Acdsee Ultimate 15

ACDSee Photo Studio Ultimate 2022
Contents
CH APT E R 1 : G E T T IN G S T AR T E D 24
Welcome to ACDSee Photo Studio Ultimate 2022 24

The Benefits of ACDSee 24
Using the User Guide 24
About the ACDSee User Interface 25
Manage Mode 25
Media Mode 25
View Mode 26
Develop Mode 26
Edit Mode 26
People Mode 26
365 Mode 27
Dashboard Mode 27
Switching Modes in ACDSee 27
Using Manage Mode 27
About the Manage Mode Panes 28
Manage Mode Drop-Down Menus 30
Working with Manage Mode Panes 30
Moving Panes 30
Docking Panes 31
Stacking Panes 31
Resizing Panes 32
Resetting the Layout 32
Using Media Mode 32
Header Button Bar 33
My Folders 38
Display Area 38
Filter By 39
Sort and Group 39
Group By 39
Using View Mode 40
Page 1 of 827
Viewing Images in Full Screen Mode 41

Using the View Mode Panes 41
Using the Bottom Toolbar 41
Using Windows Touch Gestures™ with View Mode 45
Switching to Manage Mode 45
Using Develop and Edit Mode 46
Workflow 46
Using People Mode 49
Named View 50
Unnamed View 50
Person View 50
Folders Pane 51
Using 365 Mode 51
Uploading Images 51
Using Dashboard Mode 52
Cataloging Files 52
Dashboard Mode 52
CH APT E R 2 : G E T T IN G H E L P 53
Using the Quick Start Guide 53

Finding Other Resources and Support 53
Using the Help Menu 53
Online Help and Our Community 54
CH APT E R 3 : MAN AG E MO D E 55
Importing Files with ACDSee Ultimate 55

Importing Files Using the Windows AutoPlay Dialog Box 55
Importing Files from Specific Types of Devices 56
RAW + JPEG Options 56
About Removable Devices 57
Importing Photos From a Device 57
Importing Photos From a Scanner 62
Importing Photos From a CD or DVD 63
Importing Photos From a Disk 63
Page 2 of 827
Creating a Renaming Template 64

Importing a Lightroom® Database 65
Working with Images on Mobile 66
Sending Images to ACDSee from Your Mobile Device Using ACDSee Mobile Sync 67
Getting Started 68
Sending Images and Videos 69
Troubleshooting for Mobile Sync 70
Browsing Files in the File List Pane 70
Using the File List Pane 70
Changing Overlay Icon Visibility 74
Maximizing the File List Pane 75
Creating and Managing Files 75
Browsing Using the Folders Pane 76
Selecting Multiple Folders 76
Creating and Managing Folders 76
Browsing Files By Date or Event 77
Adding Descriptions and Thumbnails in Events View 79
Browsing Your Favorite Files 80
Accessing the Shortcuts Pane 80
Creating a Shortcut 80
Creating a New Folder 80
Deleting a Shortcut or Folder 81
Using the Catalog Pane 81
Easy-Select Bars 81
The ACDSee Ultimate Database 81
Browsing RAW Files 82
Detecting Faces in Manage Mode 82
Embedding, Retrieving, and Importing Face Data 83
Changing Views 84
Customizing the Details View 85
Filtering Files 86
Grouping Files 87
Navigating Through Groups in the File List 87
Page 3 of 827
Removing Groups from the File List 88

Selecting Files in One or More Groups 88
Sorting Files 89
Sorting Files Using Column Headers 89
Custom Sorting Files 90
Selecting Files 90
Previewing Images 91
The Information Palette 91
Rotating Images 92
Comparing Images 93
Gathering Images in an Image Basket 97
Viewing Develop Settings in Manage Mode 98
Copying and Pasting Develop Adjustments 98
Restoring Images 98
Cataloging and Managing Files in ACDSee Ultimate 98
Organizing with the Catalog Pane 99
Categories 99
People 99
Keywords 99
Ratings 100
Color Labels 100
Auto Categories 100
Saved Searches 100
Special Items 100
The ACDSee Database and Embedded Data 101
Easy-Select Bars 102
Match All Match Any 102
Creating Categories 103
Manage Categories 104
Create Easy-Access Category Sets 104
Assigning and Searching Categories and Ratings 105
Quickly Assign Ratings in Thumbnail View 105
Assign and Search Categories and Ratings in the Catalog Pane 106
Page 4 of 827
Assign Categories and Ratings in the Properties Pane 107

Remove Categories or Ratings from Files 108
Assigning Color Labels 108
Create a Color Label Set 108
Assign Color Labels 109
Search Files Assigned to a Label 111
Removing Color Labels and Color Label Sets 111
Creating Collections 112
Collections Sets 114
Smart Collections 115
Using the Properties Pane 116
Properties Pane Areas 117
Metadata Tab 117
Organize Tab 118
File Tab 118
Embedding ACDSee Metadata into Files 118
Browsing and Cataloging with Auto Advance 119
Manage Mode 119
Keywords and Categories 120
Keywords 120
Categories 121
View Mode 121
Using the Map Pane 121
Using the Map Pane to Further Your Workflow 123
Adding Metadata to Files and Using Presets 124
Copying and Pasting Metadata 125
Metadata Presets 126
Removing Metadata from Files 127
Managing Metadata Views and Presets 128
Creating and Assigning Hierarchical Keywords 129
Creating Keywords 129
Managing Keywords 130
Creating Quick Keywords 131
Page 5 of 827
Importing and Exporting Keywords 132

Copying and Moving Files 132
Copying Images to the Clipboard 133
Pasting Files and Folders 134
Replacing or Overwriting Files 134
Renaming a File or Folder 135
Storing Files in Private Folders 135
Tagging Images or Files 137
Removing IPTC Keywords from Auto Categories 139
Changing the Date and Time Properties of Images 140
Backing Up Your Files to Another Computer 141
Updating or Deleting a Synchronization 142
Running a Saved Synchronization 143
Searching with ACDSee Ultimate 143
Using the Quick Search Bar 143
Using the Search Pane 145
Search Pane Areas 146
Properties Area 147
Searching with File Name Patterns 148
Using Selective Browsing 149
Setting Selective Browsing Criteria 149
Tips for Selective Browsing 150
Hiding the Selective Browsing Panel 150
Searching with Auto Categories 150
Identifying Commonly Used Search Categories 151
Refining Your Auto Categories Search 151
Finding Duplicate Files 152
Deleting and Renaming Files 153
Finding Images Quickly 154
Sharing Files with ACDSee Ultimate 154
Taking a Screen Capture 154
Emailing Images 157
Share/Email Using ACDSee 365 158
Page 6 of 827
Creating a Desktop Screensaver 158

Viewing and Configuring a Slideshow 161
Sharing Slideshows and Screensavers 165
Creating a Desktop Slideshow 166
Using the ACDSee Showroom Slideshow Controls 167
Creating a PDF 167
Creating a PowerPoint Presentation 168
Creating an HTML Album 169
Uploading Images to Photo Websites 171
Creating a Contact Sheet 171
Creating Archives of Your Files 173
Extracting Archives 174
Printing Images and Documents 175
Setting Printer Options 177
Creating Custom Print Layouts 179
Setting Image Size and Positioning 179
Setting Print Adjustments 180
Adding Text to Pages 181
Setting Contact Sheet Printing Options 181
About Batch Processing 182
Using Batch Export 183
Converting Multiple Images to Another File Format 188
Rotating or Flipping Multiple Images 189
Setting Rotated and Flipped File Options 191
Resizing Multiple Images 192
Setting File Options 197
Adjusting Exposure For Multiple Images 197
Adjusting Batch Exposure Options 198
Renaming Multiple Files 200
Changing the Color Profiles of Multiple Images 205
Using Batch Edit 205
Batch Edit Rotate Options 209
Batch Edit Crop Options 210
Page 7 of 827
Batch Edit Resize Options 211

Batch Edit Color Options 213
Batch Edit Channel Mixer Options 215
Batch Edit Sepia Options 215
Batch Edit Exposure Options 216
Batch Edit Light EQ™ Options 218
Batch Edit Noise Removal Options 219
Batch Edit Sharpening Options 220
Batch Edit Vignette Options 221
Batch Edit Text Overlay Options 223
Batch Edit Watermark Options 227
Using Batch Develop 228
About the ACDSee Database 231
Embedding ACDSee Metadata in Files 232
The Embed Pending Icon 233
Viewing Files That Have Data to Embed 234
Retrieving ACDSee Metadata That is Embedded in Files 234
Excluding Folders From the Database 234
Cataloging Files in the Database 235
About the ACDSee Indexer 236
Cataloging and the Database. 236
Creating and Switching Between Multiple Databases 236
Converting an Older Database 237
Importing Database Information 238
Importing File Information from Other Sources 238
Importing Photo Discs 239
Importing Albums 239
Working with Descript.ion Files 239
Exporting Database Information 240
Generating File Lists 241
Backing Up Your Database 241
Database Backup Tips and Strategies 242
Backup Schedule 242
Page 8 of 827
Backup Location 243

Backup Size 243
Restoring Database Information From a Backup 243
Maintaining the Database 243
Optimizing the Database 244
Mapping Drives for an Incoming Database 245
Rebuilding Thumbnails and Metadata 245
Quarantined Files 246
Working with Plug-Ins 246
Types of Plug-Ins 246
Managing Plug-Ins 247
Disabling a Plug-In 247
Changing the Plug-In Order 247
Viewing Plug-In Properties and Getting Help 247
ACDSee SeeDrive™ 248
Managing Your ACDSee 365 Files with SeeDrive™ 249
Uploading 249
Downloading 250
Making Folders Private or Public 250
Sharing and Downloading with ACDSee SeeDrive™ 251
Sharing a Folder with ACDSee SeeDrive™ 251
Sharing Your Folders by Copying and Pasting its URL Using ACDSee SeeDrive™ 253
CH APT E R 4 : ME D IA MO D E 254
Using Media Mode 254

Header Button Bar 255
My Folders 260
Display Area 260
Filter By 261
Sort and Group 261
Group By 261
CH APT E R 5 : V IE W MO D E 262
Previewing Your Images with Auto Lens 262
Page 9 of 827
Light EQ™ 263

Viewing RAW Images 263
Rotating Images 264
Using the Histogram 264
Using Face Detection and Recognition in View Mode 265
Suggestions 266
Viewing Images with Image Advance 267
Displaying Text on Images in View Mode 268
Hiding Image Text 269
Selecting Part of an Image 269
Viewing File Properties in View Mode 270
Viewing Documents 270
Viewing PDF Files in View Mode 271
Viewing Develop Settings in View Mode 273
Copying and Pasting Develop Adjustments 274
Restoring Images 274
Applying Presets in View Mode 274
Viewing and Using Brush Files 275
Playing Video and Audio Files 275
Automatically Playing Audio and Video Files 276
The Media Toolbar 276
Saving Video Frames as Images 276
Adding or Editing Image Audio 277
Recording Audio to an Image 278
Printing Images and Documents in View Mode 279
Synchronizing View Mode to a Folder 281
Setting an Image as the Desktop Wallpaper 282
Viewing Offline Images 282
Rebinding Photo Discs 283
Viewing Images in Another Application 283
Showing Originals 284
Committing Changes 284
Changing Image Color Depth 284
Page 10 of 827
Zooming In and Out 285

Setting the Zoom Level 286
Automatically Shrinking or Enlarging Images 287
Using the Navigator to View Select Areas of an Image 288
Panning a Magnified Image 289
Using Pan Lock 289
Magnifying Specific Areas of an Image 289
CH APT E R 6 : D E V E L O P MO D E 291
Using Develop Mode 291

Developing an Image 291
Saving and Canceling 292
Restoring Original Settings 293
Image Viewing Controls 293
Viewing Images 296
Customizing the View 296
Undo and Redoing 297
Using Color Pickers in Develop Mode 297
Using the Undo/Redo Button 298
Using Presets in Develop Mode 298
Using the Develop Presets Pane 298
Using Categories in the Develop Presets Pane 300
Other Ways to Create and Apply Presets 300
Applying a Preset to a Single Image 302
Applying a Develop Settings Preset to a Batch of Images 303
Renaming Presets 303
Deleting Presets 303
Importing and Exporting Presets 304
Exporting an Image to Multiple Formats and Resolutions 304
Sharing Develop Settings 312
Restoring Original Images 312
Copying and Pasting Develop Settings 313
Taking Develop Snapshots 314
Page 11 of 827
Viewing Your Snapshot 315

Saving Images in Develop Mode 316
Saving Images 316
How ACDSee Saves Changes to Images 318
Pro 3 RAW Processing Emulation 322
Viewing Develop Settings in Develop Mode 323
Using the Develop Brush 323
Smart Brushing 328
Using the Gradient Tool 330
Gradient Tool 330
Using the Radial Gradient Tool 332
Radial Gradient Tool 332
Pixel Targeting in Develop Mode 334
Targeting Adjustments by Color or Tone 334
The Pixel Targeting Pane 336
About the Tune Tab 344
Making General Adjustments 345
A Brief Technical Explanation of eV 346
Adjusting White Balance 346
Adjusting Lighting 348
Basic Light EQ™ 349
Standard Light EQ™ 349
Advanced Light EQ™ 352
Graph 353
Adjusting Color With Color EQ 356
Adjusting Color With the Color Wheel 360
Color Wheels in Pixel Targeting 362
Adjusting Tones With the Tone Wheels 362
Adjusting Tone Curves 364
Adjusting Soft Focus 365
Applying Develop Mode Effects 366
Photo Effect 366
Page 12 of 827
Color Overlay 366

Gradient Map 367
Add Grain 367
Cross Process Effect and Lomo 368
Color Grading with LUTs 368
Using Blend Modes and Opacity in Develop Mode 369
Opacity 369
Blend Modes 369
Adjusting Split Tone 371
Adding a Post-Crop Vignette 372
Selecting an Output Color Space For RAW Files 373
About the Detail Tab 373
Sharpening 375
Reducing Noise 376
RAW Noise Reduction Defaults 378
Fine-Tuning Skin Tone 378
Correcting Chromatic Aberration 379
About the Geometry Tab 380
Fixing Lens Distortion 382
Rotating and Straightening 384
Correcting Perspective 385
Cropping 386
Resizing the Crop Window 386
Fixing Lens Vignetting 387
About the Repair Tab 388
Reducing Red Eye 389
Repairing Your Image 390
CH APT E R 7 : E D IT MO D E 393
Using Edit Mode 393
Page 13 of 827
What Happens from Develop to Edit 393

Editing an Image 393
Reverting to Develop Settings or Original Settings 394
Undo and Redoing 394
Histogram and Image Viewing Controls 396
Using Color Pickers in Edit Mode 398
Using the Undo/Redo Button 398
Using Presets in Edit Mode 399
Importing and Exporting Presets 399
Restoring Originals and Develop Settings 399
Restoring the Original Image 400
Restoring Your Develop Settings 400
Saving Images in Edit Mode 400
Saving Images 400
How ACDSee Saves Changes to Images 402
Applying Photoshop® Plug-ins 406
Using the Edit Brush 406
Edit Brush 407
Smart Brushing 409
Using the Gradient Tool 410
Gradient Tool 410
Using the Radial Gradient Tool 411
Radial Gradient Tool 411
Using Blend Modes and Opacity 413
Opacity 413
Blend Modes 413
Adding Rulers and Guidelines 415
Pixel Targeting 416
The Pixel Targeting Pane 418
Recording and Applying Adjustments with ACDSee Actions 426
Applying Recordings 428
In Manage Mode 428
Page 14 of 827
In View Mode 429

In Edit Mode 429
Managing Action Categories 432
Managing Recording Categories 433
Sharing Actions 433
Using Selections 434
The Selection Tools 435
Overlay Options 436
Using the Selection Tools 436
Combining the Tools 440
Refining Selections 441
Targeting Selections 442
Channel Selections 443
Color Information Channels 443
Channel Selection Dialog Interface 443
Applying Edits or Effects to Selections 445
Using the Smart Erase Tool 446
Luminance/Color Range 446
The Luminance/Color Range Pane 448
Gathering Selections in a Selection Basket 454
Using Layers 456
Using Adjustment Layers 461
Adjustment Layers and Settings 462
Levels Adjustment Layer Options 462
Curves Adjustment Layer Options 463
RGB Adjustment Layer Options 464
Add Color Adjustment Layer Options 464
Photo Effect Adjustment Layer Options 464
Dehaze Adjustment Layer Options 466
Posterize Adjustment Layer Options 467
Threshold Adjustment Layer Options 467
Color LUTs Layer Options 467
Page 15 of 827
Using Masks with Layers 467

Mask Properties 471
Mask Flexibility 472
Creating Layer Masks From Specific Colors and Tones 473
Creating Layer Masks From Images 474
Adding Text as a Layer 475
Adding Text 475
Text Tool Actions 476
Dynamic: 476
Frame: 477
Path: 477
Keyboard Shortcuts and Mouse Shortcuts for the Text tool 477
Using Rulers and Guidelines with Text 479
Rasterizing Text 480
Adding Metadata as Text 480
Resizing the Canvas 480
Resizing by Dragging 481
Resizing and Positioning 481
Applying Layer Effects 482
Retouching with Frequency Separation 487
Retouching Images 488
Merging with Focus Stacking 489
In Manage Mode 489
In Edit Mode 489
Creating an HDR Image 490
Shooting Photos for HDR 490
In Manage Mode 491
In Edit Mode 492
Using Auto-Align 493
Using Auto-Blend 493
Reducing Red Eye 494
Removing Flaws 495
Smart Erase 497
Page 16 of 827
Adjusting Skin Tone 497

Correcting Chromatic Aberration 498
About Blend Modes 499
About Special Effect Filters 501
Adding Drawings to Your Image 502
Adding a Watermark to an Image 510
Adding Borders 511
Adding Your Own Textures or Edges 516
Textures 517
Edges 517
Adding a Vignette 518
Adding a Tilt-Shift Effect 520
Adding a Grain Effect 521
About Special Effect Filters 522
Applying a Bathroom Window Effect 523
Applying a Blinds Effect 524
Applying a Blue Steel Effect 525
Applying a Bob Ross Effect 525
Applying a Bulge Effect 527
Applying a Cartoon Effect 528
Applying a Childhood Effect 530
Applying a Clouds Effect 530
Applying a Collage Effect 531
Applying a Colored Edges Effect 532
Applying a Contours Effect 533
Applying a Crayon Drawing Effect 534
Applying a Crosshatch Effect 535
Applying a Dauber Effect 536
Applying a Dramatic Effect 537
Applying an Edge Detect Effect 538
Applying an Emboss Effect 538
Applying a Furry Edges Effect 539
Applying a Gloom Effect 542
Page 17 of 827
Applying a Glowing Edges Effect 542

Applying a Gradient Map Effect 543
Applying a Granite Effect 544
Applying a Grunge Effect 545
Applying a Jiggle Effect 546
Applying a Lomo Effect 547
Applying a Mirror Effect 548
Applying a Negative Effect 549
Applying an Oil Paint Effect 550
Applying an Old Effect 551
Applying an Orton Effect 551
Applying an Outline Effect 552
Applying a Pencil Drawing Effect 553
Applying a Photo Effect 554
Applying a Pixel Explosion Effect 555
Applying a Pixelate Effect 556
Applying a Posterize Effect 557
Applying a Purple Haze Effect 558
Applying a Radial Waves Effect 559
Applying a Rain Effect 560
Applying a Ripple Effect 562
Applying a Scattered Tiles Effect 563
Applying a Sepia Effect 564
Applying a Seventies Effect 565
Applying a Sheet Metal Effect 566
Applying a Shift Effect 567
Applying a Slant Effect 568
Applying a Sobel Effect 569
Applying a Solarize Effect 570
Applying a Somber Effect 571
Applying a Stained Glass Effect 572
Applying a Sunspot Effect 573
Applying a Swirl Effect 573
Page 18 of 827
Applying a Threshold Effect 575

Applying a Topography Effect 576
Applying a Water Effect 576
Applying a Water Drops Effect 578
Applying a Waves Effect 579
Applying a Weave Effect 581
Applying a Wind Effect 582
Creating a Custom Special Effect Filter (Convolution Effect) 583
Rotating an Image 585
Flipping an Image 586
Cropping an Image 587
Resizing the Crop Window 587
Correcting Perspective Distortion 588
Correcting Distortion 589
Automatically Correcting Lens Distortion 590
Resizing an Image 592
Pixel Resize Options and Resulting Action 593
Distorting and Retouching with the Liquify Tool 596
Adjusting Image Exposure 597
Adjusting Image Levels 599
Adjusting Levels Automatically 601
Adjusting Tone Curves in Edit Mode 602
Adjusting Lighting 603
Using the 1-Step Tab 605
Using the Basic Tab 605
Using the Standard Tab 606
Using the Advanced Tab 607
Sliders 607
Graphs 608
Reducing Haze 613
Dodge and Burn 614
Dodging and Burning Parts of an Image 614
Adjusting White Balance 615
Page 19 of 827
Adjusting Color with Color EQ 616

Adjusting Color With the Color Wheel 621
Color Wheels in Pixel Targeting 623
Adjusting Tones With the Tone Wheels 623
Channel Filtering Inside Filters 624
Creating a Grayscale Image 625
Adjusting Split Tone 628
Color Grading with LUTs 629
Creating Color LUTs 630
Using the Histogram 631
Using the Color Dialog Box 632
The Standard Tab 632
The Custom Tab 632
Selecting and Adjusting Colors 633
Sharpening an Image 633
Blurring an Image 634
About Noise and Noise Reduction 638
Loading Images in ACDSee Ultimate with Noise Reduction from Legacy Versions 639
Removing Noise 639
Adding Noise 641
Adjusting Details 642
Adjusting Clarity 644
CH APT E R 8 : PE O PL E MO D E 645
Using People Mode 645

Named View 645
Unnamed View 645
Person View 646
Folders Pane 646
Named View 646
Unnamed View 647
Person View 649
Assigned Faces Pane 649
Page 20 of 827
The Suggested Faces Pane 649
CH APT E R 9 : 3 6 5 MO D E 651
Working in 365 Mode 652

Creating an ACDSee 365 Account 652
Uploading Images to ACDSee 365 653
Setting Folders to Sync to Web 654
Creating Folders and Setting Privacy 655
Changing the Rating System 656
Downloading Images 656
Using the Transfer Manager 657
CH APT E R 1 0 : D AS H B O AR D MO D E 658
Using Dashboard Mode 658

Cataloging Files 658
Dashboard Mode 658
CH APT E R 1 1 : PICAV IE W 659
About ACDSee PicaView 659

Using ACDSee Quick View 660
Using Windows Touch Gestures™ with Quick View 661
CH APT E R 1 2 : O PT IO N S AN D CO N F IG U R AT IO N 663
Setting the General Options 663

Setting the Auto Advance Options 664
Setting the Mode Configuration Options 665
Setting the Batch Operation Options 665
Setting ACDSee as Your Default Photo Viewer 666
Setting the Manage Mode Options 666
Setting the Quick Search Options 667
Setting the Face Detection and Recognition Options 668
Setting the Face Search Options 670
Setting the File List Pane Options 671
Setting the Thumbnail Info Options 674
Setting the Thumbnail Style Options 676
Page 21 of 827
Setting the Details View Options 677

Setting the Preview Pane Options 678
Setting the Folders Pane Options 679
Setting the Catalog Pane Options 680
Setting the Calendar Pane Options 681
Setting the CD/DVD Management Options 682
Setting the Properties Pane Options 683
Setting the File Management Options 683
Setting the Color Management Options 685
Setting the Database Options 687
Setting the Media Mode Options 689
Setting the View Mode Options 690
Setting The People Mode Options 692
Setting the Display Options 693
Setting Develop and Edit Mode Options 694
Setting the Rulers and Guidelines Options 697
Setting the ACDSee 365 Options 698
Setting the ACDSee Showroom Options 699
Setting the ACDSee Quick View Options 701
Setting the Media Options 702
Setting the ACDSee Indexer Options 703
Setting the ACDSee PicaView Options 703
Setting the ACDSee Mobile Sync Options 704
Setting the Document File Type Options 705
Using ACDSee on Multiple Monitors 705
Manage Mode 705
View Mode 706
Develop and Edit Mode 706
Creating Custom Workspaces 706
Auto-hiding Panes and Panels 707
Using the Task Pane 707
Customizing Toolbars 707
Displaying and Hiding Toolbars 708
Page 22 of 827
Customizing Toolbar Contents 708

In Manage Mode: 708
In View Mode: 709
Resetting Toolbars 709
Customizing Toolbar and Pane Locations 710
Hiding Panes 710
Moving Panes and Toolbars in View, Develop, and Edit Mode 710
Docking Panes and Toolbars in View, Develop, and Edit Mode 710
Creating a Custom Menu 711
Configuring External Editors 712
Customizing Keyboard Shortcuts 714
Changing the Display Theme 715
Setting JPEG Options 715
CH APT E R 1 3 : S H O R T CU T S 717
Manage Mode Keyboard Shortcuts 717

Manage Mode Mouse Shortcuts 732
Calendar Pane Shortcuts 732
Media Mode Keyboard Shortcuts 733
View Mode Keyboard Shortcuts 734
View Mode Mouse Shortcuts 748
Develop and Edit Mode Keyboard Shortcuts 749
Develop and Edit Mode Mouse Shortcuts 780
365 Mode Keyboard Shortcuts 781
365 Mode Mouse Shortcuts 783
ACDSee PicaView Keyboard Shortcuts 784
CH APT E R 1 4 : F IL E F O R MAT S 785
Supported File Formats in ACDSee Ultimate 785

About RAW Files 790
Associating Files 791
G L O S S AR Y 792
IN D E X 804
Page 23 of 827
Chapter 1: Getting Started
Welcome to ACDSee Photo Studio Ultimate 2022

Welcome to ACDSee, the industry-leading digital photo and document management software.
The Benefits of ACDSee

Total workflow control. Build your photography workflow around ACDSee and notice the difference.
With flexible cataloging capabilities, unrivaled viewing speed, and a powerful photo editor, ACDSee is
the choice of busy professional and advanced amateur photographers worldwide. Add vastly improved
RAW processing, a full set of metadata tools, and unparalleled viewing speed, and you have a fully
integrated photography editing and management solution.
Patented editing features including Light EQ™. The Patented Light EQ™ technology single-exposure
HDR algorithms powering ACDSee's Light EQ™ tool accurately and intelligently stretch the dynamic
lighting range of your photos, making them incredibly realistic or atmospheric.
Wide variety of editing and processing tools. Create, edit, and touch-up your digital images. Use tools
such as red eye reduction, crop, sharpen, blur, and photo repair to enhance or correct your images.
Image editing tools, such as exposure adjustment, convert, resize, rename, and rotate, can be
performed on multiple files at the same time.
Completely customizable UI. The user interface is completely customizable, and provides quick access
to tools and features. You can customize the screen layout, the order of images, toolbar display, and
many other options to suit your preferences.
Impressive organizational capabilities. With ACDSee you can import your photos from your camera to
your computer, categorize and rate your files, and manage photo collections of any size—from a few
hundred to a few hundred thousand. Choose to view thumbnail previews of any size, or use a detailed
list of file properties to sort your files. Can't find a particular photo? No problem. ACDSee includes a
variety of powerful searching tools and a Compare Images feature to eliminate duplicates.
Context-sensitive help. ACDSee contains extensive context-sensitive help materials to assist you as you
move through the application. Press F1 when using any feature to open the relevant online help page.
Using the User Guide

This user guide is here to help you get the most out of your ACDSee software. It is categorized by
mode and by function. Throughout the guide, you will find icons that help you best use ACDSee.
Notes are things to consider when performing an action.
Page 24 of 827
Tips are ways to optimize your work.
Warnings are things to take into account when making an action.
If you need further guidance, check out the Quick Start Guide, or Finding Other Resources and
Support.
About the ACDSee User Interface

The ACDSee Ultimate user interface provides easy access to the various tools and features you can use
to browse, view, edit, and manage your photos and media files. ACDSee Ultimate consists of eight
modes: Manage, Media, View, Develop, Edit, People, 365, and Dashboard.
Manage Mode
Manage mode is the main browsing and managing component of the user interface, and is what you
see when you start ACDSee Ultimate using the shortcut icon on your desktop. In Manage mode, you
can find, move, preview, and sort your files, and access organization and sharing tools.
Manage mode consists of 15 panes, most of which can be closed when not in use. The File List pane
is always visible, and displays the contents of the current folder, the results of your latest search, or
the files in your database that match your filtering criteria. A status bar at the bottom of the Manage
mode window displays information about the currently selected file, folder, or category.
You can open and close panes, move them to different areas of your screen, and stack them on
other panes or dock them to the edge of the window. Most panes also have additional options you
can set to further customize their behavior and appearance.
Manage mode also features a toolbar and a set of drop-down menus. The toolbar provides buttons
for your home folder, and for navigating forwards and backwards through your folders. The drop-
down menus provide quick access to the most common tasks.
Media Mode
Media mode is ACDSee’s database-driven powerhouse for viewing and accessing the folders you have
either browsed in Manage mode or cataloged into the ACDSee database. This streamlined, uncluttered
view of the media assets managed by ACDSee offers sorting, grouping, and filtering in any combination.
Page 25 of 827
View Mode
In View mode you can play media files and display images and documents in full resolution, one at a
time. You can also open panes to view image properties, display areas of an image at varying
magnifications, or examine detailed color information.
You can open View mode by selecting an image or document and clicking on the View mode tab,
and you can use the Filmstrip in View mode to flip quickly between all of the files in a folder. View
mode contains a toolbar with shortcuts to commonly-used commands, and a status bar at the
bottom of the window, which displays information about the current image or media file.
Develop Mode
Perform most of your non-destructive image adjustment in Develop mode. Then take your image
into Edit mode to fine-tune. Use Develop mode's non-destructive editing tools to adjust an image's
exposure, white balance, color profile, as well as sharpen, reduce noise, and much more.
Develop mode is a non-destructive, parametric editing, RAW conversion environment. Parametric
editing means that when you edit an image in Develop mode you are creating instructions for
adjustments, rather than adjusting the actual pixels as you do in Edit mode. Develop mode's non-
destructive operations are entirely interwoven and interdependent and are applied in a fixed order
to maximize the image quality. When working on RAW files, adjustments are applied as much as
possible using the RAW image data.
Edit Mode
After non-destructively adjusting the image in Develop mode, use Edit mode to fine-tune your image
with a greater array of pixel-based editing tools, such as red eye removal.
Edit mode works on the image data already rendered to RGB. Edits are independently applied to the
converted RGB data in the order that you do them. This chain editing gives you full control over the
pixels, allowing creative freedom to apply precise adjustments. This makes operations such as selec-
tions and blend modes possible.
People Mode
People mode is born of a union between ACDSee’s industry-leading Face Detection & Recognition
feature and a keen application of machine learning. Photographers from all walks of life will enjoy
the dedicated space for distinguishing by client, family member, or person of interest, allowing for
the management of people by merging, renaming, or deleting faces, or taking labeling suggestions
from the AI assistant for grouping similar unnamed people.
Page 26 of 827
365 Mode
365 mode provides an easy way to upload images to 365.acdsee.com to share with your contacts or
the public. In 365 mode, you can select the images on your computer and then drag and drop them dir-
ectly into 365.acdsee.com.
Dashboard Mode
Dashboard mode allows you to quickly access and browse file, camera, and database statistics based
on your ACDSee database and EXIF information. As Dashboard mode relies on information derived
from your database, it is important to catalog in order to get the most out of it.
Switching Modes in ACDSee

In ACDSee Ultimate, you can quickly switch between the eight modes—Manage, Media, View,
Develop, Edit, People, 365, and Dashboard.
The mode buttons are located at the top right of the ACDSee Ultimate window:
To Switch from One Mode to Another:

Click one of the following mode buttons:
Manage: import, browse, organize, compare, find, and publish your photos.
Media: view your entire image collection by date.
View: display and examine photos at any magnification.
Develop: adjust all your images using the non-destructive power of the Develop tools.
Edit: fix and enhance photos using the pixel-based Edit tools.
People: view faces identified through ACDSee's Facial Recognition.
365: upload images to 365.acdsee.com to share with your contacts or the public.
Dashboard: quickly access and browse file, camera, and database statistics.
Using Manage Mode

In Manage mode, you can browse, sort, catalog, manipulate, and share your files and images. You can
combine different tools and panes to perform sophisticated searching and filtering operations, and
view thumbnail previews of images and media files.
You can also switch very quickly to the other modes by clicking the mode buttons in the top right
corner.
Page 27 of 827
The panes in Manage mode are fully customizable, and can be moved, resized, hidden, docked, or
closed. You can also stack the panes together for easy reference and accessibility, and to maximize
your screen space.
If the pane you want to view is not visible, click Panes from the top left main toolbar and select a pane.
About the Manage Mode Panes

Manage mode consists of the following panes:
Page 28 of 827
File List This pane displays the contents of the currently selected folder, the results of your
latest search, or the files and folders that match your selective browsing criteria. The
File List pane is always visible, and cannot be hidden or closed. You can customize the
File List pane by changing the way the files are displayed, or the size of the thumbnails.
Folders This pane displays the directory structure of your computer, much like the directory
tree in Windows Explorer. You can use the Folders pane to browse through the
folders and display their contents in the File List pane. You can also display the
contents of multiple folders in the File List by clicking the Easy-Select indicator
opposite each folder, on the left side of the pane.
Calendar This pane displays a calendar that you can use to organize and browse your files
according to their associated dates.
Shortcuts This pane stores shortcuts to your favorite images, files, folders or even applications.
Dragging an image, file, or folder into the Shortcuts pane creates a shortcut to the
original without affecting it in any way.
Search This pane provides access to a powerful search utility. You can specify the type of
search you want to perform, and enter your search criteria into the fields provided in
the Search pane.
You can also save a search and give it a name. Saved searches are listed on the Search
pane and the Catalog pane. On the Search pane, can select Saved searches from the
drop-down list to run again. On the Catalog pane, Saved Searches are listed below
Auto Categories, where you can run them again by clicking once on the Saved Search
name.
Preview This pane displays a thumbnail preview and histogram of any image or media file
currently selected in the File List pane. You can adjust the size of the thumbnail by
resizing the Preview pane, and also specify whether you want the Preview pane to
play media files or just display the first frame.
Selective This panel combines input from the Folders, Catalog, and Calendar panes to limit the
Browsing list of files in the File List pane to those that match a specific set of criteria. You can
include or exclude files by adjusting the different criteria in the Selective Browsing
pane. You can access the Selective Browsing panel from the View menu.
Catalog This pane lists the categories, auto categories, people, ratings, color labels, keywords,
and saved searches to help you sort and manage your files. You can also use the
Special Items area in the Catalog pane to quickly view all of the images on your
computer, or see any uncategorized files in the current folder.
Task This pane displays menus of commonly-used buttons and commands from the menus
and toolbars. The menus change dynamically based on your current location and
selections in ACDSee.
Properties This pane displays file properties and metadata for any file or folder you select in the
Page 29 of 827
File List pane. You can use the Properties pane to view and edit metadata for your
files, and the EXIF metadata included in digital photos.
Map This pane displays marked locations on a map for any file you select in the File List
pane. You can use the Map to view and mark the geographic location of your files.
Image Basket While browsing through your files and folders, you can place images in an Image
Basket to hold them temporarily. You can then edit, print, or share those images
without moving them all into a single folder.
Manage Mode Drop-Down Menus

The drop-down menus in Manage mode give you quick access to often-used tasks. The drop-down
menus include the following:
Workspaces: where you can save a set of customized layouts for the workspace or reset it to the default
workspace.
Import: where you can import photos from cameras and other devices.
Batch: where you can run all the batch editing processes.
Create: where you can create slide-show files, PDFs, PowerPoint presentations, online albums, or
archives.
Slideshow: where you can configure and run a slideshow.
Send: where you can upload to photo sites, an FTP, or share photos by email.
Editors: where you can list external editors for easy access.
Actions: where you can play ACDSee Actions on selected images.
Working with Manage Mode Panes

You can open and close panes in Manage mode to suit your preferences, and move, float, or stack any
of the panes to customize the layout of the Manage mode window.
To Open or Close Panes in Manage Mode:

Click Panes and select the pane you want to open or close.
Moving Panes
You can move a pane from a docked or floating position to a new location. You can move one pane at
a time, or several stacked panes.
To Move a Pane:
Page 30 of 827
1. Drag the pane's title bar and hold your cursor over any of the arrows of the Docking Compass.
2. When the shaded marquee displays the position of the pane you want, release the mouse button.
3. To return a pane to its previous location, double-click its title bar.
To Move a Docked or Floating Pane:

Do one of the following:
Drag the pane's tab to a new location. Only one pane moves.
Drag the pane's title bar to a new location. Any panes stacked beneath it also move.
If you use dual monitors, you can move the panes to your second monitor to free up space on
your main monitor.
Docking Panes
When you select a pane in the Manage mode, the Docking Compass activates to help you place the
pane precisely. The Docking Compass consists of an outer and inner ring of arrows. When you hold
your cursor over any of the arrows, a shaded marquee displays the potential position of the pane.
To Dock a Pane in Manage Mode Window:

1. Drag the pane's title bar or tab to activate the Docking Compass.
2. To dock a pane around the outer edge of the window, hold your cursor over any of the outer arrows of
the Docking Compass, and then release the mouse button.
3. To dock a pane around the outer edge of the File List pane, or any another pane, hold your cursor over
the inner arrows of the Docking compass, and then release the mouse button.
Stacking Panes
You can stack panes and reorder their tabs to suit your needs.
To Stack Panes:
1. Do one of the following:
Drag one pane's title bar onto the title bar of another pane until the shaded marquee appears,
and then release the mouse button.
Drag one pane inside another, hold your cursor over the center of the Docking Compass, and
then release the mouse button.
2. To reorder the panes, drag a tab to the left or right in the tab order.
3. To separate a tabbed pane, drag the pane’s tab to another location on the screen.
Page 31 of 827
Resizing Panes
You can resize all the panes in Manage mode, whether they are docked or floating.
To Resize a Docked Pane:

1. Hold your cursor over the edge of the pane until the cursor changes to arrows and lines.
2. Drag the edge of the pane to the size you want.
To Resize a Floating Pane:

Hold your cursor over the edge or corner of the pane and then drag the pane to the size you want.
Resetting the Layout

All of the panes can be restored to their default positions at any time in Manage, Media, Develop,
Edit, and People modes.
To Reset the Layout:

Click View | Reset Layout.
Using Media Mode

Media mode offers a streamlined, database-driven approach to Digital Asset Management. Only the
folders browsed in Manage mode and that have been cataloged into the ACDSee database will be
displayed in Media mode, offering a clutter-free view of photographs and videos managed by ACDSee.
The Media mode interface is divided into four separate functional areas:
1. Header Button Bar,
2. My Folders,
3. Display Area, and
4. Group By.
Page 32 of 827
Header Button Bar

Located directly below the main menu, the Header Button Bar contains three buttons described
below:
l Refresh,
l Catalog, and
l Show Orphan Files.
Header Button Bar Options
Page 33 of 827
Refresh
Refreshes the My Folder pane's folder tree and the Display Area pane.
Catalog
Produces the Catalog Files dialog which allows thumbnails and file inform-
ation to be added to the database without having to first browse folders.
Folders to Catalog
Subfolders Enabled
subfolders
will also be
added to
the data-
base.
Add folder... Click the

Add
Folder...
button to
browse for
folders to
be added
to the data-
base.
Remove folder Select a

folder in
the Folders
to Catalog
table and
click the
Remove
folder but-
ton to
remove
the folder
from the
table.
Import from Cataloged Files
EXIF and IPTC metadata Enable to

import
EXIF and
IPTC
metadata.
Page 34 of 827
ACDSee Metadata, including categories, keywords, tagged, Enable to

and collections import
ACDSee
metadata,
including
categories,
keywords,
tagged,
and col-
lections.
Face Data, including face outlines and names Enable to

import
Face Data,
including
face out-
lines and
names.
Enabling
the Face
Data
checkbox
activates
the
ACDSee
Face Data
radio but-
ton and
the Light-
room or
Picasa
Face Data
radio but-
ton.
ACDSee Face Data Enable to

import
ACDSee
Face Data.
The
ACDSee
Face Data
radio but-
ton is only
activated if
the Face
Page 35 of 827
Data,
including
face out-
lines and
names
ckeckbox
is enabled.
Enabling
the
ACDSee
Face Data
radio but-
ton dis-
ables the
Lightroom
or Picasa
Face Data
radio but-
ton.
Lightroom or Picasa Face Data Enable to

import
Lightroom
or Picasa
Face Data.
The Light-
room or
Picasa
Face Data
radio but-
ton is only
activated if
the Face
Data,
including
face out-
lines and
names
ckeckbox
is enabled.
Enabling
the Light-
room or
Picasa
Face Data
radio but-
ton dis-
Page 36 of 827
ables the
Lightroom
or Picasa
Face Data
radio but-
ton.
File Formats
Catalog images Only image

file types
will be cata-
loged
Catalog images and videos Both image

file types
and video
file types
will be
imported
Catalog all files All files in

the selec-
ted folder
will be
imported.
Options
Build and include thumbnails in database Enable to

build
thumbnails
of the
image or
video files
and
include the
thumbnails
in the data-
base.
Include contents of archive files Enable to

include the
contents of
archived
files.
Create preview files for RAW images Enable to

create pre-
view files
Page 37 of 827
for RAW
images.
Help Opens the help file related to cataloging files in Media mode.
Start Starts the process of adding thumbnails and file information to the data-
base.
Cancel Stops the process of adding thumbnails and file information to the data-
base.
Show Orphan Files
Displays missing files flagged as orphans. Orphans will be displayed in

sepia.
To use the Catalog Files tool:

1. Click the Catalog button in the Header Button Bar located directly below the main menu.
2. In the Catalog Files dialog, complete the options described in the above table.
3. Click the Start button to automatically add thumbnails and file information to the database.
My Folders
Located along the left side of the screen, the My Folders pane is a simple folder tree populated with all
folders browsed while in Manage mode. To add additional folders to the My Folders pane without
leaving Media mode, use the Catalog Files tool described above.
The My Folders pane is hidden by default. To display the My Folders pane, click the Hide/Show icon
in the lower left of the Display Area.
Clicking a folder containing media in the My Folder pane will filter the Display Area's contents to
display the selected folder's media.
Display Area
The Display Area pane occupies the large central portion of the screen and is used primarily to display
images and videos that can be filtered, sorted, or grouped.
Double-click any image or video to display them in full screen. Videos displayed in full screen can be
played without leaving Media mode. Double click the full screen image or video to return to the grid
view.
Right-click individual media assets to produce a context-sensitive help menu containing the following
options:
l View: opens media asset in View mode.
l Develop: opens media asset in Develop mode.
l Edit: opens media asset in Edit mode.
Page 38 of 827
l Rotate Left: press Ctrl + L to rotate left.
l Rotate Right: press Ctrl + R to rotate right.
l Show in File Explorer: opens to the media asset file's location in File Explorer.
Filter By
When enabled, the tools in the Filter By toolbar are very powerful for tailoring the results displayed in
the Display Area pane by filtering the results based on specific metadata.
To filter media assets in the Display Area pane, choose from a combination of any of the following:
l Enable the Tagged checkbox to display only those images with a tag.
l Make a selection from the ratings to display media with a specific rating. The button to the left of the rat-
ings lets you choose whether the results will include media with a Rating less than or equal, greater than
or equal, or matching the chosen rating.
l Make a selection from the color labels to display media tagged with a specific label.
Changes made to the Filter By tools will affect the results displayed in the Group By pane.
Sort and Group

Located directly above the media asset and to the right-side of the Display Area pane, the Sort and
Group drop downs are used to alter how the contents of the Display Area pane are presented. Unlike
the Filter By field which refines the number of media assets displayed, the Sort and Group drop downs
do not change the number of media assets displayed. Both the Sort and Group drop down results can
be sorted forwards or backwards.
Selections made in the Group field will affect the results displayed in the Group By pane.
Group By
Located along the right side of the screen, the Group By pane lists groups of media assets based on
the selection made in the Filter By drop down and the Group drop down. To display the Group By
pane, click the Hide/Show icon in the lower right of the Display Area.
The Group By pane results can be grouped forward and backwards.
The blue bar within each group tab is representative of the number of media assets in the group.
Clicking a tab in the Group By pane changes the display in the Display Area pane to reflect the group
selected.
Page 39 of 827
Using View Mode

You can use View mode to display your images, documents, and media files using their actual
dimensions or at a variety of magnifications. You can also display a group of images in sequential
order.
View mode contains four main areas:
View area: this is the main viewing area, which displays the current image, document, or media file.
You can customize the view, and zoom in or out on your images and media files.
Bottom toolbar: located below the main viewing area, the Bottom toolbar provides shortcut buttons to
commonly-used tools and commands, such as the zoom and scroll tools. You can customize the toolbar
to use large or small icons, or you can choose to not display the toolbar.
Filmstrip: this is an area below the main viewing area, which displays thumbnails of the images in the
current folder or in the group of images you selected in Manage mode. It provides a scroll bar along the
bottom, so that you can scroll through your images, and buttons for moving to the next or previous
image.
Status bar: located at the bottom of the window, the Status bar displays information and properties for
the current image or media file. It also displays icons for rating, color labels, and tagging that you can
click to edit.
View mode can also display the Properties pane to show EXIF, IPTC and ACDSee Metadata information
about the image or file. View mode also has the Navigator, Magnifying Glass, and Histogram panes,
each of which show detailed image information.
To Open an Image, Document, or Media File in View Mode:

In Manage mode, in the File List pane, do one of the following:
Select a file and press Enter.
Select a file and click the View mode button.
Double-click a file.
Right-click an image, document, or media file, and then select View.
To Open a Group of Images in View Mode:

1. In Manage mode, in the File List pane, select a group of images.
2. Press Enter.
3. To navigate through the images, do the following:
To view the next image in the sequence, click Next.
To view the previous image in the sequence, click Previous.
Page 40 of 827
Viewing Images in Full Screen Mode

You can use the entire screen of your monitor to display images. In full screen mode, the window
borders, menu bar, status bar, and toolbars are hidden, and only the image is visible. If you want to
always view your images in full screen mode, you can set this option as the default for View mode.
To View Images in Full Screen Mode:

1. Open an image or a group of images in View mode.
2. Click View | Full Screen.
3. Right-click the image to access the View mode tools and options via a context menu.
To Exit Full Screen Mode:

Press the F key.
Right-click the image and select View | Full Screen.
Use the keyboard shortcut F in View mode to toggle in and out of a full screen view.
Using the View Mode Panes
To Open the View Mode Panes:

1. Open an image in View mode.
Click Panes | Actions Browser to play ACDSee Actions on the image, or to manage actions.
Click Panes | Histogram to display the histogram for the image.
Click Panes | Magnifying glass to display a pane which shows the area of the image under your
cursor at a higher magnification.
Click Panes | Navigator to display a thumbnail overview of a magnified image.
Click Panes | Page View to open the Page View panel for multi-page images.
Click Panes | Properties to display the IPTC, EXIF and ACDSee Metadata for the image.
Click Panes | Face Detection to display and name the detected faces.
Click Panes | Develop Settings to view adjustments made to your images in Develop mode.
Using the Bottom Toolbar

Use the Bottom toolbar to access commonly-used tools.
Page 41 of 827
These tools are only available when viewing image files.
Bottom Toolbar
Page 42 of 827
Add to Image Basket Adds the image to the active

Image Basket.
Rotate left Rotates the image to the left.
Rotate right Rotates the image to the right.
Face Tool Uses ACDSee Face Detection to

detect people in images.
Identified faces can be assigned
names.
Scroll Pans or scrolls the image when

the image is zoomed to a larger
size than the View mode area.
Select Selects a rectangular area of the

image.
Zoom Zooms in or out on the image.

Click to zoom in or right-click to
zoom out.
Full Screen Displays the image on a full

screen. Press F to view full
screen.
External Editors Opens the file in an external

editor of your choosing.
Actions Browser Pane Opens the Actions Browser pane

that allows for the recording of
all Edit mode adjustments and
the application of edits to other
images by "playing" the edits
back. Use this method to batch
edit multiple photos with any
adjustment available in Edit
mode. In addition, after applying
a recording with adjustment
layers, open the image in Edit
mode and continue tweaking and
adjusting the adjustment layers
in the Layered Editor, allowing
for non-destructive image
editing.
Page 43 of 827
Auto Light EQ Automatically previews a Light

TM
EQ adjustment of the image.
Auto Lens Previews a number of filters for

the image without actually
applying the filters to the file.
Snapshots Saves adjustments made to an

image. The snapshot save point
in the editing process can be
returned to at any time. Unlike
presets, snapshots save directly
to the image, which allows
switching between snapshot
saves.
Auto Advance Turns on Auto Advance to

quickly move through images
while adding tags, ratings, labels,
categories, or keywords.
Show Face Outlines Places a box around faces

contained in an image.
Toolbar Options Produces a menu containing the

Add or Remove Buttons menu
item.
Hide Bottom Panels Hides the bottom filmstrip from

view.
Navigator Displays the Quick Navigator

pane so you can see a thumbnail
overview of a magnified image.
(Only visible for images that are
zoomed in to a size larger than
will fit on the screen.)
Zoom slider Controls the size of the image in

the View mode area. Drag the
slider to adjust the size.
Zoom drop-down list Displays a list of zoom sizes to

select.
Zoom Lock Displays all images at the zoom

option of the current image. If
the zoom level is adjusted, the
new zoom level is applied to all
Page 44 of 827
images that you view.
Actual Size Returns the image to its actual

size.
Fit Image Reduces the image to fit within

the View mode area.
RAW decode/Embedded Preview When viewing a RAW image that

Off
has not been developed, the
RAW decode/Embedded
On Preview switch is available in
the Toolbar. For information
about RAW display, see Viewing
RAW Images.
Using Windows Touch Gestures™ with View Mode

If you have a Windows Touch Gestures™-enabled device, you can use it with View mode for quick, easy
viewing of photos.
To Use Windows Touch Gestures™ with View Mode:

Open an image in View mode.
Swipe on the image to scroll through images one at a time. You can also use this method on the Filmstrip
at the bottom of View mode.
Hold and swipe slowly in one direction to go through all of the images in the folder.
Hold down on an image, and then let go to achieve the same results as right-clicking with a mouse.
Double-tap the image to return to Manage mode in ACDSee.
Move two fingers apart to zoom in, and toward each other to zoom out.
After zooming in further than 100%, you can pan the image with your finger.
Switching to Manage Mode

You can return to Manage mode at any time.
To Return to Manage Mode from View Mode:

Double-click the image.
Click the Manage mode button.
Page 45 of 827
Using Develop and Edit Mode

Develop mode is a non-destructive, parametric editing, RAW conversion environment. Parametric
editing means that when you edit an image in Develop mode you are creating instructions for
adjustments, rather than adjusting the actual pixels as you do in Edit mode. Develop mode's non-
destructive operations are entirely interwoven and interdependent and are applied in a fixed order to
maximize the image quality. When working on RAW files, adjustments are applied as much as possible
using the RAW image data.
Edit mode works on the image data already rendered to RGB. When switching from Develop to Edit
mode with a RAW file, the full resolution image data is converted to a 16 bit RGB image with the
Develop instructions applied. In Edit mode, each operation is completely independent. Edits are
applied to the converted RGB data in the order that you do them. This chain editing gives you full
control over the pixels, allowing the creative freedom to apply precise adjustments. This makes
operations such as selections and blend modes possible.
Workflow
Do most of your adjustments on RAW images in Develop mode, where you can work on the RAW
image data. Then make your final adjustments in Edit mode, where you can apply fine-tuned
adjustments on the more limited RGB image data.
For example, if you adjust the White Balance on an RAW image in Develop mode, you will be
controlling the color temperature applied during the RAW conversion. Doing a white balance
adjustment in Edit mode can only apply a color cast adjustment to the already rendered RGB data,
reducing image quality and introducing the possibility of posterization (i.e. color banding) in your
image.
The Processing Power of Develop and Edit Mode

Develop Mode First Edit Mode Second
Develop mode allows non-destructive processing of RAW, JPEG and other file For any touch-ups to
types. specific areas of your
images, use the tools
Start your image corrections in Develop. Develop is where you make most of
your image adjustments.
in Edit mode. Use the
Selections tool to
Tweak previous image adjustments at any time. If you re-open a developed
further fine tune a
image in Develop, the settings are the same as you left them. Develop allows
you to revisit the image at any time to reset or adjust the previous settings.
part of an image.
When you make a change, the changes are saved in a separate file, and the Use the editing
original remains untouched. Every time you open the image in Develop mode, tools to
the original image opens with the changes applied. This allows non-destructive selectively apply
developing of your images. adjustments to
Discard your Develop settings and revert back to the original image at any time. parts of your
The original is saved for all file types. image.
Page 46 of 827
Add final touches

to your image
In Develop mode you can:
such as borders,
Tune the image using exposure, white balance, lighting, color, tone curves, text, watermark,
soft focus, effects, split tone, and post-crop vignette tools, or set the and special
output color space of a RAW image. effects.
Adjust details in your image using the sharpening, noise reduction, skin Use the pixel-
tuning, and chromatic aberration tools. editing tools to fix
Fix geometry in your image using the lens distortion, rotate and straighten, red eye or
perspective, vignette correction, and cropping tools. remove flaws
Repair red eye in your image and remove flaws. from your image.
Discard your edit
changes and
revert back to
your Develop
settings or to the
original. When
you revert back to
the Develop
settings, the
settings are
exactly the way
you left them.
In Edit mode you

can:
Use the
Selections
tools or Edit
Brush to
apply edits to
a specific
part of the
image.
Use the
Layers pane
to create
complex
photo
manipulation
s using
layers.
Page 47 of 827
Use Pixel
Targeting to
selectively
adjust pixels
by color and
tone.
Remove
flaws, adjust
skin tones,
correct
chromatic
aberration,
or red eye.
Add
watermark,
borders,
vignettes, a
tilt-shift, a
grain effect,
special
effects, and
drawings.
Crop, flip,
resize,
rotate,
liquify, and
correct
perspective,
distortion,
and barrel
and
pincushion
distortion.
Adjust
lighting using
the
Exposure,
Levels, Auto
Levels, Tone
Curves, Light
EQ™,
Dehaze, and
Dodge and
Burn tools.
Page 48 of 827
Adjust color
using the
White
Balance,
Color EQ,
Convert to
Black &
White, Split
Tone, or
Color LUTs
tool.
Add details
to your
image using
Sharpen,
Remove
Noise, Add
Noise, the
Detail Brush,
Blur, or
Clarity tools.
You can easily group your images in Manage mode so that you can find the images that have
been developed and edited. From the Group drop-down menu select Processed State, or use
color labels to plan your workflow.
Use the keyboard shortcut Esc to cancel out of Develop or Edit mode.
Using People Mode

People mode is a dedicated space for managing all images of people.
People mode can be accessed by selecting the People mode icon in the mode bar, or by selecting
Tools | Manage People... from the Manage mode main menu.
There are three views in People mode:
l Named,
l Unnamed, and
l Person.
The Named and Unnamed views can be accessed from the Named and Unnamed buttons directly
above the results grid in the button bar. To access the Person view, double-click a person's facial image
in Named view only.
Page 49 of 827
In all views, select faces by clicking the face, or multi-select with Ctrl + click, Shift + click.
For both the Unnamed and Person views, toggle the Show Face Thumbnails icon and the
Source Image Thumbnails icon to view the face thumbnail or the entire source image.
Named View
The Named view in People mode is populated with images of all the people that have been assigned a
name in the ACDSee photo database. Images of identified people can be merged (for people with
many like-sounding names such as "Rob", "Robby", "Bobby"), renamed, or removed. Double-clicking
a person opens that person's Person view where all of the person's assigned faces reside and AI-
prepared suggestions can be confirmed or denied.
Unnamed View
The Unnamed view in People mode is populated with faces that haven't been assigned a name.
The Unnamed view can be filtered between Grouped and Ungrouped faces by toggling the drop down
list located at the far right of the button bar above the facial images.
In Grouped, the view is split between a top pane displaying groups, and a bottom pane which displays
the faces associated with the selected group(s).Grouped faces are similar enough in structure that the
AI in People mode suggests that they should be grouped together.
In Ungrouped, the view displays a flat grid of all of the unnamed faces in the database. Ungrouped
images are all of the single facial images without AI-generated groups applied.
The Unnamed view is used to manage the unnamed faces by assigning them to a name, or deleting
the face.
Person View
In People mode, the Person view is a display of all faces associated with one person.
The Person view is comprised of two separate areas:
l The Assigned Faces pane, a collection of facial images previously assigned with the person's name, and
l The Suggested Faces pane, a collection of faces that AI considers a possible match with the person.
Person view can only be accessed from the Named view.
Page 50 of 827
Folders Pane
The Folders pane is used for filtering results by folder. Click to select a single folder, or multi-select with
Ctrl + click, Shift + click, or by clicking the Easy-Select arrows to the left of the folder names.
The Folders pane is located to the left of the results grid and has two views:
l Tree view, for an expanded view of folders visited in Manage mode that contain faces, and
l List view, for a flat list of folders containing faces.
Use the View button to the right of the Folders label to toggle between the Tree view and the List view.
Use the Folders Refresh icon below the Folders label to clear the current folder selection.
See also:
People Mode Named View
People Mode Unnamed View
People Mode Person View
Using 365 Mode

You can use 365 mode to upload your images to 365.acdsee.com. 365.acdsee.com is an image sharing
and storage service available to ACDSee Ultimate users. With 365 mode and 365.acdsee.com, you can
upload and browse through your online images without having to launch an Internet browser.
365 mode has two parts: 365.acdsee.com and Transfer. In 365.acdsee.com, you can browse through
your images in your 365.acdsee.com account and modify your account settings. In Transfer, the
screen splits into two. The bottom part of the screen displays the images in your computer, and the
top part of the screen displays your 365.acdsee.com. You can simply click images in your computer
displayed in the bottom part of the screen, and drag them into the top part of the screen to upload
the images to your 365.acdsee.com account.
You cannot take an image from 365 mode and open it in Develop or Edit mode. To edit an
image, select an image in Manage or View mode and open it in Develop or Edit mode.
Uploading Images
To Upload Photos to Your 365.acdsee.com Account:

1. In 365 mode, click Sign In.
2. Log in to your account.
3. Click Transfer.
Page 51 of 827
Your screen splits in two, with the bottom part of the screen displaying images in your
computer.
4. Select an image to upload. To select multiple photos, press Shift or Ctrl on your keyboard.
5. Click and drag the image into the top part of the screen to upload it to your 365.acdsee.com account.
There is no upload size limit when uploading your images to your 365.acdsee.com account.
Using Dashboard Mode

Dashboard mode is a quick and convenient way to browse your file, camera, and database statistics.
Camera statistics are read from your images' metadata, and file information is analyzed from your
ACDSee database. Therefore, it is important to catalog your files to get the most out of Dashboard
mode.
Cataloging Files
To catalog, do one of the following:
Go to Tools | Database | Catalog.
Browse your folders in Manage mode.
Dashboard Mode
Dashboard mode contains the following tabs:
Overview tab: the Overview tab summarizes the information found on the other tabs. It also displays a
graph detailing your monthly or yearly photo counts. You can use the drop-down menu at the top of the
tab to switch between viewing a range of months or a range of years. You can use the Prev and Next
buttons to navigate backward or forward in time.
Database tab: the Database tab displays data relating to your database, such as its location, size, backup
information, a breakdown of your assets, and more.
Cameras tab: the Cameras tab displays data relating to your camera usage, such as which cameras you
use the most, your favorite ISO setting, and more.
Files tab: the Files tab displays data relating to your image and video files, such as your most used bit
depths, image resolutions, and more.
Page 52 of 827
Chapter 2: Getting Help

Using the Quick Start Guide
The Quick Start Guide is designed to give you a brief orientation of the most important features in
ACDSee. The first two intro pages allow you to configure some settings to facilitate your future
workflow. After the first two intro pages, the Quick Start Guide contains a set of links on the left side
that you can click to get a tour of the main features in ACDSee. You can also use the Next button.
To Close the Quick Start:

Uncheck the Always show at start-up option in the bottom left corner of the dialog box, and click
Close.
To Re-Open the Quick Start Guide:

On the Menu bar, click Help | Quick Start Guide.
To Use the Quick Start Guide:

Click the links on the left side of the Quick Start Guide or the Next button for a high-level tour.
To Set Preferences:
On the first page, click the Browse button to select the folder ACDSee will open to in the future.
On the second page, click the Select button to choose which folders you would like the ACDSee
database to keep track of.
Also on the second page, you can choose an interval from the drop-down menu on the right side to
specify how often ACDSee should remind you to backup your database.
Finding Other Resources and Support
Using the Help Menu

The Help menu on the ACDSee menu bar contains links to open plug-in help files and options that link
you to the ACDSee website where you can find updates, newsletters, and system requirements. Other
links take you to the registration page, or the community home page where you can join the
community and participate in the ACDSee forums. The Help menu is also where you can convert a trial
version of ACDSee to a full version by entering a license code.
Clicking Help displays a menu of links to online and offline help materials including our online help file,
that you can open any time you are online by clicking Help Contents. From the help menu, you can
also access in-app resources such as in-build plug-in help, the Quick Start Guide, which helps you
Page 53 of 827
navigate the software and its modes, and About, giving you information about your software, your
license, and your version.
Press F1 to open related help file pages from within the application.
You will also find a link to Customer Support.
Online Help and Our Community

As well as the links to online help found on the in-app help menu, we also have comprehensive
tutorials on our YouTube channel, and have an online forum where you can discuss the software with
other ACDSee users. When you visit the ACDSee Community, you will find blogs, tutorial videos, the
forum, and online lessons.
Page 54 of 827
Chapter 3: Manage Mode

Manage mode is the main browsing and managing component of the user interface, and is what you
see when you start ACDSee Ultimate using the shortcut icon on your desktop.
In Manage mode, you can:
Import your photos from a device, CD or DVD, or disk.
Browse files and folders.
Catalog files by tagging them, adding categories, color labels, ratings, keywords and other metadata.
Search for files and create saved searches.
Publish and share files, including emailing files, creating slideshows, and uploading images to your
favorite photo website.
Print images.
Edit or develop batches of files.
Manage and maintain your ACDSee Ultimate database.
Automatically advance to the next image in the folder when you apply metadata.
Detect faces in images.
View adjustments made to your image in Develop mode.
Importing Files with ACDSee Ultimate

You can use ACDSee Ultimate to download images from devices like your digital camera, flash drives,
CD/DVDs, or other removable devices. In Manage mode, you can also use the File | Import | From
Disk option to import files from a network, and any kind of disk or drive that can be mapped, while
preserving the original folders and subfolders.
Importing Files Using the Windows AutoPlay Dialog Box

When you connect your digital camera or other device to your computer, the Windows AutoPlay
dialog box prompts you to choose one of the following:
Import pictures using ACDSee: select this option to open the Import dialog box. You can then select
settings to rename, backup, and place the files. You can save your import settings and give them a name
so that you can re-use them later. You can also create advanced settings for import dates and RAW +
JPEG options if your camera takes both file formats. You can also create a file renaming template to use
with specific kinds of files or projects.
Page 55 of 827
Manage pictures using ACDSee: select this option to browse the files in ACDSee. You can then choose
to import the files or simply copy and paste the files from the device.
Import pictures and videos using Windows: select this option if you prefer to use Windows to import
the files.
Depending on the other applications installed on your computer, there may be additional options.
If you experience difficulty with your computer recognizing your device as a drive, explore your
device's manual about mounting the device as a drive. Or, use your computer's card reader to
access your memory card.
Importing Files from Specific Types of Devices

For more specific instructions, select the type of device you connected:
Importing Photos From a Device
Importing Photos From a CD or DVD
Importing Photos From a Disk
RAW + JPEG Options

Regardless of which type of device is being used to import photos, if the original camera takes both
RAW and JPEG file formats, options are available to tailor the image import to a desired workflow.
To set the RAW + JPEG import options:

1. In the ACDSee Import dialog, click the Advanced... button at the bottom left.
2. In the Advanced Import Options dialog, navigate to the RAW+JPEG field set.
3. Enable one of the following:
l Place both in chosen destination folder: Places both the RAW and JPEG files in the same
folder determined in the Location field set of the ACDSee Import dialog.
l Place JPEG in subfolder: Places only the JPEG files in a subfolder identified in the Subfolder
name field.
l Place RAW in subfolder: Places only the RAW files in a subfolder identified in the Subfolder
name field.
4. If either the Place JPEG in subfolder or Place RAW in subfolder radio buttons are enabled, enter a
name in the Subfolder name field.
5. Click OK in the Advanced Import Options dialog.
6. Click Import in the ACDSee Import dialog.
If Place JPEG in subfolder is enabled, all JPEGs will be placed in the subfolder whether there
are matching RAWs or not. The same also holds true when enabling Place RAW in subfolder.
All RAW images will be placed in the subfolder whether there are matching JPEGs or not.
Page 56 of 827
About Removable Devices

With ACDSee, there are several ways to obtain images from your digital camera, scanner, or memory
card. For more information about how your device communicates with your computer, please consult
your device's Help file or manual. Some different types of removable devices are:
USB Removable device: removable devices include memory cards that you can attach to your
computer using a USB card reader, camera memory cards that insert directly into slots on the
computer, or flash drives. USB removable devices are detected by your computer and are shown in the
structure as a removable drive.
Windows Image Acquisition (WIA): cameras and scanners that use Windows Image Acquisition (WIA)
drivers to communicate with the computer. Some cameras, including Canon cameras, use WIA. ACDSee
Ultimate automatically detects the WIA protocol.
You require DirectX 9.0c and QuickTime to copy and view audio or video files.
Importing Photos From a Device

The Import From dialog box gives you multiple options for importing your files from cameras, card
readers, flash drives, and other mass storage devices. If you want to simply import files with a few
clicks, you can. Or you can select from several options to streamline your workflow and perform
multiple tasks with each import.
In the Import From dialog box, you can view the thumbnails of the files on the device by their date or
file type. You can change the size of the thumbnails to make it easier to select those you want to
import or leave on the device, and then view only those you have selected.
You can also choose the destination folder or subfolders for the files, create a backup set of files as you
import, and rename the files during the import process, automatically rotating them if your camera
has this option. Advanced settings give you options to change the date you want to use, and where to
place RAW and JPEG files if your camera creates both file formats.
You can even organize your files as you import by adding Categories, IPTC and ACDSee Metadata.
Then you can save all these settings as a preset to use or adapt later.
If your camera connects to the computer as a removable drive, you can also simply copy
photos directly from the File List and Folders pane because ACDSee Ultimate detects and
displays the removable device in the Folders pane. If you are not sure how your camera
connects to your computer, please see About Removable Devices in Importing Files with
ACDSee.
Some cameras, for example, Canon, use Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) to communicate
with a computer. If your devices use these protocols, you can import by clicking From Device
on the File | Import menu. ACDSee Ultimate automatically detects these protocols.
Page 57 of 827
To Download Photos Using the Import From Dialog Box:

1. Connect your camera or device to the computer. Make sure your camera is turned on, and the cable is
properly connected to your computer.
If the Windows AutoPlay dialog box opens, select Import pictures using ACDSee.
If you have more than one device connected to your computer, select the device you want to
use from the list, and then click OK.
In Manage mode, click File | Import | From Device.
Press Alt + G on the keyboard.
3. In the Import From dialog box, select from the import options as described below.
4. Click Import.
5. To browse your imported photos, click Yes when the Import Complete dialog box displays.
You may require Direct X 9.0c and QuickTime to download audio and video files from your
camera.
Import From Options
Page 58 of 827
Select items to import
Select items to import You can control which items are imported by choosing one of the
following:
New: only imports files that have not been imported in the past.
All: imports all files.
Custom: imports the selected files. You can control which files are
imported by checking or unchecking their checkboxes.
View by
Date Displays all the files grouped by the dates they were created. To deselect a
date, check the checkbox beside the date. To deselect all dates, uncheck
the All Dates checkbox.
File Type Displays all the files grouped by their file type. To deselect a file type,
check the checkbox beside the file type. To deselect all file types,
uncheck the All file types checkbox.
View all Displays all the thumbnails of the files on the device.
View selected Displays only the files selected for import.
Choose import preset
Import settings drop- Displays the names of recently-used import settings to use again, or you
down menu can select one of the following:
Current: uses the current settings to import.
Last used: uses the import settings from the last import.
None: clears all the current import settings.
Saves all the current import settings with a name so that you can use them
Save import settings
again. To save (or edit) import settings, select the Save icon and type in
new name (or re-save existing settings).
The new name for the import settings appears in the drop-down menu.
Delete import settings Deletes the saved import settings currently selected in the Import settings
drop-down menu.
Location
Choose Destination Displays the names of recently-used destinations to use again, or you can
drop-down menu select one of the following:
Last used: uses the destination from the last import.
Page 59 of 827
None: clears all the current destination settings.
Place in Subfolders drop- Displays the following pre-defined subfolder options to select:
down menu
Single folder by name: creates a new subfolder with the name you
type into the Name field, which activates when you select this option.
All the files are placed into a folder with the new name.
Single folder by today's date: creates one folder using today's date as
the name and places all the files into the folder.
Nested folder by today's date: creates a series of nested folders,
one below the other, based on today's date and the format you
select in the Format field. The folders are created as the sample
shows and all the files are placed in the lowest folder.
Nested folders by file's date: creates multiple sets of nested folders
based on the files' dates and on the format you select in the Format
field, which activates when you select this option. The folders are
created as the sample shows and the files are imported into the
lowest folders on each date.
Separate folders by file's date: creates separate folders based on the
individual file dates in the format selected from the Format drop-
down options.
Preserve subfolder names: preserves existing folder names when
you use the From Disk option to import. For example, if you have a
flash drive or CD containing images in a complex set of subfolders,
the whole folder tree is imported intact.
Format Displays date format options for the Nested folder options (see above).
Sample Displays a sample of the nested folders that will be created using the
current settings (see above).
Backup to drop-down Creates a backup set of files using an exact duplicate of the subfolders you
menu have selected under Place in.
You can also do one of the following:
Click Browse and then navigate to an existing folder to use as a
backup destination.
Click Browse and then Make New Folder to create a new folder as a
backup destination.
While existing ACDSee Metadata is included in the backup

copy, any Catalog settings (IPTC or ACDSee Metadata)
added during import will not be included.
Page 60 of 827
File
Rename files to drop- Renames each file as it imports according these predefined renaming
down menu templates:
Date/time - filename: creates each filename using the file date and
time the file was created plus the original filename.
Date/time: creates each filename using the file date and the time it
was created.
Camera - sequence number: creates each filename using the camera
name and a sequential number starting at one.
Date/time - sequence number: creates each filename using the file
date and the time it was created plus a sequential number starting at
one.
Camera - filename: creates each filename using the camera name
and the original filename.
When you create and save your own renaming templates, they also
appear in this list for you to select.
Edit Opens the Rename Templates dialog box where you can create and save
your own renaming templates.
Apply Metadata drop- Select the names of saved metadata presets or select Manage presets to
down menu open the Manage Metadata Presets dialog box of options.
Customize Properties pane Metadata tab: enter ACDSee and IPTC Metadata into to
the fields to add to the files you are importing.
Properties pane Categories tab: assigns the imported files to any category
selected in this tab. You can select multiple categories.
Automatically rotate Rotates your images automatically if your camera creates the information
images needed for this option to work.
Delete items from Deletes the imported items from their original location or locations after
source after import import.
Advanced
ACDSee database date Opens the Advanced Import Options dialog box where you can change the
date settings for files and specify where to place RAW and JPEG files.
To set the ACDSee Ultimate database, use one of the following as the file
date:
Exif date: uses the EXIF date embedded in the image by the camera.
File modified date: uses the date the file was last modified.
Page 61 of 827
Specific date: uses the date you select by clicking the in the calendar
drop-down arrow.
RAW+JPEG To specify where to place RAW+JPEG files select one of the following:
Place both in chosen destination folder: Places RAW and JPEG files
in the folder you have selected under Choose destination on the
Import From dialog box.
Place JPEG in subfolder: places the RAW files in the folder you have
selected under Choose destination on the Import From dialog box.
Then creates a new subfolder with the name you type into the
Subfolder name field, which activates when you select this option. All
the JPEG files are placed into the new subfolder.
Place RAW in subfolder: places the JPEG files in the folder you have
selected under Choose destination on the Import From dialog box.
Then creates a new subfolder with the name you type into the
Subfolder name field, which activates when you select this option. All
the RAW files are placed into the new subfolder.
The values set in the IPTC fields are reflected in their corresponding EXIF field.
Importing Photos From a Scanner

You can scan images using ACDSee and import them to specific, accessible locations.
To Specify a Destination for Your Scanned Images:

1. Click Tools | Options | Manage Mode.
2. On the Manage mode page, in the Scanning Destination section, click the Browse For Folder button.
3. In the Browse For Folder dialog, select a destination folder for your scanned images.
4. Press OK.
To Scan Images:
1. In Manage mode, click File | Import | From Scanner.
2. Configure your scanning settings as desired. As the scanning dialog is controlled by Windows, these
settings will vary, depending on your OS and version of ACDSee.
3. Navigate to the location you set as the destination for your scanned images using the Folders pane.
Page 62 of 827
Importing Photos From a CD or DVD

You can download photos from a CD or DVD using the Import From dialog box, or the Folders pane.
Before you import photos, you can browse to the CD and view them just like any other folder and
then simply copy and paste them into a new location.
If you use the Import From dialog box, you can set the subfolder options to import complex folder
structures intact, including all the folder names. You can also organize your files as you import them,
as well as create a duplicate backup folder, simultaneously.
To Import Photos from a CD or DVD:

1. Insert the CD or DVD into the drive.
If you have more than one CD or DVD drive connected to your computer, select the device you
want to use, and then click OK.
In Manage mode, click File | Import | From CD/DVD.
3. In the Import From dialog box, select the Import From options you want to use, and then click Import.
Importing Photos From a Disk

ACDSee Ultimate makes it easy to import photos from any other storage device, computer, network,
flash drive etc. In fact, any device that your computer can map to. When you connect a removable
drive, or to a network, disk or another computer, ACDSee Ultimate sees it as a removable drive and
you can browse to it, and around it, using the Folders pane. You can just copy and paste the files into
ACDSee.
If the files in the disk or drive have a complex folder structure or you want to organize, rename, and
back up the files as you import them, it is worth using the Import From dialog box, which has import
settings do all of these tasks simultaneously.
To Import Photos from a Disk:

1. Connect the disk to the computer.
If you have more than one disk or drive connected to your computer, select the device you
Page 63 of 827
want to use, and then click OK.
In Manage mode, click File | Import | From Disk.
3. In the Browse for Folder dialog box, navigate to the removable drive or device in the folder tree, and
then click OK.
4. In the Import From dialog box, select the options you want to use, and then click Import.
Creating a Renaming Template

In the Import From dialog box, you can create, name, and save a template that gives each file a unique
name as they are imported and placed on your hard drive. You can then re-use the template each time
you import photos. Renaming templates can have a numerical sequence, custom text, and file-specific
information in each new file name. You can create and save different renaming templates for different
sorts of files. For example, you could have a different renaming template for a different camera, or a
different type of file.
To Create a Renaming Template:

1. In the Import From dialog box, select Rename files to.
2. From the drop-down list, select one of the following system templates:
Date/time - filename: renames the files using the date and time each file was created and the
original file name.
Date/time: renames the files using the date and time each file was created.
Camera - sequence number: renames the files using the camera name and a sequential
number.
Date/time - sequence number: renames the files using the date and time each file was created
and a sequential number.
Camera - filename: renames the files with the name of the camera and each file's original
name.
3. To create your own renaming template, or add to a system template, click Edit.
4. In the Rename Templates dialog box, select from the options as described in the table below.
5. Click OK.
If you check the Skip video and audio files checkbox, the rename process will not rename
video and audio files.
Rename Templates Options
Page 64 of 827
System template drop-down Click the drop-down list to select a different pre-defined system template.
list
New rename template Click to open the New Rename Template dialog box where you can type
in a name for your own renaming template. Give the renaming template a
name that clearly identifies how you plan to use the template, or what
kind of information the name will contain. For example, Camera name_
photographer.
When you click Save, the name of your new template is added to the
drop-down list of system templates.
Delete Deletes the renaming template currently selected in the drop-down list
unless it is a pre-defined system template, which cannot be deleted.
Rename Template Use this field to create the renaming template. You can type in the
photographer's name and an underscore between each element of the
template to make it easier to read.
Use the following placeholders to ensure that each filename is unique:
Insert an *. When your files are renamed, the * will be replaced

by the original file name.
Insert a #. When your files are renamed, each # will be replaced

by a sequential number. If you have a large number of files, insert
several ##s. For example, if you enter ###, the first file renamed
will be numbered 001, the next 002, and so on. If you have over
1000 files, insert ####.
Insert a metadata placeholder < > and the data inside these
brackets is replaced with whatever data you have chosen. For
example, if you choose <Camera:Model>, the model of the
camera is inserted into each file name.
Insert Metadata Click to open the Choose Properties dialog box, where you can select
from a long list of metadata to insert into your template.
Sample As you type, or add placeholders in the Rename Template field, the same
updates to show you a sample of how renaming template will look.
Skip video and audio files Skips the renaming of video and audio files during the rename process.
Importing a Lightroom® Database

You can use the Adobe® Lightroom® Database Importer to import your collections, keywords, ratings,
and color labels from Lightroom® into ACDSee. Your keyword hierarchies will import independent of
Page 65 of 827
whether they are embedded in the images selected for import.
You cannot import smart collections or Lightroom CC catalogs, only Lightroom Classic
catalogs.
You cannot begin importing while Lightroom® is open.
If you have a hierarchy in your Collections in ACDSee Ultimate that is identical to your
hierarchy in Lightroom®, these collections will merge.
To Import Your Lightroom® Database:

1. In Manage mode, choose Tools | Database | Import | Lightroom Database.
2. In the Adobe Lightroom Database Importer, press Next.
3. Check the checkboxes of the database information you would like to import into ACDSee, including
Ratings, Labels, Collections, and Keywords.
4. Use the Browse button next to the Location field to navigate to the location of your Lightroom®
database file.
By default, the field displays the default location where Lightroom® stores its database, so
you will only need to browse if you have moved your database.
5. Press Next.
6. Check the summary to ensure that the displayed information is correct. If you see a mistake, use the
Back button to return to the previous page to make any corrections.
7. Press Next. Green checkmarks will display next to the items that are successfully completed, and red
crossmarks will display next to items that failed.
8. Press Finish.
Lightroom is a registered trademark of Adobe Inc.
Working with Images on Mobile

You can access, browse, view, delete, and copy and paste images on your mobile phone with ACDSee.
To edit or develop images on your mobile device, you will need to copy them to a local folder.
To Access the Images on Your Phone Using ACDSee:
Make sure that file sharing is enabled on your mobile device.
Page 66 of 827
1. With your phone plugged in, open ACDSee.
2. In Manage mode, using the Folders pane, navigate to your phone under This PC/Computer.
3. Using the Folders pane or File List pane, navigate to your images. They are usually stored in a folder
called DCIM.
ACDSee displays file information supplied by your device in the Properties pane.
To View an Image from Your Mobile Phone:

In the File List pane, double-click the image.
You can use the Filmstrip to navigate through the images in the folder.
To Copy Images from Your Mobile Phone to Another Folder Using ACDSee:
In the File List pane, select the images and do one of the following:
Right-click and choose Copy. Browse to another folder, right-click and choose Paste.
Right-click and choose Copy To Folder... In the Copy To Folder dialog, select the destination folder and
click OK.
Go to Edit | Copy, or press Ctrl + C. Then, in the destination folder, go to Edit | Paste, or press Ctrl + V.
To Delete Images from Your Mobile Phone Using ACDSee:
It may be necessary to change settings on your mobile device to allow files to be deleted using
your PC.
In the File List pane, select the images and do one of the following:
Right-click and choose Delete.
Press DEL.
Go to Edit | Delete.
Sending Images to ACDSee from Your Mobile Device Using ACDSee

Mobile Sync
You can use the ACDSee Mobile Sync app to send photos and videos directly from your mobile device
into ACDSee Photo Studio on your PC. This free app is available on iOS from the Apple App Store and
for Android on the Google Play Store.
Page 67 of 827
ACDSee Mobile Sync will keep track of which photos have been sent to ACDSee Ultimate and
indicates new and unsent items using a colored border.
In Manage mode, you will be able to access images you have sent to ACDSee Ultimate by clicking the
ACDSee Mobile Sync node icon in the Folders pane.
Getting Started
To download the app, you can:

Download it in the Apple App Store, for iOS. In the App Store, type ACDSee Mobile Sync in the Search
bar.
Download it in the Google Play Store, for Android. In the Play Store, type ACDSee Mobile Sync in the
Search bar.
Page 68 of 827
After installation, open the ACDSee Mobile Sync app on your device. Follow the prompts to give the
app access to your photos and to assign the target (ACDSee on your PC). If your app doesn't find the
target, you can scan the Quick Response (QR) code found on your PC.
To open the QR code, do one of the following:

Open Tools | Show ACDSee Mobile Sync Details...
In the Notification Area, right-click on the ACDSee app icon and select Show ACDSee Mobile Sync
Details...
Then scan the QR code using your mobile device camera to add your ACDSee software as a target.
If you cannot scan the QR code, you can also add your ACDSee software as a target using your host
name or IP address.
To add your ACDSee software as a target using your host name or IP address:
1. Make sure you are on the same WiFi network as your PC.
2. On the Mobile Sync app, on the QR scanner page, select Add Without QR Code.
If you skipped the intro, or want to add an additional target, you can reopen the
scanner page by going to Settings and selecting Add Target.
3. Enter your Host name or IP Address and enter the Port. This information can be found above the QR
code when you select Show ACDSee Mobile Sync Details... on your PC.
4. The name of your target will appear. Select Add this Target.
5. This will add your ACDSee software as a target, allowing you to send photos and videos to it.
You must be connected to the same WiFi network as the PC that is running ACDSee Ultimate in
order to use ACDSee Mobile Sync to send photos and videos.
Sending Images and Videos

You can send images and videos from the ACDSee Mobile Sync app to ACDSee. ACDSee Mobile Sync
keeps track of which items have already been sent. ACDSee Ultimate will notify you with a pop-up in
the lower right corner when it has received your sent items. You can then click on the ACDSee Mobile
Sync node icon in the Folders pane in Manage mode to view the received files.
To send all new items, press the Send button. If you press and hold the Send button, it will send the
selected photos and videos to the default target.
To send specific items, select them and press the Send button.
You can use context menus within the app for more specific selection options.
Page 69 of 827
You can customize the location of your ACDSee Mobile Sync folder on your hard drive. See
Setting the ACDSee Mobile Sync Options.
Troubleshooting for Mobile Sync

If you have any issues connecting your device to use Mobile Sync, check out our troubleshooting
guide on the ACDSee Mobile Sync webpage.
Browsing Files in the File List Pane

The File List pane is the large pane in the center of the Manage mode window. The File List pane
displays the contents of the currently selected folder, the results of your latest search, or the files and
folders that match your selective browsing criteria. The File List pane is always visible, and cannot be
hidden or closed.
Files display as thumbnails in the File List pane by default. However, you can change the File List pane
view from thumbnails to details, list, icons, tiles, or Filmstrip. You can sort your files according to
name, size, properties, and more. You can also use filters to control which files display in the File List
pane.
Using the File List Pane

There are three sections in the File List pane: the Contents bar, the File List drop-down lists, and the
File List toolbar. The overlay icons, which appear on the thumbnails, allow you to rate, tag, and label
your images or documents and indicate additional information, such as if the file has been processed
or geotagged.
The Contents Bar

The Contents bar is located at the top of the File List pane and describes what you are currently
browsing. When you are using the Folders pane, the Contents bar will display the path or paths to the
folders you are browsing, as in the following example:
If you are browsing files by category or rating with the Catalog pane, the Contents bar displays the
selected classifications, as in the following example:
The Contents bar also displays a date range when browsing with the Calendar pane, and a summary of
your search criteria when you use the Search pane.
File List Drop-Down Lists
Page 70 of 827
Filter Displays a list of filter options such as rating and category. You can also select
Advanced Filters and create a custom filter.
Group Displays a list of file attributes that you can use to group files in the File List
pane.
Sort Displays a list of file attributes that you can use to sort the files in the File List
pane.
View Displays a list of view options for viewing files in the File List pane.
Select Displays a list of file selection options.
File List Toolbar

Add to Image Basket Adds selected images to the
Image Basket.
Rotate left Rotates selected images to the

left.
Rotate right Rotates selected images to the

right.
Compare images Opens selected images in the

Compare Images Viewer.
Auto Advance Turns on Auto Advance to quickly

move through images while
adding tags, ratings, labels,
categories, or keywords.
Zoom slider Controls the size of the

thumbnails in the File List pane.
Drag the slider to adjust the
thumbnails.
Photos Displays the contents of the selec-

ted folder as thumbnails.
List View Displays the contents of the selec-

ted folder as a file list.
Overlay Icons
Page 71 of 827
Icon Name Description Instructions
Sound / Playing Sound Appears if the Left-click to play

file contains embedded
embedded or audio.
associated
audio. The
second icon
appears if you
click on the
sound icon and
the embedded
sound begins
playing.
Rating Appears if the

file has been
rated in the
ACDSee
Ultimate
database.
Color Label Appears if the

file has been
assigned a
color label.
Embed Pending Appears if the Right-click and

file has choose either:
ACDSee
Embed
Metadata
ACDSee
stored in the
Metadata:
ACDSee
writes the
Ultimate
metadata
database that
to the file.
has not yet
Clear
been written
Embed
to the file.
Pending
Icon...:
clears this
overlay
icon, but
does not
write the
metadata
to the file.
Page 72 of 827
File format Displays the Left-click to

file format. display the File
Information,
Image
Attributes, and
EXIF Metadata
(summary) on
the File tab of
the Properties
pane.
Category Appears if the Left-click to

file has been open the
categorized. Categories
section on the
Organize tab of
the Properties
pane.
Collection Appears if the

file has been
added to a
collection.
Shortcut Appears if the

item is a
shortcut to
another file.
Offline Appears if the

file is stored
on an offline
device.
Excluded items Appears if the

file has been
excluded from
the ACDSee
Ultimate
database.
Tagged items Appears if the

file has been
tagged.
Page 73 of 827
Untagged items Appears if the

file has not
been tagged.
Geotagged items Appears if the Left-click to

file has been open the Map
geotagged. pane.
Auto-rotate Appears if the Left-click to

file has been rotate the image
automatically original
rotated. permanently
and update the
EXIF
information.
Developed Appears if the

file has been
developed.
Edited Appears if the

file has been
edited.
Snapshot Appears if the Open the image

file has in View mode
Develop and click the
Snapshots. Snapshot button
to view the
saved snapshots.
Changing Overlay Icon Visibility

You can change whether overlay icons are visible, visible in color, and which icons are in color.
To Change Overlay Icon Visibility:

In Manage Mode, at the top of the File List pane, do one of the following:
Click View | Toggle Overlay Mode to control whether the overlay icons are invisible, visible in grayscale,
or visible in color. Toggle the (]) key to move through the available modes.
Click View | Highlight Overlay to select which icons appear in color. Toggle the ([) key to select from the
available options.
Page 74 of 827
Note that this does not apply to all overlay icons. For more control over which icons are
visible, see Setting the Thumbnail Info Options.
Maximizing the File List Pane

To make the most of your available screen space, you can choose to maximize the File List pane and
hide the rest of the Manage mode panes. The only parts of the Manage mode window that remain
visible are the File List pane and whichever toolbars you are currently using.
To Maximize the File List Pane:

1. Click View | Maximize File List.
2. To show only the File List pane and its toolbar, click View | Full Screen.
3. Click the Close Full Screen button in the upper right corner to return to Manage mode.
Creating and Managing Files

You can use the File List pane to create, delete, and rename files.
To Create a New Image:

You can create a new, blank image.
1. In Manage mode, go to File | New| Image... or in Edit mode, go to File | New Image....
2. In the New Image dialog, enter a name for your image and the dimensions. You can customize the unit
of measurement with the drop-down menu.
Neither your width or height setting can exceed 16,000 pixels.
3. Next to Aspect Ratio, select an aspect ratio from the drop-down list. You can define your own ratio using
the Custom option. You can also delete ratios by selecting them in the drop-down and pressing the
Delete button.
4. Next to Resolution, use the Dots Per Inch field to specify a resolution.
5. From the Background Contents drop-down, select the color of your image's background, or check the
Use transparent background checkbox.
6. From the Bit Depth drop-down, select whether your image will be 32 or 64-bit.
7. Press OK. The new image will open in the .acdc format.
You can save your new image settings as a preset by clicking the save icon, entering a name,
and clicking OK.
To Manage Your Files:
Page 75 of 827

To delete a file, in the File List pane, right-click the file and choose Delete from the context menu, or
press Delete.
To rename a file, right-click the file and choose Rename from the context menu, or press F2. You can
also Type a new name for the file and press Enter.
Browsing Using the Folders Pane

The Folders pane displays a directory tree of all the folders on your computer in the same style as they
appear in Windows Explorer. You can select one or more folders in the Folders pane to display their
contents in the File List pane. The Folders pane also displays your Cloud Sync Drives as a node,
allowing you to navigate your cloud content like any other folder.
You can also use the Folders pane to create shortcuts to your favorite files, folders, or applications.
Then, instead of having to search for a specific file, you can quickly access it in the Shortcuts pane.
Whenever you browse to a folder using the Folders pane, the ACDSee Ultimate database catalogs any
images, documents, or media files in the folder.
To Open or Close the Folders Pane:

In Manage mode, click Panes | Folders.
When you connect a removable device, such as a mass storage device or digital camera, the Folders
pane displays the device as another drive, and assigns it a drive letter automatically.
You can access the device, and its contents, by clicking on it in the Folders pane.
Selecting Multiple Folders

Easy-Select bars are indicators on the left side of the Folders and Catalog panes, they look like this:
. You can use the Easy-Select bars to select multiple folders, categories, or ratings, and display their
contents in the File List pane.
To Use the Easy-Select Bar:

In the Folders pane, select the indicator to the left of each folder with contents you want to display.
You can also use the Easy-Select bars with the Selective Browsing pane.
Creating and Managing Folders

You can use the Folders and File List panes to create, delete, rename, and move folders on your hard
drive to help organize your files.
To Manage Your Folders:
Page 76 of 827
1. In the Folders pane, browse to where you want to add, delete, or rename a folder.
To create a folder, click File | New, and then select Folder. Type a name for the new folder and
press Enter.
To delete a folder, select a folder and press Delete.
To rename a folder, right-click the folder you want to rename and select Rename. Type a new
name for the folder and press Enter.
You cannot rename a drive or any folder on a read-only file system, such as a CD-ROM.
Browsing Files By Date or Event

With the Calendar pane you can browse your collection of image and media files using the dates
associated with each file. The Calendar pane includes Events, Year, Month, Day view and the Photo
Calendar, which shows thumbnails per day within a month. You can click any date in the Calendar
pane to display a list of files associated with that date.
To Open the Calendar Pane:

In Manage mode, click Panes | Calendar.
The Calendar pane opens on the left, tabbed with the Folders and Catalog panes.
Your images will not display in the Calendar pane until you have either browsed the folder
containing the images or used the Catalog Files wizard to catalog your images so they are in
the ACDSee Ultimate database.
If you are using the Photo Calendar, you only see thumbnails if there are photos on a
particular day in that month. Days that have no photo, are blank.
Calendar Pane View Options
Page 77 of 827
Events View Switches the Calendar pane to Events view. In the Events view
you see only those months during which images or media files
are available. Next to the month you see the number of dates
on which images or media files are available. Expand the
month to see the dates and the number of pictures available
for those dates. You can add a description and a thumbnail
image to help you remember the event.
Year View Switches the Calendar pane to Year view. In Year view you see
a series of tables. Each table represents a specific year. Next
to the year you see how many images or media files are
associated with that year. The months during which images or
media files are available are highlighted.
Month View Switches the Calendar pane to Month view. In Month view you
see a series of tables. Each table represents a specific month.
Next to the month you see how many images or media files
are associated with that month. The dates on which images or
Day View Switches the Calendar pane to Day view. In Day view you see a
series of tables. Each table represents a specific day. Next to
the date you see how many images or media files are
associated with that date. The time at which the images or
Photo Calendar Switches the Calendar pane to the Photo Calendar. In the
Photo Calendar, you see a single month with thumbnails for
any day that contains photos. A pop-up of the first four images
opens if you hover your cursor over a thumbnail. Click on a
thumbnail and all the pictures for that date display in the File
List. The total number of photos belonging to that month is in
the top right corner of the calendar. Drag the title bar to float
this pane onto another monitor and drag a corner to resize it
and make the thumbnails bigger or smaller.
Options Use the Calendar pane options to specify which date you want
to use to organize your files. For example, you can quickly
change the setting so that the photos are displayed by the
following:
Date the ACDSee Ultimate database cataloged the file
Date the image was taken
Date the file was modified
Date the file was loaded to your computer
Page 78 of 827
Select Options to open the Calendar dialog, where you can set
filter options, choose the day to start the week, and set clock
formats.
Table of Contents Opens a list of event dates.
Only available in Events View.
In all views apart from Events View, you can use Shift + Left Arrow or Shift + Right Arrow to
navigate between dates with images. For example, in Month View, if you had taken pictures in
August, September, and November, by using Shift + Right Arrow, you will skip the empty
month of October.
Adding Descriptions and Thumbnails in Events View

You can add a description and a thumbnail image to dates in Events view to help you remember the
event.
Try right-clicking the Calendar Title bar and select Floating to move the pane to a new location.
To Add a Description to a Date in Events View:

1. Expand the month to see the dates on which images or media files are available.
2. Click Enter event description here and replace the highlighted text with a new description.
3. Press Enter or click outside of the description area. The description is saved.
To Select a Specific Thumbnail in the Events View or Photo Calendar:

1. Expand the month to see the dates on which images or media files are available.
2. Click on a date to display the images or media files in the File List pane.
3. Click and drag an image or media file and drag it to the thumbnail area for the date.
When you release the mouse button the thumbnail is saved. You can reset the default
thumbnail by right-clicking the thumbnail and selecting Restore Default Thumbnail.
To Navigate a Long List of Dates in Events View:

1. To expand and collapse specific groups click the +/- signs which are located on the left side of the group
header.
2. To expand and collapse all groups right-click a group header and select either Open All Groups or Close
All Groups.
Page 79 of 827
3. To scroll through multiple groups click the Next Group and Previous Group buttons, which are located at
the bottom of the File List scroll bar.
4. At the bottom of the Calendar pane scroll bar, click the Table of Contents button and select a date.
Browsing Your Favorite Files

You can create shortcuts to your favorite files for easy access.
Accessing the Shortcuts Pane

Click Panes | Shortcuts.
Creating a Shortcut
You can create shortcuts to folders and files, and even run executable files, from inside the Shortcuts
pane. Favorite shortcuts can be copied, renamed, moved, or deleted just like a folder. You can even
use an executable shortcut to start another application from inside ACDSee. You can also create a
shortcut by dragging a file, folder, or executable file directly from the File List pane to the Shortcuts
pane.
To Add Files to the Shortcuts Pane:

1. In the File List pane, select a file, folder, or executable file.
Right-click the item you selected, and then select Add to Shortcuts.
Click File | Add to Shortcuts.
3. Type a name for the new shortcut and click OK.
Creating a New Folder

You can create a folder, or an entire directory tree, in the Shortcuts pane to help organize your
favorites.
To Create a New Folder:

1. In the Shortcuts pane, right-click the Shortcuts folder, or a folder you previously created, and then select
New | Folder.
2. Type the name of the folder and press Enter.
If you move a file or a folder that is a shortcuts, you break the link and the shortcut no longer
works.
Page 80 of 827
Deleting a Shortcut or Folder

You can delete a shortcut or folder from within the Shortcuts pane.
To Delete a Shortcut or Folder:

In the Shortcuts pane, right-click the shortcut or folder, click Delete, and then click Yes to confirm
that you want to delete the shortcut or folder.
Using the Catalog Pane

The Catalog pane is one of the most useful panes in Manage mode as it provides so many tools for
organizing, managing, and finding your files. You can drag files into the categories, ratings, keywords,
or color labels of the Catalog pane to assign and quickly organize your files. The Auto Categories
section can be used to find files with specific information such as file size, keywords, or shutter speed.
The Saved Searches section allows you to create and run custom searches. Special items such as the
Image Well display all the images on the computer in one click, or you can click Uncategorized to
display only those that are not yet in a category.
To Open the Catalog Pane:

In Manage mode, click Panes | Catalog.
The Catalog pane opens on the left, tabbed with the Folders and Calendar panes.
Easy-Select Bars
Select multiple albums, ratings, keywords, labels, and categories with the Easy-Select bars to display
files matching these selections in the File List pane.
Select the indicator to the left of one or more items in the Catalog pane to display the files in the
File List pane that match the specific set of criteria.
The ACDSee Ultimate Database

Any organizing you do using categories, ratings, or labels (on the Catalog pane or the Properties pane)
is stored in the ACDSee Ultimate database. If you choose to, you can then also embed this information
in each individual file, making it easier to relocate and share files, or retrieve the information from the
file if you need to.
Page 81 of 827
Browsing RAW Files

Because a RAW file is similar to a negative, it is necessary to develop, or process it, before it becomes
visible. It would be very inconvenient if you had to develop all of your RAW files before you could
browse your photos. In ACDSee Ultimate you don't have to develop your RAW files to browse your
photos because ACDSee Ultimate does some basic preprocessing for you.
If there is a thumbnail of the photo embedded in the RAW file, ACDSee Ultimate displays it in Manage
mode. Sometimes the quality of an embedded thumbnail is poor, so ACDSee Ultimate initially displays
embedded thumbnails in Manage mode, then it creates and displays a higher-quality thumbnail. You
can see this happening if you look in the Status bar at the bottom of the window.
If you find that it takes too long to display the higher-quality thumbnails, you can turn off that option.
(In Manage mode, click Tools | Options, select File List, and then uncheck the Generate high quality
thumbnail checkbox.) If there is no thumbnail of the photo embedded in the RAW file, ACDSee
Ultimate quickly creates a high-quality thumbnail to display in Manage mode.
Turning off the Generate high quality thumbnail option will increase display speed but will
reduce the accuracy of thumbnails for RAW images.
ACDSee Ultimate also searches the database to see if you have developed a RAW file. If it finds develop
settings for the RAW file, it uses those settings to display an accurate thumbnail in Manage mode.
Once generated, the thumbnails are stored in the ACDSee Ultimate database to speed up retrieval and
display time for later browsing.
Detecting Faces in Manage Mode

ACDSee automatically adds file information and thumbnails to the database as you browse. This
process is called cataloging. Once the folder you are browsing has been cataloged, ACDSee begins the
process of detecting faces in your images. As you open other folders, ACDSee will continue scanning
for faces in the first folder, and will queue subsequent folders as you open them. You can view the
scanning progress in the bottom right corner of Manage mode. ACDSee will continue scanning until
Face Detection is complete on the folders you browsed.
Scanning for Faces:

In the bottom right corner, you will see a display of the number of images queued for scanning. You
can hover over this display to view a tooltip with the file name currently being scanned.
If your queue has become too large and you wish to reset it, right-click the display and choose Clear
Queue from the context menu, or choose Tools | Face Detection | Clear Queue. You can then browse
to the specific photos you wish to scan.
You can also detect faces on an image by image basis in View mode. Face Detection will scan
each image for faces as you open it.
Page 82 of 827
After Face Detection has run on the folders you have browsed, you can open the images in View mode,
where the faces will be outlined. You can assign names to the detected faces in View mode.
To Enable or Disable Face Detection:

Choose Tools | Options | Face Detection and check or uncheck the Automatically detect faces in
images checkbox.
Once you have assigned names to detected faces in View mode, you can use the People group of the
Catalog pane to find photos based on the individuals in them. You can also search by name in the
Quick Search bar and the Search pane. You can manage the names assigned to faces through Face
Detection using the People mode.
To Remove Face Detection and Recognition on Selected Images:

You can remove face detection and recognition data on images selected in Manage mode.
1. In Manage mode, select one or more images.
2. Choose Tools | Face Detection | Remove Faces.
These images will remain marked as having been scanned for faces, and Face Detection will not re-scan
them, unless triggered by the Redetect Faces command, or enabling Rerun Face Detection and editing
or developing the images and browsing them.
To Rerun Face Detection on Selected Images:

You can force Face Detection to re-scan selected images in Manage mode.
2. Choose Tools | Face Detection | Redetect Faces.
To Rerun Facial Recognition on Selected Images:
In order to correct names mistakenly assigned to faces by ACDSee, you can rerun facial recognition on faces
you have not manually named within the selected image or images. This clears all names assigned by ACDSee's
facial recognition, but leaves manually entered names. ACDSee will then attempt to recognize unnamed faces
based on names you have entered manually.
2. Choose Tools | Face Detection | Rerun Recognition.
Embedding, Retrieving, and Importing Face Data

Any interaction you make with the Face Detection feature will create "face data", which is added to the
database, and will, therefore, trigger the Embed Pending icon. Face data is embedded in your image's
XMP file, just like any ACDSee Metadata. By embedding this face data into your files as well, you can
share it, restore it, or make it available in a new database.
Page 83 of 827
To Embed Face Data:

You can embed your face data using the Embed ACDSee Metadata dialog. See Embedding ACDSee
Metadata in Files.
To Retrieve Face Data Embedded in Files:

Choose Tools | Face Detection | Import ACDSee Face Data.
Choose Tools | Database | Catalog Files. In the Catalog Files dialog, in the Import from Cataloged Files
section, check the ACDSee Face Data checkbox. Press Start.
To Import Embedded Face Data From Lightroom or Picasa :

1. In Manage Mode, select the images for which you have embedded face data in another application.
2. Select Tools | Face Detection | Import Lightroom or Picasa Face Data.
3. A warning dialog will pop up asking if you want to overwrite any existing face data and add face data
from another program to the files. Select OK if so.
4. Your face data will import and the face data will be added to your database.
Changing Views
You can select different views to display your files in the File List pane, including thumbnail previews
and file details. You can also customize the appearance and size of thumbnails, and specify the
information displayed in the Details view.
To Change the File List View:

In Manage mode, in the File List pane, under View, select from the following:
Views
Page 84 of 827
Thumbs+Details Displays file names and details in a list, and adds a thumbnail preview to the
Filename column.
Filmstrip Displays thumbnail previews of your files in a single row across the bottom of
the File List pane, and displays the currently selected file in an expanded
Preview pane.
Thumbnails Displays thumbnail previews of all image and media files (and some
document types) in the File List pane. You can customize the appearance of
thumbnails, and specify what information to display with them.
Tiles Displays each file in the File List pane on a "tile" that includes a thumbnail
preview and file information. You can resize the tiles using the Zoom slider.
Icons Displays files in a list, represented by large default system icons for each file
type.
List Displays a list of file names and extensions.
Details Displays a list of file names and details about each file, such as size, format,
and creation date. You can customize the appearance of the Details view
mode, as explained below, and specify what information it displays.
Toggle Overlay Mode Controls whether overlay icons are invisible, visible in grayscale, or visible in
color. Use the (]) key to choose.
Highlight Overlay Controls which overlay icon is colored. Use the ([) key to rotate through.
Customizing the Details View

You can set the Details view to automatically resize columns, display or hide grid lines, and select an
entire row when you select a column entry in that row. You can also change the appearance of the
Details view, select which columns to display, and customize the column order.
To Select Columns and Set Column Order:

1. In Manage mode, from the File List drop-down, click View | Choose Details.
2. In the Choose Details dialog box, do one or more of the following:
To add a column, select a folder or detail name in the Available Details pane, and then click Add.
Adding a folder adds all detail names within the folder.
To remove a column, select a detail name in the Currently Displayed Details pane, and then click
Remove.
To move a column to the left in the File List pane, select its name in the Currently Displayed
Details pane and click Move Up.
Page 85 of 827
To move a column to the right in the File List pane, select its name in the Currently Displayed
Details pane and click Move Down.
3. Click OK.
You can click Reset to display only the default column names in the Currently Displayed Details
pane, and you can also move a column in the File List pane by dragging its header to a new
position. A vertical line indicates where the column will be inserted.
Filtering Files
You can use the Filter By options to identify the types of files and folders you want to display in the File
List pane.
To Filter Files in the File List Pane:

Click View | Filter By and select a filter option.
Click the Filter drop-down and select a filter option.
If all your thumbnails seem to disappear, click Filter | All and they reappear.
To Create a Custom Filter:

Click View | Filter By | Advanced Filters.
Click the Filter drop-down and select Advanced Filters.
2. Select Apply filtering criteria.
3. Select or clear one or more of the following options to show or hide that file or folder type in the File
List pane:
Show image files
Show media files
Show PDF files
Show folders
Show archive files
Show Office documents
Page 86 of 827
Select Show hidden files and folders to show files and folders that are normally hidden by your
operating system.
Select Show THM files to show thumbnail files.
Select Show XMP files to show the XMP sidecar files.
4. Click OK.
Grouping Files
If you have to browse a lot of images in the File List you should consider using Group By to organize
images into different groups. You may find it easier to find images when they are organized into
groups. For example, if you use more than one camera, you can quickly organize your images
according to the camera you used to capture the images. Similarly, if you save your images into
different file formats you can quickly organize your images according to their file format.
Group By only works in the Thumbs, Thumbs + Details, Details, Tiles, and Icons views.
The Processed State group is particularly useful for finding images that you have developed,
edited, or developed and edited.
To Group Files in the File List:

1. Browse to the folder or folders containing your files.
Click View | Group By and select a group option.
Click the Group drop-down and select a group option.
Navigating Through Groups in the File List
To Expand and Collapse Specific Groups:

Click the Expand or Collapse arrows, on the left side of the group header.
To Expand and Collapse All Groups:

Right-click a group header, and then select either Open All Groups or Close All Groups.
To Display a Preview of the Images in a Closed Group:

Hover your cursor over the group header.
To Scroll Through Multiple Groups:
Page 87 of 827
Click the Next Group and Previous Group buttons at the bottom of the File List scroll bar.
To Display the Table of Contents:

Click View | Group By | Table of Contents.
Click the Group drop-down list and select Table of Contents.
At the bottom of the File List scroll bar, click the Table of Contents button.
To Quickly Jump to a Specific Group:

1. Display the table of contents.
2. Click the group that you want to display.
To Change the Sort Order of the Groups:

Click View | Group By and select either Group Forward or Group Backward.
Click the Group drop-down and select either Group Forward or Group Backward.
Removing Groups from the File List
To Remove a Group:
Click View | Group By | None.
Click the Group drop-down list and select None.
Selecting Files in One or More Groups
To Select Files in Groups:

Click the group header to select all of the files in that group.
Press and hold the Ctrl key and click two or more group headers to select all of the files in those groups.
Page 88 of 827
Sorting Files
In Manage mode, you can sort your files according to different file properties to quickly organize your
images, find specific files, and create a range of files with similar attributes for easy selection.
To Sort Items in the File List:

1. Click View | Sort By, and then select a sort option:
Filename
Size (KB)
Image Type
Modified Date
Image Properties
Caption
Rating
Tagged
More (sort by metadata, EXIF, file properties, image attributes, IPTC information, or multimedia
attributes)
2. To set the direction of the sort, click View | Sort By, and then select a direction:
Sort Forward
Sort Backward
Your sort settings are saved until you change them. For example, if you sort images in the File
List pane according to Rating, the images will remain sorted according to Rating until you
change the sort settings.
Sorting Files Using Column Headers

You can quickly sort files in Details view mode using column headings.
To Sort Files Using a Column Header:

1. Click a column header. An arrow appears, indicating the sort direction.
2. Click the column header again to change the sort direction.
Page 89 of 827
Custom Sorting Files

You can use custom sorting to customize the order of files in the File List pane. After custom sorting
your files, ACDSee Ultimate automatically saves the file order for the selected folder until you change it
or delete the custom sort order.
To Customize the Sorting Order of Your Files:

1. Select one or more files.
2. Drag the selected files to a new location in the File List.
To delete a custom sort order, click View | Sort By, and then select Delete Custom Sort.
Selecting Files
In the File List pane, you can select all of your files and folders at once, select all of the files in the
current folder, select only the image files, or clear your selection entirely.
You can also set an option to automatically select new files whenever you add them to the File List.
Click Tools | Options | File List to set this option.
To Select Your Files or Folders:

Click a thumbnail to select the file.
Ctrl + click to select more than one file.
Shift + click to select a number of files in a row.
Click off to the side in the file list pane to clear your selection.
To Select Your Files or Folders Using the Menu:

1. In Manage mode, click Edit.
2. Select one of the following:
Select All: selects all files and subfolders in the current folder.
Select All Files: selects all files in the current folder.
Select All Images: selects all image files in the current folder.
Select Tagged: selects all tagged image files regardless of their folder.
Select by Rating: displays a list of ratings, and selects all files currently assigned to the rating you
select.
Page 90 of 827
Clear Selection: clears your selection.
Invert Selection: selects all files except for your original selections.
Previewing Images
You can preview image, audio, and video files in the Preview pane. By default, the Preview pane
displays the highlights of the image's EXIF information for quick reference. You can set the Preview
pane to display a thumbnail of the currently selected image or media file. You can resize the pane to
adjust the thumbnail dimensions, and reposition the pane anywhere on your screen.
You can also use the Preview pane to view a histogram of the selected image.
To Open or Close the Preview Pane:

Click Panes | Preview.
Press Ctrl + Shift + P.
To Show or Hide What Displays in the Preview Pane:

You can customize the options displayed in the Preview pane when you have an image displaying. (To
display an image, go to Tools | Options | Preview and check the Show image checkbox.) Right-click
the image in the Preview pane, select Image and Information, and then select one of the following:
Show Image: displays only a preview of the image.
Show Information: displays EXIF information about the image. This is called the Information palette.
Show Histogram: displays the image's histogram.
The Information Palette

The Information palette is located in the bottom left of ACDSee and provides immediate access to the
most useful elements of an image's EXIF information. It includes:
Camera Name and Lens Model
Dimensions
File Size
Exposure Program
White Balance
Metering Mode
Page 91 of 827
Flash
RAW (will be blank for files that are not RAW)
ISO
F-Stop
Shutter Speed
Exposure Compensation
Focal Length
If you are unsure what a certain symbol means, you can hover your mouse over it for a pop-
up explanation.
To Customize the Preview Info:

You can customize what information displays at the bottom of the Information palette section of the
Preview pane. The date and time that the image was taken is selected by default.
1. Right-click the date and time at the bottom of the Information palette in the Preview pane.
2. Click Choose Preview Info...
3. In the Choose Details dialog box, select the item listed under Currently Displayed Details and press the
Remove button.
4. From the Available Details column, choose an item by checking the checkbox next to it and pressing the
Add button.
5. Click OK.
To Preview Audio or Video Files:

1. Click Tools | Options | Preview.
2. Check the Preview audio and video clips checkbox.
3. Click OK.
The Information palette also displays in View, Develop, and Edit mode. To turn off the
Information palette, deselect Info Palette under the Panes menu.
Rotating Images
You can rotate images in Manage and View modes using the Rotate icons in the bottom toolbar.
When you rotate unprocessed JPEG images, ACDSee Ultimate performs a lossless rotation,
meaning no information is lost.
Page 92 of 827
To Rotate Images:
1. In Manage mode or View mode, select one or more images.
2. Click the Rotate Left or Rotate Right icon in the bottom toolbar.
Rotate Icons
Rotate Left Rotates the image 90° to the left.
Rotate Right Rotates the image 90° to the right.
Comparing Images
You can use the Compare Images feature to compare a group of images. The tool highlights both the
similarities and the differences in the properties, metadata, and pixel intensity levels of images you
select. You can save your preferred images to a new location on your hard drive, or tag images you
would like selected in Manage mode, and then delete, move, rename, or alter the images.
To Compare Images:
1. In the File List pane, select the images that you want to compare.
2. Click Tools | Compare Images.... Up to four images display in the Compare Images Viewer.
3. To change which image displays in the comparison view, do one or more of the following:
In the Comparison List, right-click an image and click Send to Active View (indicated by a pale
box).
In the Comparison List, drag an image to a box in the Compare Images Viewer.
In the Compare Images Viewer, right-click an image and click Next Image or Previous Image.
In the Compare Images Viewer, right-click an image and click File | Remove From View or click
the Remove icon in the image toolbar.
4. To tag images, do one of the following:
In the Comparison List, check the checkbox that is located at the bottom of the image on the
right side.
In the Compare Images Viewer, right-click an image and click Tag or click the Tag icon in the
image toolbar.
Click the Tag All button in the bottom left corner to tag all of the images, or click Untag All to
untag all of the images.
5. To rate images, right-click an image, click Set Rating, and then select an appropriate rating.
Page 93 of 827
6. To categorize images, right-click an image, click Set Categories, and then select an appropriate category
(or create an appropriate category).
7. Click OK, located in the bottom right corner.
Compare Images Toolbar
Page 94 of 827
Previous Swaps the selected image with the previous image in the
Comparison List.
Next Swaps the selected image with the next image in the Comparison
List.
Zoom In Increases the magnification of the selected image.
Zoom Out Reduces the magnification of the selected image.
Zoom menu Opens a menu of zoom options. Select from the following options:
l Actual Size: displays the image at its original size.
l Fit Image: displays the image at the largest magnification
that fits in the Compare Images Viewer.
l Fit Width: displays the image to fit between the left and right
sides of the Compare Images Viewer.
l Fit Height: displays the image to fit between the top and bot-
tom of the Compare Images Viewer.
l Zoom Lock: displays all images at the zoom option of the cur-
rent image. If the zoom is adjusted, the new zoom level is
applied to all images that you view.
l Zoom To: opens a dialog box where you can select a zoom
option.
Pan Lock Locks the panned image area, so that when you zoom and pan an
image to a specific area, the Compare Images Viewer displays the
same area for all images you view.
Exposure warning Indicates pixels that may be over or underexposed.
Properties Displays properties for each image in the Compare Images Viewer.
Click the Metadata Setup button to specify which file properties
are displayed.
The Compare Images tool displays the file properties in a field
below each image. Differences in properties are bolded, while
similarities are displayed in regular font.
Histogram Displays a histogram for each image in the Compare Images Viewer.
Metadata Setup Opens a dialog box where you can select the metadata to display for
each image in the Compare Images Viewer (ensure Properties
is toggled to on).
Page 95 of 827
One Image Displays one image in the Compare Images Viewer.
Two Images Displays two images in the Compare Images Viewer.
Three Images Displays three images in the Compare Images Viewer.
Four Images Displays four images in the Compare Images Viewer.
Properties Pane If one image is displayed, this button opens the Properties,
Histogram, Magnifying Glass, and Navigator panes.
Help Opens the Help file.
Image Toolbars
Each image in the Compare Images tool has a toolbar located below it. You can use this toolbar to
adjust each image individually.
Save Opens a dialog box where you can save the image with a different
file name and a different file format.
Previous Swaps the displayed image with the previous image in the
Comparison List.
Next Swaps the displayed image with the next image in the Comparison
List.
Zoom In Increases the magnification of the image.
Zoom Out Reduces the magnification of the image.
Delete Deletes the image from your hard drive.
Remove Removes the image from the Comparison List.
Tag Tags the image so that it will remain selected when you close the
Compare Images tool.
Page 96 of 827
Gathering Images in an Image Basket

You can use image baskets to gather and hold images and media files from different locations or
folders. Once you have placed items in an image basket, you can use any of the tools or features
inACDSee Ultimate to edit, share, or view those files. You can create up to five image baskets and use
them simultaneously.
To Open an Image Basket:

In Manage mode, click Panes | Image Basket | New Image Basket or press Ctrl + Shift + 9. Repeat this
step to open up to five image baskets.
To Add Files to an Image Basket:

In the File List pane, select the files you want to add. Drag the items to the Image Basket.
In the File List pane, right-click selected files and choose Add to Image Basket from the context menu.
You can also use this method in View mode.
In the File List pane, select the files you want to add and press Ctrl + B. You can also use this method in
View mode.
The last image basket that you interacted with is considered the "active" basket. This will be
indicated with a star next to the basket's name. The active basket is the one that images will be
added to when using the context menu or keyboard shortcut in Manage or View mode.
You can also add images to an image basket by dragging them from Windows Explorer.
To Remove Files from an Image Basket:

In the Image Basket, right-click the files, and select Remove from Image Basket or press Alt + X.
To remove all files, right-click the Image Basket, and then select Clear Image Basket.
To Rename an Image Basket:

In the Image Basket, right-click and choose Rename Image Basket from the context menu. In the
Rename Image Basket dialog, enter a name in the field and press OK.
To Delete an Image Basket:

In the Image Basket, right-click and choose Delete Image Basket from the context menu or press Ctrl +
Shift + -. Deleting an image basket will not delete the images within it.
Page 97 of 827
Viewing Develop Settings in Manage Mode

You can use the Develop Settings pane to view adjustments made to your images in Develop mode.
You must develop an image before you will see any values in the Develop Settings pane.
To Open the Develop Settings Pane:

In Manage mode, click Panes | Develop Settings.
To View Your Develop Settings:
1. Select an image with the Developed overlay icon.
2. In the Develop Settings pane, expand the groups to view each adjustment's value.
Copying and Pasting Develop Adjustments

You can copy adjustments made in Develop mode and paste them onto other images in the Develop
Settings pane.
To Copy Develop Settings and Paste Them to Other Images:

1. Select the image.
2. In the Develop Settings pane, press the Copy button.
3. Select an image on which to paste the adjustments.
4. Press the Paste button.
Restoring Images
You can also restore the image to its original state with the Restore button.
To Revert an Image Back to its Original State:

2. In the Develop Settings pane, press the Restore button.
Cataloging and Managing Files in ACDSee Ultimate

In addition to its browsing, viewing, and editing capabilities, ACDSee Ultimate features integrated
management tools you can use to organize and sort your images and media files. These tools include
batch functions (tools that can alter or adjust multiple files at the same time), category and rating
systems, and a powerful database to hold all of your important image information.
Page 98 of 827
You can use the ACDSee Ultimate batch functions to export, rename, resize, rotate, add EXIF
information, and adjust the exposure of a single image, a group of images, or the contents of an entire
folder all at once. With the category, color label, and rating systems, you can create a virtual folder
structure, and use it to find related images and media files with a single click.
ACDSee Ultimate displays file properties and image information in an easily accessible Properties pane
that you can use to directly add and edit file information, including ACDSee Metadata. You can add an
author, description, notes, and keywords to your files, and adjust the category and rating
assignments at the same time.
Organizing with the Catalog Pane

The Catalog pane is useful panes as it provides many ways to catalog, sort, group, search for, and
manage your files.
Categories
Categories are an easy way to organize your files into context-related sections. When you assign a file
to a category, you do not move the file from its folder or create an extra copy. Your categories can be
simple or complex and use any names you choose. There are different icons to use for different
categories to help you identify them at a glance. Once your files are in categories, you can search, sort,
group, and find them by category.
One way to assign files to a category is to select and drag one or more files from the file list and drop
them onto the category. You can choose colored icons to identify your categories, and cycle through
the available icons using the ] key. A file can belong to multiple categories, but it will only have one
icon. For comprehensive categories management, use the Organize tab of the Properties pane.
People
The People group in the Catalog pane will display the names of individuals you have assigned in the
Face Detection Pane in View mode. You can select a name to display all of the photos with that
individual in it, provided that they have been identified using Face Detection. You can also set Face
Search Options which allow you to choose whether to display assigned names, suggested names, or
both using the settings menu (gear icon) in the top right corner of the People group.
To assign names to faces, use People mode.
Keywords
You can use keywords to organize your files into hierarchies. You can create and assign hierarchical
keywords in the Organize tab of the Properties pane. You can add keywords to images quickly using
drag and drop. You can also manage your keywords in the context menu, by using right-click.
Page 99 of 827
Ratings
You can assign a numerical rating from 1 to 5 to your images and files. Once you have assigned ratings,
you can search, sort, and catalog your files based on the ratings, or a combination of ratings,
categories, auto categories etc. A file can have only one rating. When a file has a rating, the number
appears on top of the thumbnail in the File List pane. Ratings can be managed in Assigning and
Searching Categories and Ratings.
Color Labels
You can use color labels to catalog your files. You can use different colors to represent different stages
of your workflow. As you review your photos or documents, you can assign color labels and rename
them accordingly.
Auto Categories
Most digital cameras create and embed information about the file as you take a photo. This
information is called metadata and can include the name and model of the camera, the file size,
shutter speed, camera settings used in the shot and much more. ACDSee Ultimate uses this
information to create auto categories. You can search using auto categories to find images containing
that metadata. You can select one or more auto categories to find files, for example, photos of a
certain size, taken by a particular camera. You can also add to this data using the Properties panes.
Saved Searches
If you find yourself creating the same search criteria frequently, you can save the search to use again
later. Saved searches appear at the top of the Search pane but they also appear in the Catalog pane
for you to re-run using a single click on the name or in the white checkbox of the Easy-Select bar.
To Create a New Saved Search from the Catalog Pane:

1. In the Saved Searches area of the Catalog pane, click the New saved search icon.
The Search pane opens.

2. Enter your search criteria and then click the Saved searches icon.
The new saved search appears in the Saved Searches on the Catalog pane and in the Saved
Searches drop-down list of the Search pane.
Special Items
You can use Special Items to quickly view all of the images in your database and any uncategorized
images. Select one of the following items:
Page 100 of 827

Image Well: displays all images cataloged in the ACDSee Ultimate database. If you have a substantial
image collection, it may take a few moments to gather all of the information.
Videos: displays all videos cataloged in the ACDSee Ultimate database. This will return any video formats
supported by ACDSee. If you have a substantial file collection, it may take a few moments to gather all of
the information.
Embed Pending: displays all the files with database data that has changed but has not yet been
embedded in the files.
Uncategorized: displays any images cataloged in the database that have not been assigned to a category.
No Keywords: displays any images cataloged in the database that have no ACDSee keywords assigned.
Unnamed Faces: displays all photos in which one or more faces have been detected but not named.
Auto-Named Faces: displays all photos with one or more faces that have been automatically named by
ACDSee using facial recognition.
Suggested Names: displays all photos with suggested names using Face Search. You can use this item to
quickly confirm or deny suggestions across your image collection.
Tagged: displays all the tagged images in your file collection.
The ACDSee Database and Embedded Data

When you assign a file to a rating, or category, this information is stored in the ACDSee Ultimate
database. If you choose to, you can also embed this information in each individual file, making it easier
to relocate and share files, or retrieve the information from the file if you need to. In the database,
information is always associated with a particular file. If you move or rename files using an application
other than ACDSee Ultimate (like Windows Explorer) the link between the file and the ACDSee Ultimate
database will be broken. If this happens, and you have embedded the information in each file, you can
rebuild the database and retrieve all the information.
You can also use the Properties pane to add information to the ACDSee Ultimate database like
captions, keywords and much more. Taking the time to assign categories and add keywords, notes,
etc., makes it much easier to find and organize your files. Learn more about organizing using the
Properties Pane.
ACDsee 2022 uses XMP to embed ACDSee Metadata into each file. Only some file formats and
file extensions support XMP. These include GIF, JPEG, DNG, PNG, PSD, and TIF. In the case of
these file formats, the ACDSee Metadata is embedded inside the file and so you can rename or
move the file outside of ACDSee 2022 and still be able to retrieve the ACDSee Metadata. For
formats that currently do not support XMP, including RAW and ABR, the ACDSee Metadata is
written to a sidecar file that is stored in the same folder as its file. Because a sidecar file is
separate from the file itself, you need to rename or move them together, or you could lose the
ACDSee Metadata permanently.
Page 101 of 827

Easy-Select Bars
The Easy-Select bars are the indicators on the left side of the Folders and Catalog panes. They look like
this: . You can use these indicators to select multiple folders or categories, and display their
contents in the File List pane. In the Catalog pane you can also use the Easy-Select indicators to select
combinations of categories, ratings, auto categories, saved searches, and special items. For example,
you could display all your photos with a rating of 1 that belonged to the category People.
You can also use the Easy-Select indicators with the Selective Browsing pane (View | Selective
Browsing).
When you use the Match Any/All buttons and the Easy-Select indicators together, the Catalog pane
becomes a powerful search tool for finding unique sets of files.

In the Folders or Catalog pane, select the indicator to the left of each item with contents you want
to display. The indicator changes orientation to point to the item you have selected.
If you select a category, rating, or combination that does not have any files that match, the
File List displays a message and shows no thumbnails. The quickest way to return to a folder
with files is to click the back arrow.
To View Cataloged Files:

Select one or more categories, ratings, auto categories, saved searches, or special items. Files
assigned to those classifications are displayed in the File List pane.
The Contents bar at the top of the File List pane displays whatever categories or items are currently
selected. You can browse through specific categories, ratings, or items within specific folders using
the Selective Browsing pane.
Match All Match Any

There are two Match All/ Match Any drop-down lists on the Catalog pane; one at the top of the pane
that affects categories and one that affects saved searches. You can use the Match All and Match Any
options to affect the display of thumbnails in the File List in the following way:
Match All: to be included, a file has to belong to all the categories or searches you select. So the file has
to be in both or all of the categories or searches before it will display in the File List. Match All is more
exclusive. You can use it to limit the number of files that display and narrow a search down.
Match Any: to be included, a file can belong to any of the categories or searches you select. So any files
in the selected categories or searches will display in the File List. Match any is more inclusive.
Catalog Icons
Page 102 of 827

Category Identifies files that have been assigned to a category.
Ratings 1-5 Identifies file ratings.
New Saved search Opens the Search pane so that you can create a new
saved search.
Saved search Displays the Save/Save As menu so you can save a

search.
Easy-Select indicator (selected) Selects the category, rating, auto category, or other
item for display in the File List pane.
Easy-Select indicator (not selected) Does not select the category, rating, auto category, or
other item for display in the File List pane.
Match Any/All Controls which images are displayed in the File List
pane.
To hide the icons in the Catalog pane, click Tools | Options, and then select Catalog. Uncheck
the Show Icons checkbox in the Options dialog box.
Creating Categories
Create and manage a system of categories for your files in the Organize tab of the Properties pane.
You can easily customize your category system in a way that makes sense to you.
Select the Organize tab in the Properties pane to create, rename, delete, and move your categories.
You can also access the Categories pane by choosing Panes | Categories.
To Create a Category:
Right-click a category in the Catalog pane, and then select New Category.
In Manage mode, click Edit | Set Categories | New Category.
Create a new, top-level category
Create a sub-category within the current selection
Page 103 of 827

3. If you are creating a sub-category, select a top-level (or parent) category from the drop-down list. (If you
right-clicked a category in the Catalog pane, the new sub-category will be added below that category by
default.)
4. Type a name for the new category in the Name field.
5. Click OK.
When you create a new top-level category, you can select an icon to help identify the
category. The Icon drop-down only appears if the Show Icons checkbox is checked on the
Catalog page of the Options dialog box. In Manage mode, click Tools | Options, and then
select Catalog.
Manage Categories
To Manage Your Categories:

Select a category in the Catalog pane, and do one of the following:
To edit the category, right-click the selected category and select Edit.
To delete the category, right-click the selected category and select Delete.
In the Categories group in the Catalog pane:

To move the category, drag it to the new location.
Create Easy-Access Category Sets

If you have a long list of categories, or would like to break your categories up into different events or
areas of interest, you can use the Edit Category Sets feature.
To Create Easy-Access Category Sets:

1. First create the categories you want in your set.
2. In the Properties pane, click the Quick Categories drop-down list and select New Quick Categories
Set....
3. Customize the number of rows and columns for your set by selecting values from the Rows and
Columns drop-down menus.
4. Enter your commonly used categories into the entry fields. For sub-categories, use the pipe key.
Example: A|B|C.
5. Click the Save button.
6. Click OK. This category set will be listed in the Quick Category drop-down list.
Page 104 of 827

7. Select one or more files and click a button in the category set. The category will be assigned to the
selected files. The button text color will change to indicate that the category is assigned to currently
selected files, and will display in italics if assigned to only some (but not all) of the currently selected
files.
Make sure the category button name matches the category name in the category tree.
Assigning and Searching Categories and Ratings

You can assign files to a rating, or one or more categories, without moving the file or making an extra
copy.
If the Properties pane or Catalog pane is not visible in Manage mode, click Panes | Properties
or Panes | Catalog.
Quickly Assign Ratings in Thumbnail View

The rating number you select can be reflected as a star rating in other applications. Give your favorite
shots a high rating, and your least favorite shots a low rating.
To Assign Ratings:
1. Hover over a thumbnail to display the gray box with diagonal line through it.
2. Click the gray box to make your selection.
Example of Hovering Over a Thumbnail to Select a Rating:
1.
2.
Page 105 of 827

3.
Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl + 0-5 to quickly rate a file.
Assign and Search Categories and Ratings in the Catalog Pane

The Catalog pane allows you to both assign categories and ratings as well as search them.
To Assign Files to Categories or Ratings in the Catalog Pane:

1. In Manage mode, do one of the following:
Drag selected files to a category or rating in the Catalog pane.
Drag the category or rating from the Catalog pane to selected files.
Right-click the files, and then click Set Categories and click the category in the fly out, or click
Set Rating and click the rating.
2. In View mode, do one of the following:
Click Edit | Set Categories and then click the category to which you want to assign the file.
Right-click the file, click Set Categories, and then click the category to which you want to assign
the file.
Click Edit | Set Rating and then click the rating to which you want to assign the file.
Right-click the file, click Set Rating, and then click the rating to which you want to assign the file.
On the status bar, click the rating icon, and then click a new rating. This icon only appears once a
rating is set.
3. If you are comparing images and want to categorize them, do one of the following:
Right-click one of the files, click Set Categories, and then click the category to which you want
to assign the file.
Right-click one of the files, click Set Rating, and then click the rating to which you want to assign
the file.
Page 106 of 827

Ratings embedded by ACDSee can be seen in other applications supporting xmp:rating and
vice versa. To embed metadata into one or more selected files click Tools | Metadata | Embed
ACDSee Metadata | Embed In Selected Files.
Use the Context Menu (Right-Click) in the Category Tree to Do the Following:
Assign Items
Remove Items
Create New Category
Search
Cut
Copy
Paste
Delete
Edit Category
To Search a Category or Rating in the Catalog Pane:

Click the Category name or Rating number to display all corresponding files in the File List pane.
Assign Categories and Ratings in the Properties Pane

The Properties pane provides another way to assign categories and ratings.
To Assign Files to Ratings in the Properties Pane:

1. In the File List pane, select the files you want to assign a rating.
2. In the Properties pane, select the Metadata tab.
3. Click the rating you want these files to have from the numbers listed at the top of the Properties pane.
To Assign Files to Categories in the Properties Pane:

1. In the File List pane, select the files you want to assign a rating.
2. In the Properties pane, select the Organize tab.
3. Click the category you want these files to have from your Categories list.
Assign files quickly with a category sets button. See Create Easy-Access Category Sets.
Page 107 of 827

Remove Categories or Ratings from Files

You can remove a file from a category or rating without moving or deleting the original file, or affecting
any other files assigned to that classification.
To Remove Categories or Ratings from Files:

1. In the File List pane, select the files you want to remove.
Right-click a selected file, and then click Set Rating | Clear Rating.
Right-click a selected file, click Set Categories, and then click the name of the category from
which you want to remove the file, or to remove all categories, click Uncategorize All Selected
Items.
Uncheck a checkbox for a category or a radio button for a rating in the Catalog pane.
Right-click a category or rating in the Catalog pane, and then click Remove Items.
You can reset ratings in the Properties pane by right-clicking on the rating.
Assigning Color Labels

Color labels are useful for naming and quickly identifying your processing plans for your images and
documents. Different colors can be used to represent different stages of your workflow. For example,
as you review your photos or documents you can quickly label files to upload, print, reject, review, or
sharpen, or any other term that matches your workflow needs. Once your files have been labeled, you
can click a color label in the Catalog pane to instantly display all of the files assigned to that label.
You can also use color labels in combination with the Group by, or Filter By features to refine your list.
Color labels, like tagging, categories, and ratings, are a way to set aside, organize, and group your
photos or documents without moving them into different folders.
If the Properties pane or Catalog pane is not visible in Manage mode, click Panes | Properties
or Panes | Catalog.
Create a Color Label Set

Begin by creating a label set so you can quickly select and assign specified labels. Once you have a label
set in place, you can assign your images or documents to the appropriate labels corresponding to your
workflow.
To Create a Color Label Set:
Page 108 of 827

1. In the Catalog pane, click the Labels settings button and select Edit Label Sets.
2. Enter names for your labels and click the Save icon.
3. Click Save As from the Save Label Set dialog box.
4. Enter a name for your new label set.
5. Click OK.
Once you have created color label sets, you can access them from the Catalog pane by clicking the
Labels settings button and selecting from the drop-down list. Before assigning a color label, make sure
the intended label set is active. The active label set name is shown in brackets in the label header.
Assign Color Labels
You Can Assign Color Labels to Your Files by Using the Following:
Hover icons in thumbnail view
Catalog pane
Properties pane
Edit menu in Manage and View mode
Context menu
Keyboard shortcuts
You can also set labels from the status bar in View, Develop, and Edit mode.
To Assign a Color Label Using the Label Line Hover Icon in Thumbnail View:
1. Hover over a thumbnail to display the gray label icon.
2. Click the gray label icon to make your selection.
Example of Hovering Over a Thumbnail to Click and Select a Color Label:

1.
Page 109 of 827

2.
3.
Use the overlay icon on one of a number of selected files or images to assign the
label to all.
To Assign a Color Label to a File Using the Catalog Pane:

Drag selected files to a color label in the Catalog pane.
Drag the color label from the Catalog pane to selected files.
To Assign Files to Color Labels in the Properties Pane:

1. In the File List pane, select the files you want to assign a color rating.
2. In the Properties pane, select the color label from the boxes along the top.
To Assign Color Labels Using the Edit Menu in Manage and View Mode:
Click Edit | Set Label and then select a color.
Page 110 of 827

To Assign Color Labels with the Context Menu:

Right-click the file, click Set Label, then select a label name.
To Assign Color Labels Using Keyboard Shortcuts:

Keyboard shortcuts are available for the five color labels, plus Alt-0 to clear the label (exactly the same
as ratings, except Alt is used instead of Ctrl)
Alt-1
Alt-2
Alt-3
Alt-4
Alt-5
Alt-0
Search Files Assigned to a Label
To Search All Files in the Database Assigned to a Label:

Click the color label in the Catalog pane to display all corresponding files in the File List pane.
Use the Search box.
Use Quick Search.
To Search All Files in the File List Assigned to a Label:

Click the Filter drop-down above the File List pane and select a label name. All files assigned to that
label in the current file list will be selected.
To Select All Files in the File List Assigned to a Label:

Use Alt-1 through Alt-5 for the five colors, plus Alt-0 to clear the label, (exactly the same as ratings,
except it uses Alt instead of Ctrl).
Removing Color Labels and Color Label Sets
To Remove a Color Label from a File:
Page 111 of 827

1. In the File List pane, select one or more files you want to remove a label from.
Right-click a selected file, and then click Set Label | Clear Label.
In the Properties pane, click the gray unlabeled icon.
In the Properties pane, right-click on the color label.
To Delete a Label Set:

1. In the Catalog pane, click the Labels settings button and select Edit Label Sets.
2. Select the set you want to delete from the Labels Sets drop-down list.
3. Click the delete button.
Creating Collections
Collections is a powerful grouping and search query tool. You can use the Collections pane to group
accumulated photos based on a common variable, such as the camera used, location, or size. You
could also use Collections to group photos for sorting, processing, sharing, and much more.
Collection
Collection Set
Smart
Collection
To Create a Collection:
1. In Manage mode, choose Panes | Collection. The Collections pane will appear tabbed in the Folders
pane.
2. In the Collections pane, right-click and select Create Collection... from the context menu.
3. In the Create Collection dialog box, configure the options as described below.
4. Press the Create button.
Create Collection Dialog Box Options
Page 112 of 827

Name
Name Enter a name for your collection.
Location
Inside a Collection Set Check this checkbox if you would like to place this
collection inside of another previously-created
collection set, thereby developing a hierarchy.
Choose the collection set you would like to add your
image to from the drop-down menu.
Options
Include selected photos Check this checkbox to include any currently

selected photos in the collection.
Set as target collection Check this checkbox to designate this collection as

the target collection for images you will add photos
to. You will be able to quickly send images directly
to this collection by selecting images and pressing
Ctrl + Alt + C. To customize the keyboard shortcut,
see Customizing Keyboard Shortcuts.
To Add Photos to a Collection:

In the File List pane, select the images before using the Create Collection command described above.
Then check the Include selected photos checkbox inside the Create Collection dialog box.
In the File List pane, right-click the images and choose Collections | Add to | [name of the collection].
Drag and drop the images from the File List pane to the collection inside the Collections pane.
Select the image in the File List pane. In the Organize tab of the Properties pane, in the Collections
group, check the checkbox next to the collection.
To Set a Collection as Your Target Collection:

You can set a specific collection as the target collection, allowing you to quickly add images to it using a
keyboard shortcut. A target collection will display a blue circle icon next to it in the Collections pane.
You cannot set a smart collection as a target.
When creating a collection, check the Set as target collection checkbox in the Create Collection dialog
box.
Page 113 of 827

Right-click a collection in the Collections pane and choose Set as Target Collection.
To Add Images to Target Collections:

Select the image and press the Ctrl + Alt + C key.
You can customize this keyboard shortcut. See Customizing Keyboard Shortcuts.
To Search for Collections:

You can search for collections, collection sets, and smart collections in the Filter Collections field at the
top of the Collections pane.
Enter the name, (or portion of the name), of the collection, smart collection, or collection set you are
looking for. If the collection you are searching for is part of a collection set, the search will return the
root collection set if one of the sub-collections contains the text you entered in the Filter Collections
field.
To Remove an Image from a Collection:

1. Select the collection.
2. Right-click the image and choose Collections | Remove from Selected Collection.
This will only remove the image from the collection and will not delete the image.
You can remove multiple images from a collection at once by selecting them all and then right-
clicking and choosing Collections | Remove from Selected Collection.
To Remove an Image from All Collections:

To remove an image from all collections, right-click the image and choose Collections | Remove from
all collections.
This will only remove the image from all collections and will not delete the image.
You can remove multiple images from all collections at once by selecting them all and then
right-clicking and choosing Collections | Remove from all collections.
Collections Sets
You can create a collection set and add other collection folders inside. You can use this method to
create a hierarchy for further organization. You cannot add images to collection sets themselves. You
Page 114 of 827

can only add images to folders (collections) inside of collection sets. Selecting the root of a collection
set will display all of the images in all of the collections inside of the root.
To Create a Collection Set:

1. In the Collections pane, right-click and select Create Collection Set... from the context menu.
2. In the Create Collection Set dialog box, enter a name for your collection set.
3. Check the Inside a Collection Set checkbox if you would like to add your collection set inside of another
collection set. Select the collection set from the drop-down menu.
4. Click Create.
To Add Collections to Collection Sets:

Check the Inside a Collection Set checkbox while creating a collection inside the Create Collection dialog
box. Select the collection set from the drop-down menu.
In the Collections pane, drag and drop the collection from the root level to the collection set.
Smart Collections
Smart collections are collections with queries built into them based on search criteria you specify.
These search queries get saved to the database. When you catalog new images in the future, those
that fit the criteria of your search query will automatically show up in your smart collection. You can
also create a search query to locate files based on the date they were cataloged.
To Create a Smart Collection and Add Search Criteria to Your Query:

1. In the Collections pane, right-click and select Create Smart Collection... from the context menu.
2. In the Create Smart Collection dialog box, configure the options as described below.
3. Press the OK button.
Create Smart Collection Dialog Box Options
Page 115 of 827

Name Enter a name for your smart collection.
It is recommended that you give your smart collection a name reflective of the
search query assigned to it. This will save you the time of having to open it to find
out what it contains.
Location Inside a Collection Set Check this checkbox if

you would like to
place this collection
inside of another
previously-created
collection set, thereby
developing a
hierarchy. Select the
collection set you
would like to add your
smart collection to
from the drop-down
menu.
Match Press the Add button to select search criteria for your query. In the Add Search Criteria
dialog box, choose criteria by clicking the plus + signs to expand the tree and
check/uncheck the checkboxes on and off to select your properties. Press OK. Your
chosen criteria will appear in the Match field box. Refine each item by clicking the
underlined variables and selecting an option from the drop-down, or entering a number
into the field.
For example, if you chose Size as your search criteria, click "is" and select "is not", "is less
than", "is less than or equal to", "is greater than", "is greater than or equal to", or "is
between". Then click the "0" and enter the size value.
To Remove Criteria from Your Search Query:

Select the criteria from the Match field and select Remove.
To Edit Your Search Query:

1. Right-click your smart collection in the Collections pane and choose Edit.
2. In the Edit Smart Collection dialog box, add and remove search criteria as described above.
3. Click OK.
Using the Properties Pane

The Properties pane displays all the metadata for your files. It also displays file properties such as file
size, creation date, and read-only or hidden status. You can use the Properties pane to add, change,
Page 116 of 827

or delete the metadata for image and media files.

The Properties pane is open in Manage mode on the right of the File List pane by default. The
Properties pane is available in all modes except 365 mode and Media mode.
To Open the Properties Pane in Any Mode:

Click Panes | Properties.
The Metadata panel offers adjustable width for metadata fields. Simply hover between a
corresponding label and field to display the double arrow cursor. Click and drag to adjust
width. Double-click to toggle between the width of the longest label in the group or the
longest label in the pane.
Properties Pane Areas

The Properties pane is divided into 3 tabs: Metadata tab, Organize tab, and File tab.
Use the overlay icons, which appear as you hover over a thumbnail, to tag, rate and add color
labels to your images. Alternatively, you can display these setting in the Properties pane by
clicking Tools | Options | Properties Pane and selecting Show Tagged, Rating, and Color
Labels.
Metadata Tab
The Metadata tab displays the rating, category, IPTC, EXIF, and ACDSee Metadata stored with a
photo. The ACDSee Metadata fields are available for you to enter the caption for your photographs as
well as date, author, and notes. The keywords field is display-only and can be entered in the Organize
tab. The label field can be entered here or selected from the Labels section in the Catalog pane. IPTC
information is automatically embedded into your image, while ACDSee Metadata is not embedded in
your files, but instead is held in the database. ACDSee Metadata can be embedded into all your files
(or just selected ones) by clicking the Tools | Metadata | Embed ACDSee Metadata command.
The IPTC data fields provide a standard means for entering and storing information about your
photographs such as description, creator, and copyright information. ACDSee supports fields defined
in IPTC Core 1.1.
The EXIF data fields hold information captured by your camera such as shutter speed, camera model,
and GPS information.
Certain EXIF fields are no longer visible by default. The EXIF Artist, Copyright, Image Description, and
Date/Time Original fields are automatically modified when their matching IPTC fields are modified, (see
table below). This change reflects the recommendations of the Metadata Working Group (MWG). If
you need to have these fields visible in the EXIF section you can adjust your settings by clicking Tools |
Options | Properties Pane and clicking the Manage Metadata Views button.
Matching IPTC and EXIF Fields
Page 117 of 827

IPTC EXIF
Description writes to Image Description
Creator writes to Artist
Copyright Notice writes to Copyright
Date Created writes to Date/Time Original
When ACDSee parses metadata from a file, the content of the field is displayed without
mapping.
Organize Tab
The Organize tab displays a tree of categories and a tree of keywords. The Category tree context-menu
(right-click) allows you to add and delete categories and sub-categories. You can create category sets
to quickly categorize your files. Right-clicking the keyword tree also allows the same options. Use the
keyword tree to create a hierarchy to easily organize your files in a way that holds meaning for you.
File Tab
The File tab displays detailed file information and image attributes for a selected file or files. You can
set or change the Read-Only and Hidden properties of a file or folder, and view a summary of any EXIF
information contained in a file.
Embedding ACDSee Metadata into Files

If you have metadata in your files and they are copied, moved, or renamed, outside of
ACDSee, the link between the file and the database will be broken, but you can rebuild the
database using the embedded data in the file.
Page 118 of 827

Browsing and Cataloging with Auto Advance

You can use Auto Advance to quickly move through your images while adding tags, ratings, labels,
categories, or keywords. You can use Auto Advance in Manage and View mode.
To Turn on Auto Advance in Manage Mode:
At the bottom of the File List toolbar, toggle the Auto Advance button or press Ctrl + Q.
To Use Auto Advance:

When Auto Advance is enabled, adding (or clearing) a tag, rating, color label, keyword, or category will
advance the selection to the next image in the folder, allowing you to continue adding metadata. This
is particularly useful when paired with keyboard shortcuts, as you can organize entire folders without
moving your hands from the keyboard.
To select which types of applied metadata will trigger Auto Advance, see Setting the Auto Advance
Options.
Keywords and Categories are disabled by default.
Manage Mode
In Manage mode, using the keys on the numpad, apply the following keyboard shortcuts
to make the most out of Auto Advance:
Page 119 of 827

Turn on the numpad by pressing the Num Lock key before utilizing any of the following
keyboard shortcuts.
/ Tag
* Purple Color Label
9 Blue Color Label
8 Green Color Label
7 Yellow Color Label
6 Red Color Label
5 Rating of 5
4 Rating of 4
3 Rating of 3
2 Rating of 2
1 Rating of 1
0 Remove Rating
+ Next
- Previous
. Removes Color Label.
If the Num Lock key has not been activated, this will act as the
Delete button.
You can also customize keyboard shortcuts.
Keywords and Categories

You can streamline the process of adding keywords and categories to your images by combining
customized keyboard shortcuts and Auto Advance.
Keywords
In the Properties pane, on the Metadata tab, in the IPTC group, you can add keywords to the Keyword
field, press ENTER, and Auto Advance will move to the next image. You can also use the same method
in the Keywords field on the Organize tab of the Properties pane. In both locations, you can add
Page 120 of 827

multiple keywords at once, separating them with commas. You can continue the process for all images
without moving your hands from the keyboard.
Categories
In the Properties pane, on the Organize tab, expand the Categories group. Add categories to images
by checking the checkbox of your desired category. Or do one of the following:
Right-click the image, and choose Set Categories | [your desired category] from the context menu.
Choose Edit | Set Categories | [your desired category].
Use any of the these methods and Auto Advance will move to the next image.
To utilize this same type of convenience in all IPTC fields, see To Use Keyboard Shortcuts to Enter
Metadata into the Same Field of Multiple Photos.
View Mode
To Turn on Auto Advance in View Mode:
In the Bottom toolbar, toggle the Auto Advance button or press Ctrl + Q.
To Use Auto Advance in View Mode:

1. Choose Panes | Properties.
2. Add ratings, color labels, tags, categories, or keywords in the Properties pane and Auto Advance will
advance it to the next image in the Filmstrip, allowing you to continue adding metadata.
In View mode, use the following keyboard shortcuts to navigate your folder:
Home Selects the first image in the folder.
End Selects the last image in the folder.
Page Down Next
Page Up Previous
Using the Map Pane

Use the Map pane to add photo locations from anywhere in the world to your photos. You can then
recall and view that information for reference at any time. Use the map to select groups of files for
further workflow steps, and select photos for display in View mode.
Page 121 of 827

The location of files displayed in the Map pane is based on the latitude and longitude information in
the file properties. If you have a camera with geotagging capabilities, the geographic location is
automatically conveyed visually on the map. You can also add map coordinates to files by dragging
them directly onto the map and pressing the Save All button.
Geotagged images are indicated on the map with pins. You can click a pin on the map to select files
within a geographic location for viewing or processing. If your geotagged image pin is not displayed on
the map, try using the keyboard shortcut F5 to refresh the map.
The following file formats can be added to the map: JPG, TIFF, RAW, DNG, and PNG.
ACDSee automatically adds file information, including geographical tags, to the database as
you browse. However, if you have a large number of files, you may want to catalog those files
first to speed up the loading time for the pins on the map. To catalog your files, click Tools |
Database | Catalog Files.
To Open the Map Pane:

In Manage mode, click Panes | Map (Ctrl + Shift + M).
The Map pane appears above the File List pane in Manage mode by default. You can drag the Map
title bar to a new location and float the pane or dock it in another position like the other movable
panes in ACDSee.
You can toggle the Map on and off with the keyboard shortcut Ctrl + Shift + M in Manage
mode.
To Add Files to the Map by Dragging:

1. In Manage mode, drag one or more files onto the map.
2. Click Save All in the top left corner of the map.
Ideally images should be geotagged prior to processing. If an image is geotagged after it has
been edited and the Restore to Original command is used, then the geotag will be lost.
To Delete a Pinned Location on the Map:

Right-click the geotagged image thumbnail and select Map | Remove from Map.
To View a Geotagged Image on the Map:

Right-click the geotagged image thumbnail and select Map | View on Map.
To Find a Location:
Page 122 of 827

To find a specific location, enter a place or landmark into the Search for Location field at the top right
of the Map pane.
To Set Default Location, Zoom, and Map Type:

1. Pan to your preferred location on the map, then adjust the zoom-level and select your preferred map
type (Map, Satellite, or Terrain).
2. Click Tools | Map | Set default map location.
Note: the map reflects the current File list. If the File list has images mapped to a different
location from your default setting, then that location will be displayed.
To pan and zoom the map to a specific location, enter the location into the Map search field
and press Enter.
Reverse Geocoding:
The Reverse Geocoding command allows you to save location information into certain IPTC fields.
These include: Country, Country Code, State/Province, and Location.
1. In Manage mode, drag one or more files onto the map.
2. Click Save All in the top left corner of the map.
3. Press the Reverse Geocode button to preview the location information.
4. Click Save to save this information into the IPTC fields of the selected images.
If images with multiple different locations are selected, only one of those locations will be used
to do the reverse lookup.
Using the Map Pane to Further Your Workflow

With the images from a particular location all selected, here are a few possible workflow options:
Enter Develop or Edit mode to process this selection together.
Use the Batch tool to apply the same settings on photos from the same location.
Click Slideshow to view and present a slideshow of the photos from this location.
Send photos from this location via email.
If a geotagged image does not display, try using the keyboard shortcut F5 to refresh the map.
Pin Legend
Page 123 of 827

Indicates geotagged location.
Indicates more than one geotagged location in this area. (Zoom in to see locations)
Indicates selected geotagged location.
A dot on a pin of any color indicates unsaved image location.
Adding Metadata to Files and Using Presets

You can add information to your images using IPTC and ACDSee Metadata. IPTC information is
automatically embedded into your image, while ACDSee Metadata can be embedded into your file, or
stored in the database. You can add this information to one or multiple files at a time. You can also
save frequently used metadata values as a preset, allowing you to quickly input this information
without having to rewrite it.
We recommend entering and editing metadata prior to processing your images. If you use the Restore
to Original command, the metadata will be lost unless it was entered prior to processing (except in the
case of RAW images).
You cannot set IPTC and EXIF information for read-only files, such as those on a CD-ROM.
If the Properties pane is not already open, select Panes | Properties.
To Add Metadata to One or More Files:

1. In Manage mode, select one or more files in the File List pane.
3. Enter information into the metadata fields.
4. Click Apply or press Enter to apply your changes.
When you click Apply or Enter in Manage Mode, the focus is returned to the File List pane
allowing you to quickly make another file selection using your keyboard.
To include numbers in a sequence with your metadata, select the files and enter <#> as the
start number, in whichever field you want. Ex) Entering <5> will begin the sequence at 5.
Metadata Tab Keyboard Shortcuts
Page 124 of 827

This Shortcut Has This Result
Tab Jumps focus forward from field to field.
Shift + Tab Jumps focus backwards from field to field.
Ctrl + K Places the cursor in the ACDSee Metadata Keywords field of the Organize tab in the
Properties pane.
Alt + K Places the cursor in the IPTC Keywords field of the Metadata tab in the Properties pane.
Enter Applies your changes.
Esc Discards your changes.
If you click away from the Properties pane, any metadata that you have just entered will be
lost. You must click Apply or press ENTER to apply your changes.
To Use Keyboard Shortcuts to Enter Metadata into the Same Field of Multiple Photos:
1. Select the first photo in your list and enter content into a Metadata field.
2. Press the Page Down key to move to the next photo. The cursor remains in the same field of the
Properties pane for each photo, allowing you to quickly enter content for the same field for multiple
photos.
3. Enter content into the field and again press Page Down to move to the next photo.
4. Continue Step 3 until complete.
You do not need to click the Apply button when using this shortcut.
You can use the Page Up key to move back to the previous photo.
Copying and Pasting Metadata

You can conveniently copy and paste GPS, IPTC, and ACDSee Metadata from files and paste them into
other files.
This action will merge your keyword and category information.
To Copy Metadata:
Page 125 of 827

1. In Manage mode, select a file and do one of the following:
Go to Tools | Metadata | Copy...
Right-click and select Metadata | Copy...
2. In the Copy Metadata dialog box, select which metadata components you would like to copy.
3. Press Copy.
To Paste Metadata:
1. In Manage mode, select a file and do one of the following:
Go to Tools | Metadata | Paste.
Right-click and select Metadata | Paste.
Metadata Presets
To Create a Metadata Preset Using the Properties Pane:

1. In Manage mode, select any file in the File List pane.
3. Click the Metadata Presets drop-down list and select Manage Presets.
4. Enter content into the fields provided in the Manage Presets dialog box.
(See Notes for Inserting Data into the Manage Presets Dialog Box below.)
5. Click OK.
6. Click Save As...
7. Enter a name for the preset and click OK. The preset will appear in the Presets drop-down list.
To Create a Metadata Preset Using the Metadata Menu:

1. In Manage mode, go to Tools | Metadata | Manage Metadata Presets...
2. Enter content into the fields provided in the Manage Presets dialog box.
See Notes for Inserting Data into the Manage Presets Dialog Box below.
3. Click OK.
4. Click Save As...
5. Enter a name for the preset and click OK. The preset will appear in the Presets drop-down list on the
Metadata tab of the Properties pane.
To Set a Shortcut Preset (Ctrl + M):
Page 126 of 827

1. From the Metadata Presets drop-down list, select Manage Presets.
2. In the Manage Metadata Presets dialog box, click the arrow button next to the Presets drop-down
presets list.
3. Set a Shortcut Preset by making your selection from the list of saved Metadata Presets.
4. Click OK.
Once your default preset is set, the shortcut Ctrl + M will auto-fill the metadata fields for all selected
images. If you have not set a default preset, the shortcut Ctrl + M will open the Manage Metadata
Presets dialog box.
To Apply a Metadata Preset:

1. Select one or more images in the File List pane.
3. Click the Metadata Presets drop-down list and select a preset that you have created.
4. Click Apply.
Notes for Inserting Data into the Manage Presets Dialog Box:
The asterisk (*) represents any existing field data for the individual files. You can append additional
information next to the asterisk to maintain the existing field data, or you can delete it and enter new
information. For example, if you would like to append some text to IPTC Caption rather than replace it,
insert an asterisk in the field followed by a space and append your additional text.
You can transfer the value of one metadata field to another using the Insert Metadata command. Click
the Insert Metadata arrow next to each field to select and insert metadata place holders. For example,
you can transfer your ACDSee Keywords to IPTC Keywords by inserting the <ACDSee
Metadata:Keywords> placeholder into the IPTC Keywords field.
Importing and Exporting Metadata Presets:

1. In Manage mode, select Tools | Metadata | Manage Metadata Presets...
2. In the Manage Metadata Presets dialog box, click the arrow to the right of the Presets drop-down menu.
3. Select Import or Export.
4. Browse to find and select your XML file, then press Open.
Removing Metadata from Files

You may want to share your photos without including file information such as location, camera model,
personal ratings etc. The Remove Metadata option allows you to strip out this information from
selected images and maintain privacy.
Metadata can be removed from JPG, GIF, TIFF, PNG and DNG files.
Page 127 of 827

You can make copies of the images you want to remove the metadata from so you can
maintain the version with the metadata intact.
To Remove Metadata from Selected Images:

1. Click Tools | Metadata | Remove...
2. If you do not want to remove EXIF and IPTC or the Embedded ACDSee Metadata, deselect accordingly.
3. Click OK.
Metadata is permanently removed, but EXIF data specific to DNG files will be preserved.
Managing Metadata Views and Presets

To Select a Metadata View:
1. Click Panes | Properties to open the Properties pane.
2. Select the Metadata tab of the Properties pane.
3. Click the Metadata View drop-down list in the Metadata tab to select one of the view options: Default
Metadata View (most commonly used fields), All EXIF, All IPTC, ACDSee Metadata, or saved custom
views.
You must have an image selected to view the Metadata tab.
To Create a Customized Metadata View:

1. Click the Metadata View drop-down list in the Metadata pane and select Manage Metadata Views....
2. In the Choose Metadata to Display dialog box, select New Metadata View from the drop-down list.
3. Click the plus + signs to expand the tree and check/uncheck the checkboxes on and off to select your
preferences. See Manage Metadata View options below.
4. Click the save button and enter a name for your customized view.
5. Click OK.
Page 128 of 827

Manage Metadata Views Options

When all items in a group are selected, the group checkbox is checked.
When no items in a group are selected, the group checkbox is unchecked.

When some, but not all items in a group are selected, the group checkbox is
solid.
Check/uncheck the checkboxes to make your selections.
You can choose whether or not to display maker notes by checking or unchecking the Display
Maker Notes checkbox.
Creating and Assigning Hierarchical Keywords

You can add keywords to your files, and build a hierarchy from those keywords. These groups are
maintained in the keyword tree. Select the Organize tab in the Properties pane to create, rename,
delete, and move your keywords.
You can also access the keywords pane by choosing Panes | Keywords.
You can view all images assigned to specific keywords by clicking specific keywords in the
Keywords group in the Catalog pane.
Creating Keywords
To Create Keywords:
In the Properties pane, located to the right of the File List pane, do one of the following:
In the Organize tab, at the bottom of the Keyword group, right-click Keywords, and then select New
Keyword from the context menu.
Type a keyword into the field at the top of the Keyword group and press Enter.
Page 129 of 827

To Keyword Files with Existing Keywords, Do One of the Following:

Select one or more files, then check the box next to the appropriate keyword.
Select one or more files, then right-click the keyword. Select Assign items from the context menu.
Select one or more files, then drag them onto the keyword.
Select one or more files, then select a keyword from the Quick Keywords set. The keyword will be
assigned to your file and also added to the tree.
In the Keywords group in the Catalog pane, you can:

Select one or more files, then drag the keyword from the tree onto them.
To Establish a Hierarchy, Do One of the Following:

In the keyword field, type the lesser or more specific keyword, followed by the less than symbol,
followed by the greater or more general keyword.
Example:
Owl < Bird
or
Madrid < Spain < Europe
Right-click an existing keyword, then select New Keyword. The new keyword will automatically become
a child to the existing keyword.
When assigning multiple keywords to a file, it is important to note that separating keywords
with commas will not generate a hierarchy.
Managing Keywords
To Manage Your Keywords:

Select a keyword in the Organize tab, and do one of the following:
To unassign a keyword from a file, right-click the selected keyword and choose Remove Items or
uncheck the box.
To edit the keyword, right-click the selected keyword and choose Edit.
To delete the keyword, right-click the selected keyword and choose Delete.
To duplicate a keyword, right-click the selected keyword and choose Copy, then Paste where desired.
Page 130 of 827

In the Keywords group in the Catalog pane, you can do any of the management actions above, as well
as:
To edit the keyword tree, click and drag the keyword to other parts of the tree.
Creating Quick Keywords

You can use Quick Keywords to keep organized and to streamline your workflow by creating a group of
related keywords that hold an association for you. This is ideal for keywords you would like to be easily
accessible, rather than buried in the hierarchical tree. You can create multiple groups and choose
between them based on the photos you are viewing at the time. ACDSee comes pre-loaded with a
variety of usable sample Quick Keywords sets. You can also add these keywords to your tree.
Example:
Italy
Florence Venice Lake Como
Rome Milan Verona
Genoa Bologna Naples
To Assign a Keyword from Quick Keywords:

Select one or more files, then click the keyword.
To Create Easy-Access Quick Keywords:

1. On the Organize tab, in the Keywords group, select New Quick Keywords Set... from the drop-down
menu. The Quick Keywords dialog box opens.
2. Customize the number of rows and columns for your set by selecting values from the Rows and
Columns drop-down menus.
3. Enter up to 250 associated or commonly-used keywords in the open fields. To create a hierarchy within
a field, use the pipe key. Example: A|B|C.
4. Click the OK button.
5. In the New Preset dialog, enter a name for your set. Click OK.
6. Apply keywords from your set by selecting a file and clicking the applicable keyword from the Quick
Keywords Table. The keyword will be added to the tree. If you specified a hierarchy in the keyword set,
the parent keyword will appear in the tree with the child under it. The text of the keywords in the table
will change color to indicate that the keyword is assigned to the currently selected files, and will display
in italics if assigned to only some (but not all) of the currently selected files.
Page 131 of 827

Quick Keyword sets are saved in the Presets folder under ACDSee in your AppData folder,
which you can find using the following path: C:\Users\<Your Name>\AppData\Local\ACD
Systems\Presets
Importing and Exporting Keywords

You can import keywords into ACDSee from other users. You can also share your keywords by
exporting them. Keywords are imported and exported as .txt files.
You can import Adobe® Lightroom® keywords.
To Export Keywords:
1. Choose Tools | Metadata | Export Keywords...
2. Browse to the location of your keywords file.
3. Enter a name for your keywords file.
4. Press Save.
To Import Keywords:
1. Choose Tools | Metadata | Import Keywords...
2. Browse to the location of your keywords file.
3. Select your file and press Open. The keywords within your file will be loaded into the ACDSee keywords
tree and listed alphabetically. Conflicting keywords will be merged.
Copying and Moving Files

You can use the Copy To Folder and Move To Folder commands to relocate files and folders on your
hard drive, and specify how to handle overwriting existing files. You can also select from a list of
previously accessed folders to save time looking through your directory structure.
When you use ACDSee Ultimate to relocate your files, by default any ACDSee Metadata
associated with those files is copied to the new location. However, if you do not want to copy
the associated files, clear the Include related files for non-RAW images checkbox.
When you do NOT use ACDSee Ultimate to move or copy your files, you break the link to any
database information you have added to those files. This is because ACDSee Ultimate cannot
track the files. You will lose important categorizing and other database information. You can fix
this by clicking Change Binding and rebinding the database. If you have embedded the
database information in the files themselves, you can also retrieve this information using
Tools | Database | Catalog Files.
Page 132 of 827

To Copy or Move Files:

In the File List pane, select one or more files, and then click Edit | Copy To Folder or Move To
Folder.
While viewing an image or media file in View mode, click Edit | Copy To Folder or Move To
Folder.
2. In the Copy To Folder or Move To Folder dialog box, do one of the following:
Select the Folders tab, and locate the folder on your hard drive where you want to place the
files.
Select the History tab, and select a folder from the list of recently-accessed folders.
Select Create Folder and enter the name of a new folder.
3. In the Overwriting duplicate files drop-down list, select one of the following options to specify how
ACDSee Ultimate should handle overwriting files:
Ask: prompts you for confirmation when overwriting a file.
Rename: prompts you to rename a file.
Replace: overwrites any file with the same file name and extension.
Skip: cancels the operation if there is a file with the same file name and extension.
4. Click OK.
Copying Images to the Clipboard

You can copy an image to the Clipboard and then paste it into another application. Using the Copy
Image command transfers only the image data to the Clipboard: no EXIF, IPTC or metadata
information is retained.
To Copy an Image:
Page 133 of 827

1. In Manage mode or View mode, select the image file you want to copy.
2. Click Edit | Copy Image.
3. Paste the image into your other application.
Pasting Files and Folders

You can cut or copy files to the Clipboard, and then paste them into another folder without losing
your ACDSee Metadata.
To Cut and Paste Files:

1. In Manage mode, in the File List or Folders pane, select one or more files or folders.
2. Click Edit | Copy or Cut.
3. In the Folders pane, browse to a new location.
4. Click Edit | Paste to place the files or folders into the new location.
Replacing or Overwriting Files

When copying or moving files from one location to another, a file name collision occurs if a file already
exists in the destination folder with the same file name and extension as a file you are relocating. In
ACDSee, you can view both of the files involved in the Confirm File Replace dialog box. If the files
involved are image files, ACDSee Ultimate displays thumbnail previews of both files, and provides
options to replace the existing file, rename, delete, or skip the file you are moving, or cancel the
operation entirely.
To Use the Confirm File Replace Dialog Box:

1. If you are moving a number of files and want to handle all potential file name collisions in the same
manner, check the Apply to all checkbox.
2. To help determine any differences between the two files, use the toolbar between the two preview
fields to shrink or enlarge the size of the previews.
To replace the destination file with the source file, click Replace.
To rename the new file before moving it into the destination folder, type a new name for the
file in the Rename to field, and then click Rename.
To skip this file, and leave both files intact, click Skip.
Page 134 of 827

To delete either the destination or source file, click Delete below the file you want to remove
from your hard drive.
To cancel the operation and not move or copy any more files, click Cancel.
In the Confirm File Replace dialog box, destination file refers to the file that exists in the target
folder, and source file refers to the file you are moving or copying.
Renaming a File or Folder

You can rename a file or folder on your hard drive in the Folders and File List panes.
To Rename a File or Folder:

1. In Manage mode, in the File List or Folders pane, select the item you want to rename.
2. Click Edit | Rename.
3. Without removing or changing the file name extension, such as “.jpg”, type a new name for the file.
4. Press Enter.
You can rename multiple files at the same time using the Batch Rename tool.
Storing Files in Private Folders

You can store confidential files in private, secure folders. When you add a file to a private folder, it will
disappear from its original location. Private folders are password-protected and you can only view the
files in them in ACDSee.
When you add files to a private folder, all information related to the file is deleted from the database.
This means that though the file can be restored, database information cannot. The only way to
preserve database information is to back up or export the database before you add files to a private
folder. There is also no way to restore images from a private folder if you forget the password, so make
sure it is memorable.
To Open the Private Folder Pane:

In Manage mode, click Panes | Private Folder.
To Create a Private Folder:

1. Close any open private folders.
2. Right-click the private folder icon in the Private Folder pane and select Create Private Folder.
Page 135 of 827

3. In the Enter Password text box, type a password for the private folder. Your password must be less than
40 characters long.
4. In the Re-enter Password text box, type the password again to verify it.
5. Click OK.
A new folder will not display in the Private Folder pane. Private folders are hidden and are only
identified by their password. When you have a private folder open you will see any subfolders
that exist within the private folder, but do not confuse these subfolders with the private folder
itself.
To Open a Private Folder:

1. Close any open private folders.
2. Click Panes | Private Folder.
3. Click the Open button in the Private Folder pane header.
4. In the Enter Password text box, type the password of the private folder that you want to open.
5. Click OK.
The contents of an open private folder remain visible until you close it. Remember to close
your private folder if you have to step away from your computer and do not want anyone to
see its contents.
To Close a Private Folder:

Click the Close button in the Private Folder pane header.
Click File | Exit to exit ACDSee. The private folder is closed automatically.
To Add Files to a Private Folder:

1. Open the private folder to which you want to add files.
2. Click and drag the files onto the private folder icon in the Private Folder pane. A warning
message displays.
3. Click Yes to move the files to the private folder.
When you add files and folders to a private folder they are removed from their original
location in the file system and added to the password-protected private folder. There is no
way to recover files and folders from a private folder if you have forgotten your password.
Ensure that you choose a password that you will be able to remember.
Page 136 of 827

To Add an Existing Folder and its Contents to a Private Folder:

1. Open the private folder to which you want to add files.
2. Click and drag the folder onto the private folder icon in the Private Folder pane.
3. Click Yes to move the folder and its contents to the private folder.
To Restore Folders and Files from a Private Folder:

1. Open the private folder containing the folders or files that you want to restore.
2. Select the folders or files and click File | Restore from Private Folder.
3. Click the browse button, navigate to the folder where you would like to move the folders or files, and
then click OK.
4. Click OK.
ACDSee Ultimate moves the folders or files from the private folder to the selected location.
These folders and files are now visible to anyone with access to the computer.
To Delete a Private Folder, or the Folders or Files in the Private Folder:

1. Open the private folder containing the folders or files that you want to delete.
To delete the private folder, right-click the private folder icon and select Delete.
To delete folders or files in a private folder, right-click them and select Delete.
A warning message displays.
3. Click Yes to delete the private folder and all of its contents, or the selected folders or files in the private
folder.
Use caution when deleting folders or files in private folders. If you delete folders or files in
private folders they are permanently destroyed. Restore the folders and files if you want to
move them from the private folder to a non-secure location on your computer.
Tagging Images or Files

You can tag images to identify certain characteristics. This could be your best photos from an event or
images you wish to review. You can use this same method for organizing and categorizing your
documents and other files.
The tagging checkbox is at the bottom right corner of the thumbnails. Check the checkbox to tag or
un-tag photos or documents. Photos remain tagged until you uncheck the checkbox.
Page 137 of 827

You can display all your tagged photos or files with one click by clicking Tagged under Special items in
the Catalog pane. Tagging, like categories and ratings, is a way to set aside, organize, and group your
photos or files without moving the files into different folders.
Tagging is intended as a temporary means of separating your images and files. Once tagged,
you can move or apply categories and ratings to the images and files, and then clear all of the
tags. Categories, ratings, color labels, and folders are more effective for organizing and
grouping your images and files over a long period of time.
To Tag a Selected Image or File:

Use the keyboard shortcut \ backslash key to apply the tag.
Check the checkbox in the bottom right corner of the thumbnail.
Right-click on one or more thumbnails and select Tag.
In the Properties pane, check the tag checkbox at the top left corner in the Metadata tab.
To Untag a Selected Image or File:

Use the keyboard shortcut \ backslash key to remove the tag.
In the Properties pane, uncheck the tag checkbox at the top left corner in the Metadata tab.
To Untag All Tagged Images or Files:

1. Click Tagged in the Catalog pane to display all tagged files in the File List pane.
2. Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl + A to select all.
3. Click the backslash key \ to remove the tag.
To Display Tagged Images or Files:

In Manage mode, click Panes | Catalog to display the Catalog pane, then click Tagged in the Special
Items section.
Tagged photos or files from all your folders display in the File List pane.
To Tag an Image or File in View Mode:

In View mode, check the checkbox in the bottom right corner of the status bar.
In View mode, click Panes | Properties to display the Properties pane, click the Metadata tab, then
check the Tagged checkbox in the top left corner.
To Tag an Image When You Are Comparing Images:
Page 138 of 827

1. In the Comparison List, check the checkbox in the bottom right corner of the image thumbnails.
2. Click OK. The Compare Images Viewer closes. You will see a checkmark in the checkbox of the images
that you tagged.
Removing IPTC Keywords from Auto Categories

You can remove unused IPTC keywords from the ACDSee Ultimate database. Once removed, the
IPTC keywords will no longer display under Keywords (IPTC) in the Photo Properties' Auto Categories
list of the Catalog Pane.
This process also applies for the Supplemental Categories field. This field is only visible if
selected from the Choose Metadata to Display dialog box found under Tools | Options |
Properties Pane by pressing the Manage Metadata Views button.
To Remove IPTC Keywords and Supplemental Categories:

1. In Manage mode, select any image which supports IPTC.
2. If the Properties pane is not already displayed, click Panes | Properties.
3. To ensure the image is writable, do the following:
Select the File tab and check to see if there is a checkmark in Read only.
If there is a checkmark, the image is not writable. Uncheck the Read only checkbox to make the
file writable.
4. In the IPTC section of the Metadata tab, click the keyword picker button beside the Keywords field.
5. In the IPTC Keywords Picker dialog box, click Edit List.
6. Select the keyword you want to remove from the Value list.
To select more than one keyword, press and hold the Ctrl key while selecting the
keywords.
7. Click Remove.
8. Click OK.
9. Click OK again to confirm.
Only keywords that are not in use can be removed from the list. To find photos associated
with a keyword, click the keyword listed under Photo Properties in the Auto Categories list of
the Catalog pane.
Page 139 of 827

Changing the Date and Time Properties of Images

You can use the Batch Adjust Time Stamp tool to change the date and time properties of one or more
images in Manage mode or in View mode.
To Change the Date and Time Properties of a File:

In Manage mode, select one or more images, and then click Tools | Batch | Adjust Time Stamp.
In View mode, click Tools | Modify | Adjust Image Time Stamp.
2. On the Date to Change tab, choose from the following:
Date to Change
EXIF date and time EXIF date/time The original
original date/time the image
was captured.
EXIF date/time The date/time the

digitized image was converted
to a digital image
(usually the same as
original).
EXIF date/time The date/time the

image was lasted
edited.
File last-modified date and time The date/time the image or file was
lasted edited. For example, image editing
or updates to metadata.
File creation date and time The original date/time the file was
created.
ACDSee Database date and time The date and time held in the ACDSee
Database.
3. On the Advanced Options tab, select the options for the Adjust Image Time Stamp tool described
below, then click Next.
Advanced Options
Page 140 of 827

Accept defaults and start conversion Accepts the default settings for the
new time stamp options. To start
changing the date and time of your
images, click Adjust Time Stamp.
Automatically close wizard when finished Closes the Adjust Image Time Stamp
wizard as soon as the process is
complete.
Save current settings as defaults Remembers the current settings

and applies them the next time you
change time stamps.
4. On the Choose new time stamp page, select one of the following options:
Use different date and time: replaces the selected date and time with another time stamp
property from the same file. Select the file property you want to use from the Select date and
time drop-down list.
Use specific date and time: changes the selected time stamp in each file to a specific date and
time. Type the new date and time for the time stamp in the Date and Time fields.
Shift to a new starting date and time: replaces the earliest time stamp with a date and time
you specify, and shifts all later time stamps ahead accordingly. Specify the time stamp for the
earliest file in the Date and Time fields.
Shift date and time by a specific number: shifts all the time stamps either forwards or
backwards by a specific number of hours (to adjust for time zones). Select either Shift forward
or Shift backward, and type a number into the Hours, Minutes, and Seconds spin boxes.
5. Click Adjust Time Stamp to begin adjusting your files.
6. When the wizard is finished, click Done to return to ACDSee.
Backing Up Your Files to Another Computer

The Sync wizard will guide you through the process of creating a synchronized copy of your files to
protect you from local hard drive failure. This is also known as a back up. You can synchronize your
local folders with a network drive, remote computer, or external hard drive. You can name the
synchronization, specify the actions you want to take each time you synchronize your files, schedule
the synchronization to run at specific intervals, and edit or remove the synchronization at a later time.
The Sync wizard does not backup your database when your files are copied to a new location.
To back up files with database information, use the ACD Database Backup wizard.
To Create a Synchronization:
Page 141 of 827

1. In Manage mode, click File | Sync | Create Sync.
2. On the Welcome page, click the Next button when you are ready to continue.
3. On the Synchronization Options page, do the following:
In the Source folder field, specify the folder containing files you would like to copy.
In the Backup destination field, specify a folder on a network drive, remote computer, or
external hard drive in which to place the backup files.
In the Options area, specify how Sync should handle errors and logs.
In the Confirmations area, specify how Sync should handle file duplication conflicts.
Click Next when you are ready to continue.
4. On the Synchronization Schedule page, do the following:
In the Name text box, type a name for your synchronization.
In the Schedule area, specify whether you would like to run the synchronization immediately,
or schedule the synchronization.
Click Finish when you are ready to complete the wizard.
Schedule: an account with no password cannot set up a schedule. You must set a password
for your account for schedules to work. A blank password will not work; you must have a real
password with more than one character.
Updating or Deleting a Synchronization

You can adjust the settings of a synchronization, schedule it to run at regular intervals, or delete the
synchronization from ACDSee.
To Update or Delete a Saved Synchronization:

1. In Manage mode, click File | Sync | Edit Sync.
2. In the Saved Synchronizations dialog box, select a synchronization from the list.
To schedule the synchronization, click Schedule. Specify how often to run your synchronization,
and then click OK.
To adjust the settings, click Edit. In the Edit Synchronizations dialog box, update the folder
containing files you would like to copy, and a folder on a network drive, remote computer, or
external hard drive in which to place those files. In the Options area, update how Sync should
handle errors and logs. In the Confirmations area, update how Sync should handle file
duplication conflicts. Click OK when you are finished.
Page 142 of 827

To rename the synchronization, click Rename. Type a new name for the synchronization and
click OK.
To delete the synchronization, click Delete.
4. Click Close.
Running a Saved Synchronization

After you create a synchronization, you can run it at any time, even if it is scheduled to run at regular
intervals.
To Run a Saved Synchronization:

In Manage mode, click File | Sync, and then select the name of the synchronization you want to
run.
Searching with ACDSee Ultimate

ACDSee Ultimate includes a number of ways to search your computer for files and folders. You can use
the Search pane to search by file name, keywords, or image properties. You can create advanced
searches to locate files that fall within a date or rating range and then save and name the search to use
later. You can also use the Duplicate Finder to locate and manage identical files.
For simpler searches, you can use the Quick Search bar to quickly locate files and folders, or search the
database for specific names and keywords. You can also customize the Quick Search bar to only search
for specific items or certain parts of the database.
Also, you can use the Catalog pane to quickly locate and list all images on your hard drive, or to locate
any files in a folder that have not been categorized. If you are working with larger image collections,
you can use Selective Browsing to specify broad or narrow criteria for the images you want to display
in the File List pane.
Using the Quick Search Bar

You can use the Quick Search bar in Manage mode to quickly locate files or folders. You can use the
Quick Search options or basic operators to refine or expand your search, and view the results in the
File List pane.
The Quick Search feature always searches the following IPTC fields: Title, Headline, Description, People,
Keywords, Creator, City, Location, State/Province, Country, and Instructions. The Quick Search also
searches Color labels and the ACDSee Metadata fields: Caption, Author, Notes, and Keywords.
You can choose whether the Quick Search searches just the files currently in the file list, or the entire
database, by clicking this icon .
Page 143 of 827

When ACDSee Ultimate searches file names, it only considers the first term in the file name.
For example, a file called Cat_Dog would be found by searching for Cat, but not for Dog.
Search terms are not case-sensitive.
To Run a Quick Search:

In the Quick Search bar, type the term or part of a term you want to search for.
Click the drop-down list beside the Quick Search field and select a previously entered search term.
You can use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl + F to put the focus in the Quick Search bar and
immediately begin typing.
Quick Search Operators

Quick Search Operators are keys that help refine your search. You can use the following operators to
further refine or expand your searches in the Quick Search bar. A search term cannot begin with an
operator; it must start with a word.
The Quick Search bar treats spaces between words as + operators.
Page 144 of 827

Operator Result Examples
- Searches for all items containing the first search term, that don't Cat -Dog returns all
also include the second term. items that contain Cat,
except those that also
contain Dog. Be sure
to insert a space
before the minus sign.
If you do not insert a
space, ACDSee
Ultimate will assume
you are searching for
a hyphenated word.
+ Searches for all items containing both search terms. Items that Cat+Dog or Cat Dog
only contain one of the terms are excluded. returns items
containing both Cat
and Dog.
Cat+Dog+-Kittens
returns items that
include both Cat and
Dog, but not those
that include Cat and
Dog and Kittens.
| Searches for all items containing either of the search elements. Cat|Dog includes all
items with either Cat
or Dog in the search.
Cat+Dog|Kittens
includes items that
contain both Cat and
Dog, and those that
contain Kittens.
Using the Search Pane

You can use the Search pane to search for your files and folders. You can do basic searching by file
name or keyword phrase, and create advanced searches to narrow your results by folders, categories,
and image properties. You can also search for patterns in file names and find duplicate files.
You can also save a search and give it a name. Saved Searches are listed on the Search pane and the
Catalog pane. On the Search pane, you can select Saved Searches from the drop-down list to run
again. On the Catalog pane, Saved Searches are listed below Auto Categories where you can run them
again by clicking once on the Saved Search name.
Page 145 of 827

The Search pane will not return results for folders that are not cataloged in the ACDSee
Ultimate database. Cataloging happens automatically when you browse to a folder. You can
also click Tools | Database | Catalog Files.
To Open the Search Pane:

In Manage mode, click Panes | Search.
Search Pane Areas

The Search pane contains several areas to help you manage your searches. When you create a search,
remember that the search tool will only return files that match all of the criteria that you specify.
Saved Searches
In the Saved Searches area, you can save a complex search to use later, select a search to run again, or
delete a saved search.
Saved Searches If you have saved a search, it is listed in this drop-down list for you to select
and run again. When you click Start at the bottom of the pane, the search
results are listed in the File List pane.
Saved Searches are also listed on the Catalog pane, from where you can run
them with a single click on the Saved Search name.
Save a search Click the Save icon, and then Save or Save As to save or overwrite a saved
search. When the Saved Search dialog opens, type in a name for the search. If
you use a descriptive name, it makes it easier to remember the criteria in
your saved search.
Delete a search Select a search from the drop-down list and then click the Delete icon. Click
Yes to confirm the deletion, when the prompt opens.
Files and Text

In the Files and Text area, you can identify what you are searching for, and where you want to search
for it.
Page 146 of 827

Search for files or folders Type a portion of the file or folder name for which you want to search, or
named select a previous search term from the drop-down list. You can also use
wildcards to search for file name patterns. To exclude all non-image files,
click the right-arrow button beside the field and select Images only.
With the text Type the text you want to search for within the ACDSee Ultimate database.
This can include portions of a caption or keyword, or even the name of a
folder or category that might contain the files you want to find. When you
search by both file name and a keyword or phrase, an item is included in the
search result only when it includes both criteria.
To specify what parts of the database you want to search, and indicate how to
treat the text you type in the field, click the arrow next to the field and select
any of the following options:
l Find all words: only returns files that match all of the words you enter.
l Find whole words only: only returns files that contain the entire
word, exactly as you type it.
l Search in Caption: searches the Caption field of files in the database.
l Search in Keywords: searches the Keyword field of files in the data-
base.
l Search in Notes: searches the Notes field of files in the database.
l Search in Categories: searches the Category assignments of files in
the database.
l Search in Folders: searches in the name of folders in the database.
l Search in Labels: searches the labeled images by color.
l Search in People: searches people detected in images and named
using Face Detection in View mode. You can search by assigned names,
suggested names, or both. Named and unnamed faces are available for
edit or display in People mode.
Search in Select one of the following options:

l Entire database: performs a search on the entire ACDSee Ultimate
database. Note that any folders on your computer that have not been
cataloged are not included in the search results.
l Specific folders and categories: performs the search only within the
categories and folders you specify. Selecting this option opens the Cat-
egories and Folders area, where you can select the location and cat-
egories in which you want to search.
Sync to file list settings Imports the current Manage mode settings, including Selective Browsing
settings, into the Search pane. Note that this may also remove criteria from
the Search pane.
Properties Area
In the Properties area, you can identify file properties that you want to search for, and specify ranges
of values to include or exclude from your search.
To Use the Properties Area:
Page 147 of 827

1. Below the Search file properties field, click Add.
2. In the Add Search Criteria dialog box, select one or more properties on which to base your search.
3. Click OK.
4. In the Properties area, click the hyperlinks to define conditional statements for each property.
5. Click Start to perform the search.
Searching with File Name Patterns

You can type a text pattern into the Search pane's Search for files and folders named field to search
for file names. You can search for simple patterns such as portions of file names, or more advanced
patterns that include wildcards.
File Name Pattern Wildcards

Wildcard Result Example
? Matches any single character in the file name. ca?.jpg results in cat.jpg, cap.jpg,
and car.jpg, but not cats.jpg
* Matches zero or more characters in the file name. cat* results in cat.jpg, cats.jpg, and
cathy.jpg
[…] Matches any of the enclosed characters. ca[tr] results in cat.jpg or car.jpg,
but not cap.jpg
[!…] Matches any character not enclosed. cat[!0] results in cata.jpg and
catb.jpg, but not cat0.jpg
[…-…] Matches any character in the specified range. cat[a-f0-9] results in cata.jpg,
catb.jpg, catf.jpg and cat0.jpg,
cat1.jpg, …, cat9.jpg
\ Blocks the use of other wildcard characters that are Because square brackets are
also characters permitted in a file name, such as wildcards, if you wanted to search
square brackets: [ ]. The * and ? characters are not for a file name that contains a
permitted in file names so this function does not bracket, you must precede the
work with them. bracket with a backslash:
ACD\[123\] results in ACD[123].gif
Patterns are not case-sensitive. To use multiple patterns, separate the names with spaces or
semicolons. To match a pattern containing a space or semicolon, enclose the pattern in
double quotation marks. If you do not include the * wildcard in your pattern, the pattern is
matched as a sub-string. For example, cat would match cat, cathy and bobcat, and is
equivalent to the pattern *cat*.
Page 148 of 827

Using Selective Browsing

You can use selective browsing to browse for files that are located in a specific folder, assigned a
specific date, and/or assigned to a specific Catalog classification. By adjusting the selective browsing
criteria, you can quickly include or exclude files from the File List pane, and view only those files you
want to browse.
To get the most out of selective browsing, it is recommended that you catalog and organize your files
in the ACDSee Ultimate database. The more information you enter for your files, the more helpful you
will find the selective browsing feature.
To Use Selective Browsing:

Open the Selective Browsing panel by clicking View | Selective Browsing. The panel appears on the
left side of the File List pane.
Setting Selective Browsing Criteria

The Selective Browsing panel is divided into three areas: Folders, Catalog, and Calendar, each of which
corresponds to the Manage mode pane of the same name. When the Selective Browsing panel is
open, the Contents bar in the File List pane is replaced by the Selective Browsing bar, which lists all of
the current browsing criteria.
When you add a folder, date range, or organize method to the Selective Browsing panel, ACDSee
Ultimate excludes any files that do not match that criteria. You can add or remove criteria to narrow or
broaden your results.
To Add Selective Browsing Criteria:

With the Selective Browsing panel open, do any of the following:
In the Folders pane, select one or more folders.
In the Catalog pane, select one or more categories, and/or a rating.
In the Calendar pane, select one or more date ranges.
As each criteria is added to the Selective Browsing panel, ACDSee Ultimate searches its database for
files in that folder, that match the date range, and are assigned to the classification, and displays them
in the File List pane. You can then select those files and use the ACDSee Ultimate features to edit,
share, move, and view them however you want.
You can also adjust or refine your criteria in the Selective Browsing panel:
To remove a selected criteria from the Selective Browsing panel, right-click any of the criteria, and then
select Remove From Scope.
Page 149 of 827

To exclude all of a certain type of criteria, click the bar above the list, and toggle the option to include
that type in the scope. For example, to exclude the listed folders from the scope, click the Folders bar,
and then click Include Folders in Scope. The folders you selected will still be displayed in the Selective
Browsing panel, but will not factor in the results.
To remove all criteria of a certain type, click the bar above the list, and select Clear All.
The default behavior for categories in the Selective Browsing panel is to display files that match any of
the categories listed. You can refine your results by choosing to display only those files that are
assigned to all of the specified categories. To toggle between behaviors, right-click the bar above the
categories you selected, and select Match Any or Match All.
Tips for Selective Browsing

When you add a criteria to the Selective Browsing panel, you are indicating that the files you want to
browse must have that attribute. For example, if you select a folder in the Folders pane, then ACDSee
Ultimate displays only files in that folder. If you select a rating in the Catalog pane, ACDSee Ultimate
displays only files assigned to that rating.
You can combine criteria to refine your selective browsing even further. For example, if you select a
category and a date range, then ACDSee Ultimate displays only those files that belong to both the
category and date range you selected. ACDSee Ultimate does not display items that fall within the date
range unless they are also assigned to the correct category, and does not display files assigned to that
category unless they also match the date range.
Hiding the Selective Browsing Panel

You can use the Auto Hide feature to automatically hide the Selective Browsing panel and increase
space for the File List pane. When the panel is set to auto-hide, it rolls away when you click outside it,
leaving only an edge displayed. You can access the panel again by moving the cursor over the edge.
Searching with Auto Categories

Auto categories can help you search for files. This is particularly useful if you tend to take a lot of
photos, or if you share your pictures with others.
You will find auto categories in the Catalog pane below Labels. Double-click or click the plus sign (+) to
expand auto category groupings. Double-click or click the minus sign (-) to collapse the auto category
groupings.
Some auto category information is added to images by your camera. This could include camera make
and model, white balance settings, focal length, and aperture. You can supplement that with
information you think is useful such as the location, keywords or copyright. To do this, you can enter
information in the Properties pane.
Page 150 of 827

When you click on an auto category, ACDSee Ultimate searches for images belonging to that category.
For example, if you use more than one camera, you can use auto categories to search for pictures
taken using certain camera models. All images captured with that camera model will display.
Below are some tips for searching with auto categories.
Identifying Commonly Used Search Categories

If you use certain auto categories in the Photo Properties grouping frequently, you can save time by
adding them to the Commonly Used grouping. Some Photo Properties groupings are available in the
Commonly Used grouping by default. You can add and remove as many auto categories as you want
to the Commonly Used grouping.
To Add an Auto Category Grouping to the Commonly Used Grouping:

1. Expand the Photo Properties grouping.
2. Right-click the auto categories grouping that you want to add to the Commonly Used grouping, and
select Add to Commonly Used. The grouping is added to the Commonly Used grouping.
It remains visible in the Photo Properties grouping as well.
To Remove an Auto Category Grouping from the Commonly Used Grouping:

1. Expand the Commonly Used grouping.
2. Right-click the auto categories grouping that you want to remove from the Commonly Used grouping,
and select Remove from Commonly Used.
The grouping is removed from the Commonly Used grouping.
Refining Your Auto Categories Search

You can refine your auto categories search by selecting more than one auto category. For example,
you can find images with a certain aperture and shutter speed. If you click the Easy-Select indicator
beside the f/16 aperture auto category and the 1/30 s shutter speed auto category, ACDSee Ultimate
will search for images that belong to both of those auto categories.
When you select more than one auto category you can further control the search by selecting Match
All or Match Any from the Match Any/All drop-down list at the top of the Catalog pane. If you select
Match Any, ACDSee Ultimate will display any images associated with the selected auto categories. If
you select Match All, ACDSee Ultimate will display only those images that are associated with all of the
selected auto categories.
You can also refine your auto categories search by selecting a category or rating. For example, imagine
that you clicked on the Photographer auto category and found over 1000 images. However, you only
want to see the best images by that photographer. Click the Easy-Select indicator beside 1 in the
Ratings area of the Catalog pane. Only the images by that photographer with a rating of 1 will display.
Page 151 of 827

You can also use the Selective Browsing pane to refine your auto categories search. For example,
imagine that you clicked on the Camera Model auto category and ACDSee Ultimate displayed over
1000 images. However, you only want to see the images that you took on a specific date. Display the
Selective Browsing pane by clicking View | Selective Browsing, then select the Calendar pane and
select the appropriate date. Only the images taken with that camera model on that day will be
displayed.
Finding Duplicate Files

You can use the Duplicate Finder to find duplicate files across a variety of folders on your hard drive.
Once duplicates are found, you can perform rename and delete functions to better manage your file
collection.
Note that identical images saved as different formats (i.e. different extensions, such as JPEG,
BMP, GIF), are not recognized as duplicates. If you have a JPEG and save a copy of it, the
image is recompressed. Therefore the original JPEG and the copy are a different file internally
and they are not recognized as duplicates.
To Find Duplicate Files:

1. In Manage mode, select a folder or images to search for duplicates. (Optional)
2. Click Tools | Find Duplicates...
3. In the Duplicate Finder dialog box, do one of the following:
To find duplicates within the selected folder and any added files or folders, select Find
duplicates within this single list of files.
To find duplicates by comparing the contents of two separate lists, select Find duplicates within
these two lists of files. (This will not search for duplicates within one of the two lists. It will only
search the two lists against one another.)
4. Add files to your list or lists with the Add Files... and Add Folder... buttons. Remove files by selecting
them in the list and pressing the Remove button. Switch out one file or folder for another by selecting it
in the list and pressing the Modify button. To include the contents of any subfolders you selected, check
the Include subfolders checkbox.
5. Below the File Lists, specify whether you want to find exact duplicates or just files with the same name.
Select Find images only if you only want to search for image files.
6. Press Search.
7. If no duplicates are found, click OK and refine your search or click Cancel to exit the Duplicate Finder.
8. If duplicates are found, select sets in the list for further actions.
Page 152 of 827

Deleting and Renaming Files

Once duplicates have been found, files can be renamed or deleted. If you are working with image files,
a preview is available.
If multiple sets of duplicates have been found, you may want to sort them for easier viewing.
To Sort Files:
1. Right-click in the upper-left list.
Sort by Filename
Sort by Path
Sort by File Size
Sort by File Type
Sort by Number of Duplicates
To Delete Duplicates:
1. Select the desired file set in the upper-left list.
2. In the bottom field, do one of the following:
Check the checkbox next to the file name. The file name changes to Delete File.
Right-click on the file name and select Delete from the context menu. The file name changes to
Delete File.
3. If you searched using two file lists, you can choose Delete from File List 1/File List 2. This will save you
time by selecting all files from File List 1 or File List 2, as specified.
4. Click Next to review your changes, and then click Finish.
To Rename a File:
1. Select the desired file set in the upper-left list.
2. In the bottom field, right-click on the file name and select Rename from the context menu.
3. Type a new name for the file.
4. Click Next to review your changes, and then click Finish.
Page 153 of 827

Finding Images Quickly

You can click on the name of a saved search to quickly re-run the search. You can select Special Items
in the Catalog pane to locate all of the images in your database, or list all of the images that you have
not yet assigned to a category.
To Re-Run a Saved Search:

In Manage mode, in the Catalog pane, click the name of a saved search.
The results of the search display in the File List pane.
To Find All of Your Images at Once:

1. In Manage mode, click Panes | Catalog to open the Catalog pane.
2. In the Catalog pane, under Special Items, click Image Well.
To Locate Uncategorized Images:

2. In the Catalog pane, under Special Items, click Uncategorized. The Image Well and Uncategorized
features only display images that have been cataloged in the database; they do not search your hard
drive for specific file types.
To Locate Images That Haven't Been Keyworded:

2. In the Catalog pane, under Special Items, click No Keywords.
Sharing Files with ACDSee Ultimate

ACDSee Ultimate makes it easy to share your images and other files with friends and family. You can
email files directly from ACDSee, upload images to a website, create your own webpages with the
HTML Album plug-in, or print a contact sheet. You can also create slideshows and screensavers that
you can give to anyone with a computer—they do not need ACDSee Ultimate to view them.
Taking a Screen Capture

You can use the ACDSee Ultimate Screen Capture utility to create images from different areas of your
screen. You can select what areas to capture, how you want to perform the capture, and where to
store the captured image.
To Take a Screen Capture:
Page 154 of 827

1. In Manage mode or View mode, click Tools | Screen Capture...
2. In the Source area of the Screen Capture dialog box, identify the part of the screen you want to capture.
See the table below for a description of the Source options.
3. If you want to include your cursor in the output image, check the Include mouse cursor checkbox.
4. In the Destination area, identify where you want to place the output image.
5. In the Initiate capture area, identify how you want to take the screen capture.
6. Click Start to launch the screen capture tool.
An icon appears in the Taskbar Notification area.

7. Prepare your screen to show the area you want to capture, and then follow the steps that appear in the
bubble above the Screen Capture icon.
8. To exit the Screen Capture utility without taking a screen capture, right-click the Screen Capture icon,
and then select Exit Screen Capture.
Screen Capture Options
Page 155 of 827

Desktop
Current monitor Captures an image of the entire area displayed on the

screen.
Window
Entire window Captures an image of the entire active window.
Content only Captures an image of the window contents (does not

include the frame or title bar).
Region
Fixed size Captures an image of a fixed area on the screen.

Click the drop-down button and select a dimension setting
or select Custom, and enter the dimension in pixels.
Selected region Captures a selected area of the screen. Click and drag your
cursor to surround the area you want to capture.
Object
Child window Captures an image of sections of the window. For example,

a toolbar or button.
Menu under cursor Captures selected menu commands.
Include mouse cursor
Include mouse cursor Includes the cursor in the screen capture.
Destination options
Clipboard Places a copy of the image on the Clipboard. From the

Clipboard you can paste the image in a new location.
File Displays the Save dialog box to save the file; you can
specify location, format, and file name.
Editor Opens the captured image in the default editor.
Initiate Capture options
Hot key Designates a keystroke combination to trigger the screen

capture.
To set the Hot Key, press a key or combination of keys
(e.g., Ctrl + S) on the keyboard; do not type in the box.
Page 156 of 827

Timer Takes a screen capture after a designated period. Choose

enough time to set up your desktop or window for the
screen capture. The maximum setting is 60 seconds.
Emailing Images
You can use the Send Email wizard to send images directly from ACDSee Ultimate without opening an
external email application. To use the Send Email wizard, you will need an active email account, and
have a default email application set up on your computer, or have access to an SMTP server.
To Email Your Images:

1. In the File List pane, select the images you want to email, and then click File | Send | Email Images.
If you want to add other images, click Add. When you have finished adding images, click OK.
If you want to delete images, select an image and click Remove. The image is removed from the
wizard, but not deleted from ACDSee.
If you want to set email and image options, such as the maximum size for emails or the
conversion of images to JPEG, click Options. When you have finished selecting options, click
Apply.
If you want to change the email account settings, to use either your default email client or an
SMTP server, click Change. When you have finished changing your email account settings, click
OK.
2. In the Send Email wizard, click Next.
If you selected Send using your default email client, the wizard adds your images and email
information to a new email message. You can edit the message and then send it as you normally
would.
If you selected Send through an SMTP server, in the wizard, enter the email address you want
to send the email to, a subject for the email, and a message. Click Next.
3. When the images have been sent, click Finish to close the wizard.
Some Internet-based email applications such as Hotmail and Yahoo (free accounts) do not
support SMTP and cannot be used with the Send Email wizard. For others, such as Gmail,
Yahoo (upgraded accounts), and AOL, you must configure the account for POP/SMTP. To
learn how to configure these types of email accounts, visit their specific websites and search
for SMTP.
See also:
Page 157 of 827

Share/Email Using ACDSee 365

Once you have activated your account with ACDSee 365, you can share your images through
365.acdsee.com.
To Email Your Images:

1. In the File List pane, select the images you want to share, and then click File | Send | Share/Email using
ACDSee 365.
2. In the Share/Email with ACDSee 365 dialog box, enter a Name for your album of photos and select a
Location from your existing online folders.
3. Enter one or more email addresses to send the images to.
You can click the Share with button to pull names from your address book.
4. Select an upload size from the drop-down list.
5. Click Upload.
6. A new window opens providing the option to enter a message, enable download of full sized JPG, and
create an access password.
7. Click OK.
Creating a Desktop Screensaver

You can create a desktop screensaver using your own images. You can set the screensaver options to
adjust how long each image is displayed, set the background color, apply transition effects, and add
header or footer text.
To Create a Screensaver:
1. In Manage mode, in the File List pane, select a group of images, and then click Tools | Configure
Screensaver.
2. In the ACDSee Screensaver dialog box, click Add to browse for more images to add to your screensaver,
or select images you do not want to include and click Remove.
3. Click Configure, specify the options as described below, and then click OK.
4. To automatically use the screensaver on your desktop, check the Set as default screensaver checkbox.
5. When you are satisfied with your choices, click OK.
To Activate the Screensaver on Your Computer:

Select the Screensaver tab in your Windows Display Properties dialog box, and then select ACDSee
Screensaver from the drop-down list.
Page 158 of 827

ACDSee Screensaver Options
Page 159 of 827

Basic
Select transitions Displays a list of transitions for you to select and plays
each transition, variation, or effect in the Preview as
you select it.
Select all: selects all the transitions and displays

them randomly.
Clear all: clears any selected transitions.
These transitions do not work with the 2-

up, 4-up and Collage variations.
Variations Click the drop-down list to select from the following:
None: uses no variations
Pan and Zoom: zooms in and pans across each

slide during the time it is displayed.
2-up: displays two images at a time.
4-up: displays four images at a time.
Collage: displays images as a collage where

images overlap each other.
Effects Click the drop-down list to select from the following:
None: uses no effects.
Black & white: displays all images in grayscale.
Sepia: displays all images in sepia.
Vivid: increases the saturation of the images to

make colors brighter.
Soft: blurs images slightly for a softening effect.
Background color Specifies the background color. Click the color picker
to select or change the color. Click Other to set a
custom color in the Color dialog box.
Slide duration (sec) Specifies how long you want the screensaver to display
each image.
Advanced
Page 160 of 827

General settings Select or clear the following options:
Stretch images to fit screen: enlarges small

images to fill the entire screen.
Play embedded audio: plays any audio clips

embedded in the images.
Slide order Select one of the following options to specify the order
to display your images:
Forward
Shuffle
Text
Display header text Displays a text caption at the top of each image. Set the
options to specify the text you want to display.
Display footer text Displays a text caption at the bottom of each image. Set
the options to specify the text you want to display.
Screensaver Text Options

Alignment Specifies the alignment of the text captions.
Background color Specifies a background color for the caption text.
Text Specifies the text to display as a caption.
Font Opens the Font dialog box where you can select or change the font options for your
text.
Insert Metadata Inserts file-specific information called metadata into the caption.
Tag
Click to open the Choose Properties dialog box and select the metadata you want to
insert.
Viewing and Configuring a Slideshow

You can view a slideshow of images and/or videos from Manage mode or from View mode. You can
also configure your slideshow to start automatically whenever you run it, and set the slideshow
options to adjust how long each image is displayed, set the background color, apply transition effects,
and add header or footer text.
Page 161 of 827

To Start a Slideshow in Manage Mode:

In the File List pane, select a group of images.
In the Folders pane, select a folder.
Use the Easy-Select bar to select multiple folders that contain images.
2. Click Tools | Slideshow. (Ctrl + S)
To Start a Slideshow in View Mode:

Click Tools | Slideshow.
To Configure a Slideshow:
In the File List pane, select a group of images.
In the Folders pane, select a folder or use the Easy-Select bar to select multiple folders that
contain images.
2. Click Tools | Configure Slideshow.
3. In the Slideshow Properties dialog box, select or change the slideshow options as described below.
4. To save your settings as the default slideshow behavior, check the Save current settings as default
checkbox.
5. Click OK.
Slideshow Options
Page 162 of 827

File Selection
Slideshow contents Specifies which of the following media to include in the

slideshow:
All media in current folder: displays all the files

(images or video) in the folder you have selected.
All media in current folder and subfolders: displays

all the files in the currently selected folder and its
subfolders.
Selected media: displays only the files that you

selected before opening the Slideshow Properties
dialog box.
Always use these contents for this Retains the current Slideshow contents setting and starts
selection type and start slideshow automatically the next time you launch the slideshow.
automatically
Basic
Select transitions Displays a list of transitions for you to select and plays each
transition, variation, or effect in the Preview as you select
it.
Select all: selects all the transitions and displays

them randomly.
Clear all: clears any selected transitions.
These transitions do not work with the 2-up, 4-

up and Collage variations.
Variations Click the drop-down list to select from the following:
None: uses no variations.
Pan and Zoom: zooms in and pans across each slide

during the time it is displayed.
2-up: displays two images at a time.
4-up: displays four images at a time.
Collage: displays images as a collage where images

overlap each other.
Effects Click the drop-down list to select from the following:
Page 163 of 827

None: uses no effects.
Black & White: displays all images in grayscale.
Sepia: displays all images in sepia.
Vivid: increases the saturation of the images to

make colors brighter.
Soft: blurs images slightly for a softening effect.
Background color Specifies the background color. Click the color picker to
select or change the color. Click Other to set a custom
color in the Color dialog.
Slide duration (sec) Specifies how long you want the slideshow to display each
image.
Advanced
General settings Select or clear any of the following options:
Stretch images to fit screen: enlarges small images

to fill the entire screen.
Play embedded audio: plays any audio clips

embedded in the images.
Stretch video to fit screen: enlarges video files to

fill the entire screen.
Autohide control bar: hides the slideshow controls

whenever the cursor stops moving for more than a
few seconds.
Loop: repeats the slideshow after displaying the last

image.
Slide order Select one of the following options to specify the order to
display your images:
Forward
Shuffle
Music directory Displays music from the previously-selected folders, or you

can click Browse to find a new folder.
Text
Display header text Displays a text caption at the top of each image. Set the
Page 164 of 827

Display footer text Displays a text caption at the bottom of each image. Set the
Save current settings as default
Save current settings as default Retains the current settings on all of the tabbed pages and
applies them the next time you view a slideshow.
Slideshow Text Options

Alignment Specifies the alignment of the text captions.
Background color Specifies a background color for the caption text.
Text Specifies the text to display as a caption.
Font Opens the Font dialog box where you can select or change
the font options for your text.
Insert Metadata Tag Inserts file-specific information called metadata into the
caption.
Click to open the Choose Properties dialog box and select
the metadata you want to insert.
Sharing Slideshows and Screensavers

You can view a slideshow of your images from Manage or View mode at anytime by clicking Tools
| Slideshow (keyboard shortcut Ctrl + S in Manage mode). With ACDSee, you can also create
slideshows and screensavers of your favorite photos, and send them to friends and family, or display
them on your website. You can even save your slideshow or screensaver project to edit at a later time.
To Create a Slideshow:
1. In Manage mode, click Tools | Create | Slideshow File.
2. On the Welcome page, to create a new slideshow, select the Create a new slideshow radio button. To
specify what type of slideshow you want to create, select one of the following options:
Standalone slideshow: creates a single executable file (.exe) containing all of your images and
everything needed to view them. You can share this type of file with anyone who has a
computer, even if they do not own ACDSee.
Windows screensaver: creates a standard Windows screensaver file (.scr) that can be stored
and used on any Windows system.
Page 165 of 827

Adobe Flash Player® slideshow: creates a compact Adobe Flash file (.swf) that you can display
on a website.
3. To edit an existing slideshow or screensaver project, select the Load an existing slideshow project radio
button, and then click Browse to locate your project (.asw file).
4. Click Next to continue.
5. On the Choose your images page, you can view the images included in your slideshow, in the default
order they will be displayed. Click Add or Remove to change the images, and use the arrow buttons to
reorder them. Click Next when you are ready to continue.
6. On the Set file specific options page, click the underlined words beside each thumbnail to set the
individual options for each image. These include transitions between photos, the duration of the
transition and slide, text captions, and audio files to play when the image is displayed. Note that the
options available depend on your choice of output file format, and not all formats support all options.
Click Next when you are ready to continue.
7. On the Set slideshow options page, set the timing for each slide to automatic or manual, the order to
display slides, and whether or not to hide the controls. You can also add audio files to play in the
background, and adjust the quality, or speed, of the transitions. Click Next when you are ready to
continue.
8. On the following pages, set the options for image size, location of your slideshow file and the project
file.
9. Finally, click Next, and wait a few moments while ACDSee Ultimate generates your slideshow. When
complete, you can launch your slideshow and exit the wizard.
If you assign an audio file to an individual image, as well as to the whole slideshow on the Set
slideshow options page, then both audio files will play simultaneously when that slide
displays.
Creating a Desktop Slideshow

You can use ACDSee Showroom to create a slideshow of your photos and display that slideshow in a
small window on your computer desktop. You can run up to 16 different slideshows on your computer
at once.
You can configure the ACDSee Showroom window to always stay on top of other application windows.
You can also configure it to open when you start your computer. You do not have to open ACDSee
Ultimate to use ACDSee Showroom.
To Create a Desktop Slideshow with ACDSee Showroom:
Page 166 of 827

1. In Manage mode, navigate to a folder containing images that you want to add to the desktop slideshow.
Click Tools | Create | ACDSee Showroom.
Click Start | Programs | ACD Systems | ACDSee Showroom.
The slideshow starts immediately and the ACDSee Showroom icon appears in the taskbar.
Using the ACDSee Showroom Slideshow Controls

There are a number of slideshow controls in the ACDSee Showroom window.
Click the Back or Forward buttons to display the previous or next photos in the slideshow.
Click the Pause button to pause the slideshow while a particular photo is displayed.
If you cannot see these slideshow controls in the ACDSee Showroom window, click anywhere
in the window. The controls disappear while the slideshow is playing so you can fully enjoy
your photos.
To Create More Than One ACDSee Showroom:

With ACDSee Showroom open, do one of the following:
Right-click in the ACDSee Showroom window and select New Showroom.
Click the ACDSee Showroom icon in the taskbar and select New Showroom.
To Close ACDSee Showroom:

Click Close in the ACDSee Showroom window.
Click the ACDSee Showroom icon in the taskbar and select Exit ACDSee Showroom.
If you have configured ACDSee Showroom to open when you start your computer, it will
automatically open the next time you start your computer.
Creating a PDF
You can use ACDSee Ultimate to combine your images into PDF (portable document format) files. The
Create PDF wizard will guide you through the process of creating one or more PDF files from your
images, or adding images to a PDF slideshow.
Page 167 of 827

To Create a PDF:
1. In Manage mode, in the File List pane, select the images you want to share.
2. Click Tools | Create | PDF.
3. On the Welcome page of the Create PDF wizard, select one of the following options, and then click
Next:
Create a PDF slideshow: combines all of your images into a single PDF file that you can view as a
slideshow.
Create one PDF file containing all images: combines all of the selected images into a single PDF
file with multiple pages.
Create one PDF file for each image: converts each image into a separate PDF file.
4. On the Choose images page, you can change the selected images, and use the arrow buttons to reorder
them. Click Next to continue.
If you selected to create a PDF slideshow, set or change the transition options by clicking the
hyperlink next to each image. Click Next to set the order, color, and file name options for your
slideshow. Click Next when you are ready to continue.
If you selected to create one or more PDF files, specify a file name and location, and then click
Next.
6. Click Finish to close the wizard and return to ACDSee.
Creating a PowerPoint Presentation

You can create a PowerPoint presentation quickly from inside ACDSee Ultimate using the Create PPT
wizard. The wizard walks you through the process of creating or editing a presentation using your
photos. You can set slide duration, the location of the file, number of images per slide and whether or
not to use a design template as a background. You can also add captions, a title, or notes to each
slide.
This feature only works if you have Microsoft PowerPoint® installed on your computer. The
feature does not support RAW files, so you will need to convert RAW files to another format.
Your version of Microsoft PowerPoint® must match your ACDSee architecture. For example, if
you have a 64-bit version of ACDSee, you must have a 64-bit version of PowerPoint/Office.
To Create a PowerPoint Presentation:

2. Click Tools | Create | PPT.
Page 168 of 827

3. On the Choose images page of the Create PPT wizard, click Add if you want to add more images.
4. Click Next.
5. On the Presentation Options page, do one or all of the following:
In the Presentation Options area, if this is a new presentation, set the duration that you want
each slide to display.
If you are editing a presentation, select Existing presentation to activate the Path field, and
browse to your presentation. Select whether you want to Insert slides at the beginning or end
of the presentation.
Select the Number of images per slide from the drop-down list. (If you select more than one,
the Title and Notes options on the next page do not appear.)
Select Link to Image file if you want your images to stay linked to ACDSee Ultimate rather than
be embedded in the presentation.
Click Use a design template if you want to use a background template and browse to the folder
on your computer to select it. (PowerPoint templates are usually under Microsoft Office |
Templates | Presentation Designs.)
6. Click Next.
7. On the Text Options page, do one or all of the following:
On the Caption tab, type in a caption and select its background color and alignment. You can
also select a different font, or insert metadata like file name or picture dimensions. Captions
appear at the bottom of the slide.
On the Title tab, type in a title for the slide and select its background color and alignment. You
can also select a different font, or insert metadata.
On the Notes tab, type in any notes that you want to appear in the Notes section attached to
each slide. These notes do not appear on the slide itself.
8. Click Create.
The presentation opens in PowerPoint where you can edit it like any other presentation.
Creating an HTML Album

You can use the HTML Album wizard to prepare photo collections for posting online. The HTML album
includes slideshow controls and a thumbnail display. You can select from a list of gallery style
templates and then customize the gallery by adding your own logo as an image or text to the header
or footer. You can also change the fonts and colors used in the gallery.
To Create an HTML Album:
Page 169 of 827

2. Click Tools | Create | HTML Album.
3. On the Style Settings page of the Create HTML Album wizard, select a Gallery Style from the webpage
styles box.
After you select a Gallery Style and other settings, you can click Preview Gallery to see how
those selections affect the appearance of your HTML album. You can also generate your HTML
album from any page in the HTML Album wizard by clicking Generate Album.
4. Click Next.
5. On the Gallery Customization page, do one or all of the following:
In the Gallery Title text box, type the title that you want to display at the top of the webpage.
Check Include header to display a header at the top of the webpage, or uncheck the Include
header checkbox to remove the header.
Check Include footer to display a footer at the bottom of the webpage, or uncheck the Include
footer checkbox to remove the footer.
If you want to display an image in the header or footer, select Use image and click Browse and
select a company logo, a photo of yourself, or another image to display in the header.
If you want to display text in the header or footer, select Use information and click Set
Information and add enter the text that you would like to display.
In the Folder settings section, click Browse and select the folder where you would like to save
the HTML album files.
6. Click Next.
7. On the Thumbnail and Image page, do one or all of the following:
In the Thumbnail settings section, adjust the appearance and format of the thumbnails in the
album.
In the Image settings section, adjust the appearance and format of full size images in the album.
In the Slideshow duration section, specify how long to display full size images during a
slideshow.
In the Color and font settings section, click Color and font, adjust the colors and fonts used in
the webpage, and then click OK.
Click Save Settings to save the settings that you select for specific webpage styles. If you save
the settings, you can quickly reapply them to a webpage style from the Style Settings page of
the Create HTML Album wizard.
Page 170 of 827

8. Click Next to create your HTML album. You may need to wait a few moments while ACDSee Ultimate
generates the thumbnails and creates the webpage.
9. Click Create Another Album to create another album, or click Finish to exit the wizard and return to
ACDSee.
You will need to use FTP or another method to post the HTML album files to your website.
Uploading Images to Photo Websites

You can upload your photos or images directly from ACDSee to sites like Flickr, SmugMug, Zenfolio,
and FTP sites. You will need an account before you can upload pictures to these sites but if you do not
have one, you can create an account as part of the first upload process.
You can select almost any image file type, including RAW and TIFF, and ACDSee will convert
the file to JPG automatically before uploading.
To Upload Photos to a Photo Website:

You can quickly upload your photos to photo sharing websites without having to leave ACDSee.
1. In Manage mode, select one or more images and click File | Send | To <Photo Website>...
2. In the <Photo Website> Uploader dialog box, press the Help button in the lower right corner and follow the
instructions.
Creating a Contact Sheet

You can create contact sheets—thumbnail previews of your images arranged on pages — that you can
use to organize and share your images. You can use the Create Contact Sheet utility to save your
contact sheets in multiple image formats, and as HTML image maps. You can save your options as a
preset for future use.
The size of the thumbnails depends on how many columns and rows the contact sheet displays, and
how much space is displayed between them.
To Create a Contact Sheet:

1. In Manage mode, in the File List pane, select the images you want to include.
2. Click Tools | Create | Contact Sheet.
3. In the Contact sheet format area, set the Contact sheet format options.
4. In the Output Settings area, set the Output Settings options.
Page 171 of 827

5. If desired, add or change the text on the page.
6. Click OK.
If you do not specify an output file path, the Create Contact Sheet utility places a file named
Contact Sheet.<ext> in your default image folder. For multiple-page contact sheets, the utility
adds a number to the file name; for example, Contact Sheet3.bmp.
Contact Sheet Format Options
Page 172 of 827

Thumbnail settings
Size Specifies the number of columns and rows to create on each

page.
Spacing Creates a frame around each thumbnail. Specifies the

amount of space between rows or columns. In the
Horizontal and Vertical spin boxes, type a value to indicate
the amount of space to display.
Frame options
Use thumbnail frame Creates a frame around each thumbnail.
Margin Specifies the width of the frame.
Solid color Specifies the frame's color. Click the color picker to define a
color.
Tiled image Specifies an image to use as a frame. Click Browse to locate

the image you want to use.
Thumbnail options
Colored drop shadow Creates a drop shadow effect around each thumbnail. Click
the color picker to define a color.
Colored edge fade Creates a fading frame effect around the image. Click the
color picker to define a color.
Colored matte Uses a solid color as a background for the page. Click the
Beveled edges Creates a beveled edge effect on each thumbnail. This effect
is not displayed in the Preview window.
Page background options
Solid color Uses a solid color as a background for the page. Click the
Tiled image Uses a tiled image as the background for the page. Click
Browse to locate the picture you want to use.
Creating Archives of Your Files

You can use the Archive Creator plug-in to create archives of your images, documents, and media files.
Archive Creator supports multiple archive formats, and helps you manage your files using
Page 173 of 827

compression, encryption, and password protection tools.
To Create an Archive:
1. In Manage mode, in the File List pane, select a folder or group of files.
2. Click Tools | Create | Archive.
3. In the Create Archive dialog box, in the Options area, click the Archive Type drop-down list and select
the archive format you want to create.
Some archive formats have additional settings that you can adjust by clicking the Settings
button.
4. Do any of the following:
To include the contents of any subfolders you selected, check the Include subfolders checkbox.
To include any hidden files in your archive, check the Include hidden files checkbox.
To remove the selected files and folders from your hard drive once they have been added to
the archive, check the Delete files after archiving checkbox.
To protect the contents of your archive with a password, check the Password Protect Archive
checkbox, and type a password into the field beside it. Note that not all archive types support
passwords, and some formats require them.
5. Type a path and file name into the Output File field, or click Browse to locate a folder on your hard
drive.
Add to existing archive: adds your files to an existing archive. This option is only available if the
archive specified in the Output File field already exists.
Overwrite existing archive: replaces any existing archive with the archive you are creating. This
option is only available if the archive specified in the Output File field already exists.
7. When you are satisfied with your choices, click Create to begin archiving your files.
Extracting Archives
You can extract archives very quickly and easily without leaving ACDSee. You can either extract the files
to a folder or simply double-click and view them.
To Extract an Archive to a Folder:

1. In Manage mode, navigate to the folder containing the archive, using the Folders pane.
2. Click the archive in the File List.
3. Click Edit | Extract to Folder.
Page 174 of 827

4. In the Extract to Folder dialog, navigate to, and select the folder where you want to keep the files.
5. To create a new folder, click Create Folder, type in the name of the folder and then press Enter.
6. Use the Overwriting duplicate files drop-down list if you want to specify what do so with files in the
folder that have the same name as those you are extracting. You can select any of the following:
Ask: to be asked what to do about each individual file.
Rename: duplicates are given a new name.
Replace: duplicate files are overwritten.
Skip: no duplicates are extracted.
7. Click OK.
To View Files Inside an Archive:

1. In Manage mode, navigate to the folder containing the archive.
2. Double-click the archive.
Thumbnails of the contents of the archive open in the File List pane.
Printing Images and Documents

With the ACDSee Ultimate print utility, you can print your files on any size of paper, in any orientation,
and at any resolution your printer can support. You can also use the print utility to create and print
contact sheets, complete with headers, footers, and captions specific to each image.
As you change the options in the Print dialog box, you can view a dynamically updated preview of the
file and its position on the page. You can adjust the output size, print multiple copies of each file or
image, and change the orientation of images and documents on each page.
If you select a variety of file types to print in Manage mode and the first file is a document,
only the document will print. If the first file is an image, only the images will print.
You can use the shortcut Ctrl + P to launch the print dialog.
To Print Your Images or PDFs:

1. Select the images or PDFs you want to print.
In Manage mode, click File | Print.
In View mode, click File | Print All Images. (If you want to print a single image in View mode,
Page 175 of 827

select Print Image.)
In View mode, if viewing a PDF, press the Print button in the PDF options.
3. Under Print layout, do one of the following:
Select Full page and then choose a print size from the Format list.
Select Contact sheet and then set the Contact sheet format options to define the appearance
of your contact sheet.
Select Layout and then choose one of the available layout options.
4. On the Printer Options tab, specify the printer you want to use, the paper size, the orientation, the
number of copies you want, the range of pages that you want to print, and image resolution.
5. On the Page Settings tab, specify the image position on the paper and the margin widths.
6. On the Adjustments tab, specify any adjustments you want to apply.
7. Specify the number of prints of each photo. If you are printing a Full page or a Contact sheet this option
is available on the Page Settings tab. If you are printing a Layout this option is available below the list of
layouts.
8. Add captions, headers, or footers. You can only add captions, headers, or footers if you are printing a
Full page or a Contact sheet.
9. Click Print.
To Print Your Document Files:
Please note that your document will not print the way it appears in View mode, but rather
how it appears when viewed in Microsoft Office™.
1. Select the document or documents you want to print.
In View mode, click File | Print.
3. Select the printer you want to use from the Printer drop-down menu and enter the number of copies
you want to print in the Copies field.
4. In the Settings section, choose between printing all pages or a range, which you can input in the field
next to Custom Print.
5. From the drop-down menus, choose whether to print single or double sided, orientation, how many
pages per sheet, collated or uncollated, and paper size.
6. Click Print.
Page 176 of 827

Setting Printer Options

When printing your images with ACDSee, you can specify which printer you want to use, and set the
printer options on the Printer Options tab in the Print dialog box.
Printer Options
Page 177 of 827

Printer Specifies the printer you want to use. Select a printer from the drop-
down list and click the Properties button to set its options. Refer to
the printer manufacturer's Help file or manual for more information.
Paper size Specifies the size of the paper, e.g. Letter, Legal, A4.
Orientation Specifies Portrait or Landscape page orientation.
Copies Specifies the number of copies you want to print.
Print range Select one of the following options:

l All: prints all of the pages in the document.
l Pages from: prints a range of pages. Specify the first and last
pages of the range in the fields.
Resolution Specifies a resolution in pixels-per-inch (PPI) for the image. The

higher the value, the more dots per inch, and the higher the
resolution of the printed image. For example, 600 PPI is 360,000
(600 x 600) pixels per square inch.
Filter Specifies the resampling filter to use when printing images. Click the
drop-down list and select one of the following:
l Box: displays considerable tiling or jaggies when you resize an
image.
l Triangle: produces good results for image reduction and
enlargement, but displays sharp transition lines.
l Bicubic: produces good results with photo-realistic images
and with images that are irregular or complex. Uses inter-
polation to minimize the raggedness normally associated with
image expansion.
l Bell: smoothes the image.
l B-Spline: produces smooth transitions, but may cause excess-
ive blurring.
l Lanczos: produces the sharpest images, but may also intro-
duce some ringing artifacts.
l Mitchell: produces smooth transitions when enlarging photo-
realistic images. This filter is good compromise between the
ringing effect of Lanczos and the blurring effect of other filters.
Gamma Applies gamma correction to the printed images. Type a number

from 0.10 to 3.00 in the Gamma value field to adjust the gamma of
the image. Higher values make the image appear brighter, while
lower values make the image appear darker.
Color Management From the drop-down menu, you may choose between allowing your
printer to manage colors, or managing colors with ACDSee.
Manage colors using ACDSee:
l Printer Profile: allows you to select from all printer profiles
currently stored on your computer. Scroll down to find the pro-
file corresponding to the currently selected printer.
l Rendering Intent: a strategy for handling situations where
not all colors will fit in the output device's color space.
Page 178 of 827

l Soft Proof: allows you to preview what the printed output

would look like with the currently selected printer profile.
l Gamut Warning: displays colors that cannot be reproduced
by the printer in the preview. In such cases, the closest avail-
able color is selected. The rendering intent describes the
method used to select another color.
For more information, see Color Management.
Use EXIF 2.2 printing when Your camera may capture EXIF information that, when shared with
available your printer, will optimize printing results. Select this option if your
camera and printer support EXIF 2.2 printing.
Creating Custom Print Layouts

You can create your own custom print layouts and store them as print options.
To Create a Custom Print Format:

1. In the Print dialog box, select Full page.
2. In the Print format area, click Add.
3. In the Add Custom Format dialog box, select a measurement unit from the Measurement units drop-
down list.
4. Enter the dimensions for the new format in the Format width and Format height fields.
5. Click Add.
Setting Image Size and Positioning

You can use the Page Settings tab in the Print dialog box to adjust and control the size of the images
you are printing, and the positioning of images on each page.
Page Settings Options
Page 179 of 827

Page position Specifies where to place the image on each page.
Margins Specifies the size of the margins. Type a value or click

the arrows in the Top, Bottom, Left, and Right spin
boxes.
Number of prints Specifies how many copies of each image to print.

The print utility adds pages as required.
Automatically rotate picture based on print Specifies whether you want the print utility to
format determine automatically which orientation to use for
each image. If you check the checkbox, the print
utility changes each page's orientation to best suit the
image you are printing.
Maintain aspect ratio Specifies whether you want the print utility to
maintain the original image's aspect ratio. Select one
of the following options to indicate how the print
utility should handle the aspect ratio for oversized
images:
l Crop image to fit print format: prints only
the part of the image that fits within the print
format.
l Shrink image to fit print format: prints the
entire image, reduced to fit inside the print
format.
Setting Print Adjustments

You can use the settings on the Adjustments tab of the Print dialog to compensate for quirks specific
to your printer, such as the way your printer handles exposure.
It is recommended that you adjust these settings only after printing initially, when you know
what corrections your printer may require.
Please note that any adjustments made on the Adjustments tab will not be reflected in the
Preview window.
To Apply Adjustments to Images Prior to Printing:

1. Select the image or images you want to print.
In View mode, click File | Print Image or File | Print All Images.
Page 180 of 827

3. In the Print dialog, on the Adjustments tab, adjust the Exposure, Contrast, or Sharpness sliders as
desired.
4. Click Print.
Adding Text to Pages

You can add headers and footers to pages, and captions beneath your images.
To Add Captions to Your Printed Images:

1. In the Print dialog box, click the Caption tab.
2. Select Use caption text.
3. Click Font to open the Font dialog box and set the font options.
4. In the text box, type the text you want the caption to display.
5. Click Insert Metadata to insert file-specific information into the caption for each image.
6. In the Text alignment drop-down list, select the caption positioning.
7. To set the maximum number of text lines for each caption to display, check the Number of lines
checkbox, and then specify a number in the field.
To Add Headers and Footers to Your Printed Pages:

Click the Header tab and select Use header text.
Click the Footer tab and select Use footer text.
2. Click Font to open the Font dialog box and set the font options.
3. In the text box, type the text you want the header or footer to display.
4. To insert the current page number or the total number of pages into the text, click Insert Page Number,
and then select an option from the menu.
5. In the Text alignment drop-down list, select the header or footer positioning.
6. To set a maximum number of text lines, check the Number of lines checkbox, and then specify a
number in the field.
Setting Contact Sheet Printing Options

The Contact sheet format area of the print utility contains settings you can adjust to control the
appearance, layout, and size of your thumbnails. If you saved your format options as a preset you can
select the preset.
Contact Sheet Format Options
Page 181 of 827

Thumbnail settings
Size Specifies the number of columns and rows to create on

each page.
Spacing Specifies the amount of space between rows or columns. In

the Horizontal and Vertical spin boxes, type a number to
indicate the amount of space to display.
Frame options
Use thumbnail frame Creates a frame around each thumbnail.
Margin Specifies the width of the frame.
Solid color Specifies the frame's color. Click the color picker to define a
color.
Tiled image Specifies an image to use as a frame. Click Browse to locate

the image you want to use.
Thumbnail options
Colored drop shadow Creates a drop shadow effect around each thumbnail. Click
the color picker to define a color.
Colored edge fade Creates a fading frame effect around the image. Click the
Colored matte Creates a matte effect around each thumbnail. Click the
Beveled edges Creates a beveled edge effect on each thumbnail. This

effect is not displayed in the Preview window.
Page background options
Solid color Prints a solid color as a background for the page. Click the
Tiled image Prints a tiled image as the background for the page. Click
Browse to locate the image you want to use.
About Batch Processing

In ACDSee Ultimate you can:
Page 182 of 827

Make one type of edit to many images: for example, if you need to resize multiple photos you can use
the Batch Resize tool. Or, if you need to rotate multiple photos by 90 degrees you can use the Batch
Rotate/Flip tool.
Make multiple types of edits to multiple images: for example, if you need to resize, crop, correct color
cast, and rotate multiple images, you can use the Batch Edit wizard to perform all the edits, to all the
files, simultaneously.
Save a batch of images to a variety of outputs quickly and easily: export multiple files to a number of
specified folders, file names, formats and dimensions.
Develop a batch of images: if you want to apply the same develop settings to multiple images, you can
save your Develop settings as a Preset.
Use batch rename on non-image file types
You can speed up the batch developing and editing workflow by tagging your files. For example, you
can quickly tag the files you want to change, then click Tagged in the Catalog pane to display all the
tagged files in the File List pane. Then you can select the files and choose a batch tool.
Using Batch Export

The batch export tool allows you to save files to a variety of outputs quickly and easily.
You can export one or more files to a number of specified:
folders
file names
formats
dimensions
To Export a Batch of Images:

1. In Manage mode, select the images that you want to export.
Click File | Export (also available in View, Develop and Edit mode).
Right-click to display the context menu and select Batch | Export (also available in View mode).
Click Batch | Export.
Use the keyboard shortcut keys Ctrl + Alt + E.
3. Refer to the table below to make your selections from the Export dialog box.
Export Options
Page 183 of 827

Destination folder
Same as source folder Select this option to use the same folder
where the source images currently
reside.
Check the Create a new subfolder for
the files checkbox to place the images
within a subfolder of the source folder.
Specific folder Select this option to change the output

folder to a specific location.
File names
Use Template to rename files Using a template gives you control over
the output file name. If you choose not
use a template, the file name is
unchanged. Duplicate files are given an
underscore and number suffix.
Template Check the Use Template to rename

files checkbox to create a renaming
template. You can specify a numerical
or alphabetical sequence for the new
file names, and use the original file
names, new names, or names based on
image metadata.
Template Displays the template to
field use to rename the files.
Type an asterisk (*) to
insert the original file
name into the template.
Use one or more
number signs (#) to
insert numeric or
alphabetic characters,
depending on which
options you selected.
Click the arrow on the
drop-down list to select a
recently-used template.
Insert | Inserts file-specific
Metadata information into the file
field name template.
Page 184 of 827

Position the cursor in the

Template field, and then
click Insert. Choose
Metadata field from the
Insert drop-down menu
to open the Choose
Property dialog box.
Select the metadata you
want to insert, and then
click OK.
Insert | Replaces any number
Sequence signs (#) in the template
number with sequential numeric
characters or alphabetic
characters. Select
numeric or alphabetic
preference in Sequence
number options below.
Insert | Replaces any asterisk
Original signs (*) in the template
filename name with the original
filename.
Insert | Specifies the first letter
Sequence or number of the
number sequence.
options
Start at Start at the number or
letter you type
Format
File Format Select the file format in which you would

like to save the exported images.
Format Settings Click this button to change the settings

for the format you have selected.
Pixel format Specify the color depth for your format

settings.
Color space Check the color space checkbox to

choose a color space option from the
drop-down list.
Output size
Page 185 of 827

Resize image Select this option to specify how to scale

the images.
Resampling method Use this option to determine the method

used to resize (resample) the image:
Bell: smoothes the image.
Bicubic: produces good results

with photo-realistic images and
with images that are irregular or
complex. Uses interpolation to
minimize the raggedness
normally associated with image
expansion.
Box: displays considerable tiling

or jaggies (jagged edges) when
you resize an image.
B-spline: produces smooth

transitions, but may cause excessive
blurring.
ClearIQZ: slower than Bicubic and

Lanczos, but produces the best
results when enlarging photos,
especially those of people.
Lanczos: produces the sharpest

images, but may also introduce
some ringing artifacts.
Mitchell: produces smooth

transitions when enlarging photo-
realistic images. This filter is good
compromise between the ringing
effect of Lanczos and the blurring
effect of other filters.
Triangle: produces good results

for image reduction and
enlargement, but displays sharp
transition lines.
Dimensions Select this option to force the exported

images to fit the set dimensions
independent of landscape or portrait
orientation. Enter the dimensions in
Page 186 of 827

pixels, inches, or centimeters
Width and height Select this option to resize the exported

image to fit within the values entered in
the two boxes.
Long edge Select this option to resize the image to

the long edge only. Enter the dimensions
in pixels, inches, or centimeters
Short edge Select this option to resize the image to

the short edge only. Enter the
dimensions in pixels, inches, or
centimeters
Percentage Select this option to resize the image to a

percentage of their original size. Enter
the percentage dimensions in the Width
and Height fields.
Resolution Enter a resolution to set the number of

pixels per inch or centimeter.
Enlarge only Enlarge only resizes only those images

that are smaller than the specified height
and width.
Reduce only Resizes only those images that are larger

than the specified height and width.
Enlarge or reduce Resizes all images to the specified height

and width.
Preserve original aspect ratio Select this option to maintain original

image proportions. Note: images resized
to long or short edge maintain original
image proportion.
Metadata
Metadata Select a develop preset from the drop-

down menu to apply it to the exported
images.
Processing
Develop Presets Select a develop preset from the drop-

down menu to apply it to the exported
Page 187 of 827

images.
ACDSee Actions Select a recording from the drop-down

menu to apply it to the exported images.
File output types specified in

the ACDSee Actions Output
Options dialog will be
superseded by the output file
type selected in the Format
section of the Export dialog,
described above.
While exporting images,

recordings that included
images with multiple layers at
the time the recording was
initiated cannot be applied.
Option: you can save your settings as a preset by clicking the new export preset button and
entering a name for your preset. Select one or more presets in the list to apply.
4. Click Export.
To edit a preset, click the preset in the list, make your edits, and click the Save current
export preset button .
Converting Multiple Images to Another File Format

You can convert multiple images to any supported file format. You can set the options for each format
individually, specify how to handle multiple-page images, and apply the conversion defaults
automatically.
To Convert Images to Another File Format:

In Manage mode, select one or more images, and click Tools | Batch | Convert File Format |
Convert...
In View mode, click Tools | Modify | Convert File Format | Convert...
In Manage mode, select one or more images, and click Batch | Convert File Format | Convert...
In Manage or View mode, select one or more images and press Ctrl + Alt + F.
Page 188 of 827

2. In the Convert File Format dialog, select a new format for your image or images from the Output File
Format drop-down list. To configure format-specific options, select the file format and then press the
Settings button.
3. In the Output Location section, identify where you want to place the converted images.
4. In the File Options section, specify how you want the tool to handle any file name conflicts by selecting
one of the following options from the Overwrite existing files drop-down list:
Ask: prompts you when overwriting a file.
Skip: cancels the operation if there is a file with the same file name and extension.
Replace: overwrites the file without prompting for confirmation.
Rename: prompts you to rename the file.
5. To configure vector settings and how you want to handle any multi-page images, press the Advanced
Settings button. If you did not select any multi-page images to convert, and did not specify a multiple-
page image format as your output file format, you can skip the options in the Multi-Page Source section.
6. Click Convert.
You can save your settings as a preset for future use. After configuring the Convert File Format
dialog settings, press the Save icon next to the Preset field. You will be prompted to enter a
name for your preset. It is recommended that you give your preset an intuitive name. Saved
presets will be listed in the Convert File Format fly-out menu.
You can give your saved presets custom shortcuts for quick conversions. In the Customize
Shortcuts dialog, you can find your presets under the Preset - Convert File Format category.
Rotating or Flipping Multiple Images

You can rotate or flip multiple images at preset angles.
To Rotate or Flip an Image:

1. In Manage mode, select one or more images, and then click Tools | Batch | Rotate/Flip.
2. In the Batch Rotate/Flip Images dialog box, select the angle of rotation you want to apply. See below for
an explanation of each angle.
3. If you select an image with multiple pages and want to apply the selected angle of rotation to all of the
pages, check the Apply to all pages of the current image checkbox.
Click Next Image to move on to the next selected image. The Next Image button is not
available if the Apply to all selected images box is checked.
Page 189 of 827

If you select multiple images and you want to apply the same angle of rotation to all of them,
check the Apply to all selected images checkbox.
Click Options to specify how you want to save and store the images.
5. When you are ready to apply the rotations to your images, click Start Rotate.
Rotate / Flip Angles

Rotates the image counter-clockwise 90 degrees.
Rotates the image 180 degrees.
Rotates the image clockwise 90 degrees.
Rotates the image according to any EXIF data contained within the image (based on what the
camera thinks the orientation should be).
Flips the image along the vertical axis.
Flips the image along the horizontal axis.
Flips the image along the vertical axis, and then rotates it counter-clockwise 90 degrees.
Flips the image along the vertical axis, and then rotates it clockwise 90 degrees.
You can also use the Rotate tool in Edit mode to rotate an image using a custom angle of
rotation.
Page 190 of 827

Setting Rotated and Flipped File Options

You can change the settings in the Batch Image Rotate/Flip Options dialog box to control where
ACDSee Ultimate places modified images, how to handle file duplication conflicts, and specify whether
you want to preserve the last-modified date of the file when you use the Batch Rotate/Flip Images
tool.
To Set the Rotate and Flip Options:

1. In Manage mode, select one or more images, and then click Tools | Batch | Rotate/Flip.
2. In the Batch Rotate/Flip Images dialog box, click the Options button.
3. Set the options as described below.
4. Click OK.
Rotate and Flip Options

Force lossless JPEG operations Rotates JPEG images without decompressing and re-
compressing the JPEG information. As a result, the image
does not lose quality when rotated or flipped.
File options Specifies where to place the new images. Select one of
the following options:
l Remove/replace original files: overwrites the ori-
ginal file with the new image.
l Rename modified images and place in source
folder: adds identifying labels to the image names
and places them in the same folder as the originals.
l Place modified images in the following folder:
places the converted image in a folder that you can
specify. Click the Browse button and select a folder.
Overwrite existing files Determines how ACDSee Ultimate should handle

overwriting files. Select one of the following options from
the drop-down list:
l Ask: prompts you when overwriting a file.
l Skip: cancels the operation if there is a file with the
same file name and extension.
l Replace: overwrites the file.
l Rename: prompts you to rename the file.
Preserve last-modified dates Retains the date and time properties of the file.
Remember and apply the last rotation Automatically applies the same settings the next time you
performed rotate an image.
Auto-close progress dialog if all operations Automatically closes the dialog box after all images have
succeed been adjusted.
Save current settings as default Stores the current settings and applies them the next time
you use the Rotate/Flip Images wizard.
Page 191 of 827

Resizing Multiple Images

You can resize multiple images at once using the batch resize tool.
To Resize Multiple Images:

1. In Manage mode, select one or more images, and then click Tools | Batch | Resize | Resize...
2. In the Resize dialog box, you can choose from multiple ways to resize your images. Choose either Size in
Pixels, Percentage, Print Size, Long Edge, or Short Edge. Follow the directions in the table below.
3. Click Options to specify how you want to save and store the images.
4. Click Resize.
You can save your rename settings as a preset by clicking the save icon beside the preset drop-
down. From there, enter a name and press OK. To delete a preset, press the trash icon.
You can assign shortcuts to speed up your process of resizing multiple images by following the
directions in the Customizing Keyboard Shortcuts topic.
Resize Options
Page 192 of 827

Resize Method Setting Explanation
Size in Pixels
Width Enter a new width for the images in pixels.
Height Enter a new height for the images in pixels.
Resize Choose how to scale the images. Select one of the

following options:
Enlarge or Reduce: resizes all images to the

specified height and width.
Enlarge only: resizes only those images that

are smaller than the specified height and
width.
Reduce only: resizes only those images that

are larger than the specified height and
width.
Preserve original Check this box to keep the width-to-height ratio of

aspect ratio the original images.
Fit within Specifies whether the aspect ratio is maintained

based on the specified width. For more information
about how the different combinations affect the
images, see Pixel resize options and resulting action.
Percentage
Width Enter a new width for the images as a percentage of

the original image.
Height Enter a new height for the images as a percentage of

the original image.

Print Size
Units Choose from inches, cm (centimeters), mm

(millimeters), or pixels.
Page 193 of 827

Width Enter a new width for the images in pixels.
Height Enter a new height for the images in pixels.
Resolution Enter a resolution for the images in pixels per inch.

following options:

width.

width.
Enlarge or reduce: resizes all images to the


Fit within Specifies whether the aspect ratio is maintained

based on the specified width. For more information
about how the different combinations affect the
images, see Pixel resize options and resulting action.
Long Edge
Size Enter a size in units, and choose the units from the
drop-down menu. There, you can choose from
inches, cm (centimeters), mm (millimeters), or
pixels.

following options:

width.

Page 194 of 827

width.

Short Edge
Size Enter a size in units, and choose the units from the
drop-down menu. There, you can choose from
inches, cm (centimeters), mm (millimeters), or
pixels.

following options:

width.

width.

Options
Output Location Choose an output location from the options:
Remove/replace original files: this option

overwrites your original files.
Same as source folder: pastes the resized

files in the folder they originated.
Specific folder: use the folder icon to

navigate to a specific folder for the output
files.
Create subfolder: with an output location

selected, check this checkbox to create a
subfolder for your resized images. Enter a
name in the box. This is useful if you are
making multiple batch resizes to specific
Page 195 of 827

dimensions. You can save your resized files in

separate folders.
File options Choose your file options for overwriting existing files.
Choose whether to preserve certain file information
when resizing.
Choose your JPEG Compression options, find out
more in the JPEG Options topic.
Choose your resample type from the following
options:
Lanczos: produces the sharpest images, but

may also introduce some ringing artifacts.
Bicubic: produces good results with photo-

realistic images and with images that are
irregular or complex. Uses interpolation to
minimize the raggedness normally associated
with image expansion.
Box: displays considerable tiling or jaggies

(jagged edges) when you resize an image.
B-spline: produces smooth transitions, but may

cause excessive blurring.
ClearIQZ: slower than Bicubic and Lanczos,

but produces the best results when enlarging
photos, especially those of people.
Mitchell: produces smooth transitions when

enlarging photo-realistic images. This filter is
good compromise between the ringing effect
of Lanczos and the blurring effect of other
filters.
Triangle: produces good results for image

reduction and enlargement, but displays
sharp transition lines.
Page 196 of 827

Setting File Options

You can change the settings in the Options dialog box to control where ACDSee Ultimate places
modified images, how to handle file duplication conflicts, and specify whether you want to preserve
the last-modified date of the file.
File Options
File options Specifies where to place the new images. Select one of the
following three options:
l Remove/replace original files: overwrites the original file
with the new image.
l Rename modified images and place in source folder:
adds identifying labels to the image names and places them
in the same folder as the originals.
l Place modified images in the following folder: places
the converted image in a folder that you can specify. Click the
Browse button and select a folder.
Overwrite existing files Determines how ACDSee Ultimate should handle overwriting files.
Select one of the following options from the drop-down list:
l Ask: prompts you when overwriting a file.
l Skip: cancels the operation if there is a file with the same file
name and extension.
l Replace: overwrites the file.
l Rename: prompts you to rename the file.
Preserve last-modified dates Retains the date and time properties of the file.
Auto-close progress dialog if all Automatically closes the dialog box after all images have been
operations succeed adjusted.
Save current settings as default Stores the current settings and applies them the next time you use
the Resize Images wizard.
JPEG Compression Options Opens the JPEG Options dialog where you can specify detailed
compression options to apply to the resized files.
Organizing and Managing Files in ACDSee
Adjusting Exposure For Multiple Images

In ACDSee, you can lighten or darken the colors of an image or a group of images with the Batch
Adjust Exposure wizard. You can adjust each image individually and preview the changes before
applying, or make adjustments to an image and automatically apply the same changes to all of the
images you selected.
You can also save your settings as a preset for future use.
Page 197 of 827

To Adjust Image Exposure:

1. In Manage mode, select one or more images, and then click Tools | Batch | Adjust Exposure.
2. In the Batch Adjust Exposure dialog box, do one or more of the following:
To adjust image exposure, contrast, and fill light level, select the Exposure tab and adjust the
options.
To precisely adjust the contrast and light levels in your images, select the Levels tab and set the
options.
To adjust image exposure automatically, select the Auto Levels tab and set the options.
To precisely adjust the RGB color channels in your image, select the Tone Curves tab and set the
options.
Check the Apply settings to all selected images checkbox to apply the current settings to all of
the images you selected.
Uncheck Apply settings to all selected images and click Next Image to move to the next image,
and then repeat step 2 for each image you want to adjust.
4. Click Options to specify how you want to save and store the images.
5. Click Filter All Images.
You can also adjust image exposure and color levels in Edit mode.
Adjusting Batch Exposure Options

You can use the options in the Batch Adjust Exposure dialog to correct the exposure of your images.
There are four tabs in the Exposure section: Exposure, Levels, Auto Levels, and Tone Curves.
To Use the Exposure Options:

In the Batch Adjust Exposure dialog box, use the following options:
Exposure Options
Page 198 of 827

Exposure Specifies the amount of light to add to all areas of the image.
Auto Automatically corrects the exposure based upon the brightness

of the image.
Contrast Specifies the amount of difference between color and

brightness in an image. Moving the slider to the right darkens
the shadowed areas in an image, while moving the slider to the
left brightens them.
Fill Light Specifies the amount of light to add to the darkest areas of the
image.
Levels Options
Channel Specifies the brightness or color channel you want to adjust.
Shadows Specifies the black point of an image.

Move the slider or type a number from 0 to 255 into the spin
box to define the blackest area of an image. As the value
increases, the dark colored areas of the image become darker.
Midtones Specifies the gamma correction in an image.

Move the slider or type a number from 0.00 to 2.00 into the
spin box to set the amount of gamma correction. Higher values
make the image appear brighter, while lower values make the
image appear darker.
Highlights Specifies the white point of an image.

box to define the whitest area of an image. As the value
increases, the light colored areas of the image become lighter.
Clipped % Indicates how much of the image detail is lost due to black point
and white point correction.
Black Point Eyedropper Click the button with the black eyedropper icon to adjust the
black point. Select the area in the Before image that you want to
set as the black point for the After image.
Mid Point Eyedropper Click the button with the gray eyedropper icon to adjust the
gamma correction value. Select the area in the Before image
that you want to set as the gamma correction value.
White Point Eyedropper Click the button with the white eyedropper icon to adjust the
white point. Select the area in the Before image that you want
to set as the white point for the After image.
Page 199 of 827

Auto Levels Options

Strength Adjusts the amount of exposure applied to the image.
Auto Contrast and Color Adjusts color differences, brightness, and image color channels.
Auto Contrast Adjusts the color differences and brightness only.
Auto Color Balances color within the whole image.
Tone Curves Options

Channel Specifies the color channels to adjust.
Show Histogram Toggles the histogram display.
Histogram Displays a visual representation of the color information levels

in the image, based on the selected channel. Click and drag the
line to manipulate the curve.
Renaming Multiple Files

You can use the Batch Rename tool to rename multiple files. You can specify a template with a
numerical or alphabetical sequence, save your template for future use, replace specific characters or
phrases, change cases, and insert or remove text or spaces. This can be particularly useful if you deal
with large quantities of images, or you organize your images by file name.
To Rename Multiple Files:

1. In Manage mode, select one or more files, and then click Tools | Batch | Rename File| Rename... If
selecting two or more files, you can alternatively press F2.
2. In the Rename dialog box, you will see a list of operations. You can use the checkboxes to select or
deselect which operations to run when batch renaming. The following operations enable you to
perform the following actions:
Template - create a renaming template to apply to all selected files.
Search and Replace - search for and replace parts of your file name.
Case Change - change the case of text in your file name.
Insert Text - add text to your file name.
Remove Text- remove text from your file name.
Strip Spaces - remove spaces from your file name.
Page 200 of 827

3. Review changes you have made to file names in the Preview field.
4. Click Rename.
You can save your rename settings as a preset by clicking the save icon beside the preset drop-
down. From there, enter a name and press OK. You can also access your Last Used Settings in
the preset menu, if you wish to repeat an action. To delete a preset, press the trash icon.
You can assign shortcuts to speed up your process of renaming multiple files by following the
directions in the Customizing Keyboard Shortcuts topic.
Rename Settings
Page 201 of 827

Template
Template: Type a file name format to set as a template. You can type any text
into this box, including hyphens and underscores.
Use the * symbol to insert the original file name, so renaming IMG-
9359.jpg using the template "Summer Wedding*" will rename the
file "Summer WeddingIMG-9359.jpg".
Use the # symbol to begin a sequence, either numerical or
alphabetical.
Insert Metadata... Choose one or more metadata properties to include in the

renaming template by checking the relevant checkboxes. Press OK.
Clear Templates Select this option to clear the existing templates to create a new
one, or change the existing template.
Use numbers to replace #'s Select this option to replace #s in the rename template with
sequential numbers.
Use letters to replace #'s Select this option to replace #s in the rename template with
sequential letters.
Start at: Select either Fixed value or Auto detect. If you select Fixed value,
choose a number to start the sequence with. Select Auto detect to
identify an existing numerical system and continue it.
Search and Replace
Search for: Enter a term to search for.
Replace with: Enter a term to replace the searched term with.

Case sensitive Check this checkbox to search only for results that match the case
of your search term. You can use this to remove all capitals in your
file names, or all lowercase terms.
Include extension Check this checkbox to include file extensions in your search and
replace.
Case Change
Name Choose from Lowercase, Uppercase, or Title case to make a change

to the case in your file name, or select No change to keep as is.
Extension Choose from Lowercase, Uppercase, or No change. This can be
Page 202 of 827

useful to unify case differences in file names, for example .JPG and
.jpg
Insert Text
Insert: Type the text you want to insert into the file name.

At location Choose from Prefix, Suffix, Position (meaning how many characters
into the name), After text:, or Before text:. After and before text
lets you enter text to prelude or follow.
Add from right to left Check this box to add the text from right to left, rather than from
left to right.
Overwrite existing name Check this box to rename the file by overwriting the existing file
name.
Include extension Check this checkbox to include file extensions in your renaming
process.
Case sensitive Check this checkbox to search only for results that match the case
of your search term.
Remove Text
Start From Choose a Position or a Delimiter.
Enter a position, meaning how many characters into the

name to start removing text.
Enter a Delimiter, which is where you start removing text

from.
Remove Until Choose Count equals, Delimiter, or The end.

Enter a Count equals, this is how many characters of text to
remove.
Type a Delimiter, which is where to stop removing text

from.
When you choose The end, text is removed until the end of
the file name.
Remove from right to left Check this box to remove text from right to left, rather than from
left to right.
Page 203 of 827

Remove delimiters Check this box to remove the delimiters when renaming, else they
will remain.
Include extension Check this box to include the file extension in the text you remove.
Case sensitive Check this box to make text in the delimiter fields case sensitive.
Strip Spaces
Type of space removal Choose Remove all, Remove trailing, Remove consecutive, or
Replace with.
Remove all removes all spaces in the file name.
Remove trailing removes spaces following the file name.
Remove consecutive removes multiple spaces in the file

name.
Replace with gives you the option to enter alternatives, such

as a letter, number, or dash.
Advanced...
Handle name conflicts Choose from the following options:
Ask: produce a prompt when a name conflict occurs.
Skip: skip names that include conflicts.
Rename: rename files with conflicts.
Handle extension changes Choose from the following options:
Ask: produce a prompt when a rename affects an

extension.
Skip: skip changes that affect extensions.
Rename: rename extensions where required by the

rename.
As well as editing the options listed in the table, you can also reorder how these operations
run. To reorder operations, use either the up or down arrows at the bottom of the list, or click
and drag the name of the operation to its new location.
You can add additional operations, up to 10 in total. To do this, press the plus button at the
bottom of the list.
Page 204 of 827

To remove an operation, press the trash icon.
Changing the Color Profiles of Multiple Images

You can change the color profiles of multiple images using the Batch Convert Color Profile tool.
At this time, ACDSee Ultimate does not support CMYK color profiles.
To Change the Color Profiles Used in Images:

2. Click Tools | Batch | Convert ICC Profile.
3. In the Color profile to convert from list, select the color profile currently associated with the images.
For example, you will typically use the Batch Convert Color Profile tool to convert from your
camera's color profile to a more universal color profile, such as sRGB. If you select Use profile
information when found in JPEG and TIFF images, ACDSee Ultimate will convert from the
color profile embedded in the images, not the color profile that you select in the list.
4. In the Color profile to convert to list, select color profile that you want to associate with the image.
5. In the Rendering Intent list, select the rendering intent.
The most common rendering intent is Perceptual. Some color profiles ignore the rendering
intent, so results can vary depending on the profile that you select.
6. Click Options to specify whether ACDSee Ultimate should overwrite the image file (which effectively
deletes the original color profile) or create new files with the new color profiles. You can also select
options for JPEG compression.
7. Click Start.
8. Click Done.
Using Batch Edit

You can use the Batch Edit wizard to make multiple types of edits to multiple images. You can save
your editing settings as a preset for future use. See the links below for detailed descriptions of the
editing options for each editing tool.
It is recommended that you consider using ACDSee Actions as a more comprehensive batch
processing tool.
To Open Batch Edit:
Page 205 of 827

1. In Manage mode, select the images that you want to edit, and then click Tools | Batch | Batch Edit.
2. On the Batch Editing Options page, on the Processing Profile tab, click on the name of each type of edit
(for example, Rotate) to display the options that are available for that type of edit.
3. Select the types of edits that you want to make to the images.
To Preview Changes:
You can see how the editing options will affect an image in the Preview area.
1. In the Batch Edit wizard, select the Before and After tabs to evaluate how the currently selected options
affect the image, or click and hold the Preview icon to switch between the Before and After tabs.
2. Click Original Image or Final Image, at the top and bottom of the Operations list, to evaluate how all the
editing options affect the image.
3. To see how the selected editing options affect each image, click the Next Image and Previous Image
buttons to display each image in the Preview area.
To Use Zoom Features:

1. Drag the Zoom slider to the left or right to see the entire image, or to zoom in to a specific area in the
image.
2. Click the Fit Image button to fit the image into the Preview area.
3. Click the Actual Size button to display the image at full size in the Preview area. If you click the Actual
Size button you will need to use the horizontal and vertical scroll bars to see different parts of the full-
size image.
To Add or Remove Images:

1. If you no longer want to include an image in the Batch Edit wizard, select the Image List tab, select an
image, and then click Remove.
2. If you decide that you want to edit additional images, select the Image List tab, and then click Add.
3. Navigate to the folder containing the images that you want to add.
4. Select the images in the Available items area, and then click Add.
5. Click OK.
6. When you are satisfied with the images and the editing options, click Next.
To Set Output Options and Complete the Process:

1. On the Output Options page, specify where you would like to save the edited images, how you want to
rename them, and other options. The output options are described below.
2. When you are satisfied with the output options, click Next.
3. On the Batch Edit Progress page, the progress bars indicate which images and edits are being processed.
Page 206 of 827

4. On the Batch Edit Completed page, you have the following options:
In the Summary section, click View Log to see a log that explains any process warnings or
failures.
Click Browse with Explorer to open Windows Explorer so you can look at the edited images.
Click Save Preset to save all of the editing options as a preset for future use.
Select Browse the output folder with ACDSee if you want look at the edited images in the File
List pane.
5. Click Finish.
Editing Options
Detailed descriptions of the options for each tool in the Batch Edit wizard are in the following help
topics:
Rotate Light EQ™
Crop Noise Removal
Resize Sharpening
Color Vignette
Channel Mixer Text Overlay
Sepia Watermark
Exposure
Output Options
Page 207 of 827

Destination folder
Same as source folder Select this option if you want to save the edited images in the same
folder as the original images.
Create a new subfolder for the Creates a new subfolder in the folder that you selected from the
files Specific folder drop-down. Type a name for the new folder in the
Create a new subfolder for the files text box.
Specific folder Select this option if you want to save the edited images to a specific
folder.
File names
Keep original file names Select this option if you want to save the edited images with the
same file name as the original images.
Name using template Select this option if you want to rename the edited images using a
renaming template.
Image file format
File format If you want to change the file format of the edited images, select
the file format in which you would like to save the edited images.
Pixel format Use this option to determine number of bits per pixel (BPP) in the
output images, and whether the images will be color or grayscale.
Select Automatic if you want the output images to have the same
pixel format (or the closest possible match) as the original images.
You can use this option to convert the images from color to
grayscale, or to convert the images to a pixel format that is
compatible with other software or processes.
Metadata
Preserve metadata Select this option if the original image contains metadata, and you
want the edited image to contain the same metadata and color
profile.
Preserve embedded audio Select this option if the original image contains embedded audio,
and you want the edited image to contain the same embedded
audio.
Other options
Preserve last-modified date Select this option if the original image has a last-modified date, and
you want the edited image to have the same last-modified date.
Copy database information Select this option if you want to copy ACDSee Metadata for the
Page 208 of 827

original image and enter it into the database for the edited image.
When output file already exists Use this option to determine what ACDSee Ultimate should do if the
destination folder contains an image with the same file name as one
of the edited images:
Ask: prompts you to choose different options (skip, rename,

overwrite) depending on the image.
Skip: skips processing that image, and begins processing the

next image.
Replace: replaces the image in the destination folder with

the edited image.
Rename: renames the edited file.
Batch Edit Rotate Options

You can use the options in the Rotate section to rotate the image at a pre-set angle or at a custom
angle.
To Use the Rotate Options:

In the Batch Edit wizard, check the Rotate checkbox.
Rotate Options
Page 209 of 827

No rotation This option is selected by default so you see the un-rotated image until
you are ready to select a rotation option.
180° Rotates the image 180 degrees.
Left 90° Rotates the image to the left by 90 degrees.
Right 90° Rotates the image to the right by 90 degrees.
Custom angle Select this option and then either type a custom angle number into the
spin box or click the arrow and drag it around the circle until the image
is rotated to the desired angle.
Background color The color that you select displays behind the rotated image.
Draw a line on the image that Click the Horizontal or Vertical button, and then use the cursor to draw
you want to become vertical or a line on the image that you want set as horizontal or vertical.
horizontal
Automatic cropping When you rotate an image at a custom angle, select Automatic
cropping if you want to crop the image to the largest possible
rectangular size within the rotated image.
Reset Click to reset all options to the default.
Batch Edit Crop Options

You can use the options in the Crop section to control the size and orientation of the cropped area.
To Use the Crop Options:

In the Batch Edit wizard, check the Crop checkbox.
Crop Options
Page 210 of 827

Cropping proportion Select the size of the cropped area or the ratio to use to determine
the cropped area. Select Custom to define a custom crop area.
Orientation Select the orientation of the cropped area:
Automatic: base the orientation of the cropped area on the

orientation of the original image. For example, if the original
image has a landscape orientation, the cropped area will
also have a landscape orientation.
Landscape: use a landscape orientation for the cropped

area.
Portrait: use a portrait orientation for the cropped area.
Batch Edit Resize Options

You can use the options in the Resize section to reduce or enlarge the image.
To Use the Resize Options:

In the Batch Edit wizard, check the Resize checkbox.
Resize Options
Page 211 of 827

Resize by
Megapixels Select this option to reduce or enlarge the image to the specified
number of megapixels while maintaining the height/width aspect
ratio. For example, if you have a 6 megapixel image with an aspect
ratio of 3000 by 2000 and you select 1.5 megapixels, the image will
be reduced to 1500 by 1000.
Use the drop-down list to select from a pre-set list of megapixel
sizes. Alternately, enter the megapixels into the Megapixels spin
box. The Reduce/Enlarge drop-down list determines how the image
will be resized:
Reduce only: reduces the size of the image.
Enlarge only: makes the image larger.
Enlarge or reduce: either reduces the size of the image, or

makes the image larger.
Percentage Select this option to reduce or enlarge the image to a percentage of

the original. For example, if you want to reduce the image, enter a
percentage that is less than 100. If you want to enlarge the image,
enter a percentage that is greater than 100.
Pixel dimensions Select this option to reduce or enlarge the image to a specific width
and height, measured in pixels. The Reduce/Enlarge drop-down list
determines how the image will be resized:

Print dimensions Select this option to reduce or enlarge the image to specific print
dimensions, such as the dimensions of a photographic print. Use the
drop-down to select from a preset list of print dimensions.
Alternately, enter a specific height, width, and resolution.
The Reduce/Enlarge drop-down list determines how the image will
be resized:

Page 212 of 827

The Fitting method, which applies to the Percentage, Pixel dimensions, and Print dimensions options,
determines how the image will fit into the new image area:
Best fit preserving original aspect ratio: select this option to preserve the width/height aspect
ratio from the original image. For example, if the aspect ratio of the original image is 4:3, the
aspect ratio of the resized image will also be 4:3.
Fit exactly by stretching: select this option if you want to stretch the image to fit a particular
width and height.
Fit exactly by adding bars: select this option if you want to fit the image into an area that is
larger than the image. You can select the color of the bars that fill the gaps between the image
and the edge of the area.
Resampling method
Use this option to determine the method used to resize (resample) the image:
Box: displays considerable tiling or jaggies when you resize an image.
Triangle: produces good results for image reduction and enlargement, but displays sharp
transition lines.
Bicubic: produces good results with photo-realistic images and with images that are irregular or
complex. Uses interpolation to minimize the raggedness normally associated with image
expansion.
B-spline: produces smooth transitions, but may cause excessive blurring.
Lanczos: produces the sharpest images, but may also introduce some ringing artifacts.
Mitchell: produces smooth transitions when enlarging photo-realistic images. This filter is good
compromise between the ringing effect of Lanczos and the blurring effect of other filters.
ClearIQZ: slower than Bicubic and Lanczos, but produces the best results when enlarging
photos, especially those of people.
Reset
Batch Edit Color Options

You can use the options on the Color Cast tab to remove an unwanted hue from an image. You can
change the saturation of a batch of images using the Saturation tab.
To Use the Color Options:
Page 213 of 827

In the Batch Edit wizard, check the Color checkbox.
Color Options
Color Cast
Select color Click an area in the image that should be white or gray. The color square
shows the color of the original pixel on the left, and of the modified pixel
on the right.
White Point Select one of the following:
Custom: displays the color temperature of the area in the image

that you clicked.
Sunny: adjusts the color temperature to 5500K, approximately

that of the midday sun.
Cloudy: adjusts the color temperature to 6500K, approximately

that of a lightly overcast sky.
Shade: adjusts the color temperature to 7500K, approximately

that of a heavily overcast sky.
Tungsten: adjusts the color temperature to 2850K, approximately

that of a household light bulb.
Fluorescent: adjusts the color temperature to 3800K,

approximately that of a fluorescent light bulb.
Flash: adjusts the color temperature to 5500K, approximately that

of a camera flash.
Strength Specifies the color cast removal strength. Higher settings remove more of
the unwanted color.
Temperature Specifies the color temperature.
Tint Specifies the amount of green (to the left) and red (to the right) to match
the settings used when you took the photo.
Saturation
Amount Specifies the amount to increase or decrease the intensity of hues (color)
in the image. To remove all the color and create a grayscale image, drag
the slider all the way to the left.
Reset
Page 214 of 827

Batch Edit Channel Mixer Options

The Channel Mixer in the Batch Edit wizard can change multiple images to create a rich grayscale.
Because you can control the brightness of the red, green, and blue channels, as well as the overall
brightness, you can use the Channel Mixer to emphasize different areas or aspects of a photo, as well
as alter its mood and tone.
If you hover your cursor over each slider and watch the effect on the small preview below the controls,
it shows you which parts of the image will be affected by each channel. This helps to gauge the effect of
each slider on the image.
To Create a Grayscale Image:

In the Batch Edit wizard, check the Channel Mixer checkbox.
Channel Mixer Options

Percent Red Drag the slider to the left or right. The more red there is in a pixel, the
more effect the red slider has on that pixel. So the area of red in the
picture is brightened or darkened more than other areas.
Percent Green Drag the slider to the left or right. The more green there is in a pixel,
the more effect the green slider has on that pixel. So the area of green
in the picture is brightened or darkened more than other areas.
Percent Blue Drag the slider to the left or right. The more blue there is in a pixel, the
more effect the blue slider has on that pixel. So the area of blue in the
picture is brightened or darkened more than other areas.
Percent Brightness Drag the slider to the left or right to brighten or darken the whole
image.
Batch Edit Sepia Options

You can use the Batch Edit wizard to change batches of images to a sepia color.
To Change Images to Sepia:

1. In the Batch Edit wizard, check the Sepia checkbox.
The image in the Preview immediately changes to a sepia color.

2. Click the Image List tab and then each image in the batch to see the effect of the sepia on the other
images.
Page 215 of 827

Batch Edit Exposure Options

You can use the options in the Exposure section to correct the exposure of your images. There are four
tabs in the Exposure section: Exposure, Levels, Auto Levels, and Tone Curves.
To Use the Exposure Options:

In the Batch Edit wizard, check the Exposure checkbox.
Exposure Options
Exposure Specifies the amount of light to add to all areas of the image.
Contrast Specifies the amount of difference between color and

brightness in an image. Moving the slider to the right darkens
the shadowed areas in an image, while moving the slider to the
left brightens them.
Fill Light Specifies the amount of light to add to the darkest areas of the
image.
Brightness Specifies the image's light intensity. Moving the slider to the
right lightens the image, while moving the slider to the left
darkens it.
Gamma Specifies the intensity of the light spectrum in an image. Moving

the slider to the right lightens the image, while moving the
slider to the left darkens it.
Exposure warning Highlights overexposed and underexposed areas of the image.
Reset Click to reset all options to the default setting.
Levels Options
Page 216 of 827


box to define the blackest area of an image. As the value
increases, the dark colored areas of the image become darker.
Midtones Specifies the gamma correction in an image.

Move the slider or type a number from 0.00 to 2.00 into the
spin box to set the amount of gamma correction. Higher values
make the image appear brighter, while lower values make the
image appear darker.

box to define the whitest area of an image. As the value
increases, the light colored areas of the image become lighter.
Clipped % Indicates how much of the image detail is lost due to black point
and white point correction.
Black Point Eyedropper Click the button with the black eyedropper icon to adjust the
black point. Select the area in the Before image that you want to
set as the black point for the After image.
Mid Point Eyedropper Click the button with the gray eyedropper icon to adjust the
gamma correction value. Select the area in the Before image
that you want to set as the gamma correction value.
White Point Eyedropper Click the button with the white eyedropper icon to adjust the
white point. Select the area in the Before image that you want
to set as the white point for the After image.
Auto Select one of the following options:

l Adjust Contrast: automatically analyzes and adjusts
image contrast.
l Adjust Color and Contrast: automatically analyzes and
adjusts each color channel independently, and then
adjusts the contrast.
l Adjust Color and Brightness: automatically analyzes
and adjusts image color and brightness.
l Tolerance: opens the Tolerance settings dialog box. Spe-
cify the maximum clipping percentage for Shadows and
Highlights, and click OK. ACDSee adjusts the image
levels automatically.
Page 217 of 827

Auto Levels Options

Strength Adjusts the amount of exposure applied to the image.
Auto Contrast Adjusts color differences, brightness, and image color channels.
and Color
Auto Contrast Adjusts the color differences and brightness only.
Exposure Highlights overexposed and underexposed areas of the image.

warning
Tone Curves Options

Channel Specifies the color channels to adjust.
Show Histogram Toggles the histogram display.
Histogram Displays a visual representation of the color information levels

in the image, based on the selected channel. Click and drag the
line to manipulate the curve.
Batch Edit Light EQ™ Options

You can use the options in the Light EQ™ section to independently adjust areas in your images that
are too light or too dark, without affecting other areas. As you make changes, you can see the effect
on the image in the After Light EQ™ tab, or you can click the Image List tab and click on any of the
other images to see the effect of the adjustment on each image.
To Adjust the Lighting:

In the Batch Edit wizard, check the Light EQ™ checkbox.
Light EQ™ Options
Page 218 of 827

Use automatic settings for each Allows the software to analyze the photo and apply optimal settings
image based on the amount of light and dark pixels in the photo. Darker
photos are brightened more than photos that are already bright.
Brighten Brightens dark areas in the images. Do one or both of the following:
l Compression: drag the slider to the right to brighten dark areas
in the image.
l Amplitude: drag the slider to the right to increase the intensity
of the brightening across all areas of the image.
Darken Darkens bright areas in the images. Do one or both of the following:
l Compression: drag the slider to the right to darken bright areas
in the image.
l Amplitude: drag the slider to the right to increase the intensity
of the darkening across all areas of the image.
Batch Edit Noise Removal Options

You can use the options in the Noise removal section to remove noise from your images while
preserving details that you want to retain.
To Use the Noise Removal Options:

1. Click Tools | Batch | Batch Edit.
2. In the Batch Edit dialog box, check the Noise Removal checkbox.
Noise Removal Options
Page 219 of 827

Despeckle Removes noise.
Square Removes noise using a 3 x 3 pixel square.
X Removes noise using a 3 x 3 pixel X shape. Use this option when you want to preserve an
image's thin and diagonal lines.
Plus Removes noise using a 3 x 3 pixel plus (+) shape. Use this option when you want to
preserve an image's thin, vertical, and horizontal lines.
Hybrid Removes noise using a 3 x 3 pixel square, a 3 x 3 pixel X shape, and a 3 x 3 pixel plus (+)
shape. Use this option when you want to preserve an image's thin, diagonal, horizontal,
and vertical lines. When hybrid is selected you have additional noise removal options:
l Luminance: drag the slider to the left or right to control variations in brightness.
l Color: drag the slider to the left or right to control variations in color (hue and sat-
uration). For example, drag the slider to the right if you want to reduce color vari-
ation. However, you should be careful about reducing color variation (that is caused
by noise) because you could unintentionally reduce real color variations in a photo.
Reset Discards all changes and reverts to the original noise level.
Batch Edit Sharpening Options

You can use the options in the Sharpening section to sharpen an image by enhancing the contrast of
medium-contrast and high-contrast edges.
To Use the Sharpening Options:

In the Batch Edit wizard, check the Sharpening checkbox.
Sharpening Options
Amount Specifies the amount of light added to or removed from each edge. Higher values
produce darker edges.
Radius Specifies the number of pixels to adjust around each edge. Higher values increase
the number of sharpened pixels.
Threshold Specifies how different the lightness values of two adjacent pixels must be before
they are sharpened. Higher values increase the required difference. It is
recommended that you set the threshold so that it enhances edges while keeping
background noise to a minimum.
Page 220 of 827

Batch Edit Vignette Options

You can use the options in the Vignette section to add a frame around a subject, such as a person or a
bouquet of flowers. You can change the focal point in the portrait. You can also control the
appearance of the border.
To Use the Vignette Options:

In the Batch Edit wizard, check the Vignette checkbox.
Vignette Options
Page 221 of 827

Horizontal Specifies the focal point of the portrait on the horizontal axis. A value of
500 places the center in the middle of the photo.
Vertical Specifies the focal point of the portrait on the vertical axis. A value of 500
places the center in the middle of the photo.
Clear zone Specifies the size of the clear area around the focal point in the portrait.
Drag the slider to the left to reduce the size of the clear area. Drag the
slider to the right to increase the size of the clear area.
Transition zone Specifies the width of the transition area between the clear zone and the
frame. Drag the slider to the left to narrow the transition area. Drag the
slider to the right to widen the transition area.
Shape Specifies the shape of the frame:

l Round: creates a round frame.
l Rectangular: creates a square frame.
Show outline Displays an outline that shows the outside edge of the clear zone and the
inside edge of the frame.
Frame Specifies special effects that you can apply to the frame around the focal
point:
l Color: applies a color to the frame area.
l Saturation: removes color from the frame area.
l Blur: blurs the frame area.
l Clouds: displays clouds over the frame area.
l Edges: traces the lines and details of people or objects within the
frame area with neon colors.
l Radial Waves: creates the appearance of waves radiating from the
focal point into the frame area.
l Radial Blur: rotates and stretches people or objects in the frame
area.
l Zoom Blur: applies a zoom blur to the frame area.
l Crayon Edges: traces the lines and details around people or objects
in the frame area with crayon.
l Dauber: creates the impression that the people or objects in the
frame area around the portrait were painted with a paint dauber.
l Pixelate: blurs images by increasing the size of the pixels in the
images.
l Old: gives your images an antique look.
l Glowing Edges: adds color to the lines and details in the frame. The
colored lines and details appear to glow.
l Ripple: divides your images into concentric circles that resemble
what you see when you drop a pebble into water.
Filter Settings The settings available in the Filter Settings area vary for each frame effect.
For example, if you select Color in the Frame area, a color picker displays in
the Filter Settings area. Similarly, if you select Blur in the Frame area, a
Page 222 of 827

slider that controls the level of blurriness displays in the Filter Settings
area.
Batch Edit Text Overlay Options

You can use the options in the Text Overlay section to add formatted text to a photo. You can apply
special effects to your text to add artistic flair. You can also adjust the opacity of the text to create a
watermark effect—useful for putting copyright information onto your photos.
To Use the Text Overlay Options:

In the Batch Edit wizard, check the Text Overlay checkbox.
Text Options
Page 223 of 827

Text Type the text you want to add in the available field, then specify the font
you want to use and the formatting options such as bold, italics, and
underline. Click the drop-down list to the right of the Text field to insert a
registration, copyright, or trademark symbol or image metadata.
Rotation Specify the rotation of the text.
Size Drag the slider to specify a point size.
Color Specify the color of the text.
Opacity Drag the slider to specify the transparency of the text.
Alignment Click a square to specify the alignment of the text in the text box.
Text box
Left Specify the alignment of the text box from the left edge of the image.
Right Specify the alignment of the text box from the right edge of the image.
Top Specify the alignment of the text box from the top edge of the image.
Bottom Specify the alignment of the text box from the bottom edge of the image.
Border Specify the color of the border of the text box, then drag the slider to
specify the transparency of the border.
Fill Specify the color of the fill in the text box, then drag the slider to specify the
transparency of the fill.
Reset
Box Effects Options
Page 224 of 827

Special Effect
Special Effect Specifies the effect you want to apply to the box. Each effect has different
options that control its appearance. Drag the sliders to adjust the
appearance of the box.
Bevel
Angle Specifies the direction of the imaginary light source that creates the bevel
effect. Drag the arrow to adjust the angle—note that this also adjusts the
angle of the drop shadow.
Elevation Specifies the height of the imaginary light source that creates the bevel's
shadowed effect. Lower values produce longer shadows on the box, while a
higher value produces a more direct lighting effect and shorter shadows.
Bevel Specifies how much of each box's edge is beveled. Higher values give the
box a more rounded, smoother look.
Strength Specifies the difference between the highest and lowest points on the box.
Higher values heighten the difference between the flat portions of the box
and the beveled edges.
Drop Shadow
Angle Specifies the direction of the imaginary light source that creates the drop
shadow. Drag the arrow to adjust the angle—note that this also adjusts the
shading of the box bevel.
Blur Specifies the amount of blur applied to the drop shadow. Sharp shadows
tend to seem less realistic than those with a slight blur.
Opacity Specifies the darkness of the drop shadow where it falls on the image.
Distance Specifies the distance between the drop shadow and the box. The higher
the value, the farther the shadow and the higher the box appears.
If a drop shadow is cut off, or has a noticeably sharp edge, you may need to
increase the size of the box rectangle.
Blend Mode
Blend Mode Select an option from the Blend Mode drop-down list to specify how you
want the box to blend into the underlying image.
Text Effects Options
Page 225 of 827

Special Effect
Special Effect Specifies the effect you want to apply to your text. Each effect has different
options that control its appearance. Drag the sliders to adjust the
appearance of the text.
Bevel
Angle Specifies the direction of the imaginary light source that creates the bevel
effect. Drag the arrow to adjust the angle - note that this also adjusts the
angle of the drop shadow.
Elevation Specifies the height of the imaginary light source that creates the bevel's
shadowed effect. Lower values produce longer shadows on the text, while a
higher value produces a more direct lighting effect and shorter shadows.
Bevel Specifies how much of each letter's edge is beveled. Higher values give the
text a more rounded, smoother look.
Strength Specifies the difference between the highest and lowest points on the text.
Higher values heighten the difference between the flat portions of the text
and the beveled edges.
Drop Shadow
Angle Specifies the direction of the imaginary light source that creates the drop
shadow. Drag the arrow to adjust the angle—note that this also adjusts the
shading of the text bevel.
Blur Specifies the amount of blur applied to the drop shadow. Sharp shadows
tend to seem less realistic than those with a slight blur.
Opacity Specifies the darkness of the drop shadow where it falls on the image.
Distance Specifies the distance between the drop shadow and the text. The higher
the value, the farther the shadow and the higher the text appears.
If a drop shadow is cut off, or has a noticeably sharp edge, you may need to
increase the size of the text rectangle.
Blend Mode
Blend Mode Select an option from the Blend Mode drop-down list to specify how you
want the text to blend into the underlying image.
Page 226 of 827

Batch Edit Watermark Options

You can use the options in the Watermark section to add a watermark to an image. You can move the
watermark to any position on the image. You can also change the opacity of the watermark and blend
the watermark into the image. While this is one way to do the batch application of watermarks, we
recommended using ACDSee Actions as a more comprehensive batch processing tool.
To Use the Watermark Options:

In the Batch Edit wizard, check the Watermark checkbox.
Watermark Options
Image
Browse Click to select a watermark, or select a watermark from the drop-

down list. The watermark displays in the center of the photo by
default. Click and drag the watermark to position it, or use the
options on the Position & Blending tab.
Maintain aspect ratio while Select if you want to resize the watermark without stretching or
resizing distorting the shape.
Apply Alpha Channel Select to apply the alpha channel if it is present in the watermark.
(Only TIFF, PNG, and ICO watermark files can have an alpha
channel.)
Apply Transparency Select to make a color in the watermark transparent. The default
color is white. You can enter the RGB value of the color. If you do
not know the RGB value, move your cursor over the watermark
preview thumbnail and click on the color that you want to make
transparent.
Position & Blending
Location Specify the horizontal and vertical location of the watermark in

pixels or percent.
Blending Mode Specify how you want the watermark to blend with the image.
Opacity Drag the slider to specify the transparency of the watermark.
Reset
Page 227 of 827

Using Batch Develop

The Batch Develop tool is useful for applying a Develop preset to multiple images and exporting
multiple images to other file formats.
To Apply a Preset to a Batch of Images:

1. In Manage mode, select the images that you want to develop.
Right-click to display the context menu and select Batch | Batch Develop (also available in View
mode).
Click Batch | Batch Develop.
3. Select a preset in the Select a develop preset section.
4. Check the Export files to another format checkbox if you want to save the images in a different file
format (for example, JPEG or TIFF).
5. Click Options to display the Export dialog box and select file formats and other options. (See table
below.)
6. Refer to the table below to make your selections from the Export dialog box
7. Click Ok.
8. Click Develop.
Export Options
Page 228 of 827

Destination folder
Same as source folder Select this option to use the same folder where the source images
currently reside.
Check the Create a new subfolder for the files checkbox to place the
images within a subfolder of the source folder.
Specific folder Click this button to change the output folder to a specific location.
File names
Use Template to rename files Using a template gives you control over the output file name. If you
choose not use a template, the file name is unchanged. Duplicate files
are given an underscore and number suffix.
Template Check the Use Template to rename files checkbox to create a

renaming template. You can specify a numerical or alphabetical
sequence for the new file names, and use the original file names, new
names, or names based on image metadata.
Template field Displays the template to use to rename

the files.
Type an asterisk (*) to insert the original
file name into the template. Use one or
more number signs (#) to insert numeric
or alphabetic characters, depending which
options you selected.
Click the arrow on the drop-down list to
select a recently-used template.
Insert | Metadata field Inserts file-specific information into the

file name template.
Position the cursor in the Template field,
and then click Insert Metadata to open
the Choose Property dialog box. Select the
metadata you want to insert, and then
click OK.
Insert | Sequence Replaces any number signs (#) in the

number template with sequential numeric
characters or alphabetic characters. Select
numeric or alphabetic preference in
Sequence number options below.
Insert | Original Replaces any asterisk signs (*) in the

filename template name with the original filename.
Page 229 of 827

Insert | Sequence Specifies the first letter or number of the

number options sequence.
Start at
Format
File Format Select the file format in which you would like to save the exported
images.
Format Settings Click this button to change the settings for the format you have
selected.
Pixel format Specify the color depth for your format settings.
Color space Check the color space checkbox to choose a color space option from
the drop-down list.
Output size
Resize image Select this option to specify how to scale the images. Select from the
following options:
Dimensions: select this option to force the exported images to fit

the set dimensions independent of landscape or portrait
orientation. Enter the dimensions in pixels, inches, or centimeters.
Width and height: select this option to resize the exported image
to fit within the values entered in the two boxes.
Long edge: select this option to resize the image to the long edge
only. Enter the dimensions in pixels, inches, or centimeters.
Short edge: select this option to resize the image to the short edge
only. Enter the dimensions in pixels, inches, or centimeters.
Percentage: select this option to resize by percent.
Enlarge or reduce: resizes all images to the specified height and

width.
Reduce only: resizes only those images that are larger than the
Enlarge only: enlarge only resizes only those images that are
smaller than the specified height and width.
Resolution Enter a resolution to set the number of pixels per inch or centimeter.
Preserve original aspect ratio Select this option to maintain original image proportions. Note: images
resized to long or short edge maintain original image proportion.
Page 230 of 827

Metadata
Metadata Select these options if the image contains metadata, and you want the
exported image to contain the same metadata and color profile.
Option: you can save your settings as a preset by clicking the new export preset button
and entering a name for your preset. Select one or more presets in the list to apply.
To edit a preset, click the preset in the list, make your edits, and click the Save current export
preset button .
About the ACDSee Database

The ACDSee Ultimate database stores image, document, and media file information automatically
when you browse your folders. This process is called cataloging. The database increases the speed
with which you can browse your computer, and you can use the information stored in the database to
sort, organize, search, and filter your images and media files. You can also backup, restore, and share
database information.
You can store cached thumbnail previews, and add or edit the following information for each image or
media file on your computer:
Categories
Notes
Keywords
Color Labels
Authors
Dates
Ratings
Captions
Face Data
You can also choose to exclude folders from the database, and keep the contents of those folders
separate from your other images and media files.
When you add ACDSee Metadata to a file in ACDSee, the file is linked to the database. If you
then copy, move, or rename your files using programs other than ACDSee, such as Windows
Explorer, the link to the database is broken and this can cause the loss of ACDSee Metadata.
Page 231 of 827

Embedding ACDSee Metadata in Files

If you edit or add ACDSee Metadata to your files, ACDSee Ultimate automatically adds the new data to
its database. If you have the Display embed ACDSee metadata reminder checkbox checked in the
Options dialog box, (click Tools | Options | Database), next time you close ACDSee, the Embed
ACDSee Metadata in Files dialog box opens and offers to embed the new data into the changed files
themselves. You can also set how often you would like this reminder displayed. Embedding ACDSee
Metadata in the files as well, is a safe way to back up this data and make it easier to retrieve if you
should need to.
For example, once you have assigned ACDSee Metadata to a file, the file is linked to the database. If
the file is moved using Windows Explorer, or any application other than ACDSee, the link will be
broken. However if you have embedded this data in the file and the link is broken, you can still retrieve
the ACDSee Metadata using the embedded data in the files.
You can use ACDSee Ultimate to rename, move, or copy the file—even to another computer—and the
embedded ACDSee Metadata will transfer with the file.
To Embed ACDSee Metadata in a File When You Are Prompted:

1. In the Embed ACDSee Metadata dialog, in the Embed section, select the types of metadata you would
like to embed.
To embed data in files that are on a network, check the Include files on network drives
checkbox.
To write the information to a sidecar file if the file format does not support embedding inside
the file, select the Write sidecar files for formats that do not support embedded XMP.
To accept the current selection in the dialog and have these options happen automatically in
future, select Do not ask me this again.
3. Click Embed to embed the data in the files. A progress bar appears, followed by the Embed Summary
Report dialog that lists the following:
Items Selected: indicates the number of files that you selected.
Items Processed: indicates the number of files that were actually processed. (If you selected
files that did not need to have date embedded, this number may be different from the Items
Selected.)
Succeeded: indicates the number of files that had data embedded.
Failed: indicates the number of files that, for a variety of reasons, could not have data
embedded. (To see the Error Log, click View Errors.)
4. Click Close.
To Embed ACDSee Metadata at Any Time:
Page 232 of 827

You can embed data in files at any time.

1. Click Tools | Metadata | Embed ACDSee Metadata, and then select one of the following:
Embed in All Files: embeds data for all files.
Embed in Selected Files: embeds data for any files that you have selected.
2. In the Embed ACDSee Metadata dialog, in the Embed section, select the types of metadata you would
like to embed.
To embed data in files that are on a network, check the Include files on network drives
checkbox.
To write the information to a sidecar file if the file format does not support embedding inside
the file, select the Write sidecar files for formats that do not support embedded XMP.
4. Click Embed to embed the data in the files. A progress bar appears, followed by the Embed Summary
Report dialog that lists the following:
Items Selected: indicates the number of files that you selected.
Items Processed: indicates the number of files actually that were processed. (If you selected
files that did not need to have date embedded, this number may be different from the Items
Selected.)
Succeeded: indicates the number of files that had data embedded.
Failed: indicates the number of files that, for a variety of reasons, could not have data
embedded. (To see the Error Log, click View Errors.)
5. Click Close.
The Embed Pending Icon

In Manage mode, in the File List pane, the following overlay icon appears on top of files that have
ACDSee Metadata and Face Data stored in the ACDSee Ultimate database that has not yet been
written to the file:
Page 233 of 827

Right-click and choose either:

Embed ACDSee Metadata: writes the metadata to the file.
Clear Embed Pending Icon...: clears this overlay icon, but does not write the metadata to the file.
Viewing Files That Have Data to Embed

If you want to see the files that have data that needs to be embedded, there is a quick way to list them
using the Embed Pending option.
To View Files That Have Data to Embed:

In the Catalog pane, under Special Items, click Embed Pending.
All the files that have data to embed are displayed in the File List.
Retrieving ACDSee Metadata That is Embedded in Files

If you simply browse to the folder where the files are located, some of the ACDSee Metadata is
retrieved and written to the database. Categories and keywords, however, are not.
The safest way to retrieve all the ACDSee Metadata, (including categories and keywords), is to click
Tools | Database | Catalog Files. Then the following applies:
If the files are GIF, JPEG, DNG, PNG, and TIF formats, all the data will be retrieved and written to the
database.
If the files still have their sidecar files in the folder, and they still have the same file name, the database
information is retrieved and written to the database.
If the files have become separated from their sidecar files or renamed, their ACDSee Metadata cannot
be retrieved and will be lost.
Excluding Folders From the Database

You can choose to exclude folders from the database, and keep the contents separate from your other
images and media files. By default, the Program Files and Windows folders on your hard drive are
automatically excluded from the database.
To Manage Your Excluded Folders Settings:
Page 234 of 827

1. In Manage mode, click Tools | Database | Excluded Folder Settings.
2. In the Excluded Folders dialog box, do one of the following:
To exclude a folder from the database, click Add. Browse to a folder on your hard drive, and
then click OK.
To remove a folder from the excluded folders list, select a folder in the list, and then click
Remove.
To reset your excluded folders list to the default settings, click Reset to Defaults.
3. When you are satisfied with your choices, click Close to return to ACDSee.
Cataloging Files in the Database

ACDSee Ultimate automatically adds file information and thumbnails to the database as you browse.
You can use the Catalog dialog box to add groups of files to the database without having to first
browse the folders. This can be particularly useful when using ACDSee Ultimate for the first time, and
when browsing or managing large collections of images, as it reduces the loading time required for
these folders.
The first time you run ACDSee, you are prompted to catalog your files.
To Catalog Your Files:

1. In Manage mode, click Tools | Database | Catalog Files...
2. In the Folders to Catalog section, check the checkbox next to the folders you want to catalog.
If you want to add folders that are not in the list, click Add folder..., select the folders you want
to include, and then click OK.
3. In the Import from Cataloged Files section, select the information to add to the database. If you choose
to import Face Data, select between ACDSee Face Data or Lightroom or Picasa Face Data.
4. In the File Formats section, select the type of files to catalog.
5. In the Options section, select any additional actions you wish to perform.
6. Click Start.
A progress bar shows your files as they are cataloged.

7. Click Finish.
If you are cataloging a large collection of files, do not disrupt the process, or use other
software while it is running. For large file collections, it is best to run cataloging overnight.
Page 235 of 827

About the ACDSee Indexer
Cataloging and the Database.

The ACDSee database stores file information when you browse your folders. This process is called
cataloging. Cataloging and using the database can help you sort, organize, search, and filter your files,
as well as speeding up browsing. The ACDSee Indexer is a tool that helps you catalog your images
without browsing through them.
You can use the Catalog dialog box to add files to the database without having to first browse the
folders. During this time, you will not be able to use ACDSee.
The ACDSee Indexer allows you to catalog files while your computer is idle and ACDSee is not running.
This saves you from having to browse all folders or experience your computer slowing down while
processing. If you have edited any files in the selected folders, the ACDSee Indexer will update the
database.
You can set folders to be cataloged and how long you would like your computer to be idle before the
ACDSee Indexer begins to catalog your files. To configure these options, see Setting the ACDSee
Indexer Options.
Creating and Switching Between Multiple Databases

ACDSee allows you to create multiple databases and switch between them at any time, giving you
complete organizational control over your file collections.
When you open ACDSee for the first time, (and up until you create additional databases), you will be
using the original database called Default.dbin. It is located in: C:\Users\<Your
Name>\AppData\Local\ACD Systems\Catalogs\<Version #>. All additional databases that you create
will be stored in this same location, unless you specify otherwise.
You can configure ACDSee to display the database it is currently running in the title bar of the
application.
To Create a New Database:

1. In Manage mode, open File | Database | New...
2. In the New Database dialog box, enter a name for your new database.
3. Browse to choose the location where the database will be stored, or leave it set to the existing location
to store the new database with your existing database, Default.dbin.
The database file will be stored with a folder of the same name. The database file and
folder must always share exactly the same name, or ACDSee will not be able to connect to
the database.
Page 236 of 827

4. If you would like to have the name of your database displayed in the title bar of the application, check
the Show database filename in title bar checkbox.
5. Click OK.
6. A dialog will appear asking you if you would like to switch to your newly created database. Select Yes or
No. If you select Yes, ACDSee will restart and run with the new database.
To Switch from One Database to Another:

In Manage mode, do one of the following:
Open File | Database | In the Open Database dialog, browse to the database file (*.dbin) you want to
Open... use and click Open.
Open File | Database | Select one of your recently used databases.

Recent
To Quickly Launch ACDSee in a Specific Database Using Command Line Switch:

1. Create a shortcut to ACDSee. It is recommended that you name this shortcut something that
corresponds to the name of the database you want to open.
2. In the shortcut properties, set the target to C:\Program Files\ACD Systems\ACDSee Ultimate\<Version
#>\ACDSeeUltimate<Version #>.exe" /db "C:\Users\<Your Name>\AppData\Local\ACD
Systems\Catalogs\<Version #>FileManager\<Name of Your Database>.dbin".
Converting an Older Database

You can use the ACD Database Convert wizard to take database information from previous versions of
ACDSee Ultimate and add it to your current database. This ensures that any information associated
with your files using a previous version of ACDSee Ultimate is referenced properly in the current
database.
If you have already added information to your current ACDSee Ultimate database, it is
recommended that you create a backup of your database before converting an olderACDSee
Ultimate database.
To Convert an Older Database:

1. In Manage mode, click Tools | Database | Convert Database.
2. On the Welcome page, click Next to select your conversion options.
3. On the Database Convert Options page, specify the version of the database files you want to convert, as
well as the folder where the database files are located on your hard drive. Click Next.
Page 237 of 827

4. To automatically rebuild image thumbnails, IPTC and EXIF information after the conversion process is
complete, check the Rebuild thumbnails, EXIF and IPTC data for local images checkbox.
5. To automatically update your database after converting, check the Optimize database files after
convert checkbox.
6. Click Next.
7. On the Summary page, review your selections, and then click Next to convert your database.
Importing Database Information

You can use the ACD Database Import wizard to import archived database information, or to import
database information that was sent to you with images from another ACDSee Ultimate user. After you
import the information, ACDSee Ultimate associates it with the appropriate images.
If you have already added information to your current ACDSee Ultimate database, it is
recommended that you create a backup of your database before converting an olderACDSee
Ultimate database.
To Use the ACD Database Import Wizard:

1. In Manage mode, click Tools | Database | Import, and then select Database.
2. Click Next to start the wizard.
3. On the Import Options page, select the type of exported database information you want to import.
You can import image information from a compressed database version, or information from
an XML-based text file.
4. Click the Browse button to locate the database you want to import, and then click OK.
5. Check the Optimize database files after import checkbox to optimize the database after exiting the
wizard, and then click Next.
6. On the Summary page, review your selections. Click Back to make changes, or click Next to begin
importing the database information.
7. Click Finish to close the ACD Database Import wizard.
If you are importing database information sent to you by anotherACDSee Ultimate user,
ensure that the images to which the information applies are in an identical location and folder
structure on your hard drive.
Importing File Information from Other Sources

You can import file information into your database from other sources, including ACDSee Photo Discs
and files from previous versions of ACDSee.
Page 238 of 827

Importing Photo Discs

Previous versions of ACDSee (versions 4.0 and 5.0) created separate database files with a .ddf file
extension for Photo Discs. You can import the Photo Disc database files into your ACDSee Ultimate
database.
To Import a Photo Disc:

1. In Manage mode, click Tools | Database | Import, and then select Photo Disc.
2. In the Open dialog box, locate and select the photo disc file you want to import.
3. Click Open.
To import the information from Photo Discs created with ACDSee 6.0 or later, you must
convert and import the entire database.
Importing Albums
In previous versions of ACDSee, you could create albums in an .ais file format that consisted of
organized shortcuts to your images. Now you can use categories to create albums of images that do
not require a separate file extension. You can, however, import your albums from previous versions of
ACDSee, and add the information from the albums to the database. ACDSee Ultimate creates a new
category for each album you import.
To Import Album Information into the Database:

1. In Manage mode, click Tools | Database | Import, and then select Album.
2. In the Open dialog box, locate and select the .ais file you want to import.
3. Click Open.
Working with Descript.ion Files

In previous versions of ACDSee, file descriptions were stored in a separate descript.ion file in each
folder that contained images. ACDSee Ultimate now stores file descriptions as captions in the
database, along with other file information such as notes and keywords.
You can use the Descript.ion tools to import your old descript.ion files and add the information to the
database, or export your existing file captions to a descript.ion file.
To Import a Descript.ion File:

1. In Manage mode, click Tools | Database | Import, and then select Descript.ion File.
2. In the Open dialog box, locate and select the descript.ion file you want to import.
3. Click Open.
Page 239 of 827

To Export Captions to a Descript.ion File:

1. In Manage mode, click Tools | Database | Export, and then select Descript.ion File.
2. In the Save As dialog box, type a name for the descript.ion file in the File name field.
3. Click Save.
Exporting Database Information

You can use the ACD Database Export wizard to save selected database information in a compressed
format, and then store it as a backup, or share it with other ACDSee Ultimate users. You can also
choose to export your category and keyword definitions to a text file.
Exporting your database information differs from creating a backup in that you can choose to export
only the parts of your database that you want to share or store with specific files, such as those on a
CD. Other ACDSee Ultimate users can import your information without affecting their existing
database.
To create a backup of your entire database, including image or media files, use the ACD Database
Backup wizard.
To back up the contents of a local folder to a remote location, such as a network drive, use the ACD
Sync wizard.
To Use the ACD Database Export Wizard:

1. If you want to export your database information for a specific group of images or media files, select the
files in the File List pane in Manage mode.
2. Click Tools | Database | Export | Database.
3. Click Next to begin using the wizard.
4. On the Content and Format Options page, specify how you want to export your database information by
selecting one of the following options, and then clicking Next:
Export entire ACDSee database to a read-only, compressed version: exports the entire
contents of your ACDSee Ultimate database to a compressed version that can be shared with
other ACDSee Ultimate users.
Export database information for selected items to a read-only, compressed version: exports
all of your database information for the images selected in the File List pane.
Export database information to a text file: exports the selected information to an XML-based
text file. Check the checkboxes next to the information you want to include.
5. On the Location Options page, specify a location for the exported information, and a name for the text
file, if necessary, and then click Next.
6. On the Summary page, review your choices. You can click Back to make changes, or click Next to begin
Page 240 of 827

exporting your database information.
7. Click Finish to close the wizard and return to ACDSee.
Generating File Lists

You can generate a text file that lists all of the files in the folder currently displayed in the File List pane.
The text file places the file name, size, image file format, modified date, image properties, caption, and
rating for all of the files in the folder into a table, and creates a single text file.
To Generate a List of Your Files:

In Manage mode, click Tools | Database | Export, and then select Generate File Listing.
ACDSee Ultimate automatically generates the file listing and opens it as a text file in your default
text editor. You can then edit or save the text file.
Backing Up Your Database

You can use the ACDSee Backup wizard to back up all of your database information, which you can
then restore in the case of a system failure or other event. You can also choose to back up your image,
media, or archive files along with the relevant database information.
The ACDSee Backup wizard creates a series of files in a specified location that contain your entire
database. The backup is generated using your folder structure and is unique to your computer. To
back up portions of your database, or to share database information with another ACDSee Ultimate
user, use the ACDSee Database Export wizard.
For some suggestions about managing your database backups, see Database Backup Tips and
Strategies.
To Back Up Your Database Information:

1. In Manage mode, click Tools | Database | Back Up Database.
2. On the Welcome page, select whether you would like to create a new backup, or update an existing
backup. Click Next.
If you choose to update an existing backup, please go to step #5.

3. On the New Backup page, select the information you would like to back up. Click Next.
4. On the Backup Location page, click Browse and specify a location for your backup, and type a name for
the backup file. Click Next.
5. On the Backup Summary page, review your settings. If you chose to update an existing backup, click the
Backup to update drop-down list, and then select the existing backup. Click Next.
Backup Information Options
Page 241 of 827

Do not include Excludes thumbnails from the backup, saving a substantial amount of storage
thumbnails space on your hard drive.
Include thumbnails for Includes only thumbnails for files that do not reside on your hard drive, such as
offline files PhotoDiscs.
Include thumbnails Includes all thumbnails in the database. This will require more space on your
hard drive to store the backup.
Backup files of type Backs up the specified file types with the database information. Select from the
following file types:
Image: includes image files in the backup.
Media: includes audio and video files in the backup.
Archive: includes archive files in the backup.
All files of specified Backs up all specified files on your hard drive.
types on your local hard
drives
All files of specified Backs up all specified files on your hard drive and network drives.
types on local and
network hard drives
All files of specified Backs up all specified files in a specified folder. Click the Browse button and
types in a folder select the folder to back up.
(including subfolders)
Database Backup Tips and Strategies

The ACDSee Ultimate database stores information about your files, including EXIF information, file
name and folder location, thumbnails, categories, ratings, and any other information you add using
the Properties pane. The more information you store in the database, and the more time you spend
entering that information, the more important it is to back up your database, and to have a good
strategy for managing your backups. Losing hours of work to a system crash or other uncontrollable
event is something that should, and can, be avoided.
Backup Schedule
How often you need to back up depends on how often you add or change information in the
database. A good rule to use would be to back up your data as often as you want to avoid retyping it.
You can use the backup reminder settings on the Database page of the Options dialog box to set a
regular reminder for yourself to back up your data as often as you think appropriate. Business
environments and professional users should back up every day.
Page 242 of 827

It is also recommended that you back up your database before performing any major adjustments to
it, such as importing information from another ACDSee Ultimate user, or converting a database from a
previous version of ACDSee.
Backup Location
It's a good idea to consider where you back up your data, as well as how often. If you're backing up to
your hard drive, ACDSee Ultimate creates a new folder for each day. This helps to avoid overwriting
your backup, and gives you several increments from which you can restore. Also helpful is a monthly
backup that is stored in a different physical location than your computer, such as a network drive.
Backup Size
To keep the size of the backup small, choose to back up database information only, and back up your
images separately, also on a regular basis.
Restoring Database Information From a Backup

You can use the ACD Database Restore wizard to restore previously backed up database information.
To Restore Database Information:

1. In Manage mode, click Tools | Database | Restore Database.
2. On the Welcome page, click Next to select the backup.
3. On the Restore Options page, select the backup and date from which you want to restore, or browse to
the location of your backup and select a .bkup file.
4. Click Next when you are ready to restore your database.
When restoring a backup from a series of backup files, ACDSee Ultimate will only restore the
information included in and prior to the selected backup file. Therefore, unless required, it is
recommended that you select the last file in the backup sequence.
Maintaining the Database

It is recommended that you regularly perform database maintenance and optimization to increase
hard drive space, remove redundant or extraneous information, and increase overall ACDSee Ultimate
performance.
You can use the tools in the Database Maintenance dialog box to update folders, or to identify folders
whose thumbnails and database information you would like to delete. The Database Maintenance
dialog box displays a list of the folders on your system, and uses icons to indicate the status of
database information within specific folders.
Page 243 of 827

Database Content Icons

Folder contains files with cached thumbnails stored in the database.
Folder contains files that were changed without a database update. For example, a folder or file was
renamed or moved outside of ACDSee.
To Perform Database Maintenance:

1. In Manage mode, click Tools | Database | Database Maintenance.
2. In the Database Maintenance dialog box, browse for folders marked with the database content icons. If
there are no marked folders, you do not need to perform database maintenance and can exit the
Database Maintenance dialog box.
3. Select a folder and click one of the following buttons to identify the maintenance you want to perform
on that folder:
Remove Thumbnails: removes all thumbnail information for the selected folder.
Remove All DB Info: deletes all database and thumbnail information for the selected folder.
Remove Orphan Folders: deletes any out-of-date or broken references to missing files or
information for the selected folder. It is only possible to check for orphans in folders located on
your computer. This option will not be visible if the folder is located on a network.
Change Binding: changes all location references for the selected orphaned folder to another
folder, and retains all database information. The default binding folder is My Pictures.
4. The Database Maintenance tool will delete records, creating unused space in your database. To reclaim
the unused space, click Optimize Database, and follow the instructions in the wizard.
5. Click Close.
Optimizing the Database

You can use the Optimize Database wizard to quickly remove redundant or outdated database
records. Optimizing your database, along with performing regular database maintenance, helps regain
hard drive space and improves the overall performance of ACDSee.
If you are cataloging large numbers of files regularly, it is helpful to optimize weekly, or after an
extended cataloging session. This is also a good time to backup the database.
To Optimize Your Database:

1. In Manage mode, click Tools | Database | Optimize Database.
2. In the Database Optimization wizard, click Next.
Page 244 of 827

3. Select one or both of the following:
Optimize the database tables and fields: removes obsolete information from the database,
reduces the space used by database fields, and re-indexes the tables.
Remove orphans from database: removes any orphan database entries, caused by files or
folders deleted by other programs.
4. Click Next.
5. When the wizard has finished, click Finish to return to ACDSee.
Mapping Drives for an Incoming Database

If you are upgrading to ACDSee Ultimate or are importing or restoring your ACDSee Ultimate database,
the Database Drive Mapping dialog displays how drive mappings (in the incoming database) will be re-
established in the ACDSee Ultimate database. You can use this dialog to change how each drive will be
mapped in the database.
To Select New Drive Mappings:

1. In the Database Drive Mapping dialog, select a drive and do one of the following:
To create a new drive map, select Create new database entry.
To map the drive to a local drive, select a drive from the Local Drive drop-down list.
2. Click Done.
Rebuilding Thumbnails and Metadata

Situations can develop in which your images will be out of sync with the thumbnail images displayed in
the File List pane and the embedded metadata. You can use the Rebuild Thumbnails and Metadata
tool to immediately regenerate the thumbnails for selected images and rebuild the metadata.
To Rebuild Thumbnails:
Select one or more thumbnails in the File List pane.
Select a folder in the Folders pane.
2. Click Tools | Metadata | Rebuild Thumbnails and Metadata.
Page 245 of 827

Quarantined Files
If ACDSee Ultimate has trouble reading a corrupted or incomplete image or media file, or a file causes a
plug-in to generate an error, ACDSee Ultimate will quarantine that file. You can view a list of
quarantined files, and remove a file from the list.
To View Quarantined Files:

1. In Manage mode, click Tools | Database | Quarantine Files.
2. To remove a file, select it in the list, and then click Remove.
3. To disable the Quarantine feature, uncheck the Enable Quarantine checkbox.
4. Click OK to close the Quarantine Files dialog box and return to ACDSee.
Working with Plug-Ins

A plug-in is a software module that adds functionality to a larger program. ACDSee Ultimate comes as
standard with many different plug-ins.
Types of Plug-Ins
Image Decode: converts a file from a binary format to the image displayed in ACDSee. Decode plug-ins
allow ACDSee Ultimate to display images of many different file formats. The files that you can view with
ACDSee Ultimate depend on which decoding plug-ins are installed on your computer.
Image Encode: converts the image displayed in ACDSee Ultimate to a binary file format. Encode plug-
ins allow ACDSee Ultimate to save (or convert) images to many different file formats. The files that you
can edit and save with ACDSee Ultimate depend on which encoding plug-ins are installed on your
computer.
Archive: allows ACDSee Ultimate to display and save archives of many different file formats. The
archives that you can view and create with ACDSee Ultimate depend on which archive plug-ins are
installed on your computer.
Camera: allows ACDSee Ultimate to browse images on your digital camera and transfer them to a folder
on your hard drive.
Command Extension: adds functionality to ACDSee. For example, there is a plug-in that you can use to
share your images over the Internet.
Pane Extension: adds a pane to ACDSee Ultimate where you can perform tasks like order prints of your
digital images.
We cannot ensure the quality of plug-ins that are not certified by ACD Systems. As with any
other piece of software, you are trusting that the plug-in is free of viruses and that the
company that produced the plug-in is trustworthy.
Page 246 of 827

Managing Plug-Ins
The Plug-in Settings dialog box displays a list of all the ACDSee plug-ins installed on your computer.
You can also use the Plug-in Settings dialog box to control which plug-ins ACDSee Ultimate uses.
To Access the Plug-In Settings Dialog Box:

In Manage mode, click Tools | Plug-in Settings.
Disabling a Plug-In
You can disable a plug-in in the Plug-in Settings dialog box so that ACDSee Ultimate no longer uses it.
To Disable a Plug-In:
1. In the Plug-in Settings dialog box, select one of the Plug-in tabs.
2. Uncheck the checkbox beside the name of the plug-in that you do not want ACDSee Ultimate to use.
3. Click OK.
Changing the Plug-In Order

Some file formats can be supported by more than one plug-in. However, when this happens, you can
control which plug-in is used to read or write a file format. The order that plug-ins appear in the Plug-in
Settings dialog box is the order that ACDSee Ultimate uses the plug-ins to read or write a file.
To Change the Plug-In Order:

2. Select a plug-in in the Plug-ins list.
Click the Move up button to move the plug-in higher in the list.
Click the Move down button to move the plug-in lower in the list.
4. Click OK.
Viewing Plug-In Properties and Getting Help

You can view and set properties for certain plug-ins.
To View Plug-In Properties:
Page 247 of 827

3. Click the Properties button.
To View a Plug-In's Help File:

3. Click the Plug-in Help button.
ACDSee SeeDrive™
The ACDSee SeeDrive™ pane provides direct access to your ACDSee 365 account. You can use the
ACDSee SeeDrive™ to manage your ACDSee 365 images, and monitor your uploads and downloads to
365.acdsee.com, an image sharing and storage service. An ACDSee 365 account requires a membership
or the purchase of additional storage, which you can obtain at 365.acdsee.com.
ACDSee SeeDrive™ allows you to browse through your online images without having to launch an
Internet browser. Alternatively, you can go to 365.acdsee.com with an Internet browser. To view the
SeeDrive™ pane, go to Panes | SeeDrive.
To Use ACDSee SeeDrive™:

In the ACDSee SeeDrive™ pane, press Connect and enter your ACDSee 365 login credentials. If you do
not have an ACDSee 365 account, select Create an account.
Alternatively, you can log in through 365 mode.
Page 248 of 827

Managing Your ACDSee 365 Files with SeeDrive™

You can create, rename, and delete ACDSee 365 folders directly from ACDSee SeeDrive™ in Manage
mode.
To Create a New Folder:

1. In the ACDSee SeeDrive™ pane in Manage mode, right-click your username and select New Online
Folder...
2. In the New Online Folder dialog, enter a name for your folder and press OK.
To add a newly created folder to an existing folder hierarchy, drag the new folder to your
desired location inside of it.
To Create a New Folder Inside an Existing Folder:

1. In the ACDSee SeeDrive™ pane in Manage mode, expose your folders by clicking the arrow next to your
username.
2. Right-click your desired folder and select New Online Folder...
3. In the New Online Folder dialog, enter a name for your folder and press OK.
To Rename a Folder:
In the ACDSee SeeDrive™ pane in Manage mode, right-click the folder and select Rename.
To Delete a Folder:
In the ACDSee SeeDrive™ pane in Manage mode, right-click the folder and select Delete.
To Rename a File:
1. In the ACDSee SeeDrive™ pane in Manage mode, navigate to and open your desired folder.
2. In the File List pane, right-click the file and select Rename.
To Delete a File:
1. In the ACDSee SeeDrive™ pane in Manage mode, navigate to and open your desired folder.
2. In the File List pane, right-click the file and select Delete.
Uploading
Uploading Files to ACDSee 365 with SeeDrive™:
Page 249 of 827

To upload a folder: select a folder from the Folders pane and drag it into your desired folder in ACDSee
SeeDrive™.
To upload individual files: select your desired files in the File List pane and drag them into your desired
folder in ACDSee SeeDrive™.
Manage your uploads by right-clicking any folder in ACDSee SeeDrive™ and selecting Transfer
Manager... Use the Transfer Manager controls as described in the table below.
Downloading
Downloading Files from ACDSee 365 with SeeDrive™:

1. Select your destination folder in the Folders pane.
2. Select the folder you would like to download in ACDSee SeeDrive™, right-click and choose Download.
Manage your downloads by right-clicking any folder in ACDSee SeeDrive™ and selecting Transfer
Manager... Use the Transfer Manager controls as described in the table below.
Transfer Manager Options

Choose the Uploads or Downloads tab.
Restarts paused transfer
Pauses transfer
Cancels transfer
Retry transfer
Select all
Clear finished
Making Folders Private or Public

You can set folders to private or public in the ACDSee SeeDrive™ pane in Manage mode. When you
make a folder public, anyone can find and see the images in that folder when they browse or search
365.acdsee.com.
New folders are set to private by default.
To Change an ACDSee 365 Folder to Public Using ACDSee SeeDrive™:
Page 250 of 827

1. In the ACDSee SeeDrive™ pane, expose your folders by clicking the arrow next to your username.
2. Right-click the folder you want to make public, and select Make Public.
To Change an ACDSee 365 Folder Back to Private Using ACDSee SeeDrive™:

1. In the ACDSee SeeDrive™ pane, expose your folders by clicking the arrow next to your username.
2. Right-click the folder you want to make private, and select Make Private.
Sharing and Downloading with ACDSee SeeDrive™

You can perform sharing and downloading actions on your online content from right within ACDSee
SeeDrive™. You can also view and manage the progress of your uploads and downloads with the
Transfer Manager.
Sharing a Folder with ACDSee SeeDrive™

You can share your ACDSee 365 folders with others right from your ACDSee SeeDrive™ pane. You can
share using Email, post to a social networking site, or create a widget.
To Share Your Folders Using ACDSee SeeDrive™:

username.
2. Right-click the folder you want to share and select Share Folder.
3. In the Share window, select your sharing method and enter your information, as described below.
Share Options
Page 251 of 827

Email
Scroll through your images at the bottom of the window and uncheck any photos you do not wish to include.
After you have entered the information below, press OK.
Recipient Email Addresses Enter your recipients' email addresses. Separate multiple
email addresses with commas.
Your Message Enter a message for your recipients.
Allow download of largest available Allow your recipients to download the largest available
JPG versions of your images.
Email me too Check this checkbox to receive a copy of your email.
Optional private access password If you would like your album to be password protected, enter
the password here. The password will be available to your
recipients in the body of your email, which they can then enter
to gain access to your album.
Twitter™
Scroll through your images at the bottom of the window and uncheck any photos you do not wish to include.
After you have completed the steps listed below, press Upload.
Twitter™ Press this button to launch Twitter™ in a browser and enter

your login credentials.
Shorten URL with bit.ly Shortens the length of your album's URL, allowing you more
characters for your message.
Preview Displays a preview of your post.
Characters left Displays how many characters you have left of your message.
Allow download of largest available Allows viewers to download the largest available versions of
JPG your images.
Widget
A photo widget is an image viewer or slideshow that can be placed on a website or blog. This option
generates a piece of html code that you can copy and paste onto your website or blog. Scroll through your
images at the bottom of the window and uncheck any photos you do not wish to include.
Orientation Select the orientation of your photo widget from the drop-
down menu.
Theme Select the color theme of your photo widget from the drop-
down menu.
Page 252 of 827

Size Select the size of your photo widget from the drop-down
menu.
Sharing Your Folders by Copying and Pasting its URL Using ACDSee SeeDrive™
You can copy the URL of a folder from ACDSee SeeDrive™ and paste it in a browser, email, or anywhere
else.
You can only copy a URL from a public folder.
Copying and Pasting a Folder's URL:

username.
2. Right-click the folder you want to share and select Copy URL.
3. Right-click and select Paste, or press Ctrl + V, wherever you would like to paste the URL.
Page 253 of 827

Chapter 4: Media Mode

Using Media Mode
Media mode offers a streamlined, database-driven approach to Digital Asset Management. Only the
folders browsed in Manage mode and that have been cataloged into the ACDSee database will be
displayed in Media mode, offering a clutter-free view of photographs and videos managed by ACDSee.
The Media mode interface is divided into four separate functional areas:
1. Header Button Bar,
2. My Folders,
3. Display Area, and
4. Group By.
Page 254 of 827

Header Button Bar

Located directly below the main menu, the Header Button Bar contains three buttons described
below:
l Refresh,
l Catalog, and
l Show Orphan Files.
Header Button Bar Options
Page 255 of 827

Refresh
Refreshes the My Folder pane's folder tree and the Display Area pane.
Catalog
Produces the Catalog Files dialog which allows thumbnails and file inform-
ation to be added to the database without having to first browse folders.
Folders to Catalog
Subfolders Enabled
subfolders
will also be
added to
the data-
base.
Add folder... Click the

Add
Folder...
button to
browse for
folders to
be added
to the data-
base.
Remove folder Select a

folder in
the Folders
to Catalog
table and
click the
Remove
folder but-
ton to
remove
the folder
from the
table.
Import from Cataloged Files
EXIF and IPTC metadata Enable to

import
EXIF and
IPTC
metadata.
Page 256 of 827

ACDSee Metadata, including categories, keywords, tagged, Enable to

and collections import
ACDSee
metadata,
including
categories,
keywords,
tagged,
and col-
lections.
Face Data, including face outlines and names Enable to

import
Face Data,
including
face out-
lines and
names.
Enabling
the Face
Data
checkbox
activates
the
ACDSee
Face Data
radio but-
ton and
the Light-
room or
Picasa
Face Data
radio but-
ton.
ACDSee Face Data Enable to

import
ACDSee
Face Data.
The
ACDSee
Face Data
radio but-
ton is only
activated if
the Face
Page 257 of 827

Data,
including
face out-
lines and
names
ckeckbox
is enabled.
Enabling
the
ACDSee
Face Data
radio but-
ton dis-
ables the
Lightroom
or Picasa
Face Data
radio but-
ton.
Lightroom or Picasa Face Data Enable to

import
Lightroom
or Picasa
Face Data.
The Light-
room or
Picasa
Face Data
radio but-
ton is only
activated if
the Face
Data,
including
face out-
lines and
names
ckeckbox
is enabled.
Enabling
the Light-
room or
Picasa
Face Data
radio but-
ton dis-
Page 258 of 827

ables the
Lightroom
or Picasa
Face Data
radio but-
ton.
File Formats
Catalog images Only image

file types
will be cata-
loged
Catalog images and videos Both image

file types
and video
file types
will be
imported
Catalog all files All files in

the selec-
ted folder
will be
imported.
Options
Build and include thumbnails in database Enable to

build
thumbnails
of the
image or
video files
and
include the
thumbnails
in the data-
base.
Include contents of archive files Enable to

include the
contents of
archived
files.
Create preview files for RAW images Enable to

create pre-
view files
Page 259 of 827

for RAW
images.
Help Opens the help file related to cataloging files in Media mode.
Start Starts the process of adding thumbnails and file information to the data-
base.
Cancel Stops the process of adding thumbnails and file information to the data-
base.
Show Orphan Files
Displays missing files flagged as orphans. Orphans will be displayed in

sepia.
To use the Catalog Files tool:

1. Click the Catalog button in the Header Button Bar located directly below the main menu.
2. In the Catalog Files dialog, complete the options described in the above table.
3. Click the Start button to automatically add thumbnails and file information to the database.
My Folders
Located along the left side of the screen, the My Folders pane is a simple folder tree populated with all
folders browsed while in Manage mode. To add additional folders to the My Folders pane without
leaving Media mode, use the Catalog Files tool described above.
The My Folders pane is hidden by default. To display the My Folders pane, click the Hide/Show icon
in the lower left of the Display Area.
Clicking a folder containing media in the My Folder pane will filter the Display Area's contents to
display the selected folder's media.
Display Area
The Display Area pane occupies the large central portion of the screen and is used primarily to display
images and videos that can be filtered, sorted, or grouped.
Double-click any image or video to display them in full screen. Videos displayed in full screen can be
played without leaving Media mode. Double click the full screen image or video to return to the grid
view.
Right-click individual media assets to produce a context-sensitive help menu containing the following
options:
l View: opens media asset in View mode.
l Develop: opens media asset in Develop mode.
l Edit: opens media asset in Edit mode.
Page 260 of 827

l Rotate Left: press Ctrl + L to rotate left.
l Rotate Right: press Ctrl + R to rotate right.
l Show in File Explorer: opens to the media asset file's location in File Explorer.
Filter By
When enabled, the tools in the Filter By toolbar are very powerful for tailoring the results displayed in
the Display Area pane by filtering the results based on specific metadata.
To filter media assets in the Display Area pane, choose from a combination of any of the following:
l Enable the Tagged checkbox to display only those images with a tag.
l Make a selection from the ratings to display media with a specific rating. The button to the left of the rat-
ings lets you choose whether the results will include media with a Rating less than or equal, greater than
or equal, or matching the chosen rating.
l Make a selection from the color labels to display media tagged with a specific label.
Changes made to the Filter By tools will affect the results displayed in the Group By pane.
Sort and Group

Located directly above the media asset and to the right-side of the Display Area pane, the Sort and
Group drop downs are used to alter how the contents of the Display Area pane are presented. Unlike
the Filter By field which refines the number of media assets displayed, the Sort and Group drop downs
do not change the number of media assets displayed. Both the Sort and Group drop down results can
be sorted forwards or backwards.
Selections made in the Group field will affect the results displayed in the Group By pane.
Group By
Located along the right side of the screen, the Group By pane lists groups of media assets based on
the selection made in the Filter By drop down and the Group drop down. To display the Group By
pane, click the Hide/Show icon in the lower right of the Display Area.
The Group By pane results can be grouped forward and backwards.
The blue bar within each group tab is representative of the number of media assets in the group.
Clicking a tab in the Group By pane changes the display in the Display Area pane to reflect the group
selected.
Page 261 of 827

Chapter 5: View Mode

View mode is the main viewing component of the ACDSee user interface.
In View mode, you can:
Click + hold + drag to pan around large images.
Press the keyboard shortcut F to toggle in and out of full screen view.
Zoom in or out on your images.
View images in a slideshow.
Play video and audio files and add audio to your image files.
Add captions to your images.
Catalog files by tagging them, adding categories, keywords, and other metadata.
Apply editing and special effect presets to your images.
Automatically advance to the next image in the Filmstrip when you apply metadata.
Detect faces in images and assign them names.
View adjustments made to your image in Develop mode.
Previewing Your Images with Auto Lens

You can use Auto Lens to preview your images with a number of filters without actually applying them
to the file.
To View Your Image with an Auto Lens:

2. On the Toolbar, press the Auto Lens button.
3. Select a filter to preview your image in.
4. Use the Filmstrip or Previous/Next button to preview more images with your selected filter.
The Lens will remain turned on in View mode until you turn it off.
Page 262 of 827

To Turn Off Your Selected Auto Lens:

1. On the Toolbar, press the Auto Lens button.
2. Select None.
Light EQ™
You can view your image with an instant exposure adjustment in View mode with Light EQ™. You will
need to select Light EQ™ for each image you view.
To View Your Image with Light EQ™:

2. On the Toolbar, press the Light EQ™ button.
Viewing RAW Images

A RAW image is similar to a photo negative. When you take a photo, your camera captures all the raw
data that makes up the image. This includes an embedded JPEG so that you can preview the image. As
with a photo negative, you must develop your RAW file to view the photo.
When you double-click the thumbnail of a RAW image in Manage mode, ACDSee Ultimate checks to
see if you have previously developed the RAW file. If you have, ACDSee Ultimate displays the
developed photo in View mode. If you have not, ACDSee Ultimate does one of the following:
If you have selected the Embedded preview radio button on the General page of the Options dialog box,
ACDSee Ultimate displays the embedded JPEG, created by your camera when you took the photo. This is
the default setting.
If you have selected the RAW decode radio button on the General page, ACDSee Ultimate quickly
develops the RAW file and displays a temporary photo of the RAW file.
When you zoom in on your undeveloped RAW image in View mode, if you have selected the
Embedded preview option, and if you zoom past the resolution of the embedded JPEG, ACDSee
Ultimate quickly develops the RAW image so that you can see the image at that zoom level. When
View mode changes the display from the embedded JPEG to the decoded RAW image, you might see a
Page 263 of 827

change in the color, light, or detail of the image. This is due to a difference between the settings
applied by your camera to the JPEG and the settings used by ACDSee Ultimate to develop the image.
Since different camera models apply different color, light, and detail settings to embedded JPEGs,
these settings do not always match the settings used by ACDSee. However, you can then use the
ACDSee Ultimate Develop tools to process the RAW image to use your preferred settings.
ACDSee will automatically apply geometry corrections to DNG files that include geometric
distortion correction tags. DNG files created from the Adobe DNG Converter© will often
generate geometric distortion tags for micro 4/3rds cameras.
Rotating Images
You can rotate images in Manage and View modes using the Rotate icons in the bottom toolbar.
When you rotate unprocessed JPEG images, ACDSee Ultimate performs a lossless rotation,
meaning no information is lost.
To Rotate Images:
1. In Manage mode or View mode, select one or more images.
2. Click the Rotate Left or Rotate Right icon in the bottom toolbar.
Rotate Icons
Rotate Left Rotates the image 90° to the left.
Rotate Right Rotates the image 90° to the right.
Using the Histogram

The Histogram is a graph that represents the distribution of color intensity for each color channel in an
image.
To Display and Use the Histogram:

1. In View or Edit mode, click Panes | Histogram.
2. On the Histogram, check or uncheck the following checkboxes:
R: shows or hides the red color channel.
G: shows or hides the green color channel.
Page 264 of 827

B: shows or hides the blue color channel.
L: shows or hides the lightness of the image.
Using Face Detection and Recognition in View Mode

You can use Face Detection to detect people in images you browse in View mode. You can also import
face data from other programs in View mode.
This process will be expedited if you have allowed Face Detection to finish scanning in Manage
mode on the folder you are currently viewing.
You can assign names to the detected faces in View mode using the Face Detection pane or Face tool.
Naming faces will assist ACDSee with recognizing individuals in future images. This is referred to as
facial recognition. The more often a person is named, the more likely they will be recognized, saving
you time in the future. You can also improve your results by correcting names mistakenly assigned to
faces by ACDSee. The sooner the correction is made, the less likely it will reoccur. Once you have
named a face one or more times, ACDSee may suggest this name in future faces. See the Suggestions
section below.
Assigned names will allow you to search for images using the names of the people in them. You can do
this using the Search functions in Manage mode, as well as the People group in the Catalog pane. You
can also manage the names assigned to faces using People mode.
Face Detection is enabled by default. Face Detection is only available on supported image file types.
You cannot run Face Detection on files in unsupported locations, such as archives, phones,
and photo disks, or on files excluded from the database.
To Enable or Disable Face Detection:

Choose Tools | Options | Face Detection and check/uncheck the Automatically detect faces in
images checkbox.
When you browse images in View mode, Face Detection will scan each image for faces as you open it.
To Open the Face Detection Pane:

Choose Panes | Face Detection.
Detected faces will appear in the Face Detection pane.
To Show Face Outlines:
In the Bottom Toolbar, click the Show Face Outlines button or press Shift + B.
To Name Detected Faces:
Page 265 of 827

1. In the Bottom Toolbar, click the Face Tool button or press Shift + F.
2. In the field below the face outline, enter the name of the detected face.
3. Press Enter.
You can use Tab to move your cursor between name fields on the image, as well as on the Face
Detection pane.
To Edit Face Outlines:
2. Use your cursor to move, expand, or contract the outline.
To Draw Outlines Around and Name Undetected Faces:
2. Click and drag to draw a face outline on the image.
3. In the field below the face outline, enter a name for the face.
Outlining and naming undetected faces will not improve ACDSee's recognition of the
individual.
To Import Embedded Face Data From Lightroom or Picasa:

1. In View Mode, select Tools | Face Detection | Import Lightroom or Picasa Face Data.
2. Your face data will import and the face data will be added to your database.
When you import Lightroom or Picasa face data, it will overwrite any existing face data on the
image.
Suggestions
Once you have assigned a name one or more times, ACDSee may suggest this name for faces in future
images. Suggestions can improve themselves over time, and even assign themselves based on
similarity.
You must select the Face tool in order to interact with suggestions in the main viewer.
To Deny or Confirm Suggestions:
Page 266 of 827

Click the green checkmark to confirm the suggested name, or the red deny symbol to reject the
suggested name.
You can ignore incorrect suggestions without negative consequences. Denying a suggestion will not
affect suggestions on other photos. You can also edit suggestions in the name field and press Enter.
Viewing Images with Image Advance

Image Advance allows you to create a quick slideshow preview of a group of images, or of all the
images in a folder.
To Start Image Advance:

1. Open a group of images in View mode.
2. Click View | Image Advance | Options.
3. In the Image Advance dialog box, set the options as described below.
4. Click Start.
5. To advance to the next image, press Space.
6. To return to the previous image, press Backspace.
7. To stop or restart Image Advance, press Pause.
Image Advance Options
Page 267 of 827

Sequence Determines the order that you want to display your images. Select one of the following
options:
l Forward
l Reverse
l Random
Repeat Automatically restarts the slideshow after the last image has been displayed.
Delay Specifies how long to display each image. Drag the slider or type a time in milliseconds.
Sound Check the Play audio clips checkbox to play any audio embedded in the selected
images.
Displaying Text on Images in View Mode

You can use the Header/Footer tool to display text with your images in View mode. The text is
displayed while you are viewing the image, but does not modify the original image. You can also hide
the headers and footers without changing the settings.
To Edit Image Headers and Footers:

1. In View mode, click View | Edit Header/Footer.
2. Do one or both of the following:
Check the Header checkbox to add text at the top of the image.
Check the Footer checkbox to add text at the bottom of the image.
3. Select or change the text options as described below.
4. Click OK.
Text Options
Alignment Specifies the justification of the captions.
Background Adds a background color to the text. Click Color to specify a color.
Description Displays the text you want to see on your images. Type the text you want
to appear, or click inside the field to set an insertion point for inserting
metadata.
Insert Metadata Inserts file-specific information into the text for each image.
Font Sets the font, size, and color of the caption text.
To Insert Metadata in Image Text:
Page 268 of 827

1. Position the cursor in the Description text box where you want to display the file information and click
Insert Metadata.
2. In the Choose Properties dialog box, select the file information you want to include.
3. Click OK.
The information you added is inserted as a placeholder that will be replaced by the specific text for
each image.
Hiding Image Text

You can hide either the header or footer, or disable both at once without changing or deleting the
information in the header and footer fields.
To Hide the Image Text:

1. In View mode, click View | Edit Header/Footer.
Uncheck the Header checkbox to remove text from the top of the image.
Uncheck the Footer checkbox to remove text from the bottom of the image.
3. Click OK.
To show or hide both headers and footers simultaneously, click View | Show Header/Footer.
Selecting Part of an Image

You can use the Select tool in View mode to select a rectangular area of an image. You can then zoom
in on the selection, copy the selection, save the selection as a new image, print the selection, and use
the selection as the desktop wallpaper.
To Select Part of an Image:

1. Click the Select Tool icon.
2. Drag the cursor across the image to create a marquee.
3. Right-click inside the marquee and select one of the options described below.
4. To cancel the selection, click an area of the image outside of the marquee.
Selection Options
Page 269 of 827

Zoom To Zooms in on the selected area.
Copy Copies the selected area to the Clipboard.
Save Crop As Saves the selected area as a new image.
Print Prints the selected area.
Wallpaper Creates desktop wallpaper using the selected area and centers it on your desktop,
Centered shrinking it to fit if necessary.
Wallpaper Tiled Creates a tiled desktop wallpaper pattern using the selected area.
Viewing File Properties in View Mode

You can view an image’s properties in View mode and edit the information in the Properties pane.
To View an Image’s Properties:

In View mode, click Panes | Properties.
For more information about the Properties pane, and adding or editing ACDSee Ultimate Metadata,
see Using the Properties Pane.
Viewing Documents
You can view a variety of documents in ACDSee, including PDF, Excel, PowerPoint, Word, and Canvas X
documents. In View mode, you can add metadata to your documents to organize and make searching
easier.
To View a Document:
1. Navigate to your document in Manage mode.
2. Select the document and enter View mode.
Working with PDF Files (.pdf):

See Viewing PDF Files in View Mode.
Working with Excel Files (.xlsx):

In View mode, you can use the sheet tabs at the bottom of your document to view any of the sheets
within your document.
Working with PowerPoint Files (.pptx):
Page 270 of 827

In View mode, you can use your mouse wheel to navigate through your document's slides. You can
also click a slide to advance to the next.
Working with Word Files (.docx):

In View mode, you can use the mouse wheel to scroll through your document.
To Assign Your Document a Rating, Color Label, or Tag in View Mode:

Open your document in View mode, and do one of the following:
In the bottom right corner, click the Color Label button and select a color label.
In the bottom right corner, click the Rating button and select a rating.
In the bottom right corner, click the Tag button.
Viewing PDF Files in View Mode

You can view, navigate, and print your PDF files in View mode.
To Open an Image in View Mode:

In Manage mode, double-click your PDF.
In Manage mode, select your PDF and press Enter.
In Manage mode, select your PDF and press the View mode button.
Use the PDF options as described below.
PDF Options:
Page 271 of 827

View the previous page.

Back
View the next page.

Forward
View the PDF at a higher magnification.

Zoom In
View the PDF at a lower magnification.

Zoom Out
Opens the PDF in its default application.

Open in Default Application
Prints the PDF.

Print PDF
Fits the page within the viewing area.

Fit Page
Stretches the page to fit the width of the viewing area.

Fit Width
Displays the number of the page being viewed.

Page Number
Displays the page magnification.

Magnification
To Print PDF Documents:

See Printing Images and Documents.
Keyboard shortcuts:
Page 272 of 827

Right Arrow Displays the next file in the Filmstrip.
Left Arrow Displays the previous file in the Filmstrip.
Page Up Displays the previous page in the

document.
Page Down Advances to the next page in the

document.
Spacebar Advances to the next page in the

document.
Home Displays the first page in the document.
End Displays the last page in the document.
With Fit Page on Up Arrow Displays the previous page in the

document.
Down Arrow Advances to the next page in the

document.
Mouse Wheel Up Displays the previous page in the

document.
Mouse Wheel Down Advances to the next page in the

document.
With Fit Width on Up Arrow Scrolls upward in the document.
Down Arrow Scrolls downward in the document.
Mouse Wheel Up Scrolls upward in the document.
Mouse Wheel Down Scrolls downward in the document.
Viewing Develop Settings in View Mode

You can use the Develop Settings pane to view adjustments made to your images in Develop mode.

In View mode, click Panes | Develop Settings.
Page 273 of 827

1. While browsing your images in View mode, select an image which has been developed. This is indicated
by the Developed overlay icon in the bottom right corner of the Status bar.
Copying and Pasting Develop Adjustments

You can copy adjustments made in Develop mode and paste them onto other images in the Develop
Settings pane.
To Copy Develop Settings and Paste Them to Other Images:

2. In the Develop Settings pane, press the Copy button.
3. Select an image to which to paste the adjustments.
4. Press the Paste button.
Restoring Images
You can also restore the image to its original state with the Restore button.
To Revert an Image Back to its Original State:

2. In the Develop Settings pane, press the Restore button.
Applying Presets in View Mode

Many ACDSee Ultimate developing tools allow you to save your settings as presets. This is convenient
when you frequently use the same settings for a particular tool or effect.
For most tools, ACDSee Ultimate automatically saves the last option settings you applied to an image
when you clicked Apply or Done. This preset is called Last Used Settings. To create presets to be used
at anytime see Using Presets in Develop mode.
To Apply Presets in View Mode:

1. In View mode, click Process | Apply Preset.
2. Select one of the presets.

The preset is applied and automatically saved.
To undo the applied preset right-click and select Process | Restore to Original.
Page 274 of 827

Presets created from Edit mode can only be applied in Edit mode.
Viewing and Using Brush Files

You can view brush files in Manage mode just like fonts or other files. This means that you can assign
ratings or organize them just like any other file in ACDSee. Because many .abr files are actually groups
of images in one file, you need to open them in View mode to see the individual images.
This icon indicates an .abr brush file in ACDSee.
To View Brush Files:

In Manage mode, navigate to the folder containing your brush files.
To see just the top image in any .abr file, hover over the thumbnail to activate the pop-up, or click it to
see the image in the Preview pane.
To view the other images in the .abr file, double-click it to open it in View mode. The file opens in View
mode showing the individual images in a pane on the left-hand side.
To see the number of images, and select them by number, click the down-arrow at the top of the
sidebar, and then select the number of the image.
To scroll through the images, click the right and left arrows at the top of the sidebar, or on each image.
To Use Brush Files in Adobe Photoshop®:

With both Adobe Photoshop® and ACDSee Ultimate open, drag the file from the File List (in Manage
mode) onto the Photoshop® window.
Even though nothing appears to happen, the brush is loaded into the Photoshop® brush library. To
view the new brushes, open the library and scroll to the bottom of the pane.
To make it even easier to use brushes in Photoshop®, you can configure it to be your default
editor. Then you can use Ctrl + Alt + X to open Photoshop® and use the brush right away.
Playing Video and Audio Files

You can play video or audio files in many formats in ACDSee. You can control playback volume, and
create an image from a video frame.
To Play Video or Audio Files:
Page 275 of 827

In Manage mode, in the File List pane, do one of the following:

Double-click a video or audio file.
Select one or more files and press Enter.
Select one or more files, right-click a selected file, and then select View.
Use the Media toolbar to adjust the volume, pause, loop, or extract frames from playback.
Automatically Playing Audio and Video Files

You can configure your settings to play audio and video files automatically, as soon as you open them
in View mode, or as you view them in the Preview pane in Manage mode.
To Start Playing Media Files Automatically:

1. In Manage mode or View mode, click Tools | Options | Preview.
2. Check the Autoplay audio or video clips checkbox.
3. Click OK.
The Media Toolbar

You can use the Media toolbar to quickly access common media viewing and editing tools.
Media Toolbar Buttons

Play Plays the media file or selection. Changes into the Pause button
when a media file or selection is playing.
Extract Frames Opens a menu you can use to copy, save, and extract video
frames.
Frames are extracted at the resolution you viewed

them at, (your screen resolution).
Loop Continuously plays the media file or selection.
Volume Mute Click to mute the playback volume, click again to play the
volume.
Saving Video Frames as Images

You can extract an individual frame from a video and save it as a still image.
To Extract and Save a Single Video Frame as an Image:
Page 276 of 827

Find the frame you want to capture and press Pause.
Skip to step 2 as the exact frame you want to extract is playing.
2. On the Selection and media controls toolbar, click the Extract Current Frame button.
3. In the Extract Current Frame dialog box, select a folder in which to save your file.
4. In the File name field, type a filename.
5. Click the Save as type drop-down list and select a file format. You can click the Options button to select
or change any options associated with the file format.
6. Click Save.
Adding or Editing Image Audio

ACDSee Ultimate supports images with embedded audio and images with associated audio files.
Images with embedded audio are TIFF or JPEG images with audio saved inside the image file. You can
embed audio inside an image file by adding audio to the image.
Images with associated audio are image files paired with separate WAV audio files. Image files and their
associated audio files contain the same file name and are located in the same folder. You can associate
any WAV file with an image file by giving them the same name and placing them in the same folder, or
by adding audio to the image.
If you move or rename either an image file or the audio file associated with it, both files must
be renamed and in the same folder or they will no longer be associated. This does not apply to
images with embedded audio.
To Add Audio to an Image:

Select an image in Manage mode.
2. Click Tools | Image Audio | Edit.
3. In the Edit Audio dialog box, click the Browse button.
4. Select a WAV file and click Save.
5. If you would like to truncate or clip the audio file, check the Use markers checkbox, and drag the Start
marker and End marker sliders. Do one of the following:
Page 277 of 827

Click the Truncate button to remove the beginning and end of the audio file (the sections
outside of the start and end markers).
Click the Clip button to remove the section of the audio file inside the start and end markers.
6. To hear a preview of the file, click the Play button.
7. Click OK.
Recording Audio to an Image

You can record your own audio files and add them to your images. When you add audio to a JPEG or
TIFF image, the audio is embedded in the image. With other file formats, the audio file is associated
with the image; the audio file is saved in the same folder and is played when the image is viewed.
To Record and Add an Audio File to an Image:

Select an image in Manage mode.
2. Click Tools | Image Audio | Edit.
3. In the Edit Audio dialog box, select or change the Record sound settings options as described below.
4. Click Record and do one of the following:
Use a microphone and record a sound.
Play audio from an audio player on your computer.
5. Click Record to stop the recording.
6. Click Save As to save the audio file.
7. In the Save Sound File dialog box, type a name in the File name field, and then click Save.
8. Click OK.
Record Sound Settings Options
Page 278 of 827

Capture device Specifies which of your computer's devices you want

to record the audio.
Input format Determines which sample rate and audio type are used
to record the sound. The formats displayed depend on
the sound card you have installed on your computer.
Overwrite Replaces the recorded audio from the Start marker

slider location.
Mix Combines the recording with the existing audio file.
Insert using start marker Inserts the recording at the start marker location. Drag
the Start marker slider to select a position.
Append to sound file Adds the recording to the existing audio file.
Replace sound file Replaces the entire audio file with the new recording.
Printing Images and Documents in View Mode

With the ACDSee Ultimate print utility, you can print your images and files on any size of paper, in any
orientation, and at any resolution your printer can support. You can also use the print utility to create
and print contact sheets, complete with headers, footers, and captions specific to each image.
As you change the options in the Print dialog box, you can view a dynamically updated preview of the
image or file and its position on the page. You can adjust the output size, print multiple copies, and
change the orientation on each page.
To Print a Single Image:

1. In View mode, select the image you want to print.
2. Click File | Print....
3. Under Format, choose a print size.
4. On the Printer Options tab, specify the printer you want to use, the paper size, the number of copies
you want, the range of pages that you want to print, and image resolution.
5. On the Page Settings tab, specify the image position on the paper and the margin widths, and specify
the number of prints of each photo.
6. On the Adjustments tab, adjust the settings to compensate for the way your printer handles exposure,
contrast, and sharpness.
7. Add captions, headers, or footers.
8. Click Print.
To Print All Images:
Page 279 of 827

1. In View mode, click File | Print All....
2. Under Print layout, do one of the following:
Select Full page and then choose a print size from the Format list.
Select Contact sheet and then set the Contact sheet format options to define the appearance
of your contact sheet.
Select Layout and then choose one of the available layout options.
4. On the Page Settings tab, specify the image position on the paper and the margin widths.
5. On the Adjustments tab, adjust the settings to compensate for the way your printer handles exposure,
contrast, and sharpness.
layouts.
8. Click Print.
To Print Your Document Files:
Please note that your document will not print the way it appears in View mode, but rather
how it appears when viewed in Microsoft Office™.
1. Select the document you want to print.
2. In View mode, click File | Print....
3. Select the printer you want to use from the Printer drop-down menu and enter the number of copies
you want to print in the Copies field.
4. In the Settings section, choose between printing all pages or a range, which you can input in the field
next to Custom Print.
5. From the drop-down menus, choose whether to print single or double sided, orientation, how many
pages per sheet, collated or uncollated, and paper size.
6. Click Print....
To Print Your PDF Documents:

1. Select the PDF you want to print.
2. In View mode, click File | Print... or press the Print button in the PDF options.
Page 280 of 827

3. Choose a print size from the Format list.
4. On the Printer Options tab, specify the printer you want to use, the paper size, the orientation, the
number of copies you want, the range of pages that you want to print, and image resolution.
5. On the Page Settings tab, specify the page position on the paper and the margin widths.
layouts.
8. Click Print.
Synchronizing View Mode to a Folder

You can use the Sync to Folder option to change the images being displayed in View mode.
To Synchronize to a Folder:
1. In View mode, click File | Sync To Folder....
2. Type the path to the folder you want to synchronize, or click the Browse button to locate the folder.
3. Select or change the New Images options as described below.
4. Click OK.
New Images Options

Show new images immediately Displays images as soon as they appear in the folder. If
this option is cleared, new images are added to the end
of the slideshow.
Ignore open files Delays adding a new file to the slideshow until the
transferring application has finished moving or
downloading the file.
Sort by name Sorts the images displayed in the slideshow by their file
name.
To Stop Synchronizing to a Folder:

In View mode, click File | Sync To Folder....
Page 281 of 827

Setting an Image as the Desktop Wallpaper

You can select any image and set it as the Windows desktop wallpaper. You can also automatically
stretch a wallpapered image to fill the screen, or restore your previous wallpaper.
To Set an Image as the Desktop Wallpaper:

In Manage mode, select an image, and then click Tools | Set Wallpaper.
In View mode, click Tools | Set Wallpaper.
Centered: places the image in the center of the screen. If the image is larger than the screen, it
is shrunk to fit.
Tiled: places the image in a tiled pattern that fills the entire desktop.
Stretched: stretches the image to fit the screen.
The selected image is saved as ACD Wallpaper.bmp in the Windows folder. ACDSee Ultimate
automatically changes the wallpaper settings in the Control Panel Display properties to display the
image.
To Automatically Stretch Wallpapered Images to Fit the Screen:

1. Click Tools | Options.
2. In the Options dialog box, click General.
3. On the General page, check the Automatically stretch wallpaper to fit screen checkbox.
4. Click OK.
To Display the Previous Wallpaper:

Click Tools | Set Wallpaper | Restore.
Viewing Offline Images

ACDSee Ultimate stores thumbnails and database information for images contained on CDs or other
removable media as Photo Discs. You can then browse the thumbnails and view the information for
those images even when the disc is not in your CD-ROM drive.
To Add a Photo Disc:
Page 282 of 827

1. Place a disc containing images into your CD-ROM drive.
2. In Manage mode, click File | New | Photo Disc.
3. In the New Disc dialog box, type a name for your disc in the Title field, and then click OK.
You can then browse the contents of the Photo Disc in the Offline Media section of the Folders
pane.
If you add or remove images from a disc that you have already added to ACDSee Ultimate as a
Photo Disc, you can update the information stored in the database. Insert the disc in your CD-
ROM drive, and then right-click the name of the disc in the Folders pane and select Update
Photo Disc.
By default, ACDSee Ultimate identifies Photo Discs by their serial numbers. This is the most reliable
setting to use when working with Photo Discs, particularly if you are importing or converting Photo
Discs from previous versions of ACDSee.
However, if you are working with, or planning to work with, multi-session discs, the serial number may
be regenerated or changed each time you change the contents of a disc. Therefore, the volume label is
the required method of identification for multi-session Photo Discs.
Rebinding Photo Discs

Depending on the method used to identify Photo Discs, ACDSee Ultimate may encounter a Photo Disc
that it does not recognize. This is most common when you are using the serial number method to
identify Photo Discs and you insert a multi-session disc. ACDSee Ultimate may not recognize the disc,
as serial numbers are likely to change when updating a multi-session disc.
You can use the Rebind option to update the identification information, and associate the correct
database information with your disc.
To Rebind a Photo Disc to its ACDSee Ultimate Database Information:

1. In the Rebind Photo Disc dialog box, carefully review the Current disc information to be sure that the
correct disc is in the drive.
2. Select the Photo Disc record that you want to rebind to the current disc from the Photo Disc Name list.
3. Click Rebind.
Viewing Images in Another Application

You can open a file in another program from within ACDSee. For example, you can open documents in
the application used to create them.
To Use the Shell Open and Edit Commands:
Page 283 of 827

1. In Manage mode, click File | Shell.
2. Select one of the following options:
Open: opens the file using the application that Windows associates with its file extension.
Edit: opens the file using the default system application, or opens a dialog box where you can
select an application.
Showing Originals
When you make changes to your images, the original image is saved so that you can restore the image
to its original settings.
To Show the Original Image:

1. In View mode, select an image that has been developed or edited.
2. Click and hold the Show Original button in the bottom toolbar.
When you release the mouse button, the developed or edited image is displayed.
Committing Changes
When you make changes to your images, the original image is saved so that you have the option of
restoring the image to its original settings. If you decide that you want to keep your developed or
edited image and save that as your original image, you can commit the changes to the image. This
deletes any sidecar files or originals that have been saved, and removes the Developed or Edited
overlay icon that indicates the image has been developed or edited.
To Commit Changes to an Image:

1. In Manage mode or View mode, select an image that has been developed or edited.
2. Click Process | Commit Changes.
Changing Image Color Depth

You can modify an image's color depth in View mode. Color depth refers to the range of colors an
image contains.
To Change the Color Depth of an Image:

In View mode, click Tools | Modify | Change Color Depth, and select one of the options described
below.
Color Depth Options
Page 284 of 827

Black and White Two-color black and white palette
16 Grays 16-color grayscale palette
256 Grays 256-color grayscale palette
16 Colors 16-color palette
256 Colors 256-color palette (GIF format uses 256 colors by default)
Hicolor 32,768-color palette
Truecolor 16,777,216-color palette of all colors visible to humans
16 bit grayscale 16-bit grayscale palette
48 bit color 48-bit color palette
You can use ACDSee Ultimate to convert an image to any of these color depths. However, to use
certain image enhancement tools, filters, blends, and adjustment options, the image must be Hicolor
or Truecolor. To edit an image that is not originally Hicolor or Truecolor, you can convert it, edit the
image, and then convert it back to its original color depth.
Zooming In and Out

In View mode you can use the Zoom tools to enlarge or reduce the size of the image you are viewing.
When an image is zoomed to a larger size than the View mode window, you can use the Scroll tool
(hand icon) to pan or scroll the image.
When you zoom in on a RAW image, you might see a change in the color, light, or detail of the
image. This can occur if you have checked the Embedded preview checkbox on the General
tab of the Options dialog box. This option displays the embedded JPEG for the image, but
when you zoom in past the resolution of the embedded JPEG, ACDSee Ultimate decodes the
RAW image in order to display the image at that zoom level. As ACDSee Ultimate decodes the
image, the Zoom tool might be slow to respond. See Viewing RAW images for more
information.
To Zoom an Image In or Out:

Click once on the image to toggle between your default view and Actual Size view.
Click Tools | Zoom, and then select one of the Zoom menu options.
Zoom Menu Options
Page 285 of 827

Zoom In Increases the magnification of the image.
Zoom Out Decreases the magnification of the image.
Actual Size Displays the image at its original dimensions (100%).
Fit Image Displays the image at the largest magnification that fits in View mode window.
Fit Width Fits the image within the left and right sides of the View mode window.
Fit Height Fits the image within the top and bottom of the View mode window.
Zoom Lock Displays all images at the zoom option of the current image. If the zoom level is
adjusted, the new zoom level is applied to all images that you view.
Zoom To Opens a dialog box where you can select a zoom level.
Pan Lock Locks the panned area of an image.
If you select Fit Image you can display the previous or next image by pressing the left and right
arrow keys on your keyboard.
To change your default image view, click Tools | Zoom and select Actual Size, Fit Image
(standard), Fit Width, or Fit Height.
You can also quickly access the Zoom Lock on the Toolbar by toggling the Zoom Lock button.
Setting the Zoom Level

You can use the Set Zoom Level dialog box to set a specific zoom level in View mode.
To Set a Specific Zoom Level:

1. Click Tools | Zoom | Zoom To...
2. In the Set Zoom Level dialog, select one of the following:
Fit whole image: zooms the image to fit entirely within the window.
Fit width: zooms the image to fit the width of the window.
Fit height: zooms the image to fit the height of the window.
Specify: specifies a zoom percentage. Type a number in the field or click the drop-down list and
select a zoom level.
Page 286 of 827

3. To use this setting as the default View mode zoom level, check the Lock at this zoom level checkbox.
View mode displays all images based on the specified zoom level.
4. Click OK.
If you select Fit whole image you can display the previous or next image by pressing the left
and right arrow keys on your keyboard.
Automatically Shrinking or Enlarging Images

You can use the settings on the Display page of the Options dialog box to automatically enlarge or
shrink images to fit the size of the ACDSee Ultimate window. For information about how the
combination of the choices affects the display of images, see the Zoom mode and Resize results table
below.
To Automatically Shrink or Enlarge Images:

1. In Manage mode or View mode, click Tools | Options.
2. In the Options dialog box, click View mode | Display.
3. In the Zoom options area, select one of the following options from the Default zoom mode drop-down
list:
Actual Size: keeps images at their original size.
Fit Width: resizes images to fit the width of the View mode window.
Fit Height: resizes images to fit the height of the View mode window.
Fit Image: resizes images to fit the size of the View mode window.
4. Select one of the following options from the Resize drop-down list:
Reduce Only: reduces large images to fit the size of the View mode window.
Enlarge Only: enlarges smaller images to fit the size of the View mode window.
Reduce or Enlarge: reduces large images, and enlarges smaller images to fit the size of the
View mode window.
5. Click OK.
Zoom Mode and Resize Results
Page 287 of 827

Fit Image Fit Width Fit Height
Reduce Only Reduces large Reduces large images to Reduces large images to
images to fit the fit between the left and fit between the top and
size of the View right sides of the View bottom of the View
mode window. mode window. mode window.
Images that are Images that are smaller Images that are smaller
smaller than the than the View mode than the View mode
View mode window are displayed at window are displayed at
window are their original size. their original size.
displayed at their
original size.
Enlarge Only Enlarges small Enlarges small images to Enlarges small images to
images to fit the fit between the left and fit between the top and
size of the Viewer. right sides of the View bottom of the View
mode window. mode window.
Images that are
larger than the Images that are larger Images that are larger
View mode than the View mode than the View mode
window are window are displayed at window are displayed at
displayed at their their original size. their original size.
original size.
Reduce and Reduces large Reduces large images Reduces large images
Enlarge images and and enlarges small and enlarges small
enlarges small images to fit between images to fit between
images to fit the the left and right sides of the top and bottom of
size of the View the View mode window. the View mode window.
mode window.
If you select Fit Image you can display the previous or next image by pressing the left- and
right-arrow keys on your keyboard.
Using the Navigator to View Select Areas of an Image

Use the Navigator pane to display a thumbnail overview of images that are larger than the View mode
display area. In the Navigator, a marquee indicates the area of the image that is visible.
To Display and Use the Navigator Pane:

1. In View mode, click Panes | Navigator.
2. Drag the slider to increase or decrease the magnification of the image in View mode.
3. Drag the marquee to the area of the image you would like to display in View mode.
Page 288 of 827

To Use the Quick Navigator Pane:

1. In View mode, click and hold the Navigator button in the bottom toolbar.
2. Drag the marquee to the area of the image you would like to display in View mode.
Panning a Magnified Image

In View mode, you can pan large images by moving them vertically, horizontally, and diagonally across
the display area to view specific areas of the image. When an image is larger than the ACDSee Ultimate
window and you use the Scroll tool, the cursor changes to a hand.
To Pan an Image:
Drag the image to center the area you want to view.
Press an arrow key. You can hold the Ctrl key to pan quickly, or hold the Shift key to pan more slowly.
Using Pan Lock

You can use the Pan Lock setting to automatically center the same area of a series of larger images in
View mode.
To Use Pan Lock:

1. In View mode, pan over a large image to a specific area you want to view.
2. Using the Zoom menu, zoom in on the image until you reach the magnification you want to use for all of
your images.
3. Click Tools | Zoom | Zoom Lock to keep the current zoom level.
4. Click Tools | Zoom | Pan Lock.
As you move through your images, each one will be automatically zoomed and panned to the
same area.
Magnifying Specific Areas of an Image

You can view specific areas of an image at a higher magnification in the Magnifying Glass pane.
To Use the Magnifying Glass Pane:

1. In View mode, click Panes | Magnifying Glass.
2. Move the cursor over an area of the image to view that area in the Magnifying Glass pane.
Page 289 of 827

3. Change the Magnifying Glass pane settings by doing any of the following:
Move the slider at the bottom of the Magnifying Glass pane to increase or decrease the
magnification.
Check the Fixed checkbox to apply the slider setting to the original size of the image. Uncheck
the Fixed checkbox to apply the slider setting to the magnification of the zoomed image in View
mode.
Check the Smooth checkbox to apply anti-aliasing to the magnified portion of the image, or
uncheck the Smooth checkbox to view the individual pixels. Anti-aliasing reduces jagged-lines,
also known as 'jaggies'.
Page 290 of 827

Chapter 6: Develop Mode

Develop mode allows non-destructive processing of RAW, JPEG and other file types. Do most of your
adjustments on RAW images in Develop mode, where you can work on the RAW image data. Non-
destructive means the changes you make do not permanently change the original image, so they are
reversible.
In Develop mode you can:
Tune the image using exposure, white balance, lighting, color, tone curves, soft focus, effects, split tone,
and post-crop vignette tools, or set the output color space of a RAW image.
Adjust details in your image using the sharpening, noise reduction, skin tune, and chromatic aberration
tools.
Fix geometry in your image using the lens distortion, rotate and straighten, perspective, vignette
correction, and cropping tools.
Repair your image with the Red Eye Reduction tool or remove flaws.
Using Develop Mode

When adjusting your images in Develop, the original file is never changed. The changes are saved in a
separate file, and are applied each time you open the image. This allows for non-destructive
developing of your images, and it is recommended that you do most of your image adjustments in
Develop.
When you open a developed image in Develop, it displays the settings you previously left them at.
This allows you to revisit the image at any time to adjust the previous settings.
For more information on how develop settings are saved, see How ACDSee Saves Changes to Images.
Developing an Image
To Develop an Image:
1. Select Develop mode.
2. In Develop, in the Tune tab, select General, White Balance, Light EQ™, Color EQ, Tone Curves, Soft Focus,
Effects, Color LUTs, Split Tone, Post-Crop Vignette, or for RAW files: Output Color Space.
3. On the Detail tab, select Sharpening, Noise Reduction, Skin Tune, or Chromatic Aberration.
4. On the Geometry tab, select Lens Correction, Rotate & Straighten, Perspective, Crop, Vignette
Correction.
5. On the Repair tab, select Repair or Red Eye Reduction.
Page 291 of 827

Saving and Canceling

When you have finished developing an image, you can choose from one of the many options for
saving your image, depending on what you want to do next.
To Save the Image and Return to the Mode You Were in Previously:
1. Click Done.
Save: save your changes.
Save as: save a copy of your developed image with a new name or format.
Discard: discard your changes.
Cancel: remain on the same image in Develop with your changes intact, without saving the
image.
If you want your changes saved automatically (without the prompt to save), check the
AutoSave checkbox. Then next time you switch to a new image your changes will be saved
automatically without the prompt. You can change this setting back by clicking Tools |
Options and selecting the Automatically save Develop Mode adjustments checkbox on the
Develop Mode page.
To Save the Image and Continue Processing Other Images:

1. Click Save.
Save As: save a version of your developed image with a new name or format and switch to the
updated image.
Save a Copy: save a copy of your developed image with a new name or format, and continue to
work on the original file.
Export: export one or more copies of your developed image with the option to specify a format
and size for each.
Copy to Clipboard: copy the developed image to the clipboard. (Go to Edit | Copy.)
Save a Copy is useful for making multiple versions of an image while continuing to
work from the original file instead of a new processed copy. For example, if you take a
RAW image and save a copy of it as a JPG, instead of switching to this lossy JPG image,
you remain on the unprocessed RAW file with the settings still intact.
To Discard Changes to the Image and Return to the Mode You Were in Previously:
Page 292 of 827

Click Cancel.
Save is not available for RAW file formats because you cannot directly save changes to a RAW
file.
Restoring Original Settings

You can discard your Develop settings and revert to the original image. For more information, see
Restoring original images.
Image Viewing Controls

While developing an image, you can adjust the magnification with the zoom controls, located in the
bottom right corner.
Page 293 of 827

Clipped Shadows and Highlights Displays clipped

shadows and
highlights. Click
the icon or press
E on the
keyboard, to
highlight over-
and under-
exposed areas of
the image. When
the shadows and
highlights tool is
enabled the icon
is yellow, and
gray when
disabled.
Undo/Redo Use the Undo

button to discard
changes, slider by
slider, adjustment
by adjustment.
Use the Redo
button to return
to the options
that you had
selected prior to
clicking Undo.
Reset Discards the

settings that you
have selected and
revert to the
default settings
for each
individual group.
When you apply
changes using
one of the
groups, the reset
button turns blue.
Click on the reset
button to reset
the image to its
default settings.
Page 294 of 827

Preview Turns on or off

changes you have
made within the
group. This button
is available in
each group, so
you can view the
effects of each
group's develop
settings. When
the icon is green
the group's
changes are
visible. A gray
icon indicates that
the changes are
hidden.
Develop Settings Resets Develop

Settings to Last
Saved, Default, or
Last Used. You
can also save your
settings as a
preset, copy, or
paste them.
Display Full Screen Displays the

image on a full
screen. Press F to
view full screen.
Press any key to
return to
Develop.
Actual Size Returns the

current image to
its actual size.
Navigator The Navigator

icon only appears
when the image
is magnified or if
the Actual Size
icon has been
clicked. Click the
Navigator icon to
Page 295 of 827

display a small
duplicate of your
image. Then drag
your cursor to the
section of the
image you would
like to see
magnified.
Release the
cursor to settle
on an area of the
image.
Fit Image Reduces the

image to fit within
the Develop
mode area.
Show Original Toggles the

changes on or off,
to compare your
changes to the
original.
Zoom slider Increases the size

of the image if
you drag it to the
right, decreases
the size if you
drag to the left.
Zoom drop-down list Displays a list of

zoom sizes to
select.
Viewing Images
You can view other images by clicking on the Filmstrip at the bottom of the screen. Or, click the arrows
on the Done button to select an image to develop.
Customizing the View

You can detach the Develop and Edit panes to suit your workflow.
You can also customize how the groups expand and collapse within the pane. From the View menu,
select:
Page 296 of 827

Expand all groups: expands all the groups in pane.
Collapse all groups: collapses all the groups that are open.
Auto-collapse groups: this is the default setting. This setting automatically collapses groups and keeps
the group you're working in open. This is useful for keeping groups in one pane without having to scroll.
Filmstrip: toggles the filmstrip display on or off.
Undo and Redoing
Using the History Pane:

You can use the History pane to view the sequence of changes you have made to your image. You can
also use the History pane to jump around in your editing sequence and revert back to a previously-
applied adjustment. For example, if you applied a series of adjustments, such as color adjustments,
followed by sharpening, and exposure tweaking, but you want to revert back several steps to the state
your photo was in with just the color adjustment, you would use the History pane.
To open the History pane, click Panes | History.
To return to a specific adjustment, select your desired adjustment in the pane and double-click it. Or
select Undo All to undo all of your adjustments.
Using Color Pickers in Develop Mode

When you use the color pickers in Develop mode, the RGB values beside the color picker relate to the
original image before any edits. You can see the up-to-date RGB values for the image as edited in the
status bar at the bottom of the page.
Page 297 of 827

Using the Undo/Redo Button

You can undo and redo your changes when editing an image.
To Undo a Change:
In Develop mode, do one of the following:
Click the Undo button found at the bottom of the left pane.
Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl + Z.
To Redo a Change:
In Develop mode, do one of the following:
Click the Redo button found at the bottom of the left pane.
Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl + Y.
Using Presets in Develop Mode

You can save your develop settings as a preset to apply the same adjustments to additional images.
Presets allow you to quickly apply changes to an image without having to repeat the steps each time
you want to apply the same change. For example, if you always correct your images using the Contrast
tool with the value of 25 and the Midtones tool with the value of -8, you can save these settings as a
preset and quickly apply them to change the contrast and midtones in your images.
You can also use presets to ensure that settings are applied consistently in your images. You can
create a preset with one or multiple develop settings. You can opt to save presets from all Develop
settings across the Tune, Detail, Geometry, and Repair tabs. Or you can save presets from the settings
from all of the groups within a single tab, such as all of the settings on the Tune tab. Or you can save
presets by individual group only, such as the Color EQ group.
To make your experience with Develop mode presets easier, you can now utilize the Develops Preset
pane to create, delete, manage, and categorize your global presets.
You can apply as many presets as you want to an image. Each time you add a preset, the
settings are applied on top of the previous settings.
Using the Develop Presets Pane
To Create a Preset using the Develop Presets Pane:
Page 298 of 827

1. In Develop mode, select the Tune, Detail, Geometry, or Repair tab.
2. Select a group and make corrections to your image.
3. In the Develop Presets pane, do one of the following:
Right-click in the Develop presets pane and select Create Preset.
Select the Create new Preset button in the Develop Presets pane.
4. In the Save Develop Settings Presets dialog, select the settings you want to save to the preset and enter
a name for your preset.
5. Click OK.
To Rename a Preset using the Develop Presets Pane:

1. In the Develop Presets pane, right-click on the preset you want to rename, and select Rename Preset.
2. Enter a new name for your preset and click OK.
To Delete a Preset using the Develop Presets Pane:

1. To delete a preset do one of the following:
In the Develop Presets pane, right-click on the preset you want to delete, and select Delete Preset.
Press the trash icon in line with the preset you want to delete.
2. In the Delete Preset dialog, press Yes to confirm.
To Apply a Preset to an Image Using the Develop Presets Pane:

With an image open in Develop mode, click on any preset in the Develop Presets list.
The image is updated with the selected preset.
To Import Presets Using the Develop Presets Pane:

1. In the Develop Presets pane, select the Import Presets button.
2. Choose the files to import and select Open.
To Export Presets Using the Develop Presets Pane:

1. In the Develop Presets pane, select the Export Presets button.
2. In the Export Presets dialog, choose which Develop presets to export.

3. Select Export.
4. In the Save As dialog, choose a name for your presets and select Save.
Page 299 of 827

Using Categories in the Develop Presets Pane

Categories in the Develop Presets pane allow you to organize and manage your presets. When you
first open ACDSee Ultimate, you will see a series of organized default categories containing default
presets.
To Create a Category for Your Develop Presets:

1. Right-click in the Develop Presets pane and select New Category.
2. In the Add a new Category dialog, enter a Category name and press OK.
To Delete a Category:
Right-click in the Develop Presets pane and select Delete Category.
To Add a Preset to a Category:

In the Develop Presets pane, right-click on your chosen preset and select Set Category then choose
from your categories. Your preset will be added to the chosen category.
To Remove a Preset from a Category:

In the chosen category, right-click on your chosen preset and select Set Category then click on the
relevant category. Your preset will be removed from your chosen category.
Other Ways to Create and Apply Presets

You can also create and access presets by clicking the develop settings button from the following
places:
Top of the pane Use the develop settings button from the top-level
to save all develop settings from Tune, Detail,
Geometry, and Repair tabs. Presets created at this
level can be accessed from Manage and View
mode. In Manage mode, presets can be applied to
multiple images at a time.
Tabs: Tune, Detail, Geometry, or Repair Use the Develop Settings button within a tab to save
develop settings exclusively from the groups within
that tab only. The example on the left shows the
settings button to click to save develop settings
from the Tune tab. A preset created in a tab can
only be accessed through the same tab.
Page 300 of 827

Groups Use the Develop Settings button within a group to

save develop settings exclusively from within that
group only. The example on the left shows the
settings button to click to save develop settings
from the General group. A preset created in a
group can only be accessed through the same
group.
To Create a Preset from the Top of the Pane:

1. Make corrections to your image in Develop mode.
2. Click the develop settings button located at the top of the pane.
3. Select Save Preset from the menu.
4. In the Save Develop Settings Presets dialog, click Select All to save your settings, or select only the
specific settings you want to save as a preset.
Page 301 of 827

5. Enter a name for your preset.
6. Click OK.
To Create a Preset from a Tab:

2. Make corrections to your image in the tab.
3. Click the develop settings button on the top right of the tab.
5. In the Save Develop Settings Presets dialog, enter a name for your preset.
6. Click OK.
To Create a Preset from a Group:

2. Select a group and make corrections to your image.
3. Click the develop settings button located on the top right of the group.
5. In the Save Develop Settings Presets dialog, enter a name for your preset.
6. Click OK.
Applying a Preset to a Single Image
To Apply a Preset to a Single Image in Develop Mode:

1. Click a develop setting button from the top of the pane, tab, or group.
2. From the menu, select a preset.
You can also apply presets to an image in the Filmstrip. Select an image in the Filmstrip, right-
click and select Apply Preset. Then select the preset you want to apply to the image. The
image is updated with the selected preset.
To Apply a Preset to a Single Image in View Mode:

1. In Manage mode, select an image and click the View tab.
The image opens in View mode.

2. Right-click on the image and select Process | Apply Preset.
Page 302 of 827

3. Select the preset you want to apply to the image.
Applying a Develop Settings Preset to a Batch of Images

Applying a preset to multiple images helps to save time, and improve the efficiency of your workflow.
To Apply a Preset to a Batch of Images:

1. In Manage mode, select the images that you want to apply a preset.
2. Click Process | Apply preset and then select a preset.
The thumbnail images are updated to reflect the preset applied.
To apply a preset to a batch of images and export them to other formats see Using Batch
Develop.
Renaming Presets
You can rename a preset at any time.
To Rename a Preset:
1. Click the develop settings button.
2. Select Manage Presets.
3. In the Manage Presets dialog, select a preset and click Rename.
4. Enter a new name for the preset.
5. Click OK to save and close the dialog.
Deleting Presets
You can delete presets that you no longer need. Deleting a preset does not affect images that already
have the preset applied.
To Delete a Preset:
1. Click the develop settings button.
2. Select Manage Presets.
3. In the Manage Presets dialog, select a preset and click Delete.
4. Click OK to save and close the dialog. Or click Cancel to cancel deleting your preset.
Page 303 of 827

Importing and Exporting Presets

You can share your presets with other users by exporting them. You can also import presets made by
other users, or from your old computer.
To Export Presets:
1. Create presets as described above. (To create presets in Edit mode, see Using Presets in Edit.)
2. Choose Tools | Export Presets.
3. In the Export Presets dialog, click the plus + signs to expand the tree, and check/uncheck the
checkboxes to select which presets to export. You can export global, tab, or group presets.
You can choose to export only specific presets under the branches by
checking/unchecking the checkboxes. A gray checkbox indicates that some presets under
the branches are selected, but not all.
4. To export Edit mode filters at the same time, check the Include Edit mode filter presets checkbox.
5. Click Export.
6. In the Save As dialog, browse to specify the destination for your exported presets.
7. Enter a name in the field, and press Save.
To Import Presets:
1. Choose Tools | Import Presets.
2. In the Open dialog, navigate to the location of your presets.
3. Select the presets for import and press Open.
4. In the Import Presets dialog, click the plus + signs to expand the tree, and check/uncheck the
checkboxes to select which presets to import. You can import global, tab, or group presets.
You can choose to import only specific presets under the branches by
checking/unchecking the checkboxes. A gray checkbox indicates that some presets under
the branches are selected, but not all.
5. Press Import. Find your imported presets in the presets menus in their respective groups.
Exporting an Image to Multiple Formats and Resolutions

In ACDSee, you can export an image to multiple image formats and resolutions.
To Export an Image to Multiple Formats and Resolutions:
Page 304 of 827

1. In Develop mode, select the desired develop settings.
2. Click Save and then select Export.
3. Refer to the table below to make your selections from the Export dialog box.
Export Options
Page 305 of 827

Destination folder
S Select this option to use the same folder where the source images currently reside.
a
Check the Create a new subfolder for the files checkbox to place the images within a
m
subfolder of the source folder.
e
a
s
s
o
u
r
c
e
f
o
l
d
e
r
S Click this button to change the output folder to a specific location.

p
e
ci
fi
c
f
o
l
d
e
r
File names
U Using a template gives you control over the output file name. If you choose not use a
s template, the file name is unchanged. Duplicate files are given an underscore and number
e suffix.
T
e
m
p
l
a
Page 306 of 827

t
e
t
o
r
e
n
a
m
e
fi
l
e
s
T Check the Use Template to rename files checkbox to create a renaming template. You
e can specify a numerical or alphabetical sequence for the new file names, and use the
m original file names, new names, or names based on image metadata.
p
Template Displays the template to use to rename the files.
l
field
a Type an asterisk (*) to insert the original file name into the template.
t Use one or more number signs (#) to insert numeric or alphabetic
e characters, depending which options you selected.
Click the arrow on the drop-down list to select a recently-used
template.
Insert | Inserts file-specific information into the file name template.
Metadata
Position the cursor in the Template field, and then click Insert
field
Metadata to open the Choose Property dialog box. Select the metadata
you want to insert, and then click OK.
Insert | Replaces any number signs (#) in the template with sequential numeric
Sequence characters or alphabetic characters. Select numeric or alphabetic
number preference in Sequence number options below.
Insert | Replaces any asterisk signs (*) in the template name with the original
Original filename.
filename
Insert | Specifies the first letter or number of the sequence.
Sequence
number
options
Start at
Page 307 of 827

Format
Fi Select the file format in which you would like to save the exported images.
le
F
o
r
m
a
t
F Click this button to change the settings for the format you have selected.
o
r
m
a
t
S
e
t
ti
n
g
s
P Specify the color depth for your format settings.

ix
el
f
o
r
m
a
t
C Check the color space checkbox to choose a color space option from the drop-down list.
o
l
o
r
s
p
a
c
e
Page 308 of 827

Output size
R Select this option to specify how to scale the images. Select from the following options:
e
si
z
e
i
m
a
g
e
R Use this option to determine the method used to resize (resample) the image:
e
Box: displays considerable tiling or jaggies when you resize an image.
s
a Triangle: produces good results for image reduction and enlargement, but displays
m sharp transition lines.
p
Bicubic: produces good results with photo-realistic images and with images that are
li
irregular or complex. Uses interpolation to minimize the raggedness normally
n
associated with image expansion.
g
m Bell: smoothes the image.
e
B-spline: produces smooth transitions, but may cause excessive blurring.
t
h Lanczos: produces the sharpest images, but may also introduce some ringing
o artifacts.
d
Mitchell: produces smooth transitions when enlarging photo-realistic images. This
filter is good compromise between the ringing effect of Lanczos and the blurring
effect of other filters.
ClearIQZ: slower than Bicubic and Lanczos, but produces the best results when
enlarging photos, especially those of people.
D Select this option to force the exported images to fit the set dimensions independent of
i landscape or portrait orientation. Enter the dimensions in pixels, inches, or centimeters
m
e
n
si
o
n
s
W Select this option to resize the exported image to fit within the values entered in the two
Page 309 of 827

i boxes.
d
t
h
a
n
d
h
e
ig
h
t
L Select this option to resize the image to the long edge only. Enter the dimensions in pixels,
o inches, or centimeters
n
g
e
d
g
e
S Select this option to resize the image to the short edge only. Enter the dimensions in pixels,
h inches, or centimeters
o
rt
e
d
g
e
R Enter a resolution to set the number of pixels per inch or centimeter.

e
s
o
l
u
ti
o
n
E Enlarge only resizes only those images that are smaller than the specified height and width.
n
l
a
r
Page 310 of 827

g
e
o
n
ly
R Resizes only those images that are larger than the specified height and width.
e
d
u
c
e
o
n
ly
E Resizes all images to the specified height and width.

n
l
a
r
g
e
o
r
r
e
d
u
c
e
Preserve Original Aspect ratio
Select this option to maintain original image proportions. Note: images resized to long or short edge
maintain original image proportion.
Metadata
Select these options if the image contains metadata, and you want the exported image to contain the
same metadata and color profile.
Option: you can save your settings as a preset by clicking the new export preset button and
entering a name for your preset. Select one or more presets in the list to apply.
4. Click Export.
Page 311 of 827

To edit a preset, click the preset in the list, make your edits, and click the Save current export
preset button.
Sharing Develop Settings

You can share your develop settings with other ACDSee Ultimate users. To do this, you export the
processing settings from the database to a file, which has an .rpp file extension. You can then send the
image and the settings file, to another ACDSee Ultimate user, who can import the .rpp settings into
their ACDSee Ultimate database. When they open the image in ACDSee, the developed photo will have
the appearance you intended.
For RAW files, your changes are stored in the XMP file. To share settings for RAW files, XMP sidecar
files are the preferred way for sharing settings.
To Export Your Develop Settings:

1. In Manage mode, select the images that you want to share.
2. Click Tools | Database | Export | RPP Files. A summary of the export process displays in the Summary
dialog.
3. Click OK.
4. The .rpp file is saved in the same folder as the image.
When you send the image and the .rpp file to another ACDSee Ultimate user, tell them to keep
the image and the .rpp file together in the same folder.
To Import Develop Settings:

1. In Manage mode, select the shared images.
2. Click Tools | Database | Import | RPP Files.
A summary of the import process displays in the Summary dialog.

3. Click OK.
The thumbnails of the shared images are also updated to show your processing settings.
Restoring Original Images

Once you have developed an image, the settings you used are saved in the database and will be
applied again each time you open that file. You can remove the develop settings from a single image or
from a batch of images.
To Remove Develop Settings from an Image:
Page 312 of 827

1. Select one or more developed images in Manage or View mode. Developed images have a overlay
icon.
2. Click Process | Restore to Original.
You can also right-click a developed image and select Process | Restore to Original from the
context menu.
When you restore your image to its original state, all the develop settings will be deleted from
Copying and Pasting Develop Settings

In Develop mode, you can copy your precise adjustments and apply them to other images. This allows
you to perform complex adjustments once and have them benefit an unlimited number of images,
rather than having to perform the same actions over and over.
You can also save your Develop settings to be used as presets to be applied to other images in
the future.
To Copy Develop Settings from a Previously Developed Image and Apply Them to Other Images:
1. Open an image with the settings you want to copy in Develop.
2. Select Edit | Copy Settings...
3. In the Copy settings dialog box, select the settings you want to copy.
4. Click OK.
5. Select an image you want to paste the settings to by doing one of the following:
Click on an image in the filmstrip view.
Select File | Open Next Image (or press the Page Down key).
Select File | Open Previous Image (or press the Shift + Alt + L keys).
6. Select Edit | Paste Settings.
A blue square icon appears at the top of the Tune, Detail, Geometry and Repair tab to indicate
that changes have been made.
To Copy Develop Settings from an Image (as it is Being Developed) and Apply Them to Other
Images:
Page 313 of 827

1. After adjusting an image in Develop mode, click the Develop Settings button.
2. Press Copy Settings...
3. In the Copy settings dialog box, select the settings you want to copy.
4. Click OK.
5. Right-click the images you would like to paste the settings to, and:
In the Filmstrip: select Paste Settings...
In Manage mode: select Process | Paste Settings.
A blue square icon appears at the top of the Tune, Detail, Geometry and Repair tab to indicate
that changes have been made.
When copying settings from one image and pasting them to a second image with different
dimensions, the settings will be scaled to fit the target image automatically.
Taking Develop Snapshots

Develop Snapshots allow you to save your adjustments at any point during your development
workflow. As you make adjustments, you can take a snapshot at any time to save your work up to
that point. You may then continue to edit as desired, but can return to the version in your snapshot
whenever you like. Unlike presets, snapshots save directly to your image, allowing you to re-enter
Develop mode and switch between them, continue editing them, and apply them.
To Take a Snapshot:
1. Make any desired adjustments in Develop mode.
2. In the Snapshots pane, click the + button.
3. In the New Snapshot dialog, enter a name for your snapshot and press OK. Your saved snapshot will be
listed in the Snapshot pane.
Page 314 of 827

Images with snapshots display the Snapshot icon in Manage mode.
Viewing Your Snapshot

You can view your image with any of the snapshots saved to that image in View mode. This viewing is
commitment-free, much like the Auto Lens.
Page 315 of 827

To View Your Image with a Snapshot:

1. Open the image in View mode.
2. On the Toolbar, press the Snapshot button.
The Snapshot button will only be visible when viewing images with Develop Snapshots
you have created in Develop mode.
3. Select a snapshot to preview your image in.
If while viewing your snapshot, you want to return to the saved version of your image without
leaving Develop mode, click the Adjust Develop Settings button and choose Apply Last
Used from the menu.
Saving Images in Develop Mode

In Develop, changes are saved to the database, so that every time you open an image the
adjustments are where you left them. This also allows you to return to the image to undo or further
tweak adjustments. You have several options for saving changes to an image in Develop.
Saving Images
1. Click Done.
Page 316 of 827

Save Save your changes.
Save as Save a copy of your developed image with a new name or format.
Depending on your file type, any of the following checkboxes appear in the bottom left
corner of the Save as dialog box:
Preserve Metadata: retains metadata with the new image.
Preserve database information: maintains your catalog information, such as

ratings.
Preserve develop settings for original image: applies changes to the original
image, as well as the copy being saved.
Embed Color Profile in Image: retains color profile selected in Color Management
with your new image.
Discard Discard your changes.
Cancel Remain on the same image in Develop with your changes intact, without saving the image.
AutoSave You can enable AutoSave in order to avoid selecting a saving option each time you finish
with an image. When AutoSave is enabled, pressing Done, or selecting another image
from the Filmstrip will prompt ACDSee to automatically save your changes in Develop
mode. You will no longer see the Save Changes dialog. To disable AutoSave, choose Tools |
Options... In the Options dialog, click Develop Mode. Then uncheck the AutoSave all
Develop Mode adjustments checkbox.
AutoSave is not available for RAW images.

1. Click Save.
updated image.
and size for each.
Page 317 of 827

you remain on the RAW file with the settings still intact.
Click Cancel.
file.
How ACDSee Saves Changes to Images

How images are saved is different between non-encodable (e.g. RAW) and encodable (e.g. JPEG)
images. The table below outlines the differences in how changes to your image are saved by ACDSee.
The purpose of saving files in its original, developed, and edited states is to allow you to revert back to
a setting if you decide to discard your changes at a later time.
If you archive your images, ensure that you back up subfolders to preserve the original image
files.
Page 318 of 827

State Non encodable files (e.g. RAW) Encodabl

e files
(e.g.
JPEG)
Original Original images are located in the folders you placed them in. Original
images are
located in
the folders
you placed
them in.
Developed When you make changes and click Done, the image's develop When you
settings are stored in the XMP file of the RAW, and in the ACDSee develop
database. an image
and click
Done, the
develop
settings
are stored
in an XMP
file, and
the
original
and XMP
file are
moved to
the
[Originals]
folder. In
Manage
and View
modes,
the image
with the
changes
applied is
displayed.
The
develop
settings
are also
stored in
the
ACDSee
database.
Page 319 of 827


e files
(e.g.
JPEG)
Edited When you take a RAW file directly into Edit, and you click Save, If you take
ACDSee prompts you to save the file in a different file format. In an image
RAW, to permanently save changes to an image, you will need to directly to
save the image in a different file format. Edit and
save your
image, the
original
image is
saved to
the
[Originals]
folder in
ACDSee.
If you edit
an image
first, and
then take
it into
Develop,
ACDSee
prompts
that the
edits will
be lost.
You
cannot
revert an
image
back to
Develop, if
it was not
developed
before
taking the
image to
Edit.
Developed and Edited When you develop an image, the image's develop settings are When you
stored in the XMP file of the RAW. When you take the developed take a
image into Edit, and then apply edits and save the image, ACDSee developed
prompts you to save the image in a new file format.
Page 320 of 827


e files
(e.g.
JPEG)
For RAW files, to permanently save changes, you will need to image into
apply edits
and save
it, the
develop
settings
are saved
in the XMP
file and
placed in
the
[Originals]
folder. If
the
developed
image is in
Edit, and
has edits
applied
and you
click Save,
ACDSee
saves the
image.
If you
decide to
take the
edited
image
back into
Develop,
ACDSee
prompts
that you
will lose
your edits.
If you
choose to
discard
Page 321 of 827


e files
(e.g.
JPEG)
your edits,
the
original
image
with its
develop
settings
will be
opened.
Pro 3 RAW Processing Emulation

ACDSee RAW processing pipeline uses a wide color gamut to maximize full use of the colors captured in
your RAW files. The wider ProPhoto color space ensures that no colors are clipped until the end of the
pipeline where you can then choose to keep the colors in ProPhoto or output to sRGB.
ACDSee emulates the RAW processing pipeline for images developed in Pro 3 or previous versions.
However, if you would like to take full advantage of the improved RAW processing, you can move your
previously developed RAW images into the ACDSee pipeline with the following two options.
One option is to use the Restore to Original command and redevelop your RAW images in ACDSee.
Alternatively, if you would like to convert over to the ACDSee pipeline but still want to maintain some
of your Develop settings from Pro 3, (such as Geometry settings), you can create a Preset to retain
certain develop settings and clear others.
To Use the ACDSee RAW Processing Pipeline While Maintaining Some Develop Settings:
1. In ACDSee, open an undeveloped RAW image in Develop.
2. Create a Develop Preset and in the Save Develop Settings Preset dialog box, select Camera (RAW Only)
under the Tone Curves group. You may also want to add Advanced Color, Vibrance, Contrast, and
Exposure to this preset since the initial color, contrast, and exposure is very different in the RAW
processing engine of ACDSee.
3. Enter a name for your Preset and click OK.
4. Apply this preset in ACDSee to any image developed in Pro 3 to convert over to the new processing
pipeline (right-click and select Process | Apply Preset to select the preset).
Page 322 of 827

Viewing Develop Settings in Develop Mode

You can use the Develop Settings pane to view all adjustments made to your images in Develop mode
at once.

In Develop mode, click Panes | Develop Settings.

1. Open a previously-developed image in Develop mode.
If you are in the process of developing the image, you must press Save before the values
in the Develop Settings pane will show up.
Using the Develop Brush

The Develop Brush is designed to make a variety of edits to specific areas of a photo. In the Tune tab
adjust the Exposure, Saturation, Vibrance, Temperature, Tint, Fill Light, Contrast, Clarity, and Color
Strength, as well as Color EQ, Tone Curves, and Sharpness in a photo by brushing on the effects. In
the Detail tab adjust the Sharpness, Luminance Noise Reduction, and Color Noise Reduction in a
photo by brushing on the effects. For example, instead of adding Fill Light to an entire photo, add the
fill light to certain areas, such as back-lit subjects. Up to eight brushes can be added to separate areas
in an image and each can be assigned unique effect settings.
Develop Brush
The Develop Brush button displays at the top of the Tune and Detail tabs.
To Use the Develop Brush:
1. In Develop mode, in the Tune or Detail tab, click the Brush button at the top of the pane to
open the control panel and enter Brushing mode. Or, toggle the Brush panel open and closed with the B
key.
2. Specify the brush settings in the panel, or as you work, as described in the table below.
3. Start painting the effects onto your photo.
4. Adjust the sliders to get the effect you want.
Page 323 of 827

To apply another brush, (up to eight are available), select the next brush in the sequence
at the bottom of the panel. The box above the brush will become checked. The
checkmarks represent the activated brushes, while the selected brush icon (highlighted in
blue) represents the currently enabled brush. You can return to any of the brushes at any
given time by selecting its respective brush icon. A blue brush represents a brush that has
been used. You can deactivate or re-activate any brush by unchecking or re-checking its
respective checkbox.
5. Press Apply or Done.
Hovering over a brush button will reveal that specific brush's strokes on the image. The brush
strokes will appear in the color selected in the drop-down next to the Show brush strokes
Page 324 of 827

checkbox. (By default, the color is red.) Alternatively, hold down the S key to see your brush
strokes on the image.
If all of the sliders are at zero, brush strokes will appear in color, (as selected in the drop-down
next to the Show brush strokes checkbox), as no changes have been made to the image.
To Delete Brush Strokes:
To remove brush strokes, select the brush you wish to delete and press the button. Note that
unchecking a brush checkbox will only remove the brush strokes until the box is re-checked.
Develop Brush Options
Page 325 of 827

Nib Width Adjusts the size of the brush. You can use the mouse wheel
to adjust nib width or adjust the Nib Width slider.
Feathering Adjust the slider to control the softness of the transition

between the brush strokes and the image. Use Shift + mouse
wheel to adjust the amount of feathering or adjust the
Feathering slider.
Pressure Adjust the slider to control the strength of the brush.
Add brush stroke Brush while holding the left mouse button down.
Erase brush stroke Brush while holding the right mouse button down.
Clear all brush strokes

Removes all brush strokes of the currently selected
brush from the image.
Invert all brush strokes

Toggle this option to invert the brush strokes of the
currently selected brush. This makes brushed areas no
longer brushed and untouched areas brushed. This is useful
if you want the majority of the image brushed and a small
section untouched. Simply brush only the small area you
don't want affected and invert the brush strokes.
Smart Brushing See the Smart Brushing section below.
Show brush strokes
When this option is checked, the currently selected brush's

strokes will be displayed in the color shown. This is helpful
when brushing a complex area with a subtle effect because it
can be hard to tell if you have missed a spot. The color can
be changed in case you are brushing on a red area of the
image.
Develop Brush Tune Tab Options
Page 326 of 827

General
Exposure Drag the slider to the right to increase exposure, or drag to

the left to decrease exposure. One eV is equivalent to one
stop of exposure change. Brush on exposure.
Saturation Drag the slider to the right to increase saturation, or to the

left to decrease saturation. Brush on saturation.
Vibrance Drag the slider to the right to increase vibrance, or to the left
to decrease vibrance. Increasing the vibrance does not affect
skin tone in an image. This is unlike saturation, which
intensifies all colors equally. Brush on vibrance.
Temperature Drag the Temperature slider to the left (more blue) or right
(more yellow) to select a specific color temperature. Brush
on white balance.
Tint Drag the Tint slider to the left (more magenta) or right (more
green) to match the white balance settings that you selected
when you took the photo. Brush on white balance.
Fill Light Drag the slider to the right to add light to the darkest areas of
the image. Brush on fill light.
Contrast Drag the slider to the right to increase contrast, or to the left
to decrease contrast. Brush on contrast.
Clarity The Clarity tool adds subtle definition to the details in your
image. Use the Clarity slider to enhance the contrast of
midtones, without overpowering the shadows and highlights.
Drag the slider to the right to increase clarity, or to the left to
reverse clarity. Brush on clarity.
Color Strength Use the Color Overlay sliders to add tint to your image
without affecting brightness levels. Set the Color Strength
slider, then move the Color slider to your desired color band.
With Color Strength set to 0, no color will be applied.
Brush on color.
Color EQ
Drag the color sliders to adjust individual colors' saturation, brightness, hue, and contrast on their
respective tabs. Drag the sliders right for more intensity, or left for less intensity. You can also enter a
number into the fields for precise adjustments. Select one of the following buttons:
Saturation
Page 327 of 827

Brightness
Hue
Contrast
Color Selector
You can also select a precise color to adjust by dragging directly on the image. In order to toggle the
Color Selector on, press the Color Selector icon. Place your cursor on the image for the double
arrow icon to appear. Then click and drag up or down to adjust the colors beneath the double arrow
icon. The affected color sliders automatically adjust as you move your cursor. However, no change
will occur to the image until you brush on the adjustment.
Brush on Color EQ.
Tone Curves
Move the curve and/or add points by clicking to adjust the tonal range of your image. Select any of the
color icons on the right side of the graph to target your adjustment to one of the following color
channels:
RGB
Red
Green
Blue
Brush on your tone curves adjustment.

You can delete points on your curve by right-clicking and choosing Delete point. You can also delete a
point by dragging it off of the graph.
Develop Brush Detail Tab Options

Sharpness Move the slider to the right to brush on sharpness, or move the slider to the
left to brush on blur.
You can right-click a slider to reset to the default value.
To exit the brushing panel, toggle the Develop Brush button.
Smart Brushing
You can use the Smart Brush to target your brushing to specific colors, brightness values, or a
combination of color and brightness. The Smart Brush only affects pixels similar in value to the pixel in
the center of the brush stroke, and allows you to apply adjustments to those pixels.
Page 328 of 827

To Use the Smart Brush:
1. In Develop mode, on the Tune or Detail tab, click the Brush button at the top of the pane to
open the control panel and enter Brushing mode. Or, toggle the Brush panel open and closed with the B
key.
2. Select an option from the Smart Brushing drop-down menu:
Color Uses the color of pixels similar in value to the pixel in the center of the brush
stroke to determine if they should be brushed on, depending on the
Tolerance slider setting.
Brightness Uses the brightness of pixels similar in value to the pixel in the center of the
brush stroke to determine if they should be brushed on, depending on the
Tolerance slider setting.
Magic Uses a combination of the color and brightness values similar to the pixel in
the center of the brush stroke to determine which pixels should be brushed
on, depending on the Tolerance slider setting.
3. Use the Tolerance slider to increase or decrease the range of pixels affected by the Smart Brush.
4. Place your cursor over the color or brightness you wish to select and begin painting on the effect.
To apply another brush, (up to eight are available), select the next brush in the sequence
at the bottom of the panel. The box above the brush will become checked. The
checkmarks represent the activated smart brushes, while the selected brush icon
(highlighted in blue) represents the currently enabled smart brush. You can return to any
of the brushes at any given time by selecting its respective brush icon. A blue brush
represents a smart brush that has been used. You can deactivate or re-activate any brush
by unchecking or rechecking its respective checkbox.
Hold down Shift prior to making a brush stroke to temporarily disable the Smart Brush. You
can use this keyboard shortcut on a stroke by stroke basis.
You can erase brush strokes by right-clicking and brushing over your strokes.
To Turn off Smart Brushing:

Select Off from the Smart Brushing drop-down menu.
Page 329 of 827

Using the Gradient Tool

While the Develop tools allow you to make a variety of adjustments to your photos, sometimes you
want these effects to gradually progress across your photo. You can adjust the Exposure, Saturation,
Vibrance, Temperature, Tint, Fill Light, Contrast, Clarity, and Color Strength, as well as Color EQ, Tone
Curves, and Sharpness in one or a series of gradients over your photo. For example, instead of
applying exposure adjustments across an entire photo, you may want them to be stronger in some
areas and weaker or absent from others.
Gradient Tool
The Gradient tool button displays at the top of Tune and Detail tab.
To Use the Gradient Tool:
1. In Develop mode, on the Tune or Detail tab, click the Gradient button at the top of the pane to
open the control panel and enter gradient mode. Or, toggle the Gradient panel open and closed with
the G key.
2. Specify the gradient settings in the panel as described in the table below.
3. Position the guides on your photo. Inside the guide boxes, the gradient is transitioning. On either side of
the boxes, the effect being applied by the Gradient tool is at full strength or not applied at all. To make
this clearer, check the Show gradient mask checkbox. Move the boxes to define where the effect will
begin or end. Hold down the Shift key while positioning the effect to lock to the nearest 45° angle, for
straightness.
To apply another gradient, (up to eight are available), select the next gradient in the
sequence at the bottom of the panel. The box above the gradient will become checked.
The checkmarks represent the activated gradients, while the selected gradient icon
(highlighted in blue) represents the currently enabled gradient. You can return to any of
the gradients at any given time by selecting its respective gradient icon. A blue gradient
represents a gradient that has been used. You can deactivate or re-activate any gradient
Page 330 of 827

Gradient Tool Options

Invert gradient
Toggle this option to invert the gradient. By pressing the Invert
button after applying a gradient beginning at the top of the image, the
gradient would now begin at the bottom, and vice versa.
Show gradient mask
When this option is checked, your gradient mask will be displayed in

the color shown. Alternatively, hold down the S key to see the mask
on the image. Click the drop-down arrow to select another display
color.
Using the Gradient Tool on the Detail Tab
Sharpness Move the Sharpness slider to the right to sharpen the area affected by the gradient, or
move the slider to the left to blur the area affected by the gradient.
Page 331 of 827

To exit Gradient mode, toggle the Gradient tool button.
Using the Radial Gradient Tool

While Develop tools are generally used to make a variety of adjustments to photos, sometimes these
effects are required to draw attention to a specific area of a photo. Adjust the radial gradient's
Feathering and Squareness, the Exposure, Saturation, Vibrance, Temperature, Tint, Fill Light,
Contrast, Clarity, and Color Strength, as well as Color EQ, Tone Curves, and Sharpness in one or a
series of gradients over the photo. For example, instead of applying sharpening across an entire
photo, try sharpening just the center subject.
Radial Gradient Tool

The Radial Gradient button displays at the top of Tune and Detail tabs.
1. In Develop mode, in the Tune or Detail tab, click the Radial Gradient button at the top of the
pane to open the control panel and enter radial gradient mode. Or, toggle the radial gradient panel
open and closed with the R key.
2. Specify the radial gradient settings in the panel as described in the table below.
3. Position the guides on your photo. Inside the circle, the image is unaltered. At the perimeter of the
circle, the effect being applied by the Radial Gradient tool is transitioning between not applied at all
(inside), and full strength (outside). To make this clearer, check the Show gradient mask checkbox.
Move the guides to define where the effect will begin or end. Hold down the Shift key while positioning
the effect to change the radial gradient to a perfect circle.
To apply another gradient, (up to eight are available), select the next gradient in the
sequence at the bottom of the panel. The box above the gradient will become checked.
The checkmarks represent the activated gradients, while the selected gradient icon
(highlighted in blue) represents the currently enabled gradient. You can return to any of
the gradients at any given time by selecting its respective gradient icon. A blue gradient
represents a gradient that has been used. You can deactivate or re-activate any gradient
5. Press Save or Done.
Page 332 of 827

Page 333 of 827

Feathering Adjust the slider to control how gradual the transition of the edge of the
gradient will be.
Squareness Adjust the slider to the right to change the shape of the gradient tool from
an oval to a square.
Invert gradient
Toggle this option to invert the gradient. By pressing the Invert button,
the effects will be applied to the center of the image (inside the circular
guides), and outside of the radial gradient will be unaltered.
Show gradient mask
When this option is checked, your gradient mask will be displayed in the
color shown. Alternatively, hold down the S key to see the mask on the
image.
Using the Radial Gradient Tool on the Detail Tab
Sharpness Move the Sharpness slider to the right to sharpen the area outside of the
Radial Gradient circle, or move the slider to the left to blur.
Double-click the + at center of the guides to expand the radial gradient to fill the entire width of
the image.
To exit Gradient mode, toggle the Radial Gradient button.
Pixel Targeting in Develop Mode
Targeting Adjustments by Color or Tone

While tools are used to make a variety of global adjustments to an image and the Develop Brush
makes it possible to adjust specific sections of the image, Pixel Targeting allows for the selection of
distinct tones, colors, and skin tones. Pixel Targeting applies a number of adjustments to a photo's
individual colors or tones, or just to skin tone. For example, in Develop mode, under the Tune tab,
expand the General tool and note that the Exposure slider affects the entire image. However, to only
adjust the exposure of a blue sky in an image, apply brush strokes or a gradient to the image to target
the sky, then enable Pixel Targeting by clicking the Develop Brush icon and clicking the Pixel Targeting
Mask icon. Adjust the Color Range color wheel to the color blue, then use the General tool's
Exposure slider in the Develop Brush to only adjust the exposure on the sky.
Pixel Targeting is only available in two tabs of the Develop Tools pane:
Page 334 of 827

l Tune, and
l Detail.
In the Tune and Detail tabs, Pixel Targeting is available in the following Local Adjustment Tools:
l Develop Brush
l Linear Gradient, and
l Radial Gradient.
To perform targeted adjustments with Pixel Targeting:

1. Select one of the above tabs in the Develop Tools pane (Tune or Detail).
2. Select one of the above Local Adjustment Tools and apply the tool to the image.
l Select the Develop Brush local adjustment tool and click the Pixel Targeting Mask icon
adjacent to the Smart Brushing drop down.
l Select the Linear Gradient local adjustment tool and click the Pixel Targeting Mask
icon adjacent to the Show gradient mask checkbox.
l Select the Radial Gradient local adjustment tool and click the Pixel Targeting Mask
icon adjacent to the Feathering slider.
4. In the Pixel Targeting pane, configure the settings for Luminance Range and Color Range as described
below.
5. Adjust the selected tool's settings. The adjustments will only affect the targeted color or tones, not the
entire image.
Page 335 of 827

The Pixel Targeting Pane
The Pixel Targeting pane consists of three sections:

l Presets
l Luminance Range, and
l Color Range.
Page 336 of 827

Pixel Targeting Pane Sections
Page 337 of 827

Presets Make a selection from the Presets drop-down list, or click the
Save Preset icon to populate the new preset to the Presets
drop-down list.
Click the
icon to view
a preview of
the mask
Show Mask Preview
that high-
lights the
pixels to be
targeted.
Click the
icon to
remove all
of the cur-
rent image
Reset
edits and
return the
image to its
original
state.
Click the
icon to open
Help the Pixel Tar-
geting help
file.
Luminance Range The Luminance Range field set is used to target tones of
brightness for adjustment. Enable the Luminance Range
checkbox to enable the associated functionality.
Invert Selection Click the

icon to
change the
selected
pixels to the
unselected
pixels.
Indicator Line Click the

icon to add
an indicator
line to the
Tone Grab-
ber display
Page 338 of 827

and pro-
duce an eye-
dropper for
indicating
where a
tone from
the image
appears in
the graph.
Tone Grabber Use the four

slider tabs
to make a
tonal selec-
tion. The
area inside
the blue box
represents
the tonal
selection.
The top two
tabs cannot
slide past
one
another.
Each of the
bottom tabs
cannot slide
past their
own top tab
when sliding
toward the
center. The
tonal range
is between
0 and 255. A
diagonal line
between
the top and
its asso-
ciated bot-
tom slider
tab will pro-
duce a
feathered
selection
Page 339 of 827

effect (64 to
0 in the
Luminance
Range
example). A
straight line
connecting
the top and
associated
bottom
slider tab
will produce
a hard cut-
off (192 to
192 in the
Luminance
Range
example).
Add Detail Increase the

slide value
to sharpen
the crisp-
ness around
the edge of
the selec-
tion.
Detail Range If the Add

Detail slider
has been
advanced
past a value
of "0", the
Detail
Range slide
is enabled
for con-
trolling the
range of the
edge detail
added by
the Add
Detail
slider.
Color Range The Color Range field set is used to target specific colors for
adjustment. Enable the Color Range checkbox to enable the
Page 340 of 827

associated functionality.
Invert Color Click the

icon to
invert the
selected col-
ors on the
wheel.
Color Indicator Click the

icon to dis-
play and pro-
duce an
eyedropper
for selecting
color pixels
in the
image. Hold
down the
Alt key and
click with
the eye-
dropper to
make a
color selec-
tion.
Color Wheel Use the

Color Wheel
to adjust pre-
cise colors
in an image.
The Color
Wheel is par-
ticularly use-
ful for
common
requests
like making
a blue sky
more blue,
or bright-
ening dark
water that is
meant to
depict a
bright lake.
Page 341 of 827

The selec-
ted color is
displayed in
the circle
below the
Enable
Wheel
checkbox.
For more
information
on the Color
Wheel, see
Adjusting
Color with
the Color
Wheel.
Enable Wheel Located

above the
Wheel Selec-
tion circle
displaying
the selected
color,
enable the
checkbox to
make the
associated
wheel act-
ive.
Add Wheel Click the

+ icon to
make
changes to
another
color using
an addi-
tional color
wheel.
Wheel Selection Located dir-

ectly
beneath the
Enable
Wheel
checkbox,
Page 342 of 827

click the
inside circle
to select the
associated
color wheel.
The selec-
ted color is
represented
by the
wheel.
Delete Wheel Deletes the

currently
selected
color wheel.
Smoothness Increase the

slider to
adjust
smoothness,
which acts
like a feath-
ering tool to
soften a
color's
edges.
Skin Targeting Using the

Skin Tar-
geting slider
will disable
the rest of
the Color
Range field
set and
allow only
skin tones to
be targeted.
Right-click a slider to reset to the default value.
Click Reset to clear changes and reset to default settings.
Page 343 of 827

Save setting values as a preset for future use. Clicking the Save Preset icon on the Pixel
Targeting pane will only save Pixel Targeting settings, and not the settings on the filter. Filter
settings must be saved separately.
About the Tune Tab

In the Tune tab, you can adjust exposure, white balance, saturation, brightness, hue, color profile and
much more.
To Use the Tune Tab:

1. In Develop mode, select the Tune tab.
2. Select the General, White Balance, Light EQ™, Color EQ, Tone Curves, Soft Focus, Effects, Color LUTs,
Split Tone, Post-Crop Vignette, or Output Color Space group to develop the image.

1. Click Done.
image.
Develop Mode page.
Page 344 of 827

1. Click Save.
updated image.
and size for each.
Click Cancel.
file.
Making General Adjustments

In the General group, you can make global adjustments to your image.
You can save your settings as a preset for future use.
To Develop Your Image in General:

2. In the General group, make adjustments as described below.
Adjustment Options
Page 345 of 827

Exposure Drag the slider to the right to increase exposure, or drag to the left to decrease exposure.
One eV is equivalent to one stop of exposure change.
Highlight Drag the slider to the right to recover detail in overexposed areas of the image.
Enhancement
Fill Light Drag the slider to the right to add light to the darkest areas of the image.
Contrast Drag the slider to the right to increase contrast, or to the left to decrease contrast.
Saturation Drag the slider to the right to increase saturation, or to the left to decrease saturation.
Vibrance Drag the slider to the right to increase vibrance, or to the left to decrease vibrance.
Increasing the vibrance does not affect skin tone in an image. This is unlike saturation,
which intensifies all colors equally.
Clarity The Clarity tool adds subtle definition to the details in your image. Use the Clarity slider to
enhance the contrast of midtones, without overpowering the shadows and highlights.
Drag the slider to the right to increase clarity, or to the left to reverse clarity.
Dehaze The Dehaze tool restores contrast, detail, and lost color to images. This is especially useful
for images that have been captured through a haze. A haze can occur when dust, smoke,
or other particles obscure the clarity of the image, particularly the sky. Drag the slider to
the right to reduce haze.
Use the Settings button to reset sliders to Last Saved or Last Used settings. You can also
save your settings as a preset, copy, or paste them.
A Brief Technical Explanation of eV

eV stands for exposure value. When you capture an image, the exposure is determined by several
things — the f-stop (or aperture) shutter speed, and ISO. Typically, the camera automatically
determines the optimal exposure based on a built-in light meter and then sets the f-stop and shutter
speed accordingly. However, the light meter can be fooled by a bright sky or dark surroundings,
leading it to choose an incorrect f-stop and shutter speed. This results in an underexposed or
overexposed image. With the exposure slider you can compensate for exposure problems caused by
incorrect settings when the image was captured.
Adjusting White Balance

Use the White Balance group to remove unwanted color casts in your images. A color cast is a visible
color tint that affects your image. Color casts are usually due to the lighting when the photo was
taken. If you are taking photos indoors, you might want to remove the blue tint or remove the yellow
tint that indoor lighting can often give.
Page 346 of 827

To Adjust the White Balance in an Image:

2. In the White Balance group, do one of the following:
Automatically adjust white balance by selecting a portion of the image with neutral gray pixels with
the White Balance eyedropper.
Manually adjust white balance with the sliders as described below.
White Balance Options
Page 347 of 827

White Balance For RAW images, select one of the following white balance correction options:
l As Shot: selected automatically. Applies the camera's white balance setting
as stored in the camera when the photo was taken.
l Auto: adjusts the color temperature and tint to settings automatically determ-
ined by analyzing the image.
l Sunny: adjusts the color temperature to 5500K, approximately that of the
midday sun.
l Cloudy: adjusts the color temperature to 6500K, approximately that of a
lightly overcast sky.
l Shade: adjusts the color temperature to 7500K, approximately that of a heav-
ily overcast sky.
l Tungsten: adjusts the color temperature to 2850K, approximately that of a
household light bulb.
l Fluorescent: adjusts the color temperature to 3800K, approximately that of
a fluorescent light bulb.
l Flash: adjusts the color temperature to 5500K, approximately that of a cam-
era flash.
l Custom: allows you to specify a specific white balance, by adjusting the Tem-
perature and Tint sliders. You can also hover your mouse over the image until
it turns into an eye dropper, and click an area of the image that is a neutral
color (gray).
For encodable images, such as JPEGs, select one of the following white balance
correction options:
l As Shot: selected automatically. Applies the camera's white balance setting
as stored in the camera when the photo was taken.
l Auto: adjusts the color temperature and tint to settings automatically determ-
ined by analyzing the image.
l Custom: allows you to specify a specific white balance, by adjusting the Tem-
perature and Tint sliders. You can also hover your mouse over the image until
it turns into an eye dropper, and click an area of the image that is a neutral
color (gray).
Temperature Drag the Temperature slider to the left (more blue) or right (more yellow) to
select a specific color temperature.
Tint Drag the Tint slider to the left (more magenta) or right (more green) to match the
white balance settings that you selected when you took the photo.
Strength Drag the slider to the right to increase, or to the left to decrease the white balance
adjustment.
Adjusting Lighting
You can use the Light EQ™ tool to adjust tone levels in images that are too dark or too light, without
affecting other areas of the photo. Tone level is the average brightness of a pixel and its surrounding
pixels.
You can also simultaneously brighten dark areas that are too dark, and darken areas that are too
bright. Examples would be a back-lit photo of a person silhouetted against a bright background like
the sea, or a window. In fact, most photos taken on a dull day, or with a flash, can be improved in
various ways with fine adjustments using the Light EQ™ tool.
Page 348 of 827

To Reduce Lighting in Your Image:

2. In the Light EQ™ group, select Basic mode, Standard mode, or Advanced mode from the drop-down
menu at the top of the pane and configure the settings as described below.
Basic Light EQ™

Basic is for very quick and easy adjustments using just three sliders. You can also click directly on an
area of the image to generate automatic settings optimal for that area (usually the subject of the
photo).
Click on an area in the image to generate automatic settings optimal for that area.
Manually adjust the lighting as described below.
Basic Light EQ™ Options

Shadows Drag the slider to the right to brighten or drag the slider to the
left to darken the shadows.
Midtones Drag the slider to the right to brighten or drag the slider to the
left to darken midtones.
Highlights Drag the slider to the right to brighten or drag the slider to the
left to darken highlights.
Auto Click the Auto button for ACDSee Ultimate to automatically adjust
the lighting in your image.
Standard Light EQ™

Standard works like a sound equalizer but with light. You can adjust the brightness and contrast of
different tone bands (areas of relative brightness or darkness) independently using two sliders for each
tone band—one for brightening and one for darkening. A graph shows the amount of brightening or
darkening applied throughout the tonal range. The gray areas in the graph are suggested boundaries
for adjustment to avoid clipping and loss of detail, and turn pink to indicate where you have adjusted
the sliders far enough to cause clipping.
Page 349 of 827

Select an area of the image you would like to adjust, left-click and drag up to brighten or right-click and
drag down to darken.
Standard Light EQ™ Options
Page 350 of 827

Brighten sliders (top)
Drag the sliders up to increase the brightening in each tonal band. The sliders on the left affect dark tones.
The sliders on the right affect bright tones. Moving a slider changes the amount of brightening only in that
particular tonal band in the image.
You can also type a number into the number boxes and increment them slowly to make precise
adjustments.
Darken sliders (bottom)
Drag the sliders down to increase the darkening in each tonal band. The sliders on the left affect dark
tones. The sliders on the right affect bright tones. Moving a slider changes the amount of darkening only in
that particular tonal band in the image.
You can also type a number into the number boxes and increment them slowly to make precise
adjustments.
Graph
The graph indicates the amount of brightening and darkening applied throughout the tone range of the
image. The portion of the graph above the horizontal axis corresponds to brightening, while the portion of
the graph below the horizontal axis corresponds to darkening. When both brightening and darkening are
applied within the same tonal band, contrast is increased. The area between the top of the brightening
graph and the bottom of the darkening graph indicates the relative increase of contrast throughout the
tone range of the image. You can left-click on the graph or on the image and drag the double-pointed
arrow up to brighten or right-click and drag down to darken.
# tone bands
Set the number of tone bands you would like to adjust. A greater number of tone bands allows for more
precise control, while fewer tone bands make it easier to smooth adjustments quickly.
On Image
Double-click with left mouse Automatically sets Brightening to optimum for that area of the
button image. A brighter area (e.g. a face) works best.
Double-click with right mouse Automatically sets the Darkening to optimum for that area of the
button image.
(or Shift + double-click with left
mouse button)
Ctrl + double-click with left mouse Modifies the current brightening adjustment curve to optimize it
button for the area surrounding the tone level you clicked on. In most
cases, this will result in increasing the amount of brightness
applied to the area surrounding the tone level you clicked on,
while decreasing the amount applied to other tone levels.
Use this method to make a specific subject or area stand out by
Page 351 of 827

brightening.
Ctrl + double-click with right mouse Modifies the current darkening adjustment curve to optimize it
button for the area surrounding the tone level you clicked on. In most
cases, this will result in increasing the amount of darkness applied
to the area surrounding the tone level you clicked on, while
decreasing the amount applied to other tone levels.
Use this method to make a specific subject or area blend in by
darkening.
Scroll up or down with the mouse Increases or decreases the amount of brightening applied at that
wheel over the image tone level in the image. Both the image and the graph show the
changes.
Shift + scroll with the mouse wheel Decreases or increases the amount of darkening applied at that
over the image tone level in the image.
Hold down "A" Adjusts all of the brighten sliders at once.

+ scrolling or
+ dragging with the left mouse
button
Hold down "A" + Shift Adjusts all of the darken sliders at once.
+ scrolling or
+ dragging with the right mouse
button
Click and drag up and down on the Increases or decreases the amount of Brightening applied at that
image (left mouse button) tone level in the image. Both the image and the graph show the
changes.
(Only works if the image is actual size—no zooming.)
Shift + click and drag up and down Decreases or increases the amount of Darkening applied at that
on the image (left or right mouse tone level in the image.
button)
Auto
Click the Auto button for ACDSee Ultimate to automatically adjust the lighting in your image.
Advanced Light EQ™

Advanced gives you ultimate control of the brightness and contrast in an image. Adjustment curves
can be constructed using four sliders, and you can manually adjust the curves by clicking and dragging
Page 352 of 827

within the graph area or on the image itself.

Select an area of the image you would like to adjust, left-click and drag up to brighten or right-click and
drag down to darken.
Graph
The top half of the graph corresponds to brightening, and the bottom half corresponds to darkening.
Tone levels of the shadows are represented on the left, midtones in the middle, and highlights on the
right.
The light gray in the graph shows the amount of brightening or darkening applied throughout the
image. The dark gray areas in the graph are suggested boundaries for adjustment, and turn red to
indicate where you have adjusted far enough to cause a loss in detail. When the cursor is over the
image, the two vertical yellow lines correspond to the lower and upper bounds of the tone level of the
area under the cursor and indicate the center of adjustment.
Adjustment Light EQ™ Options
Page 353 of 827

Area Action Result
Sliders
Drag Brightening slider To the right: increases the light applied to the darker areas.
To the left: applies brightening more uniformly to all areas of the
image.
Drag Darkening slider To the right: increases the darkening applied to the brighter areas
of the image.
To the left: applies the darkening more uniformly to all areas of
the image.
Drag Amplitude slider To the right: increases the intensity of the brightening across all
(Brightening) areas of the image. The height of the curve increases.
To the left: reduces the intensity of the brightening and the
height of the curve.
If the Amplitude slider is 0: no brightening is applied.
If the Amplitude is 100-200: proportional amount of clipping
increases.
In most cases, 100 is the right amount of amplitude. For images
with fine detail in the highlights, decreasing brighten amplitude
preserves the detail.
In most cases it is not necessary to adjust amplitude.
Drag Amplitude slider To the right: increases the intensity of the darkening across all
(Darkening) areas of the image. The height of the bottom orange curve
increases.
To the left: reduces the intensity of the darkening and the height
of the curve.
On Graph
Drag the graph (top) The graph changes as you left-click and drag up on the graph
itself. The graph represents the brightening adjustments you are
making. The dark gray graph represents the maximum amount
you can drag the graph before clipping (pink) begins.
The height of the graph represents the level of brightening
applied at each tone level. (Tone moves from black on left to
white on the right.)
When you make direct brightening or darkening adjustments on
the graph or image, the corresponding Brightening or Darkening
slider changes to Custom curve. If you adjust the position of the
Page 354 of 827

Area Action Result
slider after this, it discards all direct curve adjustments.

When you make direct brightening or darkening adjustments on
the graph or image, the corresponding Brightening or Darkening
Amplitude slider changes to indicate the current curve
amplitude. (An amplitude of 100 is the maximum amplitude a
curve can have without causing clipping.)
Drag the graph (bottom) The graph changes as you right-click and drag down on the graph
itself. The graph represents the darken adjustments you are
making. The dark gray graph represents the maximum amount
you can drag the graph before clipping (pink) begins.
You can use all the shortcuts Changes the tonal band on the graph itself with a corresponding
below that apply to the change in the image. This is useful for making fine adjustments to
image, directly to the Graph a specific tonal band.
itself.
On Image
Double-click with left mouse Automatically sets Brightening to optimum for that area of the
button image. A brighter area (e.g. a face) works best.
Double-click with right Automatically sets the Darkening to optimum for that area of the
mouse button image.
(or Shift + double-click with
left mouse button)
Ctrl + double-click with left Modifies the current brightening adjustment curve to optimize it
mouse button for the area surrounding the tone level you clicked on. In most
cases, this will result in increasing the amount of brightness
applied to the area surrounding the tone level you clicked on,
while decreasing the amount applied to other tone levels.
Use this method to make a specific subject or area stand out by
brightening.
Ctrl + double-click with right Modifies the current darkening adjustment curve to optimize it
mouse button for the area surrounding the tone level you clicked on. In most
cases, this will result in increasing the amount of darkness applied
to the area surrounding the tone level you clicked on, while
decreasing the amount applied to other tone levels.
Use this method to make a specific subject or area blend in by
darkening.
Scroll up or down with the Increases or decreases the amount of brightening applied at that
Page 355 of 827

Area Action Result
mouse wheel over the image tone level in the image. Both the image and the graph show the
changes.
Shift + scroll with the mouse Decreases or increases the amount of darkening applied at that
wheel over the image tone level in the image.
Hold down "A" Sets the brightening Amplitude slider directly.

+ scrolling or
+ dragging with the left
mouse button
Hold down "A" + Shift Sets the darkening Amplitude slider directly.
+ scrolling or
+ dragging with the right
mouse button
Click and drag up and down Increases or decreases the amount of brightening applied at that
on the image (left mouse tone level in the image. Both the image and the graph show the
button) changes.
Shift + click and drag up and Decreases or increases the amount of darkening applied at that
down on the image (left or tone level in the image.
right mouse button)
Auto
Click the Auto button for ACDSee Ultimate to automatically adjust the lighting in your image.
Adjusting Color With Color EQ

Color EQ lets you make color adjustments for saturation, brightness, hue, and contrast. You can make
adjustments to the entire image in Standard mode using the vertical slider, or adjust on a color by
color basis in Standard or High Quality mode. For explanation on the controls, see below.
To Adjust Color:
Page 356 of 827

2. In the Color EQ group, select the Saturation, Brightness, Hue, or Contrast tab, and adjust them
according to the options described in the table below.
Color EQ Options
Page 357 of 827

Select High Quality mode or Standard mode from the Color EQ drop-down menu. To adjust colors
individually, left-click a color in the image and drag up or down to alter. Your changes are reflected in the
color sliders in High Quality mode, and the graph in Standard mode respectively. This works in the
Saturation, Brightness, Hue, and Contrast tabs.
High Quality
Adjust image colors individually. High Quality uses the newer, more modern color models, allowing for a
visually perceptive and higher quality adjustment.
Adjust each color individually by dragging sliders

right for more intensity, or left for less intensity.
You can also enter a number into the fields for
precise adjustments. Or, select a precise color to
adjust by placing your cursor on the image for
the double arrow icon to appear. Then, click and
drag up or down to adjust the colors beneath the
double arrow icon. The affected color sliders
automatically adjust as you move your cursor.
Standard
Supports previously developed images. Adjust colors individually or make global adjustments.
Vertical slider Apply adjustments to the entire image. A slider

on the left has the following effects on the tabs:
Saturation: adjusts from saturation to
grayscale.
Brightness: adjusts the light or dark tones in
the image.
Hue: changes to a different color.
You can also enter a number into the field for

precise adjustments.
Page 358 of 827

Individual color sliders Adjust each color with individual sliders. Select
the color you want to adjust and click and drag
the sliders. You can also enter a number into the
fields for precise adjustments.
Direct image adjustments Place your cursor on the image for the double
arrow icon to appear. Then click and drag up or
down to adjust the colors beneath the double
arrow icon. The curve control and the affected
color sliders automatically adjust as you move
your cursor. The black down arrow on the graph
indicates the color you are adjusting in the
image.
The curve appears black in the graph, and you
cannot directly adjust it. To apply further
adjustments, you can alter the white curve.
When you adjust the white curve, the black
curve automatically changes with it. You can also
enter a number into the fields for precise
adjustments.
Black & White Mode
Advanced Black & White In Black & White mode, (as defined in the
General group of the Tune tab), the Color EQ
group becomes the Advanced Black & White
group.
Brightness tab:
Brightness: adjusts the brightness of colors
in the image.
Page 359 of 827

Contrast tab:
Strength: to adjust the contrast in specific
color tones, drag individual color sliders, or
left-click on the image (where a color
previously occurred) and drag up or down.
Balance: to set the targeted brightness
range for the contrast adjustment, adjust
the slider to bring details out of highlights
or shadows. To bring details out of the
midtones, leave the Balance sliders set to 0.
Hold down Shift while clicking and dragging
on the image to target the color's
corresponding Balance slider.
Colorization: adds color back into the image

based upon the color you select with the Hue
slider. The saturation of the color added
back to any given pixel is scaled based on
both the amount of color/saturation that
existed in the original image and the Amount
slider.
Adjusting Color With the Color Wheel

In Develop and Edit mode, you can use the color wheel to adjust precise colors in your image. This lets
you change a precise color's saturation, hue, brightness, contrast, and contrast balance. You can also
adjust smoothness, which acts like a feathering tool to soften a color's edges. The Color Wheel is
particularly useful for common requests like making a blue sky more blue, or brightening dark water
that is meant to depict a bright lake.
To Adjust Color Using the Color Wheel:

1. Open the Color Wheel using one of the following options:
In Develop mode, choose Color Wheel from the Tune tab in the Develop Tools pane.
Note: to use the Color Wheel in Develop mode, you must have Color EQ set to High Quality. To
ensure this, open Color EQ and choose High Quality from the drop down menu.
In Edit mode, choose Color Wheel from the Color options in the Filter Menu.
2. Choose a color to edit by clicking and dragging the section of the color wheel around, or by using the
eyedropper on the image itself. As you move the eyedropper around the image, you will see a dot,
Page 360 of 827

known as the hue indicator, move around the wheel to show the where the color you are hovering over
sits on the wheel.
3. Refine your selection. You can increase or decrease the color selection size by clicking and dragging the
double arrows at the edge of your selection on the wheel. You can also refine the color saturation of the
selection by clicking and dragging your selection away from the edges of the wheel, or away from the
center of the wheel. The less saturated colors are in the center of the wheel and the more saturated
colors are towards the edge of the wheel.
To invert the colors you have in the selection, you can click the Invert selection button.
To view the selection you have made with the color wheel, click and hold the Preview
selection mask button.
4. Adjust the edge of your selection by using the Smoothness slider. This tool softens or sharpens the
edges of your selection, working similarly to feathering, to soften or sharpen the cut off point.
5. Use the sliders to adjust the selected colors in your image. The individual sliders will have the following
effects:
Saturation: slide left to decrease saturation and slide right to increase saturation.
Hue: slide left or right to adjust hue.
Brightness: slide left to decrease brightness and slide right to increase brightness.
Contrast: slide left to decrease contrast and slide right to increase contrast.
Page 361 of 827

Contrast Balance: once you have adjusted contrast, you can adjust contrast balance, which
changes whether you apply the contrast to the lighter or darker colors in the image.
To see what your image looked like without the edit, press the Show Previous button in
Edit Mode, or press Show Original in Develop mode.
To reset any changes, right-click on either the relevant slider, or the wheel to reset all
changes.
6. Press Done to save your changes and exit the Color Wheel.
To Adjust Multiple Colors Using the Color Wheel:

Once you have made your first color wheel edits, you can make changes to other colors using
additional color wheels.
To do this, click on the plus symbol next to the color wheel icon. +
To Delete Edits Made Using the Color Wheel:

You can delete color wheel edits until you save the image as a new file in Develop mode, or until press
Apply or Done in Edit mode.
To do this, click on the cross symbol next to your list of color wheel edits.
Color Wheels in Pixel Targeting

The Pixel Targeting tool in Develop mode and the Pixel Targeting tool in Edit mode both feature color
wheels that are used in conjunction with filters to enable Pixel Targeting to make selections based on
pixel color.
See also:
Adjusting Tone Curves
Adjusting Tones With the Tone Wheels
Adjusting Color with Color EQ

Colors in every image are split into highlights, midtones, and shadows. You can use the tone wheels in
Develop and Edit mode to add color tints to certain tones in your image. There are two curved sliders
Page 362 of 827

with each tone wheel. The curved slider on the left is the saturation slider, the slider on the right is the
brightness slider. The tone wheels themselves allow you to pinpoint a hue to adjust.
To Adjust Color Using the Tone Wheels:

1. Open the Tone Wheels using one of the following options:
In Develop mode, choose Tone Wheels from the Tune tab in the Develop Tools pane.
Note: to use the Tone Wheels in Develop mode, you must have Color EQ set to High Quality. To
In Edit mode, choose Tone Wheels from the Color options in the Filter Menu.
2. Choose a hue to edit by clicking and dragging the target point within the tone wheel, or by using the
relevant eyedropper on the image itself. As you move the eyedropper around the image, you will see a
dot, known as the hue indicator, move around the wheel to show the where the color you are hovering
over sits on the wheel. The three eyedroppers relate to the relevant tone wheels. You can also refine
the saturation of the selection by clicking and dragging your selection away from the edges of the
wheel, or away from the center of the wheel. The less saturated colors are in the center of the wheel
and the more saturated colors are towards the edge of the wheel.
Moving the target point towards the outside of the wheel increases tone saturation.
Moving it towards the inside of the wheel decreases tone saturation.
3. With a hue selected, increase saturation and/or brightness for your selected tones.
4. Press Done to exit the Color Wheel.
To reset any changes, right-click on either the relevant slider, or the wheel to reset all changes.
See also:
Adjusting Color with the Color Wheel
Page 363 of 827


In Develop mode, the Tone Curves tool changes the tonal range of an image. Channel Filtering
embedded in the Tone Curves group adjusts either the entire range of the image (RGB), or specific
colors (Red, Green, and Blue).
Save adjusted settings as a preset for future use.
Changes made with the Tone Curves tool in Develop mode are non-destructive, which are
good creative edits. For pixel-based changes, use the Tone Curves filter in Edit mode.
To adjust the Brightness Curves in an image:

1. In Develop mode, in the Develop Tools pane, select the Tune tab.
2. In the Tone Curves group, adjust the curves as described below.
Right-click the number field or the arrow for Blacks, Midtones, or Whites to reset it to the
default setting. Double-click the number field or on the arrows to use automatic settings.
Tone Curves Options
Page 364 of 827

Curve Select a curve to apply to an image. "Standard" curve is the default. Use
"Camera" to use the curve generated by ACDSee Ultimate to produce a curve
suitable for the image. The Curve drop-down list is only available for RAW files.
Channel Specify the color channels to adjust.
Histogram Displays a graphic of the color information levels in the image, based on the
selected channel. Click and drag the line to manipulate the curve. Note that
when a point on the curve is clicked, a Node Info Box appears in the top left
corner of the Histogram. The Node Info Box contains In and Out pixel values
which are set in blocks of color to give a visual representation. The Node Info
Box numbers convey that an In value pixel will be changed to the Out value. For
example, if the In value is 40 and the Out value is 80, all pixels with a value of
40 will be changed to 80. Clicking the curve adds a new point to the curve. Drag
the points up and down the curve. To delete a point, right-click the node and
select Delete point.
Blacks Click and drag the black triangle, or click it, to automatically set the black point,
enter a number into the fields, or use the up or down arrow buttons to set an
exact black point.
Midtones Click and drag the gray triangle, or click it, to automatically set the midtone
point, enter a number into the fields, or use the up or down arrow buttons to
set an exact midtone point.
Whites Click and drag the white triangle or click it, to automatically set the white point,
enter a number into the fields, or use the up or down arrow buttons to set an
exact white point.
Auto Automatically sets the points for blacks, midtones, and whites.
Color Picker Drag the cursor onto the image to change the cursor to a color picker that
provides the RGB value of the picker's current location. Click the image at a
desired tone to add a corresponding point to the adjustment curse.
Adjusting Soft Focus

You can use the Soft Focus tool to add a dreamy quality to your images. This softening can be applied
across the entire tonal range or limited to the image's midtones. To target the Soft Focus effect to a
specific tonal range within your image or the entire tonal range, use the Tonal Width slider.
To Add Soft Focus to an Image:
Page 365 of 827

2. In the Soft Focus group, make adjustments as described below.
Soft Focus Options

Strength Adjusts the amount of soft focus. Move the slider to the right to intensify the
effect.
Brightness Drag the slider to the right to increase brightness.
Contrast Drag the slider to the right to increase contrast.
Tonal Width Drag the slider to the right to increase the tonal width of the soft focus and affect a
wider range of shadows, midtones and highlights, or to the left to decrease the
tonal width by limiting the soft focus' affect to a smaller range of shadows,
midtones and highlights.
Applying Develop Mode Effects

You can apply a number of effects to your image in Develop mode.
Photo Effect
You can use the Photo Effect drop-down menu to apply a variety of filters to your images.
To Apply a Photo Effect:

2. In the Effects group, check the Photo Effect checkbox.
3. Select a filter from the Photo Effect drop-down menu.
You can use the Opacity slider and Blend Modes drop-down menu to adjust how the selected
effect blends with your image. To access these tools, press the arrow button to the right of the
Photo Effect drop-down menu.
Color Overlay
You can use the Color Overlay drop-down menu to apply a color over your image.
To Apply a Color to Your Image:
Page 366 of 827

2. In the Effects group, check the Color Overlay checkbox.
3. Select a color from the Color Overlay drop-down menu.
color blends with your image. To access these tools, press the arrow button to the right of the
Color Overlay drop-down menu.
Gradient Map
You can use the Gradient Map effect to add colors to the dark and light parts of your images. The
Gradient Map effect maps shadows to one color, and highlights to another based on the lightness
value of each pixel. You can give the darker parts of your image a completely different color from the
lighter parts.
To Apply a Gradient Map Effect:

2. In the Effects group, check the Gradient Map checkbox.
3. In the Shadows drop-down menu, specify a color to be added to the dark parts of your image. In the
Highlights drop-down menu, specify a color to be added to the light parts of your image.
colors blend with your image. To access these tools, press the arrow button to the right of the
Highlights drop-down menu.
Add Grain
You can use the Grain effect to make your images look like they were printed in a newspaper. It is also
useful to use the Grain tool in combination with other effects to achieve a general vintage look.
To Apply a Grain Effect:

2. In the Effects group, adjust the Add Grain settings as described below.
Grain Options
Grain Amount Specifies the strength of the grain.
Grain Smoothing Specifies the smoothness of the grain.
Grain Size Specifies the size of the grain.
Page 367 of 827

Cross Process Effect and Lomo

A popular film photography technique in the '80s and '90s involved processing film in a solution that
was intended for another type of film. This cross processing gave photos a boost in saturation and
contrast, and shifted colors towards greenish-yellow highlights and bluish shadows. You can simulate
these retro-effects with the Cross Process tool. Using Cross Process along with Post-Crop Vignette,
creates an effect called Lomo.
To Apply the Cross Process Effect:

2. In the Effects group, drag the Cross Process slider to the right to increase the retro-effect.
Color Grading with LUTs

"Color LUT" stands for Color Lookup Table. Color LUTs are lists that instruct ACDSee or related
programs to map specific RGB values to other specific color values. You can import LUTs and use them
as filters in ACDSee. You can also create LUTs in Edit mode and they will become available for use in
Develop mode. You can apply a color LUT in the same way you would use any other Develop mode
effect. Color LUT supported file types are .3DL and .CUBE.
To Apply a Color LUT to Your Image:

2. In the Color LUTs group, do one of the following:
Select a LUT from the drop-down menu. The LUT is immediately applied.
Press the Import LUTs button. In the Open dialog, browse to the location of your LUT files, and
press Open.
If an imported LUT file's location has changed, you will have to reload it on the Color LUTs
panel.
To Remove Color LUTs:

1. In the Color LUTs group, press the Remove LUTs button.
2. In the Remove LUTs dialog, check/uncheck the checkboxes next to the LUTs you want to delete.
3. Press Remove LUTs.
To Refresh Your List of Color LUTs:
Page 368 of 827

You can refresh your list of available LUTs to reveal moved or deleted files.
In the Color LUTs group, press the Refresh List button.
Color LUTs created in Edit mode using adjustment layers will automatically become available in
the Color LUTs group in Develop mode.
Using Blend Modes and Opacity in Develop Mode

When using a tool from the Effects group in Develop mode, you can adjust the blend mode and
opacity tools to customize how the effect blends with your image.
Opacity
The Opacity slider changes the opacity of the effect being applied to the image. It gives you control of
how much of the effect should be visible on the image. You can access the Opacity slider by pressing
the arrow button to the right of the effect's drop-down menu.
Blend Modes
The ability to control how the effects and the image merge means that other blend modes besides
opacity can be used to affect the final image.
Page 369 of 827

Normal Pixels in the developed image are combined with those in the original. Only
opacity affects this blend.
Screen Combines the developed image color with the inverse of the original photo
color, resulting in a color that is the same or lighter.
Multiply Combines the developed image color with the original photo to produce a
darker color. Multiplying any color with black produces black; multiplying any
color with white leaves the color unchanged.
Dodge Combines the developed image color with the original pixels in the photo to
produce a lighter color.
Burn Combines the developed image color with the original pixels in the photo to
produce a darker color.
Overlay Preserves the shadows and highlights of the lower layers while applying either
Multiply or Screen blend mode based on the original image area's color values.
Difference Subtracts the developed image color from the color of the original photo. Any
white in the developed image produces a true negative of the color in the
image, while black produces no effect.
Darken Applies pixels in the developed image that are darker than the original image.
Pixels in the developed image that are lighter than the original image disappear
(based on RGB values).
Lighten Applies pixels in the developed image that are lighter than the original image.
Pixels in the developed image that are darker than the original image
disappear (based on RGB values).
Hard Light Adds strong highlights or shadows by applying Multiply or Screen based on the
original image area's color values.
Soft Light Adds soft highlights or shadows by darkening or lightening based on the
Hue Applies the hue value of colors in the developed image to the color of the
original image areas.
Saturation Applies the saturation value of colors in the developed image to the color of
the original image areas.
Color Applies the hue and saturation of the developed image to the image. This
blend does not affect the luminance of the original image.
Luminosity Applies the lightness value of colors in the developed image to the color of the
Page 370 of 827

Dissolve Applies some pixels from the developed image layer onto the original image,
resulting in specks of color. The Opacity slider controls the amount of
speckling.
Exclusion Like Difference, but with less contrast, Exclusion subtracts the blend color
from the color of the underlying photo. Any white in the blend color produces
a true negative of the color in the image, while black produces no effect.
Vivid Light Combines the blend color with the underlying pixels in the photo by increasing
or decreasing contrast to produce a lighter or darker color, as determined by
the blend color.
Pin Light When the light source is lighter than 50% gray, the pixels darker than the light
source are replaced. Pixels lighter than the light source remain the same.
When the light source is darker than 50% gray, the pixels lighter than the light
source are replaced. Pixels darker than the light source remain the same.
Linear Light Dodges or burns by lightening or darkening the brightness value, depending on
the blend color.
Hard Mix Applies red, green, and blue channel values of the blend color to the RGB
values of the image.
Subtract Subtracts the blend color from the image (base) color in each channel.
Divide Divides the blend color from the image (base) color.
Darker Color From the blend color and the image (base) color, the lower channel values are
chosen.
Lighter Color From the blend color and the image (base) color, the higher channel values are
chosen.
Adjusting Split Tone

Split toning is a powerful technique originating in film photography to tint the highlights and shadows.
The Split Tone tool gives you creative control over the Hue and Saturation of your highlights and
shadows. Use the sliders to adjust the balance of tones in the highlights and shadows of your photos.
Split toning allows you to add a creative element to RAW conversion and non-destructive editing in
ACDSee.
To Adjust Highlights and Shadows:
Page 371 of 827

2. Drag the sliders to apply colored highlights and shadows as described in the table below.
Adjustment Options
Highlights
Hue Drag the slider to the right to select a highlight color.
Saturation Drag the slider to the right to increase saturation of the color in the
highlights of the image.
Shadows
Hue Drag the slider to the right to select a shadow color.
Saturation Drag the slider to the right to increase saturation of the color in the shadows
of the image.
Balance
Drag the slider to the right to emphasize the highlight color; drag the slider to the left to emphasize the
shadow color. For example if the slider is set to the maximum at 50, then full emphasis is applied to the
highlight color; if the slider is set to the minimum -50, then full emphasis is applied to the shadow color.
Create a sepia tone effect by first reducing the saturation of your photo with the Advanced
Color tool and then applying a reddish brown hue with the Split Tone tool. Or create a
monochromatic black and white photo with a slight tint of hue.
Adding a Post-Crop Vignette

Use the Post-Crop Vignette effect to add a frame around a subject. You can also control the
appearance of the border. Use the Post-Crop Vignette as a finishing tool after an image is cropped.
This gives you more control over the focal point of the image.
To Apply a Vignette Effect:

2. In the Post-Crop Vignette group, make adjustments as described below.
Page 372 of 827

Vignette Options
Strength Drag the slider to the right to add a white vignette, or drag to the left to add a black vignette.
Radius Adjusts the distance from the corners of the image where the pixels will be softened. The
higher the radius, the further from the center the pixels will be before the softening begins.
Feathering Feathering controls how soft or hard the edge of the vignette is. Drag the slider to the right to
increase the softness of the vignette transition.
Roundness Drag the slider to the right to increase the roundness of the vignette, or to the left to make it
more rectangular.
Selecting an Output Color Space For RAW Files

You can select the output color space to use when developing RAW files. This option is only available
for RAW files.
To Set the Output Color Space for a RAW File:

Look to the Histogram to help determine the best Output Color Space for your image. The
histogram provides a graphical representation of the intensity level of pixels within each color
channel. Spikes at either end of the graph indicate clipped colors. Aim for an output color space
that provides the widest gamut of colors possible while minimizing spikes at either end of the
graph.
2. In the Output Color Space group, select a color space.
3. Click Set as Default if you want to use this same color space as the default color space for developing
RAW files from Develop mode.
When saving your RAW images, the dialog box will have the Embed Color Profile in Image
option selected by default. If you deselect this option, your output color space will not be
embedded.
About the Detail Tab

In the Detail tab, you can sharpen, reduce noise, or correct chromatic aberration in your photos.
To Use the Detail Tab:
Page 373 of 827

1. In Develop mode, select the Detail tab.
2. Select the Sharpening, Noise Reduction, Skin Tune, or Chromatic Aberration group to develop the
image.

1. Click Done.
image.
Develop Mode page.

1. Click Save.
updated image.
and size for each.
Page 374 of 827

Click Cancel.
file.
Sharpening
You can use the Sharpening tool to define details and fine-tune your images.
To Sharpen Your Image:

2. In the Sharpening group, adjust the sliders as described below.
Sharpening Options
Amount Specifies the amount of sharpening applied by increasing contrast around the edges.
Radius Controls the number of pixels to adjust around each edge. Higher values increase the
number of sharpened pixels and tend to bring out coarser detail, while lower values
reduce the number of sharpened pixels and tend to bring out finer detail.
Mask Allows the targeting of edges, while suppressing the sharpening of noise and texture. To
view the areas the mask affects, press the Alt key when moving the mask slider. Areas
affected by sharpening appear white.
Detail Suppresses the halo, (the light border that forms around edges with extreme sharpening),
by reducing its intensity. The higher the value, the stronger the reduction.
Threshold Specifies how different the pixel lightness values within an edge must be before the pixels
within the edge are sharpened. Higher values sharpen only stronger edges but minimize
the appearance of noise. Lower values sharpen both strong and weaker edges, but can
increase the appearance of noise. We recommend you set the threshold to enhance
edges while keeping background noise to a minimum.
Page 375 of 827

View the effects of your changes in the Preview Window, located at the top of the Detail pane.
Move the overlay square on your image to change the area the Preview Window displays.
Set the default sharpening for RAW files by clicking the Settings button in the Sharpening
group and selecting Save New Default.
Reducing Noise
The Noise Reduction tool reduces noise in images caused by high ISO settings or long exposure.
If ACDSee loads an acdc file made with a previous version, the denoise adjustment layer is
added using the legacy settings and runs the legacy algorithm. Loading does not change the
image. The ACDSee 2022 GUI is loaded, but only the legacy sliders are enabled (Luminance and
Color) and the new sliders disabled. If a legacy slider is moved, the new algorithm is engaged
and the new sliders enabled. The image can then be re-adjusted for better results using the
additional ACDSee 2022 sliders.
2022 acdc files that include denoise adjustment layers will not load in older versions of
ACDSee.
To reduce noise in an image:

2. In the Noise Reduction group, adjust the sliders as described below.
Noise Reduction Options
Page 376 of 827

Reset to default Resets the group to its default settings.
Adjust develop settings for this group Opens a develop settings menu for resetting last
saved settings, applying a last used setting, pre-
sets, and copy and pasting options.
Activate this group If changes are made to the image settings, toggle
the group icon to see the changes with the blue act-
ive icon and the original image with the inactive gray
icon. Any changes made to the image settings are
preserved for the comparison between original and
altered.
Luminance Drag the slider to the right to reduce the visibility of lighting
noise. Apply a setting that is proportional to the noise in the
image and refer to the preview window to ensure that you
balance the level of noise reduction with loss of detail. Hold
down the Alt key while using the slider to see the remaining
noise in the image.
Strength Drag the slider to the right to control how aggressively to

reduce noise. Prevent the loss of detail by balancing Luminance
with Strength.
Color Noise Reduction Drag the slider to the right to remove color noise from the
image. Hold down the Alt key while using the slider to see the
remaining color noise in the image.
Tonal Range Tonal Range refers to a range of average brightness values in an

image. For example, the tonal range of a photo taken in a dark
cavern it would be low, whereas a sunny sky would be high.
The Tonal Range slider increases in value from left to right,
increasing from a low tonal range on the left to a high tonal
range on the right. The Tonal Range slider is used to focus noise
reduction to areas of the image that have a corresponding tonal
range. For example, the left-most position would reduce the
noise in a cavern more than a sky.
Tonal Range only affects luminance noise reduction.
Frequency Range The Frequency Range slider adjusts the noise pattern. High
frequency noise looks like fine static while low frequency noise
looks like coarse grain or "splotches". Move the Frequency
Range slider to the left to limit noise reduction to high
frequency noise.
Frequency Range affects both luminance and color noise
reduction.
Page 377 of 827

RAW Noise Reduction Defaults

For RAW files only, the slider values in the Noise Deduction tool have default values as shown in the
image below.
To save new default values or reset the default values for the Noise Deduction tool, click the settings
icon and select Save New Default or Reset Default from the menu.
Fine-Tuning Skin Tone

You can use the Skin Tune tool to even skin tone and smooth away blemishes and flaws.
To Correct Skin Tone:

2. In the Skin Tune group, adjust the sliders as described below.
Skin Tune Options
Page 378 of 827

Smoothing Drag the slider to the right to refine skin by suppressing texture detail.
Glow Drag the slider to the right to increase the brightness of skin while subtly smoothing.
Radius Specifies the scale of the texture detail that is affected by the effect. Drag the slider to the
left to enhance small details. Drag the slider to the right to enhance larger details.
Correcting Chromatic Aberration

Chromatic aberration is a lens artifact that can result in fringes in high contrast areas of some photos.
The camera lens can cause different wavelengths of light to focus differently, which appears in photos
as colored fringing or colored lines on the borders of high contrast areas. Purple fringing can also occur
when there is a bright spot of light in front of the lens.
This zoomed-in image shows an example of blue/yellow fringing.
You can use the Defringe and Chromatic Aberration tools in Develop mode to reduce the appearance
of colored fringes. This can be especially useful for photos with architectural details. For best results,
it's recommended that you use the Chromatic Aberration sliders first, and then the Defringe sliders.
To Reduce Fringing in Your Image:

2. In the Chromatic Aberration group, adjust the sliders as described below.
Chromatic Aberration Options
Page 379 of 827

Fix Red/Cyan Adjust the red and cyan channels to reduce red/cyan fringing.
Fix Blue/Yellow Adjust the blue and yellow channels to reduce blue/yellow fringing.
Defringe options
Defringe strength Adjust the amount of fringe color you want to remove from high
contrast edges. A setting of zero means that defringing is off.
Defringe radius Adjust the number of pixels surrounding an edge that will be defringed.
Color Adjust the color to remove from high contrast edges.
About the Geometry Tab

In the Geometry tab, you can correct lens distortion and perspective, or rotate and straighten your
image. You can also use the crop tool to change the composition of your image.
To Use the Geometry Tab:

1. In Develop mode, select the Geometry tab.
2. Select the Lens Correction, Rotate & Straighten, Perspective, Crop, or Vignette Correction group to
develop the image.

1. Click Done.
Page 380 of 827

image.
Develop Mode page.

1. Click Save.
updated image.
and size for each.
Click Cancel.
file.
Page 381 of 827

Fixing Lens Distortion

You can correct barrel and pincushion distortion in digital photographs. In barrel distortion the photo
appears to bulge outwards from the center. In pincushion distortion the photo appears to shrink
inwards toward the center. Barrel and pincushion distortion are common in photos that were taken
with wide angle or zoom lenses.
In ACDSee, you have the option of using manual correction via the Manual Correction slider, or you
can enable lens correction via your lens profile. This can be done by selecting the make, model, and
lens of the camera used to take your image. The Lens Correction tool can apply automatic
adjustments based on the distortion inherent to the lens used, or you can enable lens correction for
each image manually. Once a lens profile has been mapped to an EXIF profile, the Make and Model
drop-down menus will be pre-populated with the camera used to take the image based on its EXIF
information. The Lens Correction tool contains a database of camera makes, models, and their
possible lenses. The possible lenses for the selected camera will be available for you to choose from
the Lens drop-down menu, unless there is only one possible lens, in which case, that lens will be pre-
selected.
You can find the name of the lens used in the EXIF information of your image. However, the lens value
displayed in the EXIF may not be reliable in the case of third party lenses as the camera itself may only
recognize the third party lens as an ID number. If possible, recover the correct lens value and select it
from the Lens drop-down menu.
You can also map the correction specific to your lens, (the lens profile), to your camera make, model,
and lens combination. Mapping the lens profile will enable you to apply the correction to all images
with the same camera-lens combination that you open in the Develop mode Lens Correction tool,
should you choose.
You can use the Manual Correction slider for further adjustments after using automatic correction, or
on its own.
You can also use your lens profile to correct chromatic aberration, if it is available.
For quick viewing of the available lens profiles, go to Lensfun.
To Fix Lens Distortion Using Your Lens Profile:

2. In the Lens Correction group, check the Enable Lens Profile checkbox.
3. If the displayed camera make and model are not correct, select the correct options from the Make and
Model drop-down menus.
4. From the Lens drop-down menu, select the lens used to take the image. You can find this information
displayed in the EXIF panel in the lower right corner of Develop mode. The correction will occur
automatically.
Page 382 of 827

5. If you desire further adjustments, move the Manual Correction slider to the left for a bulge effect, or to
the right to stretch the edges of the image.
Click the Show Grid icon to display a grid over your image. This tool is useful when fixing
alignment in your images. When the grid is not activated, it is gray .
To Save Lens Profile as a Default for Future Use:

You can save your camera and lens combination's correction profile and use it as a default for other
images taken with the same camera/lens combination. This will ensure that every time you open an
image from a particular camera make, model, and lens combination in the Lens Correction tool, the
Lens field will be pre-populated with the lens you mapped to that camera. You can also choose to
automatically apply this lens profile to other images taken with the same camera/lens combination
upon entering Develop mode.
As this function relies on EXIF data, this can mainly be performed with JPEG, DNG, RAW, and
TIFF images.
1. With your desired camera and lens combination selected in the Make, Model, and Lens drop-down
menus, press the Map Default button.
2. Check the Auto-apply this mapped profile when entering Develop mode checkbox to apply the
mapped default to future images upon entering Develop mode.
3. In the Map Default dialog box, press OK to save, or Cancel to abort.
To Manage Your Saved Defaults:

1. Press the Manage Defaults button.
2. In the Manage Mapped Defaults dialog box, do one of the following:
In the Manage Mapped Defaults dialog box, select your default and press the Delete Mapped
Default button.
Check the Auto-apply the selected mapped profile when entering Develop mode checkbox to
apply the selected mapped default to future images taken with the same camera/lens combination
upon entering Develop mode.
3. Press OK to continue, or press Cancel to keep your mapped default.
To Fix Chromatic Aberration Using Your Lens Profile:

Chromatic aberration occurs due to the properties of a given lens. Therefore, you can use the lens
profile to automatically correct it. The Chromatic Aberration checkbox will be checked if your selected
lens has a corresponding chromatic aberration correction available.
Page 383 of 827

2. In the Lens Correction group, check the Enable Lens Profile checkbox.
3. Check the Chromatic Aberration checkbox.
4. Click to the Detail tab to view your corrected image.
Save your lens profile with the Chromatic Aberration checkbox checked to ensure that
chromatic aberration will always be corrected.
Rotating and Straightening

You can straighten a crooked photo in Develop mode by rotating the photo at a custom angle.
To Correct a Crooked Photo:

2. In the Rotate and Straighten group, adjust your image as described below.
Rotate Options
90 degrees to the left Rotates image 90 degrees to the left.
90 degrees to the right Rotates image 90 degrees to the right.
Straighten Options
Page 384 of 827

Slider Adjusts the horizontal angle of the image. Move the slider left or right
until the image appears straightened.
-5 Degrees left Adjusts the image -5 degrees to the left.
+5 Degrees right Adjusts the image +5 degrees to the right.
Straighten tool Straightens the image. Use your cursor to draw a line along the crooked
horizon. Release the cursor to automatically straighten the horizon.
Correcting Perspective
Perspective issues, which can occur if the camera is not held horizontal or perpendicular to the object
of the photo, can be common in images taken with wide angle lenses. For example, if you take a photo
of a tall building, looking up from street level, the building can appear to bend in the photo. You can
correct perspective issues using the tools in the Perspective group.
To Correct Perspective:
2. In the Perspective group, set the options as described below.
Perspective Options
Vertical Drag the slider to the left or right to identify the center of the image on the vertical
axis.
Horizontal Drag the slider to the left or right to identify the center of the image on the
horizontal axis.
Vertical Shear Drag the slider to the left or right to identify the center of the image on the vertical
and diagonal axis.
Horizontal Shear Drag the slider to the left or right to identify the center of the image on the
horizontal and diagonal axis.
Page 385 of 827

Cropping
You can use the Crop tool to remove unwanted parts of your images, or to reduce the image canvas to
a particular size.
To Crop an Image:
2. In the Crop group, resize the crop window, and position it over the area of the image you want to keep.
See below for more details.
Click the Preview Cropped Image button or press E to preview your image when cropped.
Resizing the Crop Window

You can resize the crop window in the following ways:
Drag the edges of the crop window to the desired size.
Specify an exact size for the crop window in inches.
Apply a ratio to constrain to the crop window proportions.
Use the arrow keys to manipulate the size of the crop window.
To Resize the Crop Window by Dragging:

1. Position your cursor over the edge or corner of the crop window until it changes into a double-pointed
arrow.
2. Drag the crop window's border to the desired size.
To Maximize Crop Area:

1. Click Maximize crop area. The crop selection expands to the outer edges of your images.
To Specify an Exact Size for the Crop Window:
Page 386 of 827

1. Type the desired crop window proportions into the Width and Height spin boxes.
2. In the Units drop-down list, select a unit of measurement.
3. Use the Dots per inch spin box to specify a resolution.
To Constrain the Crop Window to a Ratio:

1. Check the Constrain proportion checkbox.
2. Select a ratio from the drop-down list.
3. Position your cursor over the edge of the crop window until it changes into a double-pointed arrow, and
then drag the edge of the crop window to the desired size.
To Delete a Proportion:
1. Select a proportion from the Constrain proportion drop-down list.
2. Click the down arrow button beside the drop-down list, and select Delete.
3. Click Yes.
To Set a Proportion as Default:

1. Check the Constrain proportion checkbox.
2. Select a ratio from the drop-down list.
3. Click the down arrow button beside the drop-down list, and select Set as Default.
Crop Options
Constrain proportion Select this option to constrain the crop area to a specified
proportion. Select the proportion from the drop-down list.
Maximize crop area Click to expand the crop area to the entire image, and then click
and drag the crop borders. To redo your crop selection, click on
the Maximize crop area button to expand the selection to the
entire image again, and make your crop adjustments.
Click to rotate the crop area.

Rotate crop area
Fixing Lens Vignetting

Vignetting, an unusual darkness in the corners of images, is the result of the inability of the lens to
distribute light into the corners of the image. You can fix lens vignetting in Develop mode by
brightening the corners of the image.
Page 387 of 827

To Fix Vignetting:
2. In the Vignette Correction group, adjust your image as described below.
Vignette Correction Options

Strength Adjust how much the corners of the image will be brightened.
Radius Adjust the distance from the corners of the image that pixels will be brightened.
The higher the radius, the closer to the center of the image pixels will be
brightened.
About the Repair Tab

In the Repair tab, you can reduce red eye and repair images.
To Use the Repair Tab:

1. In Develop mode, select the Repair tab.
2. Select the Red Eye Reduction or Repair tool.

1. Click Done.
Page 388 of 827

image.
Develop Mode page.

1. Click Save.
updated image.
and size for each.
Click Cancel.
file.
Reducing Red Eye

You can use the Red Eye Reduction tool in Develop mode to correct red eye in digital photographs. The
Red Eye Reduction tool specifically targets red pixels so that nearby pixels are unaffected.
To Correct Red Eye:
Page 389 of 827

1. In Develop mode, select the Repair tab.
2. Use the Zoom tools in the bottom right corner to enlarge and center the eye you want to correct.
3. Click within the red portion of the eye.
4. In the Red Eye Reduction group, adjust the sliders as described below.
Red Eye Reduction Options

Size Drag the slider to the right to increase the size of the area being darkened, or to the left to
decrease.
Darkening Drag the slider to the right to darken the corrected portion of the eye.
You can correct as many red eyes as you want. Simply keep clicking on the image to add a new eye-
definition. Move the eye-definitions after you have placed them by clicking and dragging, or delete
them by pressing Delete.
Scroll with your mouse to adjust the size of the area you would like to darken at any time.
You can show or hide the red eye outline by toggling the eye button, located in the top left
corner of the Red Eye group, on or off.
Press Delete to remove the currently selected red eye adjustment.
Repairing Your Image

You can use the Repair Tool to remove flaws, such as:
Skin blemishes
Telephone wires and other unwanted objects
Flash flares from snowflakes or windows
Lens scratches and water drops
Shadows cast on the sensor by dust
There are three options available for the Repair Tool: the Healing Brush, the Blended Cloning tool, and
the Cloning Brush.
When you select the Healing Brush, it copies pixels from one area of a photo to another, but it
analyzes the pixels in the source area before copying them. It also analyzes the pixels in the target
area, and then blends the pixels of both source and target, to match the surrounding area. This
Page 390 of 827

ensures that the lighting and color of the replacement pixels integrate with the surrounding area. The
Healing Brush works particularly well with photos that involve complicated textures like skin or fur.
When you select the Cloning Brush, the tool copies the exact pixels from one area of a photo to
another, creating an identical image area. The Cloning Brush is more effective for photos that have
strong, simple textures or uniform colors, as it is more difficult to identify the copied pixels in the
finished photo.
When you select the Blended Clone tool, the Repair Tool copies the exact pixels from one area of a
photo to another, but it analyzes the pixels in the target area and blends them with the copied pixels.
To achieve the best results, perform any geometric operations on your image before using the
Healing Brush.
To Remove Flaws from a Photo:

1. In Develop mode, on the Repair tab, in the Repair group, select one of the following:
Heal: copies the pixels from the source area to the target area, and blends pixels into the
surrounding image area.
Clone: copies the pixels from the source area to the target area.
Blended Clone: copies the pixels from the source area to the target area, then analyzes the
pixels in the target area and blends them with the copied pixels.
2. Drag the Nib Width and Feathering sliders as described in the table below.
3. Right-click the image to set a source location. Pixels will be copied from this location and used in the
target location.
4. Click and drag over the area that you want to cover. If you selected the healing brush, ACDSee Ultimate
analyzes and replaces the pixels when you release the mouse button. If you selected the blended clone
tool, ACDSee Ultimate analyzes, replaces, and blends the pixels when you release the mouse button.
Click Done to apply your changes and close the tool.
Click Cancel to discard all changes and close the tool.
Scroll with your mouse to adjust the brush size as you work, or press the Shift key while you
scroll to adjust feathering.
For the most accurate preview, zoom your image to 100% while healing or cloning.
Page 391 of 827

Red Eye Reduction and selective adjustments, such as the Develop Brush and gradients, are
the only adjustments that cannot be healed or cloned.
Repair Tool Options

Nib Width Sets the width of the brush. The maximum brush width is relative to the size of your
image.
Feathering Sets the amount to feather on the edge of the brush to prevent sharp transitions
between the original and healed part of the photo.
Feathering is set as a percentage of the nib width, not as a specific number of pixels.
This means that you do not have to adjust the feathering when you reset the Nib
Width, as it automatically adjusts to a percentage of the new nib width. This option is
not available with the Blended Clone tool.
Page 392 of 827

Chapter 7: Edit Mode

Make your final edits in Edit mode, where you can apply fine-tuned adjustments on the more
limited RGB image data. Use the tools in Edit mode for any touch-ups to specific areas of your images.
In Edit Mode You Can:

Use the Selection tools to select and apply edits to a specific part of the image.
Use the Edit Brush
Use Pixel Targeting to target specific colors or tones for adjustment, selecting, and masking.
Use the Layers pane
Remove flaws, red eye, adjust skin tone, or correct chromatic aberration.
Add a watermark, borders, vignettes, a tilt-shift, a grain effect, special effects, and drawing tools.
Crop, flip, resize, rotate, liquify, and correct perspective, barrel and pincushion distortion, and lens
distortion.
Adjust lighting using the Exposure, Levels, Auto Levels, Tone Curves, Light EQ™, Dehaze, and Dodge and
Burn filters.
Adjust color using the White Balance, Color EQ, Color Wheel, Tone Wheels, Convert to Black & White,
Split Tone, and Color LUTs filters.
Add details to your image using Sharpen, Blur, Remove Noise, Add Noise, Detail Brush, or Clarity filters.
Using Edit Mode

After completing all of your image corrections using the non-destructive tools in Develop, take your
image into Edit to apply finishing touches to your image. In Edit, use the pixel-based editing tools, such
as red eye removal, special effects and many other tools, and combine them with the Selections tool
to fine-tune your image.
What Happens from Develop to Edit

When you take an image through Develop or Edit, the original is never altered. Changes you make are
saved to a separate file, so that you can revert to the original or the developed version at any time. To
understand more on how changes are saved, see How ACDSee Ultimate saves changes to images.
Editing an Image
To Edit an Image:
Page 393 of 827

1. Select Edit mode.
2. Do any one or more of the following:
At the top of the panel, use the Selections or Drawing tools.
Open the Layers pane to work with layers.
In the Repair group, click Red Eye Reduction, Skin Tune, Chromatic Aberration, or Repair tool.
In the Add group, click Watermark, Borders, Vignette, Tilt-Shift, Grain, or click Special Effect and
select an effect.
In the Geometry group, click Rotate, Flip, Crop, Liquify, Perspective Correction, Lens Correction,
Lens Distortion Correction, or Resize.
In the Exposure/Lighting group, click Exposure, Levels, Auto Levels, Tone Curves, Light EQ™,
Dehaze, Dodge and Burn.
In the Color group, click White Balance, Color Wheel, Tone Wheels, Color EQ, Convert to Black &
White, Split Tone, or Color LUTs.
In the Detail group, click Sharpen, Blur, Clarity, Detail Brush, or click Noise to remove or add noise.
3. You have several options in saving your images. See Saving images in Edit for more information.
You can apply adjustments to specific tones or colors with Pixel Targeting.
Reverting to Develop Settings or Original Settings

You can discard your Edit settings and revert to the Develop or the original settings for your image. For
steps to revert your image, see Restoring originals and develop settings.
Undo and Redoing
Using the History Pane:

You can use the History pane to view the sequence of changes you have made to your image. You can
also use the History pane to jump around in your editing sequence and revert back to a previously-
applied adjustment. For example, if you applied a series of adjustments, such as color adjustments,
followed by sharpening, and exposure tweaking, but you want to revert back several steps to the state
your photo was in with just the color adjustment, you would use the History pane.
To open the History pane, click Panes | History.
To return to a specific adjustment, select your desired adjustment in the pane and double-click it. Or
select Undo All to undo all of your adjustments.
Page 394 of 827

Using the Edit Mode History Window:

You can use the Edit mode History Window to view the sequence of changes you have made to your
image. You can also use the History Window to jump around in your editing sequence and revert back
to a previously-applied adjustment. For example, if you applied a series of adjustments, such as color
adjustments, followed by sharpening, and exposure tweaking, but you want to revert back several
steps to the state your photo was in with just the color adjustment, you would use the Edit mode
History Window.
To return to a specific adjustment, select the Edit mode History Window arrow at the bottom of the
Edit mode panel, and select your desired adjustment and double-click it. You can select any
adjustment in the list, or select Undo All to undo all of your adjustments.
Page 395 of 827

Histogram and Image Viewing Controls

While editing an image, you can adjust the magnification with the zoom controls, located in the
bottom right corner.
Page 396 of 827

Histogram Displays the histogram preview for the current

image. The histogram provides a graphical
representation of the intensity level of pixels
within each color channel. Spikes at either end
of the graph indicate clipped colors. Keeping the
histogram open is particularly useful when
adjusting exposure, as the histogram reflects all
adjustments as you make them.
You can also display the Histogram by selecting
Panes | Histogram.
Undo/Redo Undo to discard all changes made on the current

tab. Redo to return to the options that you had
selected prior to clicking Undo. In Edit, Undo
and Redo buttons display the changes you can
undo or redo.
Reset Click on the Reset button to reset the image to

its default settings.
Display Full Screen Displays the image on a full screen. Press F to

view full screen and to return to Edit mode.
Actual Size Returns the current image to its actual size.
Navigator Pane Automatic Window: when Automatic Window is

enabled, the Navigator pane appears as soon as
you zoom in on a photo. Drag your cursor to the
section of the image you would like to see
magnified. Release the cursor to settle on an
area of the image.
Right-click on the Navigator pane to

switch from Automatic to Manual.
Manual Window: when Manual Window is

enabled, you can view the Navigator pane by
selecting the Navigator icon. The Navigator
icon only appears when the image is magnified
or if the Actual Size icon has been clicked. Click
and hold the Navigator icon to display a small
duplicate of your image. Then drag your cursor
to the section of the image you would like to see
magnified. Release the cursor to settle on an
area of the image.
Page 397 of 827

Right-click on the Navigator icon to

switch from Manual to Automatic.
Fit Image Reduces the image to fit within the Edit mode
area.
Show Previous Toggles the changes on or off, to compare the

current image to the last saved version.
Zoom slider Increases the size of the image if you drag it to

the right, decreases the size if you drag to the
left.
Zoom drop-down list Displays a list of zoom sizes to select.
Using Color Pickers in Edit Mode

When you use the color pickers in Edit mode, the RGB values beside the color picker relate to the
image before any new and unsaved edits. You can see the up-to-date RGB values for the image as
edited in the status bar at the bottom of the page.
Using the Undo/Redo Button

You can undo and redo your changes when editing an image.
To Undo a Change:
In Edit mode, do one of the following:
Click the Undo button found at the bottom of the left pane.
Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl + Z.
To Redo a Change:
Click the Redo button found at the bottom of the left pane.
Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl + Y.
Page 398 of 827

Using Presets in Edit Mode

Many ACDSee Ultimate editing tools and special effects allow you to save your settings as presets. This
is convenient when you frequently use the same settings for a particular tool or effect.
For most tools, ACDSee Ultimate automatically saves the last option settings you applied to an image
when you clicked Apply or Done. This preset is called Last Used.
The Save Preset and Delete buttons are located at the top of an editing tool's panel.
To Save a Preset:
1. In Edit mode, select a tool and specify its settings.
2. Click the Save Preset button.
3. In the New Preset dialog box, enter a name for your preset, and then click OK.
The new preset will appear in the tool's Presets drop-down list.
To Use a Previously Saved Preset:

1. In Edit mode, select the tool for which you created the preset.
2. Click the Presets drop-down list and select the preset you want to apply.
To Delete a Preset:
1. In Edit mode, select the tool for which you created the preset.
2. Click the Presets drop-down list and select the preset you want to delete.
3. Click the Delete button.
4. In the Confirm Delete dialog box, click Yes.
Importing and Exporting Presets

You can import and export Edit presets. See "Importing and Exporting Presets" on page 304.
Please note that you cannot select individual Edit mode presets for import or export.
Restoring Originals and Develop Settings

You can also restore an edited image back to its develop settings, if you wish to discard work done in
Edit. You can read more information on how changes are saved in ACDSee.
If you have committed changes to an image, you cannot restore the original.
Page 399 of 827

Restoring the Original Image

You can discard all your changes and revert to the original image.
To Revert an Image Back to the Original in Edit:

In Edit mode, select File | Restore to Original.
To Revert an Image Back to the Original in Manage or View Mode:

Right-click the image and select Process | Restore to Original.
Choose Process | Restore to Original.
Restoring Your Develop Settings

You can discard your Edit settings and revert to the Develop settings for your image.
To Revert an Image Back to Develop Settings in Edit:

1. Take an edited image into Edit mode. A prompt will ask if you want to Discard your edits.
2. Click Discard Edits.
Saving Images in Edit Mode
Saving Images
When you have finished editing an image, you can choose from one of the many options for saving
your image, depending on what you want to do next.
1. Click Done.
Page 400 of 827

Save Save your changes.
Save as Save a copy of your developed image with a new name or format.
Depending on your file type, any of the following checkboxes appear in the bottom left
corner of the Save as dialog box:
Preserve Metadata: retains metadata with the new image.
Preserve database information: maintains your catalog information, such as

ratings.
Preserve develop settings for original image: spplies changes to the original
image, as well as the copy being saved.
Embed Color Profile in Image: retains color profile selected in Color Management
with your new image.
Discard Discard your changes.
Cancel Remain on the same image, with your changes intact, without saving the image.
AutoSave You can enable AutoSave in order to avoid selecting a saving option each time you finish
with an image. When AutoSave is enabled, pressing Done, or selecting another image
from the Filmstrip will prompt ACDSee to automatically save your changes in Edit mode.
You will no longer see the Save Changes dialog. To disable AutoSave, choose Tools |
Options... In the Options dialog, click Edit Mode. Then uncheck the AutoSave all changes
checkbox.

1. Click Save.
Save As: save a version of your edited image with a new name or format and switch to the
updated image.
Save a Copy: save a copy of your edited image with a new name or format, and continue to
Save a Copy is useful for making multiple versions of an image while continuing to work from
the original file instead of a new processed copy. For example, if you take a RAW image and
save a copy of it as a JPG, instead of switching to this lossy JPG image, you remain on the RAW
file with the settings still intact.
Page 401 of 827

file.
Click Cancel or use the keyboard shortcut Esc.
For more information on how different file formats are saved depending on their processed
state, see How ACDSee Saves Changes to Images. To learn how images are saved in Develop,
see Saving Images in Develop.
How ACDSee Saves Changes to Images

How images are saved is different between non-encodable (e.g. RAW) and encodable (e.g. JPEG)
images. The table below outlines the differences in how changes to your image are saved by ACDSee.
The purpose of saving files in its original, developed, and edited states is to allow you to revert back to
a setting if you decide to discard your changes at a later time.
If you archive your images, ensure that you back up subfolders to preserve the original image
files.
Page 402 of 827


e files
(e.g.
JPEG)
Original Original images are located in the folders you placed them in. Original
images are
located in
the folders
you placed
them in.
Developed When you make changes and click Done, the image's develop When you
settings are stored in the XMP file of the RAW, and in the ACDSee develop
database. an image
and click
Done, the
develop
settings
are stored
in an XMP
file, and
the
original
and XMP
file are
moved to
the
[Originals]
folder. In
Manage
and View
modes,
the image
with the
changes
applied is
displayed.
The
develop
settings
are also
stored in
the
ACDSee
database.
Page 403 of 827


e files
(e.g.
JPEG)
Edited When you take a RAW file directly into Edit, and you click Save, If you take
ACDSee prompts you to save the file in a different file format. In an image
RAW, to permanently save changes to an image, you will need to directly to
save your
image, the
original
image is
saved to
the
[Originals]
folder in
ACDSee.
If you edit
an image
first, and
then take
it into
Develop,
ACDSee
prompts
that the
edits will
be lost.
You
cannot
revert an
image
back to
Develop, if
it was not
developed
before
taking the
image to
Edit.
Developed and Edited When you develop an image, the image's develop settings are When you
stored in the XMP file of the RAW. When you take the developed take a
image into Edit, and then apply edits and save the image, ACDSee developed
prompts you to save the image in a new file format.
Page 404 of 827


e files
(e.g.
JPEG)
For RAW files, to permanently save changes, you will need to image into
apply edits
and save
it, the
develop
settings
are saved
in the XMP
file and
placed in
the
[Originals]
folder. If
the
developed
image is in
Edit, and
has edits
applied
and you
click Save,
ACDSee
saves the
image.
If you
decide to
take the
edited
image
back into
Develop,
ACDSee
prompts
that you
will lose
your edits.
If you
choose to
discard
Page 405 of 827


e files
(e.g.
JPEG)
your edits,
the
original
image
with its
develop
settings
will be
opened.
Applying Photoshop® Plug-ins

ACDSee supports 32-bit and 64-bit Adobe® Photoshop® plug-ins in Edit mode. 32-bit Photoshop® plug-
ins will only work in 32-bit versions of ACDSee. Similarly, you can only run 64-bit plug-ins in 64-bit
versions of ACDSee.
Not all plug-ins will work exactly as they do in Photoshop®.
To Apply a Photoshop® Plug-in:

With an image open in Edit mode, choose Tools | Photoshop Plug-ins | [your plug-in].
You can undo the effects of your plug-in by pressing the Undo button at the bottom of the
Edit panel.
You cannot open the same plug-in in two ACDSee Ultimate windows at the same time.
Photoshop is a registered trademark of Adobe Inc.
Using the Edit Brush

While the tools in Edit mode allow you to make a variety of global adjustments, sometimes you may
only want to adjust specific areas of your photos. For example, instead of blurring an entire photo,
you may want to blur certain areas, such as the background. To do this, and other local adjustments,
you can use the Edit Brush.
Page 406 of 827

The Edit Brush allows you to selectively edit your photo by simply brushing on the effects. The Edit
Brush is essentially creating a mask that is used to determine which pixels will be affected by the
current settings of the chosen operation.
Edit Brush
The Edit Brush button displays at the center of the top editing panel toolbar for all applicable Edit
mode tools.
To Use the Edit Brush:

1. In Edit mode, select the tool you want to use.
2. Click the Edit Brush button to enter Brushing mode and open the Brush controls. Or, toggle
the Brush panel open and closed with the B key.
3. Specify the brush settings in the panel or as you work as described in the table below.
4. Start painting the effects on your photo.
6. Press Done to apply your brush strokes.
Edit Brush Controls
Page 407 of 827

Add brush stroke Brush while holding the left mouse button down.
Erase brush stroke Brush while holding the right mouse button down.
Nib Width Adjusts the size of the brush. You can use the mouse wheel to
adjust nib width or adjust the Nib Width slider.
Feathering Adjust the slider to control the softness of the transition between
the brush strokes and the image. Use Shift + mouse wheel to
adjust the amount of feathering or adjust the Feathering slider.
Pressure Adjust the slider to control the strength of the brush.
Alternating between Brush mode and For filters that involve drawing or clicking on the image, such as
cursor-applied tools Light EQ™ and White Balance, hold down the Alt key to switch
from Brush mode to using the tool.
Clear all brush strokes

Removes all brush strokes from the image.
Invert all brush strokes

Toggle this option to invert brushed strokes. This makes
brushed areas no longer brushed and untouched areas brushed.
This is useful if you want the majority of the image brushed and a
small section untouched. Simply brush only the small area you
don't want affected and invert the brush strokes.
Load last applied brush strokes

Applies effects to the area most recently brushed and
applied.
Smart Brushing See Smart Brushing section below.
Show brush strokes
When this option is checked, your brush strokes will be displayed

in the color shown. This is helpful when brushing a complex area
with a subtle effect, as it can be difficult to tell if you have missed
a spot. Alternatively, hold down the S key to see your brush
strokes on the image.
When you click the Edit brush and enter Brushing mode, you need to apply brush strokes in
order to see any of your adjustments.
To exit Brushing mode, toggle the Edit brush button.
Page 408 of 827

You can undo and redo each brush stroke individually using the Undo and Redo buttons at
the bottom of the Filter Menu.
You can also use the Edit Brush with Blend Modes and Selections to alter the way the effect is
applied.
The Edit Brush is enabled in many of the editing tools and special effects filters. When it does not make
sense to have this option, it is omitted. The Edit Brush is not available in the following tools: Crop,
Resize, Lens Distortion Correction, Perspective Correction, Rotate, Flip, Watermark, Red Eye
Reduction, Repair Tool, and Selections.
Smart Brushing
You can use the Smart Brush to target your brushing to specific colors, brightness values, or a
combination of color and brightness. The Smart Brush only affects pixels similar in value to the pixel in
the center of the brush stroke, and allows you to apply adjustments to those pixels.
To Use the Smart Brush:

2. Click the Edit Brush to enter Brushing mode and open the Brush controls. Or, toggle the Brush
panel open and closed with the B key.
Color Uses the color of pixels similar in value to the pixel in the center of the brush stroke
to determine if they should be brushed on, depending on the Tolerance slider
setting.
Brightness Uses the brightness of pixels similar in value to the pixel in the center of the brush
stroke to determine if they should be brushed on, depending on the Tolerance
slider setting.
Magic Uses a combination of the color and brightness values similar to the pixel in the
center of the brush stroke to determine which pixels should be brushed on,
depending on the Tolerance slider setting.
4. Use the Tolerance slider to increase or decrease the range of pixels affected by the Smart Brush.
5. Place your cursor over the color or brightness you wish to select and begin painting on the effect.
7. Press Done to apply your brush strokes.
Hold down Shift prior to making a brush stroke to temporarily disable the Smart Brush. You
can use this keyboard shortcut on a stroke by stroke basis.
Page 409 of 827

You can erase brush strokes by right-clicking and brushing over your strokes.
To Turn off Smart Brushing:

Select Off from the Smart Brushing drop-down menu.
Using the Gradient Tool

While the tools in Edit mode allow you to make solid, global adjustments, sometimes you want these
effects to gradually progress over your photo. For example, instead of applying a blur across an entire
photo, you may want a blur that advances across the image, or advances over a section of the image.
Use the Gradient tool to gradually progress an effect across an image.
Gradient Tool
The Gradient tool button displays at the center of the top Editing panel toolbar for all applicable Edit
mode tools.

2. Click the Gradient tool button to enter Gradient mode. Or, toggle the Gradient panel open and
closed with the G key.
3. Specify the gradient settings in the panel or as you work, as described in the table below.
4. Position the guides on your photo. Inside the guide boxes, the gradient is transitioning. On either side of
the boxes, the effect being applied by the Gradient tool is at full strength or not applied at all. To make
this clearer, check the Show gradient mask checkbox. Move the boxes to define where the effect will
begin or end. Hold down the Shift key while positioning the effect to lock to the nearest 45° angle, for
straightness.
Page 410 of 827

Invert gradient
Toggle this option to invert the gradient. By pressing the
Invert button after applying a gradient beginning at the top of the
image, the gradient would now begin at the bottom, and vice
versa.
Show gradient mask
When this option is checked, your gradient mask will be displayed

in the color shown. Alternatively, hold down the S key to see the
mask on the image. Click the drop-down arrow to select another
display color.
Alternating between the Gradient For filters that involve drawing or clicking on the image, such as
tool and cursor-applied tools Light EQ™ and White Balance, hold down the Alt key to switch
from Gradient mode to using the tool.
To exit Gradient mode, toggle the Gradient tool button.
To maintain your gradient mask while switching to Edit Brush mode, hold down Shift and click
the Edit Brush button. This allows you to add to the gradient mask or erase parts of it that you
don't want.
The Gradient tool is enabled in many of the editing tools and special effects filters. When it does not
make sense to have this option, it is omitted. The Gradient tool is not available in the following tools:
Detail Brush, Dodge and Burn, Resize, Lens Distortion Correction, Perspective Correction, Crop,
Rotate, Drawing Tools, Vignette, Borders, Watermark, Repair Tool, Red Eye Reduction, and Selections.
Using the Radial Gradient Tool

While the Edit tools allow you to make a variety of adjustments, sometimes you want these effects to
draw attention to a specific area of your photo. For example, instead of applying sharpening across an
entire photo, you may want to only sharpen the center subject. Use the Radial Gradient tool to apply
effects around, or directly to, a center point.
Radial Gradient Tool

The Radial Gradient tool button displays at the top of the Editing panel toolbar for all applicable Edit
mode tools.
Page 411 of 827

2. Click the Radial Gradient tool button to enter Radial Gradient mode. Or, open and close the
Radial Gradient panel with the R key.
3. Specify the Radial Gradient settings in the panel or as you work, as described in the table below.
4. Position the guides on your photo. Inside the circle, the image is unaltered. At the perimeter of the
circle, the effect being applied by the Radial Gradient is transitioning between not applied at all (inside),
and full strength (outside). To make this clearer, check the Show gradient mask checkbox. Hold down
the Shift key while positioning the effect to change the radial gradient to a perfect circle.
6. Press Done.

Feathering Increase the slider to smooth the gradient edge.
Squareness Increase the slider to gradually transform the default oval shape of
the radial to a square.
Invert gradient
Toggle this option to invert the radial gradient. By pressing the
Invert button, the effects will be applied to the center of the image
(inside the circular guides), and outside of the radial gradient will
be unaltered.
Show gradient mask
When this option is checked, your radial gradient mask will be

displayed in the color shown. Alternatively, hold down the S key to
see the mask on the image. Click the drop-down arrow to select
another display color.
Alternating between the Radial For filters that involve drawing or clicking on the image, such as
Gradient Tool and cursor-applied Light EQ™ and White Balance, hold down the Alt key to switch
tools from Radial Gradient mode to using the tool.
To exit Radial Gradient mode, toggle the Gradient tool button.
To maintain your radial gradient mask while switching to Edit Brush mode, hold down Shift
and click the Edit Brush button. This allows you to add to the gradient mask or erase parts of it
that you don't want.
The Radial Gradient tool is enabled in many of the editing tools and special effects filters. When it does
not make sense to have this option, it is omitted. The Radial Gradient tool is not available in the
following tools: Detail Brush, Dodge and Burn, Resize, Lens Distortion Correction, Perspective
Page 412 of 827

Correction, Crop, Rotate, Drawing Tools, Vignette, Borders, Watermark, Repair Tool, Red Eye
Reduction, and Selections.
Using Blend Modes and Opacity

When using a tool in Edit, there are blend mode and opacity tools. These tools give you creative
control and let you combine the two to create a new image. You can apply blend modes and opacity to
an entire image or to a selected part of an image.
Opacity
The Opacity slider changes the opacity of the edited image. It gives you control of how much of the
edit should be visible on the image.
Blend Modes
The ability to control how the edits and the image merge means that other blend modes besides
opacity can be used to affect the final image.
Page 413 of 827

Normal Pixels in the edited image are combined with those in the original. Only
opacity affects this blend.
Screen Combines the edited image color with the inverse of the original photo color,
resulting in a color that is the same or lighter.
Multiply Combines the edited image color with the original photo to produce a darker
color. Multiplying any color with black produces black; multiplying any color
with white leaves the color unchanged.
Dodge Combines the edited image color with the original pixels in the photo to
produce a lighter color.
Burn Combines the edited image color with the original pixels in the photo to
produce a darker color.
Multiply or Screen blend mode based on the original image area's color
values.
Difference Subtracts the edited image color from the color of the original photo. Any
white in the edited image produces a true negative of the color in the image,
while black produces no effect.
Darken Applies pixels in the edited image that are darker than the original image.
Pixels in the edited image that are lighter than the original image disappear
Lighten Applies pixels in the edited image that are lighter than the original image.
Pixels in the edited image that are darker than the original image disappear
Soft Light Adds soft highlights or shadows by darkening or lightening based on the
Hue Applies the hue value of colors in the edited image to the color of the original
image areas.
Saturation Applies the saturation value of colors in the edited image to the color of the
Color Applies the hue and saturation of the edited image to the image. This blend
does not affect the luminance of the original image.
Luminosity Applies the lightness value of colors in the edited image to the color of the
Page 414 of 827

Dissolve Applies some pixels from the edited image layer onto the original image,
resulting in specks of color. The Opacity slider controls the amount of
speckling.
Exclusion Like Difference, but with less contrast, Exclusion subtracts the blend color
from the color of the underlying photo. Any white in the blend color produces
a true negative of the color in the image, while black produces no effect.
Vivid Light Combines the blend color with the underlying pixels in the photo by
increasing or decreasing contrast to produce a lighter or darker color, as
determined by the blend color.
source are replaced. Pixels lighter than the light source remain the same.
When the light source is darker than 50% gray, the pixels lighter than the light
source are replaced. Pixels darker than the light source remain the same.
Linear Light Dodges or burns by lightening or darkening the brightness value, depending
on the blend color.
Hard Mix Applies red, green, and blue channel values of the blend color to the RGB
Subtract Subtracts the blend color from the image (base) color in each channel.
Divide Divides the blend color from the image (base) color.
Darker Color From the blend color and the image (base) color, the lower channel values are
chosen.
Lighter Color From the blend color and the image (base) color, the higher channel values
are chosen.
You can use the Edit Brush to paint an effect onto specific areas of your image, and
then set the blend mode and opacity slider to change the way the effect is applied.
The blend mode and opacity controls apply to many of the editing tools and special effects filters.
When it does not make sense to have these controls, they are omitted. The blend mode and opacity
controls are not on the following tools: Crop, Resize, Lens Distortion Correction, Perspective
Correction, Rotate, Flip, Watermark, Red Eye Reduction, Repair Tool, Selections.
Adding Rulers and Guidelines

You can use rulers and guidelines to accurately place layers, text, and objects.
To Turn on Rulers:
Page 415 of 827

In Edit mode, choose View | Rulers or press Ctrl + T.
To Customize Ruler Units of Measure:

Right-click a ruler and choose a new unit of measure from the context menu.
To Draw Guidelines:
With Rulers enabled, click a ruler and drag the guideline to your desired location on the image.
You can move guidelines you have already placed by enabling the Move tool.
To Enable Snapping to Guidelines:

You can snap layers, objects, and text layers to guidelines for precise positioning. When snapping is
enabled, you can move the edge of a layer near a guideline and it will snap to the guideline.
Choose View | Snap to Guidelines or press Ctrl + Shift + G. You can use this keyboard shortcut to
enable or disable snapping.
To Remove Guidelines:
Choose View | Clear all Guidelines or press Ctrl + Shift + ;.
To Lock Guidelines in Place:

Choose View | Lock Guidelines or press Ctrl + Alt + ;.
To Hide Guidelines:
Choose View | Hide Guidelines or press Ctrl + ;. You can use this keyboard shortcut to hide or show
guidelines.
You can customize the Rulers and Guidelines options. See Setting the Rulers and Guidelines
Options.
Pixel Targeting

While tools are used to make a variety of global adjustments to an image and the Edit Brush makes it
possible to adjust specific sections of the image, Pixel Targeting allows for the selection of distinct
tones, colors, and skin tones. Pixel Targeting applies a number of adjustments to a photo's individual
colors or tones, or just to skin tone. For example, in Edit mode, open an image and add an Exposure
Page 416 of 827

filter from the toolbar and note that the exposure is adjusted over the entire image. However, to only
adjust the exposure of a blue sky in an image, enable Pixel Targeting by clicking the Pixel Targeting
button located in the image header bar and use the color wheel to target the color blue, thereby only
increasing the exposure on the sky.
Pixel Targeting is available in the following filters:

l Skin Tune
l Chromatic Aberration
l Vignette
l Special Effects
l Grain
l Exposure
l Levels
l Auto Levels
l Tone Curves
l Light EQTM
l Dehaze
l White Balance
l Color EQ
l Color Wheel
l Tone Wheels
l Color LUTs
l Split Tone
l Convert to Black & White
l Sharpen
l Blur
l Noise
l Clarity
Pixel Targeting can also be accessed by right-clicking a layer in the Layers pane and selecting Pixel
Targeting... from the context menu.
To perform targeted adjustments with Pixel Targeting:

1. Open any of the above filters in the Filter Menu pane, or select one the menu options above.
2. In the image's header bar, click the Pixel Targeting button.
3. In the Pixel Targeting pane, configure the settings for Target Tones and Target Colors as described
below.
4. Adjust the selected filter or menu option's settings. The adjustments will only affect the targeted color
or tones, not the entire image.
Page 417 of 827

The Pixel Targeting Pane
The Pixel Targeting pane consists of three sections:

l Presets
l Color Range.
Page 418 of 827

Pixel Targeting Pane Sections
Page 419 of 827

drop-down list.
Click the
icon to view
a preview of
the mask
Show Mask Preview
that high-
lights the
pixels to be
targeted.
Click the
icon to
remove all
of the cur-
rent image
Reset
edits and
return the
image to its
original
state.
Click the
icon to open
Help the Pixel Tar-
geting help
file.
Invert Selection Click the

icon to
change the
selected
pixels to the
unselected
pixels.
Indicator Line Click the

icon to add
an indicator
line to the
Tone Grab-
ber display
Page 420 of 827

and pro-
duce an eye-
dropper for
indicating
where a
tone from
the image
appears in
the graph.

slider tabs
to make a
tonal selec-
tion. The
area inside
the blue box
represents
the tonal
selection.
The top two
tabs cannot
slide past
one
another.
Each of the
bottom tabs
cannot slide
past their
own top tab
when sliding
toward the
center. The
tonal range
is between
0 and 255. A
diagonal line
between
the top and
its asso-
ciated bot-
tom slider
tab will pro-
duce a
feathered
selection
Page 421 of 827

effect (64 to
0 in the
Luminance
Range
example). A
straight line
connecting
the top and
associated
bottom
slider tab
will produce
a hard cut-
off (192 to
192 in the
Luminance
Range
example).

slide value
to sharpen
the crisp-
ness around
the edge of
the selec-
tion.
Detail Range If the Add

Detail slider
has been
advanced
past a value
of "0", the
Detail
Range slide
is enabled
for con-
trolling the
range of the
edge detail
added by
the Add
Detail
slider.
Page 422 of 827

Invert Color Click the

icon to
invert the
selected col-
ors on the
wheel.
Color Indicator Click the

icon to dis-
play and pro-
duce an
eyedropper
for selecting
color pixels
in the
image. Hold
down the
Alt key and
click with
the eye-
dropper to
make a
color selec-
tion.
Color Wheel Use the

Color Wheel
to adjust pre-
cise colors
in an image.
The Color
Wheel is par-
ticularly use-
ful for
common
requests
like making
a blue sky
more blue,
or bright-
ening dark
water that is
meant to
depict a
bright lake.
Page 423 of 827

The selec-
ted color is
displayed in
the circle
below the
Enable
Wheel
checkbox.
For more
information
on the Color
Wheel, see
Adjusting
Color with
the Color
Wheel.
Enable Wheel Located

above the
Wheel Selec-
tion circle
displaying
the selected
color,
enable the
checkbox to
make the
associated
wheel act-
ive.
Add Wheel Click the

+ icon to
make
changes to
another
color using
an addi-
tional color
wheel.
Wheel Selection Located dir-

ectly
beneath the
Enable
Wheel
checkbox,
Page 424 of 827

click the
inside circle
to select the
associated
color wheel.
The selec-
ted color is
represented
by the
wheel.
Delete Wheel Deletes the

currently
selected
color wheel.

slider to
adjust
smoothness,
which acts
like a feath-
ering tool to
soften a
color's
edges.
Skin Targeting Using the

Skin Tar-
geting slider
will disable
the rest of
the Color
Range field
set and
allow only
skin tones to
be targeted.
Pixel Targeting becomes even more powerful when paired with Selections or the Edit Brush. These
tools in combination with Pixel Targeting make it possible to target very precise areas, such as only the
blue of a person's eyes, rather than all of the blue in the image.
Page 425 of 827

Save setting values as a preset for future use. Using the Save Preset button on the Pixel
Targeting pane will only save Pixel Targeting settings, and not the settings on the filter. Filter
settings must be saved separately.
Recording and Applying Adjustments with ACDSee Actions

ACDSee Actions allow you to record all of your Edit mode adjustments and then apply them to other
images by "playing" them back. You can use this method to batch edit multiple photos with any
adjustment available in Edit mode. In addition, after applying a recording with adjustment layers, you
can open the image in Edit mode and continue tweaking and adjusting the adjustment layers in the
Layered Editor, allowing for non-destructive image editing.
You can also apply pre-loaded default actions for quick adjustments. Actions can be organized into
existing categories, or you can create your own.
For quick access in Edit mode, you can use the Record, Stop, and Play buttons at the top of
the Tools panel. Or you can use the Toggle Actions Browser button to open the
ACDSee Actions window. You can also move the ACDSee Actions bar to anywhere on your
screen.
To Record Your Adjustments:
1. In Edit mode, on the right side of the Toolbar, press the Record button. The Recording Action pane
will appear and list your adjustment steps as you make them.
2. Make any adjustments you desire in Edit mode.
3. Press the Stop button in the Toolbar to stop the recording at any time. If you pressed the Stop
button by accident, press Cancel to continue recording.
4. In the Save Action dialog box, enter a name for your recording.
5. Select a category for your action from the drop-down menu, or enter a name to create a new category.
6. Press Save. Your recording will now be available in the Actions Browser under the category you chose
(or created).
To Preview a Recording:
Page 426 of 827

Click Actions | Actions Browser...
Click Tools | Browse Actions...
Click Tools | ACDSee Actions | Actions Browser...
Right-click the images and choose ACDSee Actions | Actions Browser... from the context menu.
Right-click the images and choose Browse Actions... from the context menu.
If you select multiple images, only the first image will be previewed. However, if you
play a recording, it will apply to all selected images.
In View mode, do one of the following:
Press the Open Actions Browser pane button.

Click Panes | Actions Browser.
Press the Toggle Actions Browser button in the Toolbar.
2. In the Actions Browser, choose a category from the drop-down menu.
3. Select the thumbnail of the recording you wish to preview from the left column of the Actions Browser.
View a preview of how your current image would appear with your recording applied in the
Preview column.
Toggle the Preview button in the top right corner to view the adjustment steps of the selected
action.
Preview Image
Preview Steps
To Delete a Recording:
Page 427 of 827

Deleting a recording is permanent and cannot be undone. Your deleted recording will not
appear in your system's Recycle Bin.
1. Select the recording in the left column of the Actions Browser.
Right-click and choose Delete.
Press the Delete button.
To Rename a Recording:
Right-click and choose Rename.
Press the Rename button.
3. Enter a new name in the Name field.
4. Press OK.
Applying Recordings
You can apply your recordings to other images, allowing you to batch edit using any Edit mode
adjustments you have recorded. You can also apply any of the pre-loaded default actions, which are
organized into categories in the Actions Browser.
When applied to images that are a different size than the one used in the recording, actions that
involve drawings, geometry, or the layering of images will be scaled to the target image proportionally
using a percentage of the width and height independently. However, crop size is absolute, (based on
the number of pixels). Crop position is relative, also based on the number of pixels.
For best results with tools from the Geometry group, apply your recordings to similarly sized images.
To Apply a Recording:
Recordings are applied in the same order they were recorded in.
In Manage Mode
1. Select the images in the File List pane.
Page 428 of 827

Choose Tools | ACDSee Actions | <your desired category> | <your desired action> | Play.
Choose Tools | Browse Actions... In the Actions Browser, select your desired category from the
drop-down menu. Select the recording from the left column. Press the Play button.
Right-click the images and choose ACDSee Actions | <your desired recording> | Play.
Right-click the images and choose Browse Actions... In the Actions Browser, select your desired
category from the drop-down menu. Select the recording from the left column. Press the Play
button.
Choose Actions | Actions Browser... In the Actions Browser, select your desired category from the
Choose Actions| <your desired category> | <your desired action> | Play.
In View Mode
Choose Tools | ACDSee Action | <your desired category> | <your desired action> | Play.
Choose Tools | Browse Actions. In the Actions Browser, select your desired category from the drop-
down menu. Select the recording from the left column. Press the Play button.
Press the Open the Action Browser Pane button. In the Actions Browser, select your desired
category from the drop-down menu. Select the recording from the left column. Press the Play button.
Right-click the images and choose ACDSee Actions | <your desired recording> | Play.
Right-click the images and choose Browse Actions...In the Actions Browser, select your desired
category from the drop-down menu. Select the recording from the left column. Press the Play button.
In Edit Mode
1. Open your image in Edit mode.
Choose Panes | Actions Browser. In the Actions Browser, select your desired category from the
Choose Tools | ACDSee Actions | <your desired category> | <your desired action> | Play.
Choose Tools | ACDSee Actions | Actions Browser... In the Actions Browser, select your desired
category from the drop-down menu. Select the recording from the left column. Press the Play
button.
Choose Tools | Browse Actions. In the Actions Browser, select your desired category from the
Page 429 of 827

Press the Toggle Actions Browser button. In the Actions Browser, select your desired category
from the drop-down menu. Select the recording from the left column. Press the Play button.
You can apply a recording to a singular image layer by selecting the layer in the Layered Editor
and pressing the Play button in the Actions Browser.
To Set the Output Options for a Recording:

You can configure the options that will determine how files are outputted when recordings are applied
to them. Each output option you configure is specific to the selected (right-clicked) recording. Output
options only affect recordings that are applied to images in modes other than Edit mode.
Configured output options will not travel with shared recordings.
1. Select the recording in the left column in the Actions Browser.
Right-click and choose Options.
Click the Options button.
3. Configure the options as described below.
4. Press OK.
Output Options
Page 430 of 827

Action Results
Overwrit When a recording is applied, the file is overwritten with the edited version. If the file cannot
e the be overwritten, such as in the case of a RAW file, a copy will be saved.
selected
file,
create
copy in
case of
non-
encodabl
e files
Rename Select this option if you want to save the edited images with a new name, in the same folder
modified as the original images.
images
and place
in source
folder
Place the Select this option if you want to save the edited images to a specific folder. Browse to the
modified folder.
images in
the
following
folder
Overwrite existing
Use this option to determine what ACDSee Ultimate should do if the destination folder contains an image
with the same file name as one of the edited images:
Ask: prompts you to choose different options (skip, rename, overwrite) depending on the image.
Skip: skips processing that image, and begins processing the next image.
Replace: replaces the image in the destination folder with the edited image.
Rename: renames the edited file.
Preserve last-modified dates
Select this option if the original image has a last-modified date, and you want the edited image to have the
same last-modified date.
Preserve metadata
Select this option if the original image contains metadata, and you want the edited image to contain the
same metadata and color profile.
Page 431 of 827

Preserve database information
Select this option if you want to preserve ACDSee Metadata from the original image.
File Output
File Select the file format in which you would like to save the outputted images.
format
Pixel Use this option to determine number of bits per pixel (BPP) in the output images, and
format whether the images will be color or grayscale. Select Automatic if you want the output
images to have the same pixel format (or the closest possible match) as the original images.
You can use this option to convert the images from color to grayscale, or to convert the
images to a pixel format that is compatible with other software or processes.
Color Check the color space checkbox to choose a color space option from the drop-down list.
space
If you begin recording after adjustment layers are added, the recording can only be applied to
a target image that has the same adjustment layers already added to it.
If you record adding a layer to a single layered image, and then try to apply this recording to a
multi-layered target image, the layer will be added on top of all of the other layers.
If you record adjusting specific adjustment layers of a multi-layered image, the recording can
only be applied to a target image with the same adjustment layer. For example, if your
recording contains a sharpening adjustment layer as its third layer and you adjust it, your
target image must also have a sharpening adjustment layer as its third layer.
If you record making global adjustments to a single layered image, then add layers, and then
apply the recording to a multi-layered target image, the target image will be flattened. The
global adjustments will be applied to the whole image, and then the layers will be added on
top of that.
Managing Action Categories

Actions can be organized into existing categories, or you can create your own. You can delete
categories, as desired.
Actions saved under the category "HDR Presets" will become available as presets in the HDR
dialog.
Page 432 of 827

Managing Recording Categories

You can create categories for your recordings.
To Add a Category:
1. In the Actions Browser, click the Add a New Category button.
2. In the Add a new Category dialog, enter a name for your new category.
3. Press OK.
To Delete a Category:
In the Actions Browser, click the Delete Category button. All actions from this category will be moved
to Uncategorized.
To Move a Recording to a New Category:

Click the Move to Category button.
Right-click and choose Move to Category from the context menu.
3. In the Move to Category dialog, select a category from the drop-down menu.
4. Press OK.
Sharing Actions
You can import and export actions. Exporting actions will allow you to share them as convenient,
compressed packages. You can select which actions to export, or export them all at once.
Alternatively, you can simply share individual actions by navigating to their location and using your
desired sharing method, such as email.
You cannot import and export the pre-loaded actions that come with ACDSee.
To Export Recordings:
1. Open the Actions Browser. See "Applying Recordings" on page 428.
2. Click the Export Actions button.
Page 433 of 827

3. In the Export ACDSee Actions dialog, click the plus + signs to expand the tree, and check or uncheck the
checkboxes to select which actions to export. Or check the Select All checkbox to export all actions.
4. Choose a destination for your exported actions.
5. Enter a name for your exported actions in the Export package name field.
6. Check the Include categories with export checkbox to maintain your category structure in the exported
package.
7. Press OK.
To Import Recordings:
1. Open the Actions Browser. See "Applying Recordings" on page 428.
2. Click the Import Actions button.
3. Navigate to the location of your actions.
4. Select the Include categories with import radio button to maintain any included category structure
upon import.
5. Select the Import actions only radio button to ignore any included category structure upon import.
Select a category for your imported actions. Alternatively, you can enter a name in the field to create a
new category in which to place your imported actions.
6. Press OK.
To Share a Recording:
1. Navigate to C:\Users\<User Name>\AppData\Local\ACD Systems\Actions\
2. Select and copy your desired recording.
3. Share the .acda file using the method of your choice. For example, you can attach it to an email.
Using Selections
Use Selections to isolate an area of a photo in order to apply edits or filters to only that area, rather
than the whole photo. There are six different selection tools and each selects an area of a photo in a
unique way. The controls available change depending on which tool you select.
To Use a Selection Tool:

1. In Edit mode, at the top of the panel, select the button for one of the following selection tools: Brush
selection tool, Polygon selection tool, Rectangular selection tool, Elliptical selection tool, Lasso selection
tool, Magic wand selection tool. See below for more detailed steps for using these tools.
You can use Selections with the following Edit tools:
Page 434 of 827

Repair: Skin Tune, Chromatic Aberration
Add: Vignette, Special Effects, Tilt-Shift, Drawing tools, Grain
Exposure/Lighting: Exposure, Levels, Auto Levels, Tone Curves, Light EQ™, Dehaze, Dodge and Burn
Color: White Balance, Color EQ, Convert to Black and White, Split Tone
Detail: Sharpen, Blur, Noise, Clarity, Detail Brush
To Preview a Selection:
1. Make a selection with one of the selection tools detailed below.
2. In the button bar directly below the image, click and hold the icon to preview the selection mask.
3. Optional: Select from the main menu Select | Send selection to basket to place the current selection in
the selection basket.
The Selection Tools
Freehand Lasso: click the left mouse button and drag the cursor to draw around the area that you
wish to select. As you draw, a line appears showing where you have drawn. When you release the
mouse, the end of the line joins to the start automatically to complete the selection. The whole
selection animates and looks like marching ants.
Magic Wand: click on any area of the image and all the pixels the same color are included in the
selection. You can choose whether to select only the same color pixels that are actually touching the
one you clicked, or all the pixels in the photo that are similar. You can increase the threshold to include
more pixels in the selection. The lower the threshold, the more similar a pixel has to be to the one
clicked in order to be included. The greater the threshold, the more different a pixel can be and still be
in the selection.
Rectangular or Elliptical: click and drag either a rectangle or an ellipse that begins where
you first click and ends when you release the mouse.
Polygon: click on any area of the image to begin the selection. As you move your mouse, the
selection will follow your cursor. To change the direction of the selection line, click the left mouse
button. Double-click to complete the selection.
Brush: you can use the Brush selection tool to target your selection based on color, brightness, or
a combination of both color and brightness. Select Color, Brightness, or Magic from the drop-down
menu in the Context bar to define your selection. Then align the center of the brush with the color,
brightness, or combination that you wish to target and begin brushing. You can increase the Tolerance to
Page 435 of 827

include a wider range of pixels in your selection. The lower the Tolerance, the more similar a pixel has
to be to the one clicked in order to be included. You can erase the selection by right-clicking.
Overlay Options
You can customize the look of your selection based on the visualization best suited to your selection
task.
To Customize the Selection Overlay:

1. Choose Select | Overlay Options...
2. In the Overlay Options dialog, select one of the following overlay options:
Marching Ants This option outlines the selection with animated dashes.
Selection Highlighted This option highlights your selection in the color of your
choosing. Select a color from the drop-down menu. You can
customize the transparency of the color overlay by using the
Opacity slider.
Selection Exposed This option highlights the non-selected areas of your image in
the color of your choosing. Select a color from the drop-down
menu. You can customize the transparency of the non-
selected area by using the Opacity slider.
3. Press OK.
Using the Selection Tools
To Use the Lasso:

1. Select the Lasso button.
2. On the image, click and hold down the left mouse button as you draw around the area you want to
select.
3. Release the mouse button to complete the selection.
Page 436 of 827

4. To clear the selection, click anywhere on the image (for the Lasso , Rectangular, or Elliptical selection).
5. To add to an existing selection, hold down Shift, or press the Add to selection button in the Context bar,
and draw a shape that includes any part of the original selection line.
When you release the mouse, the original selection expands to include the outer edge of your
addition.
6. To add multiple areas into your selection, hold down Shift, or press the Add to selection button in the
Context bar and draw around any part of the image.
As long as you do not touch the line of any other selection, you can add several separate areas
to a selection.
7. To subtract from a selection, hold down Ctrl, or press the Subtract from selection button in the Context
bar, and draw a shape that includes part of the original selection, or encircles it completely.
Page 437 of 827

8. If you wish to apply edits or effects to the outside areas of the image, you need to click Select | Inverse
to reverse the selected area.
Now the selection includes all the outside areas of the image with the central area outside the
selection.
You can preview the selection mask by holding down the Preview button:
You can select an editing tool or a special effect to apply to the selection.
To Use the Magic Wand:

1. Select the Magic Wand button.
2. Click any color in the image.
Slide the Threshold slider to adjust the number of pixels to be included or excluded. The
Threshold slider sets how similar a pixel needs to be to the one you clicked in order to be
included in the selection.
Click the Connected checkbox if you want to include only pixels that are touching the one you
clicked.
Hold down Shift and click around the selection to include more pixels.
Hold down Ctrl and click around the selection to remove pixels from the selection.
4. From the Wand type drop-down list, select one of the following:
Brightness: selects pixels similar in brightness to the area of the image you clicked.
Color: selects pixels similar in hue and brightness to the area of the image you clicked.
Color is generally your best option.
RGB: selects pixels with red, green, and blue combination similar to the area of the image you
clicked.
Page 438 of 827

To Use the Rectangular or Elliptical Selection Tool:

1. Select either the Rectangular or Elliptical button.
2. Click and drag to draw the selection on the image.
To add to an existing selection, hold down Shift, or use the Add to selection button , and drag
another selection that includes any part of the original selection line. Release the mouse and
the selection now includes the additional area.
To add multiple areas to your selection, hold down Shift and drag as many as you want.
To subtract from an existing selection, hold down Ctrl, or use the Subtract from selection
button , and drag another selection that intersects with the one you want to reduce. Release
the mouse and any part that was inside the new selection is removed.
To Use the Polygon Selection Tool:

1. Select the Polygon button.
2. Click anywhere on the image to start your selection.
3. Click again to change the direction of the selection line.
4. Double-click to complete the selection.
To add to an existing selection, hold down Shift, or use the Add to selection button , and drag
another selection that includes any part of the original selection line. Double-click and the
selection now includes the additional area.
To add multiple areas to your selection, hold down Shift and drag as many as you want.
To subtract from an existing selection, hold down Ctrl, or use the Subtract from selection
button , and drag another selection that intersects with the one you want to reduce. Double-
click and any part that was inside the new selection is removed.
Page 439 of 827

To Use the Brush Selection Tool:

1. Select the Brush Selection button.
Color Selects pixels based on how similar they are to the color value of the pixel in the
center of the brush, depending on the Tolerance setting.
Brightness Selects pixels based on how similar they are to the brightness value of the pixel
in the center of the brush, depending on the Tolerance setting.
Magic Selects pixels based on how similar they are to the combination of the color and
brightness values in the center of the brush, depending on the Tolerance setting.
3. Use the Tolerance slider to increase or decrease the range of pixels selected.
4. Place your cursor over the color or brightness you wish to select, and click and/or drag on the image to
create a selection.
To remove areas from your selection, right-click and drag over the area you want to deselect.
To use the brush as a regular selection tool, hold down Shift while brushing.
Combining the Tools

You can use the Selection tools separately or in combination. For example, you can use the Magic
Wand to select most of a particular color, then switch to the Freehand Lasso to add to, or subtract
from, the selection. Or you could use the Rectangular selection to select a large general area, then
refine it using the Freehand Lasso.
To Combine Selection Tools:

1. Choose a tool and make a selection.
2. Switch to another tool.
3. Press the Add to selection button.
4. Make another selection.
Saving Selections as Presets:
Page 440 of 827

You can save your settings as a preset for future use. After you have made a selection, click Select |
Save Selection...
To use a previously saved selection, click Select | Load Selection...
To delete a saved selection, click Select | Manage Selections...
To Cut and Paste Selections:

1. Make a selection.
Press Ctrl + C or Ctrl + X.
Go to Edit | Copy.
Press Ctrl + P.
Go to Edit | Paste.
Your selection will paste onto a new layer above the selected (active) layer in the Layered Editor.
To Delete Selected Pixels:

You can delete selected areas of images or masks. To retrieve your deleted pixels, use the Undo
button.
2. Click Select | Delete Selected Pixels.
You can also delete pixels by pressing Alt + Delete.
To Create a Layer Mask from a Selection, Add or Subtract a Mask from a Selection, or To Intersect
a Mask with a Selection:
See Using Masks with Layers.
Refining Selections
Once you make a selection with one of the selection tools, you can make the selection larger or
smaller, which can make editing easier. This process shifts the edge of your selection, or feathers it to
soften it.
To Refine a Selection:
Page 441 of 827

1. Make a selection using one of the selection tools above.
2. Click Select | Refine or press Ctrl+ Shift + N.
3. In the Refine Selection panel, use the Shift Edge slider to bring the edge in by sliding left, or move it out
by sliding right. Use the Feathering slider to soften the edges of your selection, which can result in a
smoother transition.
4. Click Done to save your refined selection.
You can save your refined selection as a preset.
Targeting Selections
You can target selections to specific color tones and brightness values, as well as skin tones.
To Select Pixels by Color or Tone:

1. Click Select | Pixel Targeting...
2. On the Pixel Targeting panel, configure the settings as described below.
3. Press OK. Your targeted colors or tones will be selected.
The Pixel Targeting Panel

The Pixel Targeting panel consists of four sections: Targeted Tones, Targeted Colors, Skin Targeting,
and the Target Mask.
Target Mask:
The Target Mask allows you to see the areas in the image that are targeted by displaying them in
white. When no pixels are targeted, the Target Mask will appear completely black. Conversely, when
all pixels are targeted, as is the case before any sliders have been altered on the Pixel Targeting panel,
the entire Target Mask will appear completely white.
Targeted Tones:
The Targeted Tones sliders allow you to target tones of brightness for selection. To target one or more
tones, you may find it easiest to press the Min button under the Targeted Tones section. This
deselects all tones, and you can then choose specific tones to target for selection by moving their
sliders up between 0 and 100, depending on your desired intensity.
Targeted Colors:
The Targeted Colors sliders allow you to target specific colors for selection. To target one or more
colors, you may find it easiest to press the Min button under the Targeted Colors section. This
deselects all colors, and you can then choose specific colors to target for selection by moving their
Page 442 of 827

Skin Targeting:
The Target Skin slider allows you to specifically target skin tones for selection. To target skin tones,
move the slider to the right between 0 and 100, depending on your desired intensity.
When you move the Skin Targeting slider, all other colors, (except for skin tones), are excluded. You
cannot then alter the green color slider, for instance.
To exclude skin tones from your selections, move the slider to the left between 0 and -100.
Luminosity Selection
You can create a selection based on the brightness in the image. The brighter a pixel is, the stronger
the selection will be on that pixel.
To Select Pixels by Brightness:

Click Select | Luminosity Selection.
Channel Selections
Images store color information in Color Information Channels.
Color Information Channels

When a new image is opened, Color Information Channels are automatically created. The number of
color channels created is determined by the image’s color mode. Each color of an RGB image, for
example, has a channel for each color (Red, Green, and Blue).
To preserve an image's Color Information Channels, save files in a format that supports the
image’s color mode.
To open the Channel Selection dialog:

In Edit mode, select from the main menu Select | Channel Selection... or press Ctrl + Alt + L.
Channel Selection Dialog Interface

The Channel Selection dialog interface is divided between four distinct areas:
l Channel Type,
l Levels,
l Preview, and
l Button bar.
The Channel Type field set lists all channels in the image grouped by type:
Page 443 of 827

l RGB (Red Blue, Green),

l CMYK (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black),
l LAB (L for perceptual lightness, A and B for Red, Green, Blue and Yellow), and
l HSL (Hue, Saturation, Lightness).
The Levels group contains a three-tabbed slider and associated graph for displaying adjustments
made to the selected channel type. An Invert check box is available for selecting the inverse polarity of
the image.
The Preview pane displays the latest mask for the original image. Directly below the image are a zoom
slider, a numeric input zoom field, a Full Screen icon, and a 1:1 icon for displaying the original image
with its original dimensions.
The button bar resides at the bottom of the dialog and contains a Help button, the Save in selection
basket button, the Set as selection button, the Set as mask button, and the Cancel button. See the
table below for an explanation of the button functionality.
Help Opens the Channel Selection help page.
Save in selection basket Places the edits from the Channel Selection dialog into a
new layer in the Selection Basket dialog. Use the button
functionality below on layers in the Selection Basket (see
Selection Basket).
Set as selection Makes the edits in the Channel Selector the current selec-
tion in the Preview pane.
Set as mask Make the edits in the Channel Selector a mask in the Pre-
view pane and adds the mask to selected layer in the Lay-
ers pane.
Cancel Closes the Channel Selection dialog without taking any

action.
To edit an image through Channel Selection:

1. Select from the main menu, Select | Channel Selection..., or press Ctrl + Alt + L.
2. In the Channel Selection dialog, enable a Channel Type.
3. Make fine adjustments in the Levels group.
l Click the Save in selection basket button,
l Click the Set as selection button,
l Click the Set as mask button, or
l Click the Cancel button.
Page 444 of 827

Applying Edits or Effects to Selections

You can use the Selections tools to isolate an area of an image. Once selected, you can apply many of
the editing tools, such as color and exposure, or any of the special effects filters, to the selected area.
An active selection in an image looks like a line of marching ants.
To Apply an Edit or Effect to a Selection:

1. Use the Selections tools to create a selection.
2. Select a tool to use from any of the following groups:
Exposure/Lighting
Color
Detail
Add (Special Effects)
Ensure that the Use Selection button adjacent to the Feathering slider is toggled on.
3. Use the tool to edit the image.
Use Any of These Special Selections Options:

Use Selection Click to use the selection or apply the edit or effect to the
whole image. This control means you can edit just the
selection, then deselect Use Selection and apply another
edit to the whole image without clearing the selection.
Invert Selection Click to invert the selection.
Feathering Drag to increase or decrease the blurring between the

edge of the selection and the edit or effect.
Feathering prevents an unnatural or sharp transition
between the selection and the rest of the image as it
blends the edges. This control also makes it unnecessary
for your selection to be perfectly on the edge of the area
you want to select.
Show/Hide Selection Click to show or hide the marching ants around the
selection. Hiding the selection line makes it easier to judge
the effect of various effects. Press Ctrl + Alt + Z to enable
or disable.
Page 445 of 827

Using the Smart Erase Tool

You can remove unwanted objects from your images by selecting or brushing them and using the
Smart Erase function. Smart Erase will analyze the image and predict how to best fill in the brushed or
selected area. This is based on what the image would most likely look like without the selected or
brushed objects.
Smart Erase will not work as intended if you select or brush more than 25% of the image.
To Erase and Fill a Selection:

1. In Edit mode, at the top of the panel, choose a selection tool.
2. Select the area of the image you would like filled.
3. Click Select | Smart Erase. The fill will be applied.
4. Repeat steps until the desired look is achieved.
If you are using the Brush Selection tool, you must have the Strength slider set to 50 or more.
To Erase and Fill Using the Smart Erase Brush:
1. In Edit mode, at the top of the panel, select the Smart Erase Brush from the Toolbar.
2. Brush over the area you would like filled. When you release the mouse button, the fill will be applied.
3. Repeat steps until the desired look is achieved.
Luminance/Color Range

While tools are used to make a variety of global adjustments to an image and the Edit Brush makes it
possible to adjust specific sections of the image, the Luminance/Color Range selection tool allows for
the selection of distinct tones, colors, and skin tones. The Luminance/Color Range selection tool
applies a number of adjustments to a photo's individual colors or tones, or just to skin tone. For
example, in Edit mode, open an image and add an Exposure filter from the toolbar and note that the
exposure is adjusted over the entire image. However, to only adjust the exposure of a blue sky in an
image, enable the Luminance/Color Range tool by selecting from the main menu Select |
Luminance/Color Range and using the color wheel to target the color blue, thereby only increasing the
exposure on the sky.
To create targeted selections with Luminance/Color Range:
Page 446 of 827

1. Select from the main menu, Select | Luminance/Color Range or press Shift + Alt + P.
2. In the Luminance/Color Range pane, configure the settings for Target Tones and Target Colors as
described below.
l Click OK to accept all changes and close the dialog.
l Click Cancel to void all changes and close the dialog.
Page 447 of 827

The Luminance/Color Range Pane
The Luminance/Color Range pane consists of three sections:
Page 448 of 827

l Presets
l Color Range.
Luminance/Color Range Pane Sections
Page 449 of 827

drop-down list.
Click the icon to

remove all of the
current image
Reset
edits and return
the image to its
original state.
Click the icon to

open the Lumin-
Help
ance/Color
Range help file.
Invert Selection Click the icon to

change the selec-
ted pixels to the
unselected
pixels.

slider tabs to
make a tonal
selection. The
area inside the
blue box rep-
resents the tonal
selection. The
top two tabs can-
not slide past
one another.
Each of the bot-
tom tabs cannot
slide past their
own top tab
when sliding
toward the cen-
ter. The tonal
range is between
0 and 255. A diag-
onal line
Page 450 of 827

between the top

and its associated
bottom slider tab
will produce a
feathered selec-
tion effect (64 to
0 in the Lumin-
ance Range
example). A
straight line con-
necting the top
and associated
bottom slider tab
will produce a
hard cut-off (192
upper to 192
lower in the
Luminance
Range example).

slide value to
sharpen the crisp-
ness around the
edge of the selec-
tion.
Detail Range If the Add Detail

slider has been
advanced past a
value of "0", the
Detail Range
slide is enabled
for controlling
the range of the
edge detail
added by the
Add Detail slider.
Page 451 of 827

Invert Color Click the icon to

invert the selec-
ted colors on the
wheel.
Color Wheel Use the Color

Wheel to adjust
precise colors in
an image. The
Color Wheel is
particularly use-
ful for common
requests like
making a blue
sky more blue,
or brightening
dark water that is
meant to depict
a bright lake. The
selected color is
displayed in the
circle below the
Enable Wheel
checkbox. For
more inform-
ation on the
Color Wheel, see
Adjusting Color
with the Color
Wheel.
Enable Wheel Located above

the Wheel Selec-
tion circle dis-
playing the
selected color,
enable the check-
box to make the
associated wheel
active.
Add Wheel Click the icon to

+ make changes to
another color
using an addi-
tional color
wheel.
Page 452 of 827

Wheel Selection Located directly

beneath the
Enable Wheel
checkbox, click
the inside circle
to select the asso-
ciated color
wheel. The selec-
ted color is rep-
resented by the
wheel.
Delete Wheel Deletes the cur-

rently selected
color wheel.

slider to adjust
smoothness,
which acts like a
feathering tool to
soften a color's
edges.
Skin Targeting Using the Skin

Targeting slider
will disable the
rest of the Color
Range field set
and allow only
skin tones to be
targeted.
The Luminance/Color Range selection tool becomes even more powerful when paired with other
Selections or the Edit Brush. These tools used in together make it possible to target very precise areas,
such as only the blue of a person's eyes, rather than all of the blue in the image.
Save setting values as a preset for future use. Using the Save Preset button on the
Luminance/Color Range pane will only save Luminance/Color Range settings, and not the
settings on the filter. Filter settings must be saved separately.
Page 453 of 827

Gathering Selections in a Selection Basket

A selection basket is used to gather and hold image and selections from various sources. After a
selection has been placed in the selection basket, any of the tools or features in ACDSee Ultimate can
be used to edit or view the selections.
Selection Basket Options

Rename Right-click a selection in the Selection Basket dialog and
select Rename to open the Rename Layer dialog. Enter
a name in the New name field and click the OK button
to customize the name.
Duplicate selection Makes a copy of the selected selection and changes

focus to the new duplicate selection, named "Temp
name" by default.
Set this selection as the mask of the selec- Makes the selection in the Selection Basket a mask for
ted layer the selection in the Layers pane and adds the mask to
the Preview pane.
Set this selection as the current selection Makes the selection in the Selection Basket the current
selection in the Preview pane.
Delete Deletes the selection in the Selection Basket.
Add the currently selected layer mask to With the Selection Basket open, adds the currently
the basket selected layer mask to the basket without having to
leave the basket.
Add the current selection to the basket With the Selection Basket open, adds the currently
selection to the basket without having to leave the bas-
ket.
Navigating to another image file will result in losing the contents of the Selection Basket.
Selection Basket Context Menu Items
Page 454 of 827

Rename Right-click a selection in the Selection Basket dialog and select

Rename to open the Rename Layer dialog. Enter a name in the
New name field and click the OK button to customize the name.
Set As Selection Sets the current selection.
Add To Selection Adds any new connecting selection to the current selection.
Subtract From Selection Removes any new selection connected to the current selection.
Intersect With Selection Reduces the current selection to the area intersected by a new
selection.
Set As Mask Sets the current mask selection.
Add To Mask Adds any new connecting mask selection to the current mask
selection.
Subtract From Mask Removes any new mask selection connected to the current mask
selection.
Intersect With Mask Reduces the current mask selection to the area intersected by a
new mask selection.
To open a new Selection Basket:

1. In Edit mode, open an image and make a selection using one of the Selection Tools.
2. Select from the main menu, Select | Send To Selection Basket, or select Panes | Selection Basket.
To add an additional selection to a Selection Basket:

1. In Edit mode, with an existing Selection Basket populated with at least one selection, do one of the fol-
lowing:
l Make a new selection using one of the Selection Tools.
l Open a new image and make a new selection using one of the Selection Tools.
2. Select from the main menu, Select | Send selection to basket.
To duplicate a selection in the Selection Basket:

1. In the Selection Basket, select the selection to be duplicated.
2. Click the icon on the bottom button bar of the Selection Basket.
To set a selection as the mask of a selected layer:

1. In the Selection Basket, select the selection to be set as a mask for the selection in the Layers editor.
Page 455 of 827

2. Click the icon on the bottom button bar of the Selection Basket. Note that the selection is added to
the Layers editor as a mask and the image changed in the display area to reflect the mask's affect on the
layer.
To set a selection as the current image selection:

1. In the Selection Basket, select the selection to be set as the current image selection.
2. Click the icon on the bottom button bar of the Selection Basket. Note that the selection is set as the
current selection in the image in the image display area.
To delete a selection from the Selection Basket:

1. In the Selection Basket, select the selection to be deleted.
2. Click the icon on the bottom button bar of the Selection Basket.
To rename a selection:
1. In the Selection Basket, right-click the selection to be renamed.
2. Select Rename from the context menu.
3. In the Rename Layer dialog, enter a name in the New name field and click OK.
Using Layers
In Edit mode, you can use the Layers pane to add effects and shapes to your photos in layers, perform
photo manipulations, create composite images, and much more. Layers allow you to work on a single
element of an image without disturbing others. Layers can be as transparent or opaque as you desire.
This allows you to stack layers to achieve the level of visibility you want for the elements you add on
each layer. You can also hide layers.
You can use layers in conjunction with image effects and adjustment tools, drawing tools, text, and
more. Effects and adjustments will be applied to the layer selected in the Layers pane. You can also
create a blank image and layer other elements on top of it.
Geometry adjustments are applied to all layers.
You have the option of adding watermarks to a new layer. If you do this, the watermark will be
saved on top of the image, not as part of the image, so you can go back and edit it at any time.
To Open the Layers Pane:

With an image open in Edit mode, go to Panes | Layers.
Page 456 of 827

In the Layers pane, you will see Layer 1 with your image on it. At this point, you have the option of
editing the photo, or adding additional layers containing other photos or drawing elements, such as
shapes. You can also create a mask to hide or reveal portions of the layers below.
To Add a Layer:
Press the Add blank layer button at the bottom of the Layers pane.
Go to Layer | Add Blank Layer.
To edit a layer, select the layer in the Layers pane.
To Add Another Image to the Layers Pane:

Page 457 of 827

Press the Add a File as a Layer button at the bottom of the Layers pane.
Go to Layer | Add a File as a Layer.
Select an image thumbnail from the Filmstrip at the bottom of Edit mode and drag it into the Layers
pane.
Right-click an image thumbnail from the Filmstrip at the bottom of Edit mode and choose Add Image as
a New Layer from the context menu.
To Add Multiple Images to the Layers Pane:

In Manage mode, select your desired images, right-click and choose Process | Load Files into Stack
from the context menu.
To Set Layer Visibility:

To show or hide all layers, do one of the following:
Choose Layer | Show All Layers or press Shift + J.
Choose Layer | Hide All Layers or press Shift + Y.
To show or hide individual layers, select the layer and press the Show/Hide Layer button.
Show
Layer
Hide
Layer
To Delete a Layer:
Select the layer and press the Delete Layer button.
To Duplicate a Layer:
Select the layer you would like to duplicate and press the Duplicate button.
To Move a Layer:
In the Layers pane, select the layer and drag it up or down.
To Name a Layer:
1. To rename a layer from "Layer 1", etc, select the layer and right-click.
2. Choose Rename Layer from the context menu.
Page 458 of 827

3. In the Rename Layer dialog, enter a name for your layer and press OK.
To Merge a Layer:
You can merge a layer with the layer below.
1. Select the top layer, or a layer above another.
2. Press the Merge Layer Down button.
To Flatten an Image:
To merge all layers into a single image, do the following:
Choose Layer | Flatten Image.
To Change a Layer's Blend Mode and Opacity:

Blend modes describe how the layers blend together. Blending sticks with the layer it was applied to,
regardless of the layer order being changed. Opacity describes how transparent the layer is.
Page 459 of 827

1. Select the layer.
2. Select a Blend Mode from the drop-down menu at the top of the Layers pane.
3. Move the Opacity slider at the top of the Layers pane.
Saving Layered Images:

When you save a layered image, the Save Image As dialog opens with the file format set to .acdc by
default. By saving in the .acdc file format, your layers will remain accessible should you re-open the
image in Edit mode in the future.
The .acdc file format will not be displayed in the Save Image As dialog by default if you have
flattened or merged all layers.
Page 460 of 827

This file format saves in 8 bits per channel by default for all bit depth images. You can choose to save in
16 bits per channel for images that already have 16 bits per channel data, such as RAW files, 64-bit TIFF
files, etc. This will allow for a higher quality image, but will also create a larger file size. To save in 16 bit,
check the 16 bit per channel data checkbox in the Save Image As dialog box. If you try to use this
option to save images that have lower than 16 bits per channel data, it will still save as 8 bits per
channel.
To Create a New Image:

You can create a new, blank image.
1. Go to File | New Image... or press Ctrl + N.
2. In the New Image dialog, enter a name for your image and the dimensions. You can customize the unit
of measurement with the drop-down menu.
Neither your width or height setting can exceed 16,000 pixels.
3. Next to Aspect Ratio, select an aspect ratio from the drop-down list. You can define your own ratio using
the Custom option. You can also delete ratios by selecting them in the drop-down and pressing the
Delete button.
4. Next to Resolution, use the Dots Per Inch field to specify a resolution.
5. From the Background Contents drop-down, select the color of your image's background.
6. From the Bit Depth drop-down, select whether your image will be 32 or 64-bit.
7. Press OK. The new image will open in the .acdc format.
You can save your new image settings as a preset in the New Image dialog. Next to the Preset
drop-down, press the Save Preset icon. You will then be prompted to enter a name for the
preset. Select OK to save. To delete a preset, choose it in the drop down menu, and press the
Delete Preset icon.
To add a layer mask, see Using Masks with Layers.
Using Adjustment Layers

You can use the Adjustment Layers section of the Layers pane to non-destructively adjust and add
effects to your images in Edit mode. Adjustment layers stack in the Layers pane, allowing you to return
to individual layers at any time and continue making adjustments to each effect. Each adjustment
layer includes a mask by default.
By saving an image with adjustment layers as a .acdc file, you can re-open it in Edit mode and still
adjust each effect individually at any time.
For best results, make all global adjustments prior to adding adjustment layers.
Page 461 of 827

To Add an Adjustment Layer:

With an image open in Edit mode, do one of the following:
Select an adjustment layer icon from the bottom of the Layers pane.
Select an adjustment layer from the Add adjustment layer menu at the bottom of the Layers pane.
The adjustment layer will be added above your image in the Layers pane. The settings for your
adjustment layer will appear at the bottom of the panel. Configure the settings as described below.
To Apply an Adjustment Layer to a Particular Image:

If you have multiple images in the Layers pane, you can restrict adjustment layers to a specific image.
To apply an adjustment layer only to the closest image layer below it, press the Clipping button.
Clipping off
Clipping on
You can apply multiple adjustment layers to one particular image layer by enabling all of their Clipping
buttons.
Adjustment Layers and Settings

Exposure Adjustment Layer Options
Exposure Drag the slider to the right to increase exposure, or drag to the left to
decrease exposure.
Contrast Drag the slider to the right to increase contrast, or drag to the left to
decrease contrast.
Levels Adjustment Layer Options

Use the color pickers to select colors to adjust in the layer beneath the adjustment layer.
Use the buttons on the right of the Levels panel to select Luminance, Red, Green, or Blue as the channel
to adjust.
Use the arrows at the bottom of the panel to adjust the shadows, midtones, and highlights. Move the
shadows arrow to define the blackest area of the image. Move the midtones arrow to define the
midtone. Move the highlights arrow to define the whitest area of the image.
Page 462 of 827

Curves Adjustment Layer Options

Use the buttons on the right of the Curves panel to select the RGB, Red, Green, or Blue color channel
to adjust.
See Adjusting Tone Curves.
Light EQ™ Adjustment Layer Options

Brighten Drag the slider to increase the brightness of dark areas in your image.
Darken Drag the slider to decrease the brightness of light areas in your image.
White Balance Adjustment Layer Options

Temperature Adjusts the warmth of the correction, from blue to yellow.
Tint Adjusts the tint of the correction, from magenta to green.
Color Picker Select a precise color to adjust.
Vibrance Adjustment Layer Options

Vibrance Drag the slider to the right to increase vibrance, or to the left to
decrease vibrance. Increasing vibrance does not affect skin tone in an
image. This is unlike saturation, which intensifies all colors equally.
Saturation Drag the slider to the right to increase saturation, or to the left to
decrease saturation.
Hue Adjusts the hue of the image. Drag the slider to the right to increase or
drag to the left to decrease hue.
Lightness Adjusts the image brightness. Drag the slider to the right to increase or
drag to the left to decrease the image's brightness.
Color EQ Adjustment Layer Options

Choose the Saturation, Hue, or Brightness tab and adjust colors individually by dragging the sliders.
Vibrance Drag the slider to adjust the vibrance of the image without affecting skin
tones.
Saturation Adjusts from saturation to grayscale.
Hue Changes the color's hue.
Brightness Adjusts the light or dark tones in the image.
Color Picker Select a precise color to adjust.
Page 463 of 827

RGB Adjustment Layer Options

Adjust the Red, Green, or Blue sliders to balance or heighten the RGB channels in the image.
Split Tone Adjustment Layer Options

Highlights Hue Drag the slider to the right to select a highlight color.
Highlights Saturation Drag the slider to the right to increase saturation of the specified color in
the highlights of the image.
Shadows Hue Drag the slider to the right to select a shadow color.
Shadows Saturation Drag the slider to the right to increase saturation of the specified color in
the shadows of the image.
Balance Drag the slider to the right to emphasize the highlight color; drag the
slider to the left to emphasize the shadow color. For example if the slider
is set to the maximum at 50, then full emphasis is applied to the highlight
color; if the slider is set to the minimum -50, then full emphasis is applied
to the shadow color.
Add Color Adjustment Layer Options

Select a color to add to your image.
Use the Density slider to specify the strength of the added color.
Black & White Adjustment Layer Options

Adjust the Red, Green, or Blue sliders to add color back into the black and white image.
Brightness Adjusts the brightness of the colors in the image.
Negative Adjustment Layer

The Negative adjustment layer creates a negative out of your image. There are no settings for this
adjustment layer.
Photo Effect Adjustment Layer Options

Select a photo effect from the drop-down menu to change the look and feel of your image.
You can use your mouse wheel to quickly scroll through the photo effects.
Skin Tune Adjustment Layer Options
Page 464 of 827

Smoothing Refines skin by suppressing texture detail.
Glow Increases the brightness of skin while subtly smoothing.
Radius Specifies the scale of the texture detail that is affected by the effect. A
lower value enhances small details, while a large value enhances larger
details.
Sharpen Adjustment Layer Options

Strength Specifies the strength of the sharpening applied by increasing contrast
around edges.
Radius Controls the number of pixels to adjust around each edge. Higher
values increase the number of sharpened pixels and tend to bring out
coarser detail, while lower values reduce the number of sharpened
pixels and tend to bring out finer detail.
Detail Suppresses the halo, (the light border that forms around edges with
extreme sharpening), by reducing its intensity. The higher the value, the
stronger the reduction.
Threshold Specifies how different the pixel lightness values within an edge must
be before the pixels within the edge are sharpened. Higher values
sharpen only stronger edges but minimize the appearance of noise.
Lower values sharpen both strong and weaker edges, but can increase
the appearance of noise. We recommend you set the threshold to
enhance edges while keeping background noise to a minimum.
Blur Adjustment Layer Options

Select the Gaussian or Directional button to select the type of blur.
Gaussian
Produces an even, smooth blur.
Strength Specifies the strength of the blur. Move the slider to the right to intensify
the effect.
Directional
Produces a blurring effect that gives the illusion of movement.
Strength Specifies the strength of the blur. Move the slider to the right to intensify
the effect.
Angle Specifies the direction of the blur effect.
Page 465 of 827

Noise Reduction Adjustment Layer Options

Luminance Removes the random variations of brightness in the noise.
Color Reduces the random variations of color in the noise.
Clarity Adjustment Layer Options

Clarity Drag the slider to the right to enhance texture in the image. Drag the
slider to the left to smooth out texture in the image.
Orton Drag the slider to enhance local contrast while subtly smoothing texture.
Soft Light Drag the slider to increase brightness while subtly smoothing texture.
Tonal Width Drag the slider to control the amount shadow and highlights are affected
by the Clarity, Orton, and Soft Light sliders. Choose a value of 0 to
restrict the adjustments to midtones. Choose a value of 100 to apply the
adjustments equally in all tones.
Radius Drag the slider to control the scale of the texture detail being affected.
Choose a value of 0 to enhance small details, or a value of 100 to
enhance larger details.
Enhanced edge processing Check this checkbox to reduce the appearance of halos around edges
with enhanced texture, and to minimize the softening of edges when
texture is smoothed.
Dehaze Adjustment Layer Options

Drag the slider to adjust the strength of the contrast, detail, and color correction.
Gradient Map Adjustment Layer Options

Shadows Use the drop-down or the color picker to specify the color to be added
to the dark parts of your image.
Highlights Use the drop-down or the color picker to specify the color to be added
to the light parts of your image.
Vignette Adjustment Layer Options
Page 466 of 827

Strength Specifies the size and intensity of the vignette.
Distance Specifies the size of the clear area around the focal point in the portrait.
Drag the slider to the left to reduce the size of the clear area. Drag the
slider to the right to increase the size of the clear area.
Shape Specifies the shape of the frame.
Posterize Adjustment Layer Options

See Applying a Posterize Effect.
Threshold Adjustment Layer Options

Use the slider to select a brightness level. All pixels brighter than that brightness will become white,
and every darker pixel will become black.
Color LUTs Layer Options

Select a Color LUT from the drop-down menu. Or press the Import LUTs button to import a new LUT to
your list.
Using Masks with Layers

Layer masks allow you to control a layer's level of transparency. While it is easy to control the opacity
of a layer globally using the Opacity slider, layer masks are useful when you want to target a particular
part of a layer. Use layer masks to hide or reveal portions of the layer beneath. Layer masks are
effective for combining multiple images into a single image or for making localized adjustments.
For the types of layer masks - a white layer mask completely covers the layer below it. As you paint on
the white layer mask with a black brush, you are brushing "holes" through the mask, allowing you to
see through to the layer below. Conversely, a black layer mask is transparent and completely displays
the layer below it. As you paint on the black layer mask with a white brush, you are masking the
image, covering the layer below.
To Create a Layer Mask:

In the Layers pane, right-click the layer you want to add a layer mask to and select Set Mask White or
Set Mask Black.
Go to Layer | Mask | Set Mask White or Set Mask Black.
At the bottom of the Layers pane, press the Add layer mask button.
Page 467 of 827

The layer mask will appear as a white or black box in the Layers pane next to the thumbnail of the
image on the layer you selected. To perform actions to the layer mask, you must select it in the Layers
pane. You can alter the opacity of the layer mask by dragging the Opacity slider at the top of the
Layers pane. You can apply any Edit mode adjustment to the layer mask by selecting it and entering
the tool.
Page 468 of 827

Selected white layer

mask
Page 469 of 827

Selected black layer

mask
To Disable a Mask:
You can disable a mask without deleting it. You can even disable it, save your layers as a .acdc file and
exit Edit mode, then reopen it in Edit mode at a later date and enable your mask again.
1. Select the mask in the Layers pane.
Right-click on the mask and choose Disable mask from the context menu.
In the Layers pane, press the Disable mask button.
Choose Layer | Mask | Disable Mask.
Press Ctrl + Shift + M.
To Enable a Mask:
Page 470 of 827

1. Select the mask in the Layers pane.
Right-click on the mask and choose Enable mask from the context menu.
In the Layers pane, press the Enable mask button.
Choose Layer | Mask | Enable Mask.
Press Ctrl + Shift + M.
Mask Properties
You can adjust the properties of each layer mask on each layer individually using the Mask Properties
panel. The adjustments you make are non-destructive, meaning that you can adjust them at any time
throughout the editing process.
To Access the Mask Properties Panel:

Select the mask in the Layers pane. The Mask Properties will appear at the bottom of the pane, above
Adjustment Layers.
You can make the following adjustments to your layer mask:
Feathering You can non-destructively feather your mask to avoid sharp edges or a stark
contrast between the mask and the layer. Move the slider to blur the edges of
the mask.
Invert You can non-destructively invert your mask. This will turn a white mask black,
and a black mask white.
Displaying a Mask Overlay:

You can make your mask easier to see by checking the Show Overlay checkbox in the Mask Properties
panel.
To Customize the Mask Overlay:

1. Right-click on the mask in the Layers pane and choose Mask Overlay Options... from the context menu.
2. In the Mask Overlay Options dialog, select one of the following overlay options:
Mask Highlighted This option highlights your mask in the color of your choosing. Select a color
from the drop-down menu. You can customize the transparency of the mask
overlay by using the Opacity slider.
Mask Exposed This option highlights the non-masked areas of your layer in the color of
your choosing. Select a color from the drop-down menu. You can customize
the transparency of the unmasked area by using the Opacity slider.
Page 471 of 827

3. Press OK.
The mask overlay is only visible when the layer is selected.
To Edit a Layer Mask:

Select the layer mask in the Layers pane, then choose any adjustment, or drawing or selection tool.
Mask Flexibility
You can create or modify selections from masks.
To Create a Layer Mask From a Selection:

You can make a layer mask from a selection.
2. Go to Layer | Mask | From Selection.
Page 472 of 827

Or:
2. Press the Add layer mask button. Or add any adjustment layer by selecting one of the icons from the
bottom of the Layers pane. A mask will automatically be made from the selection.
Or:
2. Right-click the layer and choose Mask From Selection from the context menu.
To Add a Mask to a Selection:

1. With the mask selected in the Layers pane, make a selection.
2. Right-click the mask and choose Add Mask To Selection.
To Subtract a Mask from a Selection:

2. Right-click the mask and choose Subtract Mask From Selection.
To Select the Area Common to the Mask and the Selection:

2. Right-click the mask and choose Intersect Mask With Selection.
To Delete Selected Mask Pixels:

See Using Selections.
Creating Layer Masks From Specific Colors and Tones

You can create masks from specific targeted colors and/or tones—and even skin tones.
To Create a Layer Mask by Targeting Colors or Tones:

1. Select your layer and set a white or black mask, as described above.
2. Right-click the mask and choose Pixel Targeting... from the context menu.
3. On the Pixel Targeting panel, configure the settings as described below.
4. Press OK. The mask will be created from the targeted colors and/or tones.
The Pixel Targeting Panel

The Pixel Targeting panel consists of four sections: Targeted Tones, Targeted Colors, Skin Targeting,
and the Target Mask.
Page 473 of 827

Target Mask:
The Target Mask allows you to see the areas in the image that are targeted by displaying them in
white. When no pixels are targeted, the Target Mask will appear completely black. Conversely, when
all pixels are targeted, as is the case before any sliders have been altered on the Pixel Targeting panel,
the entire Target Mask will appear completely white.
Targeted Tones:
The Targeted Tones sliders allow you to target tones of brightness for the mask. To target one or more
tones, you may find it easiest to press the Min button under the Targeted Tones section. This
deselects all tones, and you can then select specific tones to target for the mask by moving their
Targeted Colors:
The Targeted Colors sliders allow you to target specific colors for the mask. To target one or more
colors, you may find it easiest to press the Min button under the Targeted Colors section. This
deselects all colors, and you can then select specific colors to target for the mask by moving their
Skin Targeting:
The Target Skin slider allows you to specifically target skin tones for the mask. To target skin tones,
move the slider to the right between 0 and 100, depending on your desired intensity.
When you move the Skin Targeting slider, all other colors (except for skin tones), are excluded. You
cannot then alter the green color slider, for instance.
To exclude skin tones from your mask, move the slider to the left between 0 and -100.
Creating Layer Masks From Images

You can copy color images and paste them as grayscale (luminance) masks on other layers, including
adjustment layers.
To Create a Mask from an Image:

Right-click an image in the Layers pane and choose Copy from the context menu.
With an image selected in the Layers pane, choose Edit | Copy.
Page 474 of 827

2. Select a layer in the Layers pane and do one of the following:
Right-click the layer and choose Paste as Mask from the context menu.
Choose Edit | Paste as Mask.
Choose Layer | Mask | Paste as Mask.
Adding Text as a Layer

You can use the Text tool in Edit mode to add text to an image. In ACDSee Photo Studio Ultimate, you
add text as a layer, so you can edit the text without affecting the image. You can customize the font,
size, color, style, and alignment, and insert metadata. You can also adjust the opacity of the text to
create a watermark effect, which is useful for placing copyright information on your photos.
You can save your image with text layers as a .acdc file. By saving in this format, your layers will remain
editable should you re-open the image in Edit mode in the future.
You can add layer effects to text layers by clicking the fx button in the Text toolbar, and
following the instructions from step 3 in the Applying Layer Effects topic.
Adding Text
To Add Text as a Layer:
1. In Edit mode, select the Text tool from the Toolbar at the top of the panel.
2. Choose the type of Text layer you want to add from the drop-down menu.
Dynamic: using Dynamic, when you change the size of the text box, the text within it will increase
or decrease with the box size.
Frame: using Frame, you can increase or decrease the text box size while maintaining the size of
the text within.
Path: using Path, you can change the precise path the text takes.
3. Add the text layer to the image using one of the following options:
Click and drag the cursor to create and resize the textbox or path in one action.
Click in your desired area of the image. A text box or path is added to the image and a text layer
appears in the Layers pane.
4. Click and drag the text box or path to reposition it anywhere on your image, or drag the box's handles to
resize it. In the Text toolbar, you can choose Dynamic, Frame, or Path from the drop-down menu. For
more on these, see below. In the Context bar, you can also choose or enter a specific point size in the
Size drop-down menu.
Page 475 of 827

If you make formatting changes after selecting the Dynamic, Frame, or Path setting, you
could lose these changes if you switch to another type of text setting. For example, if you
make a path for the text, and you then choose Dynamic, you will lose the path you had
created.
5. Type the text you want to add either in the text box or along the path. When you add additional text
boxes or paths, they will appear as separate layers in the Layers pane. When you click on, or edit text in
any box or path, the layer will show as selected in the Layers pane.
6. In the Context bar, use the drop-down menus to specify the font you want to use, the point size of the
text, the formatting options, such as italics or justification, and the color of the text.
7. At the top of the Layers pane, drag the Opacity slider to specify the transparency of the text.
8. At the top of the Layers pane, select an option from the Blend Mode drop-down list to specify how you
want the text to blend into the underlying image.
You cannot enter an Edit mode filter while a text layer is selected. This will prompt a warning
asking you if you would like to rasterize your text layer. After you rasterize the text layer it will
no longer be editable.
While you cannot merge text layers with other text layers, you can merge text with regular
image layers. This action will rasterize your text. After you rasterize the text layer it will no
longer be editable.
You can add adjustment layers above text layers and clip them directly to text layers. See
Using Adjustment Layers.
You can add a mask to a text layer. However, should you move the text layer, the mask will
not move with it.
You can modify a text layer, including customizing style settings, by selecting the text layer.
Text Tool Actions

You can perform actions such as move, rotate, or resize on text layers, using the following key
combinations:
Dynamic:
Move cursor: moves text box
Resize cursor: resizes box while preserving the aspect ratio
Shift key + Resize cursor: resizes box without preserving aspect ratio (freeform)
Page 476 of 827

Rotate cursor: rotates the box
Shift key + Rotate cursor: rotates incrementally at 45 degrees
Frame:
Move cursor: moves text box
Resize cursor: resizes box without preserving the aspect ratio (freeform)
Shift key + Resize cursor: resizes box while preserving aspect ratio
Rotate cursor: rotates the box
Shift key + Rotate cursor: rotates incrementally at 45 degrees
Path:
Move cursor: moves the entire path
Move anchor point cursor: moves the anchor point
Add anchor point cursor: adds a new anchor point
Right click + Add anchor point cursor: deletes the anchor point
Ctrl key + Move cursor: resizes the path, including the text
Alt key + Move cursor: rotates path
Keyboard Shortcuts and Mouse Shortcuts for the Text tool

There are multiple keyboard shortcuts and mouse and key combinations that can improve your
processes when working with text. Typical keyboard shortcuts, such as Ctrl + C, Ctrl + V, Ctrl + A, etc,
will work in text boxes. You can also use Home, End, Ctrl + Home, and Ctrl + End to move your cursor
to the beginning or end of the text.
You can use Ctrl + Z to undo recent changes when editing within a text box. However, using the
Undo/Redo buttons will undo and redo entire text actions, such as adding a text box.
This table covers all additional options.
Page 477 of 827

Shortcut Resulting Action Using Resulting Action Using Frame Resulting Action Using
Dynamic Path
Ctrl + X Cuts the selected text and saves it to

the Clipboard.
Ctrl + C Copies the selected text and saves it to

the Clipboard.
Ctrl + V Pastes the content from the Clipboard.
Ctrl + A Selects all text.
Ctrl + Z Undoes recent changes in the text box.
Ctrl + Y Redoes the undone action if possible.
Up Arrow Moves the cursor up one Moves the cursor up one line. No action.
line.
Down Moves the cursor down one Moves the cursor down one line. No action.
Arrow line.
Left Moves the cursor one character to the

Arrow left.
Right Moves the cursor one character to the right.

Arrow
Shift + Selects text.

Arrow
Keys
End Moves the cursor to the end of the

current line/path.
Shift + Selects text from the current position

End to the end of the line/path.
Ctrl + Selects text from the current position

Shift + to the end of the text, or end of the
End path.
Ctrl + End Moves the cursor to the end of the

text box/frame/path.
Home Moves the cursor to the beginning of

the current line/path.
Shift + Selects text from the current position
Page 478 of 827

Shortcut Resulting Action Using Resulting Action Using Frame Resulting Action Using
Dynamic Path
Home to the beginning of the current

line/path.
Ctrl + Selects text from the current Selects text from the current Selects text from the
Shift + position to the beginning of position to the beginning of the text. current position to the
Home the text. beginning of path.
Ctrl + Moves the cursor to the beginning of

Home the text box/frame/path.
Double- Selects the current word.

click
Shift + Pastes the selected content to the Clipboard.

Insert
Enter Enters a new line for text. Enters a new line for text. No action.
Delete Deletes the character to the right of

the cursor. If text is selected, it deletes
the text.
Backspac Deletes the character to the left of the

e cursor. If text is selected, it deletes the
text.
You can also apply any Alt codes in text boxes. You can use the following keyboard shortcuts to add
copyright information to your images:
® (Registration symbol) Alt + 0174
© (Copyright symbol) Alt + 0169
™ (Trademark Symbol) Alt + 0153
Using Rulers and Guidelines with Text

You can use Rulers and Guidelines to increase your positioning accuracy when using the text tool.
Some keyboard shortcuts can help you snap items to the guidelines, or rotate with more precision.
Using Dynamic or Frame:
Page 479 of 827

Use the move cursor to snap the anchor point to your guideline.
Hold Shift and move the cursor to center the box on the guideline.
Using Path:
Use the move cursor to snap the anchor point to your guideline.
Rasterizing Text
Rasterizing the text means to finalize it. There are certain situations when you may want to manually
rasterize text, such as attaching masks to text. You can also select multiple text layers and rasterize
once, rather than rasterizing layer by layer. Once text is rasterized, it is no longer editable.
To Rasterize Text:
With your text layers selected, do one of the following:
Choose Layer | Rasterize Text Layer.
Press Ctrl + Shift + T.
Right-click your text layer in the Layers pane and choose Rasterize Layer from the context menu.
Adding Metadata as Text
To Add Metadata as Text to an Image:
1. In Edit mode, select the Text tool from the Toolbar at the top of the panel.
2. In the Context bar, click the Ins button.
3. In the Choose Properties dialog box, click the plus + signs to expand the tree and check/uncheck the
checkboxes to select your metadata preferences.
4. Press OK. Your selected metadata will be added as a text layer.
When playing a recorded action that includes metadata added as a text layer, the result will
include metadata from the original image from which it was recorded, rather than from the
image upon which the action is being played.
Resizing the Canvas

You can use the Resize Canvas tool to crop or to expand the size of your canvas to fit layered content or to add
solid backgrounds.
Page 480 of 827

Resizing by Dragging
Using this method, you can resize the canvas in the following ways:
By dragging the edges of your photo to expand the canvas to your desired size.
By specifying an exact size for the canvas using pixels, inches, centimeters, or a percentage.
By applying a ratio to constrain the canvas proportions.
To Resize the Canvas by Dragging:
1. In Edit mode, select the Resize Canvas tool from the Toolbar at the top of the panel.
2. Position your cursor over the edge or corner of your image until it changes into a double-pointed arrow.
3. Drag the canvas' border to the desired size.
4. In the Context bar, press the Commit button.
For more information on the Resize Canvas tool's options available in the Context bar, see Resize
Canvas.
You can use the Arrow keys to move the canvas around pixel by pixel.
Resizing and Positioning

Using this method, you can resize the canvas in the following ways:
By specifying an exact size for the canvas using pixels, inches, centimeters, or a percentage.
By applying a ratio to constrain the canvas proportions.
To Resize and Position the Canvas:

1. In Edit mode, choose Tools | Resize Canvas.
2. In the Resize Canvas dialog, configure the settings as described below.
3. Press OK.
Resize Canvas Options
Page 481 of 827

Current Dimensions
Displays the current file size and dimensions of your layer.
New Dimensions
Type your desired canvas size in the Width and Height fields. You can customize the unit of measurement with
the drop-down menu. As you alter the size, the file size will update next to New Dimensions.
Anchor Use the Anchor buttons to lock your layer to a specific region,
such as the top left corner. The canvas will expand around it.
Aspect Ratio Select a ratio from the drop-down list. You can define your own
ratio using the Custom option. You can also delete ratios by
selecting them in the drop-down and pressing the Delete button.
Resolution Use the Dots Per Inch field to specify a resolution.
Background Color
Select a background color for your canvas.
Opacity Adjust the transparency of your canvas with the Opacity slider.
When you resize the canvas on an image with

multiple layers, the background color is only added
to the selected layer.
Applying Layer Effects

You can add effects that appear between layers. You can add layer effects to regular image and text
layers. However, you cannot add them to the bottom layer, regardless of the type of layer, or to any
adjustment layer. You can save your image with layer effects as a .acdc file format. By saving in this
format, your layer effects will remain editable should you re-open the image in Edit mode in the future.
Page 482 of 827

To Add Layer Effects:

1. In Edit mode, in the Layers pane, select the layer to which you wish to add effects.
At the bottom of the Layers pane, press the Layer Effects button.
In the Layers pane, right-click the layer and select Layer Effects from the context menu.
Go to Layer | Layer Effects.
Press Ctrl + Alt + X.
3. In the Layer Effects dialog, check the checkboxes of your desired effects. Configure the settings as
described below.
4. Press Close. Closing the Layer Effects dialog does not remove or disable your layer effects. By saving
your layered image as a .acdc file, you can re-open it in Edit mode and continue to edit your layer
effects at any point in the future.
Page 483 of 827

Layer Effects Options
Page 484 of 827

Inner Glow
Thickness Specifies the thickness of the glow effect. Drag the slider to set the thickness.
Blur Blurs the edges of the glow. Drag the slider to determine how much blur is
applied.
Opacity Specifies the opacity of the glow. Type a number from 1 to 99 or drag the
slider to adjust the opacity of the glow. The higher the opacity, the more
visible the glow is.
Blend Mode Specifies how the effect blends with the layer. Select a blend mode from the
drop-down menu.
Color Specifies the color of the glow. Click the color picker to select a different
color. See Using the Color Dialog Box.
Inner Shadow
Blur Blurs the edges of the shadow. Drag the slider to determine how much blur is
applied.
Distance Specifies the size of the shadow according to the angle setting. Drag the slider
to adjust how far the shadow encroaches on your layer.
Opacity Specifies the opacity of the shadow. Type a number from 1 to 99 or drag the
slider to adjust the opacity of the shadow. The higher the opacity, the more
visible the shadow is.
Blend Mode Specifies how the effect blends with the layer. Select a blend mode from the
drop-down menu.
Angle Specifies the angle of the shadow. Type a number from 1 to 360 or drag the
arrow to adjust the angle.
Color Specifies the color of the shadow. Click the color picker to select a different
Bevel
Elevation Specifies the visibility of the bevel effect. As you reduce the Elevation slider,
the layer darkens, making the effect stand out more.
Radius Specifies how spread out the bevel is.
Light Source Specifies an imaginary light source. Click and drag the glow on the ball to
reposition the imaginary light source.
Page 485 of 827

Outline
Thickness Specifies the thickness of the outline effect. Drag the slider to set the
thickness.
Blur Blurs the edges of the outline. Drag the slider to determine how much blur is
applied.
Opacity Specifies the opacity of the outline. Type a number from 1 to 99 or drag the
slider to adjust the opacity of the outline. The higher the opacity, the more
visible the outline is.
Color Specifies the color of the outline. Click the color picker to select a different
Blur
Strength Specifies the strength of the blur. Move the slider to the right to intensify the
effect.
Shadow
Blur Blurs the edges of the shadow. Drag the slider to determine how much blur is
applied.
Distance Specifies the size of the shadow according to the angle setting. Drag the slider
to adjust how far the shadow encroaches on your layer.
Opacity Specifies the opacity of the shadow. Type a number from 1 to 99 or drag the
slider to adjust the opacity of the shadow. The higher the opacity, the more
visible the shadow is.
Angle Specifies the angle of the shadow. Type a number from 1 to 360 or drag the
arrow to adjust the angle.
Color Specifies the color of the shadow. Click the color picker to select a different
When you clip an adjustment layer to a text or image layer with layer effects applied to it, the
layer effects will not be affected.
When rasterizing a text layer with layer effects applied, you can choose not to rasterize its
layer effects. This will allow you to continue to edit the layer effects after.
Copying and Pasting Layer Effects:

You can copy layer effect settings from one layer to another.
Page 486 of 827

1. Configure your desired layer effects settings in the Layer Effects dialog.
2. Press the Copy button.
3. Select another image or text layer. You cannot choose the bottom layer.
4. In the Layer Effects dialog, press the Paste button.
To Reset All Layer Effects Settings:
In the Layer Effects dialog, press the Reset button.
Retouching with Frequency Separation

You can use Frequency Separation to get rid of imperfections while retaining detail. By separating
images into high frequency and low frequency layers, you can smooth out flaws without losing
texture.
To Apply Frequency Separation:

1. With your image selected in the Layers pane, do one of the following:
Right-click the layer and choose Frequency Separation.
Select Layer | Frequency Separation.
Press Ctrl + Shift + F.
2. On the Frequency Separation pane, adjust the Blur Radius slider to determine how much detail is visible
in the high frequency layer, and, by contrast, to determine the blur level of the low frequency layer. You
can turn on or off your view of each layer by using the High Frequency and Low Frequency radio
buttons. Please note that these buttons do not impact the Blur Radius setting.
It is recommended that you choose a setting in which the details just become visible in
the high frequency layer.
3. Press Done.
Your image is now separated into two layers: high frequency (HF) and low frequency (LF). The low
frequency layer contains the tones, colors, and shadows of the image, and will appear blurry on its
own. This is because the texture information is stored on the high frequency layer.
Page 487 of 827

Retouching Images
By isolating adjustments to one layer or the other, you can repair flaws while maintaining a natural
look. You can approach retouching with Frequency Separation in two ways.
Low Frequency Layer

You can use blurring on your low frequency layer to smooth out lighting inconsistencies and
splotchiness. With the low frequency layer selected, use the Detail Brush or Blur tool, or apply blurring
to specific areas by using a selection tool or brush.
High Frequency Layer

You can use cloning on the high frequency layer to even texture and correct detail-related flaws. With
the high frequency layer selected, use the Repair tool to apply cloning.
Tip: you can increase sharpening by duplicating the high frequency layer one or more times.
Page 488 of 827

Merging with Focus Stacking

You can use focus stacking to merge a series of images with different focal distances. By combining
multiple images with different areas in focus, you can create a new image with a greater depth of field.
To Use Focus Stacking:
In Manage Mode
Your selected images must have the same dimensions.
Choose Process | Focus Stack...
Press Ctrl + Alt + S.
Right-click your selection and choose Process | Focus Stack... from the context menu.
3. In the Save Image As dialog, choose a location, enter a name, and choose an image format from the
Save as type drop-down menu.
4. Press Save. Your stacked image will be placed in the location of your choosing.
In Edit Mode
1. In Manage mode, select the images in the File List pane.
Choose Process | Load Files into Stack.
Right-click your selection and choose Process | Load Files into Stack from the context menu. Your
images will open in the Layers pane in Edit mode.
3. In Edit mode, choose Layer | Focus Stack...
4. In the Focus Stack dialog, configure the settings as described below.
5. Press OK. If you have disabled Keep Layer Stack, all other layers will be removed and the focus stack
layer will be the only remaining layer in the Layers pane. If you have enabled Keep Layer Stack, the
focus stack layer will appear as the top layer in the Layers pane.
Focus Stacking Options
Page 489 of 827

Merge All Layers: performs focus stacking using all layers in the Layers pane.
Selected Layers: performs focus stacking on the selected layers in the
Layers pane.
Auto-Align Layers Aligns the images in the stack. For best results, keep this option enabled.
Keep Layer Stack Disable this option to delete all other layers, keeping only the resulting
focus stack layer. If you have accidentally disabled this option and deleted
all other layers, press Ctrl + Z after the command has run.
The Focus Stack command will ignore all masks, text layers, and adjustment layers.
Running the Focus Stack command on large images will require a significant amount of
memory.
There is a 25 image limit when Focus Stacking.
Focus stacking cannot be performed on a single layer.
Creating an HDR Image

High-dynamic-range imaging (HDR) is a technique used in digital image processing to combine a series
of images with different exposures to produce one image with an optimal overall range. You can use
the HDR tool to create a new image with a greater dynamic range of luminosity. Ideally, the images
you use with the HDR tool will include a well-balanced range of highlights and shadows. See below for
additional tips on achieving the best results.
To create an HDR image, your set of images must have the following attributes defined in their EXIF
data:
an f-stop/number
an ISO value
a shutter speed/exposure value
Shooting Photos for HDR

You will have a higher chance of generating quality results if you follow these instructions when
shooting your images for HDR:
Page 490 of 827

Use the shutter speed to vary exposures. That said, varying the aperture setting changes the depth of
field, leading to poor quality results. Similarly, varying the ISO or aperture may generate noise or
vignettes. Set your ISO to its lowest value.
Generally, do not use your camera's auto-bracket feature as the exposure changes are not significant
enough.
Ensure that the scene you are shooting does not include features in motion. HDR is meant for photos of
the same scene with exposure variances.
Keep the camera stable using a tripod.
Use your camera's timer to avoid camera shake.
Keep the focus and zoom constant between images.
Shoot in RAW rather than JPEG. This will provide for greater range and flexibility.
Ensure there is detail in the deep shadows of your darkest exposure.
Ensure no area of the image is blown out in your lightest exposure.
Ensure the set of images is "balanced" (i.e. the middle image of the set has well-exposed midtones).
Using a quantity of photos higher than suggested in the table below can result in unwanted artifacts due
to improper alignment and ghosting.
Camera Bracket Settings Optimum Number of Exposures for Creating HDR Images
-1.0 to +1.0 3
-2.0 to +2.0 5
-3.0 to +3.0 7
To Create an HDR Image:
In Manage Mode
Your selected images must have the same dimensions.
Choose Process | HDR...
Press Ctrl + Alt + H.
Right-click your selection and choose Process | HDR... from the context menu.
3. In the HDR dialog, select a preset from the Presets drop-down menu, then press OK.
Page 491 of 827

To create your own presets, create actions in the Actions Browser under the category
"HDR Presets". These will become available in the Presets drop-down menu in the HDR
dialog.
4. In the Save Image As dialog, choose a location, enter a name, and choose an image format from the
Save as type drop-down menu.
5. Press Save. Your HDR image will be placed in the location of your choosing.
In Edit Mode
Choose Process | Load Files into Stack.
Right-click your selection and choose Process | Load Files into Stack from the context menu. Your
images will open in the Layers pane in Edit mode.
3. In Edit mode, choose Layer | HDR... or press Ctrl + Shift + D.
4. In the HDR dialog, configure the settings as described below.
5. Press OK. If you have disabled Keep Layer Stack, all other layers will be removed and the HDR layer will
be the only remaining layer in the Layers pane. If you have enabled Keep Layer Stack, the HDR layer will
appear as the top layer in the Layers pane.
HDR Options
Merge All Layers: merges all layers in the Layers pane.
Selected Layers: merges the selected layers in the Layers pane. If only one layer is selected,
ACDSee will perform the command on that one layer, which will not generate any results.
Auto- Aligns the images in the stack. For best results, keep this option enabled.
Align
Layers
Keep Disable this option to delete all other layers, keeping only the resulting HDR layer.
Layer
Stack If you have accidentally disabled this option and deleted all other layers, press Ctrl
+ Z after the command has run.
The HDR command will ignore all masks, text layers, and adjustment layers.
Running HDR on large images will require a significant amount of memory.
Page 492 of 827

Using Auto-Align
You can use Auto-Align to align layers for the purpose of creating composites. By stacking, aligning,
and masking sets of nearly-identical images in the Layers pane, you can omit unwanted areas while
exposing select areas to create one optimal version of the image.
After aligning, you can use layer masks to create an ideal composite.
To Align Multiple Layers:

1. Shift-click or Ctrl-click to select multiple images in the Layers pane.
2. Choose Layer | Auto-Align Layers.
The Auto-Align command will only align vertically. Therefore, attempting to align panoramas
or dissimilarly-sized images will yield undefined results.
Running the Auto-Align command on large images will require a significant amount of
memory.
Using Auto-Blend
You can use Auto-Blend to merge stacks of images in two different ways:
Focus Stack: you can blend using focus stacking. This will merge images with different focal distances
to create a new image with a greater depth of field.
HDR: you can blend using HDR. This will merge images with different exposures to create a new image
with an optimal dynamic range.
Focus Stacking and HDR will ignore all masks, text layers, and adjustment layers.
Running HDR or Focus Stacking on large images will require a significant amount of memory.
To Auto-Blend Using Focus Stacking:

Choose Process | Load Files into Stack. Your images will open in the Layers pane in Edit mode.
Right-click your selection and choose Process | Load Files into Stack. Your images will open in the
Layers pane in Edit mode.
3. In Edit mode, in the Layers pane, Ctrl + click to select specific layers or Shift + click to select a range of
layers.
Page 493 of 827

4. Choose Layer | Auto-Blend Layers...
5. In the Auto-Blend dialog, select Focus Blend.
6. Press OK.
7. A warning dialog will pop up. If you have selected your images according to the order of their focal
distance, press Proceed. If your image selection is not in order, press Cancel and change your order of
selection, whether by culling, renaming, or ctrl-clicking. The focus blended layer will appear as the top
layer in the Layers pane.
To Auto-Blend Using HDR:

Choose Process | Load Files into Stack.Your images will open in the Layers pane in Edit mode.
Right-click your selection and choose Process | Load Files into Stack. Your images will open in the
Layers pane in Edit mode.
3. In Edit mode, in the Layers pane, Ctrl + click to select specific layers or Shift + click to select a range of
layers.
4. Choose Layer | Auto-Blend Layers...
5. In the Auto-Blend dialog, choose HDR Blend.
6. Press OK. The HDR blended layer will appear as the top layer in the Layers pane.
Reducing Red Eye

You can use the Red Eye Reduction tool in Edit mode to correct red eye in digital photographs.
To Correct Red Eye:

1. In Edit mode, in the Repair group, select Red Eye Reduction.
You can also access the Red Eye Reduction tool from the Filter drop-down menu or Filter
toolbar.
2. Use the Zoom tools in the bottom right corner to enlarge and center the eye you want to correct.
3. Click within the red portion of the eye.
4. In the Red Eye Reduction group, adjust the sliders as described below.
Red Eye Reduction Options
Page 494 of 827

Drag the slider to the right to increase the size of the area being darkened, or to the
Size
left to decrease.
Darkening Drag the slider to the right to intensify the fill color, or to the left to lighten.
Click Reset to clear your changes and reset to default settings. If you saved your changes, you
cannot reset your settings. If you want to discard only the Edit settings, select File | Restore
to Developed.
Scroll with your mouse to adjust the size of the area you would like to darken at anytime.
You can show or hide the outline of the darkened area by checking or unchecking the Show
Outline checkbox.
Press Delete to remove the currently selected red eye adjustment.
Removing Flaws
You can use the Repair Tool to remove flaws, such as:
Skin blemishes
Telephone wires and other unwanted objects
Flash flares from snowflakes or windows
Lens scratches and water drops
There are four options available for the Repair Tool: Smart Erase, the Healing Brush, Blended Cloning,
and the Cloning Brush.
Heal: when you select the Healing Brush, the Repair Tool copies pixels from one area of a photo to
another, but it analyzes the pixels in the source area before copying them. It also analyzes the
pixels in the target area, and then blends the pixels of both source and target, to match the
surrounding area. This ensures that the lighting and color of the replacement pixels integrate with
the surrounding area. The Healing Brush works particularly well with photos that involve
complicated textures, like skin or fur.
Clone: when you select the Cloning Brush, the Repair Tool copies the exact pixels from one area of a
photo to another, creating an identical image area. The Cloning Brush is more effective for photos
that have strong, simple textures or uniform colors, as it is more difficult to identify the copied
pixels in the finished photo.
Page 495 of 827

Blended Clone: when you select the Blended Clone tool, the Repair Tool copies the exact pixels
from one area of a photo to another, but it analyzes the pixels in the target area and blends them
with the copied pixels.
Smart Erase: for information on Smart Erase, see the Smart Erase section below.
To Remove Flaws from a Photo:

1. In Edit mode, in the Repair group, select Repair Tool.
You can also access the Repair Tool from the Filter drop-down menu or Filter toolbar.
Heal: copies the pixels from the source area to the target area, and blends pixels into the
surrounding image area.
Clone: copies the pixels from the source area to the target area.
Blended Clone: copies the pixels from the source area to the target area, then analyzes the
pixels in the target area and blends them with the copied pixels.
Smart Erase: analyzes pixels and fills in the brushed area based on what the image would most
likely look like without the brushed object. See the "Smart Erase" on page 497 section below.
3. Drag the Nib Width and Feathering sliders as described in the table below.
4. Right-click the image to set a source location. Pixels will be copied from this location and used in the
target location.
5. Click and drag over the area that you want to cover. If you selected the healing brush, ACDSee Ultimate
analyzes and replaces the pixels when you release the mouse button. If you selected the blended clone
tool, ACDSee Ultimate analyzes, replaces, and blends the pixels when you release the mouse button.
Click Reset to reset the sliders. If you saved your changes, you cannot reset your settings. If
you want to discard only the Edit settings, select File | Restore to Developed.
Scroll with your mouse to adjust the brush sizeas you work, or press the Shift key while you
scroll to adjust feathering.
Repair Tool Options
Page 496 of 827

Nib Width Sets the width of the brush. The maximum brush width is
relative to the size of your image.
Feathering Sets the amount to feather on the edge of the brush to prevent
sharp transitions between the original and healed part of the
photo.
Feathering is set as a percentage of the nib width, not as a
specific number of pixels. This means that you do not have to
adjust the feathering when you reset the Nib Width, as it
automatically adjusts to a percentage of the new nib width. This
option is not available with the Blended Clone tool.
Pressure After setting a source point for the Clone tool, adjust the slider
to control the strength of the effect being applied.
Show preview in cursor Check this checkbox to display a preview of your selected
source point in the cursor.
Smart Erase
You can remove unwanted objects from your images by brushing them and using the Smart Erase
function. Smart Erase will analyze the image and predict how to best fill in the brushed area. This is
based on what the image would most likely look like without the brushed objects.
1. In Edit mode, in the Repair group, select Repair Tool.
2. Select Smart Erase.
3. Drag the Nib Width slider or adjust your mouse wheel to set the width of the brush.
4. Brush over the area you would like filled. When you release the mouse button, the fill will be applied.
Repeat until your desired look is achieved.
Adjusting Skin Tone

You can use the Skin Tune tool to even skin tone and smooth away blemishes and flaws.
To Correct Skin Tone:

1. In Edit mode, in the Repair group, select Skin Tune.
You can also access the Skin Tune tool from the Filter drop-down menu or Filter toolbar.
Page 497 of 827

2. On the Skin Tune panel, adjust the settings as described below.
Click Done to accept your changes and close the panel.
Click Cancel to discard your changes and close the panel.
Skin Tune Options

Smoothing Refines skin by suppressing texture detail.
Glow Increases the brightness of skin while subtly smoothing.
Radius Specifies the scale of the texture detail that is affected by the effect. A lower value
enhances small details, while a large value enhances larger details.
Correcting Chromatic Aberration

Chromatic aberration is a lens artifact that can result in fringes in high contrast areas of some photos.
The camera lens can cause different wavelengths of light to focus differently, which appears in photos
as colored fringing or colored lines on the borders of high contrast areas. Purple fringing can also occur
when there is a bright spot of light in front of the lens.
This zoomed-in image shows an example of blue/yellow fringing.
You can use the Chromatic Aberration tool in Edit mode to reduce the appearance of colored fringes.
This can be especially useful for photos with architectural details. For best results, it's recommended
that you use the Chromatic Aberration sliders first, and then the Defringe sliders.
Page 498 of 827

To Reduce Fringing in Your Image:

1. In Edit mode, in the Repair group, select Chromatic Aberration.
You can also access the Chromatic Aberration tool from the Filter drop-down menu or
Filter toolbar.
2. Adjust the sliders as described below.
Chromatic Aberration Options

Fix Red/Cyan Adjust the red and cyan channels to reduce red/cyan fringing.
Fix Blue/Yellow Adjust the blue and yellow channels to reduce blue/yellow fringing.
Defringe strength Adjust the amount of fringe color you want to remove from high
contrast edges. A setting of zero means that defringing is off.
Defringe radius Adjust the number of pixels surrounding an edge that will be
defringed.
Color Adjust the color to remove from high contrast edges.
You can use the Edit Brush to paint this effect onto specific areas of your image.
You can use the Gradient tool to transition this effect across specific areas of your
image.
You can use the Radial Gradient tool to apply effects around, or directly to, a center
point.
About Blend Modes

Blend modes are filters that change the appearance of the text added to your images. The following
table lists the blend modes available at the top of the Layers pane, and gives a brief explanation of
their effects.
Blend Modes
Page 499 of 827

Normal Applies the text to the underlying image with the specified color. Only opacity
affects this blend.
Screen Combines the text color with the inverse of the underlying photo color, resulting in
a color that is the same or lighter.
Multiply Combines the text color with the underlying photo to produce a darker color.
Multiplying any color with black produces black; multiplying any color with white
leaves the color unchanged.
Dodge Combines the text color with the underlying pixels in the photo to produce a
lighter color.
Burn Combines the text color with the underlying pixels in the photo to produce a
darker color.
Multiply or Screen blend mode based on the underlying image area's color values.
Difference Subtracts the text color from the color of the underlying photo. Any white in the
text produces a true negative of the color in the image, while black produces no
effect.
Darken Applies pixels in the text that are darker than the underlying image. Pixels in the
text that are lighter than the underlying image disappear (based on RGB values).
Lighten Applies pixels in the text that are lighter than the underlying image. Pixels in the
text that are darker than the underlying image disappear (based on RGB values).
underlying image area's color values.
Soft Light Adds soft highlights or shadows by darkening or lightening based on the underlying
image area's color values.
Hue Applies the hue value of colors in the text to the color of the underlying image
areas.
Saturation Applies the saturation value of colors in the text to the color of the underlying
image areas.
Color Applies the hue and saturation of the text to the image. This blend does not affect
the luminance of the underlying image.
Luminosity Applies the lightness value of colors in the text to the color of the underlying image
areas.
Dissolve Randomly replaces the pixels with the image (base) or text (blend) color,
depending on the opacity at any pixel location.
Page 500 of 827

Exclusion Like Difference, but with less contrast, Exclusion subtracts the text (blend) color
from the color of the underlying photo. Any white in the text produces a true
negative of the color in the image, while black produces no effect.
Vivid Light Combines the text (blend) color with the underlying pixels in the photo by
increasing or decreasing contrast to produce a lighter or darker color, as
determined by the blend color.
source are replaced. Pixels lighter than the light source remain the same. When
the light source is darker than 50% gray, the pixels lighter than the light source are
replaced. Pixels darker than the light source remain the same.
Linear Light Dodges or burns by lightening or darkening the brightness value, depending on the
text (blend) color.
Hard Mix Applies red, green, and blue channel values of the text (blend) color to the RGB
Subtract Subtracts the text color from the image (base) color in each channel.
Divide Divides the text color from the image (base) color.
Darker Color From the text color and the image (base) color, the lower channel values are
chosen.
Lighter Color From the text color and the image (base) color, the higher channel values are
chosen.
About Special Effect Filters

Available only in Edit mode, ACDSee Ultimate includes 60 special effect filters, such as Crosshatch,
Pencil Drawing, and Solarize to add unique effects to images.
To access the Special Effects filters:

l In the Filter Menu pane, select Add | Special Effect.

l From the main menu, select Filter | Add | Special Effect.
l Press Alt + S.
2. Select a special effect from the preview pane.
For more information about each effect, in the pane associated with the special effect, click the Help
icon to view an associated help file.
Page 501 of 827

Adding Drawings to Your Image

You can use the Drawing Tools in Edit mode to add lines and shapes, such as squares, circles, and
arrows to your image. You can also adjust the width, feathering, and blending of your brush, which is
useful for creating subtle and dramatic drawings.
To Draw on Your Image:
Page 502 of 827

1. In Edit mode, at the top of the panel, select from the following tools:
Hand
Use the Hand tool to exit out of any other drawing or selection tool. If you have
a scrollable image, the Hand tool also allows you to pan it.
Move
Use the Move tool to move image and text layers, and selections, as well as to
rotate and resize layers. You can also move and rotate objects, such as circles,
lines, etc, that you have created on their own respective layer. (See To Add a
Layer.) Select the Move tool, then click and drag the layer. If moving an object
on its own respective layer, select the layer, then click the object on the image
and drag it to your desired location.
You can use the Arrow keys to move layers pixel by pixel.
Use the Snap to buttons in the Context bar to snap the image, text, or object to
the left, right, top, bottom, center, and respective corners. You can also click
the Show Grid button in the Context bar to display a grid over your image. This
is useful when making precise placements.
To ensure that your layer's aspect ratio is maintained while resizing, check the
Lock Aspect Ratio checkbox in the Context bar and drag from the corners of
your layer. The Lock Aspect Ratio checkbox is checked by default.
To rotate images, text, or objects, hover your cursor over the rotation handle at
the center of the image, text, or object until your cursor becomes a circular
arrow. You can then drag your cursor clockwise or counterclockwise. You can
also lock your rotation to each 45° angle by holding down the Shift key while
rotating.
You can use the Move tool to move Guidelines. See Adding
Rulers and Guidelines.
To commit your move, press the Commit button in the Context bar. To discard
your move and revert back to your image's original position, press the Discard
button.
You can move a layer outside of the image area, commit it, then press the Move
tool button again and move it back into the image area without a loss of image
data. You can even retrieve your moved layer after saving your file as a .acdc,
closing it, and re-opening it at a later date. However, there are some
adjustments that will trigger the loss of image data if applied to the moved
layer. These adjustments are called destructive operations.
The following are destructive operations:
Page 503 of 827

Repair tool
Add Watermark (when added without checking the Add watermark as
new layer checkbox)
Add Border
Add Vignette
Add Tilt-Shift
Rotate
Crop
Perspective Correction
Lens Correction
Resize
Dodge and Burn
Detail Brush
Blur
Flip
The following Special Effects:
Bathroom Window Granite Scattered Tiles

Blinds Grunge Sheet Metal
Blue Steel Jiggle Shift
Bob Ross Lomo Slant
Bulge Mirror Solarize
Cartoon Oil Paint Somber
Childhood Old Stained Glass
Clouds Orton Sunspot
Collage Outline Swirl
Contours Pixel Explosion Topography
Crosshatch Pixelate Water
Dauber Purple Haze Water Drops
Dramatic Radial Waves Waves
Furry Edges Rain Weave
Gloom Ripple Wind
Adjustments applied using their Auto button (may have mixed results)
Selections
Drawing tools
Adding or modifying masks
Page 504 of 827

Recording a non-destructive operation and playing it back will

result in a destructive operation.
We recommend applying destructive operations to the layer you

want to move prior to moving it.
The following are non-destructive operations that will not trigger the loss of
image data if applied to the moved layer:
If you do not have enough space on your hard drive, even non-
destructive operations will become destructive.
Red Eye
Watermark (when added with the Add watermark as new layer checkbox
checked)
Exposure
Levels
Auto Levels
Tone Curves
Dehaze
White Balance
Black and White
Split Tone
Skin Tune
Sharpen
Noise
Clarity
Light EQ™
Adjustment Layers
Duplicate Layers
Blend Modes
Opacity
Brushing in compatible layers
Pixel Targeting
Selections in compatible layers
The following Special Effects:
Page 505 of 827

Convolution Edge Detect Sepia

Photo Effect Glowing Edges Seventies
Posterize Sobel Crayon Drawing
Threshold Gradient Map Emboss
Colored Edges Negative Pencil Drawing
Resize Canvas
You can use the Resize Canvas tool to expand the size of your canvas to fit
layered content or add solid backgrounds.
You can resize the canvas in the following ways:
Drag the edges of your photo to expand the canvas to your desired size.
Specify an exact size for the canvas using the fields in the Context bar.
From the drop-down menu, select your desired units.
Apply a ratio to constrain the canvas proportions. On the Context bar,
choose a ratio from the Aspect ratio not preserved drop-down menu. You
can define your own ratio using the Custom option. You can also delete
ratios by selecting them in the drop-down and pressing the Delete aspect
ratio button.
In the Context bar, you can:

Toggle the Show Grid button.
Select a color for your canvas.
Adjust transparency using the Opacity slider.
Resize your canvas as desired, then press the Commit button in the
Context bar.
When you resize the canvas on an image with multiple layers, the
resizing is performed on the selected layer.
You can use the Arrow keys to resize the canvas pixel by pixel.
Text
See Adding Text as Layers.
Rectangle
Drag over the image to create rectangle. Press Shift as you draw to create a
square. To fill your shape with color, ensure that the Fill checkbox is checked.
Page 506 of 827

Ellipse
Drag over the image to create an ellipse. Press Shift as you draw to create a
circle. To fill your shape with color, ensure that the Fill checkbox is checked.
Line
Drag over the image to draw a straight line. Press Shift as you draw to create a
vertical or horizontal line.
Arrow
Drag over the image to create an arrow. Press Shift as you draw to create a
vertical or horizontal arrow.
Polygon
Click to set the corner points of a polygon, then double-click to connect the
start and end points to complete the polygon. To fill your shape with color,
ensure that the Fill checkbox is checked.
Curve
Drag over the image then release. Next, move your mouse to create the curve
and click to set.
Brush
Drag over the image to draw a free-flowing line. Left-click with your mouse to
draw with the foreground color, and right-click to draw with the background
color.
Use the mouse wheel to adjust nib width or use the Nib Width
slider at the top of the panel, near the Opacity slider.
Use Shift + mouse wheel to adjust the amount of feathering or

adjust the Feathering slider at the top of the panel, near the
Opacity slider.
You can undo and redo each brush stroke individually using the
Undo and Redo buttons at the bottom of the Filter Menu.
Fill
Select the Fill button, and click on a pixel to shade every pixel of that same color
value with your selected color. Your selected color is defined in the color box,
Page 507 of 827

as described below. Use the Threshold slider to adjust the number of pixels to
be included or excluded. The Threshold slider sets how similar a pixel needs to
be to the one you clicked in order to be included in the selection. Check the
Connected checkbox in the Context Bar to fill all of the connected pixels of the
same color.
Gradient
Use the Gradient tool to draw gradients across your image, or use the radial
option to draw a gradient around an area. Select the Gradient tool, then
configure your color, opacity and blend mode using the Context bar. For a radial
gradient, select the Radial Gradient button in the Context bar. Then draw your
gradient by dragging across the image. To discard your gradient, press the
Discard button in the Context bar. Rearrange your gradient as desired, then
press the Commit button in the Context bar. You can undo your commit by
pressing Ctrl + Z, selecting Edit | Undo, or by using the History Window.
Eraser
Use the Eraser tool to erase pixels. To erase pixels on a layer to reveal the layer
beneath, select the second layer or higher in the Layered Editor and drag your
cursor over the pixels you would like to erase on the image. This tool modifies
the alpha channel value of the pixels.
Eye Dropper
Use the Eye Dropper tool to select colors from your images. Click a color in the
image, which will appear in the color boxes at the top right of the panel. You
can then apply this color using the drawing tools, such as the Brush tool.
You can select the background color (bottom of the color boxes) by right-
clicking on your image.
You can select a color from outside of the application by left-clicking on your
image and dragging your cursor to the color outside of the application. When
you release your mouse button, the color will be selected and shown in the
color boxes at the top right of the panel.
2. Select from one or more of the following options (Note: options vary depending on the tool
selected):
Page 508 of 827

Color
Select a color by clicking the color boxes at the top right of the panel to open the
Foreground or Background Color dialog, which displays a dialog of swatches to
choose from. If you are drawing a solid shape, such as a rectangle, the top
(foreground) color box defines the color for the outline of the shape. The
bottom (background) color box defines the color that fills the center of the
shape. If you want your shape to be a solid color, set both color boxes to match.
You can reset to black and white by pressing the reset button
directly next to the color boxes.
You can also access the color palette as you work by using the
Color pane at the top of the Layered Editor.
Nib Width
Drag the Nib Width slider to set the diameter of the brush measured in pixels.
You can also adjust the nib width with the mouse wheel or by right-clicking on
the image to reveal the Nib Width sliders.
Feathering
Select the Nib Width button to reveal the Feathering slider. Drag the Feathering
slider to set the blurring radius of the brush. You can also right-click on the image
to reveal the Nib Width and Feathering slider. Or, you can also hold down Shift
while using the mouse wheel to adjust the feather radius, represented by the
dotted circle.
Spacing
Drag the Spacing slider to set how far apart each brush segment will be. This
slider specifies the percentage of the size of the nib width, which determines
how smooth or choppy the strokes will appear.
Use Auto Spacing: check the Use Auto Spacing checkbox to allow ACDSee to
choose a spacing percentage based on the nib width and feathering settings,
which will create a smooth-looking stroke.
Page 509 of 827

Fill
Check the Fill checkbox to fill the shapes you draw with the selected color.
Opacity
Drag the Opacity slider to specify the transparency of the brush strokes.
Blending
Select an option from the Blending drop-down menu to affect how your brush
strokes blend with your image as you draw.
3. Drag over the image to draw.
Adding a Watermark to an Image

You can use the Watermark tool to add a watermark to a photo. You can move the watermark to any
position on the photo. You can also change the opacity of the watermark and blend the watermark
into the image. You can add new watermarks and delete watermarks from the list that you no longer
use.
You will need to create a watermark image before you can add the watermark to your photos.
To Add a Watermark to an Image:

1. In Edit mode, in the Add group, select Watermark. A default watermark displays in the bottom right of
the photo by default.
You can also access the Watermark tool from the Filter drop-down menu or Filter toolbar.
2. Choose a watermark from the drop-down list, or add a new watermark by using the + button.
3. Click and drag the watermark to reposition it anywhere on your image, or choose an Anchor Point from
the Positioning settings. Ruler guidelines will appear as you move the watermark around the image to
show you pixel distances from the edge. You can also change this pixel distance in the Positioning
setting.
4. Drag the marquee handles to resize the watermark image.
5. Select Maintain aspect ratio when resizing if you want to resize the watermark image without
distorting it.
Page 510 of 827

6. Select Apply Alpha Channel to apply the alpha channel if it is present in the watermark.
(Only TIFF, PNG, and ICO watermark files can have an alpha channel.)
7. Select Apply Transparency to make a color in the watermark transparent.
The default color is black. You can choose a different color by clicking on the color box. In the
Standard tab, you can choose a color, or select a color using the color picker. In the Custom
tab, you can enter HSB values (Hue, Saturation, and Brighness), Red Green Blue values, or a
hex color code. The color selected will be made transparent in the watermark image itself.
8. Select an option from the Blending Mode drop-down list to specify how you want the watermark to
blend into the underlying image.
9. Drag the Opacity slider to specify the transparency of the watermark.
10. Check the Add watermark as a new layer checkbox if you would like your watermark to appear as a
new layer in the Layered Editor.
Click Apply to add the watermark to your image, and keep the Watermark tool open.
Click Done to add the watermark to your image, and leave the tool.
Click Cancel to discard your changes and leave the tool.
to Developed.
To Remove a Watermark From the List:

1. Choose the watermark in the drop-down list.
2. Press the minus symbol -.
3. Your watermark is removed.
Adding Borders
You can use the Borders tool to add one or more borders and edge effects to your images. You can set
the size of each side of the border, change the color and texture of the border or pick up a color from
within the image by clicking on that color in the image.
There are libraries of edges and textures to get you started, but you can save your own textures or
edges to the ACDSee folder so that they appear in the library for you to use.
Page 511 of 827

You can also use Edge blur to soften the edges or blend the image into the background texture. You
can also add a third dimension to your images using the Drop Shadow and Raised edge effects.
Using combinations of multiple borders and edge effects can add to the mood and atmosphere of a
photo, emphasize contrast, and enhance color.
To Add a Border to an Image:

1. In Edit mode, in the Add group, select Borders.
You can also access the Borders tool from the Filter drop-down menu or Filter toolbar.
2. Create the border by selecting its size, color, texture, edge, or edge effects as described in the Borders
options below.
Click Done to apply your changes and close the Border tool.
4. To add another border, restart the border tool and repeat these steps.
to Developed.
Border Options
Page 512 of 827

Eyedropper
Picks up the color beneath the cursor when you click on

the image. The border changes to the clicked color, which
also appears in the Color box on the Borders pane so that
you can adjust it if you open the Color dialog box.
The eyedropper is not available when you are

using a texture.
Border
Size Sets the size of all the sides of the

border simultaneously. Drag the
slider left and right to adjust the
width of the border. You can also
type in a different number or use
the up and down arrows to change
the size of the border.
The text below the Size field shows
the final size of your image with
the border added. The final size
changes dynamically as you adjust
the size of the border.
Advanced size Opens a fly-out menu of advanced

controls size controls. Use the sliders, up
and down arrow keys, or type in a
number to set the size of each side
of the border individually. For
example, you can set the bottom
border to be larger to include a
space for copyright information.
Click on the arrow beside the Size
slider to open the advanced size
controls menu.
Color box Activates when you select the

Color radio button.
Do any of the following:
Click on a color in the

image to make the border
that color. The clicked
color appears in the Color
Page 513 of 827

box.
Click on the color in the

middle of the Color box to
open the Colors dialog,
where you can adjust the
color in multiple ways.
Click the down-arrow

beside the box and hover
over the quick-color box
until you find a color you
like. When you click inside
the quick color box, the
picked color appears in the
Color box and the border
changes to the selected
color.
Texture box Activates when you select the

Texture radio button.
Click the side arrow to

open the texture library
and view thumbnails of
textures to select.
Click the forward and back

arrows to browse through
the textures one at a time,
without opening the
library.
Edge
Straight Sets the edge of the border to be a

straight line.
Irregular Activates when you select the

Irregular radio button.
Click the side arrow beside

the edge box to open the
edge library and view
thumbnails of edges to
Page 514 of 827

select.
Click the forward and back

arrows to browse through
the edges one at a time,
without opening the
library.
Edge blur Blurs the edges of the edge of the

image into the border. Drag the
slider to the right to increase the
blur, or to the left to decrease the
blur.
Edge effects
Drop shadow Adds a drop shadow to the image

that appears to lift it off the page.
The drop shadow appears behind
the image, between it and the
border. You can adjust the depth
of the blur on the edge of the
shadow, and the transparency of
the shadow, which affects how
much of the border shows through
the shadow. You can also change
the direction of the imaginary
source of light by dragging the
glow on the Light Source ball.
Blur: adjusts the blur on

the edge of the shadow
when you drag the slider.
Opacity: adjusts the

transparency of the drop
shadow when you drag the
slider.
Raised Adds a raised edge to the image

that appears to raise it above the
border, giving it a 3D look. The
raised effect is applied to the
image, between it and the border.
You can change the direction of
the imaginary source of light of the
raised edge by dragging the glow
Page 515 of 827

on the Light Source ball. You can

also adjust the size, strength, and
color of the raised edge in the
following ways:
Size: drag the slider to the

right to increase the size of
the raised edge so that it
appears higher. The
greater the size the more
rounded the effect.
Strength: drag the slider to

the right to increase the 3D
effect of the raised edge.
Colored: select this option

to apply the border color
to the raised edge.
Light Source
Activates when you check either the Drop shadow or

Raised checkboxes. Click and drag the glow on the ball to
reposition the imaginary light source for the 3D effect of
the Drop shadow or Raised edge effects.
Adding Your Own Textures or Edges

It is possible to add custom textures and edges to the libraries in the Borders tool. If you make your
own edges or textures, or own a collection from the Internet, you can add them to the texture and
edge libraries. You can also delete existing files from the libraries to make room for others.
The textures or edges have to be in the following file formats with these extensions:
BMP
EMF
GIF
JPG
GIF
Page 516 of 827

PNG
TIF
Textures
As the textures are tiled, it is important to use an image that can be seamlessly repeated. The files are
used at their full resolution, not scaled up or down. For example, if your texture image is 100 x 100
pixels and you are creating a bordered image that is 1000 x 1000 pixels, then your texture file will be
tiled 10 times. If you use a texture file that is 1000 x 1000 pixels, then there would just be the one
texture tile for the whole border.
To Add Your Own Textures to the Texture Library:

1. In ACDSee, close the Borders tool if it is open.
2. Copy and paste your texture files into this folder:
C:\Program Files\Common Files\ACD Systems\borders\textures

3. In Manage mode, select the image you want to use and then click Tools | Process | Edit.
4. In the Add group, click Borders.
5. Select the Texture radio button and then click the arrow on the right side of the texture box to open the
texture library.
Thumbnails of the textures display for you to select.
Edges
Edge files are grayscale images that are resized to fit the image. The image file shows through any areas
in the edge file that are white, and does not show through any black areas. Pixels that are tones of
gray in the edge file show through with relative opacity depending on how close the pixels are to black
or white (in other words, the darker the gray pixel, the less it shows through).
To Add Your Own Edges to the Edges Library:

1. In ACDSee, close the Borders tool if it is open.
2. Copy and paste your edge files into this folder:
C:\Program Files\Common Files\ACD Systems\borders\edges

3. In Manage mode, select the image you want to use and then click Tools | Process | Edit.
4. In the Add group, click Borders.
5. Select the Irregular radio button and then click the arrow on the right side of the edge box to open the
edge library.
Thumbnails of the edges display for you to select.
Page 517 of 827

If you open an image with borders already applied, another border will be applied to the
image.
Adding a Vignette
You can use the Vignette effect to add a frame around a subject, such as a person or a bouquet of
flowers. You can change the focal point in the portrait. You can also control the appearance of the
border.
To Apply a Vignette Effect:

1. In Edit mode, in the Add group, select Vignette.
You can also access the Vignette tool from the Filter drop-down menu or Filter toolbar.
Click Done to apply your changes and close the tab.
Click Cancel to discard all changes and close the tab.
to Developed.
Vignette Options
Page 518 of 827

Horizontal Specifies the focal point of the portrait on the horizontal axis. A value of 500
Vertical Specifies the focal point of the portrait on the vertical axis. A value of 500
Clear zone Specifies the size of the clear area around the focal point in the portrait. Drag
the slider to the left to reduce the size of the clear area. Drag the slider to
the right to increase the size of the clear area.
Transition zone Specifies the width of the transition area between the clear zone and the
frame. Drag the slider to the left to narrow the transition area. Drag the
slider to the right to widen the transition area.
Stretch Stretches the vignette horizontally to make the shape elliptical rather than
round.
Shape Specifies the shape of the frame:
Round: select Round if you want the frame to be round.
Rectangular: select Rectangular if you want the frame to be square.
Show outline Select Show outline if you want to display an outline that shows the outside
edge of the clear zone and the inside edge of the frame.
Frame Applies the following special effects to the vignette frame area around the
focal point:
Color: changes the color of the frame area to the color you select in
the color picker.
Saturation: removes color from the people or objects in the vignette

frame so they are gray scale.
Blur: blurs the vignette frame area.
Clouds: applies a Clouds effect to the frame area.
Edges: applies an Edges effect by tracing the lines and details of

people or objects with neon colors.
Radial Waves: creates the appearance of waves radiating from the

focal point into the frame area.
Radial Blur: creates a Radial Blur that rotates and stretches the frame
area.
Zoom Blur: applies a Zoom Blur to the frame area.
Crayon Edges: applies the Crayon Edges effect by tracing the lines
Page 519 of 827

and details around people or objects with crayon.
Dauber: creates the impression that the people or objects around

the focal point were painted with a brush.
Pixelate: applies a pixel effect to the frame.
Old: applies an aging effect to the frame to make it look like an old
photo.
Glowing Edges: applies glowing edges to all the strong lines in the
frame area.
Ripple: adds ripples to the frame so that it looks like liquid ripples
moving outwards from the focal area.
Frame settings The settings that display below the Frame drop-down list change depending
on the frame you select. For example, if you select Color in the Frame drop-
down list, a color picker displays so that you can select the color for the
vignette. Similarly, if you select Blur in the Frame drop-down list, a slider
appears that you can use to change the amount of blur surrounding the
photo. For some choices, like Edges, there are no settings to apply.
Adding a Tilt-Shift Effect

You can use the Tilt-Shift effect to create emphasis on specific subjects in your photos, or make your
photos look like miniature landscapes.
To Use the Tilt-Shift Effect:

1. In Edit mode, in the Add group, select Tilt-Shift.
You can also access the Tilt-Shift tool from the Filter drop-down menu or Filter toolbar.
2. On the Tilt-Shift panel, set the options as described below.
Tilt-Shift Options
Page 520 of 827

Use the guides on the image to place the effect. The inside boxes represent the points where the focus is
transitioning to blur. Complete blur occurs at the outside boxes. Move the boxes to define where the effect
will begin or end. Hold down the Shift key while positioning the effect to lock to the nearest 45° angle, for
straightness.
Blurring
Select the type of blur you want from the Blur drop-down menu.
Lens Blur
Gaussian Blur
See Blur Types for more information.
Amount Specifies the amount of blur applied.
Bokeh Frequency Specifies how often the bokeh shapes occur.
Bokeh Brightness Specifies how bright the bokeh shapes appear.
Bokeh Sides Defines the number of sides the bokeh shape will have.
Saturation
Drag the slider to the right to intensify the effect.
image.
point.
Adding a Grain Effect

You can use the Grain effect to give your images a stylized look, like old film grain. The Grain tool can
also be used in combination with other effects to achieve a general vintage look.
To Apply a Grain Effect:
Page 521 of 827

1. In Edit mode, in the Add group, select Grain.
You can also access the Grain tool from the Filter drop-down menu or Filter toolbar.
Click Done to apply your changes and close the tab.
Click Cancel to discard all changes and close the tab.
Grain Options
Amount Specifies the strength of the grain.
Smoothing Specifies the smoothness of the grain.
Size Specifies the size of the grain.
image.
point.
About Special Effect Filters

You can use filters to add unique effects to your images. ACDSee Ultimate includes more than 40
special effect filters, such as Crosshatch, Pencil Drawing, and Solarize.
To Access the Special Effects Filters:

In Edit mode, in the Add group, select Special Effect.
You can also access the Special Effects menu from the Filter drop-down menu or Filter toolbar.
For more information about each effect, click the Help button to view a Help file page specific to that
effect.
Page 522 of 827

Applying a Bathroom Window Effect

The Bathroom Window effect divides your images into bars, transforming them so they resemble the
view through privacy glass often found in bathrooms. You can select or change the Bathroom Window
options to apply this effect to your image.
To Apply a Bathroom Window Effect:

1. In Edit mode, in the Add group, select Special Effect.
You can also access the Special Effects menu from the Filter drop-down menu or Filter
toolbar.
2. Click Bathroom Window.
3. Drag the Bar width slider to set the thickness of the bars. Thinner bars result in a more distorted image.
4. In the Bar direction area, select one of the following to specify the orientation of the bars in your image:
Vertical
Horizontal
image.
point.
Page 523 of 827

Applying a Blinds Effect

Use the Blinds effect to divide your image into bars that look like venetian or vertical window blinds.
You can customize the characteristics of the blinds you would like added to your image.
To Apply a Blinds Effect:

toolbar.
2. Click Blinds.
3. On the Blinds panel, set the options as described below.
Blinds Options
Width Specifies the width of the blinds. Type a number from 1 to 1000 or drag the slider
to adjust the width of each blind. As the value increases, the width of the blind also
increases.
Opacity Specifies the opacity of the blinds. Type a number from 1 to 99 or drag the slider
to adjust the opacity of the blinds. The higher the opacity, the more the image is
obscured.
Angle Specifies the angle of the blinds. Type a number from 1 to 360 or drag the arrow
to adjust the angle.
Blind color Specifies the color of the blinds.
image.
Page 524 of 827

point.
Applying a Blue Steel Effect

You can use the Blue Steel effect to give your images a stylish blue tint.
To Apply the Blue Steel Effect:

toolbar.
2. Click Blue Steel.
image.
point.
Applying a Bob Ross Effect

You can use the Bob Ross effect to give your images a painted look.
To Give Your Photos a Bob Ross Effect:
Page 525 of 827

toolbar.
2. Click Bob Ross.
3. On the Bob Ross panel, set the options as described in the table below.
Bob Ross Options

Brush size Drag the Brush size slider to specify the width of the brush strokes in the
effect. The higher value, the wider the brush stroke.
Coverage Drag the Coverage slider to specify the amount or density of paint on the
"canvas" of your photo.
Paint thickness Drag the Paint thickness slider to specify how three dimensional the paint
appears.
Colorfulness Drag the Colorfulness slider to specify the amount of color in your image.
Background color
Image Check the Image checkbox to use the color in the image as the
background color behind the brush strokes added to the photo. To use a
different color for the background, uncheck the Image checkbox and
select a new color from the color drop-down menu.
Randomize Indicates the random placement of the paint daubs. When you apply the
Bob Ross effect to an image, ACDSee places the daubs randomly. This
makes the paint daubs different every time you apply the filter. To
generate a new random placement of the paint daubs, click Randomize.
image.
Page 526 of 827

point.
Applying a Bulge Effect

Use the Bulge effect to stretch or shrink areas of your images horizontally and vertically. You can
customize the strength, radius and position of the distortion.
To Apply a Bulge Effect:

toolbar.
2. Click Bulge.
3. On the Bulge panel, set the options as described below.
Bulge and Shrink Options
Page 527 of 827

Horizontal position Specifies the center of the distortion along the horizontal axis. A lower value
moves the distortion towards the left side of the image, while a higher value
moves it towards the right side of the image.
Vertical position Specifies the center of the distortion along the vertical axis. A lower value moves
the distortion towards the bottom of the image, while a higher value moves it
towards the top of the image.
Radius Specifies the radius of the distorted area. A lower value decreases the radius of
the distortion, while a higher value increases the radius of the distortion.
Strength Specifies the strength of the distortion. A negative value shrinks the center of the
distortion, while a higher value bulges the distortion.
Background color Specifies the background color for the filtered image.
Check the Image checkbox to use the original image color, or click the color picker
to select a different color.
Bulge direction Specifies the direction of the distortion. Select one or both of the following
options:
Horizontal: moves the distortion horizontally.
Vertical: moves the distortion vertically.
image.
point.
Applying a Cartoon Effect

You can use the Cartoon Effect to give your images a sketched appearance.
To Apply a Cartoon Effect:
Page 528 of 827

toolbar.
2. Click Cartoon.
3. On the Cartoon panel, set the options as described below.
Cartoon Options
Shading strength Specifies the strength of the shading in the image. The higher the
setting, the more intense the shading that is applied to the image.
Shading radius Specifies how spread out the shading is.
Shading threshold Specifies how sharp an edge must be in the image before shading is
applied. If you specify a higher value, more edges in the photo will
be shaded.
Smoothness Controls how smooth the transitions between similar colors are.
Outline detail Specifies how much the details are outlined in black.
Outline strength Specifies how strong the black outlines are applied.
Artifact Suppression Remove small details Prevents small

details from
being outlined
in black,
allowing the
image to
appear more
cartoon-like.
image.
Page 529 of 827

point.
Applying a Childhood Effect

You can use the Childhood effect to give your images a dreamy, nostalgic look.
To Apply the Childhood Effect:

toolbar.
2. Click Childhood.
image.
point.
Applying a Clouds Effect

You can use the Clouds effect to make graphical content out of your images, such as backgrounds and
more.
To Apply Clouds to a Photo:
Page 530 of 827

toolbar.
2. Click Clouds.
3. On the Clouds panel, set the options as described below.
Clouds Options
Size Specifies the size of the clouds. Drag the slider to the right to increase the size.
Detail Specifies how fine the detail is. Type a number from 0 to 10 or drag the slider to
adjust the details of the clouds.
Randomize Indicates the random placement of the clouds.

When you apply the Clouds effect to an image, ACDSee Ultimate places the
fragments randomly. This makes the effect different every time you apply the
filter. You can define a specific random pattern to generate identical fragment
patterns.
To generate a new random pattern, click Randomize.
image.
point.
Applying a Collage Effect

You can use the Collage effect to creatively break up a photo into a number of photos.
Page 531 of 827

To Use the Collage Effect:

toolbar.
2. Click Collage.
3. Drag the sliders to set the Number and Size of the photos.
4. Select a background color by clicking the drop-down arrow to display gradients of colors, or click the
color box to display a dialog of swatches to choose from.
5. If you would like to reshuffle the photos, click Randomize.
7. Click Exit to leave Special Effects, and return to the Filter menu.
image.
point.
Applying a Colored Edges Effect

You can use the Colored Edges effect to trace the lines and details of people or objects in your images.
To Apply a Colored Edges Effect:
Page 532 of 827

toolbar.
2. Click Colored Edges.
3. On the Colored Edges panel, set the options as described below.
Colored Edges Options

Intensity Specifies the amount of color added to the edges within the image. The
higher the setting, the thicker the color that is applied to the image.
Edge color Specifies the color of the edges.
Edge detection Specifies the edge detection algorithm. The algorithm controls the formula
used to detect the edges and the direction of the edge indicators.
Blurring Blurs the edges in the image. Check the Use blurring checkbox, and then
choose a blur setting to determine how much blur is applied.
image.
point.
Applying a Contours Effect

You can use the Contours effect to draw contour lines on your image to create a cartoon effect. Select
or change the rounding, line frequency, color and strength setting to apply to your image.
Page 533 of 827

To Apply a Contours Effect:

toolbar.
2. Click Contours.
3. On the Contours panel, set the options as described below.
Contours Options
Rounding Specifies the amount of curve in the contour lines. The higher the value,
the rounder the lines.
Line frequency Specifies the amount of space between the contour lines. The higher the
value, the closer the lines move together.
Strength Specifies the strength of the line. The higher the value, the darker the line.
Line color Specifies the color of the contour lines.
image.
point.
Applying a Crayon Drawing Effect

You can use the Crayon Drawing effect to give your photos the appearance of a crayon drawing.
To Use the Crayon Drawing Effect:
Page 534 of 827

toolbar.
2. Click Crayon Drawing.
image.
point.
Applying a Crosshatch Effect

You can use the Crosshatch effect to add crosshatching to an image.
To Use the Crosshatch Effect:

toolbar.
2. Click Crosshatch.
image.
Page 535 of 827

point.
Applying a Dauber Effect

You can use the Dauber effect to make your images look like they were painted with a paint dauber.
Select or change the settings of the effect you want applied to your image, such as intensity, frequency
and more.
To Use the Dauber Effect:

toolbar.
2. Click Dauber.
3. On the Dauber panel, set the options as described below.
Dauber Options
Intensity Specifies the amount of color applied with each daub.
Frequency Specifies the number of daubs added to the image.
Background color Specifies the background color of the filtered image.

Check the Image checkbox to use the original image colors or click the
color picker to select a different color.
Randomize Indicates the random placement of the paint daubs.

When you apply the Dauber effect to an image, ACDSee Ultimate
places the daubs randomly. This makes the paint daubs different every
time you apply the filter. You can define a specific random seed to
generate identical daubs.
To generate a new random seed, click Randomize.
Page 536 of 827

image.
point.
Applying a Dramatic Effect

You can use the Dramatic effect to make your images look dramatic and moody by drastically changing
the contrast in specific areas.
To Apply a Dramatic Effect:

toolbar.
2. Click Dramatic.
3. On the Dramatic panel, set the options as described below.
Dramatic Options
Strength Specifies the strength of the contrast being applied.
Spread Specifies how far the effect spreads over the details in the photo.
image.
Page 537 of 827

point.
Applying an Edge Detect Effect

You can use the Edge Detect effect to create a highlighted outline of your image. After creating a black
image, the effect uses colored lines to outline the detail of an image where significant color differences
exist. Greater differences between colors in the original image produce brighter outline colors. (The
Sobel effect is similar to the Edge Detect effect, but produces sharper and brighter outlines.)
To Use the Edge Detect Effect:

toolbar.
2. Click Edge Detect.
image.
point.
Applying an Emboss Effect

You can use the Emboss effect to add a grayscale relief to an image.
To Emboss an Image:
Page 538 of 827

toolbar.
2. Click Emboss.
3. On the Emboss panel, set the options as described below.
Emboss Options
Elevation Specifies the light source's elevation on the image. Lower values produce more
shadows and a darker image. Higher values produce fewer shadows and a lighter
image.
Weight Specifies the amount of relief added to the image. Higher values increase the relief
depth.
Azimuth Specifies the angle of shadows that extend from the edges of image details. A
value of 0 adds shadows to the left side, while a value of 180 adds shadows to the
right side.
image.
point.
Applying a Furry Edges Effect

You can use the Furry Edges effect to add fur and bristles to the lines and details of people or objects
in your image.
Page 539 of 827

To Use the Furry Edges Effect:

toolbar.
2. Click Furry Edges.
3. On the Furry Edges panel, set the options as described below.
Furry Edges Options
Page 540 of 827

Frequency Specifies how much fur is added to the image. The higher the setting, the
more dense the fur that is applied to the image.
Threshold Specifies how sharp an edge must be before fur is applied to it. As the
value decreases, the area of the image that fur is added to increases.
Fur length Specifies the length of each strand of fur. As the value increases, the
length of each fur strand also increases.
Variance Specifies how much of the fur grows in the direction indicated by the
Hair direction setting. The higher the value, the more random the fur
direction will be.
Hair direction Specifies the general direction in which fur appears to grow.
Edge detection Specifies the edge detection algorithm. The algorithm controls the
formula used to detect the edges and the direction of the edge
indicators.
Background color Specifies the background color of the filtered image. Check the Image
checkbox to use the original image colors, or click the color picker to
select a different color.
Fur color Specifies the color of the fur. Check the Image checkbox to use the
original image colors, or click the color picker to select a different color.
Randomize Indicates the random placement of the fur strands.

When you apply the Furry Edges effect to an image, ACDSee Ultimate
places the fur randomly. This makes the fur strands different every time
you apply the filter. You can define a specific random seed to generate
identical fur patterns.
image.
point.
Page 541 of 827

Applying a Gloom Effect

You can use the Gloom effect to give your images a dark, gloomy appearance.
To Apply a Gloom Effect:

toolbar.
2. Click Gloom.
3. On the Gloom panel, drag the Color slider to add a color tint to the image.
image.
point.
Applying a Glowing Edges Effect

You can use the Glowing Edges effect to add color to the lines and details of people or objects in your
images. The colored lines and details appear to glow.
To Apply a Glowing Edges Effect:
Page 542 of 827

toolbar.
2. Click Glowing Edges.
3. On the Glowing Edges panel, set the options as described below.
Glowing Edges Options

Intensity Specifies the amount of color added to the edges within the image. The higher the
setting, the more intense the color that is applied to the image.
Color Specifies the color of the edges.
image.
point.
Applying a Gradient Map Effect

You can use the Gradient Map effect to add colors to the dark and light parts of your images. The
Gradient Map effect maps shadows to one color, and highlights to another based on the lightness
value of each pixel. You can give the darker parts of your image a completely different color from the
lighter parts.
To Apply a Gradient Map Effect:
Page 543 of 827

toolbar.
2. Click Gradient Map.
3. On the Gradient Map panel, set the options as described below.
Gradient Map Options

Dark Specify the color to be added to the dark parts of your image.
Light Specifies the color to be added to the light parts of your image.
image.
point.
Applying a Granite Effect

You can use the Granite effect to give your images the appearance of being painted on a rock wall.
To Use the Granite Effect:

toolbar.
2. Click Granite.
Page 544 of 827

3. On the Granite panel, set the options as described below.
Granite Options
Light Angle Specifies the direction from which an imaginary light source is shining on the
image. Drag the arrow to adjust the angle. Different light angles will change the
highlights and shadows in the peaks and valleys on the rock.
image.
point.
Applying a Grunge Effect

You can use the Grunge effect to give your images a moody, dark look. You can use the Color slider to
tint the image a variety of colors.
To Apply a Grunge Effect:

toolbar.
2. Click Grunge.
3. On the Grunge panel, drag the Color slider to specify a color tint. When the Color slider is set to 0, no
tint has been added.
Page 545 of 827

image.
point.
Applying a Jiggle Effect

Use the Jiggle effect to add jiggly distortions to your image. You can customize the characteristics of
the distortions you would like added to your image. Some distortions will change the shape of the
outside edges of the image, revealing a transparent background.
To Apply a Jiggle Effect:

toolbar.
2. Click Jiggle.
3. On the Jiggle panel, set the options as described below.
Jiggle Options
Page 546 of 827

Size Specifies the size of the jiggle distortion. Type a number from 1 to 100 or drag the
slider to adjust the width of the distortions. As the value increases, the width of the
wave also increases.
Detail Specifies how jagged the distortion becomes. Type a number from 1 to 10 or drag
the slider to adjust the detail.
Strength Specifies the intensity of the distortion. Type a number from 1 to 100 or drag the
slider to adjust the strength.
Randomize Indicates the random placement of the distortions.

When you apply the Jiggle effect to an image, ACDSee Ultimate places the
fragments randomly. This makes the effect different every time you apply the
filter. You can define a specific random seed to generate identical fragment
patterns.
image.
point.
Applying a Lomo Effect

Simulate the retro-effects of a lomo camera. Photos taken with a lomo camera are high contrast, with
a golden hue and a noticeable vignette.
To Use the Lomo Effect:

toolbar.
2. Click Lomo.
Page 547 of 827

3. Drag the Color Distortion slider to the right to increase the color distortion.
4. Drag the Vignette Strength slider to the right to increase the vignette strength.
image.
point.
Applying a Mirror Effect

You can use the Mirror effect to reflect an image along the horizontal or vertical axis. Select or change
the Mirror options to apply mirroring to your image, including mirror axis and direction.
To Apply a Mirror Effect:

toolbar.
2. Click Mirror.
3. On the Mirror panel, in the Mirror direction area, select one of the following options to indicate which
direction you want to mirror the image:
Horizontal
Vertical
Page 548 of 827

4. Drag the Mirror axis slider to adjust the position of the mirror. A value of 500 places the mirror in the
center of the image.
image.
point.
Applying a Negative Effect

You can use the Negative effect to create a negative of your image. You can also apply the Negative
filter to a negative scanned from a roll of film to produce a positive image.
To Create an Image Negative:

toolbar.
2. Click Negative.
image.
Page 549 of 827

point.
Applying an Oil Paint Effect

You can use the Oil Paint effect to give your images a painted appearance.
To Create an Oil Painting from a Photo:

toolbar.
2. Click Oil Paint.
3. On the Oil Paint panel, drag the Brush width slider to specify the width of the brush strokes in the effect.
The higher the value, the wider the brush stroke.
4. Drag the Variance slider to specify the color variance in each brush stroke. Higher values increase the
number of colors used in each stroke.
5. Drag the Vibrance slider to adjust the intensity of the colors in the image.
image.
point.
Page 550 of 827

Applying an Old Effect

You can use the Old effect to give your images an antique look. (The Old effect is similar to the Sepia
effect, but produces a more realistic appearance of age.)
To Apply the Old Effect:

toolbar.
2. Click Old.
3. On the Old panel, set the options as described below.
Old Options
Age Specifies the intensity or degree of the effect. (The numbers do not correspond to
how old the photo should appear.)
image.
point.
Applying an Orton Effect

Create beautiful impressionistic images with the Orton effect. The Orton effect mimics a darkroom
technique created by sandwiching two images together, one of which is slightly out of focus, and both
of which are slightly overexposed.
Page 551 of 827

To Use the Orton Effect:

toolbar.
2. Click Orton.
3. Drag the Blur, Contrast, and Brightness sliders to adjust each effect.
image.
point.
Applying an Outline Effect

The Outline effect is similar to the Edge Detect effect. You can use the Outline effect to create a
highlighted outline of your image. However, with the Outline effect you can control the thickness of
the outline, whether an edge is outlined or not, and the color that displays behind the outlined image.
To Use the Outline Effect:
Page 552 of 827

toolbar.
2. Click Outline.
3. On the Outline panel, set the options as described below.
Outline Options
Line width Specifies the width of the outline in the effect. The higher the value, the
wider the outline.
Threshold Specifies how sharp an edge must be in order to be outlined. If you

specify a higher value, more edges in the photo will be outlined.
Background color Specifies the background color of the filtered image. Click the color
picker to select a different color.
image.
point.
Applying a Pencil Drawing Effect

You can use the Pencil Drawing effect to create a pencil drawing from your images.
To Create a Pencil Drawing from an Image:
Page 553 of 827

toolbar.
2. Click Pencil Drawing.
image.
point.
Applying a Photo Effect

You can use the Photo Effect to apply a variety of filters to your images.
To Apply a Photo Effect:

toolbar.
2. Click Photo Effect.
3. On the Photo Effect panel, select an option from the Filter Type drop-down menu.
Page 554 of 827

image.
point.
Applying a Pixel Explosion Effect

You can use the Pixel Explosion effect to explode pixels from a center point in your images. Select or
change the Pixel Explosion settings, such as intensity and direction, to apply this effect to your image.
To Use the Pixel Explosion Effect:

toolbar.
2. Click Pixel Explosion.
3. On the Pixel Explosion panel, set the options as described below.
Pixel Explosion Options
Page 555 of 827

Horizontal center Specifies the center point of the explosion on the horizontal axis. A
value of 500 places the explosion at the middle of the image.
Vertical center Specifies the center point of the explosion on the vertical axis. A
value of 500 places the explosion at the middle of the image.
Intensity Specifies the intensity of the explosion. A higher value creates a

larger, more brilliant spread of the pixels in the image.
Explosion direction Specifies the direction of the explosion. Select one or both of the
following:
Explode horizontally: explodes the pixels towards the right

and left sides of the image.
Explode vertically: explodes the pixels towards the top and

bottom of the image.
Randomize Indicates the random placement of the pixels.

When you apply the Pixel Explosion effect to an image, ACDSee
Ultimate places the pixels randomly. This makes the pixels different
every time you apply the filter. You can define a specific random
seed to generate identical pixel patterns.
image.
point.
Applying a Pixelate Effect

A pixel is the smallest piece of a digital image, arranged in rows and columns. When you reduce the
resolution of your image, the size of the pixel increases and produces blurring. You can use the Pixelate
effect to increase the size of the pixels in your image.
Page 556 of 827

To Apply a Pixelate Effect:

toolbar.
2. Click Pixelate.
3. On the Pixelate panel, drag the Width and Height sliders to set the size of the pixels in your image.
Check the Square checkbox to make the width and height equal.
image.
point.
Applying a Posterize Effect

You can use the Posterize effect to reduce the number of brightness levels in your image. Select or
change the Posterize options to apply this effect to your image.
To Apply a Posterize Effect:

toolbar.
2. Click Posterize.
Page 557 of 827

3. On the Posterize panel, drag the Brightness levels slider to adjust the variance of colors in the image.
The lower the value, the fewer colors used in the image.
image.
point.
Applying a Purple Haze Effect

You can use the Purple Haze effect to give your image a hyper-retro, purple tint.
To Apply the Purple Haze Effect:

toolbar.
2. Click Purple Haze.
image.
Page 558 of 827

point.
Applying a Radial Waves Effect

You can use the Radial Waves effect to display waves radiating from a center point in the photo. You
can change the center point in the photo and you can also control the appearance of the waves.
To Apply a Radial Waves Effect:

toolbar.
2. Click Radial Waves.
3. On the Radial waves panel, set the options as described below.
Radial Waves Options
Page 559 of 827

Horizontal position Specifies the center of the waves on the horizontal axis. A value of 500
places the waves in the middle of the image.
Vertical position Specifies the center of the waves on the vertical axis. A value of 500
places the waves in the middle of the image.
Amplitude Specifies the depth and height of each wave.
Wavelength Specifies the amount of space between waves.
Light strength Specifies the amount of light contrast between the top and bottom of
each wave.
Wave direction Specifies the direction of the waves. Select one, or both, of the
following:
l Wave horizontally: makes the waves move towards the right
and left sides of the image.
l Wave vertically: makes the waves move towards the top and bot-
tom of the image.
image.
point.
Applying a Rain Effect

You can use the Rain effect to make it look like it was raining when you took a photo. Control the
amount, the angle, strength and other characteristics of the rain.
To Apply Rain to a Photo:
Page 560 of 827

toolbar.
2. Click Rain.
3. On the Rain panel, set the options as described below.
Rain Options
Strength Specifies the length of the rain drops. Drag the slider to the right to
increase the length.
Opacity Specifies the opacity of the rain drops. Type a number from 0 to 100 or
drag the slider to adjust the opacity of the rain drops. The higher the
opacity, the more the image is obscured.
Amount Specifies the number of rain drops.
Angle variance Specifies the angle of the rain drops. Type a number from 0 to 50 or
drag the arrow to adjust the angle.
Strength variance Specifies how much variety there should be in the length of the rain
drops. Drag the slider to the left if you want rain drops to have a similar
length. Drag the slider to the right if you want to vary the length of rain
drops. If you vary the length of rain drops they look natural.
Background blur Specifies the amount of blur in the photo. Heavy rain will block your
vision. Use this option to blur the photo so the rain effect looks natural.
Angle Specifies the angle at which the rain drops are falling.
Color Specifies the color of the rain drops.
image.
Page 561 of 827

point.
Applying a Ripple Effect

You can use the Ripple effect to divide your images into concentric circles that resembles what you see
when you drop a pebble into water. Select or change the Ripple settings to apply to your image, such
as position, strength and more.
To Apply a Ripple Effect:

toolbar.
2. Click Ripple.
3. On the Ripple panel, set the options as described below.
Ripple Options
Page 562 of 827

Horizontal position Specifies the center of the ripples on the horizontal axis. A value of
500 places the ripples in the middle of the image.
Vertical position Specifies the center of the ripples on the vertical axis. A value of
500 places the ripples in the middle of the image.
Amplitude Specifies the depth and height of each ripple.
Wavelength Specifies the amount of space between ripples.
Light strength Specifies the amount of light contrast between the top and bottom
of each ripple.
Background color Specifies the background color of the filtered image. Check the
Image checkbox to use the original image colors, or click the color
Ripple direction Specifies the direction of the ripples. Select one or both of the
following:
l Ripple vertically: makes the ripples move towards the top
and bottom of the image.
l Ripple horizontally: makes the ripples move towards the
right and left sides of the image.
image.
point.
Applying a Scattered Tiles Effect

You can use the Scattered Tiles effect to divide your images into rectangular tiles, and scatter and stack
the tiles. Select or change the Scattered Tiles options to apply this effect to your image.
To Apply a Scattered Tiles Effect:
Page 563 of 827

toolbar.
2. Click Scattered Tiles.
3. On the Scattered Tiles panel, set the options as described below.
Scattered Tiles Options

Tile size Specifies the size of the tiles.
Scatter amount Specifies how much the tiles will move from their original positions.
Background color Specifies the color of the background. Click the color picker to select a
different color.
Randomize Indicates the random placement of the tiles.

When you apply the Scattered Tiles effect to an image, ACDSee Ultimate
places the tiles randomly. This makes the effect different every time you
apply the filter. You can define a specific random seed to generate
identical tile patterns.
image.
point.
Applying a Sepia Effect

You can use the Sepia effect to give your images an antique look. (The Old effect is similar to the Sepia
effect, but produces a more realistic appearance of age.)
Page 564 of 827

To Add a Sepia Tone to an Image:

toolbar.
2. Click Sepia.
image.
point.
Applying a Seventies Effect

You can use the Seventies effect to give your images a retro look.
To Apply the Seventies Effect:

toolbar.
2. Click Seventies.
Page 565 of 827

image.
point.
Applying a Sheet Metal Effect

You can use the Sheet Metal effect to turn your images into sheet metal impressions.
To Apply a Sheet Metal Effect:

toolbar.
2. Click Sheet Metal.
3. On the Sheet Metal panel, set the options as described below.
Sheet Metal Options
Page 566 of 827

Rounding Specifies the amount of curve in the edges of the impressions.
Detail Specifies the amount of detail in the impression.
Angle Specifies the angle of the grain in the sheet metal.
Metal color Specifies the color of the sheet metal.
Direction Specifies the direction in which the sheet metal was manipulated. Select one of
the following:
l Indented: stamps the metal from the top side of the image.
l Pushed out: stamps the metal from underneath the image.
image.
point.
Applying a Shift Effect

You can use the Shift effect to divide your images into bars and shift them in random directions.
To Apply a Shift Effect:

toolbar.
2. Click Shift.
3. On the Shift panel, set the options as described below.
Page 567 of 827

Shift Options
Strength Specifies the amount of shift between the bars.
Width Specifies the width of each bar.
Angle Specifies the angle of the bars.
image.
point.
Applying a Slant Effect

You can use the Slant effect to make a photo appear slanted. For example, you could use the Slant
effect to distort a photo by pushing the top of the photo to the left and the bottom of the photo to
the right. Similarly, you could use the slant effect to push the left side of the photo upwards and the
right side of the photo downwards.
To Apply a Slant Effect:

toolbar.
2. Click Slant.
3. On the Slant panel, set the options as described below.
Page 568 of 827

Slant Options
Amount Specifies the degree of the slant.
Fulcrum Specifies the center of the slant. Drag the slider to the left to place the
center of the slant near the bottom of the photo. Drag the slider to the
right to place the center of the slant near the top of the photo.
Background color Specifies the background color of the filtered image. Click the color
Slant Direction Specifies the angle of the slant:
Horizontal: select Horizontal to push the top or bottom of the

photo to the left or right.
Vertical: select Vertical to push the left or right side of the photo
up or down.
image.
point.
Applying a Sobel Effect

You can use the Sobel effect to create a highlighted outline of your image. After creating a black image,
the effect uses colored lines to outline the detail of an image where significant color differences exist.
Greater differences between colors in the original image produce brighter outline colors. (The Sobel
effect is similar to the Edge Detect effect, but produces sharper and brighter outlines.)
To Use the Sobel Effect:
Page 569 of 827

toolbar.
2. Click Sobel.
image.
point.
Applying a Solarize Effect

You can use the Solarize effect to simulate the effect of overexposing an image, as though the film was
exposed to light before developing. Select or change the Solarize options to apply this effect to your
image.
To Apply a Solarize Effect:

toolbar.
2. Click Solarize.
3. On the Solarize panel, drag the Threshold slider to specify the brightness threshold of the image.
4. In the Effect area, specify which pixels you want to adjust by selecting one of the following options:
Solarize: adjusts pixels located above the specified threshold option. The effect takes any pixels
above the threshold and replaces them with their negative value. When you solarize an image,
a higher threshold value sets a brighter threshold, and colors need to be brighter to be
Page 570 of 827

overexposed.
Lunarize: adjusts pixels located below the specified threshold option. The effect takes any pixels
below the threshold and replaces them with their negative value. When you lunarize an image,
a higher threshold value sets a darker threshold, and colors do not have to be as bright to be
overexposed.
image.
point.
Applying a Somber Effect

You can use the Somber effect to give your images an austere or sleek look.
To Apply the Somber Effect:

toolbar.
2. Click Somber.
Page 571 of 827

image.
point.
Applying a Stained Glass Effect

You can use the Stained Glass effect to divide your image into fragments of a random size and shape,
to give the photo the appearance of a stained glass window. Control the size and position of the
fragments using the effect settings.
To Apply a Stained Glass Effect:

toolbar.
2. Click Stained Glass.
3. On the Stained Glass panel, set the options as described below.
Stained Glass Options

Fragment size Specifies the size of the fragments.
Randomize Indicates the random placement of the fragments.

When you apply the Stained Glass effect to an image, ACDSee Ultimate places
the fragments randomly. This makes the effect different every time you apply
the filter. You can define a specific random seed to generate identical
fragment patterns.
Page 572 of 827

image.
point.
Applying a Sunspot Effect

You can use the Sunspot effect to add a bright spot in your images.
To Apply a Sunspot Effect:

toolbar.
2. Click Sunspot.
3. On the Sunspot panel, drag the Horizontal Position and Vertical Position sliders or click the image to set
the location of the sunspot.
4. Drag the Brightness slider to set the intensity of the sunspot.
Applying a Swirl Effect

You can use the Swirl effect to rotate and stretch people and objects in your image.
Page 573 of 827

To Apply a Swirl Effect:

toolbar.
2. Click Swirl.
3. On the Swirl panel, set the options as described below.
Swirl Options
Horizontal position Specifies the center of the swirl on the horizontal axis. A value of 500
places the swirl in the middle of the image.
Vertical position Specifies the center of the swirl on the vertical axis. A value of 500
places the swirl in the middle of the image.
Radius Specifies the size of the swirl effect.
Strength Specifies the strength and direction of the swirl. Higher values create
a clockwise swirl, while negative values create a counter-clockwise
swirl.
Focus Specifies the concentration of the swirl. Higher values concentrate

the effect on the center of the swirl, while lower values spread the
swirl across the image.
Background color Specifies the background color of the filtered image. Check the
Image checkbox to use the original image colors, or click the color
Swirl direction Specifies the direction of the swirl. Select one or both of the
following:
l Swirl horizontally: moves the swirl towards the top and bot-
tom of the image.
l Swirl vertically: moves the swirl towards the right and left
sides of the image.
Page 574 of 827

image.
point.
Applying a Threshold Effect

You can use the Threshold effect to create a black and white image.
To Apply the Threshold Effect:

toolbar.
2. Click Threshold.
3. On the Threshold panel, set the options as described below.
Threshold Options
Threshold This slider determines which pixels become black and which ones become white
in the black and white image. Any pixels that are brighter than the selected
threshold will become white and any pixels that are darker than the threshold will
become black.
image.
Page 575 of 827

point.
Applying a Topography Effect

You can use the Topography effect to change the details of your images into contour lines.
To Apply a Topography Effect:

toolbar.
2. Click Topography.
3. On the Topographic Map panel, drag the Rounding slider to adjust the amount of curve in the contour
lines.
4. Drag the Number of lines slider to specify how many contour lines you want to add.
image.
point.
Applying a Water Effect

You can use the Water effect to insert an expanse of water below the subject of a photo and to display
a reflection of the subject in the water. You can control the position of the water below the subject.
Page 576 of 827

For example, you can position the water below a person's chin, or below their waist. You can also
control the appearance of ripples in the water and how dark or light the water appears.
To Apply a Water Effect:

toolbar.
2. Click Water.
3. On the Water panel, set the options as described below.
Water Options
Position Specifies the position of the water below the subject of the photo.
Amplitude Specifies the height of the ripples in the water. Drag the slider to the left to reduce
the height of the ripples and the distortion caused by the ripples. Drag the slider to
the right to increase the height of the ripples and the distortion caused by the
ripples.
Wavelength Specifies the distance between ripples. Drag the slider to the left to reduce the
distance between ripples and increase the distortion caused by the ripples. Drag
the slider to the right to increase the distance between ripples and reduce the
distortion caused by the ripples.
Perspective Changes the size of the waves as they get farther from the subject. Drag the slider
to the left to increase the size of the waves farthest from the subject and to
increase the illusion of distance.
Lighting Specifies the amount of light in the water.
Page 577 of 827

image.
point.
Applying a Water Drops Effect

You can use the Water Drops effect to display water drops on the surface of the photo. You can
control the number and size of water drops, and their position on the photo.
To Apply Water Drops to a Photo:

toolbar.
2. Click Water Drops.
3. On the Water Drops panel, set the options as described below.
Water Drops Options
Page 578 of 827

Density Specifies the number of water drops on the photo. Drag the slider to the left to
remove water drops. Drag the slider to the right to add water drops.
Radius Specifies the size of the water drops. Drag the slider to the left to make the water
drops smaller. Drag the slider to the right to make the water drops larger.
Height Specifies the height of the water drops above the photo surface. Drag the slider to
the left to reduce the height of the water drops and the distortion caused by the
water drops. Drag the slider to the right to increase the height of the water drops
and the distortion caused by the water drops.
Randomize Indicates the random placement of the water drops.

When you apply the Water Drops effect to an image, ACDSee Ultimate places the
water drops randomly. This makes the effect different every time you apply the
filter. You can define a specific random seed to generate identical water drop
patterns.
image.
point.
Applying a Waves Effect

You can use the Waves effect to display waves across the photo. You can change the distance between
waves. This distance is called wavelength. You can also change the height of the waves, and the angle
at which the waves cross the photo.
To Apply a Waves Effect:
Page 579 of 827

toolbar.
2. Click Waves.
3. On the Waves panel, select or change the options as described below.
Waves Options
Wavelength Specifies the distance between waves. Drag the slider to the left to
reduce the distance between waves and increase the distortion caused
by the waves. Drag the slider to the right to increase the distance
between waves and reduce the distortion caused by the waves.
Amplitude Specifies the height of the waves. Drag the slider to the left to reduce
the height of the waves and the distortion caused by the waves. Drag
the slider to the right to increase the height of the waves and the
distortion caused by the waves.
Angle Specifies the angle of the waves. Type a number from 1 to 360 or drag
the arrow to adjust the angle.
Background color Specifies the background color. Check the Image checkbox to use the
image.
point.
Page 580 of 827

Applying a Weave Effect

You can use the Weave effect to give a photo the appearance of being woven into a tapestry or basket.
You can control the width of the vertical and horizontal strips, the width of the gap between the strips,
and the background color that displays through the gap.
To Apply a Weave Effect:

toolbar.
2. Click Weave.
3. On the Weave panel, set the options as described below.
Weave Options
Strip width Specifies the width of the vertical and horizontal strips.
Gap width Specifies the width of the gap between the strips.
Background color Specifies the color of the background. Click the color picker to select a
different color.
image.
point.
Page 581 of 827

Applying a Wind Effect

You can use the Wind effect to add wind lines that make stationary objects in your image look like
they are moving. Select or change the settings to control the effect of the wind added to your image.
To Apply a Wind Effect:

toolbar.
2. Click Wind.
3. On the Wind panel, select or change the options as described below.
Wind Options
Page 582 of 827

Strength Determines how strong the wind lines are in the image. The higher the
value, the stronger the wind lines.
Threshold Determines how sharp an edge must be before the filter will apply wind.
The higher the value, the sharper the edge needs to be.
Chance of wind Determines the amount of wind lines to place in the image.
Edge detection Specifies the edge detection algorithm. The algorithm controls the
formula used to detect the edges and the direction of the edge
indicators.
Background color Specifies the background color. Check the Image checkbox to use the
Wind color Specifies the color of the wind lines. Check the Image checkbox to use
the original image colors, or click the color picker to select a different
color.
Wind angle Specifies the angle of the wind lines.
Randomize Indicates the random placement of the wind lines.

When you apply the Wind effect to an image, ACDSee Ultimate places
the wind lines randomly. This makes the wind lines different every time
you apply the filter. You can define a specific random seed to generate
identical wind lines.
image.
point.
Creating a Custom Special Effect Filter (Convolution Effect)

You can use the Convolution filter to create your own special effects and apply them to your image.
Page 583 of 827

To Create a Custom Effect Filter:

toolbar.
2. Click User Defined Convolution.
3. On the User Defined Convolution panel, set the options as described below.
User Defined Convolution Options

Convolution Matrix Specifies the formula to use when altering the image.
Type numbers in the matrix fields to change the pixels in the image.
Using a mathematical formula, the color value of each pixel in an
image is multiplied by the numbers in the matrix to produce an effect.
Division Specifies the fractional coefficient of the matrix.

Type a number into the Division field to use fractional coefficients in
the matrix. The product of the convolution matrix is divided by the
division factor before being applied to a pixel.
Bias Specifies the brightness of the image.

Type a number into the Bias field to change the brightness of the
image. The bias number is added to the RGB values of each pixel. A
positive number brightens the image, while a negative number
darkens the image.
Clear Matrix Resets the matrix.
Sample Filters Drop-Down Menu Loads a sample effect to use as a starting point for creating your own
effect.
image.
Page 584 of 827

point.
Rotating an Image
You can rotate an image at preset or custom angles in Edit mode.
To Rotate an Image at a Custom Angle:

1. In Edit mode, in the Geometry group, select Rotate.
You can also access the Rotate tool from the Filter drop-down menu or Filter toolbar.
2. Select one or more of the following:
Select one of the default orientation options.
Drag the Straightening slider to the left or right until the image appears straightened.
Click the Horizontal or Vertical button, and use the tools as described below.
Select Crop straightened image if you want to crop the image after it is straightened.
Select Preserve straightened image if you do not want to crop the straightened image. Select
the color that you would like to display behind the straightened image from the Fill color drop-
down.
Select Show grid overlay to display a grid over the image. You may find that the grid helps you
straighten the image and understand how the image will be cropped.
to Developed.
Rotate Icons
Page 585 of 827

Horizontal Click on the horizontal icon, and then use the cursor to draw a line on the image
that you want to set as the horizontal line.
Vertical Click on the vertical icon, and then use the cursor to draw a line on the image that
you want to set as the vertical line.
Flipping an Image
You can flip an image both vertically and horizontally in Edit mode.
To Flip an Image:
1. In Edit mode, in the Geometry group, select Flip.
You can also access the Flip tool from the Filter drop-down menu or Filter toolbar.
Check the Horizontal Flip checkbox.
Check the Vertical Flip checkbox.
to Developed.
image.
Page 586 of 827

Cropping an Image
You can use the Crop tool to remove unwanted parts of your images, or to reduce the image canvas to
a particular size. You can also enable relative positioning which is useful for creating settings to batch
crop a selection of images.
When zooming in, hold down the Spacebar to pan the image.
To Crop an Image:
1. In Edit mode, in the Geometry group, select Crop.
You can also access the Crop tool from the Filter drop-down menu or Filter toolbar.
2. Resize the crop window, and position it over the area of the image you want to keep.
3. To darken the parts of the image outside the crop window, drag the Darken outside crop area slider to
the left. Drag the slider to the right to lighten the area outside the crop window.
4. Click Estimate new file size to view how big your image file is after cropping.
Click Done to crop the image and close the tool.
Click Cancel to exit the tool without cropping the image.
Resizing the Crop Window

You can resize the crop window in three ways:
Drag the edges of the crop window to the desired size.
Specify an exact size for the crop window in pixels, inches, centimeters, or millimeters.
Apply a ratio to constrain the crop window proportions.
To Resize the Crop Window by Dragging:

1. Position your cursor over the edge or corner of the crop window until it changes into a double-pointed
arrow.
To Specify an Exact Size for the Crop Window:
Page 587 of 827

1. Type the desired crop window proportions into the Width and Height spin boxes.
2. In the Units drop-down list, select a unit of measurement.
3. Use the Dots per inch spin box to specify a resolution.
To Constrain the Crop Window to a Ratio:

1. Check the Constrain cropping proportion checkbox.
2. Choose a ratio from the drop-down list.
3. Click on the Rotate button if you want to change the orientation of the crop window.
Position your cursor over the edge of the crop window until it changes into a double-pointed
arrow, and then drag the edge of the crop window to the desired size.
Use the Width or Height spin box to specify a dimension for one side of the crop window.
ACDSee Ultimate automatically resizes the other dimension based on the ratio you selected.
To Resize the Crop Window by Using Relative Positioning:

You can enable relative positioning to specify how you want your image to crop. This can be
particularly useful for cropping in batches.
1. Check the Enable relative positioning checkbox.
2. Choose in the Horizontal settings whether you would like to position the crop from the left or right
edges, and the distance in pixels or as a percentage.
3. Choose in the Vertical settings whether you would like to position the crop from the left or right edges,
and the distance in pixels or as a percentage.
Correcting Perspective Distortion

You can use the Perspective Correction tool to correct perspective distortion in digital photographs.
Perspective distortion is caused by wide-angle and telephoto lenses, which distort the perspective of
large or far-away objects. For example, if you take a photo of a tall building, the building may appear
to be narrower at the top even though the building is the same width from top to bottom.
To Correct Perspective Distortion:

1. In Edit mode, in the Geometry group, select Perspective Correction.
You can also access the Perspective Correction tool from the Filter drop-down menu or
Filter toolbar.
Page 588 of 827

2. An outline displays around the image. The outline has handles at all four corners, and in the middle of all
the sides. Drag the handles to change the perspective.
to Developed.
Perspective Correction Options

Background color When you correct distortion in a photo, the edges of the photo may bulge
outwards or shrink inwards. Use the Background color options to fill gaps in the
corners or sides of a corrected photo:
l Transparent: select this option if you want to fill gaps in the corners or sides
of a corrected photo with transparency.
Show Grid Select this option if you want to display a grid over the photo while you correct
distortion. This is useful if you want to assess whether objects in the photo are
straight.
Correcting Distortion
You can use the Lens Distortion Correction tool to correct barrel, pincushion, and fisheye distortion in
digital photographs. In barrel distortion the photo appears to bulge outwards from the center. In
pincushion distortion the photo appears to shrink inwards toward the center. In fisheye distortion,
the photo appears to bulge outwards from the center, as if the photo were wrapped around a sphere.
Barrel, pincushion, and fisheye distortion are common in photos that were taken with wide angle or
zoom lenses.
To Correct Lens Distortion:

1. In Edit mode, in the Geometry group, select Distortion Correction.
You can also access the Distortion Correction tool from the Filter drop-down menu or
Filter toolbar.
2. In the Type of Distortion section, select Barrel, Pincushion, or Fisheye.
Page 589 of 827

to Developed.
Lens Distortion Correction Options

Horizontal center Drag the slider to the left or right to identify the center of the
image on the horizontal axis.
Vertical center Drag the slider to the left or right to identify the center of the
image on the vertical axis.
Correction Strength Drag the slider to the right until the objects in the photo appear to
be straight.
Scale Drag the slider to the left or right to change the scale of the photo.
Background color When you correct distortion in a photo, the edges of the photo
may bulge outwards or shrink inwards. Use the Background color
options to fill gaps in the corners or sides of a corrected photo:
l Transparent: select this option if you want to fill gaps in the
corners or sides of a corrected photo by placing the uncor-
rected photo in the background. This is useful if the gaps are
small.
Type of Distortion Determines the type of distortion applied to the image: Barrel thinner
at the top and bottom, Pincushion wider at the top and bottom, or
Fisheye.
Show Grid Select this option if you want to display a grid over the photo while
you correct distortion. This is useful if you want to assess whether
objects in the photo are straight.
Automatically Correcting Lens Distortion

You can correct barrel and pincushion distortion in digital photographs. In barrel distortion the photo
appears to bulge outwards from the center. In pincushion distortion the photo appears to shrink
Page 590 of 827

inwards toward the center. Barrel and pincushion distortion are common in photos that were taken
with wide angle or zoom lenses.
In ACDSee Ultimate, you have the option of using manual correction via the Manual Correction slider,
or you can enable lens correction via your lens profile. This can be done by selecting the make, model,
and lens of the camera used to take your image. The Lens Correction tool can apply automatic
adjustments based on the distortion inherent to the lens used, or you can enable lens correction for
each image manually. The Lens Correction tool contains a database of camera makes, models, and
their possible lenses. The possible lenses for the selected camera will be available for you to choose
from the Lens drop-down menu, unless there is only one possible lens, in which case, that lens will be
pre-selected.
You can find the name of the lens used in the Current Lens Information section. However, the lens
value displayed in the EXIF may not be reliable in the case of third party lenses as the camera itself may
only recognize the third party lens as an ID number. If possible, recover the correct lens value from the
Info palette in Edit mode, (but outside of the Lens Correction tool), and select it from the Lens drop-
down menu (inside the Lens Correction tool).
You can use the Manual Correction slider for further adjustments after using automatic correction, or
on its own.
You can also use your lens profile to correct chromatic aberration, if it is available.
For quick viewing of the available lens profiles, go to Lensfun.
To Fix Lens Distortion Using Your Lens Profile:

1. In Edit mode, in the Geometry group, select Lens Correction.
You can also access the Lens Correction tool from the Filter drop-down menu or Filter
toolbar.
2. Check the Enable Lens Profile checkbox.
3. If the displayed camera make and model are not correct, select the correct options from the Make and
Model drop-down menus.
4. From the Lens drop-down menu, select the lens used to take the image. You can find this information
displayed in the Current Lens Information section. The correction will occur automatically.
5. If you desire further adjustments, move the Strength slider in the Manual Correction section to the left
for a bulge effect, or to the right to stretch the edges of the image.
Check the Show Grid checkbox to display a grid over your image. This tool is useful when fixing
alignment in your images.
To Fix Chromatic Aberration Using Your Lens Profile:
Page 591 of 827

Chromatic aberration occurs due to the properties of a given lens. Therefore, you can use the lens
profile to automatically correct it. The Chromatic Aberration checkbox will be checked if your selected
lens has a corresponding chromatic aberration correction available.
1. In Edit mode, in the Geometry group, select Lens Correction.
2. Select the Enable Lens Profile checkbox.
3. Select the Chromatic Aberration checkbox.
To Fill in the Edges of a Manually Corrected Image:

Some manual adjustments may affect the edges of the image. You can choose what color will fill the
discrepancies created by the lens correction. Alternatively, you can opt for transparency in this area.
Disable the Transparency checkbox, then select a color from the Background Color drop-down
menu.
Resizing an Image
You can resize an image by adjusting its dimensions in pixels, percentage, or actual/print size. While
resizing, you can also choose an aspect ratio and a resampling filter to adjust the resized image's
appearance.
To Resize an Image:
1. In Edit mode, in the Geometry group, select Resize.
You can also access the Resize tool from the Filter drop-down menu or Filter toolbar.
2. Select one of the following resize options:
Pixels: resizes the image to specific dimensions in pixels.
Percent: resizes the image to a percentage of the original.
Actual/Print size in: resizes the image to match a specific output size. Click the drop-down list
to specify a unit of measurement.
3. If you want to maintain a specific width to height ratio, check the Preserve aspect ratio checkbox, and
then select one of the following options from the drop-down list:
Original: maintains the original image's width to height ratio.
1 x 1: forces the width and height to be equal.
2 x 3: forces a width to height ratio of 2:3.
Page 592 of 827

Custom: applies a custom ratio. Enter a width to height ratio in the Custom Aspect Ratio dialog
box.
4. Select a resizing filter from the Resizing Filter drop-down list.
5. Under the resize option you selected in step #3, type the image's new dimensions into the Width and
Height spin boxes. If you selected Actual/Print size in, click the Resolution drop-down list, and then
select a resolution (in dots per inch) for your output image.
6. To estimate the size of the output image, click Estimate new file size.
Click Done to apply your changes and close the Resize tool.
Resizing Tips:
Maintain image quality by reducing images only by 33%, 50%, or 66%. Other percentages
can distort the aspect ratio.
Avoid resizing an image repeatedly. Each resizing places image pixels using a slightly
different orientation. As a result, multiple resizes can change the overall color and
appearance of the image. If your first resize attempt does not produce the desired result,
click the Undo button.
Avoid increasing the size of an image. Increasing image size makes the image's pixels
more apparent, causing a grainy effect.
Pixel Resize Options and Resulting Action

You can reduce and enlarge the size of one or more images from Manage mode by entering a new
dimension in pixels. For more information on how to resize an image using pixel dimensions, please
see Resizing an image or Resizing multiple images.
Enlarging an image tends to pixelate the image, reducing image quality. It is best to avoid
enlarging images.
Page 593 of 827

Resize Options Fit within Options Action
Enlarge only
Width only Resizes the image if the specified

dimensions are larger than the
image's original dimensions. The
width is increased to the specified
value and the height is increased to
maintain the aspect ratio.
Height only Resizes the image if the specified

height is increased to the specified
value and the width is increased to
Width and height Resizes the image if the specified

width and height are increased as
close to the specified value as
possible, while maintaining the
aspect ratio.
Width or height (largest image) Resizes the image if the specified

width or height is increased as close
to the specified value as possible to
maximize the size of the image, while
maintaining the aspect ratio.
Reduce only
Width only Resizes the image if the specified

dimensions are smaller than the
width is decreased to the specified
value and the height is decreased to
Height only Resizes the image if the specified

height is decreased to the specified
Page 594 of 827

Resize Options Fit within Options Action
value and the width is decreased to

Width and height Resizes the image if the specified

width and height are decreased as
close to the specified value as
possible, while maintaining the
aspect ratio.
Width or height (largest image) Resizes the image if the specified

width or height is decreased as close
to the specified value as possible to
minimize the size of the image, while
Enlarge or reduce
Width only Resizes the width to the specified

value and resizes the height to
whatever value is necessary to
Height only Resizes the height to the specified

value and resizes the width to
whatever value is necessary to
Width and height Resizes the image within the

specified width and height. The width
and height are resized as close to the
specified value as possible while
Width or height (largest image) Resizes the image within the

specified width and height. The width
or height is resized as close to the
specified value as possible to
maximize (or minimize) the size of
the image, while maintaining the
aspect ratio.
Page 595 of 827

Distorting and Retouching with the Liquify Tool

You can use the Liquify tool to move pixels without changing them.
To Distort an Image:
1. In Edit mode, in the Geometry group, select Liquify.
2. In the Distortion Tools section, select the type of distortion to apply.
Click Done to apply your changes and close the Liquify tool.
Liquify Options
Page 596 of 827

Distortion Tools You can distort your images by moving your cursor, essentially brushing on the
effect by pushing and pulling pixels around the image.
You can use the Shift tool to push pixels in images.

Shift
You can use the Pinch tool to condense pixels

Pinch towards a center point.
You can use the Bulge tool to expand pixels

Bulge outward.
You can use the Restore tool to brush the pixels

Restore back to their original position.
You can hold down the right mouse

button to activate the Restore tool
while using any of the other Distortion
tools.
Nib Width Adjusts the size of the brush. You can use the mouse wheel to adjust nib width or
adjust the Nib Width slider.
Density Adjusts the size of the area affected. Within the inner circle of the nib, the effect is
being applied at 90% or more. The area between the inner and outer circle, the
effect is transitioning between 90%-0% at the outer edge.
Use Shift + mouse wheel to adjust Density.
Strength Adjusts the intensity of the overall effect. Move the slider to the right to intensify
the effect.
Fill color In some cases, you may distort the image to the point where its edges are pulled in.
You can select the color that you would like to display behind the image.
Transparent In some cases, you may distort the image to the point where its edges are pulled in.
You can check the Transparent checkbox for the discrepancies created behind the
image.
Adjusting Image Exposure

You can use the Exposure tool to adjust an image's exposure, contrast, and fill light.
Page 597 of 827

To Adjust the Image Exposure:

1. In Edit mode, in the Exposure/Lighting group, select Exposure.
You can also access the Exposure tool from the Filter drop-down menu or Filter toolbar.
Click Apply to apply your changes and set options on another tab.
to Developed.
Image Exposure Options

Exposure Drag the slider to the right to increase the exposure, or drag to the left to
decrease exposure.
Auto Click the Auto button to automatically adjust the exposure level.
Contrast Drag the slider to the right to increase contrast, or drag to the left to decrease
contrast.
Fill Light Drag slider to the right to increase the amount of light in the darkest areas of the
image, or drag to the left to decrease fill light. Fill light brightens dark areas of the
image.
Exposure warning Highlights overexposed and underexposed areas of the image. Overexposed
pixels turn red, underexposed pixels turn green. The icon is gray when disabled,
and turns yellow if enabled.
image.
Page 598 of 827

point.
Adjusting Image Levels

You can use the Levels tool to precisely adjust the contrast and light levels in your images.
To Adjust Image levels:

1. In Edit mode, in the Exposure/Lighting group, select Levels.
You can also access the Levels tool from the Filter drop-down menu or Filter toolbar.
Set the options as described below to adjust the contrast and light levels manually.
Click Auto and select a menu option to automatically adjust image properties.
Click Apply to apply your changes.
Click Done to apply your changes and close the Levels tool.
to Developed.
Levels Options
Page 599 of 827


Move the slider or type a number from 0 to 255 into the spin box to
define the blackest area of an image. As the value increases, the
dark colored areas of the image become darker. You can also click
on the arrow to automatically set it to where the black point start in
the image.
Midtones Specifies the midtones in an image.

Move the slider or type a number into the spin box to set the
midtone. Higher values make the image appear brighter, while
lower values make the image appear darker. You can also click on
the arrow to automatically set it to the midtone of the image.

Move the slider or type a number from 0 to 255 into the spin box to
define the whitest area of an image. As the value increases, the light
colored areas of the image become lighter. You can also click on the
arrow to automatically set it to where the highlights start in the
image.
Auto Select one of the following options:

l Adjust Contrast: automatically analyzes and adjusts image
contrast.
l Adjust Color and Contrast: automatically analyzes and
adjusts each color channel independently, and then adjusts
the contrast.
l Adjust Color and Brightness: automatically analyzes and
adjusts image color and brightness.
l Tolerance: opens the Tolerance settings dialog box. Specify
the maximum clipping percentage for black and white levels,
and click OK. ACDSee Ultimate adjusts the image levels auto-
matically.
Black Point picker Click the Black Point picker, and then click the image area you want
to set as the black point.
Mid Point picker Click the Mid Point picker, and then click the image area you want
to set as the mid point.
White Point picker Click the White Point picker, and then click the image area you want
to set as the white point.
Page 600 of 827

When you click around the image with a selected eye dropper you will see the RGB numbers
changing to reflect the RGB values of the pixel under the eye dropper. The RGB values
represent the source pixel (unprocessed) and the current pixel as it appears on the screen.
point.
image.
Adjusting Levels Automatically

You can use the Auto Levels tool to automatically correct the exposure levels of your images. Auto
Levels makes the darkest image pixels darker, and the brightest pixels brighter.
To Automatically Correct an Image's Levels:

1. In Edit mode, in the Exposure/Lighting group, select Auto Levels.
You can also access the Auto Levels tool from the Filter drop-down menu or Filter toolbar.
2. Select one of the following options:
Auto Contrast and Color: adjusts color differences, brightness, and balances RGB channels.
Auto Contrast: adjusts the color differences and brightness only.
Auto Color: balances the RGB channels in the image, without changing the brightness or
contrast.
3. Use the Strength slider to fine tune the amount of exposure you want to apply.
4. Click Exposure Warning to make overexposed and underexposed pixels visible. Overexposed pixels turn
red, underexposed pixels turn green.
Page 601 of 827

to Developed.
image.
point.
Adjusting Tone Curves in Edit Mode

In Edit mode, the Tone Curves filter changes the tonal range of an image. Channel Filtering embedded
in the Tone Curves pane adjusts either the entire range of the image (RGB), or specific colors (Red,
Green, and Blue).
Changes made with the Tone Curves filter in Edit mode are pixel-based edits, which are
recommended for final touch-ups. For non-destructive changes, use the Tone Curves tool in
Develop mode.
To adjust the Brightness Curves in an image:

1. In Edit mode, do one of the following:
l In the Filter Menu pane, under the Exposure / Lighting group, select Tone Curves,
l Select Filter | Exposure / Lighting | Tone Curves from the main menu, or
l Press U.

l Click Apply to accept any changes and remain in the tool,
l Click Done to accept any changes and close the tool, or
l Click Cancel to discard any changes and close the tool.
Page 602 of 827

to Developed.
Tone Curves Options

Channel Specifies the color channels to adjust. Options include RGB, Red, Green,
and Blue.
Show Histogram Toggles the histogram display on and off.
Histogram Displays a graphic of the color information levels in the image, based on
the selected channel. Click and drag the line to manipulate the curve. Note
that when a point on the curve is clicked, a Node Info Box appears in the
top left corner of the Histogram. The Node Info Box contains In and Out
pixel values which are set in blocks of color to give a visual representation.
The Node Info Box numbers convey that an In value pixel will be changed
to the Out value. For example, if the In value is 40 and the Out value is 80,
all pixels with a value of 40 will be changed to 80. Clicking the curve adds a
new point to the curve. Drag the points up and down the curve. To delete
a point, right-click the node and select Delete point.
Color Picker Drag the cursor onto the image to change the cursor to a color picker that
provides the RGB value of the picker's current location. Click the image at a
desired tone to add a corresponding point to the adjustment curse.
point.
image.
Adjusting Lighting
You can use the Light EQ™ tool to adjust areas in an image that are too dark or too light, without
affecting other areas of the photo. You can also simultaneously brighten dark areas that are too dark,
and darken areas that are too bright. An example would be a portrait of someone in shadow but with a
light background.
Page 603 of 827

The Light EQ™ tool is very versatile. There are 4 tabs — each allows you to achieve results in different
ways. In addition, there are several keyboard and mouse shortcuts that allow you to make
adjustments on specific areas of the photo itself.
1-Step tab: for an instant, effortless exposure adjustment.
Basic tab: for very quick and easy adjustments using three sliders. ACDSee Ultimate analyzes the photo
and varies the adjustment throughout the image automatically. For example, darker images are
brightened more. By clicking the Auto button, you can have ACDSee Ultimate fully analyze the photo
and set the slider positions automatically. You can also click directly on an area of the image to generate
automatic settings optimal for that area, (usually the subject of the photo).
Standard tab: adjust the brightness and contrast of different tone bands (areas of relative brightness or
darkness) of the image independently using a slider for each tone band. A graph shows the amount of
brightening or darkening applied throughout the tonal range. The gray areas in the graph are suggested
boundaries for adjustment to avoid clipping and loss of detail, and turn red to indicate where you have
adjusted the sliders far enough to cause clipping.
Advanced tab: gives you ultimate control of the brightness and contrast in an image. Basic adjustment
curves can be constructed using four sliders, and you can manually adjust the curves by clicking and
dragging within the graph area or on the image itself.
To Open the Light EQ™ Tool:

In Edit mode, in the Exposure/Lighting group, select Light EQ™.
You can also access the Light EQ tool from the Filter drop-down menu or Filter toolbar.
Light EQ™ Controls

Right-click on a slider Right-click on a slider to reset it.
Exposure Warning Click the Exposure Warning to make any overexposed or underexposed areas
visible. Overexposed pixels turn red, underexposed pixels turn green. You can also
toggle Exposure Warning on and off momentarily by holding down the E key.
Auto Click to allow the software to analyze the photo and apply optimal settings based on
the amount of light and dark pixels in the photo. Darker photos are brightened more
than photos that are already bright.
Done Click to apply your changes and close the tool.
Cancel Click to discard all changes and close the tool.
to Developed.
Page 604 of 827

Using the 1-Step Tab

When you open an image in the Light EQ™ tool, 1-Step automatically adjusts your image's exposure.
You can further adjust it using the Amount slider. To return to the 1-Step automatic adjustment, press
the Reset button.
Using the Basic Tab
To Add Light to Dark Areas:

1. Drag the Shadows slider to the right to add light to the dark parts of the photo.
2. Adjust the settings using any of the controls in the table below.
To Darken Areas That Are Too Bright:

1. Drag the Highlights slider to the left to darken and return detail to areas that are too bright.
To Adjust Midtones That Are Too Light or Dark:

1. Drag the Midtones slider to the right or left to brighten or darken the midtones.
Page 605 of 827

Using the Standard Tab

The Standard tab has two sets of sliders. The top
set is for brightening. The lower set is for
darkening. The dark-to-light gradient on each slider
indicates that you brighten that tone band when
you move the slider up (top row of sliders) or
darken that tone band when you move the slider
down (bottom row).
Between the two sets of sliders are two horizontal
bars graded from black to white. These bars
indicate that sliders on the far left affect the dark
tonal bands. The sliders on the right affect light
tonal bands. Moving a slider changes the light in
that particular tonal band.
In the middle of the bands are two graphs that
change as you adjust the sliders to represent the
amount of darkening and brightening throughout
the tonal range of the image. The two gray graphs
show the maximum amount of brightening or
darkening that you can apply before clipping
begins. If you push a slider too far, the clipping is
shown in bright pink.
To increase contrast within a tonal band without brightening, apply brightening and darkening
simultaneously in equal amounts by dragging the upper and lower sliders up and down, respectively.
The area between the top of the upper graph and the bottom of the lower graph indicates the amount
by which contrast is increased.
To Use the Standard Tab:

Drag the tone band sliders up or down depending on which tone bands you want to adjust.
Type the exact number into the number boxes or increment the numbers to make precise
adjustments.
Click the # Tone Bands drop-down list to increase or decrease the number of tone band sliders.
Click (or press E) to see any overexposed or underexposed pixels.
Page 606 of 827

Click the Auto button to apply settings automatically.
Drag the Darkening slider to darken the light areas of the image.
Drag the Contrast slider to increase the contrast in the image.
Drag the Fill Light slider to brighten dark areas of the image without increasing contrast.
Left-click and drag upwards to brighten the dark areas of the photo. Try to prevent clipping
(shown in pink on the graph).
Right-click and drag downwards to darken the bright areas of the photo. Try to prevent clipping
On the image, select an area you would like to adjust, left-click and drag up to brighten or right-
click and drag down to darken.
2. Click Done to apply your settings and close the tool. Or click Cancel to discard your changes and close
the tool.
Using the Advanced Tab

Sliders
The Advanced tab has two sliders for brightening and
two for darkening. The Brightening and Darkening
sliders control the shape of the adjustment curves,
while the Amplitude sliders control the height of the
curves.
The Amplitude sliders increase the intensity of the
effects of brightening or darkening.
The Scale slider at the bottom of the tool adjusts the
overall adjustment sensitivity to local variation in
brightness. Moving this slider to the left makes the
adjustment more sensitive to smaller areas of
brightness variation, which may be beneficial in some
images. For most images, however, leaving the slider
in the default position gives the best result. You can
also adjust the Contrast slider to decrease or increase
contrast, or use the Fill Light slider to brighten dark
areas of the image.
Page 607 of 827

Graphs
Between the Brightening and Darkening controls are two gray graphs that indicate the maximum
amount of brightening or darkening that you can apply before clipping (shown as bright pink) begins.
Two colored curves appear and change as you drag the Brightening, Darkening and Amplitude sliders
— these curves indicate the amount of brightening and darkening applied throughout the tonal range
of the image. Darker tonal areas are on the left, and brighter tonal areas are on the right. As you move
your cursor over the image, a vertical line in the graph indicates the tone level of the area under the
cursor within the tonal range. At times there are two lines because the tone levels for brightening and
darkening are not necessarily the same. This is because brightening is sensitive to maximum color
values while darkening is sensitive to minimum color values.
The Advanced tab is unique in that you can adjust the curves manually, either on the graph itself, or
on the actual photo. Adjustments made on the photo are reflected in the curve on the graph.
Adjustments made on the graph are reflected on the photo.
To increase contrast within a tonal range without changing the brightness, apply brightening and
darkening simultaneously in equal amounts by dragging the upper and lower curves up and down,
respectively. The area between the top of the upper graph and the bottom of the lower graph
indicates the amount by which contrast is increased.
To Use the Advanced Tab:

Drag the Brightening or Darkening sliders to adjust the bright or dark tone bands. As you drag, a
gray curve appears to indicate your adjustments.
Left-click and drag upwards to brighten the dark areas of the photo. Try to prevent clipping
Right-click and drag downwards to darken the bright areas of the photo. Try to prevent clipping
Drag the Scale slider to the right to make your adjustments more sensitive to smaller areas of
brightness variation.
Drag the Contrast slider to increase or decrease contrast in your image.
Drag the Fill Light slider to add light to the dark areas in your image without increasing contrast.
Make adjustments using any of the options in the table below, including on the image itself.
2. Click Done to apply your settings and close the tool. Or click Cancel to discard your changes and close
the tool.
Adjustment Options - Advanced Tab
Page 608 of 827

Area Action Result
Sliders
Drag Brightening To the right: increases the brightening applied

to the darker areas.
To the left: applies brightening more
uniformly to all areas of the image.
(The name of the slider changes to Custom
curve when you change the curve manually or
make adjustments on the image.)
Drag Darkening To the right: increases the darkening applied

to the brighter areas of the image.
To the left: applies the darkening more
uniformly to all areas of the image.
Drag Amplitude (Brightening) To the right: increases the intensity of the

brightening across all areas of the image. The
height of the curve increases.
To the left: reduces the intensity of the
brightening and the height of the curve.
If the Amplitude slider is 0: no brightening is
applied.
If the Amplitude is 100-200: proportional
amount of clipping increases.
In most cases it is not necessary to adjust
amplitude.
Drag Amplitude (Darkening) To the right: increases the intensity of the

darkening across all areas of the image. The
height of the bottom curve increases.
To the left: reduces the intensity of the
darkening and the height of the curve.
Drag Scale To the left: makes the tool more sensitive to

smaller areas of brightness variation.
This means that smaller areas can be adjusted
independently. Generally the default scale of
10 gives the best result, but if an image
contains small details that need brightening, a
lower scale might give better results.
Page 609 of 827

Area Action Result
On Graph
Drag the graph (top) The graph changes as you left-click and drag
up on the graph itself. The graph represents
the brightening adjustments you are making.
The dark gray graph represents the maximum
amount you can drag the graph before
clipping (pink) begins.
The height of the graph represents the level
of brightening applied at each tone level.
(Tone moves from black on the left to white
on the right.)
When you make direct brightening or
darkening adjustments on the graph or image,
the corresponding Brightening or Darkening
slider changes to Custom curve. If you adjust
the position of the slider after this, it discards
all direct curve adjustments.
When you make direct brightening or
darkening adjustments on the graph or image,
the corresponding Brightening or Darkening
Amplitude slider changes to indicate the
current curve amplitude.
Drag the graph (bottom) The graph changes as you right-click and drag
down on the graph itself. The graph
represents the darken adjustments you are
making. The dark gray graph represents the
maximum amount you can drag the graph
before clipping (pink) begins.
You can use all the shortcuts below that Changes the tonal band on the graph itself
apply to the image, directly to the Graph with a corresponding change in the image.
itself. This is useful for making fine adjustments to a
specific tonal band.
On Image
Double-click with left mouse button Automatically sets Brightening to optimum for
that area of the image. A brighter area (e.g. a
face) works best.
Double-click with right mouse button Automatically sets the Darkening to optimum
(or Shift + double-click with left mouse for that area of the image.
Page 610 of 827

Area Action Result
button)
Page 611 of 827

Area Action Result
Ctrl + double-click with left mouse button Modifies the current brightening adjustment
curve to optimize it for the area surrounding
the tone level you clicked on. In most cases,
this will result in increasing the amount of
brightness applied to the area surrounding the
tone level you clicked on, while decreasing
the amount applied to other tone levels.
Use this method to make a specific subject or
area stand out by brightening.
Ctrl + double-click with right mouse button Modifies the current darkening
adjustment curve to optimize it for the
area surrounding the tone level you
clicked on. In most cases, this will result in
increasing the amount of darkness applied
to the area surrounding the tone level you
clicked on, while decreasing the amount
applied to other tone levels.
Use this method to make a specific subject
or area blend in by darkening.
Scroll up or down with the mouse wheel Increases or decreases the amount of
over the image brightening applied at that tone level in the
image. Both the image and the graph show the
changes.
Shift + scroll with the mouse wheel over Decreases or increases the amount of
the image darkening applied at that tone level in the
image.
Hold down "A" Sets the brightening Amplitude slider directly.

+ scrolling or
+ dragging with the left mouse button
Hold down "A" + Shift Sets the darkening Amplitude slider directly.
+ scrolling or
+ dragging with the right mouse button
Click and drag up and down on the image Increases or decreases the amount of
(left mouse button) brightening applied at that tone level in the
image. Both the image and the graph show the
changes.
(Only works if the image is actual size—no
zooming.)
Page 612 of 827

Area Action Result
Shift + click and drag up and down on the Decreases or increases the amount of
image (left or right mouse button) darkening applied at that tone level in the
image.
(Only works if the image is actual size—no
zooming.)
image.
point.
Reducing Haze
You can use the Dehaze tool to restore contrast, detail, and lost color to images. This tool is especially
useful for images that have been captured through a haze. A haze can occur when dust, smoke, or
other particles obscure the clarity of the image, particularly the sky.
To Dehaze an Image:
1. In Edit mode, in the Exposure/Lighting group, select Dehaze.
You can also access the Dehaze tool from the Filter drop-down menu or Filter toolbar.
2. Drag the Amount slider to adjust the strength of the correction.
Page 613 of 827

image.
point.
Dodge and Burn

Enhance your photos and improve contrast by controlling the light and intensity of color in select
areas. Dodge, burn, saturate and desaturate your photos to accentuate and define shapes, magnify
and fade color, and add shadows and highlights.
You can use the Dodge and Burn tool to lighten or darken areas in a photo without affecting other
areas. The tool is often used to lighten underexposed areas or darken overexposed areas.
Dodging and Burning Parts of an Image
To Lighten or Darken Areas of a Photo:

1. In Edit mode, in the Exposure/Lighting group, select the Dodge tool to lighten areas, or the Burn tool to
darken areas.
You can also access the Dodge and Burn tool from the Filter drop-down menu or Filter
toolbar.
2. Under Tool Settings, select the area to adjust: Shadows, Midtones, or Highlights.
3. Drag the range slider to fine-tune targeted areas within the shadows or highlights. Increasing the range
broadens the affected range of tones, while decreasing the range narrows the affected range of tones.
4. Under Brush settings select from the following preference settings:
Drag the Nib Width slider to select a brush size.
Drag the Feathering slider to soften the edges of your strokes.
Drag the Strength slider to adjust the intensity of your strokes.
5. Draw over the areas of the image you want to lighten or darken.
6. Click Done.
When you adjust the range slider, a preview of the areas of the image that will be affected by
brushing will be shown as a grayscale image. The brighter the pixels are in the preview image,
Page 614 of 827

the more they will be affected by brush strokes. Areas that are pure white will be affected with
full strength, and areas that are black will be completely unaffected. For best results, move the
range slider until the pixels you want to dodge or burn are white, and areas that you want to
leave unaffected are black.
Scroll with your mouse to adjust the brush size as you work, or use Shift + mouse scroll to
adjust feathering.
To Saturate or Desaturate Areas of a Photo:

1. Select the Saturate tool to intensify colors, or the Desaturate tool to fade colors.
2. Under Tool Settings, select one of the following:
Standard to target all areas of the photo.
Vibrance to target the less saturated colors and to prevent skin tones from becoming over-
saturated.
3. Under Brush settings select from the following preference settings:
Drag the Nib Width slider to select a brush size.
Drag the Feathering slider to soften the edges of your strokes
Drag the Strength slider to adjust the intensity of your strokes
4. Draw over the areas of the image you want to lighten or darken.
5. Click Done.
Adjusting White Balance

You can use the White Balance tool to remove unwanted hue from an image. For example, if you take
a photo at sunset and the resulting image has a reddish hue, also known as a red color cast, you can
use the White Balance tool to remove it.
To Remove a Color Cast from an Image:

1. In Edit mode, in the Color group, select White Balance.
You can also access the White Balance tool from the Filter drop-down menu or Filter
toolbar.
Page 615 of 827

2. Click an image area that should be white or gray. The color square shows the color of the original pixel
on the left, and the modified pixel on the right.
3. Drag the Temperature slider to the left (more blue) or right (more yellow) to select a specific color
temperature.
4. Drag the Tint slider to the left (more magenta) or right (more green) to match the white balance settings
that you selected when you took the photo.
5. To specify the strength of the white balance adjustment, move the Strength slider. Higher settings
remove more of the unwanted color.
6. Click Done to save your changes, or click Cancel to discard your changes and leave the tool.
If you are having difficulties achieving the desired effect, try clicking an image area that is a
different shade of white or gray.
to Developed.
image.
point.

You can use the Color EQ tool in Edit mode to adjust overall colors in an image or each color
individually. The advanced tools can subtly fine-tune and enhance colors, or completely change
individual colors in an image.
Color EQ is useful for changing a single color in an image. If you have an image with a yellow car, you
can use the Saturation tab to saturate the yellow or use the Brightness tab to brighten the yellow. In
the Hue tab, you can change the color of the car from yellow to pink. In the Contrast tab, you can
adjust the contrast of the yellow and use the Balance slider to target the brightness range for that
contrast adjustment.
You can then use the Global Adjustments to make changes to balance the colors in your image.
Vibrance adjusts the vibrancy of colors, saturation affects the strength of colors, color shift adjusts the
hue without affecting brightness, hue will change colors, and lightness will affect how light the whole
Page 616 of 827

image is. You can also adjust color using the Red, Green, and Blue sliders to increase or decrease the
balance of those colors.
If you have an image of a yellow car with a yellow building in the background, you can change
just the car by using the Selections tool. Select the car using the Selections tool and then apply
your color adjustments.
To Adjust Color:
1. In Edit mode, in the Color group, select Color EQ.
You can also access the Color EQ tool from the Filter drop-down menu or Filter toolbar.
2. Select any of the tabs within the ColorEQ or any of the sliders in the Global Adjustments section, and
adjust them according to the options described in the tables below.
Click Apply to apply your changes.
to Developed.
image.
point.
At the top of the Color EQ pane, choose either High Quality or Standard. Adjust image colors
individually. High Quality uses the newer, more modern color models, allowing for a visually
perceptive and higher quality adjustment. Standard supports previously developed images and allows
you to adjust colors individually or make global adjustments.
Color EQ Options - High Quality.
Page 617 of 827

Presets In the presets drop-down menu, you can

choose from existing presets, or save any
of your current edits as a preset, using
the save icon.
Color EQ Saturation, Adjust each color
Brightness individually by dragging
and Hue sliders right for more
sliders intensity, or left for less
intensity. You can also enter
a number into the fields for
You can also select a precise
color to adjust by placing
your cursor on the image
for the double arrow icon to
appear. Then click and drag
up or down to adjust the
colors beneath the double
arrow icon. The affected
color sliders automatically
adjust as you move your
cursor.
The sliders have the
following effects:
Saturation: slide left

to decrease
saturation and slide
right to increase
saturation.
Brightness: adjusts
the image
brightness.
Hue: adjusts the hue

of the image.
Contrast Adjust each color

sliders individually by dragging
sliders right for more
intensity, or left for less
intensity. You can also enter
a number into the fields for
You can also select a precise
Page 618 of 827

color to adjust by placing

your cursor on the image
for the double arrow icon to
appear. Then click and drag
up or down to adjust the
colors beneath the double
arrow icon. The affected
color sliders automatically
adjust as you move your
cursor.
On the Contrast tab, once
you have adjusted contrast,
you can adjust contrast
balance, which changes
whether you apply the
contrast to the lighter or
darker colors in the image.
Global Adjustments Vibrance, Drag the sliders to make
Saturation, global adjustments. They
Color Shift, will have the following
Hue, and effects:
Lightness
Vibrance: adjust the
Sliders
vibrance of the
image without
affecting skin tones.
Saturation: slide left

to decrease
saturation and slide
right to increase
saturation.
Color Shift: adjusts

the hue without
affecting brightness.
Hue: adjusts the hue

of the image.
Lightness: adjusts
the image
brightness.
Red, Green, Drag the sliders to make

and Blue global adjustments to the
sliders red, green, and blue
channels in your image.
Page 619 of 827

Color EQ Options - Standard.

Presets In the presets drop-down menu, you can
choose from existing presets, or save any
of your current edits as a preset, using the
save icon.
Vibrance Drag the slider to adjust the vibrance of the
image without affecting skin tones.
Vertical slider The vertical slider applies adjustments to the
entire image. It has the following effects on
the tabs:
Saturation: adjusts saturation from

grayscale to highly saturated.
Brightness: adjusts the image

brightness.
Hue: adjusts the hue of the image.
You can also enter a number into the field for

Direct image adjustments Place your cursor on the image for the double
arrow icon to appear. Then click and drag up
or down to adjust the colors beneath the
double arrow icon. The curve control and the
affected color sliders automatically adjust as
you move your cursor. The black down arrow
on the graph indicates the color you are
adjusting in the image.
The curve appears black in the graph, and you
cannot directly adjust it. To apply further
adjustments, you can alter the white curve.
When you adjust the white curve, the black
curve automatically changes with it. You can
also enter a number into the fields for precise
adjustments.
Individual color sliders Adjust each color with individual sliders.
Select the color you want to adjust and click
and drag the sliders. You can also enter a
number into the fields for precise
adjustments.
Page 620 of 827

Adjusting Color With the Color Wheel

In Develop and Edit mode, you can use the color wheel to adjust precise colors in your image. This lets
you change a precise color's saturation, hue, brightness, contrast, and contrast balance. You can also
adjust smoothness, which acts like a feathering tool to soften a color's edges. The Color Wheel is
particularly useful for common requests like making a blue sky more blue, or brightening dark water
that is meant to depict a bright lake.
To Adjust Color Using the Color Wheel:

1. Open the Color Wheel using one of the following options:
In Develop mode, choose Color Wheel from the Tune tab in the Develop Tools pane.
Note: to use the Color Wheel in Develop mode, you must have Color EQ set to High Quality. To
In Edit mode, choose Color Wheel from the Color options in the Filter Menu.
2. Choose a color to edit by clicking and dragging the section of the color wheel around, or by using the
eyedropper on the image itself. As you move the eyedropper around the image, you will see a dot,
known as the hue indicator, move around the wheel to show the where the color you are hovering over
sits on the wheel.
3. Refine your selection. You can increase or decrease the color selection size by clicking and dragging the
double arrows at the edge of your selection on the wheel. You can also refine the color saturation of the
selection by clicking and dragging your selection away from the edges of the wheel, or away from the
center of the wheel. The less saturated colors are in the center of the wheel and the more saturated
colors are towards the edge of the wheel.
Page 621 of 827

To invert the colors you have in the selection, you can click the Invert selection button.
To view the selection you have made with the color wheel, click and hold the Preview
selection mask button.
4. Adjust the edge of your selection by using the Smoothness slider. This tool softens or sharpens the
edges of your selection, working similarly to feathering, to soften or sharpen the cut off point.
5. Use the sliders to adjust the selected colors in your image. The individual sliders will have the following
effects:
Saturation: slide left to decrease saturation and slide right to increase saturation.
Hue: slide left or right to adjust hue.
Brightness: slide left to decrease brightness and slide right to increase brightness.
Contrast: slide left to decrease contrast and slide right to increase contrast.
Contrast Balance: once you have adjusted contrast, you can adjust contrast balance, which
changes whether you apply the contrast to the lighter or darker colors in the image.
To see what your image looked like without the edit, press the Show Previous button in
Edit Mode, or press Show Original in Develop mode.
To reset any changes, right-click on either the relevant slider, or the wheel to reset all
changes.
6. Press Done to save your changes and exit the Color Wheel.
To Adjust Multiple Colors Using the Color Wheel:

Once you have made your first color wheel edits, you can make changes to other colors using
additional color wheels.
To do this, click on the plus symbol next to the color wheel icon. +
To Delete Edits Made Using the Color Wheel:

You can delete color wheel edits until you save the image as a new file in Develop mode, or until press
Apply or Done in Edit mode.
To do this, click on the cross symbol next to your list of color wheel edits.
Page 622 of 827

Color Wheels in Pixel Targeting

The Pixel Targeting tool in Develop mode and the Pixel Targeting tool in Edit mode both feature color
wheels that are used in conjunction with filters to enable Pixel Targeting to make selections based on
pixel color.
See also:

Colors in every image are split into highlights, midtones, and shadows. You can use the tone wheels in
Develop and Edit mode to add color tints to certain tones in your image. There are two curved sliders
with each tone wheel. The curved slider on the left is the saturation slider, the slider on the right is the
brightness slider. The tone wheels themselves allow you to pinpoint a hue to adjust.
To Adjust Color Using the Tone Wheels:

1. Open the Tone Wheels using one of the following options:
In Develop mode, choose Tone Wheels from the Tune tab in the Develop Tools pane.
Note: to use the Tone Wheels in Develop mode, you must have Color EQ set to High Quality. To
In Edit mode, choose Tone Wheels from the Color options in the Filter Menu.
2. Choose a hue to edit by clicking and dragging the target point within the tone wheel, or by using the
relevant eyedropper on the image itself. As you move the eyedropper around the image, you will see a
dot, known as the hue indicator, move around the wheel to show the where the color you are hovering
over sits on the wheel. The three eyedroppers relate to the relevant tone wheels. You can also refine
the saturation of the selection by clicking and dragging your selection away from the edges of the
wheel, or away from the center of the wheel. The less saturated colors are in the center of the wheel
and the more saturated colors are towards the edge of the wheel.
Page 623 of 827

Moving the target point towards the outside of the wheel increases tone saturation.
Moving it towards the inside of the wheel decreases tone saturation.
3. With a hue selected, increase saturation and/or brightness for your selected tones.
4. Press Done to exit the Color Wheel.
To reset any changes, right-click on either the relevant slider, or the wheel to reset all changes.
See also:
Adjusting Color with the Color Wheel
Channel Filtering Inside Filters

Channel filtering inside of filters creates high-quality grayscale, sepia tone, or other tinted images by
making creative color adjustments to an image. Channel filtering modifies a targeted color channel by
mixing the existing color channels in the image. Color channels are comprised of tonal values found in
grayscale images representing the color components in a channel type (RGB or CMYK). When applying
a channel filter, grayscale data is added or subtracted from the selected channel. Channel filtering does
not add or subtract colors to a specific channel, as in Channel Selection.
To create high-quality channel filtered images, make a selection from the Apply to channel drop down
available in the following filters:
l Skin Tune
l Chromatic Aberration
l Vignette
Page 624 of 827

l Special Effects
l Grain
l Exposure
l Levels
l Auto Levels
l Tone Curves
l Light EQTM
l Dehaze
l White Balance
l Tone Wheels
l Sharpen
l Blur
l Noise
l Clarity
The options available under the Apply to channel drop down default to "RGB (normal)" which is a
normal channel selection for RGB channel types. Other channels available in the Apply to channel
drop down include:
l Red,
l Green,
l Blue, and
l Hue,
l Saturation,
l Lightness.
To adjust an image using Color Filtering Inside a filter:

1. In Edit mode, do one of the following:
l Select one of the above filters from the Filter main menu heading, or
l Select one of the above filters from the Filter Menu pane.
2. In the pane dedicated to the selected filter, make a selection from Apply to channel drop down list.
3. Use the selected filters to make adjustments to the selected channel.
l Click Apply to accept any changes and remain in the tool,
l Click Done to accept any changes and close the tool, or
l Click Cancel to discard any changes and close the tool.
Creating a Grayscale Image

You can create rich grayscale images when you can control the brightness of the red, green, and blue
channels, as well as the overall brightness. Use the Convert to Black and White tool to emphasize
different areas or aspects of a photo, as well as alter its mood and tone.
If you hover your mouse over each slider and watch the effect on the small preview, it shows you
which parts of the image will be affected by each channel. This helps to gauge the effect of each slider
on the image.
Page 625 of 827

To Create a Grayscale Image:

1. In Edit mode, in the Color group, select Convert to Black & White.
You can also access the Convert to Black & White tool from the Filter drop-down menu or
Filter toolbar.
2. Adjust the settings as described in the table below.
3. Click Done to save your changes, or click Cancel to discard your changes and return to the Filter menu.
Grayscale Options
Page 626 of 827

Brightness Tab
On the Brightness tab, do any of the following:

Drag individual color sliders, or left-click on the image (where a color previously occurred) and drag up or
down to alter the brightness of specific tones. For instance, drag your cursor on sky areas to alter the
brightness of the blue.
Drag the Percent Red slider to the left or right.
The more red there is in a pixel, the more effect the red slider has on that pixel. The area of
red in the picture is brightened or darkened more than other areas.
Drag the Percent Green slider the left or right.
The more green there is in a pixel, the more effect the green slider has on that pixel. The area
of green in the picture is brightened or darkened more than other areas.
Drag the Percent Blue slider to the left or right.
The more blue there is in a pixel, the more effect the blue slider has on that pixel. The area of
blue in the picture is brightened or darkened more than other areas.
Drag the Percent Brightness slider to the right or left to brighten or darken the whole image.
You can right-click the slider to reset the value to zero.
Contrast Tab
You can increase or decrease the contrast of each individual color. In addition, you can specify the brightness
range that the contrast adjustment will target for each color.
On the Contrast tab, do the following:
Strength: to adjust the contrast in specific color tones, drag individual color sliders, or left-click on the image
(where a color previously occurred) and drag up or down.
Balance: to set the targeted brightness range for the contrast adjustment, adjust the slider to bring details out
of highlights or shadows. To bring details out of the midtones, leave the Balance sliders set to 0.
Hold down Shift while clicking and dragging on the image to target the color's corresponding
Balance slider.
You can right-click the slider to reset the value to zero.
At the bottom of the Convert to Black & White panel, you can use the Amount and Hue sliders to add color
back into the image. Choose the color using the Hue slider. The saturation of the color added back to any given
pixel is scaled based on both the amount of color/saturation that existed in the original image and the Amount
slider.
Page 627 of 827

image.
point.
to Developed.
Adjusting Split Tone

Split toning is a powerful technique originating in film photography to tint the highlights and shadows.
The Split Tone tool gives you creative control over the Hue and Saturation of your highlights and
shadows. Use the sliders to adjust the balance of tones in the highlights and shadows of your photos.
Split toning allows you to add a creative element to RAW conversion and non-destructive editing in
ACDSee.
To Adjust Highlights and Shadows:

1. In Edit mode, under the Color group, select Split Tone.
You can also access the Split Tone tool from the Filter drop-down menu or Filter toolbar.
2. Drag the sliders to apply colored highlights and shadows as described in the table below.
Adjustment Options
Page 628 of 827

Highlights
Hue Drag the slider to the right to select a highlight color.
Saturation Drag the slider to the right to increase saturation of the specified color in the
highlights of the image.
Shadows
Hue Drag the slider to the right to select a shadow color.
Saturation Drag the slider to the right to increase saturation of the specified color in the
shadows of the image.
Balance Drag the slider to the right to emphasize the highlight color; drag the slider to
the left to emphasize the shadow color. For example if the slider is set to the
maximum at 50, then full emphasis is applied to the highlight color; if the slider
is set to the minimum -50, then full emphasis is applied to the shadow color.
Create a sepia tone effect by first reducing the saturation of your photo with the Advanced
Color tool and then applying a reddish brown hue with the Split Tone tool. Or create a
monochromatic black and white photo with a slight tint of hue.
image.
point.
Color Grading with LUTs

"Color LUT" stands for Color Lookup Table. Color LUTs are lists that instruct ACDSee or related
programs to map specific RGB values to other specific color values. You can import LUTs and use them
as filters in ACDSee. You can apply a LUT in the same way you would use any other Edit mode filter.
You can also create your own LUTs from adjustment layers. Color LUT supported file types are .3DL
and .CUBE.
You can also apply a Color LUT as an adjustment layer.
To Apply a Color LUT to Your Image:
Page 629 of 827

1. In Edit mode, in the Color group, select Color LUTs.
2. On the Color LUTs panel, do one of the following:
Select a LUT from the list. The LUT is immediately applied.
Press the Import LUTs button. In the Open dialog, browse to the location of your LUT files, and
press Open. The LUT is immediately applied.
If an imported LUT file's location has changed, you will have to reload it in the Color LUTs
panel.
point.
image.
To Refresh Your List of Color LUTs:

You can refresh your list of available LUTs to reveal moved or deleted files. Unavailable LUTs will be
indicated in a darker font color.
On the Color LUTs panel, press the Refresh List button.
To Remove Color LUTs:

1. On the Color LUTs panel, press the Remove LUTs button.
2. In the Remove LUTs dialog, toggle the checkboxes next to the LUTs you want to delete.
3. Press Remove LUTs.
Creating Color LUTs
To Create a Color LUT:

You can create your own LUTs by using adjustment layers. Find out how in the Adjustment Layers
topic. You can add multiple adjustment layers and configure them to achieve your desired LUT. You
Page 630 of 827

can create a LUT using the following adjustment layers: Exposure, Levels, Curves, Light EQ, White
Balance, Vibrance, Color EQ, RGB, Split Tone, Add Color, Black and White, Negative, Photo Effect,
Gradient Map, Posterize, Threshold, and Color LUT.
You cannot create a LUT from a regular layer.
Created LUTs will not take masks into consideration.
1. With an image open in Edit mode, add one or more adjustment layers and configure their settings as
desired.
2. Choose Tools | Create LUT.
3. In the Create LUT dialog, configure the settings as described in the table below.
4. Press the Save button.
5. Enter a name for your LUT and press Save. Your LUT will immediately be added to the list in the Color
LUTs filter in the Color group, the Color LUTs adjustment layer drop-down list, and the Color LUTs group
on the Tune tab in Develop mode.
Create LUTs Options

Description (Optional) Enter a description for your LUT. This is most useful if
you are intending to share your LUT with others.
Copyright (Optional) Enter the copyright for your LUT. This is most useful if
you are intending to share your LUT with others.
Format Select 3DL or CUBE for your LUT file format.
Quality Select your LUT quality. A higher quality setting will create a
larger file size.
Using the Histogram

The Histogram is a graph that represents the distribution of color intensity for each color channel in an
image.
To Display and Use the Histogram:

1. In View or Edit mode, click Panes | Histogram.
2. On the Histogram, check or uncheck the following checkboxes:
R: shows or hides the red color channel.
G: shows or hides the green color channel.
Page 631 of 827

B: shows or hides the blue color channel.
L: shows or hides the lightness of the image.
Using the Color Dialog Box

The Colors dialog box appears in several places in Edit mode when you select or apply a color. You can
use the Color dialog box to select a color in multiple ways and to adjust a color using several different
tools.
The Standard Tab

On the first tab, there is a fixed honeycomb of Basic colors to choose from, including gray, black, and
white at the bottom. Below it is a grid of Custom or Favorite colors that you can fill in by selecting a
color and then right-clicking a box in the grid. To create a custom color, click the Custom tab.
The Custom Tab

On the second tab, there is a color palette. On the far right is a color slider, which you can use to
navigate to a color group and gain access to any or all colors of the spectrum. Add colors to your
Page 632 of 827

Custom colors by selecting the color in the palette and then right-clicking a box in the grid.
Selecting and Adjusting Colors

To select a color, click on a square in the grid of custom colors, or on the color palette. You can also
drag over the color palette. When you click a color, that color appears in the New box and all of its
numerical values, (Hue, Saturation, Luminosity, as well as Red, Green, and Blue), appear in the fields
on the Custom tab.
You can also adjust a color by changing the Hue, Saturation, and Luminosity values. To select a precise
color, type in the values for that color. You can do the same using the Red, Green, and Blue values.
Sharpening an Image
You can use the Sharpen tool to sharpen an image by enhancing medium and high contrast edges.
To Sharpen an Image Using Sharpen Tool:

1. In Edit mode, in the Detail group, select Sharpen.
You can also access the Sharpen tool from the Filter drop-down menu or Filter toolbar.
2. Drag the sliders to enhance or fix your image as described below.
to Developed.
Sharpen Options
Page 633 of 827

Amount Specifies the amount of sharpening applied by increasing contrast around the
edges.
Radius Controls the number of pixels to adjust around each edge. Higher values increase
the number of sharpened pixels and tend to bring out coarser detail, while lower
values reduce the number of sharpened pixels and tend to bring out finer detail.
Mask Allows the targeting of edges, while suppressing the sharpening of noise and
texture. To view the areas the mask affects, press the Alt key when moving the
mask slider. Areas affected by sharpening appear white.
Detail Suppresses the halo, (the light border that forms around edges with extreme
sharpening), by reducing its intensity. The higher the value, the stronger the
reduction.
Threshold Specifies how different the pixel lightness values within an edge must be before
the pixels within the edge are sharpened. Higher values sharpen only stronger
edges but minimize the appearance of noise. Lower values sharpen both strong
and weaker edges, but can increase the appearance of noise. We recommend you
set the threshold to enhance edges while keeping background noise to a
minimum.
image.
point.
Blurring an Image
You can use the Blur tool to apply different kinds of blur to an image.
To Blur an Image:
Page 634 of 827

1. In Edit mode, in the Detail group, select Blur.
You can also access the Blur tool from the Filter drop-down menu or Filter toolbar.
2. In the Blur type section, select the type of blur to apply.
Click Done to apply your changes and close the Blur tool.
to Developed.
Blur Types
Page 635 of 827

Gaussian
Produces an even, smooth blur.
Amount Specifies the amount of blur. Move the slider to

the right to intensify the effect.
Linear
Produces a blurring effect that gives the illusion of movement.

Angle Specifies the direction of the blur effect.
Radial
Produces blur around a center point. Click the image to set the center point.

Clockwise Specifies clockwise blur.
Counter-clockwise Specifies counter-clockwise blur.
Horizontal position Specifies the blur's center point on the horizontal

axis.
Vertical position Specifies the blur's center point on the vertical

axis.
Spread
Produces a smeared or frosted blur.

Zoom
Page 636 of 827

Produces inward or outward blur to or from a center point.

Zoom in Creates a blur that zooms in to the image's center.
Zoom out Creates a blur that zooms out from the image's
center.
Horizontal position Specifies the blur's center point on the horizontal

axis.
Vertical position Specifies the blur's center point on the vertical

axis.
Smart Blur
Produces blur by detecting and avoiding edges, and preserves detail based on the threshold
setting. This effect is usually used to smooth out skin.

Threshold Specifies how little detail an area must have

before the blur will apply to it.
Lens
Produces a blur that mimics the blurring effect of a camera aperture.

Select a bokeh shape from the options on the Blur panel. These shapes concentrate in
highlights.
Amount Specifies the strength of the blur. Move the slider

to the right to intensify the effect.
Bokeh Frequency Specifies how often the bokeh shapes show up.
Bokeh Brightness Specifies how much the bokeh shapes stand out.
Page 637 of 827

image.
point.
About Noise and Noise Reduction

Image noise looks like random black, white, or colored pixels in an area of a photo where there should
be solid color, such as a dark night sky. In digital photography, noise is typically more visible in the
dark areas of a photo.
There are many causes of image noise. You will increase image noise if you use a high ISO setting (such
as ISO 800) to capture a photo, or if you extend the exposure time. (You would typically use a high ISO
setting and extend exposure time to take a photo in low light.) However, image noise can be caused by
dead or stuck pixels in a digital camera's image sensor. Similarly, dust on a camera lens or scanner bed
can cause noise by blocking or reflecting light.
Images generally have two types of noise: luminance and color. Luminance noise is random variations
of brightness, and particularly in gray areas, may appear spotted when there should be a solid color in
the area of the image.
Color noise is random variations of color in the image.
Noise is visually distracting, so in most cases you will want to reduce noise in your photos. However, if
you reduce noise too much you may unintentionally reduce image sharpness.You can use the Noise
Removal tool to remove both luminance and color noise in your images.
Page 638 of 827

Loading Images in ACDSee Ultimate with Noise Reduction from Legacy Versions
If ACDSee loads an acdc file made with a previous version, the denoise adjustment layer is
added using the legacy settings and runs the legacy algorithm. Loading does not change the
image. The ACDSee 2022 GUI is loaded, but only the legacy sliders are enabled (Luminance and
Color) and the new sliders disabled. If a legacy slider is moved, the new algorithm is engaged
and the new sliders enabled. The image can then be re-adjusted for better results using the
additional ACDSee 2022 sliders.
2022 acdc files that include denoise adjustment layers will not load in older versions of
ACDSee.
Removing Noise
You can use the Remove Noise tool to remove noise from your images while preserving details that
you want to retain.
You can use the Remove Noise tool to remove hot image pixels caused by digital cameras with
malfunctioning CCD array sensors, or the extra pixels caused by a dusty scanner or camera
lens.
To Remove Noise from an Image:

1. In Edit mode, in the Detail group, select Noise.
You can also access the Noise tool from the Filter drop-down menu or Filter toolbar.
2. Select the Remove Noise tab.
3. Select an option from the Noise Type section.
Hold down the Alt key while adjusting a slider to view a preview of its effect on the image.
Click Done to apply your changes and close the Remove Noise tool.
Page 639 of 827

to Developed.
Noise Removal Options

Apply to channel
Modifies a targeted color channel by mixing the existing color channels in the image.
Noise Type
Camera Noise Removes digital camera noise. Adjust the following sliders to
Removal further remove noise:
Luminance Reduces the random variations of brightness in the noise.
Strength Controls the strength of the Luminance slider.
Color Reduces the random variations of color in the noise.
Preserve Restores details lost due to strong noise removal. Set the slider to
Detail adjust how much detail is restored.
Preserve Determines the level of detail necessary to be included in the

Detail Preserve Detail slider's adjustments.
Threshold
Reduces impulsive, or salt-and-pepper noise while preserving

Median Noise
edges. Select from the following options to further remove
Removal
noise:
Square Removes noise using a 3 x 3 pixel square.
X Removes noise using a 3 x 3 pixel X shape. Use this option when

you want to preserve an image's thin and diagonal lines.
Plus Removes noise using a 3 x 3 pixel plus (+) shape. Use this option
when you want to preserve an image's thin, vertical, and
horizontal lines.
Despeckle Removes noise.
Page 640 of 827

image.
point.
Adding Noise
You can use the Add Noise tool to add a grainy texture to an image. Adding small amounts of noise can
reduce the appearance of minor imperfections in the original image.
To Add Noise to an Image:

1. In Edit mode, in the Detail group, select Noise.
You can also access the Noise tool from the Filter drop-down menu or Filter toolbar.
2. Select the Add Noise tab.
Click Done to apply your changes and close the Add Noise tool.
to Developed.
Add Noise Options
Page 641 of 827

Intensity Specifies the amount of noise to add to the image. A higher intensity
increases the chance that a noise pixel will replace a pixel in the original
image.
Color proximity Specifies the color of noise pixels to add to the image. A lower value gives
each noise pixel a color similar to the pixel it replaces. Higher values
result in a random selection of the noise pixel color.
Noise color Select one of the following options to specify noise pixel color:
l Random: randomly selects the color.
l Monochrome: produces black and white noise pixels.
l Adjustable: randomly selects the color of each noise pixel, but more
pixels match a defined color. To define a color, click the color picker
and select a color.
Noise placement Adds noise to image areas that closely match a defined color. Check the
Set color checkbox to enable noise placement, and click the color picker
to specify a color.
Randomize Indicates the random placement of noise in an image.

When you use Add Noise tool, ACDSee Ultimate places the noise pixels
based on a random seed. This makes the image noise different each time
you use the Add Noise tool. You can define a specific random seed to
generate identical image noise.
image.
Adjusting Details
To highlight important details in your photo, and remove the emphasis from others, you can use the
Detail Brush. The impact of the Detail Brush is cumulative. This means that the more you brush in a
particular area using the blur option, for example, the more blurry the area will become.
To Adjust Details:
1. In Edit mode, in the Detail group, select Detail Brush.
You can also access the Detail Brush tool from the Filter drop-down menu or Filter
toolbar.
Page 642 of 827

2. Adjust the settings as described below.
Detail Brush Options

Operation
Select the operation would you like to perform:

Blur
Sharpen
Tool settings
If you selected Sharpen, set the following:
Radius Controls the number of pixels to adjust around each edge. Higher values increase the
number of sharpened pixels and tend to bring out coarser detail, while lower values
reduce the number of sharpened pixels and tend to bring out finer detail.
Threshold Specifies how different the pixel lightness values within an edge must be before the
pixels within the edge are sharpened. Higher values sharpen only stronger edges but
minimize the appearance of noise. Lower values sharpen both strong and weaker
edges, but can increase the appearance of noise. We recommend you set the
threshold to enhance edges while keeping background noise to a minimum.
Brush settings
Nib Width Drag the slider to select a brush size.
Feathering Drag the slider to soften the edges of your strokes.
Strength Drag the slider to determine the strength of the sharpening or blurring.
You can also type a number into the number box and incrementally make precise
adjustments.
Page 643 of 827

Adjusting Clarity
The Clarity tool adds subtle definition to the details in your image. Use the Clarity tool to enhance the
contrast of midtones in your images, without overpowering the shadows and highlights.
To Adjust the Clarity of Your Image:

1. In Edit mode, in the Detail group, select Clarity.
You can also access the Clarity tool from the Filter drop-down menu or Filter toolbar.
2. Drag the Strength slider to the right for greater clarity, or to the left for reverse clarity.
You can also type a number into the number box and incrementally make precise
adjustments.
image.
point.
Page 644 of 827

ACDSee Photo Studio Home 2022
Chapter 8: People Mode

Using People Mode
People mode is a dedicated space for managing all images of people.
People mode can be accessed by selecting the People mode icon in the mode bar, or by selecting
Tools | Manage People... from the Manage mode main menu.
There are three views in People mode:
l Named,
l Unnamed, and
l Person.
The Named and Unnamed views can be accessed from the Named and Unnamed buttons directly
above the results grid in the button bar. To access the Person view, double-click a person's facial image
in Named view only.
In all views, select faces by clicking the face, or multi-select with Ctrl + click, Shift + click.
For both the Unnamed and Person views, toggle the Show Face Thumbnails icon and the
Source Image Thumbnails icon to view the face thumbnail or the entire source image.
Named View
Unnamed View
Page 645 of 827

the face.
Person View
Folders Pane
The Folders pane is used for filtering results by folder. Click to select a single folder, or multi-select with
Ctrl + click, Shift + click, or by clicking the Easy-Select arrows to the left of the folder names.
The Folders pane is located to the left of the results grid and has two views:
l Tree view, for an expanded view of folders visited in Manage mode that contain faces, and
l List view, for a flat list of folders containing faces.
Use the View button to the right of the Folders label to toggle between the Tree view and the List view.
Use the Folders Refresh icon below the Folders label to clear the current folder selection.
See also:
Named View
Page 646 of 827

To merge people:
1. In People mode, in the Named view, select more than one person.
2. Right-click one of the selected people.
3. From the context menu, select Merge People.
4. In the Merge People dialog, do one of the following two options:
l Enter a new name in the Enter or select a name field, or
l Select a name from the Enter or select a name drop down.
5. Click the OK button.
Merging can also be driven from the Edit menu.
To rename a person:
1. In People mode, in the Named view, select a person to rename.
2. Right-click the selected person.
3. From the context menu, select Rename Person.
4. Enter the person's new name in the highlighted bar beneath the person's image.
5. Press Enter.
Renaming can also be driven by clicking an associated name box beneath the image, or from
the Edit menu.
To remove a person or persons:

1. In People mode, in the Named view, select a single person or people to remove.
2. Right-click the selected person(s).
3. From the context menu, select Remove Person(s).
4. In the prompted dialog, click the OK button.
Removing can also be driven from the Edit menu.
See also:
Using People Mode
Unnamed View
Page 647 of 827

the face.
To delete the face from the Unnamed view,

1. Select the face to be deleted.
l Right-click the face and select Delete Face(s) from the context menu,
l Select Edit | Delete Face(s) from the main menu, or
l Press Delete.
To assign a name to an unnamed face using the name bar:

1. Click the bar beneath an unnamed face.
2. Enter a name.
3. Press Enter.
To assign a name to an unnamed face using the context menu:

1. Right-click an unnamed face.
2. Select Name Face(s)... from the context menu, or press F2,
3. Enter a name in the Name field.
4. Click OK.
Faces supplied with names automatically disappear from the Unnamed view and are
populated into the Named view.
In Grouped, deleting or naming a group in the top pane will affect all of the faces in the group.
Deleting or naming faces in the bottom pane will affect only those faces.
See also:
Page 648 of 827

Using People Mode
Person View
Assigned Faces Pane

The Assigned Faces pane is populated with facial images previously assigned with the person's name.
Each image in the Assigned Faces pane has a right-click context sensitive help menu detailed in the
following table.
Assigned Faces Pane Context Menu Options

Menu Item Shortcut Description
Rename Face(s)... F2 Opens the Rename Face(s) dialog where a

new name can be entered. The facial
image is automatically removed from the
current Person view and placed in the
Named view after a new name is applied.
Remove Face(s)... Delete Removes the name from the facial image
and returns the image to the Unnamed
view.
Delete Face(s) Shift + Delete Removes the association with a person and
deletes the facial image from People
mode.
Set as Profile Sets the selected image as the profile

image for the person.
The Suggested Faces Pane

The Suggested Faces pane is populated with faces that AI considers a possible match with the person.
When the AI in People mode considers unnamed facial images to be a possible match for a person, a
face icon will appear in the lower left corner of a named face in Named view.
Page 649 of 827

Each image in the Suggested Faces pane has a right-click context sensitive help menu detailed in the
following table.
Suggested Faces Pane Context Menu Options

Menu Item Shortcut Description
Confirm Face(s)... Enter Confirms the AI-generated suggestion as

belonging to the person. The green
check mark icon located in the name
bar beneath the facial image can also be
used to confirm.
Deny Face(s)... Delete Removes the AI-generated suggestion

from the facial image and returns the
image to the Unnamed view. The red
crossed out circle icon located in the
name bar beneath the facial image can
also be used to deny.
Rename Face(s) F2 Opens the Rename Face(s) dialog where

a new name can be entered. The facial
image is automatically removed from the
current Person view and placed in the
Named view after a new name is
applied.
Delete Face(s) Shift + Delete Removes the AI-generated suggestion

from the facial image and deletes the
facial image from People mode.
To confirm or deny all faces in the pane, click the Confirm All Suggestions icon or the Deny
All Suggestions icon located at the far right of the Suggested Faces pane header bar.
See also:
Using People Mode
Page 650 of 827

Chapter 9: 365 Mode

For help with 365.acdsee.com, click the Web tab, then click Support.
You can use 365 mode to upload your images to 365.acdsee.com, an image sharing and storage
service available to ACDSee Ultimate users. With 365 mode and 365.acdsee.com, you can upload and
browse through your online images without having to launch an Internet browser. You need to create
a 365.acdsee.com account first, before uploading your photos.
With 365.acdsee.com, you can:
Page 651 of 827

Create Your 365.acdsee.com Account
Upload Images
Set Privacy Settings for Your Image Folders
Working in 365 Mode

You can use 365 mode to upload your images to 365.acdsee.com, an image sharing and storage
service available to ACDSee Ultimate users. With 365 mode and 365.acdsee.com, you can upload and
browse through your online images without having to launch an Internet browser. Or you can access
365.acdsee.com at any time directly from an Internet browser.
365 Mode Has Two Parts: 365.acdsee.com and Transfer

To enable the 365.acdsee.com and Transfer tabs, you need to create a 365.acdsee.com
account.
365.acdsee.com Clicking the 365.acdsee.com tab takes you to 365.acdsee.com, where you can
browse through images you have uploaded to your online account, see other
users' images, or upgrade your membership level. 365.acdsee.com has the
following menus:
l Manage: organize your images into folders.
l Upload: click Upload to switch to Transfer for uploading images.
l Profile: modify your profile and set specific information to public or
private.
l Support: see the Help or FAQs for assistance with 365.acdsee.com.
Transfer Transfer allows you to upload images to your 365.acdsee.com account. In

Transfer, the screen splits into two. The bottom of the screen displays the
available images in your computer, and the top of the screen displays your
365.acdsee.com account.
You cannot take an image from 365 mode and open it in Develop or Edit mode for editing. To
edit an image, select an image in Manage or View mode and open it in Develop or Edit mode
for processing.
Creating an ACDSee 365 Account

Before you can upload your images to 365.acdsee.com, you need to create an account.
To Create an ACDSee 365 Account:
Page 652 of 827

1. Click the 365 tab to enter ACDSee 365 mode.
2. Press the Sign Up button.
3. Enter your information into the fields and click Create your account.
If you already have an account, click the Sign In button.
Uploading Images to ACDSee 365

ACDSee 365, or 365.acdsee.com, is an image sharing and storage service for ACDSee users. Before you
upload photos, you need to create a 365.acdsee.com account. There is no size limit for uploading
images to your 365.acdsee.com account.
Depending on your ACDSee 365 account level, you can also upload videos.
To Upload Your Images:

3. Click Upload to switch to Transfer.
Your screen splits in two, with the bottom part of the screen displaying images on your
computer, and the top part of the screen representing your images online.
4. Use the drop-down list in the top right corner to select one of the following:
Upload Original with associated data: upload image in current file format, including any
associated files such as those containing metadata. This option is the best for images you want to
archive.
Upload Original (as JPG): uploads image as a JPG in its original size.
Upload 1920 x 1440 JPG: converts the image to JPG and sets the size to 1920 x 1440. This
option is the best for high quality JPGs.
Upload 1024 x 768 JPG: converts the image to JPG and sets the size to 1024 x 768. This option
results in the fastest upload.
5. Do one of the following to select an image to upload:
Click and drag an image into the top part of the screen to upload it to your 365.acdsee.com
account. To select multiple images, press the Shift or the Ctrl key and click on the images to
Page 653 of 827

select them. You can also click and drag your cursor to select multiple images.
Drag a folder of your images to the top part of the screen.
Select images and click the up arrow icon beside Transfer Manager, or click Sync to Web to
upload all the images in the Sync to Web folders.
When upload is complete, images are displayed in the order they were uploaded. Overlay icons
indicate the file type and if the image has been developed or edited.
You can upload a folder with sub-folders. 365 mode respects folder hierarchy when uploading
a folder to your 365.acdsee.com account.
Setting Folders to Sync to Web

You can set specific folders on your computer to upload all of their images to specific folders on
365.acdsee.com. As you add new images to the folder on your computer, you can quickly sync the
corresponding folder on 365.acdsee.com by pressing the Sync to Web button. The sync works in one
direction; images from your computer are uploaded to your 365.acdsee.com account.
To Set a Folder to Sync to Web:

1. In 365 mode, click Sign in.
2. Click the Transfer tab.
3. In the Folders pane in the bottom half of the screen, right-click a folder and select Set as "Sync to Web"
Folder or click Alt + A.
4. In the Setup "Sync to Web" Folder dialog box, set the options as described below.
5. Click OK.
You can also set Sync to Web folders by clicking File | Manage Sync to Web Folders.
To Run Sync to Web:

1. In Transfer, on the right side along the screen split, click Sync to Web.
2. Click OK.
To Edit a Folder's Sync to Web Settings:

1. In Transfer, in the Folders pane in the bottom half of the screen, right-click a Sync to Web folder, and
select Edit "Sync to Web" Folder.
Page 654 of 827

2. In the Edit "Sync to Web" Folder dialog box, set the options as described below.
3. Click OK.
Sync to Web Folder Options

Upload Type Use the drop-down list to select one of the following:
l Upload Original with associated data: uploads images in their current
file format, including any associated files such as those containing
metadata. This option is the best for images you want to archive.
l Upload Original (as JPG): converts the image to JPEG in it's original size.
l Upload 1920 x 1440 JPG: converts the image to JPEG and sets the res-
olution to 1920 x 1440. This option is the best for high quality JPEGs.
l Upload 1024 x 768 JPG: converts the image to JPEG and sets the res-
olution to 1024 x 768. This option is the best for images you want to view on
a Netbook, and results in the fastest upload.
Local Folder Displays the path to the folder you selected. Click the browse button to select a
different folder.
Online Folder Enter a name for the online folder. By default this is set to the same name as the
folder on your computer that you want to sync to Web.
Sync to Web right Check this box to upload the images in the selected folder immediately. If you do
away not check this checkbox, you can click Sync to Web to upload all the images in all
the folders you have chosen to sync.
Creating Folders and Setting Privacy

In 365.acdsee.com and Transfer, you can create folders and make them private or public. When you
make a folder public, anyone can find and see the images in that folder. You can also copy the URL for
your public folders and share it with family and friends.
When you create a new folder, it is set to private by default.
To Create a Folder and Make it Private or Public in Transfer:

1. In 365 mode, click Transfer.
2. In the Folders pane on the top left, right-click your user name, and select New Online Folder...
3. In the New Online Folder dialog box, enter a name for the new folder.
4. Click OK.
By default the new folder is Private.

To change the folder to Public , right-click on the folder, and then click Make Public.
Page 655 of 827

To Share the URL for a Public Folder:

1. In 365 mode, click Transfer.
2. In the Folders pane on the top left, right-click on a public folder.
3. Click Copy URL.
4. Paste the URL into an email, instant message, or other application to share it.
Right-click a public folder and select Share folder to share in an email, post on a social
networking site, or to create a widget.
Changing the Rating System

Photos that you have rated in Manage mode are rated with a star rating system in 365 mode. You can
select how to use stars to rate your photos.
To Change Your Rating System:

1. Click Tools and then select Options.
2. In the Options dialog box, select ACDSee 365.
3. In Ratings, select Convert 'Rating 1' to 5 stars or Convert 'Rating 1' to 1 star.
4. Click OK.
Downloading Images
365.acdsee.com is also a storage service for ACDSee Ultimate users. You can download your images
from your 365.acdsee.com account to your computer at any time.
To Download Your Images:

3. Click the Transfer tab.
Your screen splits in two, with the bottom part of the screen displaying images on your
computer, and the top part of the screen representing your images online.
Page 656 of 827

4. In the top part of the screen, in the Folders pane in the top left, navigate through your 365.acdsee.com
folders to the images you want to download.
5. In the bottom part of the screen, in the Local Computer pane, select a folder that you want to download
your image to.
6. Do one of the following to select an image to download:
Click and drag an image into the bottom part of the screen to download it to your computer. To
select multiple images, press the Shift or the Ctrl key and click on the images to select them.
You can also click and drag your cursor to select multiple images.
Drag a folder of your images to the bottom part of the screen.
Select images and click the down arrow icon beside Transfer Manager.
Using the Transfer Manager

The Transfer Manager lets you monitor the progress of your uploads and downloads on your
365.acdsee.com account, and also lets you cancel or pause image transfers. The Transfer Manager has
two tabs: Uploads and Downloads. These two tabs list images that are being uploaded, downloaded,
paused, or canceled.
To Open the Transfer Manager:

Click Tools | Transfer Manager.
You can do the following in Transfer Manager:

Cancel an upload or download.
Retry the image upload or download.
Pause an upload or a download.
Continue the image upload or download.
Selects all images in the list.
Clear uploaded, downloaded or canceled images from the list.
Page 657 of 827

Chapter 10: Dashboard Mode

Using Dashboard Mode
Dashboard mode is a quick and convenient way to browse your file, camera, and database statistics.
Camera statistics are read from your images' metadata, and file information is analyzed from your
ACDSee database. Therefore, it is important to catalog your files to get the most out of Dashboard
mode.
Cataloging Files
To catalog, do one of the following:
Go to Tools | Database | Catalog.
Browse your folders in Manage mode.
Dashboard Mode
Dashboard mode contains the following tabs:
Overview tab: the Overview tab summarizes the information found on the other tabs. It also displays a
graph detailing your monthly or yearly photo counts. You can use the drop-down menu at the top of the
tab to switch between viewing a range of months or a range of years. You can use the Prev and Next
buttons to navigate backward or forward in time.
Database tab: the Database tab displays data relating to your database, such as its location, size, backup
information, a breakdown of your assets, and more.
Cameras tab: the Cameras tab displays data relating to your camera usage, such as which cameras you
use the most, your favorite ISO setting, and more.
Files tab: the Files tab displays data relating to your image and video files, such as your most used bit
depths, image resolutions, and more.
Page 658 of 827

Chapter 11: PicaView

About ACDSee PicaView
ACDSee PicaView is a quick and easy file viewer "add-on" for Windows/File Explorer™ that saves you
time by letting you preview files without having to open them in an application. If you right-click, you
can view your image EXIF information or view your image files in various sizes — including RAW files.
You can also view a preview of any other image file format supported by ACDSee. You can access the
ACDSee PicaView preview by right-clicking a file in Windows/File Explorer™.
You can configure a variety of ACDSee PicaView's settings, including the size of the preview, what
information displays, and more. Access these settings by clicking ACDSee PicaView | Options..., or
through ACDSee, by going to Tools | Options... and navigating to ACDSee PicaView in the Options
dialog's menu.
To Adjust the ACDSee PicaView Options:

1. Right-click a file in Windows/File Explorer™ to access the ACDSee PicaView preview.
2. At the top of the preview, click ACDSee PicaView | Options...
3. On the ACDSee PicaView Options dialog, set or change the options as described below.
4. Click OK to apply your changes.
ACDSee PicaView Options

Display Image
Check the Display Image checkbox to display a preview of the right-clicked file on the context menu.
Location Add image to main menu: when you right-click,

displays preview in the main menu.
Add image to sub-menu: when you right-click,

displays preview in a sub-menu, available by
clicking the arrow next to ACDSee PicaView.
Size Select the size of the preview that displays when you
right-click.
Show Original Select Show Original to display the pre-developed or

pre-edited version of the image when you right-click.
Show EXIF Information
Check or uncheck the Show EXIF Information checkbox to display the right-clicked photo's EXIF
information.
Page 659 of 827

Using ACDSee Quick View

ACDSee Quick View is an image viewer that you can use to quickly view images without opening
ACDSee. For example, imagine that you want to view an image that someone sent to you in an email. If
you double-click the image it will open in Quick View, which is like a pared-down version of View mode
in ACDSee.
With Quick View you can quickly scroll through your images, temporarily rotate images, and zoom in
and out. If you are viewing a particularly appealing image in Quick View, you can also set the image as
your desktop wallpaper or print the image.
You can easily switch from Quick View to ACDSee. You also have the option to open an image in
Manage, View, Develop, or Edit mode.
If you are accustomed to using keyboard and mouse shortcuts in View mode you can use most of
those shortcuts in Quick View as well.
To Open an Image in Quick View:

1. With ACDSee Ultimate closed, double-click an image. For example, double-click the image in Windows
Explorer or in an email message.
2. Use the viewing options described below to view the image.
ACDSee Quick View Viewing Options

Previous View the previous image.
Next View the next image.
Rotate Left Rotate the image to the left.
Rotate Right Rotate the image to the right.
Zoom In View the image at a higher magnification.
Zoom Out View the image at a lower magnification.
Delete Move the image to the computer's Recycle Bin.
Page 660 of 827

You can close ACDSee by pressing Esc.
To Open the Image in ACDSee:

Click Manage, Media, View, Develop, or Edit mode.
To Set an Image as Your Desktop Wallpaper:

1. Click Previous or Next until the image that you want to make your desktop wallpaper displays in Quick
View.
2. Click Tools | Set Wallpaper and select one of the following:
Centered: displays the image in the center of the desktop.
Tiled: displays the image in one or more tiles until the desktop is covered. If the image is small it
may appear in several tiles on the desktop. If the image is large it may appear in only one or two
tiles.
Stretched: stretches the image proportionally to fill as much of the desktop as possible.
To Restore Your System to the Default Desktop Wallpaper:

Click Tools | Set Wallpaper | Restore.
To Print the Image:

1. Click File | Print.
2. Under Format, choose a print size.
4. On the Page Settings tab, specify the image position on the paper and the margin widths, and specify
the number of prints of each photo.
5. Add captions, headers, or footers.
6. Click Print.
Using Windows Touch Gestures™ with Quick View

If you have a Windows Touch Gestures™-enabled device, you can use it with ACDSee Quick View for
quick, easy viewing of photos.
To Use Windows Touch Gestures™ with Quick View:

Open an image in ACDSee Quick View.
Page 661 of 827

Swipe on the image to scroll through images one at a time.
Hold and swipe slowly in one direction to go through all of the images in the folder.
Hold down on an image, and then let go to achieve the same results as right-clicking with a mouse.
Double-tap the image to launch it in ACDSee.
Move two fingers apart to zoom in, and toward each other to zoom out.
After zooming in, you can pan the image with your finger. To return, choose View | Zoom | Fit Image.
Page 662 of 827

Chapter 12: Options and Configuration

Setting the General Options
You can adjust settings in the Options dialog box to display helpful tips, set the format for date
displays, set automatic rotate options, and control the display of certain image types.
To Access the General Options:

1. In any mode, click Tools | Options...
2. In the Options dialog box, click General.
3. On the General page, set or change any of the options described below.
4. Click OK to apply your changes and return to ACDSee.
General Options
Page 663 of 827

Enable gamma correction Applies the specified amount of gamma correction when viewing or
previewing images.
Automatically stretch wallpaper to Stretches small images to fit the entire desktop when you set them
fit screen as your wallpaper.
Disable image animation Displays only the first frame of an animated image in Manage
mode's Preview pane and in View mode.
Automatically rotate JPEG and TIFF Automatically corrects the orientation of TIFF and JPEG images
images based on EXIF orientation (based on their EXIF data) when displayed in ACDSee.
Status bar date Specifies the date to display in the status bar for a selected file.
Date/Time output format Select one of the following:

Default system format: uses the default system format when
displaying the date and time in information overlays.
Custom format: uses the specified format to display the date
and time in all information overlays. Select a format for both
Date and Time from the drop-down lists.
Show icon in Taskbar Notification Displays the ACDSee Ultimate icon in the Taskbar Notification area.
area
Show the Mode Switching icons Displays the icons next to the names of each mode.
Enable OpenCL image processing If your computer's video card driver supports it, you can check this
checkbox to improve the speed of processing RAW files. You may
wish to ensure that you have the latest video card driver in order to
take advantage of this option.
RAW display Select one of the following:

Embedded preview: use embedded JPEG.
RAW decode: perform high quality decode.
See Viewing RAW Images for more information.
Setting the Auto Advance Options

You can control which applied metadata will trigger Auto Advance.
To Adjust the Auto Advance Options:
Page 664 of 827

2. In the Options dialog box, click General | Auto Advance.
3. On the Auto Advance page, set or change the options as described below.
Auto Advance Options

Enable Auto Advance in l Manage Mode Deselect to turn off Auto Advance in
l View Mode
either Manage or View mode.
Auto Advance when l Tags Specifies which applied or removed

l Ratings
applying/clearing l Labels metadata will trigger Auto Advance.
l Categories
l Keywords Keywords and Categories are
disabled by default.
Setting the Mode Configuration Options

You can control the appearance of the mode buttons to maximize viewing space.
To Set the Mode Button Options:

2. In the Options dialog box, click Mode Configuration.
3. On the Mode Configuration page, hide modes by unchecking their corresponding checkboxes.
You cannot hide Manage mode.
4. Use the modes' corresponding drop-down menus to set them to display icons and labels, labels only, or
icons only.
5. Click Condense the appearance of the mode buttons to conserve space with smaller mode buttons.
6. Click OK.
Setting the Batch Operation Options

You can control which error logs appear for batch operations including batch rename, batch resize,
and batch convert.
To Adjust the Batch Operation Options:

1. In any mode, click Tools | Options... or press Alt + O.
2. In the Options dialog box, click General | Batch Operations.
Page 665 of 827

3. On the Batch Operations page, set or change the options as described below.
Batch Operations Options

Error logs Check the box of the relevant error log you wish to hide.
Setting ACDSee as Your Default Photo Viewer

If you have Windows 10, you can use this process to make ACDSee your default photo viewer. When
you open ACDSee Ultimate for the second time, you will see a dialog window that asks if you want to
make ACDSee your default photo viewer. Follow the prompts to change your default photo viewer. If
you do not see this dialog, follow the instructions below.
To Make ACDSee Your Default Photo Viewer:

2. In the Options dialog, click Default Photo Viewer.
3. Select Make Default... to open your Default apps settings.
4. Click on the icon beneath Photo viewer and choose ACDSee Ultimate from the list.
5. ACDSee Ultimate is now your default photo viewer.
Setting the Manage Mode Options

You can use the Options dialog box to set various options for Manage mode, including the default
start folder.
To Set Manage Mode Options:

2. In the Options dialog box, click Manage Mode.
3. On the Manage mode page, set or change the options as described below.
Manage Mode Options
Page 666 of 827

Default start folder
Remember from previous Opens Manage mode in the same folder that was open the last time
session you used ACDSee, and automatically applies any browsing criteria you
were using.
Home folder Always opens Manage mode to the specified Home folder. Click the
Browse button to locate a starting folder on your hard drive.
Show warning if start folder If you have enabled Remember from previous session, and that
does not exist folder, or your Home folder, no longer exist, you will receive a
warning.
Display theme
Specifies the color scheme to use in ACDSee.
Clear path history on exit
Clears the list of recently-accessed folders whenever you exit ACDSee.
Show full path in title bar
Displays the full path of an image in the ACDSee title bar.
Show database filename in title bar
Displays the name of the database that ACDSee is currently running in the title bar.
Folder Tree
Display Density Sets how condensed the Folder tree appears.
Use plus signs to expand Displays plus signs next to items on the Folder tree that can be
folder tree expanded.
Error Reporting
Select this option if you do not want to see a system error report if there is an error in ACDSee.
Scanning Destination
Click the Browse For Folder button to specify the destination for your scanned images.
Setting the Quick Search Options

You can use the Quick Search options to refine your search.
Page 667 of 827

To Set Quick Search Options:

1. In Manage mode, click Tools | Options...
2. In the Options dialog box, click Manage Mode | Quick Search.
3. On the Quick Search page, set or change any of the Quick Search options described below.
Quick Search Options

Include file names Searches for file and folder names that begin with the search term.
Include categories Searches for categories that match the search term, and returns any
files assigned to those categories. Subcategories are not included.
Include contents of folders Searches for folder names that begin with the search term and
returns the contents of those folders. Subfolders are not included.
Include people Searches for people detected in images and named using Face
Detection in View mode. You can further refine these search
options on the Face Search page of the Options dialog.
Setting the Face Detection and Recognition Options

You can toggle Face Detection on and off, trigger Face Detection to rerun, or allow the ACDSee Indexer
to undertake Face Detection while your computer is idle.
To Set the Face Detection Options:

2. In the Options dialog box, click Face Detection.
3. On the Face Detection page, set or change the options as described below.
4. Click OK.
Face Detection Options
Page 668 of 827

Face Detection
Automatically detect faces in images Toggle this option to turn on Face Detection. With this option
enabled, Face Detection will run on files encountered during
browsing in Manage mode. In View mode, Face Detection
will run on the open image only.
Once Face Detection has been run on an image, that
information is stored in the database. Therefore, with this
option disabled, previously detected faces will still display
face outlines and names (if named) in View mode. You will
also be able to search using the names you have assigned to
faces.
Allow Face Detection to detect faces You can enable Face Detection to be undertaken by
while your computer is idle using the the ACDSee Indexer. The ACDSee Indexer will allow the Face
ACDSee Indexer. Detection process to be done when your computer is idle
and ACDSee is not running. This allows you to avoid having to
browse all of your folders.
Rerun Face Detection You can allow Face Detection to rerun if you suspect you
have files that have been changed since the last time Face
Detection was run on them. With this enabled, Face
Detection will rerun next time you browse the changed files
either in Manage or View mode.
Facial Recognition
Enable Facial Recognition Toggle this option to turn on Facial Recognition. With this
option enabled, ACDSee will attempt to recognize individuals
based on the faces you have named in previous images.
Use the slider to set how similar two faces need to be in
order for ACDSee to identify them as the same individual.
Moderate: the default setting is optimized to name
most faces without adding too many incorrect names.
Aggressive: faces need to be less similar in order to be
recognized. This option is useful if your photo collection
consists of just a few people in a wide variety of poses,
lighting, and film quality. You may experience more
incorrect names.
Conservative: faces need to be more similar in order to
be recognized. This option is useful if your photo
collection consists of a large number of different people,
especially if those people are physically similar, such as
close family members. You will experience fewer
incorrect names, but may have to manually name
Page 669 of 827

people more frequently.
All three settings can result in incorrect names,

especially when Facial Recognition encounters a
person for the first time. If you experience more
incorrect names than you can reasonably
correct by hand, disable Facial Recognition and
manually name several faces for each person in
your photo collection. Then, re-enable Facial
Recognition, and, if necessary, rerun Facial
Recognition on a selection of files, or your entire
library.
Remove All Face Data
Removes all data related to Face Detection and Recognition from the database, including face outlines,
names, and information relating to whether Face Detection has been run on files. This action will require
ACDSee to restart.
Rerun Recognition
In order to correct names mistakenly assigned to faces by ACDSee, you can rerun facial recognition on faces
you have not manually named. This clears all names assigned by ACDSee's facial recognition, but leaves
manually entered names. ACDSee will then attempt to recognize unnamed faces based on names you have
entered manually.
Setting the Face Search Options

You can adjust settings to determine the results of searches using assigned or suggested names.
To Set the Face Search Options:

2. In the Options dialog box, click Face Detection | Face Search.
3. On the Face Search page, set or change the options as described below.
4. Click OK.
Face Search Options
Page 670 of 827

Face Search Assigned names: when you search using the Quick Search bar, the Search
pane, or the People group in the Catalog pane, ACDSee will return photos
with names assigned using Face Detection.
Suggested names: when you search using the Quick Search bar, the
Search pane, or the People group in the Catalog pane, ACDSee will return
photos with names suggested by ACDSee, (but not confirmed by you).
Both assigned and suggested names: when you search using the Quick
Search bar, the Search pane, or the People group in the Catalog pane,
ACDSee will return photos with both assigned and suggested names.
Setting the File List Pane Options

You can use the Options dialog box to set options for the File List pane to suit your preferences, such
as grouping archive files with subfolders, or highlighting image types with different background colors.
You can also customize your thumbnails, the file types ACDSee Ultimate displays, and adjust how
ACDSee Ultimate handles files and thumbnails in the File List pane.
To Adjust the File List Pane Options:

2. In the Options dialog box, click File List.
3. On the File List page, set or change the options as described below.
File List Options
Page 671 of 827

File List
Automatically select new files Automatically selects new files when they
are added to the folder displayed in the File
List pane.
Group archives with folders Treats archive files as folders when sorting
items in the File List pane.
Use embedded thumbnails Displays the RAW files embedded thumbnail

if the RAW file has them.
Generate high quality thumbnails Creates a high-quality thumbnail of the RAW

file in the background while the embedded
thumbnail is displayed, then replaces the
poorer quality thumbnail once it is ready.
Show thumbnails on folders Displays thumbnails of a folder's contents on

the folder icon in the File List pane.
Remember each folder's sort settings Select this option if you want ACDSee
Ultimate to remember the sort settings that
you used in specific folders.
<Ctrl> key activates hot-tracking Activates hot-tracking when holding the Ctrl
key. Hot-tracking means that when you hold
down Ctrl and hover over an image in
Manage mode, the contents of the Preview
and Properties panes will update, without
you having to click on each individual image.
Use animations Activates or deactivates animation for some

features as they close or open. For example,
group headers.
Configure Filters
Show all files Shows image files, folders, media files and
archive files in the File List.
Apply filtering criteria Shows any of the following that you select,
and hides any that are not selected.
Show image files
Show folders
Show media files
Page 672 of 827

Show archive files
Show hidden files and folders Shows system and other files and that are
normally hidden for safety.
Show THM files Shows Canon THM files in the File Fist.
Show XMP files Shows XMP sidecar files in the File List.
Highlight image files
Don't highlight image files Does not highlight image files in Details and
Thumbs+Details views.
Use a single color to highlight image files Uses a single color to highlight all image file
types in Details and Thumbs+Details views.
Use multiple colors to highlight image files Uses a different color to highlight each image
type in Details and Thumbs+Details views.
Pop-ups
Mouse cursor hover activates pop-ups Activates or deactivates the animated pop-up
preview that displays when you hover over
thumbnails in the File List.
Settings below allow you to include text
and/or an image in the pop-up, or if you turn
this option off, to activate the pop-up only
when you hold down the Shift key.
<Shift> key activates pop-ups Activates the pop-up only if you hold down
the Shift key while hovering over a thumbnail
in the File List. You can turn this option off if it
interferes with Shift selection.
Auto hide pop-ups Hides pop-ups after 5 seconds, even if you

are still hovering over the image.
Show thumbnail in pop-ups Shows a pop-up preview of images in the File

List when you hover over them with a
mouse.
Show information in pop-ups Includes text file information in the mouse-

over pop-up. You can select the information
to display by clicking the Configure file
information...button and selecting your
desired pop-up information.
Page 673 of 827

Configure file information
Opens the Choose Pop-up Information dialog where you can select what information to display in the pop-
up when you hover over a thumbnail in the File List. The default is file name, location, size, modified date,
and image dimension, but you can select other ACDSee Metadata, EXIF, file, image, IPTC, or multimedia
attributes.
Show the Windows Explorer shell context menu as the default right-click menu
Displays the default Windows Explorer context menu instead of the ACDSee Ultimate context menu.
Setting the Thumbnail Info Options

You can use the Options dialog box to change the information that displays with thumbnails of images
in the File List pane. These options are set under File List | Thumbnail Info.
To Adjust the Thumbnail Info Options:

2. In the Options dialog box, click File List | Thumbnail Info.
3. On the Thumbnail Info page, set or change the options as described below.
Thumbnail Info Options
Page 674 of 827

Information
File name Displays the name of each file on the thumbnail in the
File List pane.
Choose Thumbnail Info Opens a dialog box where you can select the information
to display on each thumbnail in the File List pane.
Choose Tiles Info Opens a dialog box where you can select the information
to display on each tile in Tiles view mode.
Show unrated, untagged, and unlabeled Shows unrated, untagged, and unlabeled overlay icons
overlay icons on hover when you hover over them.
Overlay icons
To view the overlay icons, go to Browsing Files in the File List Pane.
Rating Displays a rating overlay icon on thumbnails if the file has

been rated in the ACDSee Ultimate database.
Embed Pending Displays a database overlay icon on the thumbnails of

files that have had metadata information added and
stored in the ACDSee Ultimate database, but have not yet
been written to the files. This icon indicates that a file
and the database are out of sync.
Icon Displays a file format overlay icon on thumbnails in the

File List pane.
Category Displays a category overlay icon on thumbnails if the file

has been categorized.
Collection Displays a collection overlay icon on thumbnails if the file

has been added to a collection.
Shortcut Displays a shortcut overlay icon on thumbnails if the item

is a shortcut to another file.
Offline Displays an offline overlay icon on thumbnails if the file is

stored on an offline device.
Excluded items Displays an excluded file icon on thumbnails if the file is

excluded from the ACDSee Ultimate database.
Tagged items Displays a tagging overlay icon on thumbnails. If the file is

tagged, a checkmark displays in the icon.
Auto-rotate Displays an auto-rotate overlay icon on thumbnails if the
Page 675 of 827

file was automatically rotated.
Edited Displays an Edit overlay icon on thumbnails if the file has

been edited.
Developed Displays a Develop overlay icon on thumbnails if the file

has been developed.
Geotagged Displays a marker overlay icon on thumbnails if the file

has been pinned on the map.
Label Displays a color label overlay icon on thumbnails if the

file has been labeled.
Snapshots Displays a Snapshot overlay icon on thumbnails if the file

has a Develop Snapshot attached to it.
Setting the Thumbnail Style Options

You can use the Options dialog box to change how the thumbnails of images display in the File List
pane. These options are set under File List | Thumbnail Style.
To Adjust the Thumbnail Style Options:

2. In the Options dialog box, click File List | Thumbnail Style.
3. On the Thumbnail Style page, set or change the options as described below.
Thumbnail Style Options
Page 676 of 827

Thumbnail frame
Show drop shadow Shows thumbnails with a 3D drop shadow.
Show slide background Displays a shaded background behind the thumbnail and
its information.
Folder style
XP style folder Displays folders as an XP-style image.
3D style folder Displays folders as a 3D folder with transparency.
Thumbnail ratio
Custom Specifies a custom height-to-width ratio for the shape of

the thumbnails in the File List pane. Drag the slider under
the preview to set the ratio. The preview shows you the
shape as you move the slider.
Portrait Specifies a standard 3:4 portrait ratio for the shape of the
thumbnails in the File List pane.
Landscape Specifies a standard 4:3 landscape ratio for the shape of

the thumbnails in the File List pane.
Thumbnail spacing
Slider Increases or decreases the space between each

thumbnail.
High-quality scaling
Uses high-quality thumbnail scaling in the File List pane.
Setting the Details View Options

You can use the Options dialog box to change how thumbnails display in the File List pane.
To Adjust the Details View Options:

2. In the Options dialog box, click File List | Details View.
3. On the Details View page, set or change the options as described below.
Page 677 of 827

Details View Options

Show grid lines Separates each row and column in Details view mode with a
grid line.
Full row select Selects the entire row when you click a column entry in that
row.
Column auto-width Automatically resizes each column to fit its contents.
Highlight sort column Highlights the column used to sort files when you click on
the column's title.
Choose Details Specifies the columns you want to use to sort files in Details
view mode.
Setting the Preview Pane Options

You can specify how ACDSee Ultimate displays previews of your images, and configure settings to play
audio and video files automatically, as soon as you view them in the Preview pane.
To Set the Preview Options:

In Manage mode, click Tools | Options | Preview...
In Manage mode, right-click in the Preview pane and select Preview Options.
2. On the Preview options page, set or change the options as described below.
Preview Options
Page 678 of 827

Delay Specifies how quickly the Preview pane displays an image after
you select it in the File List pane.
Size Specifies the size of the previewed image in relation to the

selected image.
Preview audio and video clips Previews media files as you select them in the File List pane.
Autoplay audio and video clips Automatically starts playing audio and video files in the Preview
pane.
Instant image preview Displays an instant preview that improves in quality as the
image is decoded.
Image and Information Select one of the following:
Show image: displays a preview of the selected image

in the Preview pane.
Show information: displays information about the

selected image in the Preview pane.
Show histogram: displays a histogram for the selected

image.
Choose Preview Info Specifies the type of information you want to display in the
Preview pane. For more information, see Previewing Images.
Setting the Folders Pane Options

You can customize the Folders pane by showing or hiding the Easy-Select bar, displaying archives, and
identifying excluded folders.
To Customize the Folders Pane:

2. In the Options dialog box, click Folders.
3. On the Folders page, set or change the options as described below.
Folders Pane Options
Page 679 of 827

Easy-Select
Show Easy-Select Displays the Easy-Select bar in the Folders pane, which you can
use to select multiple folders.
Enable Easy-Select tooltip Displays a tool-tip when you place your cursor over the Easy-
Select bar.
Folder display
Show archives in Folder Pane Lists archive files in the Folders pane.
Confirm drag & drop move Prompts you for confirmation of folder movements within the
within folder views Folders pane.
Show overlay for excluded Displays an overlay icon on folders that are excluded from the
folders ACDSee Ultimate database.
Setting the Catalog Pane Options

You can customize the Catalog pane to specify which confirmations you want to be prompted for while
working with categories, and choose whether to show the Easy-Select bar.
To Set the Catalog Pane Options:

2. In the Options dialog box, click Catalog.
3. On the Catalog page, set or change the options as described below.
4. Click OK.
Catalog Options
Page 680 of 827

Category deletion
Confirm if category has assigned files Prompts you for confirmation when deleting a
category with assigned files.
Confirm if category has sub-categories Prompts you for confirmation when deleting a
category containing sub-categories.
File removal
Confirm file removal from category Prompts you for confirmation when un-
assigning files from a category.
Easy select
Show Easy-Select Displays an Easy-Select bar in the Catalog pane,

which you can use to select multiple categories,
special items, and ratings.
Enable Easy-Select tooltip Displays a tool-tip when you place your cursor
over the Easy-Select bar.
Icons
Show icons for categories, ratings, color labels, Displays icons so you can easily identify
and special items categories, ratings, color labels, and special
items.
Enable setting categories, keywords, ratings, and Allows you to set categories, ratings, and color
color labels labels in the Catalog pane.
Setting the Calendar Pane Options

You can customize the ACDSee Ultimate Calendar to start each week on a specific day, to use a 12 or
24-hour clock format, and to use one of four date types when sorting files.
To Set the Calendar Pane Options:

2. In the Options dialog box, click Calendar.
3. On the Calendar page, set or change any of the options described below.
4. Click OK to accept your changes and return to ACDSee.
Calendar Pane Options
Page 681 of 827

Date types
Database date Sorts files in the Calendar pane based on the date stored in the
ACDSee Ultimate database.
Date taken Sorts files in the Calendar pane based on the EXIF date of each
item.
File modified date Sorts files in the Calendar pane based on the last-modified date of
each item.
File created date Sorts files in the Calendar pane based on the date each file was
created on your computer.
Filters
Apply Advanced File List Filters Filters the items displayed in the Calendar pane based on the
(excluding folders) current File List pane filter settings.
Show image and media files only Displays only image, audio, and video files in the Calendar pane.
Start of week
Specifies the first day of each week in the Calendar pane.
Clock formats
12 hour Uses a 12-hour clock in the Calendar pane.
24 hour Uses a 24-hour clock in the Calendar pane.
Setting the CD/DVD Management Options

You can use the Options dialog box to set the preferred method for identifying Photo Discs.
To Change the Photo Disc Identification Options:

2. In the Options dialog box, click CD/DVD Management.
3. On the CD/DVD Management page, set or change any of the options described below.
CD/DVD Management Options
Page 682 of 827

Photo Disc Identification
Use disc volume label Attempts to identify a Photo Disc by its volume label. This
setting is recommended if you are working with multi-
session Photo Discs.
Use disc serial number Attempts to identify a Photo Disc by its serial number.
This setting is preferred when working with single-
session Photo Discs, or importing or converting Photo
Discs from a previous version of ACDSee.
Setting the Properties Pane Options

You can use the Options dialog box to customize the information available on the Metadata tab in the
Properties pane.
To Customize the Metadata Tab in the Properties Pane:

2. In the Options dialog box, click Properties Pane.
3. On the Properties Pane page, hide the Tagged, Rating, and Color Labels, by unchecking the
corresponding checkbox.
4. Hide the Categories by unchecking the checkbox.
5. Click Manage Metadata Views to open the Choose Metadata to Display dialog box.
6. Click the plus signs to expand the tree and select your preferences.
7. Click OK.
You can also click the Metadata View drop-down list in the Properties pane Metadata tab and
select Manage Metadata Views.
Setting the File Management Options

You can specify how ACDSee Ultimate handles renaming and deleting files and folders, and whether
ACDSee Ultimate sends deleted files to the desktop Recycle Bin by default.
To Set the File Management Options:

2. In the Options dialog box, click File Management.
Page 683 of 827

3. On the File Management page, set or change any of the options as described below.
File Management Options

Confirmations
You can use the following options to display confirmation dialogs upon folder or file deletion.
If you are running Windows 8 or up, your Windows settings will overtake or affirm ACDSee's. In
order for the settings in this dialog to take effect, you must enable them in your Recycle Bin
Properties settings.
Confirm folder delete
Confirm file delete
Overwriting duplicate files
Ask Prompts you for confirmation when overwriting duplicate files.
Rename Automatically resolves any naming conflicts when moving or

copying files by renaming the source files. In the Separator
character field, type a character to use to separate file names in
the automatic renaming system.
Replace Automatically overwrites files in the target folder without

prompting for confirmation.
Skip Does not move, copy, or overwrite any files that result in naming
conflicts.
Save Originals
Saves a copy of the original file when it is edited using one of the batch editing tools. This makes it possible
to restore the original file later. Turning this option off means that originals are not saved during batch
editing, and so cannot be restored.
In Develop and Edit mode, a copy of the original file is always saved, whether or not this option is selected.
Other
Click to edit file name Specifies that file names can be edited by clicking the file name in
the File List pane.
Use Recycle Bin Sends files to the Desktop Recycle Bin. If not selected, deleted files
are permanently removed from your hard drive.
Preserve database information Copies database information with files when you copy them to
when files are copied another location.
Page 684 of 827

Control confirmations for folder delete, file delete, and read-only rename and delete actions in
your operating system settings.
Setting the Color Management Options

The ACDSee Ultimate color management options help reduce color matching problems between
devices, such as your computer, your monitor, and printers. ACDSee Ultimate automatically detects
the color profile assigned to your monitor, (if setup correctly within your operating system). It is
recommended that you regularly profile your monitor with color management hardware and
software.
Before changing the color management settings, make sure you have accurate color profiles for each
of the devices that you plan to use. You can obtain color profiles from device manufacturers if the
profiles were not included in the device's software, or from the professional printers.
Color management can be a complex process. If you are not familiar with color management
systems, it is recommended that you accept the default color management settings in
ACDSee.
To Set the Color Management Options:

2. In the Options dialog box, click Color Management.
3. On the Color Management page, set or change any of the options as described below.
4. Check the Enable Color Management checkbox.
Color Management Options
Page 685 of 827

Enable
Enable Color Management Activates the color management system in ACDSee

Ultimate and the fields in this dialog box.
Apply to thumbnails Activates color management for thumbnails.
Color Management Engine Select from the drop-down list of color

management engines.
Input
Default Input Profile Specifies the default color profile to use when the
image is not tagged with an ICC profile.
Profile Details Displays the details for all color profiles currently
stored on your computer. Scroll down to find the
profile for a specific color space, such as sRGB.
Soft Proofing
Enable Soft Proofing Allows you to choose from a selection of device

profiles you want your monitor to simulate for
proofing. You can choose your printer profile to be
the emulated device and then preview what the
output from your printer would look like on your
monitor (soft proofing).
Emulated Device Profile Choose the device to be emulated.
Rendering Intent A strategy for handling situations where not all

colors will fit in the output device's color space.
Strategy options consist of:
Perceptual: remaps colors outside of the

target color space by compressing all colors
for the entire image. Colors may become
less saturated as everything condenses
towards neutral and away from the
saturated colors at the edges of the target
color space.
Saturation: preserves the saturation of

colors, potentially at the cost of hue and
lightness. This intent is most valuable for
business applications, such as graphics,
where images need to be vibrant and
contrast distinctly from one another.
Page 686 of 827

Relative Colorimetric: maps all out-of-

gamut colors to the closest in-gamut color.
Colors that fall outside the range of what
the output device can render are adjusted
to the closest color the device is capable of
displaying.
Absolute Colorimetric: colors that fall

outside the range of what the output device
can render are adjusted to the closest color
that can be rendered. However, the white
point does not move, which may result in
the distance of the colors to the white point
changing.
In View, Develop, and Edit Mode, the shortcut [ toggles Soft Proofing on and off.
Some Soft Proofing menu items are also available through View, Develop, and Edit Mode.
Under View | Soft Proofing, select your Rendering Intent or whether to enable Soft Proofing.
Setting the Database Options

You can adjust settings in the Options dialog box to display reminders, control database information,
and specify a location on your hard drive where you want to store your database files and cached
thumbnails.
To Set the Database Options:

2. In the Options dialog, click Database.
3. On the Database page, set or change the options as described below.
Database Options
Page 687 of 827

Database file
Displays the location on your hard drive where the ACDSee Ultimate database is stored.
Display backup reminder
Automatically reminds you to back up your ACDSee Ultimate database. Click the Every drop-down list and
select how often you would like to be reminded.
Manage excluded folders
Opens the Excluded Folders List dialog box, where you can specify which folders you want to exclude from
Display embed ACDSee Metadata reminder
Displays a reminder to embed ACDSee Metadata. Click the Every drop-down list and select how often you
would like to be reminded.
Set database date to EXIF date
Automatically adds the EXIF date to the ACDSee Ultimate database when you catalog the contents of a folder.
Note: if the database date is changed, the Embed Pending icon does not show up.
Metadata
Import EXIF Automatically imports EXIF and IPTC information into the ACDSee Ultimate database
and IPTC whenever you catalog the contents of a folder.
metadata
If this option is not selected, ACDSee Ultimate does not import the EXIF and IPTC
from
information, but does set aside space within the database records. To remove the empty
cataloged
records, be sure to optimize your database frequently.
files
Set "Embed Displays a database overlay icon on thumbnails if the file has been tagged, but this
Pending" metadata has not yet been written to the file. This icon indicates that the file and the
when tagging database are out of sync. When this option is disabled, tagged images will not show up
files under Embed Pending in the Special Items section of the Catalog pane.
IPTC conflicts
Show Displays the IPTC Keywords dialog box when a separator conflict occurs. You can specify
separator a method of handling conflicts within the dialog and select not to display it again. Select
conflict this option to change or adjust those settings the next time a separator conflict occurs.
dialog for
IPTC
keywords
Page 688 of 827

Show Displays the IPTC Supplemental Categories dialog box when a separator conflict occurs.
separator You can specify a method of handling conflicts within the dialog and elect not to display it
conflict again. Select this option to change or adjust those settings the next time a separator
dialog for conflict occurs.
IPTC
supplementa
l categories
Setting the Media Mode Options

Select Tools | Options... from the main menu to open the Options dialog and select "Media Mode"
from the left-hand list.
The options in the Media Mode pane include two field sets:
l Media, and
l Pop-ups.
Media Options
Enable to show database orphan
Show database orphan files
files.
Enable to browse to the first selec-

Browse to the first selected file when switching to Manage Mode ted file when switching to Manage
Mode.
Pop-ups Options
Page 689 of 827

Mouse cursor hover activates pop-ups Enable to allow a mouse cursor

hover to activate pop-ups.
<Shift> key activates pop-ups Enable to allow the pressing of the

Shift key to activate pop-ups.
Auto hide pop-ups Enable to auto-hide pop-ups.
Show thumbnail in pop-ups Enable to show thumbnail images

of the original image in the pop-
up.
Show information in pop-ups Enable to show image-related

information in the pop-up.
Configure Information... If the Show information in pop-

ups check box is enabled, click the
Configure information... button to
open the Choose Pop-up Inform-
ation dialog. Available details can
be added or removed from the list
of currently displayed details
which can also be moved up or
down in the list.
Setting the View Mode Options

You can use the Options dialog box to adjust the behavior of View mode to suit your preferences, and
increase the speed with which images are displayed.
To Set the View Mode Options:

2. In the Options dialog box, click View Mode.
3. On the View mode options page, set or change any of the View mode options described below.
View Mode Options
Page 690 of 827

Decoding and caching
Decode next image in advance Automatically decodes the next image in

sequence in View mode, resulting in shorter
load times.
Keep previous image in memory Keeps the previously decoded image in

memory for quick display in View mode.
Startup files
Replace images in list Does not open a new View mode window if an
image is opened from another application.
Images in new window Opens a new View mode window to display

images opened from another application.
Dropped files
Replace images in list Replaces the list of images open in View mode
with images dropped into View mode from
another application.
Add images to list Adds any images dropped into View mode by
another application to the list of images
already open.
Always on top
Keeps the ACDSee Ultimate window as the top window in a stack of windows.
Full-screen
Opens images in View mode in full-screen mode. (Press F to exit full-screen mode.)
Hide mouse cursor in full-screen
Hides the cursor in full-screen mode.
Instant image preview
Displays an instant preview in View mode that improves in quality as the image is decoded.
Use ACDSee Ultimate Quick View
If selected, ACDSee Ultimate Quick View is set as the default viewer for images when ACDSee is closed.
Show pixels when zoomed past 100%
Page 691 of 827

Resampling is not applied to images zoomed past 100%. When the box is unchecked, images zoomed past
100% are resampled to produce smooth transitions, but this may result in excessive blurring.
Always open in selected Auto Lens
On startup, opens images in the Auto Lens last selected prior to closing ACDSee.
Exit after delete/move
Automatically returns to Manage mode after moving or deleting an image in View mode.
View all images in folder
Adds all images in a folder to the current image list when viewing any file from that folder.
Show full image file path
Displays the image's full file path in View mode title and status bars.
Sharpen subsampled images
Automatically sharpens the view for images zoomed in at less than 100%.
Setting The People Mode Options

Select Tools | Options... from the main menu to open the Options dialog and select "People Mode"
from the left-hand list.
The options in the People Mode pane include four field sets:
l Confirmation Prompts,
l Thumbnail Style,
l Folder Pane Style, and
l Unnamed View Style.
Confirmation Prompts Options

Enable to turn off prompts when
Do not prompt when confirming all suggestions
confirming all suggestions.

Do not prompt when denying all suggestions
denying all suggestions.

Do not prompt when deleting faces
deleting faces.
Thumbnail Style Options
Page 692 of 827

Face Thumbnail Enable to use thumbnails featuring

the person's face.
Asset Thumbnail Enable to use thumbnails featuring

the entirety of the asset's original
dimensions.
Folder Pane Style Options

Enable to use the List view as the
List
default for the Folders pane.
Enable to use the Tree view as the

Tree
default for the Folders pane.
Unnamed Style Options

Ungrouped Enable to use the Ungrouped cat-
egory as a default for sorting the
Unnamed view results.
Grouped Enable to use the Grouped cat-

egory as a default for sorting the
Unnamed view results.
Setting the Display Options

You can use the Options dialog box to change the window background and specify how images are
zoomed.
To Set the Display Options:

2. In the Options dialog box, click Display.
3. On the Display options page, set or change the options described below.
Display Options
Page 693 of 827

Zoom options
Default zoom mode Specifies the default zoom level for images in
View mode.
Reset zoom mode to default on every image Resets the zoom mode to the selected default
change when the displayed image changes.
Resize Resizes the image based on the selected

option. For more information about how these
choices affect the Viewer, see Automatically
shrinking or enlarging images.
Pan tool
Enable click-zooming Deselect to turn off the one click image toggle
between Default view and Actual Size view.
Pan speed
Slow - Fast Specifies the speed when panning an image.
Background
Default color Uses the default ACDSee Ultimate color for the
background in View, Develop and Edit mode.
Custom color Specifies a color to use as the background in

View, Develop, and Edit mode.
Tiled image Uses a tiled image as the background in View,

Develop, and Edit mode. Click Browse to locate
an image on your hard drive.
The background color and tiled image options do not affect full screen mode.
To change the background color in ACDSee Quick View, open an image in Quick View, and then
click Tools | Options.
Setting Develop and Edit Mode Options

You can use the Options dialog box to set options for Develop and Edit mode.
To Set Develop and Edit Mode Options:
Page 694 of 827

2. In the Options dialog box, click Develop Mode or Edit Mode.
Develop and Edit Mode Options
Page 695 of 827

Edit
Show icons on filter menu Displays icons next to the tools in Edit.
pane
AutoSave all changes Toggles AutoSave on and off. AutoSave saves your changes in Edit
mode automatically, without prompting the Save Changes dialog.
GPU selection In order to ensure optimum performance, parts of Edit mode run off
of your GPU. ACDSee Ultimate automatically chooses the best GPU in
your system. This option—Let ACDSee Photo Studio decide—is
enabled by default. When Let ACDSee Photo Studio decide is
enabled, GPU model text displays next to the option, specifying
whether Edit mode is running off of your primary GPU or another,
more superior GPU that ACDSee Ultimate has detected. In most
cases, the GPU detected and identified as the best by ACDSee
Ultimate will be one and the same: your primary GPU.
Use primary: you can enable this option if you prefer to use
your primary GPU over the GPU ACDSee has chosen.
Let ACDSee Photo Studio decide: select this option to enable
using the superior GPU found by ACDSee.
Recorded Actions Folder Displays the path of the location where your action scripts (your
recordings) are stored on your hard drive. Click the Browse button
to specify a new location on your hard drive.
Adobe® Photoshop® Plug-in Displays the paths of the hard drive locations of your Photoshop®
Paths plug-ins. This will tell ACDSee Ultimate where to find your plug-in.
Ideally, you will direct the path to the location where your
Photoshop® plug-ins are already stored.
To change or add a location, press Add, then browse to the location,
select it and press Select Folder.
You will not be able to change the plug-in paths while

multiple ACDSee Ultimate windows are open.
To remove a location, select it and press Remove.

To move your plug-ins to a listed location, select the location and
press Open Folder. You can then drag your plug-ins into the folder.
Develop
Page 696 of 827

Enable fast image switching Enables fast image switching for RAW and other non-encodable files
for RAW files in Develop in Develop so that when you switch to the next image you do not
have to wait for the processing to be finished. The processing is done
as a background task when you exit Develop, so that you can process
images more quickly. If you deselect this option, non-encodable
images are processed one at a time and you can immediately see the
results of your processing, but you have to wait for the image
processing each time you switch to another image.
AutoSave save all Develop Enables the automatic saving of images in Develop so when you
Mode adjustments switch to the next image you are not prompted to save changes to
the current image. This lets you quickly develop a number of images,
saving your changes automatically. If you deselect this option, each
time you switch to a new image you are prompted to save changes
to the current image—you choose to save your changes to current
file, save a copy of the image, or discard your changes.
Enable Develop Tools pane Enables the undo and redo buttons at the top of the Develop Tools
undo and redo buttons pane, particularly useful if the History pane is closed or hidden.
Setting the Rulers and Guidelines Options

You can use the Options dialog box to configure settings for rulers and guidelines in Edit mode.
To Set the Rulers and Guidelines Options:

2. In the Options dialog box, click Edit Mode | Rulers and Guidelines.
Rulers and Guidelines Options
Page 697 of 827

Guidelines
Color Select a color for your guidelines.
Rulers
DPI Determines the ruler scale by dividing the layer's pixel value by dots per inch.
Uses the value in the Pixels Per Inch field of the Image Attributes section located on the File
Load tab of the Properties pane.
resolution
DPI field does not dynamically update according to the DPI in your layer's
from EXIF
EXIF metadata. However, when this checkbox is checked, the EXIF metadata
metadata
value will override the value in the DPI field.
Units
Select a unit of measure for your rulers:

Inches
Centimeters
Pixels
Percent
Setting the ACDSee 365 Options

You can use the Options dialog box to set options for ACDSee 365, such as the temporary folder
location and what to do with uploads and downloads when you close ACDSee.
To Set the ACDSee 365 Options:

2. In the Options dialog box, click ACDSee 365.
3. On the ACDSee 365 page, set or change any of the options described below.
ACDSee 365 Options
Page 698 of 827

Folder locations
Temporary folder Click the Browse button to change the folder

where ACDSee Ultimate temporarily keeps files
during uploads and downloads.
Uploads/Downloads
On shutdown, always pause all transfers Pauses all transfers when you close ACDSee.
On startup, always automatically resume all Resumes all transfers when you reopen
paused transfers ACDSee.
Number of concurrent uploads (1-10) Select the number of files to be uploaded at

the same time.
Number of concurrent downloads (1-10) Select the number of files to be downloaded at

the same time.
Ratings
Convert 'Rating 1' to 5 stars Converts a numeric rating of 1 to five stars.
Convert 'Rating 1' to 1 star Converts a numeric rating of 1 to one star.
Setting the ACDSee Showroom Options

You can customize the ACDSee Showroom desktop slideshow in a number of ways, including changing
the slide duration, order, and transition or changing the frame opacity, size, and frame style.
To Customize the ACDSee Showroom Desktop Slideshow:

1. Start ACDSee Showroom by doing one of the following:
In any mode, click Tools | Create | ACDSee Showroom.
Click Start | Programs | ACD Systems | ACDSee Showroom.
2. Right-click anywhere in the ACDSee Showroom window and select Options.
3. Set or change the options as described below.
4. Click Set As Default to use the currently selected options as the default for new Showroom windows.
ACDSee Showroom Options
Page 699 of 827

Picture Folder
Include subfolders Select this option if you want to include photos from
subfolders in the slideshow.
Skip hidden folders Select this option to skip hidden folders such as the [Originals]
folders that are created when you process images.
Slide
Duration Drag the slider to the left to decrease the display time for
each photo and to the right to increase the display time for
each photo.
Order From the Order drop-down list select Sequential to display

photos in order or Random to display photos randomly.
Transition From the Transition drop-down list select None if you do not
want any special transition effects, Slide if you want photos to
enter the window from the right and exit to the left, and Fade
if you want to reduce photo opacity during the transition from
one photo to another.
Apply to all Select Apply to all if you want to apply these changes to all
slideshows.
Showroom Window
Opacity Drag the Opacity slider to the left to reduce the opacity of the
Showroom window and to the right to increase opacity.
Size From the Size drop-down list select either a Small, Medium,
or Large Showroom window frame.
Frame From the Frame drop-down list select a frame style.
Always on top Select Always on top if you want the Showroom window to
display on top of all other application windows.
Apply to all Select Apply to all if you want to apply these changes to all
Showroom windows.
Run at startup
Select Run at startup if you want to start ACDSee Showroom automatically when you start your computer.
Page 700 of 827

Setting the ACDSee Quick View Options

You can customize ACDSee Quick View in a number of ways, including displaying Quick View on top of
any open windows, displaying Quick view at full screen, or even changing the background color in the
Quick View window.
To Customize ACDSee Quick View:

1. Double-click on an image. For example, double-click on the image in Windows Explorer or in an email
message.
2. Click Tools | Options...
3. Set or change the options as described below.
ACDSee Quick View Options
Page 701 of 827

Use ACDSee Quick View
If selected, ACDSee Quick View is set as the default viewer for images when ACDSee Ultimate is closed.
Enable gamma correction
Applies the specified amount of gamma correction when viewing images.
Disable animation
Displays only the first frame of an animated image.
Always on top
Keeps the Quick View window as the top window in a stack of windows.
Full screen
Opens images in the Quick View window in full screen mode.
Hide mouse cursor in full screen
Hides the cursor in full screen mode.
Default zoom mode
Fit image Displays the image at the largest magnification that fits in the Quick View
window. Images that are smaller than the Quick View window display at
their original size.
Actual size Displays the image at its actual size in the Quick View window.
Background
Default color Uses the ACDSee Ultimate background color in Quick View.
Custom color Specifies a color to use as the background in the Quick View window.
Click the color swatch to select a different color.
Setting the Media Options

You can change what application handles your audio and video files when launched from ACDSee.
To Customize the Default Media Player for Files Launched from ACDSee:
2. In the Options dialog box, click Media.
Page 702 of 827

3. To launch audio and video files in your system's default media player, check the Use default media
player to open audio and video files checkbox.
Setting the ACDSee Indexer Options

You can use the Options dialog to customize the functionality of the ACDSee Indexer.
To Customize the ACDSee Indexer:

2. In the Options dialog box, click ACDSee Indexer.
3. On the ACDSee Indexer page, set or change the options as described below.
ACDSee Indexer Options

Auto index folders or Enables the indexing of folders or images while the computer is idle. Set the
images when computer is slider to indicate how long your computer should be idle before indexing begins.
idle for
Index image files only Deselect to index all file types supported by ACDSee.
Current database Displays which database will be indexed.
Folders to monitor Displays which folders will be indexed.
Add Folder... Click the Add Folder... button to add additional folders to be indexed.
Remove Folder Select a folder from the list and click the Remove Folder button to remove it
from the folders to be indexed.
Include Microsoft Enables the indexing of your OneDrive folder.

OneDrive
Setting the ACDSee PicaView Options

You can use the Options dialog box to change your ACDSee PicaView settings, as well as toggling it on
and off.
To Adjust the ACDSee PicaView Options:

2. In the Options dialog box, click ACDSee PicaView.
Page 703 of 827

3. On the ACDSee PicaView page, set or change the options as described below.
ACDSee Picaview Options

Enable ACDSee Picaview
This checkbox enables or disables ACDSee PicaView. When enabled, ACDSee PicaView appears when an
ACDSee-supported file is right-clicked anywhere on your hard drive. You have the option of displaying a
preview of the file or image, and its EXIF information, or one or the other.
Display Image
Check the Display Image checkbox to display a preview of the right-clicked file.
Location: Add image to main menu: when you right-click,

displays image in the main menu.
Add image to sub-menu: when you right-click, displays

image in a sub-menu, available by clicking the arrow
next to ACDSee PicaView.
Size: Select the size of the preview that displays when you right-
click.
Show Original Select Show Original to display the pre-developed or pre-

edited version of the image when you right-click.
Show EXIF Information
Check or uncheck the Show EXIF Information checkbox to show or hide the right-clicked photo's EXIF
information.
Setting the ACDSee Mobile Sync Options

You can use the Options dialog box to change your ACDSee Mobile Sync settings.
To Set the ACDSee Mobile Sync Options:

2. In the Options dialog, click ACDSee Mobile Sync.
3. On the ACDSee Mobile Sync page, set or change the options as described below.
ACDSee Mobile Sync Options
Page 704 of 827

Root Folder Click the Browse For Folder button to specify the destination for your sent images
and videos.
Server Name To customize the name of the target server (ACDSee on your PC), enter text in
the field. This name will appear in your list of targets in the ACDSee Mobile Sync
app.
Show ACDSee Mobile Displays the ACDSee Mobile Sync folder in the Folders pane.
Sync Root Folder on
Folder Tree
Setting the Document File Type Options

You can use the Options dialog to customize how document file types are opened.
To Set the Document File Types Options:

2. In the Options dialog box, click Document File Types.
3. On the Document File Types page, check or uncheck the checkboxes next to each document file type.
When a file type's checkbox is checked, double-clicking or selecting and pressing Enter in Manage
mode will open that file type in View mode. When a file type's checkbox is unchecked, double-clicking
or selecting and pressing Enter in Manage mode will open that file type in its associated application.
Using ACDSee on Multiple Monitors

If you are using a second monitor, you can view and adjust your images simultaneously using ACDSee.
This allows you to streamline your workflow and reference the saved version of the image while
adjusting it.
You can switch which screen displays ACDSee by clicking and dragging it to the second screen.
To Use ACDSee with Your Second Monitor:
Manage Mode
1. In Manage mode, select an image.
2. Click View | Second Monitor. Your image will open on your second monitor.
Toggle your image in and out of full-screen mode by double-clicking.
Page 705 of 827

View Mode
Click View | Second Monitor: File List. A full-screen file list will open on your second monitor.
Click View | Second Monitor: Image. Your selected image will open on your second monitor.
Toggle the image or file list in and out of full-screen mode by double-clicking.
Develop and Edit Mode

1. With an image open in Develop or Edit mode, do one of the following:
Click View | Second Monitor: Image. The saved version of the selected image will open on your
second monitor. This image does not represent a live preview of the changes that are being
made to it in Develop or Edit mode. However, this allows you to compare the image to its
original as you process it.
Click View | Second Monitor: File List. A full-screen file list will open on your second monitor.
Toggle the image or file list in and out of full-screen mode by double-clicking.
Creating Custom Workspaces

You can create and save custom Manage mode workspaces based on your preferences or the tasks
you perform in ACDSee. For example, you could create and save an editing workspace, an organizing
workspace, and a browsing workspace, each with its own panes and tools arranged for easy access.
To Create and Save a Custom Workspace:

1. Change the Manage mode workspace by displaying or hiding specific panes, moving and docking panes,
stacking panes, or resizing panes.
2. When you are satisfied with the layout of the panes, click View | Workspaces | Manage Workspaces....
3. In the Manage Workspaces dialog box, click Save Workspace.
4. Type a name for the workspace, and then click OK.
5. Click OK again.
To Load a Saved Workspace:

1. In Manage mode, click View | Workspaces.
2. Select the saved workspace.
Page 706 of 827

To Restore the Default Workspace:

In Manage mode, click View | Workspaces | Default Workspace.
Auto-hiding Panes and Panels

You can use the Auto Hide button to automatically hide some panes and panels in ACDSee. When a
pane is set to auto-hide, it rolls away when you click outside of it, leaving a tab displayed. You can
access the pane by moving the cursor over the tab. When a pane or panel is floating, the auto-hide
feature is not available. You cannot move the pane to a new location if it is set to auto-hide.
The Auto Hide button's appearance on the pane’s title bar reflects its current setting:
A horizontal pushpin indicates that the pane is set to automatically hide when you click
outside of it.
A vertical pushpin indicates that the pane is fixed and will remain visible even if you click
outside of it.
To Set or Remove Auto-Hide:

Click the Auto Hide button on the title bar so that it displays a slanted or horizontal pushpin.
Using the Task Pane

The Task Pane displays groups of often-used tasks from the menus and toolbars based on your
current location and selections in ACDSee. By default, the Task Pane opens on the right side of the
Manage mode window.
To Open or Close the Task Pane:

In Manage mode, click Panes | Task Pane.
The menus in the Task Pane change depending on what area of the Manage mode window you are
working in and what items you select. For example, if you select more than a folder in the File List
pane, the Task Pane displays different menus than it does if you select a photo or media file.
The options on the Task Pane menus also change dynamically. For example, if you select multiple
images in the File List, the options in the Fix and Enhance Photos menu change to list options that you
can use with multiple images.
Customizing Toolbars
You can customize the appearance and organization of toolbars in Manage mode and View mode by
selecting which toolbars to display, and specifying each toolbar’s buttons or commands. You can also
discard your changes and reset the toolbars to their default layout at any time.
Page 707 of 827

Displaying and Hiding Toolbars

You can choose to display or hide the specific toolbars in Manage mode and View mode.
To Display or Hide a Toolbar:

In Manage or View mode, click View | Toolbars, and then select the toolbar you want to display or hide.
Customizing Toolbar Contents

You can customize the following toolbars:
In Manage mode: the Main toolbar and the File List toolbar.
In View mode: the Bottom toolbar.
You can add, remove, and rearrange buttons on these toolbars. You can also display or hide text
labels and tool tips for the buttons on these toolbars. All toolbar customization options are in the
Customize dialog box.
To Display the Customize Dialog Box:

In Manage mode, click View | Toolbars and then select Customize.
In Manage mode, click the drop-down arrow, located to the right of the Main toolbar or File List toolbar,
select Add or Remove Buttons, and then select Customize.
In View mode, click the drop-down arrow, located to the right of the Bottom toolbar, select Add or
Remove Buttons, and then select Customize.
To Add or Remove Toolbar Buttons:
In Manage Mode:
Main toolbar:
1. Click the drop-down arrow located on the right side of the Main toolbar.
2. Select Add or Remove Buttons | Main Toolbar, then select the name of the button you want to add or
remove.
File List toolbar:

With the Customize dialog box open, on the Commands tab, drag items from the Commands field to the
toolbar to add buttons.
To remove buttons, drag them from the toolbar to the Customize dialog box.
Page 708 of 827

In View Mode:
Bottom toolbar:
1. Click the drop-down arrow, located to the right of the Bottom toolbar.
2. Select Add or Remove Buttons | Bottom Toolbar, then select the name of the button you want to add
or remove.
To Rearrange Toolbar Buttons:

With the Customize dialog box open, drag buttons to your desired toolbar location.
To Display or Hide Text Labels Below Toolbar Buttons:

1. Display the Customize dialog box.
2. Click the Toolbars tab.
3. In Manage mode: select File List Toolbar or Main Toolbar.
In View mode: select Bottom Toolbar.

4. Check the Show text labels checkbox to display text labels, or clear the Show text labels checkbox to
hide text labels.
5. Click Close.
To Display or Hide Tool Tips for Toolbar Buttons:

2. Click the Options tab.
3. Select Show ScreenTips on toolbars to display tool-tips, or clear Show ScreenTips on toolbars to hide
tool-tips. If you select this option, you can also select Show shortcut keys in ScreenTips to show
keyboard shortcuts in the tool-tips.
4. Click Close.
Resetting Toolbars
You can discard all of your changes, and return the toolbars and buttons to their default states.
To Reset the Toolbars:

2. Click the Toolbars tab, and then click Reset All.
3. Click Yes to reset the toolbars.
4. Click Close.
Page 709 of 827

Customizing Toolbar and Pane Locations

You can hide, resize, float, move, and dock most toolbars and panes to suit your preferences. To learn
about all the ways you can customize your experience in Manage mode, see Using Manage Mode.
Hiding Panes
At the top right corner of Manage, View, Develop, and Edit mode, you can use the Hide/Unhide
buttons to hide and reveal panes on the left, right, or bottom of the screen.
Hide/Unhide Left Panels
Hide/Unhide Bottom Panels
Hide/Unhide Right Panels
Moving Panes and Toolbars in View, Develop, and Edit Mode

You can move a pane or toolbar from a docked or floating position to a new location.
Some toolbars do not activate the Docking Compass.
To Move a Pane or Toolbar:

1. Drag the pane or toolbar's title bar and hold your cursor over any of the arrows of the Docking Compass.
2. When the shaded marquee displays the position of the pane or toolbar you want, release the mouse
button.
3. To return a pane to its previous location, double-click its title bar.
To Move a Docked or Floating Pane or Toolbar:

Drag the pane or toolbar's tab to a new location.
Drag the pane or toolbar's title bar to a new location.
If you use dual monitors, you can move the panes and toolbars to your second monitor to free up space
on your main monitor.
Docking Panes and Toolbars in View, Develop, and Edit Mode

When you select a pane or toolbar, the Docking Compass activates to help you place the pane
precisely. The Docking Compass consists of an outer and inner ring of arrows. When you hold your
Page 710 of 827

cursor over any of the arrows, a shaded marquee displays the potential position of the pane.
Some toolbars do not activate the Docking Compass.
To Dock a Pane or Toolbar:

Drag the pane or toolbar's title bar or tab to activate the Docking Compass. To dock a pane around the
outer edge of the window, hold your cursor over any of the outer arrows of the Docking Compass, and
then release the mouse button.
Resizing Panes
You can resize all the panes and toolbars, whether they are docked or floating.
To Resize a Docked Pane:

1. Hold your cursor over the edge of the pane or toolbar until the cursor changes to arrows and lines.
2. Drag the edge of the pane or toolbar to the size you want.
To Resize a Floating Pane:

Hold your cursor over the edge or corner of the pane or toolbar and then drag the pane to the size
you want.
You can enlarge the Filmstrip in View, Develop, and Edit mode to expedite browsing your
folder. To resize the Filmstrip, drag one of its edges.
You can move the Drawing and Selections Toolbar, as well as the ACDSee Actions bar and the
Color pane.
Creating a Custom Menu

You can create a new menu in Manage mode with custom commands for easy access. You can also
customize the name and location of your new menu.
To Create a New Menu:

In Manage mode, click View | Toolbars and then select Customize.
In Manage mode, click the drop-down arrow located to the right of the Main toolbar or File List
toolbar, select Add or Remove Buttons, and then select Customize.
Page 711 of 827

2. In the Customize dialog, on the Commands tab, select New Menu from the Categories field.
3. In the Commands field, select New Menu and drag it to your desired toolbar location.
To Add Commands to a New Menu:

1. In the Customize dialog, on the Commands tab, select any option from the Categories field.
2. In the Commands field, select your command and drag it over to your new menu on the toolbar. The
new menu will expand down. Drop the command on the menu.
To Delete a New Menu or Command:
The Customize dialog must be open to delete a new menu or command.
Right-click the new menu or command and choose Delete from the context menu.
To Name a New Menu:
The Customize dialog must be open to name a new menu.
1. Right-click the new menu and choose Button Appearance... from the context menu.
2. In the Button Appearance dialog, with Text only selected, enter a name in the Button text field.
3. Press OK.
Configuring External Editors

To open images in external editing applications from within ACDSee, configure ACDSee Ultimate to
work with a variety of image editors, such as ACDSee Luxea Video Editor, and specify which image
editor ACDSee Ultimate uses by default.
An external editor must be configured before it can be assigned a shortcut key or used as a
button on the toolbar.
To configure an External Editor in ACDSee:

1. In Manage mode, select Tools | External Editors | Configure Editors from the main menu.
2. In the Configure Photo Editors dialog box, click the Add... button.
3. Browse to the hard drive folder containing an image editing application.
4. Select the executable file of the editing application. For example, ACDSee Luxea Video Editor.exe.
5. Click Open.
6. Enter an editor name in the Name field, then click OK.
To create a shortcut to the default External Editor:
Page 712 of 827

1. Select Tools | Customize Shortcuts... from the main menu.
2. In the Customize Shortcuts dialog box, select "Tools" from the Category drop-down menu.
3. From the Commands menu, select Default External Editor.
4. Enter a shortcut key into the Enter new shortcut key field.
5. Click Assign and close the dialog box.
A new keyboard shortcut has been set for the default external editor.
To create a shortcut to an individual External Editor:

1. Select Tools | Customize Shortcuts... from the main menu.
2. In the Customize Shortcuts dialog box, select "External Editors" from the Category drop-down menu.
3. From the Commands menu, select the desired external editor.
4. Enter a shortcut key into the Enter new shortcut key field.
5. Click Assign and close the dialog box.
A new keyboard shortcut has been set for an individual external editor.
To add an External Editor to the FileList toolbar in Manage mode:

1. Click the Toolbar Options drop-down arrow, to the right of the Editors and Actions menu options, and
select Add or Remove Buttons | Customize.
2. In the Customize dialog box, in the Commands tab, select "Tools" from the Category list.
3. Click and drag an External Editor from the list onto the FileList toolbar.
4. Close the dialog box.
An External Editor is added to the FileList toolbar.
To add an External Editor button to the toolbar in View mode:

1. Click the Toolbar Options drop-down arrow, to the right of the tools, and select Add or Remove Buttons
| Customize.
2. In the Customize dialog box, in the Commands tab, select "Tools" from the Category list.
3. In the Commands list, select Default External Editor, and click and drag it onto the toolbar.
4. Close the dialog box.
The default External Editor is added to the toolbar.
To manage image editors:

1. In Manage mode, select Tools | External Editors | Configure Editors from the main menu.
2. In the Configure Photo Editors dialog box, in the Editors list, select an application to change.
Page 713 of 827

To change the location of the executable file or the name of the application displayed in the
Editors list, click Edit. Set the location and name of the application, and then click OK.
To set the application as the default external editor for ACDSee, click Set As Default.
To specify whether the application can handle multiple images at the same time, check or
uncheck the checkbox in the Supports Multiple Images column.
To remove the application from the list, click Remove.
To open an image in an external image editor:

1. In Manage or View mode, select an image to open in an external editor.
Select Tools | External Editors | Default External Editor or the name of an editor.
Press Ctrl + Alt + X to open the image in the default external editor.
Customizing Keyboard Shortcuts

There are pre-defined keyboard shortcuts for commands that you use frequently. You can change pre-
defined shortcuts, or create keyboard shortcuts for commands that do not currently have shortcuts.
The options available in the Customize Shortcut dialog will be mode-specific, depending on which
mode you opened the dialog from.
Keyboard shortcuts customized in one mode will not take effect in the other modes, even if
the defined command name is the same.
If a shortcut is already assigned to a command, then assigning it to another command will

unassign it from the original command.
To Customize Keyboard Shortcuts:

In Manage, View, Develop, and Edit mode:
1. Click Tools | Customize Shortcuts... or press Ctrl + Shift + Alt + S.
2. From the Category drop-down menu, select a category, such as File, Edit, or View. The commands
available from that menu display in the Commands list box.
Page 714 of 827

3. Select a command in the Commands list box.
If a keyboard shortcut has been defined for that command, it displays in the Current Keys box.
If a keyboard shortcut has not been defined for that command, the Current Keys box will be
empty.
To remove an existing keyboard shortcut, select the keyboard shortcut in the Current Keys box, and
then click Remove.
To Define a New Keyboard Shortcut:

1. Click in the Enter a new shortcut key text box.
2. Press the keys on your keyboard that you want to use for the keyboard shortcut.
The keys display in the Enter a new shortcut key text box. The Currently assigned to field will
display the function your entered shortcut is assigned to, if applicable.
3. Click Assign.
The new keyboard shortcut displays in the Current keys box.

4. Click Close.
To remove all custom keyboard shortcuts and restore the default keyboard shortcuts, click Reset All.
Changing the Display Theme

In ACDSee Ultimate you can change the display theme to change the background color of the panes
and toolbars.
To Change the Display Theme:

1. In Manage mode, click Tools | Options.
2. In the Options dialog box, click Manage Mode.
3. In the Display theme drop-down list, select a theme.
Setting JPEG Options

You can change the settings in the Options dialog box to control the quality of the JPEG image,
encoding method, color subsampling method, and whether to update or create embedded
thumbnails in the JPEG image.
JPEG Options
Page 715 of 827

Image quality Drag the slider to determine the quality of the JPEG image.
Encoding l Progressive: select to enable progressive encoding.

l Optimize Huffman codes: select to optimize Huffman codes to increase
compression.
Color component l 2:1 Horizontal: select to subsample color channels on the horizontal axis
by a factor of 2:1.
sampling l 2:1 Vertical: select to subsample color channels on the vertical axis by a
factor of 2:1.
Embedded thumbnails l Only update existing thumbnails: select to update any existing embed-
ded thumbnails.
l Always add/update thumbnails: select to update any existing embed-
ded thumbnails, or create embedded thumbnails.
l Never add/update thumbnails: select if you do not want to update any
existing embedded thumbnails, or if you do not want to create embedded
thumbnails.
l Generate DCF compatible thumbnails: select to generate thumbnails
that meet the Digital Camera Format (DCF) specification and are compatible
with the thumbnail view on the LCD of a digital camera. This option forces a
fixed resolution of 160 x 120 and pads any extra space with black.
Save these settings as Select this option to use these JPEG settings by default for all JPEGs.
the defaults
Page 716 of 827

Chapter 13: Shortcuts

Manage Mode Keyboard Shortcuts
You can use the following keyboard shortcuts while working in Manage mode. There are also shortcuts
that can be used specifically in the Calendar pane.
To print this page for easy reference, right-click and select Print...
Page 717 of 827

Alt + F4 Closes ACDSee.

Ctrl + W
Ctrl + Shift + Alt + S Opens the Customize Shortcuts dialog box,

in which you can customize keyboard
shortcuts.
Alt + O Opens the Options dialog box.
F1 Opens the Help file.
Enter Opens the selected item in View mode.
Delete Deletes the selected items.
Using Manage Mode
Page 718 of 827

\ (backslash) Tags or untags the image.
Page 719 of 827

` (grave accent) Toggles image audio on or off.
Page 720 of 827

Alt + 0 to 5 Assigns a color label to the currently

selected item. Press Alt + 0 to remove a
color label.
Alt + C Copies one or more selected files to a

folder you specify.
Alt + Comma Opens the previous tab in the Properties

pane.
Alt + Period Opens the next tab in the Properties pane.
Alt + Enter Opens or closes the Properties pane.
Alt + G Opens the Import dialog box.
Alt + I Opens the Filters dialog box where you can

specify the types of files displayed in the
File List pane.
Alt + K Places the cursor in the Keyword section of

the IPTC group in the Metadata tab of the
Properties pane.
Alt + M Moves one or more selected files to a

folder you specify.
Alt + Shift + F Maximizes the File List pane.
F2 Renames one or more selected files.
Alt + W Restores your desktop wallpaper to the

settings you were using before you applied
an ACDSee Ultimate wallpaper.
Alt + X Removes currently displayed item from

the active Image Basket.
Backspace Moves up one level in the current drive's

folder structure.
Ctrl + 0 to 5 Assigns a rating to the currently selected

item. Press Ctrl + 0 to remove a rating.
Ctrl + \ (backslash) Selects the tagged images.
Ctrl + A Selects the entire contents of the current
Page 721 of 827

folder.
Page 722 of 827

Ctrl + B Adds the selected items to the active

Image Basket.
Ctrl + D Opens the current image in Develop mode.
Ctrl + E Opens the currently selected image in Edit

mode.
Ctrl + Alt + S Runs the Focus Stack command on the

currently selected images.
Ctrl + G Generates a file listing as a text document.
Ctrl + I Selects all images in the current folder.
Ctrl + Alt + D Opens the Edit Caption dialog box.
Ctrl + K Places the cursor in the Keywords field of

the Organize tab in the Properties pane.
Ctrl + M Opens the Manage Metadata Presets dialog

box.
Ctrl + N Creates a new folder in the File List pane.
Ctrl + O Opens the Open Files dialog box, in which

you can select one or more images to open
in View mode.
Ctrl + P Opens the currently selected image or

images in the ACDSee Ultimate Print utility.
Ctrl + Tab Moves the focus of the Manage mode

window between the currently displayed
panes.
Ctrl + X Cuts the currently selected items to the

Clipboard.
Ctrl + C Copies the selected items to the Clipboard.

Ctrl + Insert
Ctrl + V Pastes the contents of the Clipboard.

Shift + Insert
Ctrl + F Puts the focus in the Quick Search bar so
Page 723 of 827

that you can begin typing your search

query.
F5 Refreshes Manage mode.
F3 Opens the Search pane.
Ctrl + Alt + E Opens the Export dialog box.
F4 Displays the Contents bar drop-down list.
F6 Changes the File List to Thumbs+Details

view.
F7 Changes the File List to Filmstrip view.
F8 Changes the File List to Thumbnails view.
F9 Changes the File List to Tiles view.
F10 Changes the File List to Icons view.
F11 Changes the File List to List view.
F12 Changes the File List to Details view.
Shift + Delete Removes the selected item from your hard

drive.
Shift + F5 Refreshes the File List pane.
Shift + Tab Moves the focus of the Manage mode

window to the previous pane or tool in
sequence.
Tab Moves the focus of the Manage mode

window to the next pane or tool in
sequence.
Ctrl + Alt + R Opens the selected images in the Compare

Images viewer.
Ctrl + Alt + W Sets the selected image as a stretched

desktop wallpaper.
Ctrl + Alt + X Opens the current image in the default

external editor.
Page 724 of 827

Ctrl + Right-Click Opens Windows Explorer context menu.
Page 725 of 827

Ctrl + Shift + 1 Opens or closes the Folders pane.
Page 726 of 827

Ctrl + Shift + 2 Opens or closes the Catalog pane.
Page 727 of 827

Ctrl + Shift + 3 Opens or closes the Search pane.
Page 728 of 827

Ctrl + Shift + 4 Opens or closes the Calendar pane.
Page 729 of 827

Ctrl + Shift + 5 Shows or hides all Image Baskets.
Ctrl + Shift + 9 Creates a new Image Basket.
Ctrl + Shift + - Deletes the active Image Basket.
Ctrl + Shift + A Selects all files in the current folder.
Ctrl + Shift + B Shows or hides the status bar.
Ctrl + Shift + C Copies the currently selected image to the

Clipboard.
Ctrl + Shift + D Clears your current selection.
Ctrl + Shift + E Opens the current file in the default

system application or opens a dialog box
where you can select an application.
Ctrl + Shift + F Toggles the full-screen view for the File List
pane.
Ctrl + Shift + I Inverts your current selection.
Ctrl + Shift + L Opens or closes the Selective Browsing

panel.
Ctrl + Shift + M Opens or closes the Map pane.
Ctrl + Shift + N Opens a second instance of the ACDSee

program.
Ctrl + Shift + O Opens the file using the system application

associated with its file extension.
Ctrl + Shift + T Displays or hides the Manage mode Main

toolbar.
Ctrl + Shift + Tab Moves the focus of the Manage mode

window between the currently displayed
panes.
Ctrl + Shift + W Sets the selected image as a tiled desktop

wallpaper.
Ctrl + Shift + Alt + W Sets the selected image as a centered

desktop wallpaper.
Page 730 of 827

Viewing
Alt + Left Arrow Returns to the previous folder you

browsed in the File List pane.
Alt + Right Arrow Returns to the folder you last moved back
from in the File List pane.
Ctrl + S Creates a slideshow from the currently

selected images.
Ctrl + Shift + P Opens or closes the Preview pane.
Batch Editing
Ctrl + R Opens the Batch Resize Images dialog box.
Ctrl + T Opens the Batch Adjust Time Stamp dialog

box.
Ctrl + Alt + B Opens the Batch Edit dialog box.
Ctrl + Alt + F Opens the Batch Convert File Format dialog

box.
Ctrl + J Opens the Batch Rotate/Flip Images dialog

box.
Ctrl + L Opens the Batch Adjust Exposure dialog

box.
Mode Switching
Ctrl + F2 Switches to Media mode.
Ctrl + F3 Opens the image in View mode.
Ctrl + F4 Opens the image in Develop mode.
Ctrl + F5 Opens the image in Edit mode.
Ctrl + F6 Switches to People mode.
Ctrl + F7 Switches to 365 mode.
Ctrl + F8 Switches to Dashboard mode.
Page 731 of 827

Manage Mode Mouse Shortcuts

You can use the following mouse shortcuts in Manage mode.
Shortcut Resulting Action
Double-click Opens the selected image in View mode.
Right-click Opens the Manage mode context menu.
Shift + click Selects a group of images.
Click + drag Selects a group of images. Be sure to click on a blank area of the
screen, not on an image or folder, before you drag, so you can draw
a selection box around the group of images.
Ctrl + click Selects images you click on.
Ctrl + right-click Opens the Windows Explorer context menu.
Ctrl + Wheel up Increases the magnification of the thumbnail (zooms in).
Ctrl + Wheel down Decreases the magnification of the thumbnail (zooms out).
Calendar Pane Shortcuts

Once you are familiar with the basic calendar pane options, consider using the following shortcuts:
Click the title bar on a year, month, or day table to display all available images for that year, month, or
day.
Right-click the title bar on a year, month, or day table to scroll through and select from adjacent years,
months, or days.
In Year view double-click any month to switch to Month view. Or, in Month view, double-click any date
to switch to Day view.
In Month view click the letter indicating a day of the week to display all available images for that day of
the week. For example, click F to select all Fridays in that month.
In Day view click AM or PM to select the first or second half of a day.
In Event view press and hold the Ctrl key and click any month or day to display all available images for
those months or days.
Click on the title of any month calendar, to select all the photos in that month.
Page 732 of 827

Click the name of the week, to select all the photos in those weeks of the month.
Drag and select any days in the calendar to select all the photos in those days.
Media Mode Keyboard Shortcuts

You can use the following keyboard shortcuts while working in Media mode.

Ctrl + W
Alt + O Opens the Options dialog.
Ctrl + P Prints the selected image.
Ctrl + L Rotates the selected image left.
Ctrl + R Rotates the selected image right.
F5 Refreshes.
Ctrl + F Show/Hide Folder pane.
Ctrl + G Show/Hide Group pane.
Mode Switching
Ctrl + F1 Switches to Manage mode.
Ctrl + F3 Opens the currently selected image in

View mode.
Ctrl + F4 Opens the currently selected image in

Develop mode.
Ctrl + F5 Opens the currently selected image in Edit

mode.
Page 733 of 827

View Mode Keyboard Shortcuts

You can use the following keyboard shortcuts while working in View mode.
If you would like to define your own keyboard shortcuts, see Customizing Keyboard
Shortcuts.
Page 734 of 827


Ctrl + W
` (grave accent) Toggles the display of the full file path in the Status bar.
Enter Switches to the previous mode.

Esc
Shift + Esc Minimizes ACDSee in View, Develop, and Edit mode.
Ctrl + Shift + Alt Opens the Customize Shortcuts dialog box, in which you can customize
+S keyboard shortcuts.
File Menu
Ctrl + O Opens the Open files dialog box.

Insert
Shift + F4 Closes the current item.
Ctrl + Shift + F4 Closes all images.
Ctrl + S Opens the Save Image As dialog box, in which you can save your image
with a different name or file format.
Shift + L Opens the file using the system application associated with its file
extension.
Shift + E Opens the current file in the default system application or opens a
dialog box where you can select an application.
Ctrl + P Opens the current image in the ACDSee Ultimate Print utility.
Ctrl + Shift + P Prints all currently selected images, or all images in the current folder.
Alt + L Opens the Flickr Uploader dialog box.
Alt + U Opens the SmugMug Uploader dialog box.
Alt + Z Opens the Zenfolio Uploader dialog box.
Page 735 of 827

Customizing the Interface
Ctrl + Shift + H Toggles the Histogram open and closed.
Ctrl + Shift + A Toggles the Actions pane open and closed.
Ctrl + Shift + M Toggles the Magnifying Glass pane open and closed.
Ctrl + + (plus) Zooms in on the Magnifying Glass pane.
Ctrl + - (minus) Zooms out on the Magnifying Glass pane.
Ctrl + Shift + S Toggles the Navigator open and closed.
Alt + Enter Toggles the Properties pane open and closed.
Alt + , Switches to the tab to the left on the Properties pane.
Alt + . Switches to the tab to the right on the Properties pane.
Ctrl + Shift + F Toggles the Filmstrip open and closed.
Ctrl + Shift + I Toggles the Info palette open and closed.
T Toggles the Toolbar open and closed.

Ctrl + Shift + T
B Toggles the Status bar open and closed.

Ctrl + Shift + B
Ctrl + Shift + V Toggles the Page View panel open and closed for multi-page images.
Managing
Page 736 of 827

Ctrl + X Cuts the current item to the Clipboard.
Page 737 of 827

Ctrl + C Copies the currently displayed file to the Clipboard.
Page 738 of 827

Ctrl + V Pastes the contents of the Clipboard.
Page 739 of 827

Alt + C Opens the Copy To Folder dialog box.
Page 740 of 827

Alt + M Opens the Move To Folder dialog box.
Page 741 of 827

Delete Deletes the selected image.
Page 742 of 827

F2 Opens the Rename File dialog box.

Alt + R
Ctrl + B Adds the selected image to the active Image Basket.
Alt + X Removes the selected image from the active Image Basket.
Alt + A Opens the Add Shortcut dialog box.
\ (back slash) Tags or untags the image.
Ctrl + M Opens the Manage Metadata Presets dialog box.
Ctrl + 0 Clears the rating.
Ctrl + 1 Assigns a rating of 1.
Alt + 0 Clears the color label.
Alt + 1 Assigns a red color label.
Alt + 2 Assigns a yellow color label.
Alt + 3 Assigns a green color label.
Alt + 4 Assigns a blue color label.
Alt + 5 Assigns a purple color label.
Ctrl + K Opens the Keywords section of the Properties pane.
Alt + K Opens the Metadata tab of the Properties pane.
Ctrl + Shift + Alt Sets the selected image as the desktop wallpaper, centered.
+W
Ctrl + Shift + W Sets the selected image as the desktop wallpaper, tiled.
Page 743 of 827

Ctrl + Alt + W Sets the selected image as the desktop wallpaper, stretched.
Alt + W Restores your desktop wallpaper to the settings you were using before
you applied an ACDSee Ultimate wallpaper.
Viewing
Page Arrow Displays the next image.

Right
Page Down
3 (numeric
keypad)
Spacebar
Page Arrow Displays the previous image.

Left
Page Up
9 (numeric
keypad)
Backspace
End Switches to the last image in the Filmstrip.
Home Switches to the first image in the Filmstrip.
Ctrl + Right- Opens the Windows Explorer context menu.

click
+ (plus) Zooms in.
- (minus) Zooms out.
Shift + Z Zooms in to the area you select.
/ (forward Zooms the image to its actual size.

slash)
* (numeric Fits the image to the viewing area.

keypad
asterisk)
Shift + 8
Alt + Page Fits image width to the display area.

Arrow Right
Page 744 of 827

Alt + Page Fits image height to the display area.

Down
Alt + \ Toggles the zoom lock on and off.
L Toggles the pan lock.
Z Opens the Set Zoom Level dialog box.
Page Arrow Pans right when zoomed into the image.

Right
Page Arrow Pans left when zoomed into the image.

Left
Page Down Pans down when zoomed into the image.
Page Up Pans up when zoomed into the image.
F Toggles full screen mode.
Ctrl + Page Toggles the right pane open and closed.

Arrow Right
Ctrl + Page Toggles the bottom pane open and closed.

Arrow Down
O Displays saved version of the image.
E Toggles the exposure warning on and off.
R Toggles the RAW decode/embedded preview on and off.
Shift + F1 Activates the Hand tool after zooming in with the Zoom tool.
Shift + F2 Activates the Select tool.
Ctrl + Q Clears the current selection.
Shift + F3 Activates the Zoom tool.
Shift + F Activates the Face tool.
Shift + B Toggles face outlines.
Ctrl + N Opens the Face Detection pane and puts the cursor in the first name
field.
Page 745 of 827

TAB Moves the cursor between name fields on the image, as well as on the
Face Detection pane.
Ctrl + Shift + D Toggles the Face Detection pane.
Ctrl + F Redetects faces.
F5 Refreshes the View mode window and reloads the current image.
Alt + F5 Toggles a full screen display of the image on your second screen open
and closed.
Alt + F6 Toggles a full screen display of the file list on your second screen open
and closed.
Ctrl + 6 Toggles the Light EQ button on and off.
Alt + S Automatically advances to the next image every 1 to 2 seconds.
Ctrl + Alt + S Launches the slideshow.
Ctrl + A Displays or hides headers and footers.
Ctrl + Shift + Q Opens the View Header/Footer dialog box, in which you can specify
the text to display on your images in View mode.
Alt + Ctrl + S Starts or stops the slideshow.
Shift + Page Advances to the next page of a multi-page image.

Arrow Down
Shift + Page Switches to the previous page of a multi-page image.

Arrow Up
Shift + Home Switches to the first page of a multi-page image.
Shift + End Switches to the last page of a multi-page image.
Editing
Ctrl + Shift + Rotates the current image 90° counterclockwise.

Page Arrow
Left
Ctrl + Shift + Rotates the current image 90° clockwise.

Page Arrow
Right
Page 746 of 827

Alt + E Opens the image in the default editor.
Shift + R Restores an edited image to the developed version (if the image was
first developed, then edited).
Shift + O Restores an edited image to the original version.
Shift + S Commits the changes.
Shift + C Opens the Copy settings dialog box for a developed image.
Shift + V Pastes the copied develop settings to the image.
Ctrl + Alt + N Opens the Batch Develop dialog box.
Ctrl + Alt + B Opens the Batch Edit dialog box.
Ctrl + Alt + F Opens the Batch Convert File Format dialog box.
Ctrl + J Opens the Batch Rotate/Flip Images dialog box.
Ctrl + R Opens the Batch Resize Images dialog box.
Ctrl + L Opens the Batch Adjust Exposure dialog box.
Ctrl + T Opens the Batch Adjust Time Stamp dialog box.
Ctrl + Alt + R Opens the Batch Rename dialog box.
Ctrl + Shift + 1 Changes the image color depth to Black and White.
Ctrl + Shift + 2 Changes the image color depth to 16 grays.
Ctrl + Shift + 3 Changes the image color depth to 256 grays.
Ctrl + Shift + 4 Changes the image color depth to 16 colors.
Ctrl + Shift + 5 Changes the image color depth to 256 colors.
Ctrl + Shift + 6 Changes the image color depth to Hicolor.
Ctrl + Shift + 7 Changes the image color depth to Truecolor.
Ctrl + Shift + 8 Converts the image to a 16-bit grayscale palette.
Ctrl + Shift + 9 Converts the image to a 48-bit color palette.
Page 747 of 827

Mode Switching
Ctrl + F4 Opens the currently selected image in Develop mode.
Ctrl + F5 Opens the currently selected image in Edit mode.
View Mode Mouse Shortcuts

You can use the following mouse shortcuts while working in View mode.
Double-click Closes View mode and returns to the previous mode.
Right-click Opens the View mode context menu.
Middle click Toggles full screen mode (on 3-button mouse).
Wheel click Toggles full screen mode.
Wheel up Displays the previous item.
Wheel down Displays the next item.
Ctrl + Right-click Opens the Windows Explorer context menu.
Ctrl + Wheel up Increases the magnification of the image (zooms in).
Ctrl + Wheel down Decreases the magnification of the image (zooms out).
Shift + Wheel up Displays the previous page of a multiple-page image.
Shift + Wheel down Displays the next page of a multiple-page image.
Page 748 of 827

Develop and Edit Mode Keyboard Shortcuts

Use the following keyboard shortcuts in Develop and Edit mode.
Shortcuts.
Edit Mode Keyboard Shortcuts
Page 749 of 827

Alt + F4 Closes ACDSee in all modes.
Shift + Esc Minimizes ACDSee in View, Develop, and

Edit mode.
Ctrl + Shift + Alt + S Opens the Customize Shortcuts dialog box,

in which you can customize keyboard
shortcuts.
` (grave accent) Toggles the display of the full file path in

the Status bar.
File Menu
Page Arrow Right Opens the next image.

Page Down
3 (numeric keypad)
Page Arrow Left Opens the previous image.

Page Up
9 (numeric keypad)
Ctrl + S Saves the image.
Ctrl + Alt + S Saves a copy.
Ctrl + Alt + E Opens the Export dialog.
Ctrl + D Switches to Develop mode.
End Switches to the last image in the Filmstrip.
Home Switches to the first image in the Filmstrip.
Esc Switches to the previous mode.

Enter
Edit Menu
Page 750 of 827

Ctrl + Y Redo.
Ctrl + Z Undo.
Ctrl + Shift + Z Undo all.
Ctrl + C Copy.
Ctrl + V Paste.
Delete Delete.
Managing
Page 751 of 827

Ctrl + K Opens the Keywords section of the

Properties pane.
Alt + K Opens the Metadata tab of the Properties

pane.
\ (back slash) Tags the photo.
Ctrl + M Opens the Manage Metadata Presets dialog

box.
Viewing
Page 752 of 827

Ctrl + Page Arrow Right Toggles the right pane open and closed.
Ctrl + Page Arrow Left Toggles the left pane open and closed.
Ctrl + Page Arrow Down Toggles the bottom pane open and closed.
/ (forward slash) Zooms the image to its actual size.
Shift + 8 Fits the image to the viewing area.

* (numeric keypad asterisk)
+ (plus) Zooms in.
- (minus) Zoomed out.
F Displays the image full screen.
' Toggles Navigator open and closed when

zoomed into the image.
[ Enables soft proofing.
Z Displays saved version of the image.
Page Arrow Right Pans right when zoomed into the image.
Page Arrow Left Pans left when zoomed into the image.
Down Arrow Pans down when zoomed into the image.
Up Arrow Pans up when zoomed into the image.
Customizing the Interface
Page 753 of 827

F2 Toggles the Filter Menu open and closed.
F3 Toggles the Actions pane open and closed.
F4 Toggles the Properties pane open and

closed.
Alt + Enter
F5 Toggles the Filmstrip open and closed.
F6 Toggles the Info palette open and closed.
F7 Toggles the Histogram open and closed.

Ctrl + Shift + H
F8 Toggles the Layers pane open and closed.
F9 Toggles the Undo History pane open and

closed.
F10 Toggles the Colors pane open and closed.
Alt + F1 Toggles the Toolbar open and closed.
Alt + F2 Toggles the Filters toolbar open and closed.
Alt + F3 Toggles the Actions toolbar open and

closed.
Alt + F5 Toggles a full screen display of the image

on your second screen open and closed.
Alt + F6 Toggles a full screen display of the file list

on your second screen open and closed.
Ctrl + T Toggles rulers on and off.
Ctrl + Shift + G Enables/disables snapping to guidelines.
Ctrl + Shift + ; Clears all guidelines.
Ctrl + Alt + ; Locks guidelines in place.
Ctrl + ; Toggles guidelines on and off.
Selecting
Page 754 of 827

Alt + A Selects all.
Alt + D Deselects.
Alt + I Inverts selection.
Alt + Del Deletes selected pixels.
Alt + Shift + F Applies Smart Erase to a selection.
Alt + Shift + P Opens the Pixel Targeting panel for

targeting the selection to specific colors
and/or tones.
Alt + Shift + S Saves the selection.
Ctrl + Alt + L Creates a selection based on brightness in

the image.
Alt + Shift + L Opens the Load Selection dialog box.
Alt + Shift + M Opens the Manage Selections dialog box
Alt + Shift + O Opens the Overlay Options dialog box.
Filters
Page 755 of 827

Y Opens the Red Eye Reduction tool.
Page 756 of 827

Alt + P Opens the Repair tool.
Page 757 of 827

K Opens the Skin Tune tool.
Page 758 of 827

Alt + Y Opens the Chromatic Aberration tool.
Page 759 of 827

Alt + W Opens the Watermark tool.
Page 760 of 827

Alt + B Opens the Border tool.
Page 761 of 827

V Opens the Vignette tool.
Page 762 of 827

Alt + S Opens the Special Effects panel.
Page 763 of 827

X Opens the Tilt-Shift tool.
Page 764 of 827

Alt + G Opens the Grain tool.
Page 765 of 827

Alt + R Opens the Rotate tool.
Page 766 of 827

Alt + F Opens the Flip tool.
C Opens the Crop tool.
P Opens the Perspective Correction tool.
Alt + Z Opens the Distortion Correction tool.
Alt + V Opens the Lens Correction tool.
J Opens the Resize tool.
Alt + L Opens the Liquify tool.
Alt + X Opens the Exposure tool.
L Opens the Levels tool.
Alt + J Opens the Auto Levels tool.
U Opens the Tones Curves tool.
Q Opens the Light EQ™ tool.
H Opens the Dehaze tool.
D Opens the Dodge and Burn tool.
A Opens the White Balance tool.
O Opens the Color EQ tool.
W Opens the Convert to Black & White tool.
Alt + T Opens the Split Tone tool.
Alt + M Opens the Color LUTs tool.
Alt + N Opens the Sharpen tool.
Alt + U Opens the Blur tool.
N Opens the Noise Reduction tool.
Alt + C Opens the Clarity tool.
I Opens the Detail Brush tool.
Working Inside Filters
Page 767 of 827

B Toggles Brush controls open and closed.
S Toggles the brush stroke display when

working inside a filter.
G Toggles Gradient controls open and closed.
R Toggles Radial Gradient controls open and

closed.
Spacebar Switches to the Hand tool when working

with the Brush or Gradients inside a filter.
E Toggles the exposure warning on and off in

the Exposure tool.
Layered Editor
Ctrl + Alt + I Opens the Import image as layer dialog

box.
Ctrl + Alt + N Adds a new blank layer.
Ctrl + Alt + A Duplicates the selected layer.
Ctrl + Delete Deletes the selected layer.
Ctrl + Alt + R Opens the Rename Layer dialog box.
Ctrl + Alt + V Toggles the Show/Hide Layer button on and

off.
Ctrl + Alt + C Toggles the Clipping button on and off.
Ctrl + Shift + Down Arrow Merges the selected layer with the layer
below it.
Ctrl + Alt + F Merges all layers into a single image.
Shift + J Shows all layers.
Shift + Y Hides all layers.
Ctrl + Shift + F Applies Frequency Separation.
Ctrl + Shift + T Rasterizes the selected text layer.
Page 768 of 827

Ctrl + Shift + D Opens the HDR dialog.
Ctrl + Shift + O Opens the Focus Stack dialog.
Shift + Alt + A Auto-aligns the selected images.
Shift + Alt + B Opens the Auto-Blend dialog.
Layer Masks
Ctrl + Alt + W Adds a white layer mask.
Ctrl + Alt + B Adds a black layer mask.
Ctrl + Alt + , Adds the mask to a selection.
Ctrl + Alt + - Subtracts the mask from a selection.
Ctrl + Alt + = Selects the area common to the mask and

the selection.
Ctrl + Alt + . Creates a mask from the selection.
Ctrl + Alt + J Inverts the mask.
Ctrl + Shift + Delete Deletes the mask.
Ctrl + Alt + P Opens the Pixel Targeting panel, allowing

you to mask specific colors and/or tones.
Ctrl + Shift + V Pastes the image layer as a luminance

mask.
Ctrl + Shift + M Disables/enables the selected mask.
Adjustment Layers
Page 769 of 827

Shift + E Adds an Exposure Adjustment Layer.
Shift + B Adds a Blur Adjustment Layer.
Shift + Z Adds a Posterize Adjustment Layer.
Shift + U Adds a Curves Adjustment Layer.
Shift + I Adds a Negative Adjustment Layer.
Shift + F Adds a Color Adjustment Layer.
Shift + W Adds a Black and White Adjustment Layer.
Shift + T Adds a Threshold Adjustment Layer.
Shift + G Adds a RGB Adjustment Layer.
Shift + R Adds a Clarity Adjustment Layer.
Shift + L Adds a Levels Adjustment Layer.
Shift + X Adds a Vibrance Adjustment Layer.
Shift + V Adds a Vignette Adjustment Layer.
Shift + S Adds a Sharpen Adjustment Layer.
Shift + O Adds a Color EQ Adjustment Layer.
Shift + Q Adds a Light EQ Adjustment Layer.
Shift + M Adds a Gradient Map Adjustment Layer.
Shift + K Adds a Skin Tune Adjustment Layer.
Shift + P Adds a Photo Effect Adjustment Layer.
Shift + A Adds a White Balance Adjustment Layer.
Shift + H Adds a Dehaze Adjustment Layer.
Shift + C Adds a Split Tone Adjustment Layer.
Shift + N Adds a Noise Reduction Adjustment Layer.
Shift + D Adds a Color LUT Adjustment Layer.
Tools
Page 770 of 827

Ctrl + Q Activates the Hand tool.
M Activates the Move tool.
Ctrl + Shift + C Activates the Resize Canvas tool.
T Activates the Text tool.
Ctrl + Shift + R Activates the Rectangle tool.
Ctrl + Shift + E Activates the Elliptical tool.
Ctrl + Shift + L Activates the Line tool.
Ctrl + A Activates the Arrow tool.
Ctrl + Shift + P Activates the Polygon tool.
Ctrl + Shift + B Activates the Curve tool.
B Activates the Brush tool.
Ctrl + F Activates the Fill tool.
Ctrl + G Activates the Gradient tool.
Alt + E Activates the Eraser tool.
Ctrl + E Activates the Smart Erase tool.
Ctrl + Shift + I Activates the Eyedropper tool.
Color Tools
Ctrl + [ Opens the Foreground Color dialog box.
Ctrl + ] Opens the Background Color dialog box.
Ctrl + X Switches the foreground and background

color.
Selection Tools
Page 771 of 827

Ctrl + R Activates the Rectangle Selection tool.
Ctrl + I Activates the Ellipse Selection tool.
Ctrl + L Activates the Lasso Selection tool.
Ctrl + W Activates the Magic Wand Selection tool.
Ctrl + B Activates the Brush Selection tool.
Actions
Ctrl + Shift + S Stops recording.
Alt + Shift + R Starts recording.
Mode Switching
Ctrl + F4 Opens the image in Develop mode.
Develop Mode Keyboard Shortcuts
Page 772 of 827

Alt + F4 Closes ACDSee in all modes.
Shift + Esc Minimizes ACDSee in all modes.
Ctrl + Shift + Alt + S Opens the Customize Shortcuts

dialog box, in which you can
customize keyboard shortcuts.
`(grave accent) Toggles the display of the full file

path in the Status bar.
File Menu
Page Arrow Right Displays the next image.

Page Down
3 (numeric keypad)
Page Arrow Left Displays the previous image.

Page Up
9 (numeric keypad)
Ctrl + S Saves the image.
Ctrl + Alt + S Saves a copy.
Ctrl + E Switches to Edit mode.
End Switches to the last image in the

Filmstrip.
Home Switches to the first image in the

Filmstrip.
Esc Switches to the previous mode.

Enter
Edit Menu
Page 773 of 827

Ctrl + Y Redo.
Ctrl + Z Undo.
Ctrl + Alt + C Opens the Copy settings dialog

box.
Ctrl + Alt + V Pastes the copied settings.
Delete Delete.
Managing
Ctrl + B Adds the selected image to the

Image Basket.
Alt + X Removes the image from the

Image Basket.
Ctrl + K Opens the Keywords section of

the Properties pane.
Alt + K Opens the Metadata tab of the

Properties pane.
Page 774 of 827

\ (back slash) Tags or untags the photo.
Ctrl + M Opens the Manage Metadata

Presets dialog box.
Viewing
Page 775 of 827

[ Enables soft proofing.
Page 776 of 827

Ctrl + Page Arrow Left Toggles the left pane open and
closed.
Ctrl + Page Arrow Down Toggles the bottom pane open

and closed.
/ (forward slash) Zooms the image to its actual size.
Shift + NUM 8 Scrolls up when zoomed into the

image.
Shift + 8 Fits the image to the viewing area.
Alt + Page Arrow Right Fits image width to the display

area.
Alt + Page Down Fits image height to the display

area.
+ (plus) Zooms in.
- (minus) Zoomed out.
F Toggles full screen mode.
' Toggles Navigator open and closed

when zoomed into the image.
Z Displays saved version of the

image.
Page Arrow Right Pans right when zoomed into the

image.
Page Arrow Left Pans left when zoomed into the

image.
Down Arrow Pans down when zoomed into the

image.
Up Arrow Pans up when zoomed into the

image.
Alt + E Expands all tool groups.
Alt + C Collapses all tool groups.
Page 777 of 827

Alt + A Toggles a setting wherein tool

groups will close when others are
opened to prevent the use of a
scroll bar.
V Toggles the Preview open and

closed.
H Toggles the Histogram open and

closed.
Alt + Enter Toggles the Properties pane open

and closed.
Ctrl + Shift + F Toggles the Filmstrip open and

closed.
Ctrl + Shift + I Toggles the Info palette open and

closed.
Ctrl + Shift + T Toggles the Develop tools open

and closed.
P Toggles the Snapshots pane open

and closed.
Alt + F5 Toggles a full screen display of the

image on your second screen
open and closed.
Alt + F6 Toggles a full screen display of the

file list on your second screen
open and closed.
Ctrl + Shift + P Opens the Develop Presets pane.
Ctrl + Shift + U Opens the History pane.

F9
Ctrl + Shift + H Opens the Histogram pane.

F7
H
Mode Switching
Page 778 of 827

Ctrl + E Opens the image in Edit mode.

Shift + E
Ctrl + F5
Using Develop Mode
B Toggles Brush controls open and

closed.
I Inverts brush strokes.
1 Selects the first brush
2 Selects the second brush.
3 Selects the third brush.
4 Selects the fourth brush.
5 Selects the fifth brush.
6 Selects the sixth brush.
7 Selects the seventh brush.
Shift + 1 Enables the first brush.
Shift + 2 Enables the second brush.
Shift + 3 Enables the third brush.
Shift + 4 Enables the fourth brush.
Shift + 5 Enables the fifth brush.
Page 779 of 827

Shift + 6 Enables the sixth brush.
Shift + 7 Enables the seventh brush.
G Toggles Gradient controls open

and closed.
R Toggles Radial Gradient controls

open and closed.
Spacebar Switches to the Hand tool when

working with the Brush or
Gradients while zoomed in. You
can then use the Hand tool to pan
the image.
E Toggles the exposure warning on

and off when using the Exposure
tool.
Alt + I Toggles the grid on and off when

using the Crop tool.
C Toggles the cropped image

preview when using the Crop tool.
Ctrl + T Switches to the Tune tab.
Ctrl + D Switches to the Detail tab.
Ctrl + G Switches to the Geometry tab.
Ctrl + R Switches to the Repair tab.
Ctrl + P Opens the New Snapshot dialog

box.
Develop and Edit Mode Mouse Shortcuts

Use the following mouse shortcuts in Develop and Edit mode to make quick image adjustments.
Page 780 of 827

Shift + click Turns off the auto-collapse feature in the pane as you open
groups.
Shift + mouse wheel Makes large adjustments to the sliders. If the scroll is active
in the Develop pane, the wheel scrolls the pane.
Spacebar + click + drag Scrolls the image by dragging the mouse. Use when you are
using a tool in Develop, and have the image zoomed in.
Right-click Resets any slider to its default value.
Mouse wheel over slider Makes fine adjustments to a slider. Place your cursor over
the slider and scroll up or down.
Mouse wheel over image Adjusts brush size. Place your cursor over the image and
scroll up or down to adjust nib width.
Shift + mouse wheel Adjusts feathering. Place your cursor over the image and
scroll up or down to adjust feathering.
365 Mode Keyboard Shortcuts

Use the following keyboard shortcuts in the Transfer mode.
Shortcuts.
Page 781 of 827

Alt + A Sets selected folder as an Upsync folder.
Alt + D Downloads selected files and folders.
Alt + Enter Displays Properties pane in the lower screen of Transfer mode.
Alt + Num + Group forward files and folders in the lower screen of Transfer mode.
Alt + Num - Group backward files and folders in the lower screen of Transfer mode.
Alt + O Displays Options dialog.
Alt + U Uploads selected files and folders.
Alt + Shift + U Upsyncs all files.
Ctrl + \ Selects tagged files.
Ctrl + A Selects all files and folders.
Ctrl + F8 Changes the view in the upper screen in Transfer mode to thumbnail view
of images in your account.
Ctrl + F12 Changes the view in the upper screen in Transfer mode to a detailed view
of images in your account.
Ctrl + Shift + D Clears image selection.
Ctrl + Shift + I Inverts image selection.
Ctrl + Shift + 1 Displays Folders pane in the lower screen of Transfer mode.
Ctrl + Shift + 2 Displays Catalog pane in the lower screen of Transfer mode.
Ctrl + Shift + 3 Displays Search pane in the lower screen of Transfer mode.
Ctrl + Shift + 4 Displays Calendar pane in the lower screen of Transfer mode.
Ctrl + Shift + 5 Shows or hides all Image Baskets.
Ctrl + W Closes ACDSee.
Delete Deletes files or folders.
Enter Opens the selected item in View mode.
F2 Renames files and folders.
Page 782 of 827

F5 Refreshes the view.
F6 Displays thumbnails and details of folders and files in the lower screen of
Transfer mode.
F7 Displays filmstrip view of folders and files in the lower screen of Transfer
mode.
F8 Displays thumbnails of folders and files in the lower screen of Transfer

mode.
F9 Displays tile view of folders and files in the lower screen of Transfer mode.
F10 Displays icon view of folders and file types in the lower screen of Transfer
mode.
F11 Displays a list of folder and file types in the lower screen of Transfer mode.
F12 Displays a detailed view of folders and files in the lower screen of Transfer
mode.
Num + Sort forward files and folders in the lower screen of Transfer mode.
Num - Sort backward files and folders in the lower screen of Transfer mode.
Shift + Alt + A Displays 365.acdsee.com mode.
Shift + Alt + C Copies URL.
Shift + Alt + T Displays Transfer mode.
365 Mode Mouse Shortcuts

Use the following mouse shortcuts in Transfer mode.
Click + drag Selects a group of images.
Ctrl + click Selects images you click on.
Shift + click Selects a group of images.
Page 783 of 827

ACDSee PicaView Keyboard Shortcuts

You can use the following shortcut with ACDSee PicaView.
Shift + right-click an l If you have Display Image enabled: the image will not display in the
main context menu.
image l If you have Display Image disabled: the image will display in the main
context menu.
Page 784 of 827

Chapter 14: File Formats

Supported File Formats in ACDSee Ultimate
Files that can be read by ACDSee:
Page 785 of 827

ABR Adobe™ brush format
ACDC ACDSee Ultimate ACDC Image
AFPHOTO Affinity Thumbnails only
ANI Windows animated cursor Shows cursor animation
ARW Sony RAW
BMP Windows Bitmap Windows and OS/2;2/8/16/24/32 bpp; RLE and

uncompressed
CNV Canvas Thumbnails only
CR2 Canon RAW CR2
CR3 Canon RAW CR3 To see applicable cameras, please refer to the supported
RAW format page on the ACDSee website.
cRAW Sony cRAW
CRW Canon RAW CRW
CUR Windows cursor
CVX Canvas Thumbnails only
DCR Kodak RAW DCR
DCX Multi-page PCX All sub-types and multiple pages supported
DNG Digital Negative An open-source archival format for RAW files
EMF Enhanced Metafile Format Win32 enhanced placeable metafiles
ERF Epson RAW
GIF Graphics Interchange Format Single page animated; 87a and 89a
GPR GoPro RAW
HDR Creo RAW
HEIF High Efficiency Image File Format Supports EXIF only. IPTC metadata is not supported for
HEIC files
ICN AT&T ICN
ICO Windows icon Shows multiple resolutions as separate pages
Page 786 of 827

JBR Corel brush format
JP2 JPEG2000 48-bit support
JPC JPEG2000 48-bit support
JPG JPEG JFIF JFIF and Adobe CMYK
MRW Konica Minolta RAW
NEF Nikon RAW
ORF Olympus RAW
PBR Corel PaintShop Pro brush Up to 3072×2048 resolution (16BASE)

format
PCX ZSoft Publishers Paintbrush All sub-types supported
PEF Pentax RAW PEF, Samsung RAW
PCT Macintosh PICT
PNG Portable Network Graphics All sub-types supported
PSD Adobe PhotoShop Document RGB, grayscale, duotone, paletted and bi-level Lab color
interpreted as grayscale only
RAF FujiFilm RAW
RAW Pentax RAW, Leica RAW, Contax

RAW, Casio RAW, Panasonic RAW
RWL Leica RAW
sRAW Canon sRAW
SRW Samsung SRW
SVG Scalable Vector Graphics Requires Windows 10 and the Creators' update.
TGA Targa TGA All sub-types supported
TIFF Tag Image File Format Bilevel / RGB / Paletted / CMYK / YCrCb / LOGL / LOGLUV;
Uncompressed / PackBits / LZW / ThunderScan / SGILog /
CCITT / ZIP / NEXT / New-JPEG (no v6.0 JPEG support)
Support for multiple-page documents Kodak RAW TIFF,
Canon RAW TIFF
Page 787 of 827

WBMP Wireless Bitmap
WEBP Google WebP Format
WMF Windows Metafile Format Win 3.x placeable metafiles
Files that can be written by ACDSee:

ACDC ACDSee Ultimate ACDC Image Not supported on ACDSee Pro 9 and ACDSee 19
BMP Windows Bitmap Windows 1/8/24 bpp
GIF Graphics Interchange Format Non-interlaced GIF 89a only
GPR GoPro RAW
JP2 JPEG2000
JPEG JPEG JFIF
PCX ZSoft Publishers Paintbrush 8 and 24 bpp; RLE compressed
PNG Portable Network Graphics 1/4/8 bpp colormapped; 24 bpp RGB
PSD Adobe PhotoShop Document RGB, grayscale, duotone, paletted and bi-level Lab color
interpreted as grayscale only
WBMP Wireless Bitmap
WEBP Google WebP Format
TGA Targa TGA 8 and 24 bpp. RLE and uncompressed top-down and
bottom-up
TIFF Tag Image File Format 1/8/24 bits per pixel, single-page; uncompressed, CCITT3,
CCITT4, LZW, Deflate (ZIP), and JPEG compression;
Adjustable DPI tags
Archive read support formats:
Page 788 of 827

ARJ ARJ archive ARJ format
CAB CAB archive Microsoft CAB file format
GZ GZ archive Unix GZIP (GnuZIP)
RAR RAR archive RAR format (RAR5 is not supported)
TAR TAR archive Unix TAR format
TGZ TGZ archive TAR format compressed with GZIP
ZIP ZIP archive Store and deflate
Archive write support formats:

ZIP ZIP archive Store and deflate
Video and audio read support formats:

AAC Audio Data Transport Format
ADST Audio Data Transport Stream
ASF Active Streaming File – HotMetaL Pro
AVI AVI movie format
M4A MPEG-4
M4V MPEG-4
MOV MPEG-4
MP3 MPEG Layer III compressed audio
MP4 MPEG-4
WAV Sound file
VMA Sound file
WMV Windows Metafile
Document view support formats:

To view Microsoft® Office documents in ACDSee Ultimate, you will need to have Microsoft®
Office 2010 or above installed.
Page 789 of 827

DOC Microsoft® Office Word
DOCX Microsoft® Office Open XML
PDF Portable Document Format *PDF viewing is supported in Professional 2020
PPS Microsoft® Office PowerPoint
PPSX Microsoft® Powerpoint Open XML
PPT Microsoft® Office Powerpoint
PPTX Microsoft® Powerpoint Open XML
RTF Rich Text Format
XLS Microsoft® Office Excel
XLSB Microsoft® Excel Binary Workbook
XLSX Microsoft® Excel Open XML
XPS Microsoft® XML Paper Specification
About RAW Files

A RAW file is like a negative. RAW files contain all of the data that was collected by your digital camera's
sensor when you took a photo. If you tried to view a RAW file without processing, it would appear
almost completely black. It is therefore necessary to process your RAW files to produce a photo.
ACDSee Ultimate offers a new RAW processing engine providing improved Color, Contrast and
Exposure. ACDSee Ultimate also emulates Pro 3's pipeline for RAW images developed in Pro 3 or earlier
versions.
You can use Develop and Edit mode to select exposure, color, and image sharpness settings for your
RAW files. You can select and save unique settings for each RAW file, or you can select and save generic
settings as presets. If you save generic settings as presets, you can apply those presets to numerous
RAW files using the batch tool, or by going to Manage mode, and selecting Tools | Process | Apply
Preset and then selecting a preset.
You cannot change your original RAW files permanently. The RAW files remain intact after processing
to preserve all the data captured by your camera. The processing settings that you select for a
particular image are saved to the XMP file of the RAW, and associated with the image in the database.
To save any changes you make to a RAW file permanently, you need to save it as a separate file, in a
different file format (JPEG or TIFF, for example). If you want to save your processed file to many
different formats at the same time, use the multiple format option in Develop mode. After developing
Page 790 of 827

your image, simply click on the Save button, and select Export. In the Export dialog box, select your
export settings and click OK.
Associating Files
ACDSee Ultimate can work with a large number of file formats. ACDSee Ultimate can be set as the
default application for opening certain file types. This process is called associating files. When you
associate file types, you set ACDSee Ultimate as the default program to open these kinds of files when
you double-click them.
To Set File Association Options in ACDSee:

1. Click Tools | File Association Settings.
2. In the four format sections, check the checkboxes of the file formats you would like to associate with
ACDSee Ultimate for image formats, RAW formats, media formats, and archive formats.
3. Click Save.
To Disassociate a File Type with ACDSee:

1. Click Tools | File Association Settings.
2. In the four format sections, uncheck the checkboxes of the file formats you would like to disassociate
with ACDSee Ultimate for image formats, RAW formats, media formats, and archive formats.
3. Click Save.
Page 791 of 827

Glossary
Page 792 of 827

A
Actions, ACDSee Actions
You can record the steps you take when editing images in Edit mode. You can then save them as
"ACDSee Actions". Once saved, you can apply the actions to other images. This is particularly useful for
batch editing.
Album
Collection of images, often organized by theme or event. In ACDSee, albums contain shortcuts to
where the images are stored on your hard drive.
Aliasing
Jagged edges caused by pixels. Occurs most often in low resolution images or images that have
been enlarged. See jaggies.
Antialiasing, Anti-Aliasing
Software technique for reducing jagged lines, or ‘jaggies’. Uses shades of gray and color to smooth
out the contrast between adjacent pixels.
Aspect Ratio
An image’s width-to-height ratio. For example, an image with an aspect ratio of 3:1 has a width 3
times larger than its height.
Azimuth
Angle of shadows that extend from the edges of image details. In ACDSee you can control azimuth
when applying the Emboss effect to an image.
B
Background Processing
Tasks or programs that function without user interaction.
Barrel Distortion
In barrel distortion the photo appears to bulge outwards from the center.
Batch Processing
Any operation or tool, such as resizing, converting, or renaming, that can be used to adjust
multiple images or files simultaneously.
Bit
Bits are small units of computer memory. The color depth of your image is constrained by the
number of bits available to store color information. For example, it is possible to store 256 different
color values per color channel in 8-bit RGB images. Similarly, it is possible to store 65,536 different
color values per color channel in 18-bit images.
Blackpoint
Page 793 of 827

An image’s darkest area. You can control the intensity of the black in an image by adjusting its
blackpoint.
Blend Modes
Filters that change the effect of a tool or the appearance of a selected object.
Brightness
Light intensity of an image. You can make an image appear brighter or darker by adjusting its
brightness.
Brush
A tool that you can use in Edit mode or Develop mode to isolate or indicate pixels you want to apply
effects or adjustments to. The Brush in Drawing Tools can be used to draw in color on your image.
See Smart Brushing.
C
Cache
High-speed storage mechanism. The ACDSee Database is a cache.
Caption
Text associated with a file, or a comment or description added to a printed image.
Cataloging
Adding file information to the ACDSee database.
Category
Assign categories to photos to help sort and manage them more easily.
Chromatic Aberration
A lens artifact that can result in fringes in high contrast areas of some photos.
CMYK
Color model that uses cyan, magenta, yellow, and black (key) as its primary colors.
Color Cast
A color cast is a visible color tint that affects your image. For example, many digital cameras
produce pictures with a slightly blue color cast. ACDSee includes a tool that removes an unwanted
color cast.
Color Channel Value

Contains all pixel information for a single color. A grayscale image has one channel, while an RGB
image has three channels. You can adjust RGB values when editing a color.
Color Gamut
Range of colors that a device such as a printer or monitor can produce or display.
Page 794 of 827

Color Management
Process of adjusting your computer settings so that the color output from your printer matches
the colors you see on your monitor.
Color Space
There are two types of color spaces: device-independent or device-dependent. A device-
independent color space, such as RGB, describes all possible colors. A device-dependent color space
describes the subset of colors (from the device-independent color space) that a particular device
can reproduce. Device-dependent color spaces are used to map colors between devices (for
example, from a monitor to a printer) to ensure that colors are reproduced accurately.
Compression
Process that converts data to a storage format requiring less space than the original data.
Contact Sheet
Physical or digital page that contains a series of small images, usually in a grid format.
Context Menu
Menu that appears when you right-click within a program.
Contrast
Measure of an image’s color and brightness differences.
Convert
Change a file from one format to another. For example, you might convert a file from a bitmap
(.bmp) to a JPEG (.jpg) to reduce the file size.
Cropping
Removing unwanted image areas.
D
Database
Electronic filing system that provides fast access to stored data. The ACDSee Database contains two
parts: a cached thumbnail file and an information file. The cached thumbnail file contains small
copies (thumbnails) of the images on your system. The information file contains details about the
files on your system, such as descriptions, dates, authors, notes, keywords, and categories.
Database Date
Date that you apply to the properties of a file and save in the ACDSee Database.
Descriptions
ACDSee stores descriptions in a hidden file named descript.ion. Descriptions such as file name and
captions for an image will be included in the descript.ion files.
Dock
Page 795 of 827

Attaching a toolbar, window, or pane to different screen areas.
DPI (dots per inch)

Measurement of an image’s resolution. For example, 92 DPI means 92 dots horizontally and 92
dots vertically, which equals 8,464 dots per square inch. More dots per inch result in higher
resolution and image quality.
Dynamic Range
The dynamic range of an image is directly related to the dynamic range of your digital camera's
sensor. If your digital camera's sensor has a large dynamic range it can capture the darkest shadows
and brightest highlights at the same time, without clipping the shadows or highlights. (RAW images
preserve the dynamic range of your digital camera's sensor.) Adjusting the tonal range of the image
changes how the dynamic range of the image is represented on a monitor or in a photo.
E
Elevation
Height of an imaginary light source over an image. The elevation of the light source works in
conjunction with azimuth to generate a three-dimensional emboss effect.
Encode
Writing (or saving) a file format.
Encryption
Method of converting data into a secure format. You need a digital password or key to read an
encrypted file.
EXIF (Exchangeable Image File)

Standard for storing information, primarily with images that use JPEG compression. Most digital
cameras create EXIF information and embed it in the image file. For example, EXIF information can
include details about shutter speed and whether a flash was used.
Export
Moving data from one application to another. The exporting application places the data in a format
that the other application understands.
Exposure
Exposure is the amount of time that your digital camera's sensor is exposed to light.
F
Face Detection, Facial Recognition
Face Detection will detect the faces of individuals in your images. You can assign names to the
faces, and ACDSee will recognize the individuals going forward. You can search for images using the
names of the people in them.
Feather
Page 796 of 827

Softening image edges to blend them into the background.
File Listing
In ACDSee, a report of the files currently displayed in Manage mode.
File Format
Medium for encoding information in a file. Each type of file has a different file format that specifies
how it organizes the information it contains.
Filter
Program that can apply an effect to an image, such as an embossed appearance or a sepia tone.
Fisheye Distortion
In fisheye distortion, the photo appears to bulge outwards from the center, as if the photo were
wrapped around a sphere.
G
Gamma
Range of color values a monitor, scanner, or printer can display. Adjusting this value increases or
decreases the intensity of the light spectrum.
Grayscale Image
Image composed of different shades of gray.
H
Highlights
Highlights are the brightest or whitest parts of an image.
Histogram
A histogram is a graph that displays the dynamic range of shadows and highlights in an image.
Hue
Predominant color in an image.
I
Image Editor
Program that you can use to create and edit images. ACDSee is an image editor.
Image Resolution
Quality of image details and colors. Also used to describe the quality of monitors and printer
output.
Image Viewer
Program that displays images. ACDSee is an image viewer.
Page 797 of 827

Import
Bringing data into an application from another using a format that the receiving application
understands.
Interpolation
Process that uses nearby pixels to estimate the color of new pixels added to the larger image. For
example, interpolation might be used when enlarging a digital image.
IPTC
Standard method of encoding information within image files so that items such as descriptive
comments and copyright information can be transmitted with the image.
J-K
Jaggies
Individual pixels displayed in an image with low resolution. The appearance of pixels in an image
causes lines and curves to appear jagged.
L
Lens Vignetting
Unusual darkness in the corners of images as a result of an inability of the lens to distribute light
into the corners of the image.
Lossless Compression
Form of compression that retains all image data and quality.
Lossless Rotation and Flipping

Rotation of a JPEG image without loss of image quality. This works best on images with dimensions
that are a multiple of 8 or 16.
Lossy Compression
Form of compression that attempts to remove unnecessary data. This data loss can affect image
quality.
M
Marquee
Dashed-line frame that identifies a selected portion of an image. Depending on the tool, you can
resize or move a marquee with or without changing the underlying image.
Metadata
Information about an image and how it was taken. This can be stored within the image itself or in a
sidecar file. For example, the metadata of digital camera images can contain the date and time the
picture was taken, the shutter speed, the exposure settings of the camera, and whether a flash was
used.
Page 798 of 827

Monochrome Image
Image containing a single color.
N
Noise
Effect produced when a variety of pixel colors are used in the same color region. Noise often occurs
in images with high ISO setting or slow shutter speed.
O
Opacity
Determines how visible an effect is when applied to an image or a selection. High opacity produces a
more solid effect, while low opacity results in a nearly invisible effect.
Overexposed
Images that are overexposed have too many highlights, and tend to look faded. You typically
overexpose images by exposing your digital camera's sensor to light for too long.
P-Q
Panning
Moving zoomed images vertically, horizontally, and diagonally across the display area to view
specific areas of the image.
PDF
An acronym for Portable Document Format. You can view PDFs on any computer using the free
Adobe Reader® software.
Perceptual
Rendering intent that scales all of the colors within one gamut to fit within another gamut. Best
used for photographic images, as it maintains the relationship between the colors more accurately
than the colors themselves.
Perspective Distortion
Perspective distortion is caused by wide angle and telephoto lenses, which distort the perspective
of large or far-away objects. For example, if you take a photo of a tall building, the building may
appear to be narrower at the top even though the building is the same width from top to bottom.
Photo Album
See album.
Photo Editor
See image editor.
Pincushion Distortion
Page 799 of 827

In pincushion distortion the photo appears to shrink inwards toward the center.
Pixel (or Picture Element)

Smallest visible portion of a digital image, arranged in rows and columns.
Plug-in
Software module that adds functionality to a larger program.
PPI (pixels per inch)

Measurement of how an image is displayed. More pixels per inch result in higher image quality.
Presets
A preset contains image correction settings. You can create and use presets to ensure that settings
you apply are the same and consistent across all images.
Primary Colors
Colors that can produce other colors when blended. For example, in the RGB color model, red,
green, and blue are primary colors.
R
Raster Image
Image composed of a rectangular grid of pixels. Each pixel contains a defined value about its color,
size, and location in the image. As a result, resizing the image can affect its quality.
Rasterize
To convert a vector layer to pixels, defining the resolution. To rasterize a layer can be seen as
finalizing a layer, as it is no longer editable.
Rating
Assign ratings (1, 2, 3, 4, 5) to photos to help sort and manage them more easily.
RAW
An image file format. RAW files contain all of the image data that was captured by your digital
camera's sensor. RAW files are not processed by your camera; instead, you must process RAW
images through Develop mode.
Recursive
Program or task that can repeat itself indefinitely, such as a slideshow.
Red Eye
Red eye occurs when the light from your digital camera's flash reflects off the retinas in the subject's
eyes. The subject's eyes look red instead of their normal color.
Relative Colorimetric
Page 800 of 827

Rendering intent that maps the colors that fall exactly within the color gamuts of both the input
and output devices. Best used for single- or limited-color images as colors outside of both gamuts
may be mapped to a single color.
Render
Drawing images to your screen.
Rendering Intent
Approach used to map colors from one color gamut to another. There are four rendering intents
available: Perceptual, Relative Colorimetric, Saturation, and Absolute Colorimetric.
Resolution
Quality and clarity of an image, measured in pixels, dots per inch, or pixels per inch.
RGB
Color model that uses red, green, and blue as its primary colors.
Ringing Artifacts
Distortion around the edges of image subjects, caused by compressing or resizing an image.
S
Saturation
Purity of a color. Higher color saturation results in more gray.
Saturation (rendering intent)

Rendering intent that maintains color saturation from one gamut to another. Best suited for
images in which the actual color represented is less important than the color’s vividness.
Selection
Portion of an image that you define with a selection tool. A marquee surrounds a selection. ACDSee
and ACD Photo Editor include selection tools.
Sepia
Sepia-toned images are composed of shades of brown. Many old photographs have a sepia tone.
Sharpen
The sharpen tool is for sharpening images. The original image is blurred slightly. This blurred
version of the image is subtracted from the original image, revealing the edges in the original image.
These edges can then be sharpened by increasing contrast.
Sharpness
The sharpness in an image is determined, primarily, by your digital camera's lens and sensor. You
can also create the illusion of sharpness by increasing the contrast between edges within an image.
Shortcut Menu
Page 801 of 827

Menu that appears when you right-click within a program. Sometimes referred to as a context
menu.
Slideshow
Automated sequential display of images. You can use slideshow software such as ACDSee to display
slideshows of your images.
Smart Brushing
Brushing targeted to specific colors, brightness values, or combination of color and brightness. The
Smart Brush only affects pixels similar in value to the pixel in the center of the brush stroke, and
allows you to apply adjustments to those pixels.
Soft Proofing
Using your computer's monitor as a proofing device. The monitor displays a simulation of how
colors will appear when rendered by the printer.
T
Tagging
Tagging, like categories and ratings, is a great way to organize and group your photos without
moving the files into different folders. You can tag a photo with one click. Similarly, you can display
all tagged photos with one click.
Thumbnails
Small preview of a full-sized image.
Timestamp
Date and time associated with a file.
Transitions
Special effects used between images or video segments in slideshows, screensavers, and videos.
U
Underexposed
Images that are underexposed have too many shadows. Images typically become underexposed if
you don't expose your digital camera's sensor to light long enough.
V
Vector Image
Image consisting of individual objects rather than pixels. Mathematical equations define the
objects. You can adjust the size of a vector image and the image will retain its clarity and quality.
W
Watermark
Page 802 of 827

Background text or graphics added to an image, usually to provide copyright protection.
White Balance
Removes color cast to create a photo that is correctly lit. You can use your camera settings to apply
the correct white balance before taking an image, or correct the white balance in ACDSee.
Whitepoint
Lightest image area. You can control the intensity of the white in an image by adjusting its
whitepoint.
X-Z
XML (Extensible Markup Language)
Standard language for Web documents.
Zoom
In ACDSee, zoom refers to the process of increasing or decreasing the display scale for an image.
Increase the display scale to view a portion of an image or a specific image detail. Decrease the
display scale to view more or all of the image.
Page 803 of 827

Index
Page 804 of 827

365 mode 51
creating an account 652
creating folders 655
making folder public or private 655
privacy settings 655
rating system 656
uploading images 51
ACDSee
database 231
importing photos 55
user interface 25
ACDSee Actions 426
ACDSee Mobile Sync 67
acquiring
importing 55
acquiring photos 55
Actions 426
Adjusting Clarity 644
adjusting post-crop vignetting 372
adjusting soft focus 365
Advanced Color 616
Align 493
Aligning Layers 493
archiving files 173
assigning categories and color labels 108
assigning categories and ratings 105
associating files with ACDSee 791
audio
adding to images 277
recording to images 278
Page 805 of 827

Auto-Align 493
Auto-Blend 493
backing up
database 241
tips and strategies 242
barrel distortion 589
batch editing
Batch Processor 205
color profiles 205
exposure 197
flipping 189
renaming 200
resizing 192
rotating 189
batch export
how 183
batch processing
about 182
black and white 285
blank image 75, 461
blend modes 499
blurring 634
border 511
brightness 597
Brush 406
Calendar pane 77
Canvas 480
Catalog pane
customizing 680
Page 806 of 827

cataloging
assigning ratings 105
files 98
cataloging files 235
categories
assigning 105
finding unassigned images 154
managing 103
CD
getting photos 63
Photo discs 282
setting CD/DVD management options 682
clarity 644
color
changing color depth 284
changing color profiles 205
setting color management options 685
color labels 108
color scheme 667, 715
Color Wheel 360, 621
committing changes 284
comparing images 93
contact sheets
creating 171
printing 181
converting
databases 237
descript.ion files 238
images to another file format 188
to grayscale 284
copying
files 132
images 133
Page 807 of 827

Crayon Drawing effect 534

Create image 75, 461
crooked photos 384
cropping 386, 587
Crosshatch effect 535
customizing
Calendar pane 681
Catalog pane 680
Database 687
File List pane 671
File management 683
Folders pane 679
keyboard shortcuts 714
Manage mode workspace 706
moving panes 30
Preview pane 678
toolbars 707
View mode 690
D icon 74, 676

database
about 231
adding information to 124, 128
backing up 241
cataloging files 235
converting 237
excluding folders 234
exporting 240
importing 238
keywords 129
maintaining 243
Page 808 of 827

mapping drives 245

optimizing 244
options 687
quarantining files 246
rebuilding thumbnails 245
restoring 243
tips and strategies 242
date
changing in multiple files 140
Dauber effect 536
Default Photo Viewer 666
deleting
metadata 127
Detail tab 373
Details view 84
Details View options 677
Develop 291
Advanced Color group 356
Crop group 386
Detail tab 373
General group 345
Geometry tab 380
Lens Distortion group 382
Light EQ™ 348
Lighting group 348
Noise Reduction group 376
Output Color Space group 373
Perspective group 385
Post-Crop Vignette group 372
presets 298
Red Eye Reduction 389
Rotate & Straighten group 384
Page 809 of 827

Sharpening group 375

Soft Focus group 365
Split Tone 371
Tone Curves group 364
Tune tab 344
White Balance group 346
Develop mode 46
Develop Presets Pane 298
developing
adjusting color 356
adjusting lighting 348
adjusting tone curves 364
adjusting white balance 346
cropping images 386
fixing lens distortion 382
Highlights, shadows, hue, saturation 371, 628
making general adjustments 345
post-crop vignette 372
reducing noise 376
rotating and straightening 384
selecting an output color space 373
sharpening images 375
soft focus 365
Developing
managing presets 298
digital camera
getting photos 57
plug-ins 57
display theme 667, 715
downloading
photos from a CD 63
photos from a digital camera 57
photos in ACDSee 55
Page 810 of 827

dual monitors
moving the panes 31
Duplicate Finder 152
DVD
setting CD/DVD management options 682
E icon 74, 676

Edge Detect effect 538
Edit 393
Add Noise 641
Advanced Color 616
Auto Levels 601
Blur 634
Border 511
Clarity 644
Convert to Black & White 625
Crop 587
Flip 586
Lens Distortion Correction 589
Perspective Correction 588
presets 399
Red Eye Reduction 494
Remove Noise 639
Repair tool 495
Resize 592
Rotate 585
Selections 434
Sharpen 633
Split Tone 628
Text 502
Tone Curve 602
Vignette 518
Page 811 of 827

Watermark 510
Edit Brush 406
Edit mode 46
Edit mode, Develop mode 46
editing
adding noise 641
adding text 502
blurring 634
brightness 597
clarity 644
cloning 390, 495
configuring editors 712
correcting barrel distortion 589
correcting fisheye distortion 589
correcting perspective distortion 588
correcting pincushion distortion 589
correcting shadows and highlights 603, 614
cropping 587
exposure 601
flipping 586
HSL values 616
light levels 599
presets 399
removing noise 639
removing red eye 389, 494
repairing 495
resizing 592
rotating 585
sharpen 633
special effects 522
tone curve 602
toolbars 707
Page 812 of 827

effects
about 522
Bathroom Window 523
Blinds 524
Blur 551
Bulge 527
collage 531
Colored Edges 532
Contours 533
Crayon Drawing 534
Crosshatch 535
Dauber 536
Edge Detect 538
Emboss 538
Furry Edges 539
Glowing Edges 542
golden hue 547
Granite 544
Mirror 548
Negative 549
Oil Paint 550
Old 551
Outline 552
Pencil Drawing 553
Pixel Explosion 555
Pixelate 556
Posterize 557
Radial Waves 559
Rain 560
Ripple 562
Scattered Tiles 563
Sepia 564
Sheet Metal 566
Page 813 of 827

Shift 567
Slant 568
Sobel 569
Solarize 570
Stained Glass 572
Sunspot 573
Swirl 573
Threshold 575
Topography 576
user defined 583
Vignette 518
Water 576
Water Drops 578
Waves 579
Weave 581
Wind 582
emailing images 157-158
Emboss effect 538
erasing 127
excluding folders from database 234
EXIF
adding EXIF information 124, 128
batch set information 124
viewing 117
exporting database information 240
Exporting Keywords 132
exposure
adjusting automatically 601
adjusting for multiple images 197
Face 265
Face Detection 83, 265
Page 814 of 827

Face Recognition 83, 265

Facial Recognition 265
Favorites pane 80
File List pane
customizing 671
filtering files 86
full screen 75
setting Details View options 677
setting File List options 671
setting thumbnail display options 674
using 70
views 84
files
archiving 174
associating with ACDSee 791
cataloging 98
cataloging in the database 235
changing dates 140
copying and moving 132
details 84
finding duplicates 152
listing 241
management options 683
map coordinates 121
pasting 134
properties 116
quarantining 246
renaming 135
replacing 134
selecting 90
sorting 89
synchronizing between folders 141
filtering files 86
Page 815 of 827

fisheye distortion 589

flipping
in Edit 586
multiple photos 189
focus 365
Focus Stack 489
folders
browsing 76
excluding from database 234
pasting 134
renaming 135
synchronizing files 141
synchronizing in View mode 281
Folders pane
options 679
using 76
footer
in View mode 268
printing on pages 181
Frequency Separation 487
fullscreen mode 41
Furry Edges effect 539
Geometry tab 380

getting photos
renaming templates 64
glossary 792
Glowing Edges effect 542
Gradient 410
Granite effect 544
grayscale 285
Page 816 of 827

Group by
Processed State 87
Guidelines 415
HDR 490
header
in View mode 268
printing on pages 181
Heal tool 495
hicolor 285
highlights 603, 614
histogram 264, 631
home folder 667
HSL 616
HTML album 169
image advance 267

Image Basket 97
Image Well 154
images
adding audio 277
comparing 93
converting to another format 188
copying 133
developing 304
developing a batch of files 228
downloading 55
emailing 157-158
extracting from video files 276
finding quickly 154
import 57
importing 55
Page 817 of 827

panning 289
sharing develop settings 312, 322
uploading 654
viewing 41
import
photos 57
importing
images 55
importing database information 238
Importing Keywords 132
importing photos
from a CD 63
from a digital camera 57
from a disk 63
IPTC
adding IPTC information 124, 128
removing IPTC keywords auto categories 139
viewing 117
JPEG options 715
keyboard shortcuts
customizing 714
Manage mode 717
View mode 734
keywords 129
labels
assigning 108
Layer Effects 482
Layer Mask 467
Layers 456
Page 818 of 827

Layers Pane 456

Light EQ™ 603
light levels 599
listing files 241
local contrast enhancement 603, 614
Luminance Mask 474
magnifying glass 289

Manage mode
and RAW files 82
customizing the workspace 706
customizing toolbars 707
Favorites pane 80
File List pane 70
Folders pane 76
Image Basket 97
Map pane 121
options 666
Properties pane 116
Quick Search bar 143
Search pane 145
Selective Browsing pane 149
using 27
views 84
Map pane
using 121
Mask 467
metadata
removing metadata 127
Mirror effect 548
mobile sync 67
Page 819 of 827

modes
switching 27
mouse shortcuts 748
moving
files 132
Manage mode panes 28
multiple images
adjusting exposure 197
renaming 200
resizing 192
navigator 288
Negative effect 549
new image 75, 461
noise
about 638
adding to an image 641
removing from an image 639
Oilpaint effect 550

Old effect 551
optimizing the database 244
options
ACDSee Quick View 660
Calendar pane 681
Catalog pane 680
contact sheet 181
database 687
file management 683
Folders 679
general 663
Manage mode 666
Page 820 of 827

Preview pane 678

View mode 690
organizing
assigning categories 105
assigning color labels 108
finding images quickly 154
managing categories 103
originals
showing 284
Orton effect 551
Outline effect 552
overwriting files 134
panes
auto-hiding 707
moving 30
resetting to default layout 27
PDF 167
Pencil Drawing effect 553
perspective distortion 588
photo discs 282
Photo Repair tool 390, 495
photos 531
PicaView 659
pincushion distortion 589
Pixel Explosion effect 555
pixel resize options 593
Pixel Targeting 334, 416
Pixelate effect 556
plug-ins
about 246
managing 247
Page 821 of 827

viewing properties 247

polaroid 531
Posterize effect 557
Preview pane
customizing 678
using 91
printing
contact sheet options 181
custom print formats 179
setting size and positioning 179
text on pages 181
Process mode
Develop 291
Processed State
group by 87
Properties pane
options 683
using 116
quarantining files 246
Radial Waves effect 559

Rain effect 560
ratings
assigning 105
RAW images
browsing 82
developing 291
removing develop settings 312
viewing 263
recognition 265
recording image audio 278
Page 822 of 827

red eye reduction 389, 494

removeable devices 57
renaming
file or folder 135
multiple files 200
while getting photos 64
replacing files 134
resizing
multiple images 192
one image 592
restoring database information 243
restoring originals 399
retro effect 547
Ripple effect 562
rotating
in Develop 384
in Edit 585
in Manage and View mode 92, 264
multiple photos 189
Rulers 415
Scattered Tiles effect 563

screen capture 154
screensavers
creating 158
sharing 165
Search pane 145
searching
file name patterns 148
for duplicate files 152
Image Well 154
Quick Search bar 143
Page 823 of 827

setting Quick Search options 667

wildcards 148
with ACDSee 143
with the Search pane 145
second monitor
moving the panes 31
selecting
files 90
part of an image 269
Selections tool 434
Selective Browsing 149
Sepia effect 564
sharing 614
archives 173
contact sheets 171
emailing images 157-158
HTML albums 169
PDFs 167
screensavers 165
slideshows 165
with ACDSee 154
sharpen 633
Sheet Metal effect 566
Shift effect 567
shortcuts
Manage mode 717
mouse 748
View mode 734
Slant effect 568
slideshows
configuring 161
image advance 267
sharing 165
Page 824 of 827

Sobel effect 569

soft focus 365
Solarize effect 570
sorting files 89
sound
adding to images 277
recording 278
Stained Glass effect 572
start folder
default 667
Straightening crooked photos 384
Sunspot effect 573
Swirl effect 573
switching
modes 27
sync
uploading images 654
sync to web 654
synchronizing
files between folders 141
View mode to a folder 281
tagging images 137

text
adding to an image 502
adding to pages (printing) 181
blend modes 499
displaying on images in View mode 268
lists of files 241
Text Layers 475
theme
color 667, 715
Page 825 of 827

Threshold effect 575

thumbnails
rebuilding 245
setting display options 674
setting ratio options 676
views 84
timestamp 140
timestamps 140
Tone Wheels 362, 623
toolbars 707
Topography effect 576
truecolor 285
Tune tab 344
undo/redo 298, 398

USB mass storage device
about 57
user interface 25
Vibrance 345, 616

video files
extracting frames 276
View mode
automatic zooming 287
customizing 690
displaying text 268
fullscreen mode 41
histogram 264, 631
image advance 267
magnifying glass 289
mouse shortcuts 748
Page 826 of 827

navigator 288
panning 289
setting display options 693
setting zoom level 286
synchronizing to a folder 281
using 40
zooming an image 285
viewing
file properties 270
file types in the File List 86
fullscreen 41
images 40
images in another application 283
text on images in View mode 268
Vignette effect 372, 518
wallpaper 282
Water Drops effect 578
Water effect 576
watermarks 510
Waves effect 579
Weave effect 581
Wheel 360, 621
Wheels 362, 623
White Balance 615
wildcards 148
Wind effect 582
zooming
automatically 287
setting level 286
Page 827 of 827

Acdsee Ultimate 15

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Acdsee Ultimate 15

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Acdsee Ultimate 15

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ACDSee Photo Studio Ultimate 2022

Welcome to ACDSee Photo Studio Ultimate 2022 24

Viewing Images in Full Screen Mode 41

Using the Quick Start Guide 53

Importing Files with ACDSee Ultimate 55

Creating a Renaming Template 64

Removing Groups from the File List 88

Assign Categories and Ratings in the Properties Pane 107

Importing and Exporting Keywords 132

Creating a Desktop Screensaver 158

Batch Edit Resize Options 211

Backup Location 243

Using Media Mode 254

Previewing Your Images with Auto Lens 262

Light EQ™ 263

Zooming In and Out 285

Using Develop Mode 291

Viewing Your Snapshot 315

Color Overlay 366

Using Edit Mode 393

What Happens from Develop to Edit 393

In View Mode 429

Using Masks with Layers 467

Adjusting Skin Tone 497

Applying a Glowing Edges Effect 542

Applying a Threshold Effect 575

Adjusting Color with Color EQ 616

Using People Mode 645

The Suggested Faces Pane 649

Working in 365 Mode 652

Using Dashboard Mode 658

CH APT E R 1 1 : PICAV IE W 659

About ACDSee PicaView 659

Setting the General Options 663

Setting the Details View Options 677

Customizing Toolbar Contents 708

Manage Mode Keyboard Shortcuts 717

CH APT E R 1 4 : F IL E F O R MAT S 785

Supported File Formats in ACDSee Ultimate 785

Chapter 1: Getting Started

Welcome to ACDSee Photo Studio Ultimate 2022

The Benefits of ACDSee

Using the User Guide

Notes are things to consider when performing an action.

Tips are ways to optimize your work.

Warnings are things to take into account when making an action.

About the ACDSee User Interface

Switching Modes in ACDSee

To Switch from One Mode to Another:

Media: view your entire image collection by date.

View: display and examine photos at any magnification.

People: view faces identified through ACDSee's Facial Recognition.

Using Manage Mode

About the Manage Mode Panes

Manage Mode Drop-Down Menus

Slideshow: where you can configure and run a slideshow.

Actions: where you can play ACDSee Actions on selected images.

Working with Manage Mode Panes

To Open or Close Panes in Manage Mode:

3. To return a pane to its previous location, double-click its title bar.